Yamaha CS1D El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: CS1D

Categoría: Mezcladores de audio

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Owner’s Manual

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with

these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may

cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all

installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the

problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on

different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in

is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer

authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service

Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (Perchlorate)

This product contains a battery that contains perchlorate material.

Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply,

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

This product contains a high intensity lamp that

contains a small amount of mercury. Disposal of

this material may be regulated due to environmen-

tal considerations.

For disposal information in the United States, refer

to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site:

www.eiae.org

(mercury)* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Control Surface

Model Name : CS1D

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is sus-

pected.

(FCC DoC)

NEDERLAND / THE NETHERLANDS

• Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up.

• This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up.

• Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij

op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de lev-

ensduur of gelieve dan contact op te nemen met de vertegen-

woordiging van Yamaha in uw land.

•For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at

the end of life please consult your retailer or Yamaha repre-

sentative ofﬁce in your country.

• Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.

• Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small

chemical waste.

(lithium disposal)

ADVARSEL!

Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig

håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri

af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte

batteri tilbage til leverandoren.

VARNING

Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd

samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som

rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.

Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens

instruktion.

VAROITUS

Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti

asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan

laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä

käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden

mukaisesti.

Important

Read the following before operating the CS1D

Warnings

•

Do not allow water to enter this unit or allow the unit

to become wet. Fire or electrical shock may result.

•

Connect this unit’s power cord only to an AC outlet of

the type stated in this Owner’s Manual or as marked

on the unit. Failure to do so is a ﬁre and electrical

shock hazard.

•

Do not place heavy objects, including this unit, on top

of the power cord. A damaged power cord is a ﬁre and

electrical shock hazard. In particular, be careful not to

place heavy objects on a power cord covered by a car-

pet.

•

Do not modify the unit. Doing so is a ﬁre and electri-

cal shock hazard.

•

Do not place a container with liquid or small metal

objects on top of this unit. Liquid or metal objects

inside this unit are a ﬁre and electrical shock hazard.

Cautions

•

This unit has ventilation holes at the top and bottom

to prevent the internal temperature rising too high.

Do not block them. Blocked ventilation holes are a ﬁre

hazard.

•

Since this device is heavy, please use an appropriate

number of people (two or more) when moving it.

•

Before moving the CS1D, you must be sure to lower

the display toward the back until it is fastened in posi-

tion.

•

Do not use the device or headphones for a long period

of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since

this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experi-

ence any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

•

Do not apply oil, grease, or contact cleaner to the fad-

ers. Doing so may cause problems with electrical con-

tact or fader motion.

Operating Notes

•

The digital circuits of this unit may induce a slight

noise into nearby radios and TVs. If noise occurs, relo-

cate the affected equipment.

•

Using a mobile telephone near this unit may induce

noise. If noise occurs, use the telephone away from the

unit.

•

XLR-type connectors are wired as follows: pin 1:

ground, pin 2: hot (+), and pin 3: cold (–).

•

If the message “WARNING LOW BATTERY !” appears

when you turn on this unit, contact your dealer as

soon as possible about replacing the internal data

backup battery. The unit will still operate correctly,

but data other than the presets will be lost.

We recommend that you save the data on an ATA-

compatible PC ﬂash storage card before replacing the

battery.

•

The performance of components with moving con-

tacts, such switches, rotary controls, faders, fans, and

connectors, deteriorates over time. The rate of deterio-

ration depends on the operating environment and is

unavoidable. Consult your dealer about replacing

defective components.

•

The CS1D is cooled by fan exhaust openings located

on its rear panel. Check these regularly and use a vac-

uum cleaner etc. to ensure that the openings do not

become clogged with dust. Before performing this

maintenance, you must turn off the POWER switch of

the PM1D power supply unit and make sure that the

CS1D is not operating.

•

The power must be turned on/off using the POWER

switch of the PW1D power supply unit. Do not turn

the power on/off by plugging in the power cable, or by

using a power strip or circuit breaker. Doing so may

cause malfunctions.

•

Do not rapidly turn on and off the POWER switch of

the PW1D power supply unit. Doing so may cause

excessive current to damage the system. You must

allow at least ﬁve seconds to elapse between power-on

and power-off.

Handling the included PM1D System Software disc

The included PM1D System Software Disc is CD-R media containing documentation and software for the PM1D.

A computer with a connected CD drive is required in order to use this documentation and software.

For details on the contents, refer to the documentation on the disc.

Please observe the following points when handling the disc.

Failure to do so may cause problems such as the recorded data being lost, the drive to malfunction, or the printed label to

become blurred.

•

Do not place the disc in locations of direct sunlight,

high temperature, or high humidity.

•

Do not touch either surface of the disc.

Hold the disc at the edges. Gently wipe dust or dirt off

of the recording surface of the disc.

Important

iii

•

Do not wipe the disc with chemicals or detergents.

•

Do not bend or drop the disc.

•

Use an air duster or cleaner to remove dust. Vigorously

rubbing the surface of the disc with a dry cloth may

scratch the disc.

•

Do not write on the disc or afﬁx labels to it.

•

Keep water droplets or condensation off of the label

surface.

•

Yamaha Corporation makes no guarantee of a disc

that is rendered unreadable due to careless handling.

CS1D Exclusion of Certain Responsibility

Manufacturer, importer, or dealer shall not be liable for any incidental damages including personal injury or any other

damages caused by improper use or operation of the CS1D.

About the LCD display

The LCD screen built into the CS1D has the following characteristics. Please be aware that even if the following symp-

toms occur, this is not a malfunction or a defect.

•

Since the LCD display is manufactured with extremely

delicate technology, individual pixels may not display

correctly. (A pixel may be constantly lit or constantly

dark.)

•

The LCD screen may be affected by changes in the

ambient temperature.

•

Depending on the environment of use, you may notice

unevenness in brightness or small spots.

•

Since the LCD screen uses a cold cathode tube for a

backlight, the state of the display will gradually change

over time.

Cautions when handling the track pad

•

Place your hand and arm in a relaxed, natural posi-

tion, and operate the track pad by moving your ﬁnger

lightly across the surface or tapping it gently.

•

This device is designed to be operated with one ﬁnger.

It will not operate in the following situations.

1) When operated by a gloved ﬁnger

2) When operated with a pen, ballpoint pen, or pen-

cil etc.

3) When operated by two or more ﬁngers

4) When operated with an object placed on it

•

The unit may not operate correctly if water droplets or

condensation are present on the surface, or if operated

using a soiled or sweaty ﬁnger. If condensation occurs,

dry the unit thoroughly, or wipe it dry before use.

•

To avoid malfunctions, please observe the following

cautions.

1) Do not drop objects on the unit, strike it, or sub-

ject it to strong physical shock.

2) Do not spill coffee, juice, or other liquids on the

unit.

•

Do not operate the unit with a pointed metal object

such as a pen, since this will damage the unit.

•

If the surface becomes soiled, wipe it clean with a dry

cloth. If the surface is severely soiled, wipe with a

moist cloth, and dry carefully before use.

•

Do not touch the surface while the por is being turned

on.

Trademarks

ADAT MultiChannel Optical Digital Interface is a trademark and ADAT and Alesis are registered trademarks of Alesis

Corporation. Tascam Digital Interface is a trademark and Tascam and Teac are registered trademarks of Teac Corpora-

tion. Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Compact Flash is a trademark of SanDisk

Corporation. Yamaha is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective

holders and are hereby acknowledged.

No part of the CS1D software or this

Owner’s Manual

may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means

without the prior written authorization of Yamaha Corporation.

Yamaha website

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/product/proaudio/homeenglish

Yamaha manual Library

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

Operating Manual

(Start-up)

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

About the “CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Printing conventions in “CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introducing the various components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

Terms used in the “CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Connections (Standard mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Connecting the console and engine (Standard mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Connecting an analog input/output unit to the engine (Standard

mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Connecting a digital input/output unit to the engine (Standard mode) . . . . . . . . 9

Connections (Mirror mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Connecting the console and engines (Mirror mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Connecting an analog input/output unit to the engines (Mirror mode) . . . . . . . 12

Connecting a digital input/output unit to the engines (Mirror mode) . . . . . . . . 13

Turning on the power and verifying the connections . . . . . . .14

Turning on the power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Checking the status of each device (Standard mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Checking the engine (Standard mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Checking the analog input unit (Standard mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Checking the analog output unit (Standard mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Digital input/output unit (Standard mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Checking the status of each device (Mirror mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Engines (Mirror mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Checking the analog input unit (Mirror mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Checking the analog output unit (Mirror mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Checking the digital input/output unit (Mirror mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Basic settings (Standard mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Selecting the operation mode (Standard mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Setting the word clock (Standard mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Contents

iii

Basic settings (Mirror mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Selecting the operation mode (Mirror mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Setting the word clock (Mirror mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Checking the operation of input units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Preparations for checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Connect the monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Connect an input source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Patch the input unit to an input channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Monitor the input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Checking the operation of an output unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Preparations for checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Connect the monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Connect an input source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Patch the input unit to an input channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Patch the STEREO A channel to an output unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Send the input signals of input channels 1/2 to the STEREO bus . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Turn off the power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Introduction

About the “CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)”

The “CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)” is an introductory manual that explains how to connect the various compo-

nents of the PM1D system and verify that the PM1D system is operating correctly.

When starting up the PM1D system for the ﬁrst time, or if you have changed the conﬁguration of the system such as

when the PM1D system has been moved to another location and/or re-connected, we recommend that you follow the

procedure described in this manual to verify that the system is operating correctly.

•

This manual explains only the minimum operations.

For details on operating the PM1D system, please

refer to “CS1D Operating Manual (Basic operation)”

•

For details on the speciﬁcations and functionality of

the engine (DSP unit DSP1D-EX {DSP1D}) and I/O

units, please refer to the owner’s manual included

with each device.

•

For details on the function and operation of the con-

trollers and connectors found on the top panel, rear

panel, and front panel of the console (CS1D), refer to

“CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware).”

•

For details on the software in the display screen of

the console (CS1D), refer to “CS1D Reference Man-

ual (Software).”

Screen shots shown in this manual are taken from a

prototype. Please be aware that they may differ

slightly from the actual screens on your unit.

Printing conventions in “CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)”

•

Differences between the 96 channel model and 48

channel model

In general, the “CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)”

is written with the 96 channel model PM1D system

(the model with the DSP1D-EX as the engine) in

mind. Where the functionality of the 96 channel

model differs from the 48 channel model (the model

with the DSP1D as the engine), the functionality of

the 48 channel model is enclosed in curly brackets { }.

•

Standard mode and Mirror mode

The PM1D system has two operation modes (ele-

ments that determine system structure and connec-

tion method); “Standard mode” in which one

console is connected to one engine, and “Mirror”

mode in which one console is connected to two

engines of which only one is used.

Be aware that the mode used by the PM1D system

will depend not only on the number of engines, but

also on the type of connections and on the internal

settings.

Explanations that apply only to

Standard mode

will

be indicated by the following symbol.

Explanations that apply only to

Mirror mode

will be

indicated by the following symbol.

The PM1D system version 1.0 does not support any

other operation mode (i.e., other than Mirror

mode) in which two engines are used.

•

Distinguishing between the controls of the CS1D

and the on-screen knobs/buttons

Names of controls (switches, encoders, faders) on the

top panel, rear panel, and front panel of the CS1D

are enclosed in square brackets [ ] in order to distin-

guish them from the knobs and buttons etc. that are

displayed in the screen.

Example

: Tu rn on the [TO ST] switch.

(This indicates an operation on the top panel of the

CS1D.)

Example

: Click the BASIC button.

(This indicates an operation in the display screen.)

•

Va r ious icons

The following icon is used to call your attention to

various tips for operation or to reference pages.

The following icon is used to indicate particularly

important items or operations that you must be

aware of.

DSP

x1x1

DSP

x2x2

Hint

Introducing the various components

The PM1D system consists of the following types of components. (The components that are actually included will differ

depending on your system.)

Engine (DSP1D-EX {DSP1D})

This is the DSP unit that performs the majority of the

audio processing in the PM1D system, such as audio sig-

nal input/output, mixing, and effects. There are two

models of engine: the

96 channel DSP1D-EX

, and the

48 channel DSP1D

Console (CS1D)

The mixing operations, scene memory/library opera-

tions, and various editing operations of the PM1D sys-

tem are performed from this console.

Power supply (PW1D)

This power supply provides power to the console.

Analog input unit (AI8)

This is an input unit that inputs analog audio signals to

the engine, and can accommodate up to eight analog

input cards.

The following types of cards can be installed in the AI8.

•

Mic/line input card (LMY2-ML)

•

AD card (LMY4-AD)

The following models of AI8 are available, depending on

the type of analog input cards that are installed.

•

AI8-ML8

A unit with eight mic/line input cards installed

•

AI8-AD8

A unit with eight AD cards installed

•

AI8-ML4AD4

A unit with four mic/line input cards + four AD

cards installed

Cards can be installed in the AI8 only by a Yamaha

service engineer. The user must never attempt to

install a card himself.

Analog output unit (AO8)

This is an output unit that outputs analog audio signals

from the engine, and can accommodate eight DA cards

(LMY4-DA).

Cards can be installed in the AO8 only by a Yamaha

service engineer. The user must never attempt to

install a card himself.

Digital input/output unit (DIO8)

This unit performs input/output of ADAT, Tascam, and

AES/EBU format digital audio signals and input/output

of analog audio signals to and from the engine of the

PM1D system. Each DIO8 unit can accommodate up to

eight digital I/O cards or analog I/O cards.

The following types of card can be installed.

POWER

ON/ OFF

A B

ENGINE ID

1 2

CONTROL I/O

48CH 96CH

INPUT

CONFIGURATION

POWER

ON OFF

INPUT UNIT NO.

PHANTOM MASTER

OFF

+48V

POWER

ON/ OFF

12345678

ANALOG INPUT BOX

Card Format Input Output

MY8-TD TASCAM 8 IN 8 OUT

MY8-AT ADAT 8 IN 8 OUT

MY8-AE AES/EBU 8 IN 8 OUT

MY8-AD ANALOG IN 8 IN —

MY4-AD ANALOG IN 4 IN —

MY4-DA ANALOG OUT — 4 OUT

AP8AD* ANALOG IN 8 IN —

AP8DA*

*: Manufactured by Apogee Corporation

* As of September 1, 2000

ANALOG OUT — 8 OUT

1234567

OUTPUT UNIT NO.

INPUT SELECTOR

POWER

ON/ OFF

ANALOG OUTPUT BOX

I/O UNIT ID

PORT B SELECTOR

5-8

1-4

POWER

ON/ OFF

Introducing the various components

It is not possible to install and use a total of five or

more AP8AD/AP8DA cards. Also, if you are using

AP8AD/AP8DA cards simultaneously with MY8-

AD/MY4-AD/MY4-DA cards, there are restrictions

on the number of cards, as described below. Never

exceed the allowable number of cards, since

attempting to use a greater number of cards than

allowed may damage the DIO8 due to excessive

current. If you are not using AP8AD or AP8DA

cards, or if you are using AP8AD or AP8DA cards

simultaneously with an MY8-TD/MY8-AT/MY8-

AE card, there is no limitation on the number of

MY8-TD/MY8-AT/MY8-AE cards that can be used.

[AP8AD] +

[AP8DA] cards

used

[MY8-AD] +

[MY4-AD] +

[MY4-DA]

cards used

[MY8-TD] +

[MY8-AT] +

[MY8-AE] cards

used

Total 0 cards Up to a total of 8 cards

Total 1 card Up to 6 cards

Up to the number

of vacant DIO8

slots

Total 2 cards Up to 4 cards

Up to the number

of vacant DIO8

slots

Total 3 cards Up to 2 cards

Up to the number

of vacant DIO8

slots

Total 4 card Up to 1 card

Up to the number

of vacant DIO8

slots

Total 5 or more

cards cannot

be used

——

CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)

Terms used in the “CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)”

Of the specialized terms used in operating the CS1D, this section will explain the terms that appear in “CS1D Operating

Manual (Start-up).” For a more detailed explanation of terms, refer to “CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation).”

•

Display

This refers to the LCD display located in the upper

center of the CS1D console. When you wish to

change an internal setting of the CS1D, you can recall

the appropriate screen in the display, and use the

buttons or knobs in the display to edit the setting.

•

Pointer

The arrow shown in the display is called the

“pointer,” and is used to select the object that you

wish to modify. You can move the pointer by pressing

your ﬁnger on the track pad (located in the data

entry block) and dragging it up/down/left/right.

•

Cursor

The red frame shown in the display is called the “cur-

sor.” An on-screen item will be enclosed by the cur-

sor to indicate that this item is selected for

modification.

•

Click

“Click” refers to the action of placing the pointer on

a speciﬁc item in the display, and pressing the left or

right switch of the track pad (located in the data

entry block). This action is used to turn an on-screen

button on/off, or to move the cursor to a speciﬁc

item.

Using the [CURSOR] switches (located in the data

entry block) to move the cursor to a speciﬁc item and

then pressing the [ENTER] switch will have the same

result as clicking on that item.

Hint

As alternative ways to perform this action, you can

use a mouse connected to the MOUSE connector of

the CS1D, or use the arrow keys and ENTER key of a

keyboard connected to the KEYBOARD connector of

the CS1D.

[CURSOR] switches

Tra ck pad

Left switch[ENTER] switches

Display

Data entry block

Right switch

Pointer

Cursor

Left switch

Click

Mouse left click

Right switch

Click

Mouse right click

Introducing the various components

•

Drag

“Drag” refers to the action of placing the pointer

over a speciﬁc object on the screen, and holding

down the left or right switch while you slide your ﬁn-

ger left/right/up/down across the track pad.

This action is used to continuously adjust a knob or

slider in the screen, or to move a speciﬁc item to

another location.

Hint

As an alternative way to perform this action, you can

use a mouse connected to the MOUSE connector of

the CS1D.

Tra ck pad

Drag

Mouse

While pressing

Connections (Standard mode)

This section explains connections for Standard mode, in which one console (CS1D) is connected to one engine (DSP1D-

EX {DSP1D}).

Connecting the console and engine (Standard mode)

The following diagram shows typical connections between the console and engine for Standard mode.

Digital input/output connections

Use the included D-sub half pitch 68 pin cable to

connect the DIGITAL I/O ENGINE A connector of

the console to the CONSOLE I/O connector of the

engine.

These connectors transmit and receive multi-channel

digital audio signals.

The console and engine each have two identical digi-

tal input/output connectors, numbered 1 and 2.

These two sets of connectors are completely identi-

cal, and the system will operate normally if just one

set is connected. However, you may connect both 1

and 2 so that one of them can be used as a backup.

You must connect the identically-numbered con

nectors of the console and engine to each other. If

differently-numbered connectors are connected to

each other, the system will not function correctly.

This method of connection is recommended for

most cases.

DSP

x1x1

POWER SUPPLY (PW1D)

ENGINE A

DC POWER

INPUT A

IN OUT

CONSOLE (CS1D)

ENGINE A

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

CONTROL

I/O

CONSOLE

I/O

DIGITAL

I/O

CONTROL

I/O

1IN531

2 OUT 6 4 2

OUTPUT

CONSOLE

I/O

CASCADE

DIGITAL I/O

CONSOLE

1 2121

ENGINE B

DIGITAL I/O

ENGINE A

Console (CS1D)

Engine

(DSP1D-EX {DSP1D})

Connections (Standard mode)

Hint

If both digital input/output connectors 1 and 2 are

connected, connector 1 will be given priority when

the power is turned on.

If the word clock stops being supplied from either

connector 1 or 2 (whichever is the currently-used

connector), the receiving device will automatically

switch to the other connector.

•

Use only Yamaha-manufactured D-sub half pitch 68

pin cables to connect the digital input/output con-

nectors. Operation cannot be guaranteed if any other

cables are used.

•

If you need a cable of a different length than the

included D-sub half pitch 68 pin cable, please con-

tact your dealer.

Control input/output connections

Use BNC cables (50

Ω

) to connect the CONTROL I/

O ENGINE A IN connector of the console to the

CONTROL I/O OUT connector of the engine, and

the CONTROL I/O ENGINE A OUT connector of

the console to the CONTROL I/O IN connector of

the engine.

These connectors transmit and receive control sig-

nals between the console and engine.

The console and engine each have two identical sets

of connectors, numbered 1 and 2.

These two sets of connectors are completely identi-

cal, and the system will operate normally if just one

set is connected. However, you may connect both 1

and 2 so that one of them can be used as a backup.

This method of connection is recommended for

most cases.

You must connect the identically-numbered con

nectors of the console and engine to each other. If

differently-numbered connectors are connected to

each other, the system will not function correctly.

Hint

If both control input/output connectors 1 and 2 are

connected, connector 1 will be given priority when

the power is turned on.

If the currently-used control output connector stops

functioning correctly, the receiving device will auto-

matically switch to the other connector.

Power supply connections

Use the included special cable to connect the DC

POWER INPUT connector of the console to the DC

OUTPUT connector of the PW1D power supply.

The rear panel of the console has two DC POWER

INPUT connectors, A and B.

If you are using only one power supply, you may con-

nect it to either DC POWER INPUT connector.

Hint

You can also connect two power supplies to the two

DC POWER INPUT connectors A and B. If this con-

nection method is used, the PM1D system will con-

tinue to operate even if one of the power supplies

should unexpectedly fail, since the other power sup-

ply will continue to supply power to the system.

OUT

THRU

CONTROL

WORD CLOCK

TIME CODE IN

GPI

RS-422

REMOTE

OUT

OFF

RS-232-C

USB

75Ω

MIDI CONTROL I/O

CONSOLE

CONSOLE ENGINE B ENGINE A

OUT

CONTROL I/O

Console (CS1D)

Engine

(DSP1D-EX {DSP1D})

CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)

Connecting an analog input/output unit to the engine (Stan-

dard mode)

The following diagram shows a common way of making connections between the engine and analog input/output units

for Standard mode.

Analog input unit AI8 connection

Connect the OUTPUT A connector of the AI8 analog

input unit to one of the INPUT 1–INPUT 10 con-

nectors of the engine. Set the CONTROL PORT

switch (located on the rear panel of the AI8) to the A

position.

Analog output unit AO8 connection

Connect the INPUT A connector of the AO8 analog

output unit to one of the OUTPUT 1–OUTPUT 6

connectors of the engine. Set the INPUT SELECTOR

switch (located on the front panel of the AO8) to the

A position.

Hint

An AI8 analog input unit can be connected to any

INPUT connector of the engine, and the number of

that INPUT connector will be the ID number of that

unit. Similarly, an AO8 analog output unit can be

connected to any OUTPUT connector of the engine,

and the number of that OUTPUT connector will be

the ID number of that unit.

Be careful not to connect inputs and outputs in

reverse. If such a connection is made, the unit will

not be recognized and cannot be controlled.

ANALOG OUTPUT BOX ANALOG OUTPUT BOX

ANALOG INPUT BOXANALOG INPUT BOX

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

INPUT A INPUT AOUTPUT A OUTPUT A

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

ENGINE A

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

AI8 (ID=2) AI8 (ID=1) AO8 (ID=1) AO8 (ID=2)

CONTROL PORT

Switch = A

INPUT SELECTOR

Switch = A

CONTROL PORT

Switch = A

INPUT SELECTOR

Switch = A

Connections (Standard mode)

Connecting a digital input/output unit to the engine (Standard

mode)

When connecting a DIO8 digital input/output unit to the engine in Standard mode, the method will depend on whether

you use only slots 1–4 (of the DIO8’s slots 1–8) or slots 1–4 as well as slots 5–8.

If input/output cards are installed only in DIO8

slots 1–4

The following diagram shows example connections

for when input/output cards are connected only to

slots 1–4 of the DIO8.

Connect the OUTPUT A connector of the digital

input/output unit to one of the INPUT 1–10 connec-

tors of the engine, and connect the INPUT A connec-

tor of the digital input/output unit to one of the

OUTPUT 1–6 connectors of the engine. In this case,

set the PORT B SELECTOR switch (located on the

front panel of the DIO8) to the 5-8 position.

If input/output cards are also installed in DIO8

slots 5–8

The following diagram shows example connections

for when input/output cards are installed in DIO8

slots 1–4 and also in slots 5–8.

Connect the OUTPUT connectors A/B of the digital

input/output unit to the INPUT 1–10 connectors of

the engine, and connect the INPUT connectors A/B

of the digital input/output unit to OUTPUT 1–6

connectors of the engine. In this case, set the PORT B

SELECTOR switch (located on the front panel of the

DIO8) to the 5-8 position.

Hint

The DIO8 digital input/output unit can be con-

nected to any INPUT connector/OUTPUT connec-

tor of the engine. The DIO8 will automatically select

a control connector according to the status of con-

nections, and the connector number of the engine

connected to that connector will be displayed in the

LED display as the unit ID. In the example shown

above, the INPUT 1 connector number is the unit ID

number.

Be careful not to connect inputs and outputs in

reverse. If such a connection is made, the unit will

not be recognized and cannot be controlled.

When using an MY8-AT card to handle ADAT for

mat signals, synchronization may tend to be lost

easily, depending on the device that is connected.

For more reliable synchronization, we recommend

that the word clock for the combination of digital

audio equipment you are using be taken from other

than the ADAT format connector.

DIO8 (ID=1)

PORT B SELECTOR=5–8

INPUT 1

OUTPUT A INPUT A

OUTPUT 1

ENGINE A

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

DIO8 (ID=1)

PORT B SELECTOR=5–8

OUTPUT INPUT

ENGINE A

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

INPUT 2

INPUT 1

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

BBAA

Connections (Mirror mode)

This section explains connections for Mirror mode, in which one console (CS1D) is connected to two engines (DSP1D-

EX {DSP1D}).

Connecting the console and engines (Mirror mode)

The following diagram shows typical connections between the console and engines for Mirror mode.

Digital input/output connections

Use the included D-sub half pitch 68 pin cables to

connect the DIGITAL I/O ENGINE A connector of

the console to the CONSOLE I/O connector of engine

A, and the DIGITAL I/O ENGINE B connector of the

console to the CONSOLE I/O connector of engine B.

These connectors transmit and receive multi-channel

digital audio signals.

•

Use only Yamaha-manufactured D-sub half pitch 68

pin cables to connect the digital input/output con-

nectors. Operation cannot be guaranteed if any other

cables are used.

•

If you need cables of a different length than the

included D-sub half pitch 68 pin cables, please con-

tact your dealer.

•

The console and engines A/B each have two identical

sets of digital input/output connectors, numbered 1

and 2.

These two sets of connectors are completely identi-

cal, and the system will operate normally if just one

set is connected. However, you may connect both 1

and 2 so that one of them can be used as a backup.

This method of connection is recommended for

most cases.

DSP

x2x2

POWER SUPPLY (PW1D)

DC POWER

INPUT A

ENGINE B

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

ENGINE A ENGINE B

IN OUT IN OUT

CONSOLE (CS1D)

ENGINE A

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

CONTROL

I/O

CONSOLE

I/O

CONSOLE

I/O

DIGITAL

I/O

CONTROL

I/O

CONTROL

I/O

IN OUT

Clock Generator

WORD

CLOCK IN

WORD

CLOCK IN

WORD

CLOCK IN

1IN5

2 OUT 6

CONSOLE

I/O

CASCADE

CONSOLE

1 2121

ENGINE B

DIGITAL I/O

ENGINE A

1IN5

2 OUT 6

CONSOLE

I/O

CASCADE

Console

(CS1D)

Engine B Engine A

Connections (Mirror mode)

Hint

If both digital input/output connectors 1 and 2 are

connected, connector 1 will be given priority when

the power is turned on.

If the word clock stops being supplied from either

connector 1 or 2 (whichever is the currently-used

connector), the receiving device will automatically

switch to the other connector.

2 Control input/output connections

Use BNC cables (50Ω) to connect the CONTROL I/

O ENGINE A IN and OUT connectors of the console

to the CONTROL I/O OUT and IN connectors of

engine A. In the same way, connect the CONTROL I/

O ENGINE B IN and OUT connectors of the console

to the CONTROL I/O OUT and IN connectors of

engine B. These connectors transmit and receive

control signals between the console and engines A/B.

The console and engines A/B each have two identical

sets of connectors, numbered 1 and 2. These two sets

of connectors are completely identical, and the sys-

tem will operate normally if just one set is connected.

However, you may connect both 1 and 2 so that one

of them can be used as a backup.

This method of connection is recommended for

most cases.

Hint

If both control input/output connectors 1 and 2 are

connected, connector 1 will be given priority when

the power is turned on.

Control output connectors 1/2 will always output the

same signals. If the currently-used control output

connector stops functioning correctly, the receiving

device will automatically switch to the other connec-

tor.

You must connect the identically-numbered con

nectors of the console and engine to each other. If

differently-numbered connectors are connected to

each other, the system will not function correctly.

Power supply connections

Use the included special cable to connect the DC

POWER INPUT connector of the console to the DC

OUTPUT connector of the PW1D power supply.

The rear panel of the console has two DC POWER

INPUT connectors, A and B. If you are using only

one power supply, you may connect it to either DC

POWER INPUT connector.

You can also connect two power supplies to the two

DC POWER INPUT connectors A and B. If this con-

nection method is used, the PM1D system will con-

tinue to operate even if one of the power supplies

should unexpectedly fail, since the other power sup-

ply will continue to supply power to the system.

Word clock connections

Use BNC cables (75

Ω

) to connect the clock output

connector of an external clock generator to the

WORD CLOCK IN connector of the console, and to

the WORD CLOCK IN connectors of engines A/B.

Connect the word clock transmitting and receiving

devices in a one-to-one relationship, and turn on the

Ω

screen for the receiving device.

The word clock transmission/reception circuit is

designed with one-to-one connection in mind. For

this reason, if you connect multiple receiving

devices to a single clock transmission connector,

performance may be impaired and the system may

fail to operate correctly.

If you cannot avoid using this type of connection,

turn on the 75

Ω

switch for one of the receiving

devices, and turn off the 75

Ω

switches for all

remaining devices.

In Mirror mode, you can also switch to the other

engine manually if the currently-used engine expe-

riences difﬁculties.

In order to minimize the clock switching time in

such cases, we recommend that you supply a word

clock from an external clock generator to the con-

sole and to engines A/B.

Of course, switching will occur even without this

type of supply method.

OUT

THRU

CONTROL

WORD CLOCK

TIME CODE IN

GPI

RS-422

REMOTE

OUT

OFF

RS-232-C

USB

75Ω

MIDI CONTROL I/O

CONSOLE

OUT

THRU

CONTROL

WORD CLOCK

TIME CODE IN

GPI

RS-422

REMOTE

OUT

OFF

RS-232-C

USB

75Ω

MIDI CONTROL I/O

CONSOLE

CONSOLE ENGINE B ENGINE A

OUT

CONTROL I/O

Console (CS1D)

Engine B Engine A

CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)

Connecting an analog input/output unit to the engines (Mirror

mode)

The following diagram shows a common way of making connections between the engine and analog input/output units

for Mirror mode.

Analog input unit AI8 connection

Connect the OUTPUT A connector of the AI8 analog

input unit to one of the INPUT 1–INPUT 10 con-

nectors of engine A, and connect the OUTPUT B

connector of the AI8 to one of the INPUT 1–INPUT

10 connectors of engine B.

•

When using Mirror mode, OUTPUT connectors A

and B of the AI8 must be connected to the identi-

cally-numbered INPUT connector of engines A and

B. Be aware that if these are connected to differently-

numbered INPUT connectors, the content of the

input signals will change when you switch between

engines A and B.

•

When using Mirror mode, leave the CONTROL

PORT switch of the AI8 in the A position as the

default setting.

Analog output unit AO8 connection

Connect the INPUT A connector of the AO8 analog

output unit to one of the OUTPUT 1–OUTPUT 6

connectors of engine A. Connect the INPUT B con-

nector of the AO8 to one of the OUTPUT 1–OUT-

PUT 6 connectors of engine B.

•

When using Mirror mode, INPUT connectors A and

B of the AO8 must be connected to the identically-

numbered OUTPUT connector of engines A and B.

Be aware that if these are connected to differently-

numbered OUTPUT connectors, the content of the

output signals will change when you switch between

engines A and B.

•

When using Mirror mode, leave the INPUT SELEC-

TOR switch of the AO8 in the A position as the

default setting.

•

Be careful not to reverse the input and output. If you

do so, the unit will not be recognized, and cannot be

controlled.

ANALOG OUTPUT BOX ANALOG OUTPUT BOX

ANALOG INPUT BOXANALOG INPUT BOX

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

INPUT A INPUT AOUTPUT A OUTPUT A

INPUT B INPUT BOUTPUT B OUTPUT B

OUTPUT 1

INPUT 1

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 2

OUTPUT 2

ENGINE A

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

ENGINE B

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

AI8 (ID=2) AI8 (ID=1) AO8 (ID=1) AO8 (ID=2)

WORD

CLOCK IN

WORD

CLOCK

WORD

CLOCK IN

WORD

CLOCK IN

WORD

CLOCK IN

Clock Generator

CONTROL

PORT

Switch = A

CONTROL

PORT

Switch = A

INPUT

SELECTOR

Switch = A

INPUT

SELECTOR

Switch = A

Connections (Mirror mode)

Connecting a digital input/output unit to the engines (Mirror

mode)

The following diagram shows the usual method of connecting the engines to a digital input/output unit in Mirror mode.

When using a DIO8 digital input/output unit in Mirror

mode, only the input/output cards installed in slots 1–4

can be used.

Connect the OUTPUT A connector of the DIO8 digital

input/output unit to one of the INPUT 1–10 connectors

of engine A, and connect the OUTPUT B connector to

an INPUT 1–10 connector of engine B. In the same way,

connect the INPUT A connector of the DIO8 to one of

the OUTPUT 1–6 connectors of engine A, and connect

the INPUT B connector to an OUTPUT 1–6 connector

of engine B.

•

In Mirror mode, INPUT connectors A and B of the

DIO8 must be connected to the identically-num-

bered OUTPUT connector of engines A and B. Simi-

larly, OUTPUT connectors A and B of the DIO8

must be connected to the identically-numbered

INPUT connector of engines A and B.

•

Be aware that if differently-numbered connectors are

used, the content of the input and output signals will

change when you switch between engines A and B.

•

When using the system in mirror mode, set the

DIO8’s front panel PORT B SELECTOR switch to 5–

8 if you will be using connector A as the default, or to

1–4 if using connector B as the default.

•

Be careful not to connect inputs and outputs in

reverse. If you do so, the unit will not be recognized,

and cannot be controlled.

When using an MY8-AT card to handle ADAT for

mat signals, synchronization may tend to be lost

easily, depending on the device that is connected.

For more reliable synchronization, we recommend

that the word clock for the combination of digital

audio equipment you are using be taken from other

than the ADAT format connector.

DIO8 (ID=1)

INPUT 1

OUTPUT A INPUT A

OUTPUT B INPUT B

OUTPUT 1

INPUT 1 OUTPUT 1

ENGINE A

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

ENGINE B

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

Clock Generator

WORD

CLOCK IN

WORD

CLOCK IN

WORD

CLOCK IN

Turning on the power and verifying the connections

Here’s how to turn on the power of the various components in the PM1D system, and verify that the devices are con-

nected correctly.

Before you continue with the following procedure,

connect the various components of the system as

described on pages 6–13.

Hint

We recommend that you use the following procedure

to verify the connections not only when starting-up

the PM1D system for the ﬁrst time, but also after you

have moved the system to a different location or

changed its conﬁguration or connections.

Turning on the power

When you have ﬁnished connecting the various components of the PM1D system, turn on the power in the order of

input/output units, engine(s), and the console power supply.

Before turning on the engine (DSP1D) or the console power supply (PW1D), you must wait at least five seconds

after the power was turned off. Failing to observe this waiting period may cause malfunctions.

If you are using Mirror mode, turn on the power of the clock generator as well.

•

The “PM1D Operating Manual (Start-up)” assumes that the various internal settings of the CS1D are in their default

state. If you have already modiﬁed the settings of the CS1D from their initial state, or if you are not sure whether the

settings are in their initial state, turn on the PW1D power supply, and when the opening title appears in the LCD

screen, press both the left and right switches located below the CS1D track pad and hold them down until the MEM-

ORY INITIALIZATION popup window appears. Refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Software).”

However, if you turn on the power in this way, the scene and library data that you saved will be lost. Be careful not to

inadvertently erase important data.

After the opening screen appears in the CS1D display, the following screen will appear.

Adjust the brightness knob (located at the right of the display) so that the screen can be comfortably viewed at the angle

from which you will operate the console.

Each device must be powered-on using the power switch of the device itself. You must also observe the correct

sequence in which to power-on each device.

DSP

x2x2

Brightness

Turning on the power and verifying the connections

If the opening screen is followed by the “VERSION CHECK” popup window, it is possible that the PM1D system

version is incorrect. Please unify the software version of all connected devices. For the procedure, refer to the expla-

nation within the included PM1D System Software disc.

Hint

Normally, the display will show the screen that was accessed last when the power was turned off.

Checking the status of each device (Standard mode)

After you turn on the power of the PM1D system, you can use the LEDs and indicators of the various components to

check that connections between components have been made appropriately. Check the status of each device as described

below.

The checking method differs between Standard mode and Mirror mode. This section describes checking for Standard

mode.

For Mirror mode, refer to “Checking the status of each device (Mirror mode)” (→p.18).

Checking the engine (Standard mode)

The front panel of the DSP1D-EX {DSP1D} engine shows the following information.

1 ENGINE ID

These indicators show whether the engine (DSP1D-

EX {DSP1D}) is connected to the ENGINE A or

ENGINE B connectors (DIGITAL I/O, CONTROL I/

O) of the console. In Standard mode, the A LED will

always be lit.

2 CONTROL I/O

If the CONTROL I/O connectors of the engine and

console are connected correctly, the LED for the cur-

rently-valid CONTROL I/O connector (either 1 or 2)

will light.

3 INPUT CONFIGURATION

This indicates the number of monaural input chan-

nels that can be used on this engine. If the engine is

the DSP1D-EX, the “96CH” LED will light. {For the

DSP1D, the “48CH” LED will light.}

For details on the lit/dark status of each indicator,

refer to the operating manual included with the

DSP1D-EX {DSP1D}.

DSP

x1x1

POWER

ON/ OFF

A B

ENGINE ID

1 2

CONTROL I/O

48CH 96CH

INPUT

CONFIGURATION

A B

ENGINE ID

1 2

CONTROL I/O

48CH 96CH

INPUT

CONFIGURATION

CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)

Checking the analog input unit (Standard mode)

If the AI8 input unit is correctly connected to the engine, the INPUT UNIT ID indicator of the AI8 will show the ID

number of that unit (i.e., the number of the INPUT connector on the engine to which the AI8 is connected).

If the AI8 connections or word clock synchroniza

tion are faulty, one of the following error displays

will appear in the INPUT UNIT ID indicator.

•

........................The AI8 is connected to an

OUTPUT connector of the

engine. Re-connect it to an

INPUT connector.

•

........................Either the cable connected to the

OUTPUT connector of the AI8

rear panel is disconnected, or the

connection destination is incor-

rect. Please check the cable.

•

UL (unlocked)

....The word clock of the AI8 is not

synchronized with the PM1D

system.

Check the connection for the

WORD CLOCK IN connector of

the AI8, or the CS1D word clock

settings (

→

p.24).

•

UC (unconnected)

Control signals are not being

received correctly. Make sure

that the engine is powered-on.

INPUT UNIT NO.

PHANTOM MASTER

OFF

+48V

POWER

ON/ OFF

12345678

ANALOG INPUT BOX

INPUT UNIT ID

ID number of the AI8

(when the AI8 is connected to the

INPUT 1 connector of the engine)

Turning on the power and verifying the connections

Checking the analog output unit (Standard mode)

If the AO8 analog output unit is correctly connected to the engine, the OUTPUT UNIT ID indicator of the AO8 will dis-

play the ID number of that unit (i.e., the number of the OUTPUT connector on the engine to which the AO8 is con-

nected).

If multiple connectors are connected, the number of the connector used by the engine to transmit and receive control

signals will be displayed.

If the AO8 connections or word clock synchroniza

tion are faulty, one of the following error numbers

will appear in the OUTPUT UNIT ID indicator.

•

.........................The AO8 is connected to an

INPUT connector of the engine.

Re-connect it to an OUTPUT

connector.

•

.........................The cable connected to the

INPUT connector on the AO8

rear panel has been disconnected

or is connected to the wrong des-

tination. Check the cable.

•

UL (unlocked)

... The word clock of the AO8 is not

synchronized with the PM1D

system.

Check the connection for the

WORD CLOCK IN connector of

the AO8, or the CS1D word

clock settings (

→

p.24).

•

UC (unconnected)

.Control signals are not being

received correctly. Make sure

that the engine is powered-on.

Digital input/output unit (Standard mode)

If the DIO8 digital input/output unit is correctly connected to the engine, the I/O UNIT ID indicator of the DIO8 will

show the ID number of that unit (i.e., the number of the OUTPUT connector on the engine to which the DIO8’s INPUT

A connector is connected).

If multiple connectors are connected, the number of the connector used by the engine to transmit and receive control

signals will be displayed.

For details on the lit/dark status of the indicators of

the AI8, AO8, and DIO8, refer to the owner’s man-

uals included with each unit.

1234567

OUTPUT UNIT NO.

INPUT SELECTOR

POWER

ON/ OFF

ANALOG OUTPUT BOX

OUTPUT UNIT ID

ID number of the AO8

(when the AO8 is connected to the OUTPUT 2

connector of the engine)

I/O UNIT ID

PORT B SELECTOR

5-8

1-4

POWER

ON/ OFF

I/O UNIT ID

ID number of the DIO8

(when the INPUT A connector of the DIO8

is connected to the OUTPUT 3 connector

of the engine)

CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)

Checking the status of each device (Mirror mode)

Here’s how to check the connection status of each device when using the PM1D system in Mirror mode.

Engines (Mirror mode)

The front panel of each DSP1D-EX {DSP1D} engine displays the following information.

ENGINE ID

These indicators show whether the DSP1D-EX

{DSP1D} is connected to the ENGINE A or the

ENGINE B connectors (DIGITAL I/O, CONTROL I/

O) of the console.

When either the A or the B LED is lit, the corre-

sponding engine is in use. If one of the LEDs is blink-

ing, the corresponding engine is ready.

•

If the ENGINE ID LEDs for both engines A and B

blink when the power is turned on even though

engines A/B are both connected, please check the

connections of each engine (digital input/output

connectors, control input/output connectors).

•

If both LEDs are dark, digital signals or control sig-

nals are not being passed between the engine and

the console. Check the connections between

engines A/B and the console, and between the con-

sole and the power supply.

CONTROL I/O

If the CONTROL I/O connectors of the engine and

console are correctly connected, the LED will light to

indicate which of the two sets of CONTROL I/O

connectors (1 and 2) is currently being used.

•

When the power is turned on, engine A will be

given priority. If LED 2 lights when the power is

turned on even though connectors 1 and 2 are

both connected, check the connections for connec-

tor 1.

•

If LED 1 blinks, control signals are not being

passed between the engine and the console. Check

the CONTROL I/O connections between the

DSP1D-EX {DSP1D} and the CS1D.

INPUT CONFIGURATION

This indicates the number of monaural input chan-

nels that can be used with this engine.

The “96CH” LED will light for the DSP1D-EX, and

the “48CH” LED will light for the DSP1D.

DSP

x2x2

POWER

ON/ OFF

A B

ENGINE ID

1 2

CONTROL I/O

48CH 96CH

INPUT

CONFIGURATION

A B

ENGINE ID

1 2

CONTROL I/O

48CH 96CH

INPUT

CONFIGURATION

Turning on the power and verifying the connections

Checking the analog input unit (Mirror mode)

If the AI8 analog input unit is correctly connected to the engine in Mirror mode, the INPUT UNIT ID indicator of the

AI8 will show the ID number of that unit (i.e., the number of the INPUT connector on the engine to which the AI8 is

connected), and the dot ( . ) will light on both sides of the ID number.

If the connections of the AI8, the setting of the

CONTROL INPUT SELECTOR switch, or the

word clock synchronization are not correct, one of

the following error displays will appear in the

INPUT UNIT ID indicator.

•

.........................The AI8 is connected to an

OUTPUT connector of the

engine. Re-connect it to an

INPUT connector.

•

.........................The cable connected to the

OUTPUT connector on the rear

panel of the AI8 has been discon-

nected, or is connected to the

wrong destination. Check the

cable.

•

UL (unlocked)

....The word clock is not synchro-

nized.

Check the connections of the

AI8’s WORD CLOCK IN con-

nector, or the word clock settings

of the CS1D (

→

p.28).

•

UC (unconnected)

..Control signals are not being

received correctly.

Make sure that the engine is

powered-on.

•

ID number and A (or b) displayed alternately

Since control signals from the CS1D forcibly

switched the valid engine to A (or B), the setting of

the CONTROL INPUT SELECTOR switch of the

AI8 does not match the actual operation.

This display does not signify an actual error. How-

ever as necessary, check the setting of the CON-

TROL INPUT SELECTOR switch or the setting of

the CS1D.

INPUT UNIT NO.

PHANTOM MASTER

OFF

+48V

POWER

ON/ OFF

12345678

ANALOG INPUT BOX

INPUT UNIT ID

ID number of the AI8

(when the AI8 is connected to the

INPUT 1 connector of the engine)

CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)

Checking the analog output unit (Mirror mode)

In Mirror mode if the AO8 is correctly connected to the engine, the OUTPUT UNIT ID indicator of the AO8 will show

the ID number of that unit (i.e., the number of the OUTPUT connector on the engine to which the AO8 is connected),

and the dot ( . ) will light on both sides of the ID number.

If the connections of the AO8, the setting of the

INPUT SELECTOR switch, or the word clock syn-

chronization are not correct, one of the following

error displays will appear in the OUTPUT UNIT ID

indicator.

•

........................The AO8 is connected to an

INPUT connector of the engine.

Re-connect it to an OUTPUT

connector.

•

........................The cable connected to the

INPUT connector on the rear

panel of the AO8 has been dis-

connected, or is connected to the

wrong destination. Check the

cable.

•

UL (unlocked)

....The word clock is not synchro-

nized.

Check the connections of the

AO8’s WORD CLOCK IN con-

nector, or the word clock settings

of the CS1D (

→

p.28).

•

UC (unconnected)

..Control signals are not being

received correctly.

Make sure that the engine is

powered-on.

•

ID number and A (or b) displayed alternately

Since control signals from the CS1D forcibly

switched the valid engine to A (or B), the setting of

the INPUT SELECTOR switch of the AI8 does not

match the actual operation.

This display does not signify an actual error. How-

ever as necessary, check the setting of the INPUT

SELECTOR switch or the setting of the CS1D.

1234567

OUTPUT UNIT NO.

INPUT SELECTOR

POWER

ON/ OFF

ANALOG OUTPUT BOX

OUTPUT UNIT ID

ID number of the AO8

(when the AO8 is connected to the OUTPUT 2

connector of the engine)

Turning on the power and verifying the connections

Checking the digital input/output unit (Mirror mode)

If the output unit and the engine are correctly connected in Mirror mode and the PORT B SELECTOR of the DIO8 is in

the 5-8 position, the I/O UNIT ID indicator will show the ID number of that unit (i.e., the number of the OUTPUT con-

nector on the engine to which the INPUT A connector of the DIO8 is connected), and a dot ( . ) will be displayed at each

side of the number.

If the PORT B SELECTOR switch of the DIO8 or

the word clock synchronization are not correct, the

I/O UNIT ID indicator of the DIO8 will show one

of the following error displays.

•

UL (unlocked)

....The word clock of the DIO8 is

not synchronized with the

PM1D system. Check the con-

nections of the DIO8’s WORD

CLOCK IN connector, or the

word clock setting of the CS1D

(

→

p.28).

•

ID number and A (or b) displayed alternately

Since control signals from the CS1D forcibly

switched the valid engine to A (or B), the setting of

the PORT B SELECTOR switch of the DIO8 does

not match the actual operation. This display does

not signify an actual error. However as necessary,

check the setting of the PORT B SELECTOR

switch or the setting of the CS1D.

I/O UNIT ID

PORT B SELECTOR

5-8

1-4

POWER

ON/ OFF

I/O UNIT ID

ID number of the DIO8

(when the INPUT A connector of the DIO8

is connected to the OUTPUT 3 connector

of the engine)

Basic settings (Standard mode)

When starting up the PM1D system for the ﬁrst time, you will need to select the operation mode of the PM1D (which is

what determines the system conﬁguration and how the components are connected to each other), and set the word clock

that will be shared by the entire system. Once these settings have been made, the PM1D system will automatically

remember them. (However if you modify the conﬁguration of the system, you may need to make settings again.)

Be aware that the display screens and settings differ between Standard mode and Mirror mode. This section explains the

basic settings for Standard mode. If you are using Mirror mode, please proceed to “Basic settings (Mirror mode)”

(

→

p.26).

Selecting the operation mode (Standard mode)

The “operation mode” determines the conﬁguration of the PM1D system and how the components are connected to

each other. The PM1D system version 1.0 supports two modes: “Standard mode” in which one console is used with one

engine, and “Mirror mode” in which one console is used with two engines.

[Procedure]

1. In the LED FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[SYS/W.CLOCK] switch several times to access the

screen shown on the following page.

Hint

The switches of the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block

are used to access speciﬁc functions in the display. By

pressing the same switch repeatedly, you can succes-

sively access different screens within that function.

DSP

x1x1

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[SYS/W.CLOCK] switch

Basic settings (Standard mode)

This is the SYSTEM CONNECTION screen, in

which you can check the connection status of the

various components, and select the operation mode.

2. Click the button located at the right of “OPERA

TION MODE.”

The OPERATION MODE window will appear, in

which you can select the operation mode.

3. Click the button marked “CONSOLE x 1 <->

ENGINE x1.”

Clicking “CONSOLE x 1 <-> ENGINE x1” will select

“Standard mode,” and you will then return to the

previous screen.

Ve r ify that the OPERATION MODE ﬁeld indicates

“CONSOLE x1 <-> ENGINE x1.”

When you perform this switch, the word clock will

be reset. At this time, noise may be produced from

the output jacks of the CS1D or AO8 (in particular

if an MY8-AT digital I/O card is installed in the

DIO8). In order to protect your speakers, you must

turn down the output of the power amp before

changing this setting.

Hint

In the SYSTEM CONNECTION screen you can also

check the cabling within the system and the status of

each device.

If both sets of connectors (1/2)

are connected, two lines will be

displayed in the screen. In this

case, the connector for the

transmitting device in the

graphic will show the number of

the currently-valid connector.

This shows the connection sta-

tus between the console and

engine. The light blue line in the

screen shows the control signal

connection, and the red line

shows the digital audio signal

connection.

This indicates the type

of input unit that is con-

nected to each INPUT

connector (1–10) of the

engine.

This indicates the type of

input unit that is con-

nected to each OUTPUT

connector (1–6) of the

engine.

This indicates the type

of input unit that is con-

nected to each INPUT

connector (1–10) of the

engine.

If the connection is broken, an

“x” symbol will be displayed

instead of the number.

CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)

Setting the word clock (Standard mode)

In order for the PM1D system to function, word clock (audio system clock) synchronization must be established

between all devices of the system. In this screen you can specify the word clock that will operate the PM1D system. In

general, the frequency of this clock is referred to as the sampling rate or sampling frequency.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[SYS/W.CLOCK] switch several times to access the

following screen.

Settings for the word clock of the PM1D system are

made in this screen.

2. In the screen area marked “SETTING LEVEL,”

make sure that the BASIC button is on (displayed

in green).

If the ADVANCED button is on instead of the BASIC

button, click the BASIC button.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[SYS/W.CLOCK] switch

Basic settings (Standard mode)

Hint

When the ADVANCED button is on, you can make

more detailed word clock settings.

3. Click one of the following buttons to select the

word clock source as the word clock master.

In Standard mode you can select one of the following

three choices as the word clock.

When you change the word clock settings, noise

may be heard from the output jacks of the CS1D

and AO8, particularly if an MY8-AT digital I/O

card is installed in the DIO8. To protect your

speaker system, you must turn down the power

amp output before changing the word clock set-

tings. Such a change in the word clock settings can

occur not only when PM1D system internal settings

are changed, but also when the word clock setting is

switched on an external device (e.g., a CD player or

a recording device).

■

ENGINE A

•

INT 48 k (Default setting)

The internal clock of the engine,

48 kHz

•

INT 44.1 k

...........The internal clock of the engine,

44.1 kHz

•

W.CLOCK IN

.....Supply a word clock to the

WORD CLOCK IN connector of

the engine

Normally you will select either INT 48 k or INT

44.1 k. If you are using an external clock generator as

the master, select W.CLOCK IN, and supply a word

clock to the WORD CLOCK IN jack of the engine/

console.

If when you change the word clock settings, the AI8

or AO8 indicator shows “UL” or the display shows a

message warning that the word clock is not syn-

chronized, check the connections between the

engine and console, and the connections between

the engine and the input/output units.

Basic settings (Mirror mode)

This section explains how to select the operation mode and word clock master when using the PM1D system in Mirror

mode.

Selecting the operation mode (Mirror mode)

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[SYS/W.CLOCK] switch several times to access the

following screen.

This is the SYSTEM CONNECTION screen, in

which you can check the connection status of each

device, and select the operation mode.

DSP

x2x2

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[SYS/W.CLOCK] switch

Basic settings (Mirror mode)

2. Click the button located at the right of “OPERA

TION MODE.”

The OPERATION MODE window will appear, in

which you can select the operation mode.

3. Click the button marked “CONSOLE x 1 <->

ENGINE x2 (Mirror Mode).”

Clicking “CONSOLE x 1 <->ENGINE x2 (Mirror

Mode)” will select “Mirror mode,” and you will then

return to the previous screen. Verify that the OPER-

ATION MODE ﬁeld indicates “CONSOLE x1 <->

ENGINE x2 (Mirror Mode).”

When you perform this switch, the word clock will be

reset. At this time, noise may be produced from the

output jacks of the CS1D or AO8 (in particular if an

MY8-AT digital I/O card is installed in the DIO8). In

order to protect your speakers, you must turn down the

output of the power amp before changing this setting.

Hint

In the SYSTEM CONNECTION screen you can also

check the cabling within the system and the status of

each device.

When using the PM1D system in Mirror mode, use this screen to verify that the same configuration of components

is connected to the INPUT connectors and OUTPUT connectors of engines A and B. Be aware that if the two con-

ﬁgurations are different, the signal ﬂow will change when you switch between engine A and engine B, and the

desired state will not be obtained.

This indicates the type

of input unit that is con-

nected to each INPUT

connector (1–10) of the

engine.

This indicates the type

of input unit that is

connected to each

OUTPUT connector

(1–6) of the engine.

If both jacks (1/2) of the same type

are connected, two lines will be dis-

played in the screen. You can click a

button in the jack area to select the

jack number (1 or 2) that is currently

enabled. If the connection is broken,

an "x" symbol will be displayed

instead of the number.

This shows the connection status

between the console and engine.

The light blue lines in the screen

show control signal connections,

and the red lines show digital audio

signal connections.

This indicates the type

of input unit that is

connected to each

OUTPUT connector

(1–6) of the engine.

This indicates the type

of input unit that is con-

nected to each INPUT

connector (1–10) of the

engine.

If both jacks (1/2) of the same type

are connected, two lines will be dis-

played in the screen. You can click a

button in the jack area to select the

jack number (1 or 2) that is currently

enabled. If the connection is broken,

an "x" symbol will be displayed

instead of the number.

This shows the connection status

between the console and engine.

The light blue lines in the screen

show control signal connections,

and the red lines show digital audio

signal connections.

CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)

Setting the word clock (Mirror mode)

This section explains how to check whether the word clock settings are appropriate when using the PM1D system in mir-

ror mode.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[SYS/W.CLOCK] switch several times to access the

following screen.

Settings for the word clock of the PM1D system are

made in this screen.

2. In the “SETTING LEVEL” section of the screen,

make sure that the ADVANCED button is on (dis-

played in green).

The ADVANCED button will automatically be on if

you select “CONSOLE x1 <-> ENGINE x2 (Mirror

Mode)” in the SYSTEM CONNECTION screen

(

→

p.26).

•

ADVANCED button on

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[SYS/W.CLOCK] switch

Basic settings (Mirror mode)

3. Make sure that the master word clock and the word

clock input select are set as follows.

MASTER CLOCK SELECT

•

The W.CLOCK of the engine or console is on

WORD CLOCK INPUT SELECT

Word clock settings will automatically be as shown

above.

Although it is possible to change this setting manu

ally, you should supply a word clock from an exter-

nal clock generator to each device (

→

refer to the

connection methods on p.10, 12), and use the sys-

tem with the above settings to ensure that the sys-

tem operates in a stable manner.

With these settings, the word clock from the exter-

nal clock generator will be supplied directly to each

device in the PM1D system even if you switch

between engines A and B in case of problems, so

that the clock itself will not be switched, and the

change will occur in the shortest possible time.

If when you change the word clock settings, the AI8

or AO8 indicator shows “UL” or the display shows a

message warning that the word clock is not syn-

chronized, check the connections between the

engines and console, and the connections between

the engines and the input/output units.

Console W.CLOCK IN

Engine A/B W.CLOCK IN

Each unit W.CLOCK IN

Checking the operation of input units

This section explains how to check the operation of an input unit connected to the DSP1D-EX {DSP1D} engine.

The general procedure is as follows.

Connect an input source to the input unit

Connect a monitor system (or headphones) to the MONITOR OUT A jacks of the console (or to the MONITOR A

headphone jack)

Tu rn on the power in the order of input unit

→

DSP1D-EX {DSP1D} engine

→

CS1D console

→

monitor system

Patch the input unit to an input channel

Press the [CUE] switch of the input channel

Check whether the signal is output from the MONITOR OUT A jacks (or the MONITOR A headphone jack)

Preparations for checking

Before you begin checking the operation of the input unit, make sure that you have performed the following actions.

•

Connect the various components that are part of

the PM1D system (

→

p.6–13)

•

Use the indicators/LEDs of the input/output units

and the engine to verify that the components are

correctly connected to each other (

→

p.14–21)

•

Set the operation mode and the word clock master

as appropriate for the conﬁguration of the PM1D

system that you are using (

→

p.22–29).

Checking the operation of input units

Connect the monitor system

In order to check the operation of an input unit, you must connect a monitor system such as powered monitor speakers

or a power amp + speaker to the MONITOR OUT A jacks located on the rear panel of the CS1D console. (Since the pur-

pose of this is to check the operation, high power monitors are not necessary.)

If you will be monitoring through headphones, connect them to the PHONES MONITOR A jack located on the front

panel of the CS1D console.

Please do not use the MONITOR A/B headphone

jacks located on the top panel of the console (in the

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block) simulta-

neously with the PHONES MONITOR A/B jacks

located on the front panel. Doing so can cause the

CS1D to malfunction due to excessive current.

CONSOLE (CS1D)

MONITOR OUT A jacks

MONITOR A

headphone jacks

Headphones

Monitor

system

Connect an input source

Connect one of the following input sources according to the type of input unit or card that you wish to check.

•

To check a mic/line input card (LMY2-ML)

installed in the AI8

Connect a line output device such as a CD player or

DAT recorder to input jacks 1A and 2A of the LMY2-

ML.

•

To check an AD card (LMY4-AD) installed in the

AI8

Connect a line output device such as a CD player or

DAT recorder to input jacks 1/2 of the LMY4-AD.

•

To check an input channel of a digital I/O card

(MY8-AT, MY8-TD, MY8-AE) installed in the DIO8

Connect the digital output connector of a DAT

recorder or digital MTR (multi-track recorder) that

matches the format of your digital I/O card. In this

case, make connections and settings so that the sig-

nals are sent from the recorder to input channels 1/2

of the digital I/O card.

INPUT UNIT NO.

PHANTOM MASTER

OFF

+48V

POWER

ON/ OFF

12345678

ANALOG INPUT BOX

ANALOG IN

CH2B

SIGNAL

MIC/LINE INPUT CARD

MODEL LMY2-ML

SIGNAL

CH2A CH1B CH1A

MIC/Line-Platine (LMY2-ML)

CD player/DAT recorder

AI8 input unit

INPUT UNIT NO.

PHANTOM MASTER

OFF

+48V

POWER

ON/ OFF

12345678

ANALOG INPUT BOX

ANALOG IN

CH4

SIGNAL

AD CARD

MODEL LMY4-AD

SIGNAL

CH3 CH2 CH1

CD player/DAT recorder

AI8 input unit

I/O UNIT ID

PORT B SELECTOR

5-8

1-4

POWER

ON/ OFF

DIGITAL I/O CARD

MODEL MY8-AE

AES/EBU

DIGITAL I/O CARD

MODEL MY8-AT

DAT

00.00.00.00

8-TRACK DIGITAL

DIGITAL I/O CARD

MODEL MY8-TD

Tascam Digital Audio

Interface (TDIF-1)

WORD CLOCK OUT

OUT

Digital-E/A-Platine (MY8-AT)

Digital-E/A-Platine (MY8-TD)

Digital-E/A-Platine (MY8-AE)

ADAT

INPUT 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8

OUT

PUT 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8

DIGITAL OUT (AES/EBU)

DIGITAL I/O

DIGITAL OUT

DIO8 digital input/output unit

TASCAM digital MTR

DAT recorder

ADAT digital MTR

(female) (male)

Special AES/

EBU cable for

the MY8-AE

Checking the operation of input units

Patch the input unit to an input channel

Simply connecting a source to an input unit does not cause that signal to be input to the PM1D system. In order to send

signals to the PM1D system, you must assign (patch) the input jacks of the input unit to input channels of the PM1D sys-

tem. This operation is performed within the display of the CS1D console.

[Procedure]

1. Turn on the power in the order of PM1D system

→

monitor system.

2. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

INPUT [PATCH] switch several times to access the

following screen.

This is the INPUT PATCH screen, where signals

from an input unit or effect return can be patched to

input channels.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

INPUT [PATCH] switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)

Hint

The switches in the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block

are used to access the desired function in the display.

Each function is divided into multiple screens, and

you can press the same switch repeatedly to cycle

through the displayed screens.

3. Move the left/right scroll bar so that the visible area

of the horizontal rows (patch source) shows the

input unit to which the input source is connected.

Use the left/right scroll bar to access input units that

are not currently shown in the visible area.

4. Patch the input source to input channels 1/2.

In the IN PATCH screen, the jack to which the input

source is connected can be patched to the desired

input channel by making a

●

symbol appear in the

grid where the patch source intersects the patch des-

tination. There are two ways to do this, as follows.

In this grid, input jacks (horizontal rows) can be patched to input channels (vertical col-

umns). A

●

symbol is displayed to indicate a currently-patched grid location.

Patch source

input jack.

From the top

row, the dis-

play shows

the type and

ID of the input

unit, the num-

ber of the slot

in which the

input card is

installed, and

the number of

the channel

(jack) within

the card.

Number of

the patch

destination

input chan-

nel.

You can also click this area to

move the displayed portion.

Drag this box to move the

displayed area to left or

right.

Click the / buttons to

switch the display in steps of a

unit.

Click the / buttons to

switch the display in steps of a

slot.

Click the / buttons

to switch the display in steps

of a unit.

Click the / buttons

to switch the display in steps

of a slot.

Checking the operation of input units

Using the switches of the console

1. Use the [CURSOR] switches in the data entry block

to move the cursor (the red frame) in the display to

the desired grid.

2. Press the [ENTER] switch to make a

●

symbol

appear.

Using the track pad of the console

1. Use the track pad to move the cursor to the desired

grid. (The cursor will change to the shape of a ﬁn-

ger.)

2. Click the desired grid to make the

●

symbol

appear.

The screen will appear as follows when an input

source has been patched to input channels 1/2.

•

For an AI8 with a mic/line input card (LMY2-ML)

installed

•

For an AI8 with an AD card (LMY4-AD) installed

•

For a DIO8 with a digital I/O card installed

Data entry block

[ENTER] switch

[CURSOR] switch

Tra ck pad

Data entry block

CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)

Monitor the input signal

After you have patched an input source to an input channel, press the [CUE] switch for that input channel and check

whether it is output from the MONITOR OUT jacks.

[Procedure]

1. Play back the input source, and check that the

meter LEDs light for input channels 1/49 and 2/50

in INPUT block 1 of the console.

If the input source is connected to a mic/line input

card (LMY2-ML), adjust the [GAIN] encoder so

that the CLIP segment of the meter LED does not

light.

2. Press the [CUE] switches of input channels 1/49

and 2/50 to make the switch LEDs light.

The input signals of input channels 1/2 will be sent to

the monitoring bus (CUE bus).

In the CUE section of the MASTER block, make

sure that the [SOLO] switch, the [INPUT AFL]

switch, and the [LAST CUE] switch are off (LED

dark). If any of these switches are on, it may not be

possible to monitor the signal from the MONITOR

OUT A jacks or the MONITOR A headphone jack

even though the [CUE] switch of the input channel

is pressed.

Monitoring will also be impossible if the CUE

INTERRUPTION button has been turned off in the

MON/CUE function MONITOR A screen. Please

check whether this button has been turned off.

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” →p.71.)

3. In the MONITOR A section of the MASTER block,

turn on the MONITOR A [ON] switch and raise the

MONITOR A [LEVEL] volume to an appropriate

level. Also raise the volume of your monitor system.

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

-68

THR

COMP

THR

CLIP

GATE

+10

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

-68

THR

COMP

THR

GATE

+10

CLIP

ONON

CUE

INPUT block 1

[CUE] switch

Meter LEDs for

input channels 1/49

and 2/50

[GAIN] encoder

MASTER block

[LAST CUE] switch

[INPUT AFL]

switch

[SOLO]

switch

MONITOR A

PHONES [LEVEL]

volume

MONITOR A

[ON] switch

MONITOR A

[LEVEL] volume

Checking the operation of input units

Hint

When monitoring through the MONITOR A head-

phone jack, raise the MONITOR A PHONES

[LEVEL] volume (located in the MONITOR A sec-

tion of the MASTER block) to an appropriate level.

If you are now able to monitor the signal, you have

veriﬁed that the input unit/card to which the source

is connected is operating normally.

4. As necessary, perform the same operational check

for other input units or cards.

If you are unable to monitor an input source, check

the following points.

Meter LEDs of the INPUT block do not light

• Is the input source connected appropriately?

→Check the unit/card to which the input source is

connected (→p.32)

• When using a mic/line input card (LMY2-ML), is

the input source connected to input jacks 1A and

2A?

→When the PM1D system is in the default state,

input jacks 1B or 2B cannot be used without

changing the settings. Re-connect to input jacks 1A

and 2A (→p.32).

• Has the input unit/card to which the input source

is connected been correctly patched to the input

channel?

→Check the settings of the IN PATCH screen

(→p.33).

• In the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block, has

the MODULE [FLIP] switch been turned on (LED

lit)?

→When the MODULE [FLIP] switch is on, the mod-

ules of INPUT blocks 1 and 2 will be exchanged.

Press the MODULE [FLIP] switch to make the

LED go dark. (“CS1D Reference Manual (Hard-

ware)” →p.5)

• In the MASTER block GLOBAL LAYER section,

has the [49-96] switch been turned on (LED lit)?

→On the 96 channel model when the GLOBAL

LAYER [49-96] switch is on (LED lit), channels

49–96 will be selected as the input channels that

are controlled from the top panel of the CS1D.

{This switch has no function on the 48 channel

model.} To control channels 1–48, press the GLO-

BAL LAYER [1-48] switch. (“CS1D Reference

Manual (Hardware)” →p.5)

Meter LEDs of the INPUT block do light, but the signal

is not output from MONITOR OUT jacks A or the

MONITOR A headphone jack

• Is your monitor system connected appropriately?

→Check the connections of the monitor system/

headphones.

• Is the monitor volume raised?

→Raise the MONITOR A [LEVEL] or [PHONES]

volume to an appropriate level.

• In the MASTER block CUE section, have the

[SOLO], [INPUT AFL], or [LAST CUE] switches

been turned off?

→If any of these switches are on, it may not be possi-

ble for the signal of the input channel whose

[CUE] switch was pressed to be monitored from

MONITOR OUT jacks A or the MONITOR A

headphone jack. You must turn off all of these

switches. (“CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)”

→p.81)

The meter LEDs of the INPUT block are lit, and a

signal is output from the MONITOR A headphone

jack, but no signal is output from MONITOR OUT

jacks A

• Is the CUE INTERRUPTION button (MON/CUE

function MONITOR A screen) turned on?

→Monitoring is not possible if the CUE INTERRUP-

TION button is turned off. Turn this button on.

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” →p.71)

Checking the operation of an output unit

This section explains the procedure for checking the operation of an output unit connected to the DSP1D-EX {DSP1D}

engine. The general procedure is as follows.

Connect an input source to an input unit

Connect your monitor system to an output unit

Tu rn on the power in the order of input unit → DSP1D-EX {DSP1D} engine → CS1D console → monitor system

Patch the input unit to an input channel

Patch the output unit to the STEREO A channel

Send the input channel signal to the STEREO bus

Check whether the signal is output from the STEREO OUT A jacks

Preparations for checking

Before you begin checking the operation of an output unit, make sure that the following actions have been completed.

• Connect the various components that are part of

the PM1D system (→p.6–13)

• Use the indicators/LEDs of the input/output units

and the engine to verify that the components are

correctly connected to each other (→p.14–21)

• Set the operation mode and the word clock master

as appropriate for the conﬁguration of the PM1D

system that you are using (→p.22–29).

Checking the operation of an output unit

Connect the monitor system

In order to check the operation of an analog output unit, you will need to connect a monitor system such as a set of pow-

ered speakers or a power amp + speakers to a DA card (LMY4-DA) installed in the AO8 analog output unit.

If you are checking the output channels of a DIO8

digital input/output unit, connect the output con-

nector of the digital I/O card (MY8-AT, MY8-TD,

MY8-AE) to the digital input connector of a DAT

recorder or digital MTR (multi-track recorder) of

the same format as that card. In this case, it will not

be possible to directly monitor the signal via the

monitor system, so you will need to arrange things

so that the signal can be monitored via the head-

phone jack or analog output jacks of the recorder.

1234567

OUTPUT UNIT NO.

INPUT SELECTOR

POWER

ON/ OFF

ANALOG OUTPUT BOX

ANALOG OUT

DA CARD

MODEL LMY4-DA

SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL

CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1

DA-Platine (LMY4-DA)

Monitor system

AO8 analog output unit

CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)

Connect an input source

As a sound source for checking, connect a line output device such as a CD player or DAT recorder to an input unit.

INPUT UNIT NO.

PHANTOM MASTER

OFF

+48V

POWER

ON/ OFF

12345678

ANALOG INPUT BOX

ANALOG IN

CH4

SIGNAL

AD CARD

MODEL LMY4-AD

SIGNAL

CH3 CH2 CH1

CD player/DAT recorder

AI8 analog input unit

Checking the operation of an output unit

Patch the input unit to an input channel

Patch the input jack to which you connected the input source to input channels 1/2. For details of the procedure, refer to

page 33.

[Procedure]

1. Turn on the power in the order of the PM1D system

→ monitor system.

2. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

INPUT [PATCH] switch several times to access the

following screen.

3. Patch the input source to input channels 1/49 and

2/50.

The following illustration shows an example of when

jacks 1/2 of an AD card (LMY4-AD) installed in slot

1 of the AI8 are patched to input channels 1/2.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

INPUT [PATCH] switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)

Patch the STEREO A channel to an output unit

Similarly to the case for an input unit, outputting a signal from the PM1D system requires more than simply connecting

your monitor system to an output unit. In order to output a signal, you must also assign (patch) an output channel (MIX

channel, MATRIX channel, STEREO A/B channel) of the PM1D system to the jacks of an output unit. This action is per-

formed within the display of the CS1D console.

Here’s how to patch the STEREO A channel output signal to the output unit to which your monitor system is connected.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

OUTPUT [PATCH] switch several times to access

the following screen.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

OUTPUT [PATCH] switch

Checking the operation of an output unit

2. Use the up/down scroll bars to make “ST A[L]” and

“ST A[R]” appear in the vertical column (patch

source) area.

Use the up/down scroll bar to see output channels

that are not currently visible. “ST A[L]” and “ST

A[R]” correspond to STEREO A channels L and R

respectively.

3. Use the left/right scroll bar to make the output unit

to which your monitor system is connected appear

in the horizontal row (patch destination) of the dis-

play.

4. Patch “ST A[L]” and “ST A[R]” to the jacks to which

your monitor system is connected.

The following illustration shows the example of

when jacks 1/2 of a DA card (LMY4-DA) installed in

slot 1 of the AO8 are patched to the L/R channels of

STEREO A.

In this grid, output jacks (horizontal rows) can be patched to output channels (vertical columns).

A ● symbol will be displayed for currently-patched grids. This is the OUTPUT PATCH screen in

which the output signals of the output channels can be patched to output units or to the inputs of

the internal effects.

Patch desti-

nation out-

put jacks.

From the

top, this

area shows

the type and

ID of the

output unit,

the number

of the slot in

which the

output card

is installed,

and the

channel

(jack) num-

ber within

the card.

Patch source

output

channels.

CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)

Send the input signals of input channels 1/2 to the STEREO bus

With the operations you have performed up to this point, the signals of the STEREO bus of the PM1D system will be

output to the output jacks to which your monitor system is connected. Now we will send the signals of the input source

to the STEREO bus to verify that they can be monitored via your monitor system.

[Procedure]

1. Play back the input source. In INPUT block 1 of the

console, verify that the meter LEDs light for input

channels 1/49 and 2/50.

2. If the input source is connected to a mic/line input

card (LMY2-ML), adjust the [GAIN] encoder so

that the CLIP segment of the meter LED does not

light.

3. Turn on the [ON] switches of input channels 1/49

and 2/50 (so that the LEDs are lit).

4. Turn on the [TO ST] switches of input channels 1/

49 and 2/50.

5. Raise the faders of input channels 1/49 and 2/50 to

the 0 position (nominal level).

6. In the STEREO OUTPUT block, turn on the STE-

REO [ON] switch of the ST OUTPUT A channel.

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

-68

THR

COMP

THR

CLIP

GATE

+10

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

-68

THR

COMP

THR

GATE

+10

CLIP

ONON

CUE

INPUT block 1

[CUE] switch

Meter LEDs for

input channels 1/49

and 2/50

[TO ST] switch

[GAIN] encoder

[ON] switch

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

INS

SEL

TO MTRX

CUE

ST OUTPUT

STEREO [ON]

switch of the ST

OUTPUT A

channel

STEREO OUTPUT block

Fader

Checking the operation of an output unit

7. In the STEREO OUTPUT block, raise the ST OUT-

PUT A channel fader.

At this time, the STEREO A L/R meters in the meter

bridge block will show the output level of the STE-

REO A channel.

If the signal can now be heard from your monitor

system, you have veriﬁed that the output unit/card to

which the source is connected is functioning cor-

rectly.

8. As necessary, use the same procedure to check the

operation of other output units or cards.

If the input source could not be monitored, check

the following points.

Meter LEDs in the INPUT block do not light

• Is the input source connected appropriately?

→Check the unit/card to which the input source is

connected (→p.32).

• When using a mic/line input card (LMY2-ML), is

the input source connected to input jacks 1A and

2A?

→When the PM1D system is in the default state,

input jacks 1B or 2B cannot be used without

changing the settings. Re-connect to input jacks 1A

and 2A (→p.32).

• Has the output unit/card to which the input source

is connected been correctly patched to the input

channel?

→Check the settings of the IN PATCH screen

(→p.33).

• In the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block, has

the MODULE [FLIP] switch been turned on (LED

lit)?

→When the MODULE [FLIP] switch is on, the mod-

ules of INPUT blocks 1 and 2 will be exchanged.

Press the MODULE [FLIP] switch to make the

LED go dark. (“CS1D Reference Manual (Hard-

ware)”→p.5)

• In the MASTER block GLOBAL LAYER section,

has the [49-96] switch been turned on (LED lit)?

→On the 96 channel model when the GLOBAL

LAYER [49-96] switch is on (LED lit), channels

49–96 will be selected as the input channels that

are controlled from the top panel of the CS1D.

{This switch has no function on the 48 channel

model.} To control channels 1–48, press the GLO-

BAL LAYER [1-48] switch. (“CS1D Reference

Manual (Hardware)” →p.5)

STEREO A L/R meters in the meter bridge block do not

light

• Is the input channel [ON] switch turned off?

→In the INPUT block, turn on the [ON] switch for

input channels 1/49 and 2/50 (→p.44).

• Is the [TO ST] switch of the input channel turned

off?

→In the INPUT block, turn on the [TO ST] switch

for channels 1/49 and 2/50 (→p.44).

• Is the input channel fader lowered?

→In the INPUT block, raise the faders for input

channels 1/49 and 2/50 (→p.44).

STEREO A L/R meters in the meter bridge block are lit,

but there is no output from the output unit

• Is the STEREO A channel STEREO [ON] switch

turned off?

→In the STEREO OUTPUT block, turn on the STE-

REO [ON] switch of the STEREO A channel

(→p.44).

• Is the STEREO fader of the STEREO A channel

lowered?

→In the STEREO OUTPUT block, raise the STEREO

fader of the STEREO A channel (→p.45).

• Is the monitor system connected appropriately?

→Check the connections of the monitor system

(→p.39).

• Are the output channels patched appropriately?

→In the OUT PATCH screen, check whether the

STEREO A L/R channels are appropriately patched

to the output unit/card to which your monitor sys-

tem is connected (→p.42).

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

MIN

HOUR

NUMBER

STEREO A

STEREO B

CUE

SCE

Meter bridge block

STEREO A L/R meters

CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up)

• Is the Solo function turned on?

→If the [SOLO] switch is turned on in the MASTER

block CUE section, and the [CUE] button of any

channel is turned on, the signals of the other chan-

nels will be muted. Turn off the [SOLO] switch

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)” →p.81).

Turn off the power

You have now ﬁnished the system check of the “CS1D Operating Manual (Start-up).”

We recommend that you store the current state as a scene memory before you turn off the power supply (PW1D). If the

current unit connection state differs from the unit connection state the next time the power is turned on, patch settings

etc. may be modiﬁed. For the procedure of storing a scene, refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)” (→p.89) or

“CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” (→p.18).

Lower the faders of the STEREO OUTPUT block, and turn off the power in the order of the monitor system → PM1D

system.

Before you move the CS1D, you must tilt the display backward until it locks into place.

Before turning on the engine (DSP1D) or the console power supply (PW1D), you must wait at least five seconds

after the power was turned off. Failing to observe this waiting period may cause malfunctions.

Operating Manual

(Basic Operation)

Contents

Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

About the “CS1D Operation Manual (Basic Operation)” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Printing conventions in the “CS1D Operation Manual (Basic Operation)” . . . . . . . . . 1

Overview of the PM1D system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Full-digital/separate type SR mixing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Component structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Signal flow in the PM1D system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Number of inputs/outputs and channel structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

MIX buses/MATRIX buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Scene memories/Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Word clock synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Chapter 2. The user interfaces of the CS1D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

About the user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

User interfaces within the display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

User interface on the top panel of the CS1D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

External user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Various basic operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Drag and drop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Scroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Accessing the desired screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Button operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Moving the cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Adjusting the value of a knob or fader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Assigning a name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Chapter 3. Audio connections and patching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Audio connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Audio connections for an analog input unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Audio connections for an analog output unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Audio connections for a digital input/output unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Audio connections for the console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Input channel patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Output channel patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Chapter 4. Basic operation for input channels . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

About input channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Blocks used to control input channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Changing the channel assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Contents

iii

Basic operation INPUT blocks/ST IN block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

INPUT block/ST IN block controls and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Head amp settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Sending a signal from an input channel to a STEREO bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Pairing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Basic operation in the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Controls and functions of the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block . . . . . . . . . . 44

Head amp settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Sending signals from an input channel to the STEREO bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Sending signals from an input channel to a MIX bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Using the delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Using the compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Using the noise gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Using the 4 band EQ/HPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Chapter 5. Basic operation for output channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

About the output channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Blocks used to control the output channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Switching the channel assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Basic operation of the MIX OUTPUT block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Controls and functions of the MIX OUTPUT block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Sending a signal from a MIX channel to an output unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Sending a signal from a MIX channel to a MATRIX bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Sending a signal from a MIX channel to the STEREO bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Pairing MIX channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Basic operation of the MATRIX OUTPUT block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Controls and functions of the MATRIX OUTPUT block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Sending a signal from a MATRIX channel to an output unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Pairing MATRIX channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Basic operation of the STEREO OUTPUT block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Controls and functions of the STEREO OUTPUT block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Sending a signal from a STEREO A/B channel to an output unit. . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Basic operation of the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Controls and functions of the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block. . . . . . . . . 74

Sending a signal from an output channel to an output unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Sending a signal from a MIX channel to a MATRIX bus/STEREO

bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Sending a signal from the STEREO A channel to the MATRIX bus . . . . . . . . . . 79

Delay settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Compressor settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

6 band EQ/HPF settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Chapter 6. Insert and direct out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Insert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Connecting the external device to be inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Inserting into an input channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Contents

Inserting into an output channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Direct out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Direct out connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Directly outputting an input channel signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Chapter 7. DCA groups/Mute groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

DCA groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Assigning a channel to a DCA group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Controlling a DCA group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Mute groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Assigning input channels to a mute group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Assigning output channels to a mute group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Controlling a mute group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Chapter 8. Scene memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

About scenes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Scene memory operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Storing a scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Recalling a scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Using PREVIEW mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Directly recalling a scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Chapter 9. Recall safe/Mute safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

Recall safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Using the console to set/defeat Recall Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Using the screen to set/defeat Recall Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Mute safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Using the console to set/defeat Mute Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Using the screen to set/defeat Mute Safe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Chapter 10. Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Basic operation of the MONITOR A/MONITOR B section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

About MONITOR A/MONITOR B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Controls and functions of the MONITOR A/MONITOR B sections . . . . . . . . . 111

Using the MONITOR A section to monitor a signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Using the MONITOR B section to monitor a signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Using the Cue/Solo function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Cue mode and Solo mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Cue/Solo groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Controls and functions of the CUE section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Using the Cue function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Using the Solo function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Contents

Chapter 11. Talkback/Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Talkback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Chapter 12. Internal effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

About the internal effects of the PM1D system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Patching an internal effect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Using an internal effect via the MIX bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Inserting an internal effect into a channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Basic operation of the effect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Editing effect parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Recalling effect data from the library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Storing effect data to the library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Chapter 13. Graphic EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Inserting a graphic EQ into a channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Controlling a graphic EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Controlling a graphic EQ from the display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Controlling a graphic EQ from the DCA faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Chapter 14. MIDI/Time Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Using MIDI program changes to control events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Using time code to control events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Chapter 15. Using a memory card to save/load data . . . . . . . . . 144

Saving a file onto a memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Loading a file from a memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Chapter 16. Various settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Initial settings for the console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Setting the internal calendar and clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Specifying the metering points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Input channel metering point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Output channel metering point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

User defined function settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Chapter 1. Introduction

About the “CS1D Operation Manual (Basic Operation)”

The “CS1D Operation Manual (Basic Operation)” explains basic operation of the PM1D system, such as connecting the

input sources and playback system, operating the CS1D console, and using the display of the CS1D to make various set-

tings.

•

The “CS1D Operation Manual (Basic Operation)”

assumes that the various components of the PM1D

system have been connected and are operating cor-

rectly. For details on connecting the components of

the PM1D system and verifying that they are operat-

ing correctly, refer to “CS1D Operation Manual

(Start-up).”

•

For details on the speciﬁcations and functions of the

engine (DSP unit DSP1D-EX {DSP1D}) and input/

output units, refer to the manual included with each

unit.

•

For a more detailed explanation of the functions and

operation of the controls and connectors on the top

panel, rear panel, and front panel of the console

(CS1D), refer to the “CS1D Reference Manual

(Hardware).”

•

For details on the functions and operation of the

software in the display of the console (CS1D), refer

to the “CS1D Reference Manual (Software).”

Screen shots shown in this manual are taken from a

prototype. Please be aware that they may differ

slightly from the actual screens on your unit.

Printing conventions in the “CS1D Operation Manual (Basic Operation)”

•

Differences between the 96 channel model and 48

channel model

The PM1D system is available either as a 48 channel

model or a 96 channel model, which differ in the

number of available input channels. In general, the

“CS1D Operation Manual (Basic Operation)” is

written for the 96 channel model of the PM1D sys-

tem (the model that uses the DSP1D-EX as its

engine). When the speciﬁcations differ between the

96 channel mode and the 48 channel model (the

model that uses the DSP1D as its engine), the speciﬁ-

cations of the 48 channel model are given in curly

brackets { }.

Example

: A number 1–96 {1–48} will be displayed in

the NUMBER indicator.

•

Standard mode and Mirror mode

The PM1D system supports two operation modes

(an element that deﬁnes the structure and connec-

tion method for the system): “Standard mode” (in

which one engine is connected to one console), or

“Mirror mode” (in which two engines are connected

to one console, but only one engine is used).

Please note that the mode in which the PM1D system

is used will affect not only the number of engines,

but also the method of connections and the internal

settings.

Explanatory material that applies only to Standard

mode is indicated by the following icon.

Explanatory material that applies only to Mirror

mode is indicated by the following icon.

Other than Mirror mode, version 1.0 of the PM1D

system does not support an operation mode that

uses two engines.

•

Distinguishing CS1D controllers from the on-

screen knobs/buttons

Controllers (switches, encoders, volumes) on the top

panel, rear panel, or front panel of the CS1D are

enclosed in square brackets [ ] to distinguish them

from knobs or buttons that appear in the display.

Example

: Tu rn on the [ON] switch.

(This refers to an operation on the top panel of the

CS1D.)

Example

: Click the BASIC button.

(This refers to an operation in the display.)

•

Va r ious icons

The following icon is used to indicate operating tips

or pages to which you should refer.

The following icon is used to indicate particularly

important points, or operations of which you must

be careful.

DSP

x1x1

DSP

x2x2x2

Hint

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Overview of the PM1D system

The PM1D system is a full-digital SR mixing system that consists of a CS1D console, PW1D power supply, DSP1D-EX

{DSP1D} DSP unit(s), AI8 analog input unit(s), AO8 analog output unit(s), DIO8 digital input/output unit(s), and

input/output cards. This section describes the ways in which the PM1D system differs from conventional analog mixing

consoles.

Full-digital/separate type SR mixing system

The PM1D is a full-digital SR mixing system using cutting-edge digital audio processing technology. 28 bit linear equiv-

alent AD converters and 27 bit linear equivalent DA converters are used to ensure a dynamic range of better than 120 dB,

for astoundingly high quality.

The system is divided into components such as engine, console, and input/output units. The compact modules allow the

system to be conﬁgured ﬂexibly, provide an amazing number of inputs and outputs, and ensure excellent portability and

operability.

Component structure

The following types of components make up the PM1D system.

•

Engine (DSP1D-EX {DSP1D})

Up to ten input units and six output units can be

connected to this DSP unit, which performs the

majority of audio processing such as audio signal

input/output, mixing, routing, and EQ/dynamics/

effects.

The PM1D system offers the following two types of

engine.

Hint

By installing an optional input DSP board (IDB1D)

in the DSP1D, it can be upgraded to the same speciﬁ-

cations as the DSP1D-EX.

The board must be installed by a Yamaha service

engineer. Never attempt to install this board your-

self.

•

Analog input unit (AI8)

This input unit inputs analog audio signals to the

engine. It has eight slots in which input cards can be

installed.

The following two types of cards can be installed in

the AI8.

The following three models of AI8 are available, with

different cards installed at the factory.

Cards must be installed in the AI8 by a Yamaha ser-

vice engineer. Never attempt to install these cards

yourself.

Engine

Monaural input

channels

Stereo input

channels

DSP1D-EX

96 8

DSP1D

48 4

POWER

ON/ OFF

A B

ENGINE ID

1 2

CONTROL I/O

48CH 96CH

INPUT

CONFIGURATION

Card

Input

jacks

Number of

channels

LMY2-ML

Mic/line input

card

1A, 1B,

2A, 2B

2 (select

either A or B)

LMY4-AD

AD card 1–4 4

Input unit Cards installed

AI8-ML8

LMY2-ML

8 cards

AI8-AD8

LMY4-AD

8 cards

AI8-ML4AD4

LMY2-ML

4 cards, LMY4-AD

4 cards

INPUT UNIT NO.

PHANTOM MASTER

OFF

+48V

POWER

ON/ OFF

12345678

ANALOG INPUT BOX

Chapter 1. Introduction

•

Analog output unit (AO8)

This output unit outputs analog audio signals from

the engine. The AO8 has eight slots, with eight

LMY4-DA DA cards installed at the factory.

Cards must be installed in the AO8 by a Yamaha

service engineer. Never attempt to install these

cards yourself.

•

Digital input/output unit (DIO8)

This unit performs input/output of digital audio sig-

nals in ADAT, Tascam, AES/EBU formats, as well as

analog audio signals, to and from the engine of the

PM1D system. The DIO8 has eight slots which can

accommodate digital I/O cards or analog I/O cards.

The following eight types of card can be installed in

the DIO8.

It is not possible to install and use a total of ﬁve or

more AP8AD/AP8DA cards. Also, if you are using

AP8AD/AP8DA cards simultaneously with MY8-

AD/MY4-AD/MY4-DA cards, there are restrictions

on the number of cards, as described below. Never

exceed the allowable number of cards, since

attempting to use a greater number of cards than

allowed may damage the DIO8 due to excessive

current. If you are not using AP8AD or AP8DA

cards, or if you are using AP8AD or AP8DA cards

simultaneously with an MY8-TD/MY8-AT/MY8-

AE card, there is no limitation on the number of

MY8-TD/MY8-AT/MY8-AE cards that can be used.

•

Console (CS1D)

This console controls the engine. Although it has the

appearance of a conventional mixing console, the

CS1D is simply a controller for controlling the

engine. Please be aware that with the exception of

some monitor signals, the audio signals of the PM1D

system are handled by the engine.

•

Power supply (PW1D)

This is the power supply that provides power to the

console.

Card

Output

jacks

Number of

channels

LMY4-DA

DA card 1–4 4

Card Format Input Output

MY8-TD TASCAM 8 IN 8 OUT

MY8-AT ADAT 8 IN 8 OUT

MY8-AE AES/EBU 8 IN 8 OUT

MY8-AD ANALOG IN 8 IN —

MY4-AD ANALOG IN 4 IN —

MY4-DA ANALOG OUT — 4 OUT

AP8AD* ANALOG IN 8 IN —

AP8DA*

*: Manufactured by Apogee Corporation

* As of September 1, 2000

ANALOG OUT — 8 OUT

1234567

OUTPUT UNIT NO.

INPUT SELECTOR

POWER

ON/ OFF

ANALOG OUTPUT BOX

I/O UNIT ID

PORT B SELECTOR

5-8

1-4

POWER

ON/ OFF

[AP8AD] +

[AP8DA] cards

used

[MY8-AD] +

[MY4-AD] +

[MY4-DA]

cards used

[MY8-TD] +

[MY8-AT] +

[MY8-AE] cards

used

Total 0 cards Up to a total of 8 cards

Total 1 card Up to 6 cards

Up to the number

of vacant DIO8

slots

Total 2 cards Up to 4 cards

Up to the number

of vacant DIO8

slots

Total 3 cards Up to 2 cards

Up to the number

of vacant DIO8

slots

Total 4 card Up to 1 card

Up to the number

of vacant DIO8

slots

Total 5 or more

cards cannot

be used

——

POWER

ON OFF

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Signal ﬂow in the PM1D system

The following diagram shows the general signal ﬂow within the PM1D system.

1 The signals input to the AI8 analog input unit are AD

converted, and then sent as multi-channel digital

audio signals to the DSP1D-EX {DSP1D} engine.

2 The signals sent to the DSP1D-EX {DSP1D} engine

are processed by mixing, routing, EQ/dynamics/

effects.

3 In general, the operation of the engine and of the

input unit is controlled from the CS1D console.

Hint

The signals that are input from the 2-TRACK IN

DIGITAL jacks 1–6 and 2-TRACK IN ANALOG

jacks 1/2 of the CS1D can also be sent to the engine.

4 The signals processed by the engine are DA con-

verted by the output unit, and sent to the speaker

system, foldback system, or recording system.

Hint

Signals can also be output from the STEREO OUT

DIGITAL jacks or MONITOR OUT ANALOG jacks

of the CS1D.

When a DIO8 digital input/output unit is used, the

same unit will be used both as an input unit and out-

put unit, so that the signal ﬂow will be as shown on

the next page.

INPUT

1~10

INPUT

OUTPUT

1~6

OUTPUT

CONTROL

I/O

DIGITAL I/O

ENGINE A

INPUT UNIT NO.

PHANTOM MASTER

OFF

+48V

POWER

ON/ OFF

12345678

ANALOG INPUT BOX

1234567

OUTPUT UNIT NO.

INPUT SELECTOR

POWER

ON/ OFF

ANALOG OUTPUT BOX

CONTROL

I/O

DIGITAL I/O

CONSOLE

I/O

Mic Line device Speaker system foldback

AI8 analog input unit

DSP1D-EX {DSP1D}

engine

AO8 analog output unit

Console (CS1D)

Analog audio signal

Digital audio signal

Control signal

Chapter 1. Introduction

DIGITAL I/O CARD

MODEL MY8-TD

OUTIN

INPUT

1~10

INPUT

OUTPUT

1~6

OUTPUT

I/O UNIT ID

PORT B SELECTOR

5-8

1-4

POWER

ON/ OFF

ADAT

ADAT digital MTR

DSP1D-EX {DSP1D}

engine

DIO8 digital input/output unit

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Number of inputs/outputs and channel structure

The DSP1D-EX {DSP1D} engine provides INPUT connectors 1–10 for connecting input units, and OUTPUT connec-

tors 1–6 for connecting output units.

When the PM1D system is used in Standard mode, up to ten input units (maximum of 320 input connectors) and up to

six output units (maximum of 192 output connectors) are connected to one engine.

When the PM1D system is used in Mirror mode, up to ten input units (maximum of 320 input connectors) and up to six

output units (maximum of 192 output connectors) are connected to two engines.

DSP

x1x1

INPUT

1~10

INPUT A

OUTPUT

1~6

OUTPUT A

INPUT A

DSP1D-EX {DSP1D}

engine

Input units

Output units

DSP

x2x2

INPUT

1~10

OUTPUT

1~6

INPUT

1~10

OUTPUT

1~6

INPUT A INPUT B

OUTPUT B OUTPUT A

INPUT A INPUT B

OUTPUT B OUTPUT A

DSP1D-EX {DSP1D}

engine A

DSP1D-EX {DSP1D}

engine B

Input units

Output units

Chapter 1. Introduction

In either mode, the input connectors of an input unit must be assigned (patched) in the CS1D display to an input chan-

nel in order to be used. Similarly, in order to use the output connectors of an output unit, you must assign them in the

display to an output channel (MIX channel, MATRIX channel, STEREO A/B channel).

The following table shows the type and number of engines required when using the 48 channel model and 96 channel

model in Standard mode or Mirror mode, and the number of input/output connectors and channels that can be used.

Number of inputs/outputs and channel structure

Hint

The 96 channel model and 48 channel model differ in the number of available monaural input channels and stereo

input channels. However, they have the same number of MIX channels, MATRIX channels, and STEREO A/B output

channels.

In Mirror mode, one of the engines (A/B) is maintained as a backup, and you can manually switch between the units

to use either one or the other. Thus, the number of input/output connectors and channels is the same as in Standard

mode.

Standard mode Mirror mode

Model 48 channel model 96 channel model 48 channel model 96 channel model

Engine DSP1D × 1 DSP1D-EX × 1 DSP1D × 2 DSP1D-EX × 2

Input connectors Maximum 320 Maximum 320 Maximum 320 Maximum 320

Output connectors Maximum 192 Maximum 192 Maximum 192 Maximum 192

Monaural input channels 48 96 48 96

Stereo input channels 4848

MIX channels 48 48 48 48

MATRIX channels 24 24 24 24

STEREO channels 2 (A, B) 2 (A, B) 2 (A, B) 2 (A, B)

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

MIX buses/MATRIX buses

The PM1D system can send the input channel signals to MIX buses 1–48. The signals sent to a MIX bus is routed

through a MIX channel that provides EQ, comp, and delay, and is output from the respective connector that is patched to

MIX 1–48. At this time, you can choose to either ﬁx the signal levels that are output from the input channels (FIX mode)

or allow them to vary (VARI mode). MIX buses that are set to FIX mode can be used as group buses, and MIX buses that

are set to VARI can be used as AUX buses.

In addition, the PM1D system has 24 independent MATRIX buses. Signals from MIX channels 1–48, STEREO A/B chan-

nels, and SUB IN can be mixed at the desired level and sent to a MATRIX bus. The signal sent to a MATRIX bus is routed

through a MATRIX channel that provides EQ, comp, and delay, and is output from the respective output connector that

is patched to MATRIX 1–24.

Scene memories/Libraries

The PM1D system can store the mix parameters of each channel and the settings of the entire PM1D system in memory

as a scene. Scenes are assigned a number consisting of an integer portion in the range of 00–99, and a decimal portion in

the range of .0–.9, for a total of 1,000 scenes from 00.0 to 99.9. (Ten of these scenes are read-only.)

Independently of scene memory, the PM1D system can store settings such as patch data, EQ data, compressor data, and

effect data in libraries for later reuse.

Word clock synchronization

In order for digital audio signals to be accurately transmitted and received, all components of the PM1D system and the

digital devices connected to the digital input/output units must be synchronized to the same word clock signal.

If any non-synchronized device is present, the input/output signals of that device may be muted, or may generate

click noise.

In Standard mode, the internal clock of the engine is normally used as the word clock master, and the input/output units

and console will be synchronized to this. It is also possible to use an external clock generator as the master that supplies a

word clock to the engine, console, and input/output units.

In Mirror mode, you can also switch to the other engine manually if the currently-used engine experiences difﬁculties. In

order to minimize the clock switching time in such cases, we recommend that you supply a word clock from an external

clock generator to the console and to engines A/B. Of course, switching will occur even without this type of supply

method.

Hint

For details on selecting the word clock master, refer to “CS1D Operation Manual (Start-up)” (→p.24) and to “CS1D

Reference Manual (Software)” (→p.44).

Hint

As an exception, the 2-TRACK IN DIGITAL jacks 1–6 of the CS1D console have built-in sample rate converters, and

will accept digital signals that are not synchronized with the PM1D system.

DSP

x1x1

DSP

x2x2

Chapter 2. The user interfaces of the CS1D

This chapter introduces the various user interfaces that control the software of the CS1D console, and explains how to

use them.

About the user interfaces

The PM1D system is designed so that basic parameters such as channel adjustments and mixing can be controlled using

only the faders and encoders on the top panel of the CS1D. However if you wish to make more detailed settings, you will

need to access a speciﬁc function and edit the parameter value in software. The following pages explain the various inter-

faces used to control the software in the display.

User interfaces within the display

The following user interfaces are used within the display of the CS1D.

• Pointer

The arrow shown in the display is called the

“pointer.” The pointer is used to select the element

that you wish to control.

• Cursor

The red frame shown in the display is called the “cur-

sor.” When an on-screen element is enclosed by the

cursor, that element is selected for control.

• Tabs

The screen names shown at the upper left of the dis-

play are called “tabs.” Tabs are used to switch between

different screens within the same function.

• Buttons

Buttons in the display are used to switch parameters

on/off, or to select one of multiple choices. Cur-

rently-on buttons are displayed in green, and buttons

that are off are displayed in gray.

• Knobs/faders/numerical boxes

Knobs/faders in the display are used to modify the

value of a parameter. The current value can be veri-

ﬁed in the numerical box.

Pointer

Cursor

Tab

Buttons turned on

Buttons turned off

Knob

Numerical box

Fader

Numerical box

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

• Text input box

These boxes are used to input characters/numerals/

symbols when assigning a name to a channel or

scene, etc.

• Character palette

This is a virtual keyboard used to input characters/

numerals/symbols into a text input box.

• Scroll bar

When one screen is insufﬁcient to display all of the

items, this bar is used to access the portion that is

currently not shown.

• MENU button

This is a special button that accesses the function

menu that is the starting point for operations in the

display. With the exception of the function menu

itself and various popup windows, this button is

shown at the same location in all screens.

Scroll bar

MENU button

Chapter 2. The user interfaces of the CS1D

User interface on the top panel of the CS1D

The top panel of the CS1D provides the following controls used for operations in the display.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block

The LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block contains switches used to access the desired function or screen in the display.

1 Global functions

These switches access functions that affect the entire

PM1D system.

2 Output functions

These switches access functions that affect the output

channels.

3 Input functions

These switches access functions that affect the input

channels.

Press the switch for the desired function, and the

screen for that function will appear in the display.

Hint

By holding down the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch and

pressing one of these LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

switches, you can cycle backward through the pages

within that function (the Page Back function). The

Page Back function will also operate if you continue

holding these switches.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Data entry block

The data entry block contains controllers used to modify

the settings and values in the display.

1 CURSOR [▲]/[▼]/[√]/[®] switches

These switches are used to move the cursor in the

display to the desired parameter.

2 [DEC/CANCEL]/[INC/OK] switches

These are used to increase or decrease the value of

the parameter at which the cursor is located in the

display. These switches can also be used instead of

the CANCEL button or OK button shown in the

window that asks you to conﬁrm a Recall or Store

operation before it is executed.

3 [SHIFT/GRAB] switch

When the cursor in the display is located at a knob-

type parameter that has a broad range of adjustment,

you can hold down this switch and use the [DEC/

CANCEL]/[INC/OK] switches or rotate the [DATA]

encoder to change the parameter value in larger

steps.

In some screens, you can hold down this switch and

use the CURSOR [▲]/[▼]/[√]/[®] switches to

move the cursor from its current location to another

area. For details refer to the explanations of each

screen in the reference manual (software section).

4 [ENTER] switch

This switch is used to turn on/off the button at the

cursor location, or to open a popup window.

5 [DATA] encoder

This is used to increase or decrease the value of the

parameter at which the cursor is located in the dis-

play. If you hold down the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch

while you rotate the [DATA] encoder, the parameter

value will change more rapidly.

6 Track pad and left/right switches

This is used to move the pointer in the display, or to

select a speciﬁc parameter.

When you are operating a knob-type display param-

eter that has a broad range of adjustment, you can

hold down the right switch of the track pad and

operate the pad to change the parameter value in

larger steps.

External user interfaces

As necessary, the following external user interfaces can be added to the PM1D system.

• Mouse

A PS/2 compatible mouse can be connected to the

MOUSE connector on the rear panel/top panel of the

CS1D, and used in the same way as the track pad.

• Keyboard

A PS/2 compatible keyboard can be connected to the

KEYBOARD connector on the rear panel/top panel

of the CS1D, and used to input characters/numerals/

symbols in the same way as the character palette.

The function of each key is listed below. (Key layout

is according to the English-language keyboard.)

Data entry block

Key Function

PageDown

Same function as the [DEC/CANCEL]

switch of the data entry block

PageDown

Same function as the [INC/OK] switch of

the data entry block

← → ↑ ↓

Same function as the [CURSOR]

switches

Numeric key-

pad 4, 6, 2, 8

(NumLock key

= off)

Alt+PageUp

Same function as moving the [DATA]

encoder in the INC direction

Chapter 2. The user interfaces of the CS1D

Identical types of connectors on the rear panel and

top panel cannot be used simultaneously. Only one

connector of each type can be used.

• Numeric keypad

If a PS/2 compatible numeric keypad is connected to

the NUM KEY connector located on the rear panel

or top panel of the CS1D, you can use the keypad to

input numbers and recall scenes.

The function of each key is as follows.

Alt+PageDown

Same function as moving the [DATA]

encoder in the DEC direction

Return

Same function as [ENTER] switch

Enter

Shift Same function as [SHIFT/GRAB] switch

Ctrl+←,

Ctrl+→

Same function as clicking the

√® but-

tons in the character palette

Ctrl+c

Same function as clicking the COPY

button in the character palette

Ctrl+v

Same function as clicking the PASTE

button in the character palette

Insert

Same function as clicking the INS button

in the character palette

Delete

Same function as clicking the DEL but-

ton in the character palette

BackSpace

Delete backward one character in the

text input box (backspace function)

Ctrl+↑,

Ctrl+↓, Ta b

Switch the object of editing in the text

input box

Esc

Same function as clicking the MENU

button (normal screen)

Same function as clicking the CANCEL

button (popup windows with a CANCEL

button). In screens with no CANCEL

button, the same function as clicking the

OK button or EXIT button.

Alt + 0~9,

-,=

Switch pages within the same screen

Key Function

0–9

Same function as the SCENE MEMORY

block [0]–[9] switches

Enter

Same function as the SCENE MEMORY

block [RECALL] switch

Same function as the SCENE MEMORY

block [▲/INC] switch + [ENTER] switch (recall

the next-numbered scene)

Same function as the SCENE MEMORY

block [▼/DEC] switch + [ENTER] switch

(recall the previously-numbered scene)

Not used in the current version

Key Function

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Various basic operations

This section explains the basic operations performed in the CS1D display. In general, operations in the CS1D software

will consist of combinations of these actions.

Click

“Click” is the action of moving the pointer to a speciﬁc item in the screen, and pressing the left or right switch of the

track pad (or if using an external mouse, pressing the left or right mouse button). Clicking is used to turn an on-screen

button on/off, to move the cursor, or to make ﬁne adjustments of a numeric value.

Hint

If you use the [CURSOR] switches of the data entry

block to move the cursor to a speciﬁc item and press

the [ENTER] switch, the result will be the same as if

you had clicked that item. (The same is true if you

use the arrow keys or ENTER key of an external key-

board.)

Hint

After moving the pointer to a speciﬁc item, you can

tap the track pad to produce the same result. (This is

called “tapping.”)

To defeat this function, you must cancel tapping in

the display (UTILITY function PREFERENCE

screen). (“CS1D Reference Manual (Software)”

→p.36)

Drag

“Drag” is the action of moving the pointer to a speciﬁc item in the screen, then pressing and holding the left or right

switch and sliding your ﬁnger up/down/left/right on the track pad. To drag using the mouse, press and hold the left or

right mouse button, and move it up/down/left/right. Dragging is used mainly to modify the value of an on-screen knob

or fader.

Left switch

Click

Mouse left click

Right switch

Click

Mouse right click

Tra ck pad

Tapping

Tra ck pad

Drag

Mouse

Left switch

While pressing

Tra ck pad

Drag

Mouse

Right switch

While pressing

Chapter 2. The user interfaces of the CS1D

Drag and drop

“Drag and drop” is the action of moving the pointer to a speciﬁc item in the screen, dragging it to another location in the

screen, and then releasing your ﬁnger. Drag and drop is used (for example) to copy EQ or dynamics processor settings to

another channel.

Scroll

When the number of items for display is greater than can be shown in a single screen, you can drag the box within the

scroll bar to view the hidden portion.

• Dragging the scroll bar box

You can also scroll the screen by clicking the vacant

portion of the scroll bar or the / buttons or

/ buttons located at the ends of the scroll bar.

• Using the [DEC/CANCEL]/[INC/OK] switches or

the [DATA] encoder to operate the scroll bar

If you place the cursor on a scroll bar box and press

the [DEC/CANCEL] switch or rotate the [DATA]

encoder counter-clockwise, the screen will scroll

toward the left (or upward, in the case of a vertical

scroll bar). If you press the [INC/OK] switch or

rotate the [DATA] encoder clockwise, the screen will

scroll toward the right (or downward, in the case of a

vertical scroll bar).

Hint

If the cursor is at the box of a scroll bar, you can hold

down the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch and rotate the

[DATA] encoder to produce the same result as press-

ing the button or button (depending on the

direction of rotation).

Drag

If you click here, the box in

the scroll bar will move in

large steps toward the side

you clicked, and the screen

will scroll correspondingly.

Click these buttons to move the

scroll bar box in the direction of

the arrow. Clicking / will

produce greater movement than

clicking / .

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Accessing the desired screen

There are two ways to access the desired function/screen in the display.

Using the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block

[Procedure]

1. Of the switches in the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the switch for the desired function.

The last-operated screen of the corresponding func-

tion will be accessed.

2. To switch screens within the same function, repeat-

edly press the same switch as in step 1.

Most functions have several screens.

If you hold down the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch of the

data entry block and press the same switch as in step

1, you will return to the previous screen of the same

function.

Using the buttons within the display

[Procedure]

1. In any screen, click the MENU button.

When you click the MENU button, the function

menu screen will appear. When you wish to select a

speciﬁc screen from the display, you will start from

this screen.

Hint

The MENU button will be located at the same place

in all screens, with the exception of the function

menu itself and various popup windows.

2. In the function menu screen, click the button for

the desired function.

The last-operated screen of the corresponding func-

tion will be accessed.

3. If the function includes more than one screen, click

the tabs at the upper part of the screen to select the

desired screen.

Chapter 2. The user interfaces of the CS1D

Button operations

Buttons within the display are used to turn speciﬁc parameters on/off, or to choose one of multiple choices. Buttons can

be operated in the following ways.

Using the track pad (mouse)

[Procedure]

1. Drag the track pad (mouse) to move the pointer to

the desired button.

2. Use the left or right switch of the track pad (mouse)

to click the button.

The button will be switched on/off. (Alternatively,

the corresponding button will be selected.)

• Switching a button on/off

Hint

If tapping in the display is enabled (UTILITY func-

tion PREFERENCE screen), you can also click by

tapping the track pad. In this case, the operation will

be the same as if you pressed the left switch of the

track pad (mouse). (“CS1D Reference Manual (Soft-

ware)” →p.36)

Using the data entry block switches /keyboard

[Procedure]

1. Use the [CURSOR] switches (or the arrow keys of

the keyboard) to move the cursor to the desired

button.

2. Press the [ENTER] switch (or the ENTER key of the

keyboard).

The button will be switched on/off. (Alternatively,

the corresponding button will be selected.)

Pointer

Click

Cursor

Selected button

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Moving the cursor

Here’s how to move the cursor (red box) in order to select the display parameter that you wish to edit.

Moving the cursor

[Procedure]

1. Press a CURSOR [▲]/[▼]/[√]/[®] switch. The

cursor in the display will move in the direction of

the switch you pressed.

However, the cursor will not move if no parameter

exists in the direction of that switch.

Hint

If the cursor is on a grid such as in the PATCH

screen, rotating the [DATA] encoder clockwise will

move the cursor toward the right, and rotating it

counterclockwise will move the cursor toward the

left. If you hold down the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch,

rotating the [DATA] encoder clockwise will move the

cursor downward, and rotating it counterclockwise

will move the cursor upward.

Moving the cursor from a scroll window

[Procedure]

1. Hold down the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch, and press a

CURSOR [▲]/[▼]/[√]/[®] switch.

The cursor will move out of the scroll window

(where which it was located) in the direction of the

switch you pressed.

This technique can be used in screens that have a

scroll window (e.g., the IN/OUT PATCH function

INSERT PATCH screen) or in screens that have a list

window (e.g., the SCENE function MEMORY

screen).

• Using the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch and the CUR-

SOR [√]/[®] switches to move the cursor

Move to the adjacent grid

[SHIFT/GRAB] switch

CURSOR [

®] switch

Chapter 2. The user interfaces of the CS1D

Adjusting the value of a knob or fader

Knobs and faders within the display are used to adjust the value of speciﬁc parameters. Knobs and faders can be adjusted

in the following ways.

Using the track pad (mouse)

[Procedure]

1. Move the pointer to the desired knob/fader, and use

the left or right switch of the track pad (mouse) to

click the knob/fader.

The cursor will move to that location.

2. To increase or decrease the value in steps of one, use

the right switch or left switch of the track pad

(mouse) to click the knob/fader.

Clicking the right switch will increase the value by

one, and clicking the left switch will decrease the

value by one.

3. To increase or decrease the value continuously, use

the track pad (mouse) to drag the knob/fader.

You can change the value continuously by dragging

the knob or fader in the left/right or up/down direc-

tion. In the case of a knob with a broad range of

adjustment, you can drag while holding down the

right switch of the track pad (mouse). This makes

the value change more rapidly than when the left

switch is held down. This method is convenient

when you wish to change the value rapidly.

Using the data entry block switches (keyboard)

and encoder

[Procedure]

1. Use the [CURSOR] switches (or the arrow keys of

the keyboard) to move the cursor to the desired

knob/fader.

• Move the cursor to a knob

2. To increase or decrease the value in steps of one, use

the [DEC/CANCEL]/[INC/OK] switches (or keys

that have the same function as the [DEC/CAN-

CEL]/[INC/OK] switches, such as the PageUp/

PageDown keys of your keyboard).

• Change the value in steps of 1

3. To raise or lower the value continuously, rotate the

[DATA] encoder.

• Change the value continuously

Hint

If the parameter being adjusted by the knob has a

broad range of adjustment, you can increase the rate

of change by holding down the [SHIFT/GRAB]

switch and using the [DEC/CANCEL]/][INC/OK]

keys or rotating the [DATA] encoder.

Adjust the value of the knob

Adjust the value of the fader

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Assigning a name

The PM1D system allows you to assign names (long name, short name) to individual channels, and to assign titles to

scenes and libraries. For example, the screen shown below is the LIBRARY STORE popup window in which you can

name and store a library.

Characters can be input in this screen in the following ways.

• LIBRARY STORE popup window

1. Use the text palette (or the keyboard) to input char-

acters.

When you click the text palette, the corresponding

character/symbol/numeral will be input to the text

input box, and the highlighted area will move to the

right.

2. Input the remaining characters in the same way.

Var ious buttons within the text palette can be used

while entering text.

These buttons have the following functions.

• INS button..........Insert a space (blank) at the

highlighted area. The same result

will occur if you press the Insert

key of the keyboard.

• DEL button........ Delete the highlighted character.

The same result will occur if you

press the Delete key of the key-

board.

• CLEAR button... Erase all characters that had been

input in the text box.

Chapter 2. The user interfaces of the CS1D

• √ ® buttons.......Move the highlighted area to left

or right.

• PASTE button ....The text string that had been

copied to the buffer by the COPY

button will be pasted.

• COPY button .....The speciﬁed text string will be

copied from the text box into the

buffer.

•

CAPS LOCK button

Switch between uppercase and

lowercase alphabetical charac-

ters. When this button is on,

uppercase characters can be

input.

3. When you have input the name, click the STORE

button.

The name that you input will be ﬁnalized, and saved

in the library.

Hint

The same type of screen will be displayed in the IN

PATCH/OUT PATCH function NAME screen where

you assign a name (long name, short name) to each

channel, and the basic operation is the same.

The number of characters that can be used will

depend on the item that you are attempting to save.

It is not possible to insert characters or move the

highlighted portion in excess of the maximum

length for each text string.

Hint

If you connect the keyboard of a personal computer,

you can input text from the keyboard.

It is not possible to paste into the ﬁle name ﬁeld of

the FILE SAVE popup window.

Chapter 3. Audio connections and patching

This chapter explains how to connect input/output devices such as mics and speaker systems to the input/output units

and to the CS1D console, and patch them to input channels and output channels.

The “CS1D Operation Manual (Basic Operation)” assumes that the components of the PM1D system are connected

appropriately, and that all components are operating correctly. For details on connecting the components of the

PM1D system and checking their operation, refer to the “CS1D Operation Manual (Start-up).”

Audio connections

This section explains how to make audio connections for the input/output units and the console.

Audio connections for an analog input unit

Two types of input card can be installed in the AI8 analog input unit: the LMY2-ML mic/line input card and the LMY4-

AD AD card. The two cards differ in speciﬁcations and number of channels.

• Mic/line input card (LMY2-ML)

The LMY2-ML provides two (A and B) XLR-3-31

(balanced) input jacks for each of input channels 1

and 2. However, only one jack (A or B) at a time can

be used for each channel. (You can switch between A

and B in the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block

or in the display.)

• LMY2-ML connection

Sources ranging from mics to line level devices can

be connected to these jacks.

The pin wiring is as follows.

• Input jack wiring

Hint

If you wish to supply +48 V phantom power to the

connected device, turn on the PHANTOM MASTER

switch (located on the front panel of the AI8), and

also turn on the [+48V] switch for the corresponding

input channel (→p.46).

If different sets of audio sources (that you will not

use simultaneously) are connected to LMY2-ML

jacks 1A and 1B, and to 2A and 2B, they can share

input channels of different settings simply by switch-

ing between A and B on the CS1D console.

INPUT UNIT NO.

PHANTOM MASTER

OFF

+48V

POWER

ON/ OFF

12345678

ANALOG INPUT BOX

ANALOG IN

CH2B

SIGNAL

MIC/LINE INPUT CARD

MODEL LMY2-ML

SIGNAL

CH2A CH1B CH1A

MIC/Line-Eingangsplatine

(LMY2-ML)

Synthesizer

Mic

AI8 analog input unit

Male XLR plug

1 (ground)

3 (cold)

2 (hot)

Chapter 3. Audio connections and patching

• AD card (LMY4-AD)

The LMY4-AD provides four channels of XLR-3-31

(balanced) input jacks that can be used simulta-

neously.

• LMY4-AD connections

The pin wiring is as follows.

• Input jack wiring

INPUT UNIT NO.

PHANTOM MASTER

OFF

+48V

POWER

ON/ OFF

12345678

ANALOG INPUT BOX

ANALOG IN

CH4

SIGNAL

AD CARD

MODEL LMY4-AD

SIGNAL

CH3 CH2 CH1

AD-Platine (LMY4-AD)

Synthesizer

Rhythm

machine

AI8 analog input unit

Male XLR plug

1 (ground)

3 (cold)

2 (hot)

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Audio connections for an analog output unit

An LMY4-DA DA card installed in the AO8 analog output unit provides four channels of XLR-3-32 (balanced) output

jacks.

• LMY4-DA connections

The pin wiring is as follows.

• Output jack wiring

1234567

OUTPUT UNIT NO.

INPUT SELECTOR

POWER

ON/ OFF

ANALOG OUTPUT BOX

LMY4-DA DA-Platine

ANALOG OUT

DA CARD

MODEL LMY4-DA

SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL

CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1

Speaker system

AO8 analog output unit

Female XLR plug

1 (ground)

3 (cold)

2 (hot)

Chapter 3. Audio connections and patching

Audio connections for a digital input/output unit

The DIO8 digital input/output unit can accommodate up to eight digital I/O cards or analog I/O cards, according to

your system. The following diagrams show examples of connecting the DIO8 to digital recorders in ADAT, Tascam, and

AES/EBU formats.

• Connecting an ADAT format digital device

• Connecting a Tascam format digital device

• Connecting an AES/EBU format digital device

• When connecting a digital device via a digital I/O

card installed in the DIO8, the PM1D system and the

digital device must be synchronized to the same

word clock. (If they are not synchronized, the input/

output signal of that device may be muted, or may

produce click noise.)

• For details on the settings required to use a digital

device as a slave, refer to the manual for that device.

• When using an MY8-AT card to handle ADAT for-

mat signals, synchronization may tend to be lost eas-

ily, depending on the device that is connected. For

more reliable synchronization, we recommend that

the word clock for the combination of digital audio

equipment you are using be taken from other than

the ADAT format connector.

I/O UNIT ID

PORT B SELECTOR

5-8

1-4

POWER

ON/ OFF

DIGITAL I/O CARD

MODEL MY8-AT

OUTIN

Digital-E/A-Platinen MY8-AT

ADAT

DIGITAL OUTDIGITAL IN

DIO8 digital input/output unit

ADAT

I/O UNIT ID

PORT B SELECTOR

5-8

1-4

POWER

ON/ OFF

WORDCLOCK IN

8-TRACK DIGITAL

DIGITAL I/O

DIGITAL I/O CARD

MODEL MY8-TD

Tascam Digital Audio

Interface (TDIF-1)

WORD CLOCK OUT

Digital-E/A-Platinen MY8-TD

Tascam

DIO8 digital input/output unit

I/O UNIT ID

PORT B SELECTOR

5-8

1-4

POWER

ON/ OFF

Digital-E/A-Platinen MY8-AE

DIGITAL I/O CARD

MODEL MY8-AE

AES/EBU

DAT

00.00.00.00

AES/EBU

OUT

Digital audio workstation

DIO8 digital input/output unit

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Audio connections for the console

In the PM1D system, most of the signal processing is performed in the input/output units and in the engine, and the

console simply controls their operation. However as exceptions, the CS1D also has the following input/output jacks.

• 2-TRACK IN DIGITAL AES/EBU jacks (1–6)

These are AES/EBU (XLR-3-31) jacks for inputting

AES/EBU format digital sources from an external

device such as a CD player or DAT recorder.

• 2-TRACK IN DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks (1–2 only)

These are coaxial (RCA phono) jacks for inputting

consumer format (IEC60958) digital sources from an

external device such as a CD player or DAT recorder.

• 2-TRACK IN ANALOG L/R jacks (1–2)

These are XLR-3-31 (balanced) input jacks for input-

ting stereo analog signals from an external device.

For 2-TRACK IN DIGITAL AES/EBU jacks 1/2 and

2-TRACK IN DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks 1/2, only

one type of jack can be used simultaneously. The

type of jack that will be used can be selected in the

display (MON/CUE function 2TR IN screen).

• Audio connections for the console 1

• STEREO OUT DIGITAL AES/EBU jacks (A/B)

These are AES/EBU (XLR-3-32) jacks that digitally

output the STEREO A/B channel signals in AES/EBU

format.

• STEREO OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks (A/B)

These are COAXIAL (RCA phono) jacks that digi-

tally output the STEREO A/B channel signals in con-

sumer format (IEC60958).

• MONITOR OUT ANALOG jacks (A/B)

These are XLR-3-32 (balanced) jacks that output the

monitor A/B signals.

• CUE OUT ANALOG jacks (A/B)

These are XLR-3-32 (balanced) jacks that output the

cue signals.

• Audio connections for the console 2

DAT

00.00.00.00

AES

/EBU

COAXIAL

STEREO OUT

DIGITAL

AES

/EBU

COAXIAL

AES

/EBU

AES

/EBU

AES

/EBU

AES

/EBU

2-TRACK IN DIGITAL

AES

/EBU

COAXIAL

AES

/EBU

COAXIAL

DIGITAL OUTDIGITAL IN

DAT recorder

MONITOR OUT

ANALOG

TALKBACK IN 2

CUE OUT

ANALOG

2-TRACK IN

ANALOG

ANALOG OUT

Monitor system

CD player

Cue system

Chapter 3. Audio connections and patching

• TALKBACK IN 1 jack (top panel)

• TALKBACK IN 2 jack (rear panel)

These are XLR-3-31 (balanced) jacks for connecting

talkback mics. These two jacks can be used simulta-

neously.

• Audio connections for the console 3

TALKBACK IN 2

CS1D top

panel

CS1D rear

panel

Talkback mic

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Patching

Simply connecting an external device to an input/output unit does not cause the signal to be input to (or output from)

the engine. In order to transfer signals to and from the engine, you must assign (patch) each connector of the input/out-

put unit to a channel of the PM1D system.

Hint

As exceptions, patching is not necessary for the output jacks of the CS1D console itself (the STEREO OUT DIGITAL

AES/EBU, STEREO OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL, MONITOR OUT ANALOG, and CUE OUT ANALOG jacks).

Input channel patching

Here’s how to patch an input unit to an input channel, and assign a name.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

INPUT [PATCH] switch several times to access the

following screen.

This is the INPUT PATCH screen, in

which you can patch the various

input jacks and the return signals

from the internal effects to the

desired input channel (monaural/

stereo).

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

INPUT [PATCH] switch

Chapter 3. Audio connections and patching

2. Use the horizontal scroll bar to access the patch

source input unit.

The horizontal axis of the screen shows the input

unit ID number/card slot number/input jack channel

number. To view a unit/card/input jack that is not

currently visible, use the horizontal scroll bar.

Hint

By clicking the / buttons you can scroll the

display by units. By clicking the / buttons you

can scroll the display by slots.

3. Use the vertical scroll bar to access the patch desti-

nation input channel.

The vertical axis of the screen shows the patch desti-

nation input channel 1–96 (monaural) or the ST IN

channel 1–8 (stereo). To view a portion that is not

currently visible, use the vertical scroll bar.

4. Click the grid where the patch source and patch

destination intersect.

To patch an input jack to an input channel, click the

grid where the patch source and patch destination

intersect. Grids that are patched will be indicated by

a “●” symbol. (If you click the same grid once again,

the patch will be defeated and the “●” symbol will

disappear.)

• An example where an input jack is patched to

input channel 1

5. In the same way, patch other units/cards/input

jacks to input channels.

Although it is possible to patch a single input jack

to multiple input channels, it is not possible to

patch multiple input jacks to a single input channel.

6. To assign a name to an input channel, click the but-

ton located at the right of the channel number.

A short name (maximum 4 characters) and a long

name (maximum 8 characters) can be assigned to

each input channel.

When you click the button located at the right of the

channel number, a NAME EDIT popup window will

appear in which you can input the name.

• NAME EDIT popup window

7. In the NAME EDIT popup window, move the cur-

sor to the SHORT or LONG text input box, and

input the desired name. (For the procedure refer to

p.20.)

Hint

By clicking the ▲/▼ buttons located between the

two text input boxes, you can copy the short name to

the ﬁrst four characters of the long name (or vice

versa).

8. When you have input the name, click the OK button.

You will return to the INPUT PATCH screen, and the

name will be displayed at the right of the channel

number.

Input channel number

From above, this indicates the

type and number of input unit/

card slot number/input jack

channel number/number of

input channels patched to that

jack.

Input channel name Click this grid to display a “●” symbol to patch the desired

input jack and input channel.

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Hint

The short name you assign to each channel will be

displayed in various screens of the display and in the

[NAME] indicator of the CS1D console.

9. As necessary, assign names to other channels as

well.

Hint

If you wish to assign names to numerous channels at

once, it is convenient to use the IN PATCH function

NAME screen. (“CS1D Reference Manual (Soft-

ware)” →p.128)

Output channel patching

Here’s how to patch an output unit to an output channel (MIX channel, MATRIX channel, STEREO A/B channel) and

assign a name. The procedure is essentially the same as input channel patching.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

OUTPUT [PATCH] switch several times to access

the following screen.

This is the OUTPUT PATCH screen,

in which you can patch the various

output channels to the desired out-

put jacks or to the inputs of the

internal effects.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

OUTPUT [PATCH] switch

Chapter 3. Audio connections and patching

2. Use the vertical scroll bar to access the patch source

output channel.

The vertical axis of the screen shows the patch source

MIX channel (MIX 1–48), MATRIX channel (MTRX

1–24), or STEREO A/B channel (ST AL/AR, ST BL/

BR). To view a portion that is not currently visible,

use the vertical scroll bar.

3. Use the horizontal scroll bar to access the patch

destination output unit.

The horizontal axis of the screen shows the output

unit ID number/card slot number/input jack channel

number. To view a unit/card/input jack that is not

currently visible, use the horizontal scroll bar.

Hint

By clicking the / buttons you can scroll the

display by units. By clicking the / buttons you

can scroll the display by slots.

4. Click the grid where the patch source and patch

destination intersect.

5. In the same way, patch other units/cards/output

jacks to output channels.

Although it is possible to patch a single output

channel to multiple output jacks, it is not possible

to patch multiple output channels to a single out-

put jack.

6. To assign a name to an output channel, click the

button located at the right of the channel number.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear in

which you can input the name.

7. In the NAME EDIT popup window, move the cur-

sor to the SHORT or LONG text input box, and

input the desired name. (For the procedure refer to

p.20.)

8. When you have input the name, click the STORE

button.

You will return to the OUTPUT PATCH screen, and

the name will be displayed at the right of the channel

number.

Hint

The short name you assign to each channel will be

displayed in various screens of the display and in the

[NAME] indicator of the CS1D console.

9. As necessary, assign names to other channels as

well.

Hint

If you wish to assign names to numerous output

channels at once, it is convenient to use the OUT

PATCH function NAME screen. (“CS1D Reference

Manual (Software)” →p.83)

From above, this indicates

the type and number of

output unit/card slot num-

ber/output jack channel

number.

To patch the desired output jack and output channel, click

this grid to display a “●” symbol.

Output channel name

Output channel type

and number

This indicates the number of output jacks that are

patched to the output channel.

Chapter 4. Basic operation for input channels

This chapter explains basic operation for input channels/ST IN channels.

About input channels

Blocks used to control input channels

On the PM1D system, you can use 96 {48} monaural input channels and 8 {4} stereo ST IN channels. A signal patched to

one of these input channels passes through the internal four-band EQ/compressor/gate, and is sent to the STEREO bus

or MIX bus.

The following blocks on the CS1D console are used to control input channels.

• INPUT blocks 1–4

These blocks adjust the pan and level etc. of monau-

ral input channels 1–96 {1–48} and send them to the

STEREO bus or MIX bus. Each block contains 12

channels of modules.

• ST IN block

This block adjusts the pan and level etc. of the stereo

ST IN channels 1–8 {1–4} and send them to the STE-

REO bus or MIX bus.

• SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block

This block controls most of the mix parameters for

the selected input channel or for the L or R channel

of a ST IN channel, such as head amp settings, EQ/

compressor/gate settings, and send to the STEREO

bus or MIX bus.

INPUT block 2

INPUT block 1 INPUT block 3

INPUT block 4

ST IN block

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block

Chapter 4. Basic operation for input channels

Changing the channel assignments

When the PM1D system is in its default state, INPUT blocks 1–4 are assigned input channels 1–12, 13–24, 25–36, and

37–48 respectively. Similarly, ST IN channels 1–4 are assigned to the ST IN block.

However, you can change these assignments by using the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block MODULE [FLIP] switch

and the MASTER block GLOBAL LAYER [1-48]/[49-96] switches, as described below. {On the 48 channel model, the

GLOBAL LAYER [49-96] switch cannot be selected. Only the GLOBAL LAYER [1-48] switch is valid.}

• Using the MODULE [FLIP] switch to change the

channel assignments

• Using the GLOBAL LAYER [1-48]/[49-96] switches

to change the channel assignments (96 channel

model only)

If operating the INPUT block/ST IN block does not

produce the expected result, make sure that the

above switches are set appropriately.

FLIP

CH 13-24

CH 1-12

CH 37-48

CH 25-3612

CH 1-12

CH 13-24

CH 25-36

CH 37-48

INPUT block 2

INPUT

block 1

INPUT

block 3

INPUT block 4

ST IN block

CH 13-24

CH 1-12

CH 37-48

CH 25-3612

GLOBAL LAYER

CH 61-72

CH 49-60

CH 85-96

CH 73-84

INPUT block 2

INPUT

block 1

INPUT

block 3

INPUT block 4

ST IN block

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Basic operation INPUT blocks/ST IN block

This section explains basic input channel operation using the INPUT blocks/ST IN block.

Since multiple channels are controlled simultaneously in the INPUT blocks/ST IN block, the number of controlla-

ble parameters is limited to the necessary minimum. This means that there are some parameters that cannot be con-

trolled unless you use the display or the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block.

INPUT block/ST IN block controls and functions

This section explains the various controls and functions of the INPUT block and ST IN block.

INPUT block

MIX

100

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

DCA

-68

THR

COMP

THR

CLIP

GATE

+10

SEL

INPUT [MIX] encoder and LEDs

This encoder sets the send level of the signal that is

sent from the input channel to a VARI type MIX bus.

The peripheral LEDs will light to indicate the approxi-

mate current value.

INPUT MIX [ON] LED

This LED indicates the on/off status of the signal that

is sent from the input channel to the MIX bus.

INPUT [PAN] encoder and LEDs

This encoder sets the stereo position of the signal that is

sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus. The

approximate current value is shown by the perimeter LEDs.

INPUT [TO ST] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent from

that input channel to the STEREO bus.

INPUT [GAIN] encoder and LEDs

This encoder adjusts the input sensitivity of the head

amp for an input channel to which a mic/line input card

(LMY2-ML) has been patched. The peripheral LEDs

will light to indicate the approximate current value.

INPUT [CLIP] LED

This LED will light when the input signal clips for that

input channel.

INPUT [+48V]/[INS]/[ø] LEDs

These respectively indicate the on/off status of

phantom power, insertion, and phase.

INPUT [A]/[B] LEDs

For an input channel to which a mic/line input card

(LMY2-ML) has been patched, these indicate

whether input jack A or B is enabled.

COMP [+]/[THR]/[–] LEDs

These LEDs show the operating status of the inter-

nal compressor. For details on the meaning of each

LED, refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Software).”

GATE [+]/[THR]/[–] LEDs

These LEDs show the operating status of the inter-

nal noise gate. For details on the meaning of each

LED, refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Software).”

INPUT [NAME] indicator

This shows the short name of the input channel.

Meter LEDs

This is a six-point LED meter that indicates the

input level of the input channel.

INPUT [SEL] switch and LED

This switch selects the input channel that will be con-

trolled in the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block and

in the display.

INPUT [ON] switch and LED

This turns the input channel on/off. If this switch is

turned off, no signal will be sent from this input chan-

nel to the STEREO bus or MIX buses.

INPUT fader

This is a 100 mm fader that adjusts the input level

of the input channel.

Chapter 4. Basic operation for input channels

ST IN block

MIX

100

PAN

L CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

DCA

-68

COMP

CLIP

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

GATE

+10

LSTATUS R

SEL

TO ST

THR

ST IN STATUS [L]/[R] LEDs

These LEDs indicate which channel (L or R) is cur-

rently displayed by this ST IN channel module.

ST IN [MIX] encoder and LEDs

This encoder sets the send level of the signal that is

sent from the ST IN channel to a VARI type MIX bus.

The peripheral LEDs will light to indicate the approxi-

mate current value.

ST IN MIX [ON] LED

This LED indicates the on/off status of the signal that is

sent from the ST IN channel to the MIX bus.

ST IN [PAN] encoder and LEDs

This encoder sets the stereo position of the signal that is sent

from the ST IN channel to the STEREO bus. The approximate

current value is shown by the

perimeter

LEDs.

ST IN [TO ST] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent from

the ST IN channel to the STEREO bus.

ST IN [GAIN] encoder and LEDs

This encoder adjusts the input sensitivity of the head

amp for a ST IN channel to which a mic/line input card

(LMY2-ML) has been patched. The peripheral LEDs

will light to indicate the approximate current value.

ST IN [CLIP] LED

This LED will light when the input signal clips for that

ST IN channel.

ST IN [+48V]/[INS]/[ø] LEDs

These respectively indicate the on/off status of

phantom power, insertion, and phase.

ST IN [A]/[B] LEDs

For a ST IN channel to which a mic/line input card

(LMY2-ML) has been patched, these indicate

whether input jack A or B is enabled.

COMP [+]/[THR]/[–] LEDs

These LEDs show the operating status of the inter-

nal compressor. For details on the meaning of each

LED, refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Software).”

GATE [+]/[THR]/[–] LEDs

These LEDs show the operating status of the inter-

nal noise gate. For details on the meaning of each

LED, refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Software).”

ST IN [NAME] indicator

This shows the short name of the ST IN channel.

Meter LEDs

These are six-point LED meters that independently

indicate the L and R input levels of the ST IN chan-

nel.

ST IN SEL [L]/[R] switches and LEDs

These switches select the channel (L or R of the corre-

sponding ST IN channel) that will be controlled in the

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block and in the display.

For a ST IN channel, the L/R channel parame-

ters will generally operate in tandem. For this

reason, using the ST IN SEL [L]/[R] switches to

select either L or R and moving the encoders

and fader of the ST IN block will cause the other

channel (R or L) to change accordingly.

However, head amp parameters and pan/delay

related parameters must be set independently.

ST IN [ON] switch and LED

This turns the ST IN channel on/off. If this switch is

turned off, no signal will be sent from this ST IN chan-

nel to the STEREO bus or MIX buses.

ST IN fader

This is a 100 mm fader that adjusts the input level

of the ST IN channel.

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Head amp settings

For channels to which a mic/line amp card (LMY2-ML) has been patched, you must complete various settings for the

head amp (e.g., select input jacks A/B, turn phantom power on/off) before you continue.

Hint

This section explains the procedure for an input channel. If you are using a ST IN channel, head amp settings must be

made separately for L and R. Use the ST IN SEL [L]/[R] switches to select each channel and make settings.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

INPUT [HA/INSERT] switch several times to access

one of the following screens.

• 1-24/25-48/49-72/73-96

In these screens you can make settings for input

cards that have been patched to input channels 1–

24/25–48/49–72/73–96 respectively. {On the 48

channel model, the 49-72 and 73-96 screens are

not valid.}

• ST IN 1–8

In this screen you can make settings for input cards

that have been patched to ST IN channels 1–8 {1–4}.

• 1–24 screen (IN HA/INSERT function)

Within the IN HA/INSERT function screen, the

“INS” tab is a screen where you can make settings

for the input cards patched to an Insert In point.

Please do not confuse this with the screens listed

above.

The following parameters will be displayed for a

channel to which an LMY2-ML mic/line input card

has been patched.

• Display for a channel to which an LMY2-ML has

been patched

2. Use the A/B button in the screen to select the input

jack (A/B) of the card that each channel will use.

3. Use the ø and +48V buttons in the screen to switch

the phase and phantom power on/off for each chan-

nel.

If the ø button is turned on, the phase of the input

signal will be reversed. If the +48V button is turned

on, +48V phantom power will be supplied to the cor-

responding input jack.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

INPUT [HA/INSERT] switch

Level meter

This level meter indicates the input level.

GAIN GANG

This button links the head amp gain of adjacent input

channels in the screen (or of the L and R of a ST IN

channel).

A/B LINK

This button links the A/B input jack selection

for adjacent input channels in the screen (or

for the L and R of a ST IN channel).

A/B

These buttons

switch between

input jacks A

and B of the

mic/line input

card.

GAIN

This knob adjusts the input sensitivity of

the head amp.

ø (phase)

This button switches the input signal

between normal and reversed phase.

+48V

This is an on/off button for the phantom power of the

mic/line input card.

Chapter 4. Basic operation for input channels

If you wish to use phantom power, you must also

turn on the +48V switch located on the front panel

of the AI8 input unit. If this switch is off, no phan-

tom power will be supplied to the cards installed in

that unit.

4. While watching the level meter, drag the on-screen

GAIN knob to adjust the input sensitivity of the

channel.

The GAIN knob adjusts the input sensitivity of the

head amp. The supported range of levels is 10 dB —

–68 dB, and the current value is shown in the numer-

ical box located immediately below.

Hint

As an alternative to the on-screen knob, you can also

adjust the input sensitivity using the INPUT [GAIN]

encoder of the INPUT block. In this case, the periph-

eral LEDs around the encoder will indicate the

approximate value.

The PAD will be internally switched on or off when

the gain of the LMY4-MLF card (including the AI8-

ML8F unit) internal head amp is adjusted between

–8 dB and –7 dB. Keep in mind that noise may be

generated if there is a difference between the Hot

and Cold output impedance of the external device

connected to the card when using phantom power.

5. If you want the gain or input jack A/B selection to

be linked between adjacent input channels in the

screen, turn on the GAIN GANG button and A/B

LINK button for each channel.

If the GAIN GANG button is on, gain settings will be

linked while preserving the level difference between

channels. If the A/B LINK button is on, the A/B input

jack selection will be linked. Be aware that even if the

A/B LINK button is on, link will not be valid until

the A/B button is switched for one of the channels.

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Sending a signal from an input channel to a STEREO bus

Here’s how to use the INPUT block/ST IN block to send an input channel signal to a STEREO bus.

Hint

The procedure described here uses the example of an input channel, but virtually the same procedure applies to ST

IN channels as well.

[Procedure]

1. Make sure that an input source is correctly patched

to the input channel, and that the head amp is set

appropriately.

2. In the INPUT block, turn on the INPUT [ON]

switch.

3. Turn on the INPUT [TO ST] switch.

4. Raise the INPUT fader.

The input channel signal will now be sent to the

STEREO buses.

Hint

If the PM1D system is in its initial state, the STEREO

A/STEREO B section of the meter bridge block will

show the level of the signals sent to the STEREO bus

(the pre-attenuator level of STEREO A/B channels).

5. As necessary, use the INPUT [PAN] encoder to

adjust the panning of the signal.

The peripheral LEDs will indicate the approximate

current value. If the ▲ LED is lit, this indicates that

the signal is panned to the center.

When sending signals from a ST IN channel to the

STEREO bus, use the ST IN SEL [L]/[R] switches to

select each channel separately, and set the ST IN

[PAN] encoder separately for L and R.

6. In the STEREO OUTPUT block, turn on the STE-

REO A [ON] or STEREO B [ON] switch.

The STEREO OUTPUT block is where signals sent to

the STEREO bus are output via the STEREO A/B

channels to an output unit.

7. In the STEREO OUTPUT block, raise the STEREO

A or STEREO B fader.

The signal sent from the input channel to the STE-

REO bus will be output from the output jack(s)

patched to the STEREO A or STEREO B channel.

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

INS

SEL

TO MTRX

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

INS

SEL

MONO

ON ON

STEREO OUTPUT block

STEREO A

[ON] switch

STEREO B

[ON] switch

STEREO A/

STEREO B

faders

Chapter 4. Basic operation for input channels

Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX bus

Here’s how to use the INPUT block/ST IN block to send an input channel signal to a MIX bus.

Hint

If the send destination is a MIX bus, the type of MIX bus (FIX or VARI) that you wish to use must ﬁrst be selected in

the display. Then you can set the send level for each channel. MIX buses set to FIX type can be used as group buses,

and MIX buses set to VARI type can be used as AUX buses.

The procedure described here uses the example of an input channel, but the procedure is virtually identical for a ST

IN channel as well.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

INPUT [PAN/ROUTING] switch several times to

access the following CH to MIX screen.

• CH to MIX screen (PAN/ROUTING function)

In the CH to MIX screen you can make settings for

the signal that is sent from an input channel/ST IN

channel to the MIX bus.

The vertical column in the upper part of the screen

shows the send destination MIX bus, and the hori-

zontal rows show the send source input channel/ST

IN channel.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

INPUT [PAN/ROUTING] switch

Set/defeat pairing for consecutive odd →

even-numbered MIX buses.

Switch between FIX/VARI types for consec-

utive odd → even-numbered MIX buses.

Switch the signal sent from the input chan-

nel/ST IN channel (vertical column) to the

MIX bus on/off and adjust its send level, etc.

Input channel/ST IN channel (send source)

MIX bus (send destination)

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

2. Use the on-screen FIX/VARI buttons to select either

FIX type or VARI type for adjacent odd-numbered

→ even-numbered MIX buses.

When you switch between FIX type and VARI type,

the screen and signal ﬂow will change as follows.

• FIX type MIX buses

• VARI type MIX buses

ON/OFF buttons

These are on/off switches for the signal that is sent from the

input channel/ST IN channel to each MIX bus.

Input

channel 1

→MIX bus 1

Input

channel 1

→MIX bus 2

Input

channel 2

→MIX bus 1

Input

channel 2

→MIX bus 2

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 1

PAN

MIX1 (FIX)

MIX2 (FIX)

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 2

PAN

MIX1 (FIX)

MIX2 (FIX)

ON/OFF buttons

These are on/off

switches for the sig-

nal that is sent from

the input channel/

ST IN channel to

each MIX bus.

PRE/POST buttons

These buttons select

either PRE or POST

(post fader) as the send

point from which the

signal will be sent from

the input channel/ST IN

channel to each MIX

bus. If PRE is selected,

you can also use the

PRE FADER/PRE EQ

buttons to select either

pre-fader or pre-EQ.

LEVEL knobs

These knobs

adjust the send

level of the signal

that is sent from

the input channel/

ST IN channel to

each MIX bus.

Input

channel 1

→MIX bus 1

Input

channel 1

→MIX bus 2

Input

channel 2

→MIX bus 1

Input

channel 2

→MIX bus 2

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 1

PAN

MIX1 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX2 (VARI)

LEVEL

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 2

PAN

MIX1 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX2 (VARI)

LEVEL

Chapter 4. Basic operation for input channels

3. Use the on-screen ON/OFF buttons to switch the

signal sent from each input channel to the MIX bus

on/off.

In the case of a FIX type MIX bus, this is all you need

to do for the nominal-level signal of each channel to

be sent to the corresponding MIX bus.

Hint

The signal that is sent from each input channel to the

MIX bus cannot be switched on/off by operations in

the INPUT block/ST IN block.

If Recall Safe is speciﬁed for only one of two adja-

cent odd-numbered→even-numbered MIX chan-

nels, it is possible that the VARI/FIX settings may

differ between the odd-numbered and even-num-

bered channels after a scene is recalled. In such

cases, the settings after the recall will take priority.

4. Use the on-screen PRE/POST buttons to select the

location (PRE/POST) from which the signal of each

input channel will be sent to the VARI type MIX

bus.

If POST is selected, the post-fader signal will be sent.

If PRE is selected, you can also use the buttons of the

VARI & FIX section (located at the bottom of the

screen) to select either PRE FADER or PRE EQ.

• VARI & FIX section

Hint

In addition, the CH to MIX screen allows you to

make various settings, such as to specify pairing for

adjacent odd-numbered → even-numbered MIX

buses, and to cause the [PAN] encoder of the input

channel be reﬂected for the MIX bus as well. For

details refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Software).”

5. In the INPUT block MIX SEND section, use the [▼/

DEC]/[▲/INC] switches to select a MIX bus that

you set to the VARI type.

If you wish to use the INPUT block to adjust the

send level to a VARI type MIX bus, you must ﬁrst use

the MIX SEND section to select the MIX bus that

will be affected.

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

• INPUT block MIX SEND section

Hint

As alternate ways to select the MIX bus that your

operations will affect, you can also use the MIX OUT

block MIX [SEL] switch, or the SELECTED OUT-

PUT CHANNEL block CHANNEL SELECT [▼/

DEC]/[▲/INC] switches. Since a ST IN channel does

not have a section corresponding to the MIX SEND

section, you can use these methods.

When the PM1D system is in its initial state, selecting

a MIX bus in one INPUT block will cause this selec-

tion to be reﬂected for the other INPUT blocks as

well.

However, MIX buses can be selected independently

for INPUT blocks whose MIX SEND [LOCAL]

switch is turned on.

6. Use the INPUT [MIX] encoder of the input channel

to adjust the send level of the signal that is sent

from that channel to the desired MIX bus.

The approximate current value is indicated by the

peripheral LEDs around the encoder. If the LED at

the ® mark is lit, the level is nominal (0 dB).

If a FIX type MIX bus is selected, the INPUT [MIX]

encoder has no effect, and only the nominal level

LED will be lit.

Hint

When the PM1D system is in its initial state, the MIX

OUT 1–24 and MIX OUT 25–48 sections of the

meter bridge block will indicate the level of the sig-

nals sent to each MIX bus (the pre-attenuator level of

the MIX channel).

It is also possible to temporarily exchange the func-

tions of the [MIX] encoders and faders of the input

channel/ST IN channels, so that you can use the fad-

ers to set the send levels. For details refer to “CS1D

Reference Manual (Software).”

7. In the MIX OUTPUT block, turn on the MIX [ON]

switch for the corresponding MIX channel.

The MIX OUTPUT block is where the signals sent to

each MIX bus are sent via the MIX channel to the

output unit.

8. In the MIX OUTPUT block, raise the MIX [LEVEL]

encoder for the appropriate MIX channel.

The signal sent from the input channel to the MIX

bus will be output from the output unit patched to

the corresponding MIX channel.

FIX

LOCAL

VARI

MIX SEND

DEC INC

MIX SEND [FIX]/[VARI] LEDs

These LEDs indicate the type of the currently selected MIX bus.

MIX SEND [NAME] indicator

MIX SEND [NUMBER] indicator

This displays the short name and number of the

currently selected MIX bus.

MIX SEND [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC] switch

Select one of MIX buses 1–48 to control.

MIX SEND [LOCAL] switch and LED

This speciﬁes whether the MIX bus

number currently selected in the

INPUT block will be linked with other

INPUT blocks ([LOCAL] switch = off) or

can be switched independently of other

INPUT blocks ([LOCAL] switch = on).

PAIR

ON ON

MIX [LEVEL]

encoder

MIX OUTPUT block

MIX [ON]

switch

Chapter 4. Basic operation for input channels

Pairing settings

Monaural input channels can be paired so that their principal parameters are linked.

[Procedure]

1. For adjacent odd-numbered → even-numbered

input channels, hold down one of the [SEL]

switches and press the other [SEL] switch.

The direction in which the channel parameters are

copied will depend on the order in which the [SEL]

switches are pressed. When you create a pair, the

parameters of the channel you pressed ﬁrst will be

copied to the channel that you pressed next, and will

subsequently be linked.

For example if you pair CH 1 and CH 2, holding

down the CH 1 [SEL] switch and then the CH 2

[SEL] switch will cause the state of CH 1 to be copied

to CH 2. For details on the parameters that are cop-

ied/linked when paired, refer to “CS1D Reference

Manual (Appendices)” (→p.45). If you wish to reset

the parameters, do so from the screen.

2. To cancel pairing, hold down the [SEL] switch of

one of the paired channels and press the [SEL]

switch for the other channel.

Hint

It is also possible to set/cancel pairing within the dis-

play.

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Basic operation in the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block

Here we will explain how to control an input channel using the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block. The SELECTED

INPUT CHANNEL block controls only the currently selected channel. In exchange for being limited to only one chan-

nel, you can manually control virtually all of the mix parameters for the input channel, from head amp settings to EQ/

compressor/gate settings, and sends to the STEREO bus and MIX buses.

Controls and functions of the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block

Here we will provide a brief explanation of the controls and functions within the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block.

PAIR

NOISE GATE

COMPRESSOR

MIX SEND section

Make on/off settings

and adjust the send lev-

els for the signals that

are sent from the cur-

rently selected channel

to MIX buses 1–48.

+48/ø/INSERT section

Switch phantom power

on/off (valid only for

channels that are

patched to an LMY2-ML

mic/line input card),

switch the phase, and

turn insertion on/off.

DELAY section

Make settings for the

internal delay function.

INPUT section

Switch between input jacks A/B for channels to which an LMY2-ML mic/line

input card has been patched.

NOISE GATE section

Make settings for the

internal noise gate.

EQUALIZER section

Make settings for the

internal four-band EQ

(HIGH, HIGH MID,

LOW MID, LOW) and

the HPF.

COMPRESSOR section

Make settings for the

internal compressor.

Chapter 4. Basic operation for input channels

PAIR

EQ ON

EQUALIZER

STEREO

GAIN ATTENUATOR

DCA

SAFE

CHANNEL SELECT

MIX

CHFLIP

DEC INC

SHIFT

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL

PHONESPHONES

CHANNEL SELECT

section

Select/view the channel

that will be controlled by

the SELECTED INPUT

CHANNEL block.

GLOBAL CONTROL section

Exchange (ﬂip) faders and modules.

GAIN section

Adjust the input sensitivity

of the head amp for chan-

nels to which a mic/line

input card (LMY2-ML) has

been patched.

FADER section

Switch the currently selected channel on/off and adjust

its input level.

SAFE section

Temporarily exclude the

currently selected chan-

nel from scene recall

operations or mute

group operations.

ATTENUATOR

Attenuate the level of

the pre-EQ signal.

STEREO section

Switch the signal sent

from the currently

selected channel to the

STEREO bus on/off

and adjust its panning.

DCA section

Assign the currently

selected channel to the

desired DCA group(s).

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Head amp settings

Here’s how to use the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block to make head amp settings for an input channel to which a

mic/line input card (LMY2-ML) has been patched.

Hint

Even for ST IN channels or input channels that have been paired, head amp settings must be made independently.

Select each channel in turn, and make settings for it.

[Procedure]

1. Use the INPUT block [SEL] switches or the ST IN

block [L]/[R] switches to select the input channel

that you wish to control.

In order to use the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL

block, you must ﬁrst select the input channel (or ST

IN channel L/R) that you wish to control.

• INPUT block

• ST IN block

When you select a channel, the LEDs and indicators

of the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block will

show the settings of the various parameters for that

channel. The number and short name of that chan-

nel will be displayed in the CHANNEL SELECT sec-

tion by the [NAME]/[NUMBER] indicator.

[NAME] will not be displayed for channels that are

not patched to an input unit.

The number shown by the [NUMBER] indicator

corresponds to the channel as follows.

• 1–96 {1–48}........ Monaural input channels 1–96

{1–48}

• 1L, 1R ... 8L, 8R.. ST IN channels 1–8 {1–4} L or R

Hint

You can also use the CHANNEL SELECT [▼/DEC]/

[▲/INC] switches of the SELECTED INPUT

CHANNEL block to select the channel. For details

refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)”

(→p.34).

2. In the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block, use the

+48/ø/INSERT section to switch the phase and

phantom power on/off for the selected channel.

If the [+48V] switch is on, +48V phantom power will

be supplied to the corresponding input jack. If the

[ø] switch is on, the phase of the input signal will be

reversed.

• +48/ø/INSERT section

[+48V] or [ø] may not be operable, depending on

the type of input unit that is patched. The +48V

switch located on the front panel of the AI8 input

unit functions as the master phantom switch for the

entire unit. This means that if the master phantom

switch is off, phantom power cannot be used for

that unit.

3. In the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block, use the

INPUT section to select either input jack A or B of

the mic/line input card.

The switch LED for the currently selected input jack

(A/B) will light.

This may not be operable, depending on the type of

input unit that is patched.

THR

COMP

THR

GATE

SEL

[SEL] switch

L CLIP

SEL

COMP

GATE

SEL

THR

SEL [L]/[R] switch

CHANNEL SELECT

DEC INC

SHIFT

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL

block

[NAME]/[NUMBER]

indicator

INSERT+48V

+48V / / INSERT

Chapter 4. Basic operation for input channels

4. While watching the level meter in the fader section

of the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block, use the

GAIN section [GAIN] encoder to adjust the input

sensitivity of the channel.

The peripheral LEDs of the encoder will indicate the

approximate value.

This may not be operable, depending on the type of

input unit that is patched.

If you wish to link the gain or A/B input jack selec-

tion between odd-numbered

→

even-numbered

input channels, use the on-screen GAIN GANG

button or A/B LINK button located in the IN HA/

INSERT function screen (

→

p.36).

These operations cannot be performed in the

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block.

The PAD will be internally switched on or off when

the gain of the LMY4-MLF card (including the AI8-

ML8F unit) internal head amp is adjusted between

–8 dB and –7 dB. Keep in mind that noise may be

generated if there is a difference between the Hot

and Cold output impedance of the external device

connected to the card when using phantom power.

5. In the same way, make head amp settings for other

input channels as well.

Sending signals from an input channel to the STEREO bus

Here’s how to use the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block to send the signal of an input channel to the STEREO bus.

[Procedure]

1. Use the INPUT block [SEL] switches or the ST IN

block [L]/[R] switches to select the input channel

that you wish to control.

2. Turn on the [ON] switch located in the fader sec-

tion of the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block.

•

Fader section

3. Turn on the [TO ST] switch located in the STEREO

section of the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL

block.

•

STEREO section

Please be aware that if either the [ON] switch or the

[TO ST] switch is turned off, no signal will be sent

from that channel to the STEREO bus.

4. Raise the fader in the SELECTED INPUT CHAN-

NEL block.

Now the signal of the input channel will be sent to

the STEREO bus.

Hint

When the PM1D system is in its initial state, the

STEREO A/STEREO B section of the meter bridge

block will indicate the level of the signal that is sent

to the STEREO bus (i.e., the pre-attenuator level of

the STEREO A/B channel).

5. Use the STEREO section [PAN] encoder to adjust

the pan of the signal.

The peripheral LEDs will indicate the approximate

current value. When the LED at the

▲

mark is lit, the

signal is panned to the center.

Hint

Even for a ST IN channel or for input channels that are

paired, pan settings must be made independently. Select

each channel in turn, and make the setting for each.

[ON] switch

Fader

STEREO

[TO ST] switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

6. In the STEREO OUTPUT block, turn on the STE-

REO A [ON] or STEREO B [ON] switch.

7. In the STEREO OUTPUT block, raise the STEREO

A or STEREO B fader.

The signal sent from the input channel to the STE-

REO BUS will be output from the output jack that is

patched to the STEREO A or STEREO B channel.

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

INS

SEL

TO MTRX

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

INS

SEL

MONO

ON ON

STEREO OUTPUT block

STEREO A

[ON] switch

STEREO B

[ON] switch

STEREO A/

STEREO B

faders

Chapter 4. Basic operation for input channels

Sending signals from an input channel to a MIX bus

Here’s how to use the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block to send an input channel signal to a MIX bus.

By using the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block, you can simultaneously control the signals that are sent from a spe-

ciﬁc input channel to multiple MIX buses.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

INPUT [PAN/ROUTING] switch several times to

access the CH to MIX screen. For each of the MIX

buses arranged in odd-numbered → even-num-

bered pairs, select the type (FIX/VARI) (→p.40).

Hint

If necessary, you can use the CH to MIX screen to

pair adjacent odd-numbered → even-numbered

MIX buses. In this case, the on/off setting, send level,

and PRE/POST selection will be linked for the signals

sent from each channel to the paired MIX buses.

2. Use the INPUT block [SEL] switch or the ST IN

block SEL [L]/[R] switch to select the input channel

from which the signal will be sent.

3. Use the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block MIX

SEND LAYER [1-24]/[25-48] switches to select

either MIX buses 1–24 or MIX buses 25–48 as the

MIX buses that you wish to control.

In the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block MIX

SEND section, use the MIX SEND LAYER [1-24]/

[25-48] switches to select the MIX buses that you

wish to control.

4. Use the [ON] switches of the MIX SEND section to

turn the signal sent from the currently selected

channel to each MIX bus on or off.

• MIX SEND section

If the send destination MIX bus is a FIX type, this

step is sufﬁcient to send a nominal level from the

currently selected channel.

Hint

If you turn on the [FIXED MIX PAN] switch located

in the STEREO section of the SELECTED INPUT

CHANNEL block, the signal from after the [PAN]

encoder of that channel will be sent to the FIX type

MIX bus. This method is convenient when you want

the pan setting of the [PAN] encoder to be reﬂected

in the MIX bus as well.

• STEREO section

• Signal ﬂow when the [FIXED MIX PAN] switch is

off

• Signal ﬂow when the [FIXED MIX PAN] switch is

MIX SEND LAYER [1-24]

switch

When this switch is on, MIX

buses 1-24 will be controlled.

MIX SEND LAYER [25-48]

switch

When this switch is on, MIX

buses 25–48 will be controlled.

PAIR

MIX SEND [ON] switch

[PRE] switch

[LEVEL] encoder

STEREO

[FIXED MIX PAN] switch

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL

PAN

MIX1 (FIX)

MIX2 (FIX)

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL

PAN

MIX1 (FIX)

MIX2 (FIX)

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

5. Use the MIX SEND section [PRE] switches to select

the location (PRE/POST) from which the signal

will be sent to VARI type MIX buses.

If the PM1D system is in its initial state, the pre-fader

signal will be sent to MIX buses whose MIX SEND

[PRE] switch LED is lit, and the post-fader signal will

be sent to MIX buses for which this switch LED is

dark.

Hint

It is also possible to send the pre-EQ signal when the

[PRE] switch LED is lit. However, this setting cannot

be made in the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL

block. Make this setting in the PAN/ROUTING func-

tion CH to MIX screen (→p.41).

If the send destination MIX buses have been paired,

the MIX SEND [ON] switches and MIX SEND

[PRE] switches will be linked for adjacent odd-num-

bered → even-numbered MIX buses.

6. Use the [LEVEL] encoders of the MIX SEND sec-

tion to set the send level of the signals that are sent

to VARI type MIX buses.

Use the MIX SEND [LEVEL] encoders to set the level

of the signals that are sent from the currently selected

channel to VARI type MIX buses. The range is – ∞

dB – +10 dB, and the perimeter LEDs of the encoder

will indicate the approximate current value. When

the LED at the ® symbol is lit, the signal is at nomi-

nal level (0 dB).

• If a FIX type MIX bus is selected, the MIX SEND

[LEVEL] encoder will have no effect, and only the

nominal level LED will be lit.

• If FIX type MIX buses are paired, adjacent [ON]

switches at the left and right of each other in the MIX

SEND section will be linked.

• If VARI type MIX buses are paired, adjacent [ON]

switches and [PRE] switches at the left and right of

each other in the MIX SEND section will be linked.

Also, the left (odd-numbered) MIX SEND [LEVEL]

encoder will function as a MIX SEND [PAN]

encoder to adjust the pan of the signal sent to the two

MIX buses, and the right (even-numbered) MIX

SEND [LEVEL] encoder will function as the MIX

SEND [LEVEL] encoder for both MIX buses.

Hint

When the PM1D is in its initial state, the MIX OUT

1–24 and MIX OUT 25–48 sections of the meter

bridge block will show the levels of the signals sent to

each MIX bus (i.e., the pre-attenuator level of the

MIX channel).

7. In the MIX OUTPUT block, turn on the MIX [ON]

switch for the appropriate MIX channel.

8. In the MIX OUTPUT block, raise the MIX [LEVEL]

encoder for the appropriate MIX channel.

The signal that is sent from the input channel to the

MIX bus will be output from the output jack that is

patched to the corresponding MIX channel.

PAIR

MIX SEND [PAN] encoder

Adjusts the pan of the signal sent to the two MIX buses

MIX SEND [LEVEL] encoder

Adjusts the send level for both MIX

buses

PAIR

ON ON

MIX [LEVEL]

encoder

MIX OUTPUT block

MIX [ON]

switch

Chapter 4. Basic operation for input channels

Using the delay

By using the DELAY section of the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block, you can delay the input signal of an input

channel by a speciﬁed interval. For example, this is useful when you wish to compensate for time differences between mic

placed at a distance from each other.

[Procedure]

1. Use the INPUT block [SEL] switches or the ST IN

block [L]/[R] switches to select the input channel

that you wish to control.

2. In the DELAY section of the SELECTED INPUT

CHANNEL block, turn on the DELAY [ON] switch.

The switch LED will light, and the delay function will

be active for that channel.

3. Use the DELAY [TIME] encoder to set the delay

time.

The delay time can be set in a range of 0–250 msec.

Hint

Even for a ST IN channel or for paired input chan-

nels, delay settings must be set individually. Select

each channel in turn, and make separate settings for

each channel.

TIME

msec

DELAY

DELAY [ON] switch DELAY [TIME] encoder

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Using the compressor

By using the COMPRESSOR section of the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block, you can manually operate nearly all of

the compressor parameters.

Hint

The compressors provided by the PM1D system allow you to choose from three types: COMP (compressor),

EXPANDER, and COMPANDER. However, the choice of type cannot be made from the top panel. For this reason,

you must ﬁrst load compressor data that uses the desired type from the library, and then use the SELECTED INPUT

CHANNEL block to adjust the parameters as necessary.

The COMPRESSOR section contains the following controls and functions.

COMPRESSOR

COMPRESSOR [RATIO] encoder and [VALUE] indicator

The [RATIO] encoder located at the right sets the ratio of the compressor.

The current value is shown by the [VALUE] indicator at left.

COMPRESSOR FILTER [ON] switch and LED

COMPRESSOR ATTACK/RELEASE

[TIME] encoder and [VALUE] indicator

This sets the attack time/release time of

the compressor. Use the switch located

at the right to select either ATTACK or

RELEASE, and use the [TIME] encoder

to adjust the value. The current value is

shown by the [VALUE] indicator.

COMPRESSOR [LINK] switch and LED

This speciﬁes whether compressor opera-

tion for pairable input channels will be

linked by the key-in signal (link=on) or

whether the compressors will operate

independently (link=off). (The LED will light

if link is on.) For details refer to “CS1D Ref-

erence Manual (Hardware)”

→

p.26.

COMPRESSOR [GR] meter LEDs

These LEDs indicate the amount of gain reduc-

tion produced by the internal compressor.

COMPRESSOR [POST] meter LEDs

These LEDs indicate the level of the signal

after being processed by the compressor.

COMPRESSOR [PRE CLIP] LED

This LED will light when the signal

clips before entering the compressor.

COMPRESSOR [ON] switch and

LED

This switches the internal compres-

sor on/off.

COMPRESSOR [GAIN] encoder and LED

This encoder sets the GAIN parameter of the

internal compressor. The approximate current

value is shown by the perimeter LEDs.

COMPRESSOR [THR] encoder and LEDs

This sets the THRESHOLD LEVEL

parameter of the internal compressor.

The approximate current value is shown

by the perimeter LEDs.

COMPRESSOR [WIDTH (dB)/KNEE]

encoder and [VALUE] indicator

If the compressor type is COMP or

EXPANDER

Use the [WIDTH (dB)/KNEE] encoder to

set the KNEE parameter of the COMP or

EXPANDER. (The [KNEE] LED will light.)

If the compressor type is COMPANDER

Use the [TIME] encoder to set the WIDTH

parameter of the COMPANDER.

COMPRESSOR [ATTACK]/[RELEASE]

switches and LEDs

COMPRESSOR FILTER [FREQUENCY]

encoder and [VALUE] indicator

Use the [ON] switch located at the left to

switch on/off the HPF or LPF placed

before the internal compressor, and use

the [FREQUENCY] encoder at the right to

set its cutoff frequency. The current value

is shown by the [VALUE] indicator.

The HPF and LPF cannot be used simul-

taneously. The selection of either HPF or

LPF is made in the display (IN GATE/

COMP function COMP PRM screen).

Hint

Chapter 4. Basic operation for input channels

[Procedure]

1. Use the INPUT block [SEL] switches or the ST IN

block [L]/[R] switches to select the input channel

that you wish to control.

2. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

INPUT [GATE/COMP] switch several times to

access the following COMP PRM screen.

In the COMP PRM screen you can make compressor

settings for the currently selected input channel.

• COMP PRM screen

3. In the upper right of the screen, click the INPUT

COMP LIBRARY button.

The following INPUT COMP LIBRARY popup win-

dow will appear. In this window you can store input

channel compressor settings (input compressor data)

in the library, or recall (load) existing data from the

library.

• INPUT COMP LIBRARY popup window

4. From the library list, select data that uses the

desired type.

When you click a row in the library list, that row will

be highlighted, and the compressor type used in that

data and the parameter settings will be displayed in

the edit section.

Hint

Rows numbered 01-34 are displayed as “READ

ONLY,” and contain read-only preset data. Initially, it

is a good idea to recall preset data that is close to the

settings you wish, and then modify the parameters as

necessary.

5. Click the RECALL button located in the lower left

of the library list.

The data you selected in step 4 will be recalled into

the input channel you selected in step 1.

You will exit the INPUT COMP LIBRARY popup

window and return to the previous COMP PRM

screen.

Hint

If a ST IN channel or either input channel of a pair is

selected, the same data will be loaded into both chan-

nels.

In the COMP PRM screen, you can also select the

key-in signal (the reference signal that operates the

compressor), and select either LPF or HPF as the ﬁl-

ter that processes the input signal of the compressor.

For details refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Soft-

ware)” (→p.142).

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

INPUT [GATE/COMP] switch

Library list

This list shows the input compressor data that has been

stored in memory. The highlighted row is currently

selected for operations.

Edit section

This shows the settings of the

input compressor data currently

selected in the library list.

These buttons are used for

Store or Recall operations.

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

6. In the COMPRESSOR section of the SELECTED

INPUT CHANNEL block, turn on the COMPRES-

SOR [ON] switch.

The compressor will be turned on for the corre-

sponding channel.

7. Use the knobs and encoders in the COMPRESSOR

section to adjust parameters such as ATTACK,

RELEASE, THRESHOLD LEVEL, and GAIN.

Hint

For details on the parameters of each type, refer to

“CS1D Reference Manual (Appendices)” (→p.11).

You can also make settings so that the relevant screen

appears when you operate the COMPRESSOR sec-

tion. This setting is made in the UTILITY function

PREFERENCE screen (“CS1D Reference Manual

(Software)” →p.37).

Chapter 4. Basic operation for input channels

Using the noise gate

As with the compressor, most parameters of the built-in noise gate of the PM1D system can be controlled manually by

using the NOISE GATE section of the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block.

Hint

The noise gate of the PM1D system allows you to select one of two types: GATE or DUCKING. However, the type

cannot be selected by operations in the front panel. For this reason, you must ﬁrst load noise gate data that uses the

desired type from the library, and then use the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block to edit the parameters as neces-

sary.

The NOISE GATE section contains the following controls and functions.

NOISE GATE

NOISE GATE KEY IN FILTER [HPF]/[LPF] switch

NOISE GATE KEY IN FILTER [ON] switch

and LED

This controls the ﬁlter (HPF or LPF) that is pro-

vided for the key-in signal of the noise gate.

Use the [HPF]/[LPF] switches located at the

upper left to select the type of ﬁlter that you

wish to control. Then use the [ON] switch

located at the lower left to turn it on/off, and use

the [KEY IN FILTER] encoder at the upper right

to adjust the cutoff frequency. The HPF and

LPF can be used simultaneously.

The HPF and LPF apply only to the key-

in signal that is sent to the noise gate.

They do not affect the signal that is sent

to the STEREO bus or the MIX bus.

Hint

NOISE GATE KEY IN [CUE] switch and LED

This monitors the key-in signal after it has

passed through the ﬁlter.

NOISE GATE ATTACK/DECAY [TIME]

encoder and [VALUE] indicator

This sets the attack time/release time of the

noise gate. Use the switch located at the right to

select either ATTACK or RELEASE, and use the

[TIME] encoder to adjust the value. The current

value is shown by the [VALUE] indicator.

NOISE GATE [LINK] switch and LED

For pairable input channels, this speci-

ﬁes whether noise gate operation will be

linked by the key-in signal (link=on) or

whether the noise gates will operate with

independent key-in signals (link=off).

(The LED will light if link is on.) For

details refer to “CS1D Reference Manual

(Hardware)”.

NOISE GATE [POST] meter LEDs

These LEDs indicate the level of the signal

after it has passed through the noise gate.

NOISE GATE [RANGE] encoder and LEDs

This sets the RANGE parameter of the internal noise gate.

The approximate current value is shown by the perimeter

LEDs.

NOISE GATE [FREQUENCY] encoder

and [VALUE] indicator

NOISE GATE SIG [+]/[THR]/[–] LEDs

These indicate the level of the noise gate key-

in signal (after passing through the ﬁlters). For

details on the meaning of each LED, refer to

“CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)”.

NOISE GATE HOLD [TIME] encoder

and LEDs

This sets the HOLD TIME parameter of

the internal noise gate. The current value

is shown by the [VALUE] indicator.

NOISE GATE [THR] encoder and LEDs

This sets the THRESHOLD LEVEL parameter

of the internal noise gate. The approximate

current value is shown by the perimeter LEDs.

NOISE GATE [ON] switch and LED

This switches the internal noise gate on/off.

NOISE GATE [ATTACK]/[DECAY]

switches and LEDs

NOISE GATE [GR] meter LEDs

These LEDs indicate the amount of gain

reduction produced by the internal noise

gate.

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

[Procedure]

1. Use the INPUT block [SEL] switches or the ST IN

block [L]/[R] switches to select the input channel

that you wish to control.

2. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

INPUT [GATE/COMP] switch several times to

access the following GATE PRM screen.

In the GATE PRM screen you can make noise gate

settings for the currently selected input channel.

• GATE PRM screen

3. Click the INPUT GATE LIBRARY button located in

the upper right of the screen.

The following INPUT GATE LIBRARY popup win-

dow will appear. In this window you can store input

channel noise gate settings (input noise gate data) in

the library, or recall existing data from the library.

• INPUT GATE LIBRARY popup window

4. From the library list, select data that uses the

desired type.

When you click a row in the library list, that row will

be highlighted, and the noise gate type used in that

data and the parameter settings will be displayed in

the edit section.

5. Click the RECALL button located in the lower left

of the library list.

The data you selected in step 4 will be recalled into

the input channel you selected in step 1.

You will exit the INPUT GATE LIBRARY popup

window and return to the previous GATE PRM

screen.

Hint

If a ST IN channel or either input channel of a pair is

selected, the same data will be loaded into both chan-

nels.

In the GATE PRM screen you can also select the key-

in signal (the reference signal that operates the noise

gate).

6. In the NOISE GATE section of the SELECTED

INPUT CHANNEL block, turn on the NOISE GATE

[ON] switch.

The noise gate will be turned on for the correspond-

ing channel.

7. Use the knobs and encoders in the NOISE GATE

section to adjust parameters such as ATTACK,

RELEASE, THRESHOLD LEVEL, and GAIN.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

INPUT [GATE/COMP] switch

Library list

This shows a list of the input noise gate data that has

been stored in memory. The highlighted row is currently

selected for operations. Rows numbered 01-04 are dis-

played as “READ ONLY,” and contain read-only preset

data.

Edit section

This shows the settings of the

input noise gate data currently

selected in the library list.

These buttons are used for

Store or Recall operations.

Chapter 4. Basic operation for input channels

Hint

For details on the parameters of each type, refer to

“CS1D Reference Manual (Appendices)” (→p.16).

You can also make settings so that the relevant screen

appears when you operate the NOISE GATE section.

This setting is made in the UTILITY function PREF-

ERENCE screen (“CS1D Reference Manual (Soft-

ware)” →p.37).

Using the 4 band EQ/HPF

Here’s how to use the EQUALIZER section of the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block to control the 4 band EQ and the

HPF.

EQ ON

EQUALIZER

EQ [LPF] switch and LED (HIGH band

only)

This switches the HIGH band EQ type

to LPF. If this switch is on, the HIHG

band [Q]/[GAIN] encoders will have no

effect.

EQ [FREQUENCY] encoder and

[VALUE] indicator

This sets the center frequency of each

band. The adjustable range for each

band is 20 Hz – 20 kHz, and the current

value is shown by the [VALUE] indicator.

EQ [GAIN] encoder and LEDs

This sets the gain of each band. The

adjustable range is –18 dB – +18 dB,

and the approximate current value is

shown by the perimeter LEDs.

HPF [FREQUENCY] encoder and

[VALUE] indicator

This controls the HPF, which is indepen-

dent of the 4 band EQ.

EQ [ ] switch and LED (HIGH/LOW

bands only)

This switches the type of the HIGH/

LOW band EQ between peaking and

shelving. If this switch is on, the HIGH

band [Q] encoder will have no effect.

EQ [Q] encoder and LEDs

This sets the Q (steepness) of each

band. The approximate current value is

shown by the perimeter LEDs.

[EQ ON] switch

This turns the entire EQ on/off.

[HPF] switch and LED

HPF [6 dB/OCT]/[12 dB/OCT]/[18 dB/OCT] switches

and LEDs

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

[Procedure]

1. Use the INPUT block [SEL] switches or the ST IN

block [L]/[R] switches to select the input channel

that you wish to control.

2. In the EQUALIZER section of the SELECTED

INPUT CHANNEL block, turn on the [EQ ON]

switch.

The 4 band EQ of the corresponding channel will be

turned on.

3. For each band, use the [Q] encoder, [F] encoder,

and [GAIN] encoder to set the steepness, center fre-

quency, and gain respectively.

Hint

If boosting by the EQ causes the input signal to clip,

lower the [ATTENUATOR] encoder of the

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block. This encoder

adjusts the pre-EQ level of the signal.

• [ATTENUATOR] encoder (SELECTED INPUT

CHANNEL block)

4. If you wish to use the HIGH band or LOW band as

shelving type EQ, turn on the [ ] switch for the

appropriate band.

5. If you wish to use the HIGH band as a LPF, turn on

the [LPF] switch of the HIGH band.

6. If you wish to use the HPF, turn on the [HPF]

switch.

The EQUALIZER section in the SELECTED INPUT

CHANNEL block contains an HPF that is indepen-

dent of the EQ.

Turn on the [HPF] switch, and use the HPF [6dB/

OCT]/[12dB/OCT]/[18dB/OCT] switches and the

HPF [F] encoder to adjust the slope and cutoff fre-

quency of the HPF.

Hint

You can also make settings so that the relevant screen

appears when you operate the EQUALIZER section.

This setting is made in the UTILITY function PREF-

ERENCE screen (“CS1D Reference Manual (Soft-

ware)” →p.37).

As with the compressor and noise gate, EQ settings

can also be stored in or recalled from a dedicated EQ

library.

ATTENUATOR

Chapter 5. Basic operation for output channels

This chapter explains basic operation for MIX channels, MATRIX channels, and STEREO A/B channels.

About the output channels

Blocks used to control the output channels

The PM1D system provides MIX channels 1–48, MATRIX channels 1–24, and the STEREO A/B channels as output

channels for MIX buses 1–48, MATRIX buses 1–24, and the STEREO bus. The signals sent to these output channels is

routed through the internal six-band EQ and compressor, and is sent from the output jack that is patched by the OUT

PATCH function.

The following blocks of the CS1D console are used to control output channels.

• MIX OUTPUT block

This block speciﬁes the level and on/off setting of the

signals that are sent from the input channels and ST

IN channels to MIX buses 1–48, and sends them to

the output units patched to MIX channels, to the

STEREO bus, and to the MATRIX buses.

• MATRIX OUTPUT block

This block speciﬁes the level and on/off setting of the

signals that are sent from MIX channels 1–48, the

STEREO A channel, and the SUB IN channels to

MATRIX buses 1–24, and outputs them from the

output units that are patched to the channels.

• STEREO OUTPUT block

This block mixes the signals that are sent from the

input channels/output channels to the STEREO bus,

and outputs them from the output units that are

patched to the STEREO A/B channels.

• SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block

This block selects the desired MIX channel, MATRIX

channel, or STEREO A/B channel L or R, and speci-

ﬁes its on/off setting, EQ/compressor settings, and

output level.

MIX OUTPUT block

MATRIX OUTPUT block

STEREO OUTPUT block

SELECTED OUTPUT

CHANNEL block

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Switching the channel assignments

When the PM1D system is in its initial state, MIX chan-

nels 1–24 are assigned to the MIX OUTPUT block.

However, this assignment can be changed as follows by

the MIX LAYER [1-24]/[25-48] switches of the MIX

OUTPUT block.

• Using the MIX LAYER [1-24]/[25-48] switches to

change the channel assignments

Similarly, MATRIX channels 1–12 are assigned to the

MATRIX block when the PM1D system is in its initial

state, but this assignment can be changed as follows by

the MATRIX LAYER [1-12]/]13-24] switches of the

MATRIX OUTPUT block.

• Using the MATRIX LAYER [1-12]/[13-24] switches

to change the channel assignments

If operating the MIX OUTPUT block

MATRIX

OUTPUT block does not produce the result you

expect, check that the above switches are set appro-

priately.

MIX

LAYER

MIX 1-12

MIX

LAYER

MIX 13-24

MIX 25-36

MIX 37-48

MIX OUTPUT block

MATRIX

LAYER

MATRIX

LAYER

MATRIX 1-12

MATRIX 13-24

MATRIX OUTPUT block

Chapter 5. Basic operation for output channels

Basic operation of the MIX OUTPUT block

This section explains basic operation of the MIX OUTPUT block.

Controls and functions of the MIX OUTPUT block

PAIR

ON ON

MIX [TO ST] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is

sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus.

MIX [ON] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the MIX channel.

If this switch is off, no signal will be sent to

the channel of the output unit that is

patched to the corresponding MIX channel.

MIX [PAIR] LED

This LED will light if the two adjacent odd-

numbered → even-numbered MIX channels

have been paired.

MIX [LEVEL/BAL] encoder and LEDs

These encoders set the output level of MIX

channels 1–48.

[INS] LED

This LED will light if insertion is on for the

MIX channel.

MIX [CUE] switch and LED

This switch monitors the currently

selected MIX channel.

MIX [NAME] indicator

This shows the short name of the MIX channel.

MIX [TO MTRX] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is

sent from the MIX channel to the MATRIX

buses. If this switch is off, no signal will be sent

from that MIX channel to any MATRIX bus.

MIX [DCA] switch and LEDs

This switch assigns each MIX channel to

DCA faders 9–12. When a MIX channel is

assigned to a DCA fader, the correspond-

ing LED will light.

SAFE [RCL] LED

This LED will light for MIX channels that are

set to Recall Safe (a condition in which the

channel is independent of scene recall

operations).

SAFE [MUTE] LED

This LED will light for MIX channels that are

set to Mute Safe (a condition in which the

channel is independent of mute group

operations).

MIX [SEL] switch and LED

This switch selects the MIX channel that

your operations will affect. The MIX [SEL]

LED of the currently selected MIX channel

will light.

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Sending a signal from a MIX channel to an output unit

Here’s how the signal sent from an input channel to the MIX bus can be output from the output unit patched to the cor-

responding MIX channel.

[Procedure]

1. Make sure that an appropriate signal is being sent

from the input channel to the MIX bus. Also make

sure that a valid output unit is patched to the corre-

sponding MIX channel.

2. In the MIX OUTPUT block, turn on the MIX [ON]

switch for the MIX channel of the output unit to

which the signal will be sent.

3. In the MIX OUTPUT block, raise the MIX [LEVEL]

encoder.

The signal of the corresponding MIX channel will be

output from the output unit that is patched to that

channel.

4. In order to use the meter bridge to check the (post-

fader) level of the signal sent from the MIX bus to

the output unit, go to the METER section in the

MASTER block of the console, turn on the METER

SELECT [MIX 25-48] switch, and turn off the

METER [PRE] switch.

With these settings, the 48 meters in the left and right

sides of the meter bridge will show the post-fader

levels of the MIX channels.

Hint

The detection point (metering point) shown in the

meters can be speciﬁed in greater detail. For details

refer to the section “Setting the metering point” in

“Chapter 16. Various settings.”

MASTER block

METER [PRE]

switch

METER SELECT

[MIX 25-48] switch

Chapter 5. Basic operation for output channels

Sending a signal from a MIX channel to a MATRIX bus

Here’s how the signal sent from an input channel to a MIX bus can be output to a MATRIX bus.

[Procedure]

1. Make sure that an appropriate signal is being sent

from an input channel to a MIX bus.

2. In the MIX OUTPUT block, turn on the MIX [TO

MTRX] switch of the MIX channel whose signal

you wish to send to the MATRIX bus.

If this switch is off, no signal will be sent from that

channel to the MATRIX bus.

3. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

OUTPUT [MATRIX/ST] switch several times to

access the following MATRIX/ST ROUTING

screen.

• MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen (MATRIX/ST func-

tion)

In the MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen you can make

settings for the signals sent from the MIX channels to

the MATRIX buses/STEREO bus. The vertical col-

umn in the upper part of the screen is the destination

MATRIX bus, and the horizontal row is the source

MIX channel.

• Detail of MATRIX/ST ROUTING

4. Use the on-screen buttons in the MIX TO MATRIX

section to select the destination of the signal sent

from the MIX channel to the MATRIX channel.

The following buttons can be used.

• PRE FADER ....... Immediately before the MIX

[LEVEL] encoder

• POST FADER .... Immediately after the MIX

[LEVEL] encoder

• POST ON ........... Immediately after the MIX [ON]

switch

Hint

The ON/OFF switches in the MIX TO MATRIX sec-

tion are on/off switches for the signal sent from the

MIX channel to the MATRIX bus. They are linked

with the MIX [TO MTRX] switches of the MIX

OUTPUT block.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

OUTPUT [MATRIX/ST] switch

MIX channel (source)

MATRIX bus (destination)

Enable/cancel pairing for two adjacent

odd-numbered → even-numbered

MATRIX buses.

Specify the output level of the

signal sent from the MIX chan-

nel (horizontal row) to the

MATRIX bus.

MIX TO MATRIX

This is an on/off switch and a destination selection for

the signal sent from the MIX channel (horizontal row)

to the MATRIX bus.

MIX TO STEREO

This is an on/off switch and destination selection for

the signal sent from the MIX channel (horizontal row)

to the STEREO bus.

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

5. In the screen, drag the knob located at the intersec-

tion of the source MIX channel and the destination

MATRIX bus to adjust the level of the signal sent

from each MIX channel to the MATRIX bus.

The current value is shown in the numerical box

below the knob.

This parameter can be controlled only in the dis-

play.

6. In order to use the meter bridge to check the (pre-

fader) level of the signals sent to the MATRIX

buses, go to the METER section in the MASTER

block of the console, and turn on the METER [PRE]

switch and the METER SELECT [MATRIX 1-24]

switch.

With these settings, the 24 meters at the right side of

the meter bridge will show the pre-fader levels of the

MATRIX channels.

Hint

The detection point (metering point) shown in the

meters can be speciﬁed in greater detail. For details

refer to the section “Setting the metering point” in

“Chapter 16. Various settings.”

7. In the MATRIX OUTPUT block, turn on the

MATRIX [ON] switch for the appropriate MATRIX

channel.

8. In the MATRIX OUTPUT block, raise the MATRIX

[LEVEL] encoder of the appropriate MATRIX chan-

nel.

The signal sent from the MIX channel to the

MATRIX bus will be output from the output jack

patched to that MATRIX channel.

9. In order to use the meter bridge to view the (post-

fader) levels of the signals output from the

MATRIX channels, turn off the METER [PRE]

switch in the METER section of the MASTER block

of the console.

MASTER block

METER [PRE]

switch

METER SELECT

[MATRIX 1-24]

switch

PAIR

ON ON

MATRIX OUTPUT block

MATRIX [ON]

switch

MATRIX [LEVEL]

encoder

Chapter 5. Basic operation for output channels

Sending a signal from a MIX channel to the STEREO bus

Here’s how the signal sent from an input channel to a MIX bus can be output to the STEREO bus.

[Procedure]

1. Make sure that an appropriate signal is being sent

from an input channel to the corresponding MIX bus.

2. In the MIX OUTPUT block, turn on the MIX [ON]

switch.

3. Turn on the MIX [TO ST] switch.

If MIX [TO ST] switch is off, the signal from that

MIX channel will not be sent to the STEREO bus.

4. Raise the MIX [LEVEL] encoder.

5. To adjust the panning of the signal sent from the

MIX channel to the STEREO bus, press the LCD

FUNCTION ACCESS block OUTPUT [MATRIX/

ST] switch several times to access the following

MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen.

•

MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen (MATRIX/ST function)

6. Drag the PAN knobs located in the MIX TO STE-

REO section to adjust the panning of the signal sent

from each MIX channel to the STEREO bus.

The current value is shown in the numerical box

located below the knob.

Hint

By clicking the PRE button in the MIX TO STEREO

section, you can send the signal to the STEREO bus

from a point immediately before the [ON] switch of

the MIX OUTPUT block. This method is convenient

when you wish to send the MIX channel signal only to

the STEREO bus without sending it to an output unit.

7. In the STEREO OUTPUT block, turn on the STE-

REO A [ON] or STEREO B [ON] switch.

8. In the STEREO OUTPUT block, raise the STEREO

A or STEREO B fader.

The signal sent from the MIX channel to the STE-

REO bus will be output from the output jack patched

to the STEREO A or STEREO B channel.

9. So that the level of the signal output from the STE-

REO A/B channel (post-fader) can be viewed in the

meter bridge, turn off the METER [PRE] switch

located in the METER section of the MASTER

block.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

OUTPUT [MATRIX/ST] switch

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

INS

SEL

TO MTRX

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

INS

SEL

MONO

ON ON

STEREO OUTPUT block

STEREO A

[ON] switch

STEREO B

[ON] switch

STEREO A/

STEREO B

faders

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Pairing MIX channels

Adjacent odd-numbered → even-numbered MIX channels can be paired. All parameters except for pan and delay will be

linked for the two paired channels.

[Procedure]

1. In the MIX OUTPUT block, hold down the [SEL]

switch for one of two adjacent odd-numbered →

even-numbered MIX channels, and then press the

other [SEL] switch.

The direction in which the channel parameters are

copied will depend on the order in which the [SEL]

switches are pressed. When you create a pair, the

parameters of the channel you pressed ﬁrst will be

copied to the channel that you pressed next, and will

subsequently be linked.

For example if you pair MIX 1 and MIX 2, holding

down the MIX 1 [SEL] switch and then the MIX 2

[SEL] switch will cause the state of MIX 1 to be cop-

ied to MIX 2. For details on the parameters that are

copied/linked when paired, refer to “CS1D Reference

Manual (Appendices)” (→p.45).

If you wish to reset the parameters, do so from the

screen.

When MIX channels are paired, the functions of the

controllers on the CS1D console and the parameters

in the display will change as follows.

■ SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block

If VARI type MIX buses are paired, the left (odd-

numbered) encoder of the MIX SEND section will

function as a [PAN] encoder to set the panning, and

the right (even-numbered) encoder will function as

the [LEVEL] encoder for both MIX buses.

Adjacent odd-numbered → even-numbered MIX

SEND [ON] switches and MIX SEND [PRE]

switches will be linked.

• When VARI type MIX buses are not paired

• When VARI type MIX buses are paired

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL

PAN

MIX1 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX2 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX1 SEND LEVEL MIX2 SEND LEVEL

PAI R

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL

PAN

MIX1/2 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX1/2 SEND PAN MIX1/2 SEND LEVEL

PAI R

Chapter 5. Basic operation for output channels

■ MIX OUTPUT block

If MIX channels are paired, the left (odd-numbered) encoder will function as a [BAL] encoder to set the volume bal-

ance between the two MIX channels, and the right (even-numbered) encoder will function as a [LEVEL] encoder for

both MIX channels.

The operation of other adjacent odd-numbered → even-numbered switches will also be linked.

• When MIX channels are not paired • When MIX channels are paired

PAIR

ON ON

OUTPUT LEVEL

OUTPUT PATCH

MIX CHANNEL

MIX 1

MIX 2

MIX 1

OUTPUT

LEVEL

MIX 2

OUTPUT

LEVEL

PAIR

ON ON

OUTPUT LEVEL BALANCE

OUTPUT PATCH

MIX CHANNEL

MIX 1

MIX 2

MIX 1/2

BALANCE

MIX 1/2

OUTPUT

LEVEL

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

■ CH to MIX screen

In the row of paired MIX buses, the PRE buttons and

ON/OFF buttons will be consolidated for odd →

even numbers. Of the two adjacent odd-numbered

→ even-numbered knobs of VARI type MIX chan-

nels, the left (odd-numbered) knob will function as a

PAN knob to set the panning between the two MIX

buses, and the right (even-numbered) knob will

function as a LEVEL knob for both MIX buses.

• When FIX type MIX buses are not paired

• When FIX type MIX buses are paired

• When VARI type MIX buses are not paired

• When VARI type MIX buses are paired

■ MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen

The two adjacent odd-numbered → even-numbered

knobs of the source MIX channels will be linked.

2. To defeat pairing, hold down the [SEL] switch for

one of the paired MIX channels, and then press the

[SEL] switch of the other channel.

Hint

You can also set/defeat pairing by clicking the heart

symbol displayed beside the MIX channel number in

various display screens.

Input

channel 1

→MIX bus 1

Input

channel 1

→MIX bus 2

Input

channel 2

→MIX bus 1

Input

channel 2

→MIX bus 2

Input channel 1

→MIX buses 1/2

Input channel 2

→MIX buses 1/2

Input

channel 1

→MIX bus 1

Input

channel 1

→MIX bus 2

Input

channel 2

→MIX bus 1

Input

channel 2

→MIX bus 2

Input channel 1

→MIX buses 1/2

Input channel 2

→MIX buses 1/2

Chapter 5. Basic operation for output channels

Basic operation of the MATRIX OUTPUT block

This section explains basic operation of the MATRIX OUTPUT block.

Controls and functions of the MATRIX OUTPUT block

Sending a signal from a MATRIX channel to an output unit

Here’s how the signal sent from a MIX channel or the STEREO A channel to the MATRIX bus can be output from an

output unit patched to the corresponding MATRIX channel.

[Procedure]

1. Make sure that an appropriate signal is being sent

from a MIX channel or the STEREO A channel to a

MATRIX bus. Also make sure that a valid output

unit is patched to the corresponding MATRIX

channel.

2. In the MATRIX OUTPUT block, turn on the

MATRIX [ON] switch for the MATRIX channel.

3. In the MATRIX OUTPUT block, raise the MATRIX

[LEVEL] encoder.

The signal of the corresponding MATRIX channel

will be output from the output unit patched to that

channel.

4. So that the (post-fader) signal sent from the

MATRIX bus to the output unit can be monitored

in the meter bridge, go to the METER section in the

MASTER block of the console, turn on the METER

SELECT [MATRIX 1-24] switch and turn off the

METER [PRE] switch.

With these settings, the 24 meters at the right of the

meter bridge will indicate the post-fader signal levels

of the MATRIX channels.

PAIR

ON ON

MATRIX [NAME] indicator

This displays the short name of the MATRIX

channel.

MATRIX [ON] switch and LED

This switch turns the MATRIX channel on/

off. If this switch is off, the signal will not be

sent to the output unit patched to the corre-

sponding MATRIX channel.

MATRIX [LEVEL/BAL] encoder and LEDs

These encoders set the output level of

each MATRIX channel 1–24.

[INS] LED

This LED will light when insertion is on for

the MATRIX channel.

MATRIX [CUE] switch and LED

This switch monitors the currently selected

MATRIX channel.

SAFE [RCL] LED

This LED will light for MATRIX channels that

are set to Recall Safe (a condition in which

the channel is independent of scene recall

operations).

SAFE [MUTE] LED

This LED will light for MATRIX channels that are

set to Mute Safe (a condition in which the chan-

nel is independent of mute group operations).

MATRIX [PAIR] LED

This LED will light for adjacent odd-numbered

→ even-numbered MATRIX channels that are

paired.

MATRIX [SEL] select and LED

This switch selects the MATRIX channel that

will be controlled. The MATRIX [SEL] LED of

the currently selected MATRIX channel will

light.

MASTER block

METER [PRE]

switch

METER SELECT

[MATRIX 1-24]

switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Hint

The detection point (metering point) shown in the

meters can be speciﬁed in greater detail. For details

refer to the section “Setting the metering point” in

“Chapter 16. Various settings.”

Pairing MATRIX channels

Adjacent odd-numbered → even-numbered MATRIX channels can be paired. All parameters except for pan and delay

will be linked for the two paired channels.

[Procedure]

1. In the MATRIX OUTPUT block, hold down the

[SEL] switch for one of two adjacent odd-num-

bered → even-numbered MATRIX channels, and

then press the other [SEL] switch.

The direction in which the channel parameters are

copied will depend on the order in which the [SEL]

switches are pressed. When you create a pair, the

parameters of the channel you pressed ﬁrst will be

copied to the channel that you pressed next, and will

subsequently be linked.

For example if you pair MATRIX 1 and MATRIX 2,

holding down the MATRIX 1 [SEL] switch and then

the MATRIX 2 [SEL] switch will cause the state of

MATRIX 1 to be copied to MATRIX 2. For details on

the parameters that are copied/linked when paired,

refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Appendices)”

(→p.45).

If you wish to reset the parameters, do so from the

screen.

When MATRIX channels are paired, the functions of

the controllers on the CS1D console and the parame-

ters in the display will change as follows.

■ MATRIX OUTPUT block

If MATRIX channels are paired, the left (odd-num-

bered) encoder will function as a [BAL] encoder to

set the volume balance between the two MATRIX

channels, and the right (even-numbered) encoder

will function as a [LEVEL] encoder for both

MATRIX channels.

The operation of other adjacent odd-numbered →

even-numbered switches will also be linked.

• When MATRIX channels are not paired

MATRIX CHANNEL

MATRIX 1

MATRIX 2

PAIR

ON ON

OUTPUT PATCH

OUTPUT LEVEL

MATRIX

channel 1

OUTPUT

LEVEL

MATRIX

channel 2

OUTPUT

LEVEL

Chapter 5. Basic operation for output channels

• When MATRIX channels are paired

■ MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen

In the row of paired MATRIX buses, the left (odd-

numbered) knob of the two adjacent odd-numbered

→ even-numbered knobs will function as a PAN

knob to set the panning between the two MATRIX

buses, and the right (even-numbered) knob will

function as a LEVEL knob for both MATRIX buses.

• When MATRIX buses are not paired

• When MATRIX buses are paired

2. To defeat pairing, hold down the [SEL] switch for

one of the paired MATRIX channels, and then press

the [SEL] switch of the other channel.

Hint

You can also set/defeat pairing by clicking the heart

symbol displayed beside the MATRIX channel num-

ber in various display screens.

PAIR

ON ON

OUTPUT PATCH

OUTPUT LEVEL BALANCE

MATRIX CHANNEL

MATRIX 1

MATRIX 2

MATRIX

channels 1/2

BALANCE

MATRIX

channel 2

OUTPUT

LEVEL

LEVEL knob

MIX channel 1

→MATRIX bus 1

MIX channel 2

→MATRIX bus 1

MIX channel 1

→MATRIX bus 2

MIX channel 2

→MATRIX bus 2

……

MATRIX1

MATRIX2

FADER

MIX CHANNEL 1

MATRIX1

LEVEL

MATRIX2

LEVEL

PAN knob

MIX channel 1

→MATRIX buses 1/2

MIX channel 2

→MATRIX buses 1/2

MIX channel 1

→MATRIX buses 1/2

MIX channel 2

→MATRIX buses 1/2

LEVEL knob

PAN

to MATRIX 1/2

LEVEL

……

MATRIX1

MATRIX2

FADER

MIX CHANNEL 1

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Basic operation of the STEREO OUTPUT block

This section explains basic operation of the STEREO OUTPUT block.

Controls and functions of the STEREO OUTPUT block

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

INS

SEL

TO MTRX

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

INS

SEL

MONO

CUE CUE

ON ON

ST OUTPUT

STEREO A [TO MTRX] switch and

LED (STEREO A channel only)

This is an on/off switch for the signal

sent from the STEREO A channel to the

MATRIX buses. If this switch is off, no

signal will be sent from the STEREO A

channel to any MATRIX bus.

STEREO [SEL] switch and LED

This switch selects the STEREO A/B

channel that you wish to control. Each

time you press the STEREO [SEL]

switch, the L and R of that STEREO A/B

channel will alternate.

STEREO B [MONO] switch and LED

(STEREO B channel only)

This switches the STEREO B channel

between monaural output and stereo output.

STEREO fader

This 100 mm fader adjusts the output

level of the STEREO A/B channel.

STEREO [CUE] switch and LED

This switch monitors the STEREO A/B

channel.

STEREO SAFE [RCL] LED

This LED will light for STEREO A/B chan-

nels that are set to Recall Safe (a condition

in which the channel is independent of

scene recall operations).

STEREO SAFE [MUTE] LED

This LED will light for STEREO A/B chan-

nels that are set to Mute Safe (a condition

in which the channel is independent of mute

group operations).

STEREO [INS] LED

This LED indicates the insertion on/off

status of STEREO A/B channels.

STEREO [ON] switch and LED

This switch turns each STEREO A/B channel on/off individually. If this switch

is off, no signal will be sent to the output unit patched to the corresponding

STEREO A/B channel.

Chapter 5. Basic operation for output channels

Sending a signal from a STEREO A/B channel to an output unit

Here’s how a signal sent from an input channel or MIX channel to the STEREO bus can be output from an output unit

patched to a STEREO A/B channel.

[Procedure]

1. Make sure that an appropriate signal is being sent

from the channels to the STEREO bus. Also make

sure that a valid output unit is patched to a STE-

REO A/B channel.

2. In the STEREO OUTPUT block, turn on the STE-

REO [ON] switch for the STEREO A or B channel.

3. In the STEREO OUTPUT block, raise the STEREO

A or B channel fader.

The signal of the STEREO A/B channel will be out-

put from the output unit that is patched to that

channel.

4. So that the (post-fader) level of the signal sent from

the STEREO bus to the output unit can be viewed

in the meter bridge, turn off the METER [PRE]

switch located in the METER section of the MAS-

TER block on the console.

With this setting, the STEREO A/B meters of the

meter bridge will show the post-fader signal levels of

the STEREO A/B channels.

Hint

The detection point (metering point) shown in the

meters can be speciﬁed in greater detail. For details

refer to the section “Setting the metering point” in

“Chapter 16. Various settings.”

MASTER block

METER [PRE]

switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Basic operation of the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block

This section explains how to use the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block to control an output channel. In the

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block, you can select one channel from the MIX channels, MATRIX channels, or L/R

of the STEREO A/B channels, and use the EQ and compressor to process the signal before outputting it to an output unit

or to another bus.

Controls and functions of the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block

The controls and functions of the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block are summarized below.

COMPRESSOR

EQ ON

EQUALIZER

DELAY section

Make settings for the internal delay function.

COMPRESSOR section

Make settings for the internal compressor.

EQUALIZER section

Make settings for the internal 6 band EQ (HIGH, HIGH MID,

MID, LOW MID, LOW, SUB LOW).

Chapter 5. Basic operation for output channels

Sending a signal from an output channel to an output unit

Here’s how the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block can be used to send the signal of an output channel from the

output unit that is patched to that channel.

[Procedure]

1. Use the [SEL] switches of the MIX OUTPUT block,

MATRIX OUTPUT block, or STEREO OUTPUT

block to select the output channel that you wish to

control.

Before using the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL

block, you must ﬁrst select the output channel that

you wish to control (a MIX channel, MATRIX chan-

nel, or L/R of the STEREO A/B channel).

EQUALIZER

DCA

SAFE

CHANNEL SELECT

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL

DEC INC

SHIFT

DCA section

Assign the currently selected channel

to the desired DCA group.

OUTPUT section

Control the output level and on/off

status of the signal sent from the cur-

rently selected channel to the output

unit or STEREO bus/MATRIX bus.

SAFE section

Temporarily exclude the currently

selected select from Scene Recall

operations or Mute Group operations.

CHANNEL SELECT section

Select/view the channel that will be

controlled in the SELECTED OUT-

PUT CHANNEL block.

PAIR

MIX OUTPUT block

[SEL] switch

PAIR

MATRIX OUTPUT block

[SEL] switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

When you select a channel, the LEDs and indicators

of the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL will show

the settings of the various parameters for that chan-

nel. The type, number, and short name are shown by

the switches and [NAME]/[NUMBER] indicator of

the CHANNEL SELECT section.

• When a STEREO A/B is selected

The [ST] switch LED will light, and the [NUM-

BER] indicator will show either AL (L channel of

STEREO A), Ar (R channel of STEREO B), bL (L

channel of STEREO B), or br (R channel of STE-

REO B).

• When a MATRIX channel is selected

The [MATRIX] switch LED will light, and the

[NUMBER] indicator will show a number in the

range of 1–24.

• When a MIX channel is selected

The [MIX] switch LED will light, and the [NUM-

BER] indicator will show a number in the range of

1–48.

Hint

It is also possible to select a channel by using the

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block CHAN-

NEL SELECT [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC] switches. For

details refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Hard-

ware)” (→p.66).

By repeatedly pressing a [SEL] switch of the STEREO

OUTPUT block, you can alternate between the L

channel and the R channel.

2. In the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block

OUTPUT section, turn on the [ON] switch.

3. In the OUTPUT section, raise the [LEVEL] encoder.

The signal of the corresponding output channel will

be sent from the output unit patched to that channel.

4. If in step 1 you selected a STEREO A/B channel or

one channel of a pair of MIX/MATRIX channels,

use the OUTPUT section [PAN/BAL] encoder to

adjust the volume balance between the two chan-

nels.

If either channel of the STEREO A/B channel or of a

paired MIX/MATRIX channel is selected, the OUT-

PUT section [BAL] switch LED will light. This indi-

cates that you can use the [PAN/BAL] encoder to

adjust the balance between the two channels.

INS

SEL

TO MTRX

INS

SEL

MONO

ON ON

STEREO OUTPUT block

[SEL] switch

MIX

MATRIX

CHANNEL

COPY

DEC INC

SHIFT

CHANNEL SELECT

SELECTED OUTPUT

CHANNEL block

[NAME]/[NUMBER]

indicator

[ST] switch

[MATRIX] switch

[MIX] switch

SELECTED OUTPUT

CHANNEL block

[PAN/BAL]

encoder

[ON] switch [LEVEL] encoder

[BAL] switch

Chapter 5. Basic operation for output channels

Sending a signal from a MIX channel to a MATRIX bus/STEREO bus

Here’s how you can use the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block to send a MIX channel signal to the STEREO bus or

a MATRIX bus.

[Procedure]

1. Use the [SEL] switches of the MIX OUTPUT block

to select the MIX channel that you wish to control.

2. To sent the MIX channel signal to the STEREO bus,

go to the OUTPUT section of the SELECTED OUT-

PUT CHANNEL block and turn on the [TO ST]

switch. If you wish to send the signal to a MATRIX

bus, turn on the [TO MTRX] switch.

3. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

OUTPUT [MATRIX/ST] switch several times to

access the following MATRIX/ST ROUTING

screen.

• MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen (MATRIX/ST

function)

4. If you are sending the MIX channel signal to the

STEREO bus, use the PRE button located in the

MIX TO STEREO section of the screen to specify

the point from which the signal will be sent from

the MIX channel to the STEREO bus.

If the PRE button is on, the signal from before the

[LEVEL] encoder (pre-fader) will be sent to the STE-

REO bus. If the PRE button is off, the signal from

after the [LEVEL] encoder (post-fader) will be sent

to the STEREO bus.

5. If you are sending the MIX channel signal to the

MATRIX bus, use the buttons of the on-screen MIX

TO MATRIX section to select one of the following

points from which the signal will be sent from the

MIX channel to the MATRIX bus.

• PRE FADER ....... Immediately before the MIX

[LEVEL] encoder (pre-fader)

• POST FADER .... Immediately after the MIX

[LEVEL] encoder (post-fader)

• POST ON ........... Immediately after the MIX [ON]

switch

6. In the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block OUT-

PUT section, turn on the [ON] switch.

If pre-fader has been selected as the signal send

point, the signal will now be sent to the corre-

sponding bus.

7. In the OUTPUT section, raise the OUTPUT

[LEVEL] encoder.

SELECTED OUTPUT

CHANNEL block

[PAN/BAL]

encoder

[TO ST] switch [TO MTRX]

switch

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

OUTPUT [MATRIX/ST] switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

8. If you are sending the MIX channel signal to the

STEREO bus, use the [PAN/BAL] encoder located

in the OUTPUT section to adjust the pan.

If a MIX channel is selected in the SELECTED OUT-

PUT CHANNEL block and the OUTPUT [TO ST]

switch is on, the OUTPUT [TO ST PAN] switch LED

will light. This indicates that you can use the OUT-

PUT [PAN/BAL] encoder to adjust the pan of the

signal that is sent from the MIX channel to the STE-

REO bus. In the following diagram, the portion

enclosed by a dotted line corresponds to the OUT-

PUT [PAN/BAL] encoder.

• Adjusting the pan of the signal sent from the MIX

channel to the STEREO bus

9. If the source MIX channel is paired, use the OUT-

PUT [PAN/BAL] encoder to adjust the balance of

the two channels.

If a paired MIX channel is selected in the SELECTED

OUTPUT CHANNEL block, the OUTPUT [BAL]

switch LED will light. This indicates that you can use

the OUTPUT [PAN/BAL] encoder to adjust the bal-

ance between the two MIX channels. In the following

diagram, the portion enclosed by a dotted line corre-

sponds to the [PAN/BAL] encoder.

• Adjusting the volume balance between paired

MIX channels

When paired MIX channels are sent to the STEREO

bus, you can use both of the functions described in

steps 8 and 9. In this case, you can press the OUT-

PUT [TO ST PAN] or OUTPUT [BAL] switch to

select the item that will be controlled by the OUT-

PUT [PAN/BAL] encoder.

STEREO L

STEREO R

OUTPUT LEVEL

PAN

MIX 1

PAN

MIX 2

OUTPUT LEVEL

BAL

OUTPUT PATCH

MIX 1

MIX 2

Chapter 5. Basic operation for output channels

Sending a signal from the STEREO A channel to the MATRIX bus

Here’s how to use the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block to send the signal of the STEREO A channel to a MATRIX

bus.

[Procedure]

1. Use the STEREO A [SEL] switch of the STEREO

OUTPUT block to select the STEREO A channel.

2. In the OUTPUT section of the SELECTED OUT-

PUT CHANNEL block, turn on the [TO MTRX]

switch.

3. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

OUTPUT [MATRIX/ST] switch several times to

access the following MATRIX/ST ROUTING

screen.

• MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen (MATRIX/ST

function)

4. Scroll the screen to the right so that the ST A [L]

(STEREO A channel L) or ST A [R] (STEREO A

channel R) appears in the horizontal source row.

5. Use the on-screen buttons in the MIX TO MATRIX

section to select one of the following as the point

from which the STEREO A channel signal will be

sent to the MATRIX bus.

• PRE FADER ....... Immediately before the STE-

REO A fader (pre-fader)

• POST FADER .... Immediately after the STEREO A

fader (post-fader)

• POST ON ........... Immediately after the STEREO A

[ON] switch

6. In the OUTPUT section of the SELECTED OUT-

PUT CHANNEL block, turn on the [ON] switch.

If pre-fader is selected as the send point for the sig-

nal, the signal will now be sent to the correspond-

ing bus.

7. In the OUTPUT section, raise the OUTPUT

[LEVEL] encoder.

8. In the OUTPUT section, use the [PAN/BAL]

encoder to adjust the output level balance between

L and R.

If the STEREO A channel is selected in the

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block, the OUT-

PUT [BAL] switch LED will light. This indicates that

you can use the OUTPUT [PAN/BAL] encoder to

adjust the L/R balance.

SELECTED OUTPUT

CHANNEL block

[PAN/BAL]

encoder

[TO MTRX] switch

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

OUTPUT [MATRIX/ST] switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Delay settings

You can use the DELAY section of the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block to delay the output signal of a desired

output channel by a ﬁxed time. For example, this provides a convenient way to compensate between speaker systems that

are located at a distance from each other.

[Procedure]

1. Use the [SEL] switches of the MIX OUTPUT block,

MATRIX OUTPUT block, or STEREO OUTPUT

block to select the output channel that you wish to

control.

2. In the DELAY section of the SELECTED OUTPUT

CHANNEL block, turn on the DELAY [ON] switch.

The switch LED will light, and the delay function will

be enabled for that channel.

3. Use the DELAY [TIME] encoder to specify the delay

time.

The delay time can be set in the range of 0–1000

msec.

Hint

Even for the STEREO A/B channels or for a paired

MIX/MATRIX channel, the delay settings must be

made independently. Select each channel in turn,

and make settings individually.

TIME

msec

DELAY

SELECTED OUTPUT

CHANNEL block

DELAY [ON] switch

DELAY [TIME]

encoder

Chapter 5. Basic operation for output channels

Compressor settings

You can use the COMPRESSOR section of the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block to manually control almost all of

the compressor parameters.

Hint

The compressors of the PM1D system allow you to select one of three types: COMP (compressor), EXPANDER, and

COMPANDER. However, it is not possible to select the type by operations on the top panel. For this reason, you

must ﬁrst load compressor data of the desired type from the library, and then use the SELECTED OUTPUT CHAN-

NEL block to edit the parameters as desired.

Separate libraries are provided for the input channel compressors and output channel compressors. Compressor

data cannot be loaded into the opposite type of compressor.

The controls and functions of the COMPRESSOR section are shown below.

COMPRESSOR

COMPRESSOR [RATIO]

encoder and [VALUE] indicator

Use the [RATIO] encoder located

at the right to adjust the ratio of

the compressor. The current

value is shown in the [VALUE]

indicator at left.

COMPRESSOR FILTER [ON] switch and LED

The [ON] switch located at the left is an on/off switch for the HPF or

LPF located before the internal compressor. The [FREQUENCY]

encoder at the right sets the cutoff frequency of this ﬁlter.

The current value is shown in the [VALUE] indicator.

The HPF and LPF cannot be used simultaneously. The selec-

tion of either HPF or LPF is made in the display (OUT COMP

function COMP PRM screen).

Hint

COMPRESSOR ATTACK/

RELEASE [TIME] encoder and

[VALUE] indicator

This sets the attack time/release

time of the compressor. Use the

switch located at the right to select

either ATTACK or RELEASE, and

use the [TIME] encoder to adjust

the value. The current value is

shown in the [VALUE] indicator.

COMPRESSOR [LINK] switch and

LED

This speciﬁes whether the compres-

sors of adjacent odd-numbered →

even-numbered MIX channels or

MATRIX channels will be linked by

the key-in signal (link=on), or whether

the compressors will operate with

independent key-in signals (link=off).

(The LED will light when link is on.)

For details refer to “CS1D Reference

Manual (Hardware)” (

→

p.61).

COMPRESSOR [PRE CLIP] LED

This LED will light when the signal clips

before passing through the compressor.

COMPRESSOR [ON] switch and LED

This turns the internal compressor on/off.

COMPRESSOR [GAIN] encoder and LEDs

This sets the GAIN parameter of the internal

compressor. The approximate current value is

shown by the perimeter LEDs.

COMPRESSOR [THR] encoder and LED

Set the THRESHOLD LEVEL parameter

of the internal compressor. The approxi-

mate current value is shown by the

perim-

eter

LEDs.

COMPRESSOR WIDTH (dB)/

KNEE [TIME] encoder and

[VALUE] encoder

When the compressor type is

COMP or EXPANDER

use the [TIME] encoder to set the

KNEE parameter of the COMP or

EXPANDER. (The [KNEE] LED

will light.)

When the compressor type is

COMPANDER

use the [TIME] encoder to set the

WIDTH parameter of the COM-

PANDER.

COMPRESSOR [ATTACK]/

[RELEASE] switch and LED

COMPRESSOR FILTER [FREQUENCY]

encoder and [VALUE] indicator

COMPRESSOR [GR] meter LEDs

These LEDs indicate the amount of gain reduc-

tion produced by the internal compressor.

COMPRESSOR [POST] meter LEDs

These LEDs indicate the level of the

signal after being processed by the

compressor.

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

[Procedure]

1. Press a [SEL] switch in the MIX OUTPUT block,

MATRIX OUTPUT block, or STEREO OUTPUT

block to select the output channel that you wish to

control.

2. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

OUTPUT [COMP] switch several times to access

the following COMP PRM screen.

In the COMP PRM screen you can make compressor

settings for the currently selected output channel.

• COMP PRM screen

3. Click the OUTPUT COMP LIBRARY button in the

upper right of the screen.

The following OUTPUT COMP LIBRARY window

will appear. In this window you can store (save) out-

put channel compressor settings in the library, or

recall (load) existing data from the library.

• OUTPUT COMP LIBRARY popup window

4. From the library list, select data that uses the

desired type.

When you click a line in the library list it will be

highlighted, and the compressor type and parameter

settings used by that data will be displayed in the edit

section.

Hint

Numbers 01–09 are displayed as “READ ONLY,” and

contain read-only preset data. Initially, you may wish

to recall whichever of these presets is closest to the

settings you intend, and then modify the parameters

as necessary.

5. Click the RECALL button located at the lower left

of the library list.

The data you selected in step 4 will be recalled to the

output channel that you selected in step 1.

The OUTPUT COMP LIBRARY popup window will

close, and you will return to the previous COMP

PRM screen.

Hint

If a STEREO A/B channel or one of a pair of MIX/

MATRIX channels is selected, the same data will be

loaded into both channels.

The COMP PRM screen also lets you select the key-

in signal (the reference signal that controls the com-

pressor), and to switch between LPF and HPF to ﬁl-

ter the input signal of the compressor. For details

refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Software)”

(→p.93).

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

OUTPUT [COMP] block

Library list

This is a list of the output compressor data that has

been stored in memory. The currently highlighted line is

selected for operations.

Edit section

This area shows the settings of

the output compressor data that

is currently selected in the library

list.

These buttons are used for

Store and Recall opera-

tions.

Chapter 5. Basic operation for output channels

6. In the COMPRESSOR section of the SELECTED

OUTPUT CHANNEL block, turn on the COM-

PRESSOR [ON] switch.

The compressor of the corresponding channel will be

enabled.

7. Use the knobs and encoders of the COMPRESSOR

section to adjust parameters such as ATTACK,

RELEASE, THRESHOLD LEVEL, and GAIN.

Hint

For details on the parameters of each type, refer to

“CS1D Reference Manual (Appendices)” (→p.11).

You can make settings so that the corresponding

screen appears automatically when you operate the

COMPRESSOR section. This setting is made in the

UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen (“CS1D

Reference Manual (Software)” →p.37).

6 band EQ/HPF settings

Here’s how to use the EQUALIZER section of the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block to control the 6 band EQ.

EQ ON

EQUALIZER

EQ [LPF] switch and LED (HIGH band only)

This switch changes the HIGH band EQ type

to LPF. If this switch is on, the HIGH band [Q]/

[GAIN] encoders will have no effect.

EQ [ ] switch and LED (HIGH/SUB

LOW bands only)

This switch changes the HIGH/SUB LOW

band EQ type from peaking to shelving. If

this switch is on, the HIGH/SUB LOW

band [Q] encoders will have no effect.

[HPF] switch and LED (SUB

LOW band only)

This switch changes the SUB

LOW band EQ type to HPF. If

this switch is on, the SUB LOW

band [Q]/[GAIN] encoders will

have no effect.

[EQ ON] switch

This switch turns the entire

equalizer on/off.

EQ [BYPASS] switch and LED

This switch bypasses the EQ for each band.

EQ [Q] encoder and LEDs

This encoder sets the Q

(steepness) of each band. The

approximate current value is

shown by the peripheral LEDs.

EQ [GAIN] encoder and LEDs

This sets the gain of each band.

The adjustable range is –18 dB

– +18 dB, and the approximate

current value is shown by the

peripheral LEDs.

EQ [FREQUENCY] encoder

and [VALUE] indicator

This sets the center frequency

of each band. The range is

20 Hz – 20 kHz for each band,

and the current value is shown

by the [VALUE] indicator.

EQ [ ] switch and LED

(SUB LOW band only)

This switch changes the SUB LOW

band EQ to a low shelving type.

The switch LED will light if low

shelving is selected.

In this case, the SUB LOW band

[Q] encoder will have no effect and

the peripheral LEDs will go dark.

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

[Procedure]

1. Press a [SEL] switch in the MIX OUTPUT block,

MATRIX OUTPUT block, or STEREO OUTPUT

block to select the output channel that you wish to

control.

2. In the EQUALIZER section of the SELECTED OUT-

PUT CHANNEL block, turn on the [EQ ON]

switch.

The 6 band EQ of the corresponding channel will be

enabled.

3. For each band, use the [Q] encoder, [FREQUENCY]

encoder, and [GAIN] encoder to set the steepness,

center frequency, and gain respectively.

4. If you wish to use the HIGH band or SUB LOW

band as a shelving type EQ, turn on the [ ] switch

of the corresponding band.

5. If you wish to use the HIGH band as an LPF, turn

on the [LPF] switch of the HIGH band.

6. If you wish to use the SUB LOW band as an HPF,

turn on the [HPF] switch of the SUB LOW band.

Hint

You can make settings so that the corresponding

screen appears automatically when you operate the

EQUALIZER section. This setting is made in the

UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen.

In the same way as for the compressor or noise gate,

EQ settings can be stored to or recalled from a dedi-

cated EQ library. However, the output channel EQ

library is independent of the input channel EQ

library, and settings cannot be loaded/saved between

these libraries.

Chapter 6. Insert and direct out

This chapter explains how external devices such as effect processors can be inserted into a speciﬁc channel, and how the

signal of an input channel can be directly output from a desired output jack.

Insert

An external device such as an effect processor can be inserted in an input channel/output channel of the PM1D system.

Connecting the external device to be inserted

To insert an external device into a speciﬁc channel, you will use the output jack and input jack of an output unit as the

insert out/insert in jacks respectively.

The following diagram shows typical connections for insertion.

• Example connections for insertion 1 • Example connections for insertion 2

If an external digital device is inserted via a digital

I/O card as shown in “Example connections for

insertion 2,” the word clocks of the PM1D system

and the digital device must be synchronized. Nor-

mally, we recommend that you set the digital device

as the slave, so that it will synchronize to the word

clock of the PM1D. (For details on setting it to slave

mode, refer to the manual for your device.)

1234567

OUTPUT UNIT NO.

INPUT SELECTOR

POWER

ON/ OFF

ANALOG OUTPUT BOX

INPUT UNIT NO.

PHANTOM MASTER

OFF

+48V

POWER

ON/ OFF

12345678

ANALOG INPUT BOX

Effect processor

DA card

LMY4-DA

AD card

LMY4-AD

AI8 analog input unit

AO8 analog output unit

DIGITAL I/O CARD

MODEL MY8-TD

OUTIN

I/O UNIT ID

PORT B SELECTOR

5-8

1-4

POWER

ON/ OFF

DIGITAL

OUT

DIGITAL

Effect processor

Digital I/O card

DIO8 digital input/output

unit

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Inserting into an input channel

Here’s how an external device connected to an input/output unit can be inserted into an input channel.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

INPUT [PATCH] switch several times to access the

following INSERT PATCH screen (IN PATCH func-

tion).

• INSERT PATCH screen (IN PATCH function)

In the INSERT PATCH screen (IN PATCH function),

patch an output jack to the insert out point in the left

half of the screen, and patch an input jack to the

insert in point in the right half of the screen.

2. In the left half of the screen, click the grid at which

the output jack connected to the external device

intersects with the desired input channel.

3. In the right half of the screen, click the grid at

which the input jack connected to the external

device intersects with the desired input channel.

With these settings, the input/output jacks con-

nected to the external device will be patched to the

corresponding input channel. (However, you should

be aware that the insertion will not actually be

enabled until the INS. button is turned on in the fol-

lowing INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen.)

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

INPUT [PATCH] switch

From above,

this indicates

the type and

number of the

output unit,

the card slot

number , and

the channel

number of the

output jack.

From above, this indicates

the type and number of the

input unit, the card slot

number, the channel num-

ber of the input jack, and

the number of input chan-

nels that are patched to

that jack.

To patch the desired output jack to the

insert out of an input channel, click this

grid to display a “●” symbol.

Number of the input

channel

Name of the input channel

To patch the desired output jack to the insert in

of an input channel, click this grid to display a

“●” symbol.

Number of output jacks that are

patched to the insert out of that

channel

Chapter 6. Insert and direct out

4. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

INPUT [PATCH] switch several times to access the

following INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen (IN

PATCH function).

In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen (IN PATCH

function) you can switch insertion on/off for each

input channel. Here you can also select the insert I/O

point (the position at which the external device is

inserted), and the direct out point (the position from

which direct output is taken).

Hint

You can also turn insert on/off in the SELECTED

INPUT CHANNEL block.

• INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen (IN PATCH func-

tion)

Hint

You can also access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT

screen (IN PATCH) by clicking the INSERT/DIRECT

POINT tab in step 3.

5. Click the INS. button for the desired channel to

turn it on.

Insert will be enabled for the corresponding channel.

6. Click one of the following buttons to select the

desired INSERT I/O POINT.

• PRE EQ ...............Immediately before the EQ

• POST EQ ............Immediately after the EQ

• PRE COMP.........Immediately before the com-

pressor

• PRE DELAY ........Immediately before the delay

• PRE FADER........Immediately before the fader

7. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

INPUT [HA/INSERT] switch.

The IN HA/INSERT function screen will appear.

This contains mainly input card preamp settings (A/

B selection, gain adjustment, etc.).

• IN HA/INSERT function screen

Specify the insert I/O point for

each channel.

Specify the direct out point for

each channel

Number of the input channel

Short name of the input

channel

Turn insert on/

off for each

channel.

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

8. From the 1-24 INS, 25-48 INS, 49-72 INS, 73-96

INS, and ST IN INS tabs, click the tab that contains

the channel into which you wish to insert the exter-

nal device. {On the 48 channel model, the 49-72 INS

and 73-96 INS tabs are not valid.}

The following items will be displayed, according to

the type of input card that was patched to the insert

point in step 3.

For a mic line input card (LMY2-ML) installed in the

AI8

For an AD card (LMY4-AD) installed in the AI8

For a digital I/O card (MY card) installed in the DIO8

1 GAIN GANG

If this button is on, the head amp gain settings of

adjacent input channels in the screen will be linked

while preserving the current difference between

them.

2 A/B LINK

If this button is on, the input jack A/B selection of

adjacent input channels in the screen will be linked.

3 Level meter

This peak level meter shows the input level.

4 A/B

This button switches between input jacks A/B of an

AD card with head amp.

5 +48V

For each channel, this button is an on/off switch for

the phantom power of an AD card with head amp.

The +48V switch located on the front panel of the

AI8 input unit is the master phantom switch for the

entire unit. If this switch is off, phantom power

cannot be used with that unit (regardless of the set-

ting of the +48V button in the display).

6 ø (phase)

This button switches the input signal between nor-

mal/reversed phase.

7 GAIN

This knob adjusts the input sensitivity of the preamp.

The adjustable range is +10 dB – –68 dB, and the

current value is shown in the numerical box located

below.

8 This shows the input channel number and the pair-

ing status. You can also enable/defeat pairing by

clicking the heart symbol.

9. As necessary, adjust input card parameters such as

the A/B button, +48V button, GAIN, and phase.

By clicking a tab whose name does not include

“INS” in step 8, you can make preamp settings for

an input unit that is patched to an input channel.

Hint

The A/B selection, +48V phantom power, ø (phase),

and GAIN settings can also be made in the

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block.

1 2

Chapter 6. Insert and direct out

Inserting into an output channel

Here’s how an external device can be inserted into an output channel (MIX channel, MATRIX channel, STEREO A/B

channel). Most of the steps are the same as for an input channel.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

OUTPUT [PATCH] switch several times to access

the following INSERT PATCH screen (OUT PATCH

function).

• INSERT PATCH screen (OUT PATCH function)

In this screen as in the INSERT PATCH screen of the

IN PATCH function, you can patch an output jack to

the insert out point in the left half of the screen, and

patch an input jack to the insert in point in the right

half of the screen.

2. In the left half of the screen, click the grid at which

the output jack connected to the external device

intersects with the desired output channel.

3. In the right half of the screen, click the grid at

which the input jack connected to the external

device intersects with the desired output channel.

4. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

OUTPUT [PATCH] switch several times to access

the following INSERT screen (OUT PATCH func-

tion).

In the INSERT POINT screen (OUT PATCH func-

tion) you can switch insertion on/off for each output

channel. Here you can also select the insert I/O point

(the position at which the external device is

inserted).

• INSERT POINT screen (OUT PATCH function)

Hint

You can also access the INSERT screen (OUT PATCH

function) by clicking the INSERT tab in step 3.

5. Click the INS. button for the desired channel to

turn it on.

Insert will be enabled for the corresponding channel.

Hint

You can also turn insert on/off in the SELECTED

OUTPUT CHANNEL block.

6. Click one of the following buttons to select the

desired INSERT I/O POINT.

• POST EQ............ Immediately after the EQ

• PRE COMP........ Immediately before the com-

pressor

• PRE DELAY ....... Immediately before the delay

• PRE FADER ....... Immediately before the fader

• POST ON ........... Immediately after the [ON]

switch

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

OUTPUT [PATCH] switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

7. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

OUTPUT [INSERT] switch.

The OUT INSERT function screen will appear. This

contains mainly preamp settings for the input card

that is patched to the insert point.

• OUT INSERT function screen

8. From the MIX 1-24 INS, MIX 25-48 INS, MATRIX

1-24 INS, and ST MAS INS tabs, click the tab that

contains the channel into which you wish to insert

the external device.

The following items will be displayed, according to

the type of input card that was patched to the insert

point in step 3.

For a mic line input card (LMY2-ML) installed in the

AI8

For an AD card (LMY4-AD) installed in the AI8

For a digital I/O card (MY card) installed in the DIO8

1 GAIN GANG

If this button is on, the head amp gain settings of

adjacent input channels in the screen will be linked

while preserving the current difference between

them.

2 A/B LINK

If this button is on, the input jack A/B selection of

adjacent input channels in the screen will be linked.

3 Level meter

This peak level meter shows the input level.

4 A/B

This button switches between input jacks A/B of an

AD card with head amp.

5 +48V

For each channel, this button is an on/off switch for

the phantom power of an AD card with head amp.

The +48V switch located on the front panel of the

AI8 input unit is the master phantom switch for the

entire unit. If this switch is off, phantom power

cannot be used with that unit (regardless of the set-

ting of the +48V button in the display).

6 ø (phase)

This button switches the input signal between nor-

mal/reversed phase.

7 GAIN

This knob adjusts the input sensitivity of the preamp.

The adjustable range is +10 dB – –68 dB, and the

current value is shown in the numerical box located

below.

8 This shows the input channel number and the pair-

ing status. You can also enable/defeat pairing by

clicking the heart symbol.

9. As necessary, adjust input card parameters such as

the A/B button, +48V button, GAIN, and phase.

1 2

Chapter 6. Insert and direct out

Direct out

An input source patched to an input channel can be output directly from a desired output jack without being affected by

the STEREO bus or MIX buses.

Direct out connections

If you wish to directly output a speciﬁc signal, you can use an output jack of an output unit as a direct output.

• Direct out connection example 1 • Direct out connection example 2

Directly outputting an input channel signal

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

INPUT [PATCH] switch several times to access the

following DIRECT OUT PATCH screen (IN PATCH

function).

In the DIRECT OUT PATCH screen, you can patch

the desired input channel to an output jack that will

be the direct output destination.

•

DIRECT OUT PATCH screen (IN PATCH function)

1234567

OUTPUT UNIT NO.

INPUT SELECTOR

POWER

ON/ OFF

ANALOG OUTPUT BOX

Mixer

AO8 analog

output unit

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL I/O CARD

MODEL MY8-TD

OUTIN

I/O UNIT ID

PORT B SELECTOR

5-8

1-4

POWER

ON/ OFF

ADAT

Digital MTR

DIO8 digital input/output

unit

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

INPUT [PATCH] switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

2. Click the grid at which the input channel intersects

with the output jack that you wish to use as the

direct output.

3. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

INPUT [PATCH] switch several times to access the

following INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen (IN

PATCH function).

In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen (IN PATCH

function) you can switch insertion on/off for each

input channel. Here you can also select the insert I/O

point (the position at which the external device is

inserted), and the direct out point (the position from

which direct output is taken).

• INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen (IN PATCH func-

tion)

4. Use the on-screen buttons to select one of the fol-

lowing as the direct out point (the location in the

signal patch from which the direct out signal will

be taken).

• PRE EQ ...............Immediately before the EQ

• PRE FADER........Immediately before the fader

• POST FADER.....Immediately after the fader

• POST ON............Immediately after the [ON]

switch

Hint

The direct point can also be selected in the IN

PATCH function INSERT/DIRECT POINT screen,

or in the INSERT/DIRECT VIEW screen.

To patch the direct out point of a channel to the desired

output jack, click this grid to display a “●” symbol.

Number of output jacks that are

patched to the direct out point of

that channel

Name of the input channel

Number of the input

channel

From the top, this shows the

type and number of the output

unit, the slot number of the

card, and the channel number

of the output jack.

Specify the insert I/O point for

each channel.

Specify the direct out point for

each channel

Number of the input channel

Short name of the input

channel

Turn insert on/

off for each

channel.

Chapter 7. DCA groups/Mute groups

On the PM1D system, channels can be assigned to a DCA group/mute group to adjust the levels or switch muting on/off

for a group of channels. This chapter explains operations for DCA groups and mute groups.

DCA groups

The PM1D system has 12 DCA groups to which input channels (input channels, ST IN channels) or output channels

(MIX channels) can be assigned. By using the DCA faders in the DCA GROUP block of the console, you can control the

levels of each DCA group.

Assigning a channel to a DCA group

Input channels (input channels, ST IN channels) can be assigned to DCA groups 1–12. Output channels (MIX channels)

can be assigned to DCA groups 9–12. (However, it is not possible for input channels and output channels to exist in the

same DCA group.) Here we will explain how to assign channels to a DCA group.

[Procedure]

1. In the DCA GROUP block of the console, turn on

the FADER STATUS [DCA] switch (the LED will

light).

The FADER STATUS [DCA] switch lets you use the

DCA faders to control DCA groups. (The DCA fad-

ers can also be used as input channel or MIX channel

faders.)

2. In the DCA GROUP block, press one of the

[ASSIGN DCA] switches 1–12 to select a DCA

group (1–12).

3. In the INPUT block, ST IN block, or MIX OUTPUT

block, press the [DCA] switch for the channels that

you wish to assign to the DCA group you selected

above.

For that channel, the [DCA] LED of the selected

DCA group will light. You can assign either input

channels (input channels, ST IN channels) or output

channels (MIX channels).

FADER

STATUS

37–48

DCA

FADER STATUS

[DCA] switch

DCA GROUP

block

[ASSIGN

DCA] switch

DCA GROUP

block

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

• Output channels cannot be assigned to DCA groups

1–8.

• Input channels and output channels cannot coexist

in a DCA group 9–12. If an input channel has already

been assigned, attempting to assign an output chan-

nel will cause an error message to appear, and the

assignment will not be completed. (The converse

also applies.)

• When a scene is recalled, the DCA group data of the

Recall Safe channels may sometimes be adjusted so

that the Recall Safe settings are not mixed within

DCA groups 9–12.

Also when recalling a channel library, the recalled

channel data may be adjusted so that the settings are

consistent between DCA groups 9–12.

4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to assign channels to other

DCA groups as desired.

You can assign multiple channels to a single DCA

group, or assign a single channel to multiple DCA

groups.

Hint

The assignment of input channels/output channels

to DCA groups can also be performed within the dis-

play (IN DCA/MUTE function DCA ASSIGN screen,

OUT DCA/MUTE function DCA ASSIGN screen).

You can also use the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL

block (or the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL

block) to assign the desired channel to a DCA group.

In this case, press the [SEL] switch for the channel

that you wish to assign, and then use the SELECTED

INPUT CHANNEL block DCA [1]–[12] switches (or

the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block DCA

[9]–[12] switches) to select the DCA fader. This

method is convenient when you wish to assign a spe-

ciﬁc channel to multiple DCA faders.

DCA

RCL

MUTE

DCA

RCL

MUTE

INPUT [DCA]

switch

MIX OUTPUT

block

ST IN block

INPUT block INPUT block

Chapter 7. DCA groups/Mute groups

Controlling a DCA group

By using the DCA faders in the DCA GROUP block of the console, you can control the levels of each DCA group.

[Procedure]

1. Assign input channels/output channels to a DCA

group.

2. In the DCA GROUP block of the console, turn on

the FADER STATUS [DCA] switch (the LED will

light).

The FADER STATUS [DCA] switch lets you use the

DCA faders to control DCA groups. (The DCA fad-

ers can also be used as input channel or MIX channel

faders.)

3. Operate DCA faders 1–12.

The levels of the input channels or output channels

assigned to each DCA fader will be controlled.

Hint

DCA group levels can also be adjusted in the display

(IN DCA/MUTE function DCA GROUP ASSIGN

screen, OUT GROUP DCA/MUTE function DCA

ASSIGN screen).

4. To mute a speciﬁc DCA group, press the DCA

[MUTE] switch (located in the DCA GROUP block)

for that DCA group.

The DCA [MUTE] switch LED will light, and the

input channels/output channels included in that

DCA group will be set to a state identical to when the

DCA fader has been lowered to the minimum posi-

tion (– ∞ dB).

5. If you press the switch once again, the DCA

[MUTE] LED will go dark, and muting will be

defeated.

Hint

DCA group operations can also be performed in the

display (IN DCA/MUTE function DCA GROUP

ASSIGN screen, OUT DCA/MUTE function DCA

GROUP ASSIGN screen).

FADER

STATUS

37–48

DCA

FADER STATUS

[DCA] switch

DCA GROUP

block

DCA [MUTE]

switch

DCA GROUP

block

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Mute groups

The PM1D system provides 12 mute groups, to which the desired input channels (input channels, ST IN channels) or

output channels (MIX channels, MATRIX channels) can be assigned. By using the [1]–[12] switches located in the

SCENE MEMORY block of the console, you can turning muting on/off for each mute group.

Do not confuse “mute groups” with the “DCA group muting” that is controlled by the DCA [MUTE] switches of

the DCA GROUP block. These functions are independent in their operation and in their settings.

Assigning input channels to a mute group

Here’s how to assign an input channel (input channel, ST IN channel) to a mute group.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

INPUT [DCA/MUTE] switch several times to

access the following MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen

(IN DCA/MUTE function).

• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen (IN DCA/MUTE

function)

In this screen, mute groups 1–12 are shown from top

to bottom, and input channels (or ST IN channels)

are shown from left to right. Use the left/right scroll

bar to view channels that are currently not visible.

2. To assign an input channel to a mute group, click

the grid where the two intersect.

A “●” symbol will appear in the grid, and the input

channel will be assigned to the mute group. (If you

click once again, the assignment will be cancelled,

and the “●” symbol will disappear.)

3. In the same way, assign input channels to other

mute groups.

• It is not possible to assign input channels and output

channels to the same mute group of mute groups 9–

12. If an output channel is already assigned, attempt-

ing to assign an input channel will cause an error

message to appear, and the assignment will not be

completed. (The converse also applies.)

• When a scene is recalled, the mute group data of the

Recall Safe channels may sometimes be adjusted so

that the Recall Safe settings are not mixed within

mute groups 9–12.

Also when recalling a channel library, the recalled

channel data may be adjusted so that the settings are

consistent between mute groups 9–12.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

INPUT [DCA/MUTE] switch

Chapter 7. DCA groups/Mute groups

Assigning output channels to a mute group

Here’s how to assign an output channel (MIX channel, MATRIX channel) to a mute group.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

OUTPUT [DCA/MUTE] switch several times to

access the following MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen

(OUT DCA/MUTE function).

• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen (OUT DCA/

MUTE function)

In this screen, mute groups 9–12 are shown from top

to bottom, and output channels (MIX channels,

MATRIX channels) are shown from left to right. Use

the left/right scroll bar to view channels that are cur-

rently not visible.

2. To assign an output channel to a mute group, click

the grid where the two intersect.

A “●” symbol will appear in the grid, and the output

channel will be assigned to the mute group. (If you

click once again, the assignment will be cancelled,

and the “●” symbol will disappear.)

3. In the same way, assign output channels to other

mute groups.

It is not possible to assign input channels and out-

put channels to the same mute group of mute

groups 9–12. If an input channel is already

assigned, attempting to assign an output channel

will cause an error message to appear, and the

assignment will not be completed. (The converse

also applies.)

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

OUTPUT [DCA/MUTE] switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

Controlling a mute group

By using the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches in the SCENE MEMORY block of the console, you can switch muting

on/off for mute groups 1–12.

[Procedure]

1. Assign input channels/output channels to mute

groups 1–12.

2. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

INPUT [DCA/MUTE] switch several times to

access the MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen (IN DCA/

MUTE function).

• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen (IN DCA/MUTE

function)

3. In the MODE section, click the MUTE MASTER

button to turn it on.

The SCENE MEMORY [MUTE] LED in the SCENE

MEMORY block of the console will light. In this

state, the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches of the

console will function as MUTE MASTER buttons to

switch muting on/off for mute groups 1–12.

Hint

In the initial state of the PM1D system, the SCENE

MEMORY [1]–[12] will function as DIRECT

RECALL switches that recall speciﬁc scenes.

The function of the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12]

switches can also be selected in the OUT DCA/

MUTE function MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen, or

in the SCENE MEMORY function DIRECT RECALL

screen.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

INPUT [DCA/MUTE] switch

STORE

SCENE NUMBER

PREVIEW

RECALL

UNDO

SCENE MEMORY

DEC INC

789

456

123

CLEAR

MUTE

RECALL

MUTE MASTER

DIRECT RECALL

SCENE MEMORY block

SCENE

MEMORY

[MUTE] LED

SCENE

MEMORY

[1]–[12]

switches

Chapter 7. DCA groups/Mute groups

4. Press a SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switch.

The LED of the corresponding switch will light, and

the mute group assigned to that switch will be

muted. (All channels assigned to that group will be

in the same state as if their [ON] switches had been

turned off.)

Hint

You can turn on multiple buttons to simultaneously

mute two or more mute groups.

5. To turn off muting, press a SCENE MEMORY [1]–

[12] switch whose LED is currently lit.

Hint

Mute group operations can also be performed in the

display (IN DCA/MUTE function MUTE GROUP

ASSIGN screen, OUT DCA/MUTE function MUTE

GROUP ASSIGN screen).

100

Chapter 8. Scene memory

Mix parameters and various settings of the PM1D system can be stored in memory as a scene, and later recalled (loaded).

This chapter explains mainly how to perform scene operations using the top panel of the CS1D.

Hint

It is also possible to store/recall scenes by operations within the display. (By using this method, you can assign names

to individual scenes.) For details refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” (→p.18).

Data such as patch data, unit data, name data, EQ data, compressor data, and effect data can be saved for later recall

in libraries that are independent of scenes. For more about libraries, refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Software)”

(→p.166).

About scenes

The scenes of the PM1D system contain settings for all the controllers of the CS1D (except for display contrast and ana-

log volume settings), as well as the settings for the following functions in the display.

• All INPUT functions

• All OUTPUT functions

• EFFECT functions

• GEQ functions

However for the UNIT, PATCH, and NAME data, only the number of the linked library is memorized (not the contents

of the settings). If a library link is on when a scene is recalled, the library of the corresponding number will be recalled

simultaneously.

When a scene is stored into memory, a scene number will be assigned. The scene number consists of an integer portion

from 00–99, and a decimal portion from .0–.9, providing a total of 1,000 scenes numbered from 00.0 to 99.9.

Hint

Numbers 00.0–00.9 contain various factory preset settings. These preset scenes are read-only, and cannot be over-

written. You may write scenes into any of the other numbers.

Chapter 8. Scene memory

101

The currently selected scene is shown by the [SCENE

NUMBER] indicator located in the SCENE MEMORY

block of the console.

The scene number can be selected in the following two ways.

• Using the SCENE MEMORY [0]–[9] switches to

directly input the scene number

In this method, you use a three-digit number to

specify the scene number. Consecutively input the

two-digit integer portion and the one-digit decimal

portion. (If the integer portion has only one digit,

add a 0 at the beginning.)

• Examples of entering the scene number

• Using the SCENE MEMORY [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC]

switches to increment or decrement the scene num-

ber

When the PM1D system is in the initial state, press-

ing the SCENE MEMORY [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC]

switches cause the scene number displayed in the

[SCENE NUMBER] indicator to increment or decre-

ment in 0.1 units.

Hint

If desired, you can skip scenes in which data has not

been saved. This setting is made in the display

(SCENE function MEMORY screen).

• [CLEAR] switch

To return to the number that had been selected ,

press the [CLEAR] switch while the [SCENE NUM-

BER] indicator is blinking.

STORE

SCENE NUMBER

RECALL

789

SCENE MEMORY block

[SCENE

NUMBER]

indicator

DEC INC

789

456

123

CLEAR

SCENE MEMORY block

SCENE

MEMORY

[0]–[9]

switches

SCENE

MEMORY [▼/

DEC]/[▲/INC]

switches

[CLEAR]

switch

0 0 1

0 1 2

1 0 1

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

102

Scene memory operations

Storing a scene

Here’s how to store the current mix settings as a scene.

We recommend that you store the current state as a scene memory before you turn off the power supply (PW1D). If the

current unit connection state differs from the unit connection state the next time the power is turned on, patch settings

etc. may be modiﬁed.

Before you perform the following procedure, make

sure that the SCENE MEMORY [PREVIEW] switch

in the SCENE MEMORY block is turned off. (If this

switch is on, turn it off.)

[Procedure]

1. Use the panel controllers of the CS1D to set the mix

parameters.

2. Use the SCENE MEMORY [0]–[9] switches or the

SCENE MEMORY [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC] switches to

select the scene number into which you wish to

store.

When you select a new scene number, the number

shown in the [SCENE NUMBER] indicator will

blink. The blinking indicates that the displayed scene

number is different than the mix parameters that are

currently being controlled from the CS1D.

• Blinking [SCENE NUMBER] indicator

However, be aware that the scene number displayed in

the SCENE MEMORY [NUMBER] indicator of the

meter bridge block will not change. This indicator

always shows only the last stored/recalled scene number.

3. Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] switch

The SCENE STORE popup window will appear,

allowing you to assign a title to the scene and store it.

Assign a title and comment as necessary. (For details

on entering text →p.20)

4. Use the [CURSOR] switches to move the cursor to

the STORE button in the screen, and press the

[ENTER] switch.

A message asking you to conﬁrm the store operation

will appear in the display. When you select OK, the

current mix parameter settings will be stored in the

scene number you selected in step 2, and the [SCENE

NUMBER] indicator will stop blinking.

Hint

You can make settings so that the conﬁrmation mes-

sage does not appear in the display when you press

the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] switch. This setting

is made in the display (UTILITY function PREFER-

ENCE screen)(“CS1D Reference Manual (Software)”

→p.37).

STORE

SCENE NUMBER

PREVIEW

RECALL

UNDO

MUTE

SCENE MEMORY block

SCENE

MEMORY

[PREVIEW]

switch

SCENE NUMBER

STORE

SCENE NUMBER

PREVIEW

RECALL

UNDO

MUTE

SCENE MEMORY block

SCENE

MEMORY

[STORE]

switch

Chapter 8. Scene memory

103

• If there are any changes in a UNIT, PATCH, or

NAME library that is linked to that scene, the popup

window for the corresponding library will appear

after the SCENE STORE popup window. Store the

library as necessary.

• If the EVENT RECALLING button is set to

“ENABLE” in the TC EVENT screen of MIDI/GPI/

TC functions, pressing the [STORE] switch will pro-

duce a message of “TIME CODE ACTIVE! CANNOT

STORE!,” and the Store operation cannot be exe-

cuted.

You must ﬁrst switch the EVENT RECALLING but-

ton to “DISABLE.”

• While a message asking you to conﬁrm the Store

operation is being displayed, using the SCENE

MEMORY [0]–[9] switches or the [▼/DEC]/[▲/

INC] switches to change the scene number will cause

the Store operation to be aborted.

• If you press the [STORE] switch while saving or

loading to/from a memory card, a message of “CAN-

NOT STORE!” will appear, and the store operation

will not be performed.

Recalling a scene

Here’s how to recall a scene from memory.

Before you perform the following procedure, make sure that the SCENE MEMORY [PREVIEW] switch in the

SCENE MEMORY block is turned off.

[Procedure]

1. Use the SCENE MEMORY [0]–[9] switches or the

SCENE MEMORY [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC] switches to

select the scene number that you wish to recall.

When you select a new scene number, the number

shown in the [SCENE NUMBER] indicator will blink.

However, be aware that the scene number displayed in

the SCENE MEMORY [NUMBER] indicator of the

meter bridge block will not change. This indicator

always shows only the last stored/recalled scene number.

2. Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] switch.

A message asking you to conﬁrm the recall operation

will appear in the display. When you select OK, the

scene of the number you selected in step 1 will be

recalled.

Hint

You can make settings so that the conﬁrmation mes-

sage does not appear in the display when you press

the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] switch. This set-

ting is made in the display (UTILITY function PREF-

ERENCE screen).

If you recall a scene by mistake, you can press the

SCENE MEMORY [RECALL UNDO] switch located

in the SCENE MEMORY block to return to the state

immediately prior to the recall operation. (If you

undo a Recall operation, an symbol will

appear in the top line of the display.)

When the undo operation is not available, such as

immediately after the power is turned on, or in PRE-

VIEW mode, pressing the [RECALL UNDO] switch

will produce a message of “CANNOT UNDO!”

While a message asking you to conﬁrm the Recall

operation is being displayed, using the SCENE

MEMORY [0]–[9] switches or the [▼/DEC]/[▲/

INC] switches to change the scene number will cause

the Recall operation to be aborted.

STORE

SCENE NUMBER

PREVIEW

RECALL

UNDO

MUTE

SCENE MEMORY block

SCENE

MEMORY

[RECALL]

switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

104

Using PREVIEW mode

The SCENE MEMORY block provides two modes: “NORMAL” mode in which the scene is actually loaded into the sys-

tem, and “PREVIEW” mode in which only the parameter values are loaded without affecting the internal signal process-

ing of the system. By using PREVIEW mode you can conﬁrm the setting values of a scene in memory, or edit the settings

and store them once again.

[Procedure]

1. In the SCENE MEMORY block of the console, turn

on the SCENE MEMORY [PREVIEW] switch.

The switch LED will light, and the SCENE MEM-

ORY block will be in PREVIEW mode.

The audio signal processing will remain as it was

before you entered Preview mode. In Preview mode,

operating the knobs and encoders etc. will not affect

the audio signal processing.

2. Use the SCENE MEMORY [0]–[9] switches or the

SCENE MEMORY [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC] switches to

select the scene number that you wish to load.

When you select a new scene, the number shown in

the [SCENE NUMBER] indicator will blink.

3. Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] switch.

Only the setting values of the scene selected in step 2

will be loaded, and shown in the LEDs and display of

the CS1D panel. However, the internal signal pro-

cessing of the system will remain as it was prior to

the recall operation, and will not change.

Even if a fade time is speciﬁed for the recalled scene,

it will be ignored in PREVIEW mode.

Hint

You can also access speciﬁc channels in the

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block or SELECTED

OUTPUT CHANNEL block, or access speciﬁc

screens in the display and view the settings in detail.

4. As desired, use the controllers of the console to edit

the settings.

When you operate the panel controllers in PREVIEW

mode, the patch whose settings alone were loaded in

step 3 will be modiﬁed. The internal signal process-

ing of the system will not be affected.

5. If you wish to save the changes you made in step 4,

select the storing destination patch number as nec-

essary, and press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE]

switch.

The settings you edited in step 4 will be stored into

memory.

6. To return the SCENE MEMORY block to NORMAL

mode, press the SCENE MEMORY [PREVIEW]

switch to make the switch LED go dark.

The preview function applies to the parameters

included in [SCENE MEMORY], [UNIT

LIBRARY], [PATCH LIBRARY], and [NAME

LIBRARY]. The preview function does not apply to

any other parameters.

STORE

SCENE NUMBER

PREVIEW

RECALL

UNDO

MUTE

SCENE MEMORY block

SCENE

MEMORY

[PREVIEW]

switch

Chapter 8. Scene memory

105

Directly recalling a scene

Frequently-used scenes can be assigned to the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches of the SCENE MEMORY block, and

directly recalled at one touch.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[SCENE] switch several times to access the follow-

ing screen.

• DIRECT RECALL screen (SCENE function)

In the SCENE function DIRECT RECALL screen,

you can assign scenes to the SCENE MEMORY [1]–

[12] switches.

2. In the DIRECT RECALL ASSIGN list at the left side

of the screen, click the line for the switch number to

which you wish to assign a scene.

The highlighted area will move to the selected line.

3. In the SCENE MEMORY list, click the line that

shows the desired scene to select it.

The cursor will move to that line. Use the scroll bar

located at the right of the list to view scenes that are

not currently visible.

4. Click the ASSIGN button.

The scene you selected in step 3 will be assigned to

the switch whose number you selected in step 2.

5. Repeat steps 2–4 to assign the desired scenes to the

SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches.

6. In the MODE section at the upper left of the screen,

make sure that the DIRECT RECALL button is on.

(If it is off, click the DIRECT RECALL button.)

If the DIRECT RECALL button is on, the SCENE

MEMORY [RECALL] LED in the SCENE MEMORY

block of the console will light, and the SCENE

MEMORY [1]–[12] switches will function as direct

recall switches to directly recall the twelve assigned

scenes.

Hint

The function of the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12]

switches can also be speciﬁed in the IN DCA/MUTE

function MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen, and the

OUT DCA/MUTE function MUTE GROUP

ASSIGN screen.

7. Press one of the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12]

switches in the SCENE MEMORY block of the con-

sole.

The corresponding switch LED will light, and the

scene assigned to that switch will be recalled.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[SCENE] switch

DIRECT RECALL ASSIGN

list

SCENE MEMORY list

106

Chapter 9. Recall safe/Mute safe

This chapter explains the “Recall Safe” function that excludes speciﬁc channels or parameters from recall operations, and

the “Mute Safe” screen that excludes speciﬁc channels from mute operations.

Recall safe

“Recall Safe” is a function that allows you to specify certain channels or parameters to remain unaffected when a scene is

recalled. For example if you specify Recall Safe for a channel that you always want to control manually, the parameters of

that channel will not change even when a new scene is recalled.

There are two ways to set a channel to Recall Safe; you can use the top panel of the console, or you can use a function

within the display.

Using the console to set/defeat Recall Safe

Here’s how to use the top panel of the console to set/defeat Recall Safe. This method is convenient when you wish to tem-

porarily operate only a speciﬁc channel manually.

[Procedure]

1. Use the [SEL] switches to select the channel for

which you wish to select Recall Safe.

You can select input channels (input channels, ST IN

channels) or output channels (MIX channels,

MATRIX channels, STEREO A/B channels).

2. If you selected an input channel in step 1, press the

SAFE [RECALL] switch located in the SAFE section

of the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block.

3. If you selected an output channel in step 1, press

the SAFE [RECALL] switch located in the SAFE sec-

tion of the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block.

In either case, the SAFE [RECALL] switch LED will

light, and the corresponding channel will be set to

Recall Safe. As desired, make settings for other chan-

nels in the same way.

4. To defeat Recall Safe, use the [SEL] switches to

access the corresponding channel, and press the

SAFE [RECALL] switch once again.

The SAFE [RECALL] switch LED will go dark, and

Recall Safe will be defeated for that channel.

DCA

SAFE

NNEL

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL

block

SAFE

[RECALL]

switch

DCA

SAFE

SELECTED OUTPUT

CHANNEL block

SAFE [RECALL]

switch

Chapter 9. Recall safe/Mute safe

107

If Recall Safe is speciﬁed for either (not both) the

odd-numbered or even-numbered channel of two

channels, and you recall a scene in which these two

channels are paired, pairing will be forcibly

defeated, and the channel that was set to Recall Safe

will maintain the state prior to the recall.

Using the screen to set/defeat Recall Safe

Recall Safe can also be set/cancelled from within the display. With this method, you can not only set/cancel Recall Safe,

but also select the parameters to which Recall Safe will apply. Furthermore, you can select not only input channels or

output channels, but also DCA groups, internal effects, graphic EQ, and mute masters as objects for the recall.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[SCENE] switch several times to access the follow-

ing RECALL SAFE screen (SCENE function).

• RECALL SAFE screen (SCENE function)

2. Of the buttons arranged in the screen, turn on the

SAFE ON/OFF buttons for the channels/parame-

ters that you wish to set to Recall Safe.

In the RECALL SAFE screen, click the SAFE ON/

OFF buttons to select the channels/parameters that

you wish to set to Recall Safe. The following elements

correspond to each button.

• CH 1–96 {1-48} ........Input channels 1–96 {1–48}

• ST IN 1–8 {1–4}........ST IN channels 1–8 {1–4}

• MIX 1–48..................MIX channels 1–48

• MTRX 1–24 ..............MATRIX channels 1–24

• ST A/B ...................... STEREO A/B channels

• DCA 1–12 ................ DCA groups 1–12

• GEQ 1–24................. Graphic EQ modules 1–24

• EFFECT 1–8............. Internal effects 1–8

• MUTE MASTER...... Turn all mute groups on/off

For the INPUT, ST IN, MIX, MTRX, and STEREO

A/B channels, you can specify Recall Safe not only for

the entire channel, but for individual parameters.

The following parameters can be selected.

• ALL..................All parameters of that channel

• AT T ..................The ATT parameter of that channel

• EQ....................The EQ parameters of that channel

(except ATT)

• FADER ............The fader of that channel (includes

BALANCE for STEREO A/B)

• SEND/TO MTRX .... The SEND/TO MATRIX

parameters of that channel

(ON, LEVEL, PAN, PRE/

POST, PAN, PRE POINT)

• UNIT ........................ The parameters of the unit

patched to that channel (HA

GAIN GANG and HA A/B

LINK are included in ALL)

Hint

By clicking one of the SET ALL buttons located at the

bottom of the screen, you can set all channels, all

speciﬁed parameters, or all units to Recall Safe status.

• If the SET ALL button is on, all units (including

those not displayed in this screen) will be set to

Recall Safe. Be aware that units that are not currently

patched and units that are patched to Insert will also

be set to Recall Safe.

• Simply turning on the above buttons does not enable

the Recall Safe function. To enable Recall Safe, you

must turn on the SAFE ON/OFF button for the cor-

responding channel.

• As an exception to this, Unit Recall Safe is indepen-

dent of Channel Recall Safe. For this reason, simply

turning on the UNIT button will exclude the corre-

sponding unit from recall operations even if the

SAFE ON/OFF button is off.

Channels/parameters whose buttons are turned on will

be set to Recall Safe. With this setting, these channels/

parameters will not be affected even if a scene is recalled.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[SCENE] switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

108

In the case of parameters of which there is only one

setting for two adjacent odd-numbered → even-

numbered channels (such as the parameters listed

below), Recall Safe will be valid only if both channels

are set to Recall Safe.

• HA GAIN GANG / HA A/B LINK / GATE LINK /

COMP LINK / DELAY GANG / PAN MODE /

GEQ LINK

Hint

In the case of two paired channels, a ST IN channel,

or the STEREO A/B channels, all settings that are set

to Recall Safe will be linked for both channels.

3. To defeat Recall Safe, turn off the button of the cor-

responding channel/parameter in the RECALL

SAFE screen.

Hint

By clicking one of the CLEAR ALL buttons located at

the bottom of the screen, you can exclude all chan-

nels, all speciﬁed parameters, or all units from Recall

Safe status.

If a scene is recalled when Recall Safe is enabled, an

symbol will appear in the top line of the dis-

play. This indicates that the contents stored in the

scene are different than the current scene.

Mute safe

“Mute Safe” is a function that allows you to specify certain channels of mute group to remain unaffected when a mute

master is set to on.

There are two ways to set a channel to Mute Safe; you can use the top panel of the console, or you can use a function

within the display.

Using the console to set/defeat Mute Safe

Here’s how to use the top panel of the console to set/defeat Mute Safe. This method is convenient when you wish to tem-

porarily exclude only a speciﬁc channel from the mute group(s).

[Procedure]

1. Use the [SEL] switches to select the channel for

which you wish to select Mute Safe.

You can select input channels (input channels, ST IN

channels) or output channels (MIX channels,

MATRIX channels, STEREO A/B channels).

2. If you selected an input channel in step 1, press the

SAFE [MUTE] switch located in the SAFE section of

the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block.

3. If you selected an output channel (MIX channel,

MATRIX channel, STEREO A/B channel) in step 1,

press the SAFE [MUTE] switch located in the SAFE

section of the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL

block.

In either case, the SAFE [MUTE] switch LED will

light, and the corresponding channel will be set to

Mute Safe. As desired, make settings for other chan-

nels in the same way.

4. To defeat Mute Safe, use the [SEL] switches to

access the corresponding channel, and press the

SAFE [MUTE] switch once again.

The SAFE [MUTE] switch LED will go dark, and

Mute Safe will be defeated for that channel.

Hint

Normally, the Mute Safe operation can be performed

independently of the scene memory. However if you

recall a scene that causes a channel to switch from

monaural to paired, both channels will be turned on

if either of the two channels had been set to Mute

Safe On until then.

DCA

SAFE

NNEL

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL

block

SAFE

[MUTE]

switch

Chapter 9. Recall safe/Mute safe

109

Using the screen to set/defeat Mute Safe

You can also set/defeat Mute Safe from within the display. This method is convenient when you wish to quickly make set-

tings for multiple channels.

[Procedure]

1. To set Mute Safe for input channels, press the

INPUT [DCA/MUTE] switch (located in the LCD

FUNCTION ACCESS block) several times to access

the following MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen (IN

DCA/MUTE function).

• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen (IN DCA/MUTE

function)

2. In the MUTE SAFE buttons arranged in the bottom

line of the grid, click the button for the desired

channel.

The button display will change from “–” to “ON,”

and that channel will be set to Mute Safe. With this

setting, the corresponding channel will not be

affected even if mute groups are muted/unmuted.

3. To set Mute Safe for output channels, press the

OUTPUT [DCA/MUTE] switch (located in the LCD

FUNCTION ACCESS block) to access the following

MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen (OUT DCA/MUTE

function).

• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen (OUT DCA/

MUTE function)

4. In the MUTE SAFE buttons arranged in the bottom

line of the grid, click the button for the desired

channel.

The button display will change from “–” to “ON,”

and that channel will be set to Mute Safe.

5. To defeat Mute Safe, access the same screen and

click the MUTE SAFE button once again.

The button display will change back from “ON” to

“–” and Mute Safe will be defeated.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

INPUT [DCA/MUTE] switch

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

OUTPUT [DCA/MUTE] switch

110

Chapter 10. Monitor

This chapter explains monitoring functions of the PM1D system such as the MONITOR A/B outputs and the cue/solo

functions.

Basic operation of the MONITOR A/MONITOR B section

About MONITOR A/MONITOR B

The PM1D system provides two monitor outputs, MONITOR A and MONITOR B. For each, the monitoring source can

be selected and the output level set independently. To control MONITOR A/MONITOR B from the CS1D console, you

will use the following sections of the MASTER block.

• MONITOR A section

This section controls the monitor signal that is out-

put from MONITOR OUT jacks A located on the

rear panel of the CS1D or from the MONITOR A

headphone jacks located on the top panel and front

panel of the CS1D. You can select the monitor

source, set the output level, switch between stereo/

mono, and set the delay function.

• MONITOR B section

This section controls the monitor signal that is out-

put from MONITOR OUT jacks B located on the

rear panel of the CS1D or from the MONITOR B

headphone jacks located on the top panel and front

panel of the CS1D. You can select the monitor source

and set the output level.

Hint

MONITOR A/MONITOR B operations can also be

performed within the display (MON/CUE function

MONITOR A screen, MONITOR B screen). By using

these screens, you can make more detailed settings

than can be made in the MONITOR A/MONITOR B

sections.

Please note that the available functions differ

between MONITOR A and MONITOR B. The fol-

lowing table shows the monitor sources that can be

selected for each monitor output, and the functions

that are available.

• Differences between the MONITOR A and MONI-

TOR B functions

*The cue/solo signal can be output indirectly by

selecting MONITOR A as the monitor source.

MONITOR A MONITOR B

Output jacks

MONITOR OUT

jacks A

MONITOR OUT

jacks B

Headphone jack A Headphone jack B

Selectable

monitor

sources

2TR IN 1 2TR IN 1

2TR IN 2 2TR IN 2

ST A ST A

ST B ST B

DEFINE MONITOR A

DEFINE

Delay function ● ✕

Gate function ● ✕

DIRECT IN ● ●

COMM IN

●

DIMMER

●

Cue/solo

signal output

●

✕ (*)

Chapter 10. Monitor

111

Controls and functions of the MONITOR A/MONITOR B sections

The controls and functions of the MONITOR A/MONITOR B sections are explained below.

■ MONITOR A section ■ MONITOR B section

Using the MONITOR A section to monitor a signal

Here’s how to use the MONITOR A section to monitor the desired source.

[Procedure]

1. Make sure that your monitor system is connected

to MONITOR OUT jacks A located on the rear

panel of the CS1D. Alternatively, connect a set of

headphones to the MONITOR A headphone jack

located on the top panel or front panel of the CS1D.

Do not use the top panel PHONES MONITOR jack

simultaneously with the front panel MONITOR

headphone jack. Doing so may cause the CS1D to

malfunction due to excessive current.

When the PM1D system is in the initial state, the

settings of the MONITOR A section will be over-

ridden if the [CUE] switch of even one input chan-

nel, output channel, or DCA group is on, and the

cue signal will be output from MONITOR OUT

jacks A. The CUE ACTIVE LED (located in the

MASTER block CUE section) will light if there are

any currently active [CUE] switches.

DELAY

SOURCE

MONITOR A SOURCE [2TR IN 1]/

[2TR IN 2]/[ST A]/[ST B]/[DEFINE]

switches and LEDs

Select the monitor source for the

MONITOR A output. The switch

LED for the currently selected

source will light. (Only one source at

a time can be selected.)

MONITOR A DELAY [TIME]

encoder and [VALUE] indicator

MONITOR A DELAY [ON] switch

and LED

Control the delay built into the MONI-

TOR A output.

MONITOR A [LEVEL] volume

This analog volume controls the

output level of MONITOR A.

MONITOR A [L MONO]/[R MONO]

switches and LEDs

Switch the MONITOR A output

between stereo and monaural.

MONITOR A [ON] switch and LED

Turn the MONITOR A output on/off.

MONITOR A PHONES [LEVEL]

volume

This analog volume controls the

output level of the PHONES MON-

ITOR A jack.

SOURCE

MONITOR B SOURCE [2TR IN 1]/

[2TR IN 2]/[ST A]/[ST B]/[MONI-

TOR A]/[DEFINE] switches and

LEDs

Select the monitor source for the

MONITOR B output. The switch

LED for the currently selected

source will light. (Only one source

at a time can be selected.)

MONITOR B [LEVEL] volume

This analog volume controls the

output level of MONITOR B.

MONITOR B [ON] switch and LED

Turn the MONITOR B output on/off.

MONITOR B PHONES [LEVEL]

volume

This analog volume controls the

output level of the PHONES MON-

ITOR B jack.

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

112

• Detail of the CUE section

2. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[MON/CUE] switch several times to access the fol-

lowing MONITOR A screen.

• MONITOR A screen (MON/CUE function)

In the MONITOR A screen you can make various

settings related to the MONITOR A output. Here we

will specify the source that will be monitored when

the SOURCE [DEFINE] switch of the MONITOR A

section is pressed.

3. Use the buttons arranged in the DEFINE section of

the screen to select the source that will be moni-

tored when the SOURCE [DEFINE] switch is

pressed.

You can select from the following monitor sources.

• MIX 1–48 ........... Output signals of MIX buses 1–

• MATRIX 1–24.... Output signals of MATRIX buses

1–24

• 2TR IN 3–6 ........ Input signals from 2-TRACK IN

DIGITAL jacks 3–6 of the CS1D

console

Hint

In the MONITOR A screen you can also use func-

tions such as DIRECT IN to directly monitor the sig-

nal from a speciﬁc input jack, or COMM IN to

monitor the signal from a speciﬁc input jack via the

MONITOR A output when that signal exceeds a cer-

tain level. For details refer to “CS1D Reference Man-

ual (Software)”.

4. In the MASTER block MONITOR A section, press

one of the SOURCE [2TR IN 1]/[2TR IN 2]/[ST A]/

[ST B]/[DEFINE] switches to select the source that

you wish to monitor.

The following sources correspond to each switch.

• [2TR IN 1] switch.... The input signal from the 2-

TRACK IN DIGITAL 1 jack

or 2-TRACK IN ANALOG 1

jacks located on the CS1D

rear panel

• [2TR IN 2] switch.... The input signal from the 2-

TRACK IN DIGITAL 2 jack

or 2-TRACK IN ANALOG 2

jacks located on the CS1D

rear panel

• [ST A] switch ........... The output signal of the STE-

REO A channel

• [ST B] switch ........... The output signal of the STE-

REO B channel

•

[DEFINE] switch

....... The signal previously speci-

ﬁed in the display (MON/

CUE function MONITOR A

screen)

5. Turn on the MONITOR A [ON] switch.

6. Use the MONITOR A [LEVEL] volume to adjust the

output level from the MONITOR OUT A jacks.

Alternatively, use the MONITOR A [PHONES] vol-

ume to adjust the output level of the PHONES

MONITOR A jack.

Hint

The MONITOR A [LEVEL] volume and MONITOR

A [PHONES] volume are independent.

CUE ACTIVE LED

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[MON/CUE] switch

Chapter 10. Monitor

113

7. As necessary, use the DELAY [ON] switch and the

DELAY [TIME] encoder to set the dedicated delay

for MONITOR A.

The [ON] switch at left switches the delay on/off, and

the [TIME] encoder at right sets the delay time. The

delay time range is 0 msec – 750 msec.

8. If you wish to monitor the MONITOR A output in

monaural, turn on the [L MONO] switch or

[R MONO] switch.

According to the on/off status of the MONITOR A

[L MONO]/[R MONO] switches, the MONITOR A

output will change as shown on the following table.

MONITOR A [L MONO]/[R MONO] switches

Using the MONITOR B section to monitor a signal

Here’s how to use the MONITOR B section to monitor the desired source.

[Procedure]

1. Make sure that your monitor system is connected

to MONITOR OUT jacks B on the rear panel of the

CS1D. Alternatively, connect a set of headphones to

the MONITOR B headphone jack on the top panel

or front panel of the CS1D.

Do not use the top panel PHONES MONITOR jack

simultaneously with the front panel MONITOR

headphone jack. Doing so may cause the CS1D to

malfunction due to excessive current.

2. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[MON/CUE] switch several times to access the fol-

lowing MONITOR B screen.

• MONITOR B screen (MON/CUE function)

In the MONITOR B screen you can make various

settings related to the MONITOR B output. Here we

will specify the source that will be monitored when

the SOURCE [DEFINE] switch of the MONITOR B

section is pressed.

3. Use the buttons arranged in the DEFINE section of

the screen to select the source that will be moni-

tored when the SOURCE [DEFINE] switch is

pressed.

You can select from the following monitor sources.

• MIX 1–48 ........... Output signals of MIX buses 1–

• MATRIX 1–24.... Output signals of MATRIX buses

1–24

• 2TR IN 3–6......... Input signals from 2-TRACK IN

DIGITAL jacks 3–6 of the CS1D

console

[L MONO]

switch

[R MONO]

switch

MONITOR A output signal

Stereo signal

Monaural signal of left channel only

Monaural signal of right channel

only

Monaural signal of mixed left and

right channels

Dark Dark

Lit

Dark

Dark Lit

Lit

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[MON/CUE] switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

114

Hint

In the MONITOR B screen you can also use DIRECT

IN to directly monitor the signal from a speciﬁc

input jack. For details refer to “CS1D Reference Man-

ual (Software)”.

4. In the MASTER block MONITOR B section, press

one of the SOURCE [2TR IN 1]/[2TR IN 2]/[ST A]/

[ST B]/[MONITOR B]/[DEFINE] switches to select

the source that you wish to monitor.

The following sources correspond to each switch.

• [2TR IN 1] switch ....The input signal from the 2-

TRACK IN DIGITAL 1 jack

or 2-TRACK IN ANALOG 1

jacks located on the CS1D

rear panel

• [2TR IN 2] switch ....The input signal from the 2-

TRACK IN DIGITAL 2 jack

or 2-TRACK IN ANALOG 2

jacks located on the CS1D

rear panel

• [ST A] switch............The output signal of the STE-

REO A channel

• [ST B] switch............The output signal of the STE-

REO B channel

• [MONITOR A] switch

The same signal as the moni-

tor source currently selected

in the MONITOR A section

• [DEFINE] switch .....The signal previously speci-

ﬁed in the display (MON/

CUE function MONITOR B

screen)

5. Turn on the MONITOR B [ON] switch.

6. Use the MONITOR B [LEVEL] volume to adjust the

output level from the MONITOR OUT B jacks.

Alternatively, use the MONITOR B [PHONES] vol-

ume to adjust the output level of the PHONES

MONITOR B jack.

Chapter 10. Monitor

115

Using the Cue/Solo function

The PM1D system provides a ﬂexible Cue/Solo function. Here’s how to use it.

Cue mode and Solo mode

The input channels, output channels, and DCA groups of the CS1D each provide a [CUE] switch that is used by the Cue/

Solo function. The result of pressing the [CUE] switch will depend on whether CUE mode or SOLO mode is selected.

The two modes differ as follows.

• CUE mode

The cue signal from the channel/DCA group whose

[CUE] switch is pressed will be output via the dedi-

cated CUE bus from MONITOR OUT jacks A,

PHONES MONITOR A jack, and CUE OUT jacks

(the Cue function). Select this mode if you wish to

monitor the signal of a speciﬁc channel without

affecting other output buses.

• SOLO mode

The solo signal of only the channel/DCA group

whose [CUE] switch is pressed will be output from

the MIX, MATRIX, and STEREO buses, and the

remaining channels/DCA groups will be muted.

(This is the conventional “Solo function.”) The same

signal can also be monitored from MONITOR OUT

jacks A, PHONES MONITOR A jack, and CUE OUT

jacks.

Hint

To switch between CUE mode and SOLO mode,

press and hold the [SOLO] switch (located in the

MASTER block CUE section) for two seconds or

longer.

When SOLO mode is selected, you may exclude spe-

ciﬁc channels from the Solo operation (→p.119).

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

116

Cue/Solo groups

The cue/solo signals of the PM1D system can be categorized into the following three groups.

• INPUT CUE group

These are the cue/solo signals of the input channels.

They are enabled when the [CUE] switch of an input

channel or ST IN channel is pressed.

• Input channel [CUE] switch

• ST IN channel [CUE] switch

• DCA CUE group

These are the cue/solo signals of the DCA groups.

They are enabled when a [CUE] switch in the DCA

GROUP block is pressed.

• DCA GROUP block [CUE] switch

Hint

For details on DCA groups, refer to “Chapter 7. DCA

groups/Mute groups.”

• OUTPUT CUE group

These are the cue/solo signals of output channels.

They are enabled when the [CUE] switch of a MIX

channel, MATRIX channel, or STEREO A/B channel

is pressed.

• MIX/MATRIX channel [CUE] switch

• STEREO A/B channel [CUE] switch

It is not possible for the [CUE] switches of these

three groups to be on simultaneously. The group

for the last-pressed [CUE] switch will be given pri-

ority, and the cue/solo signals of that group will be

enabled.

For details on cue operation, refer to “CS1D Refer-

ence Manual (Hardware)” (→p.81).

CUE

10 11 12

CUE CUE

ST OUTPUT

Chapter 10. Monitor

117

Controls and functions of the CUE section

Operations for the Cue/Solo function are performed in the CUE section of the MASTER block or in the display (MON/

CUE function CUE/SOLO screen). The controls and functions of the CUE section are explained below.

Using the Cue function

Here’s how to use the [CUE] switch of the desired channel/DCA group to monitor the cue signal.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[MON/CUE] switch several times to access the fol-

lowing MONITOR A screen.

• MONITOR A screen (MON/CUE function)

2. Make sure that the CUE INTERRUPTION button

located at the right edge of the screen is turned on.

The CUE INTERRUPTION button is an on/off

switch for the interrupt from the cue signal of the

[CUE] switch. Be aware that if this button is off,

pressing a [CUE] switch will not affect MONITOR

OUT jacks A.

[CUE OUT LEVEL] volume

This knob sets the output level of the

signal output from the CUE OUT jacks.

[OUTPUT PFL] switch and LED

This selects the location in the signal

route at which the signal will be moni-

tored when you press the [CUE] switch of

an output channel (MIX channel, MATRIX

channel, STEREO A/B channel).

[DCA PRE PAN] switch and LED

This switch selects the location in the

signal route at which the signal will be

monitored when a [CUE] switch in the

DCA GROUP block is used to monitor

a DCA group to which input channels

are assigned.

[LAST CUE] switch and LED

This switch selects either LAST CUE mode

(LED lit) or MIX CUE mode (LED dark) as

the operation when the [CUE] switch is

pressed for two or more channels.

CUE ACTIVE [INPUT]/[DCA]/[OUT-

PUT] LEDs

These LEDs indicate the monitoring

status. If even one [CUE] switch is

currently on, the LED for its group will

light.

[SOLO] switch and LED

This selects either CUE mode (LED

dark) or SOLO mode (LED blinks) as

the monitoring method for the [CUE]

switches. Press and hold this switch

more than 2 seconds to set the SOLO

mode

[INPUT AFL] switch and LED

This switch selects the output location of the signal that is

sent to the CUE bus when a [CUE] switch of an input

channel (input channel, ST IN channel) is pressed.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[MON/CUE] switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

118

3. Use the [INPUT AFL] switch located in the CUE

section of the MASTER block to specify the posi-

tion from which the signal will be sent to the CUE

bus when the [CUE] switch of an input channel is

pressed.

When the [INPUT AFL] switch is off, the post-fader

signal will be sent to the CUE bus. When this switch

is on, the pre-fader signal will be sent.

4. Use the [OUTPUT PFL] switch of the CUE section

to specify the position from which the signal will be

sent to the CUE bus when the [CUE] switch of an

output channel is pressed.

When the [OUTPUT PFL] switch is off, the pre-

fader signal will be sent to the CUE bus. When this

switch is on, the post-fader signal will be sent.

5. Use the [DCA PRE PAN] switch of the CUE section

to specify the position from which the signal will be

sent to the CUE bus when the [CUE] switch of a

DCA group is pressed.

When the [DCA PRE PAN] switch is off, the post-

pan signal will be sent to the CUE bus. When the

switch is on, the pre-pan signal will be sent.

Hint

The setting of this switch only affects DCA groups to

which input channels are assigned. For DCA groups

to which output channels are assigned, the signal will

always be sent to the CUE bus from a location imme-

diately after the [ON] switch.

6. Use the [LAST CUE] switch of the CUE section to

select either LAST CUE mode ([LAST CUE] switch

on) or MIX CUE mode ([LAST CUE] switch off) as

the mode of operation when two or more [CUE]

switches within the same group are pressed.

The operation of the two modes differs as follows.

• LAST CUE mode ([LAST CUE] switch is on)

Only the channel/DCA group whose [CUE] switch

was pressed last will be monitored.

Hint

In LAST CUE mode, pressing the [CUE] switch of a

channel will also cause the [SEL] switch to operate in

tandem, selecting that channel.

• MIX CUE mode ([LAST CUE] switch is off)

All channels/DCA groups within the same cue

group whose [CUE] switches are on will be moni-

tored.

Hint

It is not possible to simultaneously turn on [CUE]

switches that belong to different groups. The group

to which the last-pressed [CUE] switch belongs will

take priority, and the signals of that group can be

monitored.

In this case of channels that are paired, both channels

will be turned on.

7. Make sure that the [SOLO] switch of the CUE sec-

tion is off (Cue mode).

8. Turn on the [CUE] switch of the desired channel/

DCA group.

The cue signal of the corresponding channel will be

output from MONITOR OUT jacks A, the PHONES

MONITOR A jack, and the CUE OUT jacks.

9. To defeat cue, press the currently-on [CUE]

switch(es) once again.

Hint

When you press the [LAST CUE] switch to change

from LAST CUE mode to MIX CUE mode (or vice

versa), the previously-valid cue (solo) will be can-

celled.

Chapter 10. Monitor

119

Using the Solo function

Here’s how to use the Solo function of the PM1D.

[Procedure]

1. Use the [LAST CUE] switch of the CUE section to

select either LAST CUE mode ([LAST CUE] switch

on) or MIX CUE mode ([LAST CUE] switch off) as

the mode of operation when two or more [CUE]

switches within the same group are pressed.

2. Turn on the [SOLO] switch of the CUE section for

two seconds or longer.

Solo mode will be selected. In Solo mode, only the

signal of the channel/DCA group whose [CUE]

switch was pressed will be output to the MIX,

MATRIX, and STEREO buses. The same signal can

also be monitored from MONITOR OUT jacks A,

the PHONES MONITOR A jack, and the CUE OUT

jacks.

3. If you wish to exclude only a speciﬁc channel from

the Solo operation, press the [MON/CUE] switch

(located in the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block)

several times to access the following CUE/SOLO

screen.

• CUE/SOLO screen (MON/CUE function)

4. In the SOLO SAFE section of the CUE/SOLO

screen, select the channel(s) that you wish to

exclude from the Solo operation. (You may select

more than one.)

Channels that are selected in the SOLO SAFE section

will not be muted in Solo mode. For example, this is

a convenient way to avoid soloing channels that must

not be soloed accidentally, such as the main STEREO

channel or MIX channels that are sending signals to

an external recorder.

Each button corresponds to the following channels.

• INPUT 1–96 {1–48}.Input channels 1–96 {1–48}

• ST IN 1–8 {1–4} ....... ST IN channels 1–8 {1–4}

• MIX 1–48 ................. MIX channels 1–48

• MATRIX 1–24.......... MATRIX channels 1–24

• STEREO A/B............ STEREO A/B channels

5. Turn on the [CUE] switch of the desired channel/

DCA group.

Only the signal of the corresponding channel/DCA

group will be sent to the various buses, and other

channels/DCA groups will be muted. The same sig-

nal will also be output from MONITOR OUT jacks

A, the PHONES MONITOR A jack, and the CUE

OUT jacks.

6. To defeat Solo, press the currently-on [CUE]

switches once again.

Hint

When you press the [LAST CUE] switch to change

from LAST CUE mode to MIX CUE mode (or vice

versa), the previously-valid cue (solo) will be can-

celled.

Normally, cue/solo operations can be performed

independently of the scene memory. However if you

recall a scene that causes a channel to switch from

monaural to paired, both channels will be turned on

if either of the two channels had been set to Cue/Solo

On until then.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[MON/CUE] switch

120

Chapter 11. Talkback/Oscillator

This chapter explains how to use the talkback and oscillator functions.

Talkback

The CS1D console has input jacks for two talkback mics: a TALKBACK 1 jack (top panel) and a TALKBACK 2 jack (rear

panel). The talkback signals that are input from these two jacks are mixed inside the CS1D and can be sent to the desired

bus or output jack.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[MON/CUE] switch several times to access the fol-

lowing TALKBACK screen (MON/CUE function).

In the TALKBACK screen you can make settings for

the TALKBACK 1/2 jacks, and select the destination

of the talkback signal.

• TALKBACK screen (MON/CUE function)

2. In the TALKBACK 1/TALKBACK 2 section of the

TALKBACK screen, turn phantom power on/off,

select normal/reversed phase, and set the input

sensitivity for the TALKBACK 1/2 jacks.

The following items can be set in the TALKBACK 1/

TALKBACK 2 section of the TALKBACK screen.

3. Use the buttons in the ASSIGN section of the

TALKBACK screen to select the bus or output jack

to which the talkback signal will be sent. (You may

select more than one.)

Each button corresponds to the following buses and

output jacks.

• STEREO ............. STEREO bus

• MONITOR B ..... MONITOR OUT jacks B

• MIX 1–48 ........... MIX buses 1–48

• MATRIX 1–24.... MATRIX buses 1–24

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[MON/CUE] switch

Indicates the peak level of the signals that are

input from the TALKBACK 1/2 jacks.

Turn phantom power on/off for the

TALKBACK 1/2 jacks.

Switch the signals

that are input from

the TALKBACK 1/2

jacks between nor-

mal/reversed phase.

(Phase is reversed

when button is on.)

Select the input

sensitivity of the

TALKBACK 1/TALK-

BACK 2 jacks. The

selectable levels are

+10 dB or –44 dB.

Chapter 11. Talkback/Oscillator

121

Hint

It is not possible to send the talkback signal directly

to MONITOR OUT jacks A. However by patching

the talkback signal to an input channel in the IN

PATCH screen (INPUT PATCH function), you can

monitor it from MONITOR OUT jacks A as a con-

ventional input signal.

If necessary, you can also output the talkback signal

directly from a desired output jack. For details refer

to “CS1D Reference Manual (Software)”.

4. In the TALKBACK section of the MASTER block,

press the [TB ON] switch.

The [TB ON] switch can be used in the following

two ways.

• Press and hold the switch for two seconds or

longer

This is the conventional way to use talkback. The

LED will be lit and talkback will be on as long as

you continue to hold the switch. It will turn off

when you release the switch.

• Press and immediately release the switch

The LED will remain lit even after you release the

switch, and talkback will stay on. When you press

and immediately release the switch, talkback will

be turned off.

While talkback is on, the signal from the talkback

mic will be sent to the bus/output jack that you

selected in step 3. At this time, the two talkback

mics connected to the TALKBACK 1 jack (top

panel) and the TALKBACK 2 jack (rear panel) can

be used in exactly the same way. As necessary, use

the TALKBACK [LEVEL] volumes to adjust the

input level of each jack.

MASTER block

[TB ON] switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

122

Oscillator

The PM1D provides an internal oscillator for test purposes, and can send a sine wave or pink noise to the desired bus.

This can be used to check the operation of devices connected to an output unit, or to check the acoustical characteristics

of a concert location.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[MON/CUE] switch several times to access the fol-

lowing OSCILLATOR screen (MON/CUE func-

tion).

In the OSCILLATOR screen you can select the out-

put waveform of the oscillator, and select the output

destination of the signal.

• OSCILLATOR screen (MON/CUE function)

2. In the PINK/BURST section of the OSCILLATOR

screen, use the PINK NOISE button and BURST

NOISE button to select the type of signal that the

oscillator will output.

3. If you selected sine wave in step 2, use the SINE

WAVE FREQ section to specify the frequency of the

sine wave.

4. Use the LEVEL knob in the OSC section of the

OSCILLATOR screen to set the output level of the

oscillator.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[MON/CUE] switch

If this button is on, pink noise will be sent to the speci-

ﬁed bus or output jack.

If this button is on, repeated bursts of pink noise will be

sent to the speciﬁed bus or output jack. You can use

the on-screen knobs to adjust the duration (WIDTH) of

the noise itself and the spacing of the silent portions

(INTERVAL).

Specify the duration of the noise itself when the

BURST NOISE button is on.

Specify the spacing

of the silent inter-

vals when the

BURST NOISE but-

ton is on.

This HPF/LPF can be used to process

the noise when either the PINK NOISE

or BURST NOISE buttons are on.

Use the buttons located below to turn

each ﬁlter on/off, and the knobs located

above to adjust the cutoff frequency.

If both the PINK NOISE and BURST NOISE buttons

are off, a sine wave will be sent to the speciﬁed bus or

output jack. Use the SINE WAVE FREQ section to

specify the frequency of the sine wave.

These buttons set the sine wave to

preset frequency values (10 kHz/

kHz/100 Hz).

This knob continuously adjusts the

frequency of the sine wave.

Chapter 11. Talkback/Oscillator

123

5. Use the buttons in the ASSIGN section of the

OSCILLATOR screen to select the bus to which the

oscillator signal will be sent.

Each button corresponds to the following buses.

•

STEREO

..............STEREO bus

•

MIX 1–48

............MIX buses 1–48

•

MATRIX 1–24

....MATRIX buses 1–24

Hint

If necessary, you can also output the oscillator signal

directly from the desired output jack. For details

refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Software)”.

6. Press the [OSC ON] switch in the OSCILLATOR

section of the MASTER block.

The oscillator signal will be sent to the bus or output

jack you selected in step 5. To turn off the oscillator,

press the same switch once again.

MASTER block

[OSC ON]

switch

124

Chapter 12. Internal effects

This chapter explains how to use the internal effects.

About the internal effects of the PM1D system

The PM1D system contains eight effect units. For each effect unit, you can select one of 29 effect types.

The inputs and outputs of these internal effects are not ﬁxed to any particular bus or channel. They can be freely patched

to any output channel or input channel, or used as insert-in/insert-out in any channel.

•

Signal ﬂow for the internal effects

If the signal path is assigned to only one side of the effect, it will be processed as monaural input/stereo output.

•

When the signal path is assigned to only one input

channel

If the signal path is assigned to both input channels, the

processing will depend on the type of effect that is cur-

rently selected. “STEREO type” effects process the L/R

input signals independently. “MIX type” effects mix the

L/R inputs before inputting them to the effect, and then

output in stereo.

•

When the signal path is assigned to both input

channels

STEREO type effects

MIX type effects

MIX channels 1–48 output

OUTPUT PATCH

INPUT PATCH

Input channels 1–96 {1–48} input

EFFECT 1

MATRIX channels 1–24 output ST IN channels 1–8 {1–4} input

STEREO A/B channels output Input channels 1–96 {1–48} insert in

Input channels 1–96 {1–48} insert out

EFFECT 2

ST IN channels 1–8 {1–4} insert in

ST IN channels 1–8 {1–4} insert out

• • • • •

MIX channels 1–48 insert in

MIX channels 1–48 insert out MATRIX channels 1–24 insert in

EFFECT 8

MATRIX channels 1–24 insert out STEREO A/B channels insert in

STEREO A/B channels insert out

INPUT L R L RETURN

EFFECT

R RETURN

INPUT L or R

L RETURNINPUT L

EFFECT L

R RETURNINPUT R

EFFECT R

L RETURNINPUT L

EFFECT

R RETURNINPUT R

Chapter 12. Internal effects

125

Patching an internal effect

To use an internal effect, you must ﬁrst patch the input and output of the effect to an appropriate signal path. Here we

will explain two typical methods of patching.

Using an internal effect via the MIX bus

Here’s how you can patch MIX channel outputs to the effect input, and the effect outputs to input channels. As an exam-

ple, we will explain how to use a VARI type MIX bus as the effect send, and an input channel as the effect return.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

INPUT [PAN/ROUTING] switch several times to

access the following CH to MIX screen.

•

CH to MIX screen (PAN/ROUTING function)

2. Use the VARI/FIX buttons located at the left of the

screen to select “VARI” as the type for the MIX bus

that will be used as the effect send.

Hint

The VARI/FIX selection is made in groups of two

adjacent odd-numbered

→

even-numbered MIX

buses. If you wish to use the effect input in stereo, it

is convenient to set these two MIX buses as a pair.

3. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[EFFECT] switch several times to access the

EFFECT 1 – EFFECT 8 screen for the desired effect.

•

EFFECT 1 screen (EFFECT function)

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

INPUT [PAN/ROUTING] switch

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[EFFECT] switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

126

The EFFECT function has eight screens for the eight

effects EFFECT 1 – EFFECT 8, allowing settings to be

made independently.

4. Click the SEL button located in the INPUT L sec-

tion at the upper left of the screen.

When you click the SEL button of the INPUT L/

INPUT R section, a CH SELECT popup window will

appear, allowing you to select the signal path that will

be patched to the input of the effect.

•

CH SELECT popup window

In this window, you will ﬁrst use the buttons in the

top row to select the type of signal route, and then

use the remaining buttons to select an individual

channel. You can select from the following signal

routes.

•

CH 1 INS – CH 96 INS {CH 1 INS – CH 48 INS}

Input channel 1–96 {1–48} insert out

•

ST 1 INS–ST 8 INS {ST 1 INS–ST 4 INS} (L/R)

ST IN channel 1–8 {1–4} insert out

•

MIX 1 – MIX 48

MIX channel 1–48 output

•

STA (L/R)

STEREO A channel (L/R) output

•

STB (L/R)

STEREO B channel (L/R) output

•

MATRIX 1 – MATRIX 24

MATRIX channel 1–24 output

•

MIX 1 INS – MIX 48 INS

MIX channel 1–48 insert out

•

MATRIX 1 INS – MATRIX 24 INS

MATRIX channel 1–24 insert out

•

STA (L/R) INS

STEREO A channel (L/R) insert out

•

STB (L/R) INS

STEREO B channel (L/R) insert out

•

OFF

If you click this button, the selection will be can-

celled.

For channels that are already used by another effect,

the NAME will be displayed in white characters on

a red background.

Please be aware that selecting one of these channels

may affect other functionality.

5. From the buttons in the top row of the screen, click

the MIX button, and then click the number of the

MIX bus that you set to VARI type in step 2.

When you click the number, you will return to the

previous screen. As necessary, assign a MIX channel

to the R input of the effect as well.

Hint

If one of two paired MIX channels is patched to the L

input of the effect, the other MIX channel will auto-

matically be patched to the R input of the effect.

6. Click the SEL button located in the OUTPUT L sec-

tion at the upper right of the screen.

When you click the SEL button of the OUTPUT L/

OUTPUT R section, a CH SELECT popup window

will appear, allowing you to select the signal route

that will be patched to the effect output.

• CH SELECT popup window

You can select from the following signal routes.

• CH 1 – CH 96 {CH 1– CH48}

Input channel 1–96 {1–48} input

• CH 1 INS – CH 96 INS {CH 1 INS – CH 48 INS}

Input channel 1–96 {1–48} insert in

• ST 1 –ST8 {ST 1 – ST 4} (L/R)

ST IN channel 1–8 {1–4} input

• ST 1 INS–ST 8 INS {ST 1 INS–ST 4 INS} (L/R)

ST IN channel 1–8 {1–4} insert in

• MIX 1 INS – MIX 48 INS

MIX channel 1–48 insert in

• MATRIX 1 INS – MATRIX 24 INS

MATRIX channel 1–24 insert in

• STA (L/R) INS

STEREO A channel (L/R) insert in

• STB (L/R) INS

STEREO B channel (L/R) insert in

• OFF

If you click this button, the selection will be can-

celled.

For channels that are already used by another effect,

the NAME will be displayed in white characters on

a red background.

Please be aware that selecting one of these channels

may affect other functionality.

Chapter 12. Internal effects

127

7. In the row of buttons at the top of the screen, click

either the IN 1-48 button or the IN 49-96 button

{on the 48 channel mode, this button has no effect},

and then click the button for the channel that you

wish to patch to the L output of the effect.

When you click the button, you will return to the

previous screen. As necessary, assign a MIX channel

to the R output of the effect as well.

Hint

If one side of a ST IN channel (or of two paired input

channels) is patched to the L output of the effect, the

other side of the ST IN channel (or paired input

channel) will automatically be patched to the R out-

put of the effect.

8. Adjust the send level of the signal that is sent from

the input channel to which the input source is con-

nected to the MIX bus patched to the effect.

Hint

To raise the MIX send level, you can either use the

INPUT block (or ST IN block), or the SELECTED

INPUT CHANNEL block. By using the MIX SEND

[PRE] switch located in the SELECTED INPUT

CHANNEL block, you can select whether to send the

pre-fader or post-fader signal for each input channel.

For details refer to “Chapter 4. Basic operation for

input channels.”

9. In the MIX OUTPUT block, turn on the MIX [ON]

switch for the corresponding MIX channel. Use the

MIX [LEVEL] encoder to adjust the master send

level of the effect.

Hint

If the MIX channels are paired, the left (odd-num-

bered) encoder will function as a MIX [BAL]

encoder to adjust the volume balance between the

two channels, and the right (even-numbered)

encoder will function as a MIX [LEVEL] encoder to

adjust the output level of the two channels in com-

mon.

For details refer to “

Chapter 5. Basic operation for out-

put channels

.”

10. Turn on the [ON] switch for the input channel (or

ST IN channel) to which the L/R output of the effect

is patched, and use the fader to adjust the effect

return level.

Hint

The effect input/output levels can be viewed in the

EFFECT function screen.

PAIR

ON ON

MIX [LEVEL]

encoder

MIX OUTPUT block

MIX [ON]

switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

128

Inserting an internal effect into a channel

With this method, an internal effect can be patched between the insert out and insert in of a desired channel. As an

example, we will explain how to insert an effect into an input channel.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[EFFECT] switch several times to access the desired

effect screen from EFFECT 1– EFFECT 8.

• EFFECT 1 screen (EFFECT function)

2. Click the SEL button located in the INPUT L sec-

tion at the upper left of the screen.

The CH SELECT popup window will appear.

• CH SELECT popup window

3. In the row of buttons at the top of the screen, click

either the “IN 1-48 INS. OUT” button or the “IN

49-96 INS. OUT” button {on the 48 channel model,

this button has no effect}.

The buttons labeled “INS. OUT” are used to patch

the effect input to the insert out of each channel. You

may also select a MIX channel or MATRIX channel

as the insert destination.

For channels that are already used by another chan-

nel, the NAME will be displayed in white characters

on a red background.

Please be aware that selecting one of these channels

may affect other functionality.

4. Click the button for the channel that you wish to

patch to the L input of the effect.

You will return to the previous effect screen, and the

insert out selected for the INPUT L section will be

displayed. As necessary, assign an insert out to the R

channel of the effect as well.

Hint

If one of two paired channels (or a stereo channel) is

patched to the L input of the effect, the other channel

will automatically be patched to the R input of the effect.

5. Click the SEL button located in the OUTPUT L sec-

tion at the upper right of the screen.

The CH SELECT popup window will appear, allow-

ing you to select a signal route as the effect send des-

tination.

• CH SELECT popup window

6. In the row of buttons at the top of the screen, click

either the IN 1-48 INS. IN” button or the “IN 49-96

INS. IN” button {on the 48 channel mode, this but-

ton has no effect}.

The buttons labeled “INS. IN” are used to patch the

effect output to the insert in of each channel. Nor-

mally, you will select the insert in of the same chan-

nel that you selected in step 3.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[EFFECT] switch

Chapter 12. Internal effects

129

For channels that are already used by another chan-

nel, the NAME will be displayed in white characters

on a red background.

Please be aware that selecting one of these channels

may affect other functionality.

7. Click the button of the channel that you wish to

patch to the L output of the effect.

You will return to the previous effect screen, and the

selected channel will appear in the OUTPUT L sec-

tion. In the same way, assign the insert in of the

desired channel to the R channel output.

Hint

If one side of a pair of channels (or a stereo channel)

is patched to the L output of the effect, the other

channel will automatically be patched to the R out-

put of the effect.

8. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

INPUT [PATCH] several times to access the follow-

ing INSERT/DIRECT POINT screen (IN PATCH

function).

• INSERT/DIRECT POINT screen (IN PATCH

function)

• INSERT/DIRECT POINT

9. For the channel into which the effect was inserted,

click the INS. button to turn it on. As necessary,

select the INSERT I/O POINT.

If you inserted the effect into an output channel,

press the OUTPUT [PATCH] switch several times

to access the INSERT POINT screen (OUT PATCH

function) and make settings in the same way.

10. Turn on the [ON] switch of the input channel (or

ST IN channel) into which the effect was inserted,

and use the fader to adjust the input level.

The input/output levels of the effect can be viewed in

the EFFECT function screen.

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

130

Basic operation of the effect screen

This section explains how you can use the EF function screen to edit effect parameters, and recall/store effect library data.

Editing effect parameters

In the EFFECT function screen, you can use the knobs or buttons to edit effect parameters.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[EFFECT] switch several times to access the desired

screen from EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8.

• EFFECT 1 screen (EFFECT function)

2. Use the TYPE knob in the upper middle of the

screen to select the effect type.

The TYPE knob switches the preset settings that are

provided for the currently selected effect.

Depending on the effect that is selected, this setting

may not be available.

3. Use the knobs and buttons in the lower part of the

screen to set the effect parameters.

The lower part of the screen contains knobs and but-

tons that are used to edit the effect parameters. The

parameter contents will differ depending on the cur-

rently selected effect. When you change the type in

step 2, the setting values of the various parameters

will change accordingly.

Hint

Effect parameter settings can be saved in the effect

library, independently of scene memories. (For the

Save procedure, refer to p.133.)

[Procedure]

Using the encoders to operate effect parameters

When the EFFECT function EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8

screens are displayed, you can use the encoders of the

MIX OUTPUT block to control the effect parameters.

1. Access one of the EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8 screens.

2. Click the ASSIGN button located in the center of

the screen to turn it on.

The parameters of the currently selected effect will be

assigned to the MIX [LEVEL/BAL] encoders as shown in

the following diagram. At this time, the MIX [NAME]

indicator of the MIX OUTPUT block will show the

parameter name (up to four characters).

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[EFFECT] switch

ASSIGN button

Chapter 12. Internal effects

131

Hint

•When the EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8 screens are dis-

played, you can obtain the same result by holding

down the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch located in the

data entry block and pressing the MIX LAYER [1-

24] switch or [25-48] switch.

•The ASSIGN button on/off setting is common to

all of the EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8 screens. If you

switch between EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8 screens

when the ASSIGN button is on, the parameters of

the new screen will be assigned.

3. To return to the previous state, click the ASSIGN

button to turn it off.

The encoder functions will return to their previous

state.

Hint

The encoder functions will also return to their previ-

ous state if you access a screen other than EFFECT 1–

EFFECT 8, or if you press either the MIX LAYER [1-

24] or [25-48] switch.

Recalling effect data from the library

It is not possible to switch the effect type from within the EFFECT function screen. If you wish to change the effect type,

you must recall effect data that uses the desired effect. Here’s how you can recall (load) existing effect data from the effect

library.

Hint

The libraries of the PM1D system are an area of internal memory that stores system settings for later reuse, and are

independent of the scene memories. There are other libraries in addition to the effect library explained here, such as

the patch library and EQ library.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[EFFECT] switch several times to access the desired

screen from EFFECT 1 – EFFECT 8.

• EFFECT 1 screen (EFFECT function)

PAI R PAIR

PAI R

PAI R PAIR

PAI R

MIX

LAYER

PAI R PAIR

PAI R

Encoders 1–12

Encoders 13–24

CS1D MIX OUTPUT block

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[EFFECT] switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

132

2. Click the EFFECT LIBRARY button located in the

upper right of the screen.

The EFFECT LIBRARY popup window will appear,

in which you can recall/store effect data from/to the

effect library.

• EFFECT LIBRARY button

• EFFECT LIBRARY popup window

3. Click the library list at the right side of the screen

(or use the CURSOR [▲]/[▼] switches of the data

entry block) to select the desired effect data.

When you click the desired number in the library list,

the highlighted area will move to that line. The con-

tents of the data selected at this time will be displayed

in the left side of the screen, allowing you to ﬁnd the

effect you want.

4. Click the RECALL button.

The selected effect data will be loaded into the PM1D

system.

You will exit the library popup window and return to

the previous screen.

5. Edit the effect parameters as necessary.

This displays the effect type

and parameter settings of

the data selected in the

library list. In this window

you can also edit effect

parameters and re-save

them in the library.

This is the library list

which lists the data

stored in the library.

The row currently

selected for opera-

tions will be high-

lighted.

These buttons are

used to store or

recall library data.

Chapter 12. Internal effects

133

Storing effect data to the library

You can store (save) effect parameter settings in the effect library for later re-use.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[EFFECT] switch several times to select the desired

screen from EFFECT 1 – EFFECT 8.

2. Click the EFFECT LIBRARY button located in the

upper right of the screen.

The EFFECT LIBRARY popup window will appear.

• EFFECT LIBRARY button

• EFFECT LIBRARY popup window

3. From the library list, select the number into which

you wish to store the data, and click that line.

Data displayed as “READ ONLY” contains factory

preset data. It is not possible to overwrite data onto

these numbers.

4. Click the STORE button.

The LIBRARY STORE popup window will appear, in

which you can assign a name to the data that you are

storing.

• LIBRARY STORE popup window

5. Use the character palette to assign a name to the

data.

For details on using the character palette, refer to

p.20.

6. Click the STORE button.

A window will ask you to conﬁrm the Store opera-

tion.

• Store confirmation window

7. To execute the Store operation, click the OK button.

You will exit the library popup window and return to

the previous screen.

If you click the CANCEL button instead of the OK

button, the Store operation will be cancelled and you

will return to the library popup window.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[EFFECT] switch

134

Chapter 13. Graphic EQ

The PM1D system provides twenty-four 31-band graphic EQ modules. This chapter explains how to operate the graphic

EQ.

Inserting a graphic EQ into a channel

The 24 GEQ (graphic EQ) modules built into the PM1D system can be patched to the insert-out/insert-in of a desired

channel. Here we will explain how to insert a graphic EQ into an input channel.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[GEQ] switch several times to access the following

GEQ PARAMETER screen.

• GEQ PARAMETER screen (GEQ function)

In the GEQ PARAMETER screen you can select a

speciﬁc GEQ module, select the patch destination

channel, and set the parameters.

2. Click the MODULE button in the upper left of the

screen.

A GEQ SELECT popup window will appear, allowing

you to select a GEQ module (1–24).

• GEQ SELECT popup window

3. Select the desired module from GEQ 1 – GEQ 24,

and click the corresponding button.

When you click a button, you will return to the GEQ

PARAMETER screen. Notice that the selected mod-

ule is displayed at the right of the MODULE button.

4. Click the INSERT button located at the right of the

MODULE button.

The GEQ PATCH SELECT popup window will

appear, allowing you to select the patch destination

for the GEQ module.

• GEQ PATCH SELECT popup window

In this window, you will ﬁrst use the top row of but-

tons to select the type of channel, and then use the

remaining buttons to select the channel number.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[GEQ] switch

Chapter 13. Graphic EQ

135

The following signal routes can be selected as a patch

destination.

• IN 1-48 INSERT OUT

Patch to the insert-out/insert-in of an input chan-

nel 1–48 or ST IN channel 1–4.

• IN 49–96 INSERT OUT {this button is not valid

for the 48 channel model}

Patch to the insert-out/insert-in of an input chan-

nel 49–96 or ST IN channel 5–8.

• MIX INSERT OUT

Patch to the insert-out/insert-in of a MIX channel

1–48.

• MATRIX INSERT OUT

Patch to the insert-out/insert-in of a MATRIX

channel 1–24.

• STEREO A (L/R)

Patch to the insert-out/insert-in of the STEREO A

channel (L or R).

• STEREO B (L/R)

Patch to the insert-out/insert-in of the STEREO B

channel (L or R).

Hint

If the short name of a channel is displayed on a red

background, this indicates that some other item (an

internal effect, input/output unit, or another GEQ)

has already been inserted into that channel. Be aware

that if you select such a channel as the patch destina-

tion for a GEQ module, the previously-inserted item

will be defeated.

5. In the top row of the screen, click either the 1-48

INSERT OUT button or the 49-96 INSERT OUT

button {this button is not valid for the 48 channel

model}, and then click one of the buttons in the

lower part of the screen to select the channel num-

ber.

When you click a number, you will return to the pre-

vious GEQ PARAMETER screen. Notice that the

module you selected is displayed at the right of the

INSERT button.

Hint

If one side of a stereo channel (or of two paired chan-

nels) is patched to one of two adjacent odd-num-

bered → even-numbered GEQ modules, the

remaining channel will automatically be assigned to

the other GEQ module.

If you turn on the LINK button of the GEQ PARAM-

ETER screen, adjacent odd-numbered → even-num-

bered GEQ modules will be linked.

6. Turn on the GEQ ON/OFF button located in the

upper middle of the screen.

Hint

The GEQ can also be switched on/off in the GEQ

ASSIGN 1-12/13/24 screens.

7. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

INPUT [PATCH] switch several times to access the

INSERT/DIRECT POINT screen (IN PATCH func-

tion).

• INSERT/DIRECT POINT screen (IN PATCH

function)

If an input channel is selected as the GEQ insert, the

INS. button of the corresponding channel in the

INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen will automatically be

turned on.

• INSERT/DIRECT POINT

8. If necessary, change the INSERT I/O POINT.

• The INS. button will switch on/off only when you

select/cancel the insert destination in the GEQ

PARAMETER screen. Selecting/canceling the GEQ

insert destination in the IN PATCH/OUT PATCH

screen will not operate this function.

• In the INSERT/DIRECT POINT screen you can

always switch the INS. button on/off.

• If you insert a graphic EQ into an output channel,

press the OUTPUT [PATCH] switch several times to

access the INSERT POINT screen (OUT PATCH

function), and make the setting in the same way.

• If you defeat GEQ insertion in the GEQ PARAME-

TER screen, the INS. button of the corresponding

channel will automatically be turned off.

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

136

Controlling a graphic EQ

To control a graphic EQ, you can either use the virtual faders and virtual knobs shown in the display, or the DCA faders

of the CS1D console.

Controlling a graphic EQ from the display

Here’s how to control the desired GEQ module by using the virtual faders and virtual knobs shown in the GEQ function

screen.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[GEQ] switch several times to access the GEQ

PARAMETER screen.

• GEQ PARAMETER screen (GEQ function)

2. Click the MODULE button located in the upper left

of the screen to select the GEQ module that you

wish to control.

Make sure that the GEQ ON/OFF button is turned

on. Also make sure that the corresponding module

has been inserted into an appropriate channel, and

that insertion has been enabled for that channel.

Hint

An alternate way to select the desired GEQ module is

to use the GEQ ASSIGN 1-12/13-24 screens of the

GEQ function.

3. Use the LIMIT section (located in the screen at the

right of the faders) to specify the range of the fad-

ers.

In the LIMIT section you can select the maximum

change and direction of change produced by the fad-

ers. You can select ±15 dB, ±12 dB, ±6 dB (these are

bi-directional, allowing boost or cut), or –24 dB (cut

only).

• LIMIT section

4. Operate the virtual faders in the screen.

The numerical boxes below the faders will indicate

the amount of boost/cut.

Hint

By clicking the EQ FLAT button located below the

LIMIT section, you can reset all faders to the 0 dB

position.

5. As necessary, operate the four notch ﬁlters located

at the bottom of the screen.

Four notch ﬁlters can be used for each GEQ module.

The NOTCH 1 – NOTCH 4 buttons turn each ﬁlter

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[GEQ] switch

Chapter 13. Graphic EQ

137

on/off, the Q knobs adjust the steepness, and the F

knobs adjust the center frequency.

• Notch ﬁlters

Hint

Notch ﬁlters 1–4 are independent of the graphic EQ,

and are not affected by the GEQ ON/OFF button. If

necessary, you can access the graphic EQ module and

use only the notch ﬁlters.

Controlling a graphic EQ from the DCA faders

Here’s how to control the desired GEQ module in realtime by using the twelve DCA faders in the DCA GROUP block of

the console. When this method is used, the currently selected GEQ module is divided into three frequency bands which

are operated individually.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[GEQ] switch several times to access the GEQ

PARAMETER screen.

• GEQ PARAMETER screen (GEQ function)

2. Click the MODULE button located in the upper left

of the screen, and select the GEQ module that you

wish to control.

Make sure that the GEQ ON/OFF button is turned

on. Also make sure that the corresponding module is

inserted into an appropriate channel, and that inser-

tion is enabled for that channel.

Hint

Holding down the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch and press-

ing the [SEL] switch of a channel will display the

GEQ if a GEQ has been inserted into that channel.

3. In the LIMIT section located at the right of the fad-

ers, specify the control width for the faders.

4. In the ASSIGN TO DCA FADERS section located in

the lower right of the screen, click one of the follow-

ing buttons to select the frequency bands that will

be controlled by the DCA faders.

Each button corresponds to the following frequency

bands.

• 1.60k-20.0k button

The DCA faders will be assigned to the twelve

bands from 1.6 kHz–20 kHz.

• 200-2.50k button

The DCA faders will be assigned to the twelve

bands from 200 Hz–2.5 kHz.

• 20-250 button

The DCA faders will be assigned to the twelve

bands from 20 Hz–250 Hz.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[GEQ] switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

138

When you click one of the above buttons, you will be

able to use the DCA faders to operate the graphic EQ.

The center line of the selected range of faders will

change to red in the display.

Hint

While the GEQ PARAMETER screen is displayed,

you can also perform operations using the DCA fad-

ers by holding down the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch and

pressing the [DCA STATUS] switch. The frequency

range selected at this time will be the same as in the

following diagram.

At this time, the [FADER STATUS] switches in the

DCA GROUP block of the CS1D will function as

graphic EQ band select switches, as shown in the fol-

lowing diagram.

• FADER STATUS switches

5. Operate DCA faders 1-12.

The corresponding frequency bands will be cut or

boosted.

6. If you wish to use the DCA faders to control other

bands, repeat steps 4–5.

7. When you are ﬁnished using the DCA faders to

control the graphic EQ, press the [DCA] switch of

the FADER STATUS section. Alternatively, click the

OFF button in the ASSIGN TO DCA FADERS sec-

tion of the GEQ PARAMETER screen.

The [FADER STATUS] switch will return to the nor-

mal condition, and the DCA faders will function as

control faders for the DCA groups.

If you again wish to assign the graphic EQ to the

DCA faders, click one of the buttons in the ASSIGN

TO DCA FADERS section of the GEQ PARAMETER

screen.

Hint

The settings of the GEQ function are saved as part of

a scene. In addition, the settings of a GEQ module

can be saved in the GEQ library independently of the

scene memory. For details refer to “CS1D Reference

Manual (Software)”.

When you exit the GEQ screen, the assignments to

the DCA faders will be cancelled forcibly. At this

time, the [FADER STATUS] switches of the DCA

GROUP block will return to their previous state.

10 11 12

FADER

STATUS

1–12

13–24

25–36

37–48

DCA

20–250

200–2.50k

1.60k–20.0k

OFF

No function

139

Chapter 14. MIDI/Time Code

This chapter explains how MIDI messages and time code (LTC) can be used to control events on the PM1D.

Using MIDI program changes to control events

On the PM1D system, you can assign speciﬁc events (scene recall/effect recall) to MIDI program numbers, so that the

speciﬁed event will be executed when the corresponding MIDI program change number is received. It is also possible to

cause program change messages to be transmitted to an external device when a speciﬁc event is executed on the console.

[Procedure]

1. Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the external

device to the MIDI IN connector of the console (or

engine). Connect, the MIDI OUT connector of the

console (or engine) to the MIDI IN connector of the

external device.

• MIDI connections between the PM1D system and an external device

2. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[MIDI/GPI/TC] switch several times to access the

following MIDI PROGRAM screen.

•

MIDI PROGRAM screen (MIDI/GPI/TC function)

In the MIDI PROGRAM screen you can select the

port at which MIDI messages will be transmitted and

received, specify how they will be transmitted and

received, and assign an event to each program num-

ber.

MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN

Console (CS1D)

External device

(MIDI sequencer, etc.)

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[MIDI/GPI/TC] switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

140

3. In the MIDI PORT section of the screen, press the

button for the port at which program changes will

be transmitted and received.

In the MIDI PORT section you can select from the

following ports to transmit (TX) and receive (RX)

MIDI program change messages.

• CONSOLE ..........MIDI IN/OUT connectors on

the rear panel of the console

• ENGINE A ..........MIDI IN/OUT connectors of

engine A

• ENGINE B ..........MIDI IN/OUT connectors of

engine B

• OFF .....................MIDI messages will not be trans-

mitted or received

Hint

The ENGINE B button is valid only when the PM1D

system is being used in Mirror mode.

4. In the MIDI MODE section, use the MULTI or SIN-

GLE button to select the program change transmis-

sion/reception mode.

You can select one of the following two modes.

• Single mode (when the SINGLE button is on)

This mode uses a single MIDI channel to transmit

and receive programs. In this mode, incoming pro-

gram changes 1–128 received on the MIDI channel

speciﬁed by the RX CH knob (RX CH) will execute

the event assigned to each program number. When

the corresponding events are executed on the CS1D,

a program change 1–128 will be transmitted to the

external device on the MIDI channel speciﬁed by the

TX CH knob (TX CH).

• Multi mode (when the MULTI button is on)

This mode uses multiple MIDI channels to transmit

and receive program changes. In this mode, incom-

ing program changes 1–128 on MIDI channels 1–16

will execute the event assigned to each program

MIDI channel/program number. When the corre-

sponding events are executed on the CS1D, a pro-

gram change 1–128 will be transmitted to the

external device on a MIDI channel 1–16.

5. If you selected single mode in step 4, use the TX

CH/RX CH knobs to select the MIDI channels on

which program changes will be transmitted or

received. If desired, turn on the OMNI button or

the BANK button.

When Single mode is selected, turning the OMNI

button on will allow program change messages of all

MIDI channels to be received.

When Single mode is selected, turning the BANK

button on will allow events to be speciﬁed by the

combination of bank select messages (bank numbers

1–16) + program change messages.

Please do not confuse “Single mode/OMNI button

on” with “Multi mode.” When the OMNI button is

on, program changes will be received on all MIDI

channels, but the only events that can be executed

are those that have been assigned to program

changes 1–128 of the RX CH. Also, the TX CH is

the only MIDI channel that can be transmitted.

6. From the PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT list in the

right of the screen, select the program number to

which you wish to assign an event, and click the

button of that line.

The PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT list allows you to

assign an event to each program number. When you

click the button of the desired line, a popup win-

dow will appear, where you can select an event to

assign.

• Event selection popup window

Hint

In Multi mode, MIDI channels 1–16 and program

changes 1–128 can be used.

In Single mode, only program changes 1–128 of the

MIDI channel selected by the RX CH knob can be

used.

If the BANK button is turned on in Single mode,

bank select 1–16 and program change 1–128 of the

MIDI channel selected by the RX CH knob can be

used. In this case, the number displayed in the CH

column of the PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT list

will be the bank number.

7. Click one of the buttons in the upper left of the

window to select the type of event.

The following events can be selected.

• SCENE................ Scene memory recall operations

• EFFECT.............. Effect recall operations

• NO ASSIGN....... No event assigned

8. If you selected Scene memory recall in step 7, select

the number of the desired scene from the list in the

right side of the popup window, and click the OK

button.

DSP

x2x2

Chapter 14. MIDI/Time Code

141

9. If you selected Effect recall in step 7, use the but-

tons in the lower left of the popup window to select

the internal effect (1–8) for which data will be

recalled, use the list at the right to select the effect

library data that will be recalled, and then click the

OK button.

10. In the same way, assign events to other program

numbers as well.

11. Transmit a program change (or bank select + pro-

gram change) from an external device on a valid

MIDI channel.

The event assigned to that program number will be

executed. When you execute one of the assigned

events on the CS1D, a program change (or bank

select + program change) will be transmitted to the

external device.

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

142

Using time code to control events

On the PM1D system, speciﬁed scenes can be recalled when the LTC time code received at the TIME CODE IN connec-

tor (or the time code internally generated by the PM1D system itself) reaches a speciﬁed time location. Here we will

explain how to capture a time code time location, and how to assign the desired scene to that time location.

[Procedure]

1. Connect the time code output connector of the

external device to the TIME CODE IN connector of

the console (or engine).

• Time code connections between the PM1D system and the external device

2. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[MIDI/GPI/TC] switch several times to access the

following TC EVENT screen.

• TC EVENT screen (MIDI/GPI/TC function)

In the TC EVENT screen you can select the connec-

tor at which time code will be received, select the

frame rate of the time code, and assign a desired

scene number to a captured time location.

3. Use the buttons of the TIMECODE IN section to

select the time code source.

TIMECODE IN TIMECODE OUT

Console (CS1D)

External device

(MIDI sequencer/

recorder etc.)

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[MIDI/GPI/TC] switch

Chapter 14. MIDI/Time Code

143

The following sources can be selected.

• CONSOLE ..........Time code (LTC) will be received

from the TIMECODE IN con-

nector of the console.

• ENGINE A ..........Time code (LTC) will be received

from the TIMECODE IN con-

nector of engine A.

• ENGINE B ..........Time code (LTC) will be received

from the TIMECODE IN con-

nector of engine B.

• INT GEN.............The internal time code generated

by the PM1D system itself will be

followed. The instant you click

this button, internal time code

will start being generated at the

time speciﬁed by the INT GEN

START TIME knobs.

• OFF .....................If this button is clicked, no time

code will be received from out-

side.

If “OFF” is selected in the TIME CODE IN section,

time code will not be displayed in this screen or in

the TIME CODE section of the meter bridge block.

4. Use the buttons of the FRAME RATE section to

select the frame rate appropriate for the time code

that will be received.

The following frame rates can be selected.

• 24.........................24 frames/second

• 25.........................25 frames/second

• 29.97ND..............29.97 frames/second (non-drop)

• 29.97DF ..............29.97 frames/second (drop

frame)

• 30ND...................30 frames/second (non-drop)

• 30DF ...................30 frames/second (drop frame)

5. As necessary, use the knobs of the OFFSET section

to specify the offset value.

The four knobs of the OFFSET section specify the

offset value by which the event times will be shifted

relative to the incoming time code.

If the INT GEN button is selected as the time code

source, you can use the INT GEN START TIME

knob to specify the starting time of the internally-

generated time code.

6. Start time code output on the external device.

At this time, the currently received time code value

will be displayed in the TIME CODE section of the

meter bridge and in the TC EVENT screen.

7. When you come to the moment at which you want a

scene to be recalled, click the CAPTURE button in

the TC EVENT screen.

Each time you click the CAPTURE button, the time

location at that instant will be added to the list below.

If an event is already recorded at the same time loca-

tion, the original event will take priority.

8. When you have captured all of the desired times,

stop time code output on the external device.

9. In the list, click the line of time code that you cap-

tured ﬁrst.

The TC EVENT popup window will appear, in which

you can select a scene memory.

• TC EVENT popup window

10. Select a scene memory, and click the OK button.

11. Repeat steps 7–8 until you have assigned the

desired scene to each of the time code locations you

captured.

Hint

By using the ADD button, DELETE button, or ALL

DELETE button located below the list, you can regis-

ter new time code locations and events to the list, or

delete a time code location from the list.

12. Click the EVENT RECALLING ENABLE button to

turn it on.

This setting will allow events to be controlled by time

code.

While this button is set to “ENABLE,” it is not pos-

sible to store or sort SCENE memories or UNIT/

PATCH/NAME libraries. Nor is it possible to load

from memory card.

13. Once again, start time code output on the external

device.

Each time a time location registered in the list is

reached, the corresponding scene will be recalled.

• The FRAME RATE button and OFFSET/INT GEN

START TIME knobs can be operated only while

“OFF” is selected in the TIMECODE IN section.

• CAPTURE, ADD, DELETE, and ALL DELETE but-

tons can be operated only while the EVENT

RECALLING button is set to “DISABLE.”

144

Chapter 15. Using a memory card to save/load data

This chapter explains how to use a memory card to save/load data. On the PM1D system, all system settings (or just spec-

iﬁed items) can be saved on a commercially available memory card, and loaded later for reuse. For example this allows

you to back up the settings to load it into the PM1D.

• You can use either PCMCIA Type II compatible ATA

type PC ﬂash storage cards, or compact ﬂash media

with a PC card adapter that is guaranteed to work

with that card. (In either case, the power supply volt-

age can be 3.3V or 5V.) Operation cannot be guaran-

teed for other media.

• Normally, memory cards are sold in a formatted con-

dition. For this reason, it is not necessary to format a

card before using it on the PM1D system.

• If you need to format a card, please use an external

device such as a personal computer to do so. The

PM1D system does not have the capability to format

a memory card.

Saving a ﬁle onto a memory card

Here’s how to save desired items of data onto a memory card.

[Procedure]

1. Insert a ATA-compatible PC ﬂash storage card into

[PC] card slot A or B located on the top panel of the

CS1D.

Cards may be inserted or removed while the power

of the CS1D is turned on.

2. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[UTILITY] switch several times to access the fol-

lowing LOAD/SAVE screen.

MASTER block

[PC] card slot

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[UTILITY] switch

Chapter 15. Using a memory card to save/load data

145

• LOAD/SAVE screen (UTILITY function)

In the LOAD/SAVE screen you can select the desired

data item, and save or load it.

3. In the screen, click SLOT A or SLOT B to select the

memory card that you wish to use.

4. Use the buttons of the SAVING MEMORY SELECT

section to select the item that you wish to save or

load.

In the SAVING MEMORY SELECT section you can

select the item that you wish to save. The following

items can be selected.

• SCENE MEMORY

Contents of one or more scene memories

• SETUP

Internal parameters of the PM1D system not

stored in scene memory

• TC EVENT

Settings of the TC EVENT screen (MIDI/GPI/TC

function)

• MIDI PROGRAM

Settings of the MIDI PROGRAM screen (MIDI/

GPI/TC function)

• UNIT LIBRARY

• PATCH LIBRARY

• NAME LIBRARY

• INPUT CH LIBRARY

• OUTPUT CH LIBRARY

• INPUT EQ LIBRARY

• OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY

• INPUT GATE LIBRARY

• INPUT COMP LIBRARY

• OUTPUT COMP LIBRARY

• EFFECT LIBRARY

• GEQ LIBRARY

Contents of the corresponding library

5. If you selected Scene Memory in step 4, use the on-

screen From No. knob and To No. knob to specify

the desired number(s). (Alternatively, you can

select “ALL.”)

For example if you select Scene Memory in the SAV-

ING MEMORY SELECT section and set the From

No. knob = 01.0 and the To No. knob = 02.9, the data

for PM1D system scene memories 01.0–02.9 will be

saved on the memory card. If at a later time you load

this ﬁle from the memory card, the data will be

loaded into the same scene memory numbers of the

PM1D system.

6. Click the SAVE button.

A popup window will appear, in which you can input

the ﬁle name and a comment.

7. As necessary, assign a ﬁle name and comment, and

click the SAVE button.

The data you selected in steps 4–5 will be saved on

the memory card.

Never insert or remove a memory card while the

card is being accessed.

The following characters cannot be used in a ﬁle

name. If you attempt to input them, they will be

ignored. (However, the SPACE character is unavail-

able only at the beginning of the file name.)

It is not possible to paste the ﬁle name in the FILE

SAVE popup window.

It is not possible to recall or save a scene while sav-

ing. If you press the panel [STORE] switch or

[RECALL] switch, a message of “CANNOT

STORE!” or “CANNOT RECALL!” will appear.

(SPACE) \ / : * ? "

< >|+=[];,.

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

146

Loading a ﬁle from a memory card

Here’s how to load the desired data from a memory card into the PM1D system.

[Procedure]

1. Insert the PC ﬂash storage card containing the data

into [PC] card slot A or B located on the top panel

of the CS1D.

2. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[UTILITY] switch several times to access the fol-

lowing LOAD/SAVE screen.

• LOAD/SAVE screen (UTILITY function)

3. In the list at the right, click a row to select the ﬁle

that you wish to load.

The cursor moves to the row.

Hint

The list shows the following information for each ﬁle.

• FILE NAME

A ﬁle name of up to 8 characters.

• TYPE

One of the following types of ﬁle.

• ALL ....................All contents including scene

memories/libraries, SETUP, TC

EVENT, and MIDI PROGRAM

• COMPOSITE ....Part of the scene memories (a

ﬁle saved by using the From

No. knob and To No. knob to

specify the range)

• Other .................A ﬁle containing only a speciﬁc

item

• DATE/SIZE

The date and time at which the ﬁle was last saved.

• COMMENT

The comment that was added when the ﬁle was saved.

4. Click the LOAD button.

The ﬁle you selected in step 3 will be loaded from the

memory card into the PM1D system. A blank scene

memory will be loaded as blank.

If the type of ﬁle being loaded is ALL/COMPOS-

ITE, all or part of the PM1D scene memories and/

or libraries may be overwritten unexpectedly. Be

careful not to accidentally erase important scenes

or libraries.

MASTER block

[PC] card slot

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[UTILITY] switch

Chapter 15. Using a memory card to save/load data

147

Never insert or remove a memory card while the

card is being accessed.

If the EVENT RECALLING button is set to

“ENABLE” in the MIDI/GPI/TC function TC

EVENT screen, the LOAD button will be grayed,

and loading will not be possible.

You must ﬁrst switch the EVENT RECALLING but-

ton to “DISABLE.”

It is not possible to recall or save a scene while load-

ing. If you press the panel [STORE] switch or

[RECALL] switch, a message of “CANNOT

STORE!” or “CANNOT RECALL!” will appear.

148

Chapter 16. Various settings

This chapter explains various settings that allow you to customize the PM1D system.

Initial settings for the console

Here’s how to make initial settings that affect the basic operation of the CS1D console, such as track pad/mouse opera-

tion and operation within the display.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[UTILITY] switch several times to access the fol-

lowing PREFERENCE screen.

• PREFERENCE screen (UTILITY function)

2. Use the on-screen knobs and buttons to specify the

initial settings for each item.

The following items can be set.

a) MOUSE

Make settings for the track pad built into the CS1D

or the mouse connected to the MOUSE connector.

• TAPPING

Specify whether or not to enable tapping on the

built-in track pad.

• SPEED

Set the speed of pointer movement controlled by

the built-in track pad of the CS1 or a mouse con-

nected to the MOUSE connector.

b) LED BRIGHTNESS

Adjust the brightness of the LEDs on the CS1D.

c) GATE/COMP GR METER ON/OFF LINK

If this button is on, the on-screen GR meter will be

displayed or hidden according to whether the

internal compressor is turned on or off.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[UTILITY] switch

Chapter 16. Various settings

149

d) AUTO DISPLAY ON/OFF

Specify whether or not the corresponding screen

will appear in the display when a speciﬁc controller

in the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL/SELECTED

OUTPUT CHANNEL section of the CS1D is oper-

ated. The following table shows the controllers

corresponding to each button and the screen that

will be selected.

e) CONFIRMATION ON/OFF

Specify whether or not a conﬁrmation message

will appear when you perform a speciﬁc operation

on the CS1D.

Each button corresponds to the following opera-

tions.

Even if the RECALLING button is turned on, using

the following methods will cause the scene to be

recalled without a conﬁrmation message.

● Recall via MIDI program change

● Recall from the TC EVENT screen

● Direct recall

● Recall using a USER DEFINE switch

f) WARNING MESSAGES ON/OFF

Specify whether or not a warning message will

appear when an error occurs within the PM1D sys-

tem.

Each button corresponds to the following errors.

Hint

The settings of the PREFERENCE screen are main-

tained even when the power of the PM1D system is

turned off. If the SETUP button of the UTILITY

function LOAD/SAVE screen is turned on when sav-

ing data to a memory card inserted in the PC ATA

STORAGE CARD slot of the CS1D, the settings of

the PREFERENCE screen will be saved on the card as

well.

Button Controller Selected screen

INSERT/UNIT

button

[INSERT] switch INSERT/DIRECT

VIEW or

INSERT VIEW

UNIT-related

controllers

HA/INSERT

EQ button ATT, EQ-related

controllers

EQ PARAMETER

GATE/COMP

button

Gate/compressor-

related controllers

GATE PRM /

COMP PRM

DELAY button Delay-related con-

trollers

IN DELAY / OUT

DELAY

ROUTING button Routing-related

controllers

PAN/ROUTING /

MATRIX/ST or

OUT CH VIEW

FADER button Input/output chan-

nel faders and [ON]

switch

IN CH VIEW / OUT

CH VIEW

CUE/SOLO

button

Input/output chan-

nel [CUE] switches

IN CH VIEW / OUT

CH VIEW

OSCILLATOR

button

[OSC ON] switch,

[OSC OUT] switch

OSCILLATOR

Button Operation

PATCH button Patching changes in the OUT PATCH

screen/IN PATCH screen

RECALLING

button

Scene or library recall operations

STORING button Scene or library store operations

Button Error

TC DROP A dropout occurred in the time code.

DIGITAL I/O A digital audio signal not synchronized

with the PM1D system was input.

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

150

Setting the internal calendar and clock

Here’s how to set the date of the internal calendar and the time of the internal clock.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[UTILITY] switch several times to access the fol-

lowing PREFERENCE screen.

• PREFERENCE screen (UTILITY function)

2. Use the six knobs of the INTERNAL CALENDAR/

CLOCK section to set the date and time.

• INTERNAL CALENDAR/CLOCK section

3. To ﬁnalize the new date and time, click the SET but-

ton.

The new date and time will take effect the instant you

click the SET button. If you click the CANCEL but-

ton instead of the SET button, the previous date and

time will reappear.

Hint

The date and time you specify in this screen are used

as a time stamp when a scene is stored into internal

memory, and when data is saved on a memory card

inserted into the PC ATA STORAGE CARD slot of

the CS1D.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[UTILITY] switch

Chapter 16. Various settings

151

Specifying the metering points

The metering point (the location at which the level is detected) for the level meters on the CS1D console can be speciﬁed

independently for input channels and output channels.

Input channel metering point

Here’s how to set the metering point for the input levels displayed by the level meters of the INPUT block/ST IN block.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[METER] switch several times to access the CH 1-

48/STIN 1-4 screen or the CH 49-96/STIN 5-8

screen. {The CH 49-96/STIN5-8 screen is not valid

for the 48 CH model.}

• CH 1-48/STIN 1-4 screen (METER function)

The CH 1-48/STIN 1-4 screen and CH 49-96/STIN

5-8 screen show virtual level meters that indicate the

input levels of the input channels. In this screen you

can also select the metering point for the input chan-

nels.

2. Use the buttons located at the right of the screen to

select the metering point at which the input level

will be detected.

The following metering points can be selected.

• PRE ATT............. Before the attenuator

• PRE GATE.......... Immediately before the internal

gate

• PRE FADER ....... Immediately before the fader

• POST FADER .... Immediately after the fader

• POST ON ........... Immediately after the [ON]

switch

3. If you want the peak level display of the input chan-

nels to be held, turn on the PEAK HOLD button.

Hint

Steps 2 and 3 will affect the following level meters.

• Level meters of the INPUT block/ST IN block

• Level meters of the SELECTED INPUT CHAN-

NEL block

• Level meters of the CH 1-48/STIN 1-4 screen and

CH 49-96/STIN 5-8 screen

However, the METER [PEAK HOLD] switch in the

MASTER block of the CS1D will affect only the CLIP

LED of the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[METER] switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

152

Output channel metering point

Here’s how to set the metering point for the various output levels displayed in the meter bridge block.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[METER] switch several times to access the MIX 1-

48 screen or the MATRIX 1-24/ST/MONITOR IN5-

8 screen.

• MATRIX 1-24/ST/MONITOR screen (METER

function)

The MIX 1-48 screen and MATRIX 1-24/ST/MONI-

TOR IN 5-8 screen show virtual level meters that

indicate the output levels of the output channels,

monitor outputs, and cue outputs. In this screen you

can also select the metering point for the output

channels.

2. Use the buttons located at the right of the screen to

select the metering point at which the output level

will be detected.

The following metering points can be selected.

• PRE EQ ...............Immediately before the EQ

• PRE FADER........Immediately before the fader

• POST FADER.....Immediately after the fader

• POST ON............After the [ON] switch

Hint

You can also use the METER [PRE] switch in the

METER section (MASTER block) of the CS1D to

select the metering point for the output channels.

If the METER [PRE] switch is on, either PRE EQ or

PRE FADER as selected in the display will be the

metering point.

If the METER [PRE] switch is off, either POST

FADER or POST ON as selected in the display will be

the metering point.

3. If you want the peak level display of the output

channels to be held, turn on the PEAK HOLD but-

ton.

Hint

You can also use the METER [PEAK HOLD] switch

in the METER section (MASTER block) of the CS1D

to turn peak hold on/off for the output channels.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[METER] switch

Chapter 16. Various settings

153

User deﬁned function settings

You can assign the desired function to the USER DEFINE [1]–[8] switches in the USER DEFINE block of the CS1D con-

sole, and use them to control the system.

[Procedure]

1. In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block, press the

[UTILITY] switch several times to access the fol-

lowing USER DEFINE screen.

• USER DEFINE screen (UTILITY function)

In the USER DEFINE screen you can assign the

desired function to each of the USER DEFINE [1]–

[8] switches.

2. From the USER DEFINE [1]–[8] switches, select the

switch to which you wish to assign a function, and

click the button for that number.

The following USER DEFINE KEY SETUP popup

window will appear.

• USER DEFINE KEY SETUP popup window

In the USER DEFINE KEY SETUP popup window,

use the FUNCTION list in the left of the window to

select the function that will be assigned to the switch,

and use the PARAMETER section to select the

parameter speciﬁc to that function.

The following functions and parameters can be

selected.

• SCENE RECALL (parameters: –1/+1)

Recall the scene numbered one before (or after)

the currently selected scene.

• MONITOR A SOURCE SELECT (parameters:

2TR IN 3–6, DIRECT, MIX 1–48, MTRX 1–24)

• MONITOR B SOURCE SELECT (parameters:

2TR IN 3–6, DIRECT, MIX 1–48, MTRX 1–24)

Select 2TR IN 3–6, DIRECT IN, MIX channels 1–

48, or MATRIX channels 1–24 as the source moni-

tored by MONITOR A or B respectively.

The LED will light for a USER DEFINE switch to

which this function is assigned if the currently

selected monitor source and parameter match.

If you use the USER DEFINE [1]–[8] switches to

change the monitor source, the MONITOR A

SOURCE switch and MONITOR B SOURCE

switch of the CS1D will be invalid until the monitor

source is next selected from the front panel.

• PAGE SELECT (parameters: PREVIOUS, NEXT,

LAST)

Access the speciﬁed screen in the display, according

to the selected parameter.

PREVIOUS: Access the previous screen of the cur-

rently selected function.

NEXT: Access the next screen of the currently

selected function.

LAST: Access the last-selected screen once again.

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

[UTILITY] switch

CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)

154

• BOOKMARK (parameters: none)

Access the last-registered screen. The LED will light

for a USER DEFINE switch to which this function is

assigned if a screen has been assigned. When the

functions of the USER DEFINE [1]–[8] switches are

shown in the lower part of the display, the name of

the screen assigned as a BOOKMARK will be shown

at the position of the corresponding switch.

Hint

To register a screen, press and hold the USER

DEFINE switch to which the BOOKMARK function

was assigned for two seconds or longer. If you release

the switch in less than two seconds, the last-regis-

tered screen will be recalled.

3. Select the function that you wish to assign to the

switch, and the parameter speciﬁc to that function.

4. Press the OK button.

5. Repeat steps 2–5 until you have assigned the

desired function to each of the USER DEFINE [1]–

[8] switches.

6. To execute an assigned function, press one of the

USER DEFINE [1]–[8] switches in the USER

DEFINE block.

Hint

Functions assigned to the USER DEFINE [1]–[8]

switches can also be executed within the display. To

do so, click the USER DEFINE button in the lower

left of the screen to make the USER DEFINE 1–8

buttons appear in the lower part of the screen, and

then click the desired button.

• USER DEFINE button

• Show the USER DEFINE 1–8 buttons in the lower

part of the screen

Reference Manual

(Hardware)

Contents

How the “CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)” is organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Printing conventions in the “CS1D Reference Manual

(Hardware)” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

INPUT block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

INPUT block channel assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

ST IN block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Channel assignments for the ST IN block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

+48/ø/INSERT (+48/phase/insert) section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

INPUT section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

DELAY section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

MIX SEND section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

COMPRESSOR section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

NOISE GATE section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

EQUALIZER section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

STEREO section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

GAIN section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

ATTENUATOR section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

FADER section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

DCA section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

SAFE section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

CHANNEL SELECT section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

GLOBAL CONTROL section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

MIX OUTPUT block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Channel assignments in the MIX OUTPUT block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

MIX channel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

MIX LAYER section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

MATRIX OUTPUT block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

MATRIX OUTPUT block channel assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

MATRIX channel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

MATRIX LAYER section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

STEREO OUTPUT block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

DELAY section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

COMPRESSOR section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

EQUALIZER section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

OUTPUT section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

DCA section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

SAFE section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

CHANNEL SELECT section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

DCA GROUP block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Select the items you wish to control from the DCA faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

DCA fader section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

FADER STATUS section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Contents

iii

MASTER block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

TALKBACK section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

OSCILLATOR section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Card slot section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

CUE section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

MONITOR A section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

MONITOR B section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

ENGINE section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

GLOBAL LAYER section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

METER section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

SCENE MEMORY block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS/USER DEFINE block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

LCD ACCESS GLOBAL section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

LCD ACCESS OUTPUT section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

LCD ACCESS INPUT section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

USER DEFINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Data entry block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Meter bridge block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Meter section (left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Meter section (right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

TIME CODE section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

SCENE MEMORY section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Rear panel block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

DIGITAL I/O section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

2-TRACK IN DIGITAL section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

STEREO OUT DIGITAL section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

WORD CLOCK section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

LAMP connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

2-TRACK IN ANALOG section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

MONITOR OUT ANALOG section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

TALKBACK IN 2 section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

CUE OUT ANALOG section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

DC POWER section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

CONTROL section

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

CONTROL section

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Input/output signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Front panel block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

How the “CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)” is organized

The “CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)” explains the function and operation of each block of the CS1D control sur-

face.

CS1D Top panel

CS1D Rear panel

Meter bridge block (→p.101)

INPUT

block

(→p.4)

INPUT

block

(→p.4)

ST IN block (→p.12)

Data entry block

(→p.99)

STEREO OUTPUT block (→p.52)

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block (→p.19)

MIX OUTPUT block (→p.40)

Display (→p.39)

MATRIX OUTPUT block (→p.46)

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block (→p.56)

SCENE MEMORY block (→p.89)

MASTER block (→p.77)

DCA GROUP block (→p.69)

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS/USER

DEFINE block (→p.96)

LAMP LAMP LAMP LAMP

CONSOLE ENGINE B ENGINE A

OUT

USB

RS-232-C

CONTROL

TIME CODE IN

GPI

MIDI

OUT

THRU

DC POWER INPUT B

SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL

DC POWER INPUT A

SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL

FAN

HIGH

LOW

AES

/EBU

COAXIAL

STEREO OUT

DIGITAL

WORD CLOCK

AES

/EBU

COAXIAL

AES

/EBU

AES

/EBU

AES

/EBU

AES

/EBU

2-TRACK IN DIGITAL

AES

/EBU

COAXIAL

AES

/EBU

COAXIAL

REMOTE

RS-422

NUM

KEY

MOUSE

KEY

BOARD

SVGA OUT

CONTROL I/O

OFF

OUT

CONSOLE

1 2121

ENGINE B

DIGITAL I/O

ENGINE A

MONITOR OUT

ANALOG

TALKBACK IN 2

CUE OUT

ANALOG

2-TRACK IN

ANALOG

LAMP connectors (→p.107)

2-TRACK IN DIGITAL section

(→p.106)

WORD CLOCK section (→p.107)MONITOR OUT ANALOG section (→p.108)

CUE OUT ANALOG

section (→p.109)

DC POWER section (→p.110)

CONTROL section 1

(→p.111)

CONTROL section 2

(→p.112)

TALKBACK IN 2 section (→p.109)

2-TRACK IN ANALOG section (→p.108)

STEREO OUT DIGITAL section (→p.106)

DIGITAL I/O section (→p.105)

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

CS1D front panel

•

For details on the speciﬁcations and functions of the

engine (DSP unit) and input/output units, refer to

the owner’s manual for each device.

•

For details on installation and connection of the

PM1D system, refer to “CS1D Operating Manual

(Start-up).”

•

For details on basic operation of the PM1D system,

refer to “CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Opera-

tion).”

•

For details on the functions and operations within

the display of the CS1D, refer to “CS1D Reference

Manual (Software).”

Screen shots shown in this manual are taken from a

prototype. Please be aware that they may differ

slightly from the actual screens on your unit.

MOUSE KEYBOARD MONITOR A MONITOR B

Front panel block (→p.114)

Printing conventions in the “CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)”

Printing conventions in the “CS1D Reference Manual (Hard-

ware)”

In general, the “CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)” is written for the 96 channel model of the PM1D system (the

model that uses the DSP1D-EX for its engine).

•

If speciﬁcations differ between the 96 channel model

and the 48 channel model (the model that uses the

DSP1D for its engine),

the speciﬁcations of the 48

channel model will be enclosed in curly brackets

{ }

Example: The [NUMBER] indicator will show a

number in the range of 1–96 {1–48}.

•

Controls (switches, encoders, volumes) on the top

panel, rear panel, and front panel of the CS1D are

enclosed in square brackets [ ] to distinguish them

from the knobs and buttons displayed by the soft-

ware in the screen. The block name or section name

may also be given before the name enclosed in square

brackets [ ].

Example: INPUT [MIX] encoder, MIX SEND

[NAME] indicator

•

The following icon indicates useful tips or related

pages for reference.

•

The following icon indicates particularly important

items or operations that must be used with caution.

Hint

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

INPUT block

[Function]

This block speciﬁes the pan and level of the signals patched to monaural input channels 1–96 {1–48}, and

sends them to the STEREO bus or MIX buses 1–48 or assigns them to the DCA groups.

MIX

100

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

CUE

DCA

-68

THR

COMP

THR

CLIP

SAFE

GATE

+10

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

-68

THR

COMP

THR

GATE

+10

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

-68

THR

COMP

THR

GATE

+10

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

-68

THR

COMP

THR

GATE

+10

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

-68

THR

COMP

THR

GATE

+10

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

-68

THR

COMP

THR

GATE

+10

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

-68

THR

COMP

THR

GATE

+10

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

-68

THR

COMP

THR

GATE

+10

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

-68

THR

COMP

THR

GATE

+10

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

-68

THR

COMP

THR

GATE

+10

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

-68

THR

COMP

THR

GATE

+10

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

-68

THR

COMP

THR

GATE

+10

FIX

LOCAL

VARI

RCL

MUTE

MIX

100

CUE

DCA

CLIP

SAFE

RCL

MUTE

MIX

100

CUE

DCA

CLIP

SAFE

RCL

MUTE

MIX

100

CUE

DCA

CLIP

SAFE

RCL

MUTE

MIX

100

CUE

DCA

CLIP

SAFE

RCL

MUTE

MIX

100

CUE

DCA

CLIP

SAFE

RCL

MUTE

MIX

100

CUE

DCA

CLIP

SAFE

RCL

MUTE

MIX

100

CUE

DCA

CLIP

SAFE

RCL

MUTE

MIX

100

CUE

DCA

CLIP

SAFE

RCL

MUTE

MIX

100

CUE

DCA

CLIP

SAFE

RCL

MUTE

MIX

100

CUE

DCA

CLIP

SAFE

RCL

MUTE

MIX

100

CUE

DCA

CLIP

SAFE

RCL

MUTE

MIX SEND

ONONONONONONONONONONONON

DEC INC

INPUT

block 2

INPUT

block 1

INPUT

block 3

INPUT

block 4

INPUT block

INPUT block channel assignments

The top panel of the CS1D has four blocks located at top, bottom, left and right.

When the PM1D system is in the default state, channels 1–12, 13–24, 25–36, and 37–48 are assigned to these blocks in the

order of lower left

→

upper left

→

lower right

→

upper right. These assignments can be changed as follows in the

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block MODULE FLIP section, and in the MASTER block GLOBAL LAYER section. {The

GLOBAL LAYER section has no effect on the 48 channel model.}

Using the MODULE [FLIP] switch to change the

channel assignments

Using the GLOBAL LAYER switches to change the

channel assignments (96 channel model only)

FLIP

CH 13-24

CH 1-12

CH 37-48

CH 25-36

CH 1-12

CH 13-24

CH 25-36

CH 37-48

INPUT block

GLOBAL LAYER

CH 13-24

CH 1-12

CH 37-48

CH 25-36

CH 61-72

CH 49-60

CH 85-96

CH 73-84

INPUT block

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

MIX SEND [NAME] indicator

MIX SEND [NUMBER] indicator

These indicate the short name and the number 1–48

of the MIX bus currently selected for that INPUT

block.

•

You can use any of the following ways to select the

MIX bus to which your operation will apply.

1) Use the

MIX SEND [

▼

/DEC]/[

▲

/INC]

switches

2) Use the

MIX [SEL]

switch of the MIX/MATRIX

OUTPUT block

3) Use the

CHANNEL SELECT [

▼

/DEC]/[

▲

/INC]

switches of the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL

block

Hint

If you have turned on the FADER FLIP [MIX] switch

of the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block, the

MIX SEND [NAME] indicator will alternately show

“FLIP” and the short name.

MIX SEND [

▼

/DEC]/[

▲

/INC] switches

These switches select the MIX bus 1–48 to which

your operation will apply.

If you press the MIX SEND [

▲

/INC] switch, the next

higher-numbered MIX bus will be selected. (If MIX

bus 48 is selected, you will wrap around to MIX bus

1.)

If you press the MIX SEND [

▼

/DEC] switch, the

next lower-numbered MIX bus will be selected. (If

MIX bus 1 is selected, you will wrap around to MIX

bus 48.)

When the CS1D is in its default state, changing the

MIX bus that is the object of operations in one

INPUT block will also cause the MIX bus selected

for the other INPUT blocks to be switched in tan-

dem. However, if the MIX SEND [LOCAL] switch

(5) is turned on for an INPUT block, you will be

able to select its MIX bus independently of the

other INPUT blocks.

MIX SEND [FIX]/[VARI] LED

This LED indicates the type of MIX bus that is cur-

rently selected.

MIX buses 1–48 of the PM1D system are in pairs of

odd and even numbers (MIX buses 1/2, 3/4, ...). You

are free to select one of two types for each pair.

•

FIX (ﬁxed)

These MIX buses have a ﬁxed send level. Select this

type when you wish to use the MIX bus as a bus out-

put for group output or for recording on MTR.

•

VARI (variable)

These MIX buses have a variable send level. Select

this type when you wish to use the MIX bus as a fold-

back/effect send.

The type selection is made in the display (PAN/

ROUTING function, CH to MIX screen).

Signal ﬂow when FIX is selected as the type for MIX

buses 1/2

Signal ﬂow when VARI is selected as the type for MIX

buses 1/2

*Each of the above diagrams show only one exam-

ple of standard signal routing. For details on sig-

nal routing, please refer to the block diagram on

page 38.

FIX

LOCAL

VARI

MIX SEND

2 3 5

DEC INC

INPUT CHANNEL

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

PAN

MIX1 (ODD)

MIX2 (EVEN)

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL

PAN

MIX1 (ODD)

MIX2 (EVEN)

INPUT block

MIX SEND [LOCAL] switch and LED

This speciﬁes whether the signal of the MIX bus

selected in this INPUT block will be linked with the

other INPUT blocks ([LOCAL] switch = off), or will

be switchable independently from the other INPUT

blocks ([LOCAL] switch = on).

When the MIX SEND [LOCAL] switch is on (LED

lit), pressing the MIX SEND [

▼

/DEC]/[

▲

/INC]

switches (

) of that INPUT block will not affect the

other INPUT blocks. (The converse also applies.)

INPUT [MIX] encoder and LED

When a VARI type MIX bus is selected, this encoder

sets the send level of the signal that is sent to that

MIX bus from each input channel.

The range is from –

∞

dB – +10 dB, and the approxi-

mate current value is shown by the LEDs around the

perimeter of the encoder. When the LED at the

mark is lit, the level is nominal (0 dB). However if a

FIX type MIX bus is selected, the INPUT [MIX]

encoder will have no effect, even if you operate the

encoder, the LED display will continue to indicate

the nominal position.

INPUT MIX [ON] LED

This indicates the on/off status of the signal sent

from each input channel to the currently selected

MIX bus. (When on, the LED will light.)

The on/off status can be switched in the SELECTED

INPUT CHANNEL block of the console, or in the

display (PAN/ROUTING function, CH to MIX

screen).

By making the FADER [FLIP] switch settings in the

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block, you can

exchange (ﬂip) the functions of the INPUT [MIX]

encoders (

6) and the INPUT faders (L). (→p.36)

8 INPUT [PAN] encoder and LED

This encoder sets the panning of the signal sent from

each input channel to the STEREO bus.

The approximate current value is shown by the LEDs

around the perimeter of the encoder. When the LED

at the ▲ mark is lit, the signal is panned to the center.

The perimeter LEDs will light differently, depending

on whether LCR mode (a function that allows three-

channel playback with a CENTER channel added to

the L/R channels) is on or off. (LCD mode can be

turned on/off in the PAN/ROUTING function LCR

screen.)

• When LCR=off

• When LCR=on

Hint

If the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block STE-

REO [FIXED MIX PAN] switch is on, the setting of

this INPUT [PAN] encoder will also apply to FIX

type MIX buses.

In addition, if the VARI PAN LINK button is turned

on in the PAN/ROUTING function CH to MIX

screen, the PAN knob that is displayed in the screen

when VARI type MIX buses are paired will be linked

with this INPUT [PAN] encoder. For details refer to

“CS1D Reference manual (Software),” CH to MIX

(PAN/ROUTING function).

9 INPUT [TO ST] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the signal sent from each

input channel to the STEREO bus. (The LED will

light when this is on.)

This switch does not affect the signal that is sent

from the input channel to the MIX bus.

0 INPUT [+48 V] LED

This LED will light if an AD card with head amp has

been patched to this input channel, and phantom

power is on.

The LED will be dark if a different card is patched, or

if phantom power is off.

A INPUT [INS] LED

This LED will light if insertion is turned on for that

input channel.

Insertion on/off can be switched in the SELECTED

INPUT CHANNEL block of the console, or in the

display (IN PATCH function INSERT/DIRECT

POINT screen).

MIX

100

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

-68+10

PAN

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

INPUT [ø] (Phase) LED

If settings have been made to invert the phase of the

input signal for this input channel, this LED will

light.

The phase setting can be changed in the SELECTED

INPUT CHANNEL block of the console, or in the

display (IN HA/INSERT function).

INPUT [A]/[B] LED

For an input channel to which an AD card with swit-

chable input jacks A/B has been patched, the corre-

sponding LED will light to indicate the currently

selected input jack (A/B).

For an input channel to which another type of card is

patched, these LEDs will be dark. The A/B input jack

selection can be performed in the SELECTED INPUT

CHANNEL block of the console, or in the display (IN

HA/INSERT function or IN CH VIEW function).

INPUT [GAIN] encoder and LED

If an AD card with head amp is patched to this input

channel, this encoder will adjust the input sensitivity

of the head amp.

The adjustable range is +10 dB — –68 dB. The

approximate current value is shown by the LEDs

around the perimeter of the encoder.

The PAD will be internally switched on or off when

the gain of the LMY4-MLF card (including the AI8-

ML8F unit) internal head amp is adjusted between

–8 dB and –7 dB. Keep in mind that noise may be

generated if there is a difference between the Hot

and Cold output impedance of the external device

connected to the card when using phantom power.

INPUT [CLIP] LED

This LED will light when the input signal of that

input channel has clipped.

If this LED lights for an input channel to which an

AD card with head amp has been patched, use the

INPUT [GAIN] encoder (

) to lower the input sen-

sitivity. If this LED lights for an input channel to

which an AD card without a head amp or a digital I/

O card has been patched, lower the output level of

the sound source that is connected to the card.

COMP [+]/[THR]/[–] LEDs

The LEDs indicate the operating status of the inter-

nal compressor. If the compressor is turned off, all

LEDs will be dark.

If the compressor is turned on, one of the LEDs will

light to indicate the currently selected type and status

of the compressor.

When the compressor type is COMP

When the compressor type is EXPANDER

When the compressor type is COMPANDER

THR

COMP

THR

CLIP

GATE

SEL

Time

Threshold level

Level

Output signal

Key-in signal

[–] [–][THR] [THR][+]

ATTACK

RELEASE

COMP

Time

Threshold level

Level

Output signal

Key-in signal

[–] [–]

[THR]

[THR][+]

RELEASE

EXPANDER

AT TAC K

[–] [–]

[THR] [THR]

[+]

RELEASE

WIDTH

AT TAC K

RELEASE

Time

Threshold level

Level

Output signal

Key-in signal

COMPANDER

INPUT block

*Each of the diagrams shows the example of using

the input channel itself as the key-in signal for the

compressor.

Hint

The compressor on/off status and its parameters can

be set in the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block,

or in the display (IN GATE/COMP function COMP

PRM screen).

GATE [+]/[THR]/[–] LEDs

These LEDs indicate the operating status of the inter-

nal noise gate. If the noise gate is turned off, all LEDs

will be dark. If the noise gate is turned on, one of the

LEDs will light to indicate the currently selected type

and operating status of the noise gate.

When the noise gate type is GATE

When the noise gate type is DUCKING

*Each of the above diagrams shows the example of

using the input channel itself as the key-in signal

for the noise gate.

Hint

The noise gate on/off status and its parameters can

be set in the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block,

or in the display (IN GATE/COMP function GATE

PRM screen).

INPUT [SEL] switch and LED

This switch selects the input channel to which your

operations will apply. The [SEL] LED for the cur-

rently selected input channel will light.

The channel selected by this switch can be adjusted

in the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block, and

these adjustments will also be reﬂected in the display.

Hint

If the selected input channel is part of a pair, the

[SEL] LED will blink for the other input channel of

the pair.

You can also use the [SEL] switch to set/defeat pair-

ing.

[Procedure]

Using the [SEL] switch to set/defeat pairing

1. For two input channels that can be set as a pair,

hold down one of the [SEL] switches and press the

other [SEL] switch.

The direction in which the channel parameters are

copied will depend on the order in which the [SEL]

switches are pressed. When creating a pair, the

parameters of the channel you pressed ﬁrst will be

copied to the channel that you pressed later, and then

the parameters will be linked.

For example if you wish to pair CH 1 and CH 2, hold

down the CH 1 [SEL] switch and press the CH 2

[SEL] switch. The state of CH 1 will be copied to CH

2. For details on the parameters that are copied/

linked for a pair, refer to “CS1D Reference Manual

(Appendices)” (

→

p.45).

If you wish to reset the parameters, do so from the

screen.

2. To defeat pairing, hold down the [SEL] switch for

one of the paired channels, and press the [SEL]

switch for the other channel.

INPUT [NAME] indicator

This shows the short name of the input channel. The

short name can be input in the display (IN PATCH

function NAME screen, etc.).

Meter LEDs

These six LEDs indicate the input level of the input

channel. The position at which the level is detected

can be selected from the following locations: PRE

ATT. (before the attenuator), PRE GATE (immedi-

ately before the internal noise gate), PRE FADER

(immediately before the fader), POST FADER (imme-

diately after the fader), or POST ON (immediately

after the [ON] switch). The level detection point can

be selected in the display (METER function).

The peak level of this meter will not be held even if

the PEAK HOLD button is turned on in the display

(METER function input meter screen).

[ON] switch and LED

This switches the on/off status of the input channel.

(This LED will be lit for input channels that are

turned on.) If this switch is turned off, no signal will

be sent from that input channel to the STEREO bus

or MIX buses.

Time

Threshold level

Level

Output signal

Key-in signal

[–]

[THR]

[THR][+]

ATTACK

HOLD

GATE

Time

Threshold level

Level

Output signal

Key-in signal

[THR]

[THR][+]

ATTACK

HOLD

[–] [–]

DUCKING

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

L INPUT fader

This is a 100 mm fader that adjusts the input level of each

input channel. The adjustable range is – ∞ dB – +10 dB.

Hint

In the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block FADER

FLIP section, you can exchange (ﬂip) the functions

of the INPUT fader (L) and the INPUT [MIX]

encoder (6) as shown in the following illustrations.

• When the FADER FLIP [CH] switch is on

• When the FADER FLIP [MIX] switch is on

DCA

SAFE

RCL

MUTE

CUE

MIX

100

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

DCA

-68

THR

COMP

THR

CLIP

SAFE

GATE

+10

RCL

MUTE

CUE

SEL

If a VARI type MIX bus is selected, this

encoder will adjust the send level to

that MIX bus. If a FIX type MIX bus is

selected, only the LED at the

® posi-

tion will light, and the encoder will be

disabled.

This indicates the on/off status of the

signal that is sent from the input chan-

nel to the currently selected MIX bus.

This turns the input channel on/off.

This adjusts the input level of the input

channel.

MIX

100

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

DCA

-68

THR

COMP

THR

CLIP

SAFE

GATE

+10

RCL

MUTE

CUE

SEL

This adjusts the input level of the input

channel.

This indicates the on/off status of the

input channel.

This is an on/off switch for the signal

that is sent from the input channel to

the currently selected MIX bus.

If a VARI type MIX bus is selected, this

fader will adjust the send level to that

MIX bus. If a FIX type MIX bus is

selected, the fader will be ﬁxed at the

0 dB position and will have no effect.

INPUT block

M INPUT [ASSIGN DCA] switch and LEDs

This switch assigns the input channel to DCA groups

1–12. When an input channel is assigned to a DCA

group, the corresponding LED will light. The LED

will blink while you are in the process of making

assignments to a DCA group.

Hint

It is possible to assign a single channel to multiple

DCA groups, as well as to assign multiple channels to

a single DCA group.

[Procedure]

Assigning an input channel to a DCA group

1. In the DCA GROUP block, press one of the

[ASSIGN DCA] switches 1–12 to select a DCA

group (1–12).

The LED of the selected [ASSIGN DCA] switch will

light.

If following step 1 you do not perform any action

for approximately ten seconds, the [ASSIGN DCA]

switch LED will automatically go dark, and the

assignment procedure will be terminated.

2. In the INPUT block, press the INPUT [DCA]

switch for the input channel that you wish to assign

to the above-selected DCA group.

While the DCA GROUP block [ASSIGN DCA]

switch LED is lit, all of the INPUT [DCA] LEDs

assigned to that DCA group will blink.

• DCA faders 9–12 can be used for either input chan-

nels or output channels. However, it is not possible

to assign both inputs and outputs to the same DCA

fader. For this reason, if an output channel is already

assigned to DCA 9–12, attempting to assign an input

channel will cause a message to be displayed, and you

will not be able to do so.

• When a scene is recalled, the DCA group data of

recall safe channels may be adjusted so that recall safe

settings are consistent within DCA groups 9–12.

Also when a channel library is recalled, the data

recalled to a channel may be adjusted so that settings

are consistent within DCA groups 9–12.

N SAFE [RCL] LED

This LED will light if the input channel has been set

to Recall Safe (a state in which the input channel is

unaffected by scene recall operations).

The parameters of a channel for which this LED is lit

will not change when a scene memory is recalled.

Recall Safe settings can be made in the SELECTED

INPUT CHANNEL block or display (SCENE func-

tion RECALL SAFE screen).

O SAFE [MUTE] LED

This LED will light if the input channel has been set

to Mute Safe (a state in which the input channel is

unaffected by mute group operations).

A channel for which this LED is lit will not be

affected even if a mute group to which it belongs is

muted.

Mute Safe settings can be made in the SELECTED

INPUT CHANNEL block or display (IN DCA/

MUTE function MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen).

P [CUE] switch and LED

This switch is used for monitoring the input channel.

When this switch is pressed, the PFL (pre-fader lis-

ten), PRE PAN, or POST PAN signal of the corre-

sponding input channel will be sent to the CUE bus,

and can be monitored from the CUE OUT jacks,

MONITOR OUT A jacks, and PHONES jack.

The location of the signal that is sent to the CUE bus

and the monitoring method can be selected on the

console in the CUE section of the MASTER block, or

in the display (MON/CUE function CUE/SOLO

screen).

Hint

For the input channel signal ﬂow, refer to the block

diagram on page 38.

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

ST IN block

[Function]

This block adjusts the pan and level of the stereo signals patched to ST IN channels 1–8 {1–4}, and sends them

to the STEREO bus or to MIX buses 1–48, or assigns them to DCA groups.

MIX

100

PAN

L CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

CUE

DCA

-68

COMP

CLIP

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

GATE

+10

LSTATUS R

SEL

MIX

100

PAN

L CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

CUE

DCA

-68

COMP

CLIP

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

GATE

+10

LSTATUS R

SEL

TO STTO ST

THR

MIX

100

PAN

L CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

CUE

DCA

-68

COMP

CLIP

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

GATE

+10

LSTATUS R

SEL

MIX

100

PAN

L CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

CUE

DCA

-68

COMP

CLIP

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

GATE

+10

LSTATUS R

SEL

TO STTO ST

THR

ST IN

block

ST IN block

Channel assignments for the ST IN block

The ST IN block contains four modules, two above and two below. In the default state of the PM1D system the lower two

modules are assigned to control ST IN channels 1/2, and the upper two modules are assigned to control ST IN channels

3/4. However, these assignments can be changed as follows in the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block MODULE FLIP

section, and the MASTER block GLOBAL LAYER section. {The GLOBAL LAYER section is not available for 48 channel

model.}

Using the MODULE [FLIP] switch to change channel

assignments

Using the GLOBAL LAYER switches to change channel

assignments (96 channel model only)

FLIP

ST IN block

GLOBAL LAYER

ST IN block

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

1 ST IN STATUS [L]/[R] LEDs

These LEDs indicate whether this ST IN channel

module currently shows the right or the left channel.

When the [L] LED is lit, the module shows the status

of the left channel. When the [R] LED is lit, the mod-

ule shows the status of the right channel.

Hint

The two-channel signal that is patched to the ST IN

channel will be processed as a pair, all parameters

will be linked except for the head amp settings (A/B

channel selection, phantom power on/off, gain

adjustment), and pan and delay.

2 ST IN [MIX] encoder and LEDs

When a VARI type MIX bus is selected, this encoder

sets the send level of the signal that is sent from the

ST IN channel to that MIX bus.

The range is – ∞ dB – +10 dB, and the approximate

current value is shown by the perimeter LEDs. When

the LED for the ® mark is lit, the level is nominal (0

dB).

However if a FIX type MIX bus is selected, the ST IN

[MIX] encoder will have no effect, the LEDs will

remain dark even if the encoder is operated

Hint

To select the MIX bus that will be the send destina-

tion of the ST IN channel, use the MIX OUTPUT

block MIX [SEL] switch, or the SELECTED OUT-

PUT CHANNEL block CHANNEL SELECT [▼/

DEC]/[▲/INC] switches.

3 ST IN MIX [ON] LED

This indicates the on/off status of the signal that is

sent from the ST IN channel to the currently selected

MIX bus. (The LED will light when on.)

The on/off setting can be switched from the console

in the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block, or in

the display (PAN/ROUTING function CH to MIX

screen/MIX ASSIGN screen).

You can set the FADER [FLIP] switch in the

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block to exchange

(ﬂip) the function of the ST IN [MIX] encoder (2)

and the ST IN fader (H). (→p.36)

4 ST IN [PAN] encoder and LEDs

This encoder sets the panning of the signal that is

sent from the ST IN channel to the STEREO bus.

The approximate current setting is shown by the

perimeter LEDs. When the LED at the ▲ mark is lit,

the pan is at the center.

As shown below, the perimeter LEDs will light differ-

ently, depending on whether LCR mode (a function

that allows three-channel playback with a CENTER

channel added to the L/R channels) is on or off.

(LCR mode can be turned on/off in the PAN/ROUT-

ING function LCR screen.)

• When LCR=off

• When LCR=on

Hint

This parameter can be adjusted independently for

left and right channels.

5 ST IN [TO ST] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent

from the ST IN channel to the STEREO bus. (The

LED will light when this is on.)

This switch does not affect the signal that is sent

from the ST IN channel to the MIX buses.

6 ST IN [+48V] LED

This LED will light if an AD card with head amp is

patched to the ST IN channel, and the phantom

power is on.

This will be dark if a different type of card is patched,

or if phantom power is off.

Hint

This parameter can be set independently for left and

right channels.

MIX

100

PAN

L CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

-68+10

LSTATUS R

TO ST

PAN

ST IN block

7 ST IN [INS] LED

This LED will light if insertion is turned on for the

ST IN channel.

Insertion can be switched from the console in the

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block, or in the dis-

play (IN PATCH function INSERT/DIRECT POINT

screen).

8 ST IN [ø] (Phase) LED

This LED will light if the phase has been reversed for

the input signal of this ST IN channel.

The phase setting can be made from the console in

the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block, or in the

display (IN HA/INSERT function).

9 ST IN [A]/[B] LEDs

For a ST IN channel to which an AD card with swit-

chable A/B inputs has been patched, one of these

LEDs will light to indicate the currently selected

input jack (A/B).

For a ST IN channel to which a different type of card

has been patched, the LEDs will be dark.

You can switch between A/B input jacks in the

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block of the console,

or in the display (IN HA/INSERT function or IN CH

VIEW function).

Hint

This parameter can be set independently for left and

right channels.

0 ST IN [GAIN] encoder and LEDs

If an AD card with head amp is patched to this ST IN

channel, this encoder will adjust the input sensitivity

of the head amp. The range of levels is +10 dB — –68

dB.

The approximate current value is shown by the

perimeter LEDs.

Hint

This parameter can be set independently for left and

right channels.

A ST IN CLIP [L]/[R] LED

This LED will light when the input signal of the ST

IN channel clips. If this LED lights when an AD card

with head amp has been patched to this ST IN chan-

nel, use the ST IN [GAIN] encoder (0) to lower the

input sensitivity.

If this LED lights when an AD card without head

amp or a digital I/O card has been patched to this ST

IN channel, lower the output level of the sound

source connected to the corresponding card.

B ST IN COMP [+]/[THR]/[–] LEDs

The LEDs indicate the operating status of the inter-

nal compressor. If the compressor is turned off, all

LEDs will be dark.

If the compressor is turned on, one of the LEDs will

light to indicate the currently selected type and status

of the compressor.

When the compressor type is COMP

When the compressor type is EXPANDER

L CLIP

SEL

COMP

CLIP

GATE

SEL

THR

Time

Threshold level

Level

Output signal

Key-in signal

[–] [–][THR] [THR][+]

ATTACK

RELEASE

COMP

Time

Threshold level

Level

Output signal

Key-in signal

[–] [–]

[THR]

[THR][+]

RELEASE

EXPANDER

AT TAC K

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

When the compressor type is COMPANDER

*Each of the above diagrams shows the example of

using the ST IN channel itself as the key-in signal

for the compressor.

Hint

The compressor on/off status and its parameters can

be set in the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block,

or in the display (IN GATE/COMP function COMP

PRM screen).

C ST IN GATE [+]/[THR]/[–] LEDs

These LEDs indicate the operating status of the inter-

nal noise gate. If the noise gate is turned off, all LEDs

will be dark.

If the noise gate is turned on, one of the LEDs will

light to indicate the currently selected type and oper-

ating status of the noise gate.

When the noise gate type is GATE

When the noise gate type is DUCKING

*Each of the above diagrams shows the example of

using the ST IN channel itself as the key-in signal

for the noise gate.

Hint

The noise gate on/off status and its parameters can

be set in the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block,

or in the display (IN GATE/COMP function GATE

PRM screen).

D ST IN SEL [L]/[R] switches and LEDs

These switches select the ST IN channel to which

your operations will apply.

You can select either the L or the R channel. The LED

of the currently selected channel will light, and the

LED of the other channel will blink.

The channel selected by these switches can be

adjusted by the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL

block, and will be reﬂected by the contents of the dis-

play screen.

E ST IN [NAME] indicator

This displays the short name of the ST IN channel.

The short name can be input in the display (IN

PATCH function NAME screen, etc.).

F L/R meter LEDs

These six LEDs indicate the input level of the ST IN

channel.

The position at which the level is detected can be

selected from the following locations: PRE ATT.

(before the attenuator), PRE GATE (immediately

before the internal noise gate), PRE FADER (imme-

diately before the fader), POST FADER (immediately

after the fader), or POST ON (immediately after the

[ON] switch).

The level detection point can be selected in the dis-

play (METER function).

The peak level of this meter will not be held even if

the [PEAK HOLD] switch is turned on in the

METER section (MASTER block).

G ST IN [ON] switch and LED

This switches the on/off status of the ST IN channel.

(This LED will be lit for ST IN channels that are

turned on.)

If this switch is turned off, no signal will be sent from

that ST IN channel to the STEREO bus or MIX

buses.

[–] [–]

[THR] [THR]

[+]

RELEASE

WIDTH

AT TAC K

RELEASE

Time

Threshold level

Level

Output signal

Key-in signal

COMPANDER

Time

Threshold level

Level

Output signal

Key-in signal

[–]

[THR]

[THR][+]

ATTACK

HOLD

GATE

Time

Threshold level

Level

Output signal

Key-in signal

[THR]

[THR][+]

ATTACK

HOLD

[–] [–]

DUCKING

ST IN block

H ST IN fader

This is a 100 mm fader that adjusts the input level of

each ST IN channel. The adjustable range is – ∞ dB –

+10 dB.

Hint

In the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block FADER

FLIP section, you can exchange (ﬂip) the functions

of the ST IN fader (H) and the ST IN [MIX] encoder

(2) as shown in the following illustrations.

• When the FADER FLIP [CH] switch is on

• When the FADER FLIP [MIX] switch is on

CUE

DCA

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

MIX

100

PA N

L CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

CUE

DCA

-68

COMP

CLIP

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

GATE

+10

LSTATUS R

SEL

TO ST

THR

If a VARI type MIX bus is selected, this

encoder will adjust the send level to

that MIX bus. If a FIX type MIX bus is

selected, only the LED at the

® posi-

tion will light, and the encoder will be

disabled.

This indicates the on/off status of the

signal that is sent from the ST IN

channel to the currently selected MIX

bus.

This turns the ST IN channel on/off.

This adjusts the input level of the ST

IN channel.

MIX

100

PA N

L CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

SEL

CUE

DCA

-68

COMP

CLIP

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

GATE

+10

LSTATUS R

SEL

TO ST

THR

This adjusts the input level of the ST

IN channel.

This indicates the on/off status of the

ST IN channel.

This is an on/off switch for the signal

that is sent from the ST IN channel to

the currently selected MIX bus.

If a VARI type MIX bus is selected, this

fader will adjust the send level to that

MIX bus. If a FIX type MIX bus is

selected, the fader will be ﬁxed at the

0 dB position and will have no effect.

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

I ST IN [DCA] switch and LEDs

This switch assigns the ST IN channel to DCA

groups 1–12.

When a ST IN channel is assigned to a DCA group,

the corresponding LED will light. The LED will blink

while you are in the process of making assignments

to a DCA group.

Hint

It is possible to assign a single ST IN channel to mul-

tiple DCA groups, as well as to assign multiple ST IN

channels to a single DCA group.

[Procedure]

Assigning a ST IN channel to a DCA group

1. In the DCA GROUP block, press one of the

[ASSIGN DCA] switches 1–12 to select a DCA

group (1–12).

The LED of the selected [ASSIGN DCA] switch will

light.

If following step 1 you do not perform any action

for approximately ten seconds, the [ASSIGN DCA]

switch LED will automatically go dark, and the

assignment procedure will be terminated.

2. In the ST IN block, press the ST IN [DCA] switch

for the ST IN channel that you wish to assign to the

above-selected DCA group.

While the DCA GROUP block [ASSIGN DCA]

switch LED is lit, all of the INPUT [DCA] LEDs

assigned to that DCA group will blink.

• DCA groups 9–12 can be used for either input chan-

nels or output channels. However, it is not possible

to assign both inputs and outputs to the same DCA

group. For this reason, if an output channel is already

assigned to DCA group 9–12, attempting to assign an

input channel will cause an error message to be dis-

played, and you will not be able to do so.

• When a scene is recalled, the DCA group data of

recall safe channels may be adjusted so that recall safe

settings are consistent within DCA groups 9–12.

Also when a channel library is recalled, the data

recalled to a channel may be adjusted so that settings

are consistent within DCA groups 9–12.

J SAFE [RCL] LED

This LED will light if the ST IN channel has been set

to Recall Safe (a state in which the channel is unaf-

fected by scene recall operations).

The parameters of a channel for which this LED is lit

will not change when a scene memory is recalled.

Recall Safe settings can be made in the SELECTED

INPUT CHANNEL block or display (SCENE func-

tion RECALL SAFE screen).

K SAFE [MUTE] LED

This LED will light if the ST IN channel has been set

to Mute Safe (a state in which the channel is unaf-

fected by mute group operations).

A channel for which this LED is lit will not be

affected even if a mute group to which it belongs is

muted.

Mute Safe settings can be made in the SELECTED

INPUT CHANNEL block or display (IN DCA/

MUTE function MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen).

L [CUE] switch and LED

This switch is used for monitoring the ST IN chan-

nel.

When this switch is pressed, the POST PAN, PFL

(pre-fader listen), or AFL (after-fader listen) signal of

the corresponding ST IN channel will be sent to the

CUE bus, and can be monitored from the CUE OUT

jacks, MONITOR OUT jacks A, and PHONES jack.

The location of the signal that is sent to the CUE bus

and the monitoring method can be selected on the

console in the CUE section of the MASTER block, or

in the display (MON/CUE function CUE/SOLO

screen).

Hint

For the signal ﬂow of the ST IN channel, refer to the

block diagram on page 38.

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block

[Function]

In this block you can view and set the parameters of the currently selected input channel or ST IN channel.

Hint

If desired, the related screen can be made to appear automatically when this block is operated.

This setting is made in the UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen.

PAI R

NOISE GATE

COMPRESSOR

PAI R

EQ ON

EQUALIZER

STEREO

GAINATTENUATOR

DCA

SAFE

CHANNEL SELECT

MIX

CHFLIP

DEC INC

SHIFT

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL

PHONESPHONES

SELECTED

INPUT CHANNEL

block

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

[Procedure]

Selecting a channel

The channel to be controlled by the SELECTED INPUT

CHANNEL block can be selected in the following ways.

1. Use a [SEL] switch

You can use the INPUT block INPUT [SEL] switches

or the ST IN block ST IN SEL [L]/[R] switches to

directly select the desired channel.

In the case of a ST IN channel, select either the left or

the right channel.

The [SEL] switch LED of the currently selected chan-

nel will light.

• Use an INPUT [SEL] switch of the INPUT block

• Use a ST IN SEL [L]/[R] switch of the ST IN block

2. Use the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block

You can use the CHANNEL SELECT [▼/DEC]/[▲/

INC] switches of the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL

block to select channels sequentially.

The number and short name of the channel will be

displayed by the CHANNEL SELECT [NAME] indi-

cator and the CHANNEL SELECT [NUMBER] indi-

cator located above the CHANNEL SELECT [▼/

DEC]/[▲/INC] switches.

• Use the CHANNEL SELECT [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC]

switches of the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL

block

THR

COMP

THR

GATE

THR

COMP

THR

GATESEL SEL

[SEL]

switch

INPUT block

L CLIP

SEL

COMP

GATE

SEL

L CLIP

SEL

COMP

GATE

SEL

THR

ST IN SEL

[L]/[R]

switch

ST IN block

DEC INC

SHIFT

CHANNEL

SELECT

[NUMBER]

indicator

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block

CHANNEL

SELECT

[NAME] indi-

cator

CHANNEL SELECT

[▼/DEC]/[▲/INC]

switches

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block

+48/ø/INSERT (+48/phase/insert) section

In this section you can switch phantom power on/off, reverse the phase, and switch insertion on/off.

1 [+48 V] switch and LED

If an AD card with head amp is patched to the chan-

nel, this switch turns the phantom power on/off.

(The switch LED will light when if phantom power is

on.)

For a channel to which another card is patched, this

switch has no function.

The +48V switch on the front panel of the AI8

input unit is the master phantom switch for the

entire unit.

Be aware that if the master phantom switch is off,

that unit cannot use phantom power.

2 [ø] (Phase) switch and LED

This switches the input signal between normal and

reverse phase. The LED will light if the phase has

been inverted.

3 [INSERT] switch and LED

This switch turns channel insertion on/off.

When insertion is on, the switch LED will light, and

the insert out/in points speciﬁed in the display (IN

PATCH function INSERT PATCH screen) will be

enabled.

Be aware that if you turn on the [INSERT] switch

when the insert out/in points are not patched to

appropriate jacks, a signal may not be input to that

channel.

INSERT+48V

+48V / / INSERT

1 2 3

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

INPUT section

In this section you can switch between input jacks A/B of the AD card with head amp (LMY2-ML).

1 INPUT [A]/[B] switches and LEDs

If an AD card with switchable input jacks A/B is

assigned to the channel, these switches select input

jack A or B.

The LED for the currently selected input jack (A/B)

will light.

If another type of card is patched to the channel, the

LEDs will be dark.

DELAY section

In this section you can make settings for the internal delay function.

1 DELAY [ON] switch and LED

This switch turns the delay on/off for the selected

channel.

When on, the switch LED will light, and the input

signal will be delayed by the time shown in the

DELAY TIME [VALUE] indicator (2).

2 DELAY TIME encoder and [VALUE] indicator

The DELAY TIME encoder is used to adjust the delay

time of the selected channel.

At this time, the current delay time will be shown in

milliseconds in the DELAY TIME [VALUE] indica-

tor.

The delay time range is 0 msec – 250 msec.

Hint

It is convenient to use the input channel or ST IN

channel delay function to compensate for timing dif-

ferences between widely separated mics.

Even if the internal clock on which the PM1D system

operates is switched from 48 kHz to 44.1 kHz (or the

opposite), the delay time will not change. However

while a PM1D system is synchronized to a word

clock supplied from an external device, the displayed

time and the actual delay time may differ if the word

clock frequency is changed using vari-pitch.

The delay time can be adjusted independently for

each channel even for the two channels of a pair, or

for ST IN channels.

If you adjust the delay time here, decimal places

that are not subsequently displayed will be rounded

off.

INPUT

1 2

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block

MIX SEND section

In this section, the signals sent from the currently selected channel to MIX buses 1–48 can be switched on/off, and their

send levels adjusted.

1 MIX SEND [PAIR] LED

This LED will light to indicate two adjacent odd and

even-numbered MIX buses 1–48 (MIX buses 1/2, 3/

4, ...) that are paired.

Mix bus pairing can be set or defeated on the console

by the MIX OUTPUT block MIX [SEL] switch, or in

the display (PAN ROUTING function etc.).

Hint

Before you perform this procedure, use the MIX

SEND LAYER [1-24]/[25-48] switches (7) to select

either MIX buses 1-24 or MIX buses 25-48 as the

send destination MIX buses.

2 MIX SEND [LEVEL/PAN] encoder and LEDs

This encoder sets the send level of the signal that is

sent from the currently selected channel to a MIX

bus that is set to VARI.

The range of adjustment is – ∞ dB – +10 dB, and the

approximate current value is shown by the perimeter

LEDs.

When the LED at the ® symbol is lit, the level is

nominal (0 dB).

However in the case of FIX type MIX buses, only the

LED at the ® position of the input channel will light,

and the MIX SEND [LEVEL] encoder will be dis-

abled.

If the send destination MIX bus is paired, the

encoder for the left-hand MIX bus will function as

the MIX SEND [PAN] encoder, and the encoder for

the right-hand MIX bus will function as the MIX

SEND [LEVEL] encoder. The approximate current

value for each will be shown by the perimeter LEDs

around each encoder.

PAIR

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

Of the LEDs around the [PAN] encoder, the LED at

the q mark indicates that the signal is panned to the

center.

• When the send destination MIX bus is not paired

• When the send destination MIX bus is paired

3 MIX SEND [NAME] indicator

This shows the short name of the MIX bus.

The short name can be input in the display (OUT

PATCH function NAME screen, etc.).

4 MIX SEND [ON] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent

from the selected channel to the corresponding MIX

bus. (The switch LED will light when on.)

If the send destination MIX bus is paired, the setting

of this parameter will be linked for adjacent odd-

numbered to even-numbered MIX buses.

5 MIX SEND [PRE] switch and LED

This switch speciﬁes the location of the signal that is

sent from the selected channel to a VARI type MIX

bus.

If the send destination MIX bus is paired, the setting

of this parameter will be linked for adjacent odd-

numbered to even-numbered MIX buses.

• If the [PRE] switch LED is dark

The post-fader signal will be sent to the correspond-

ing MIX bus.

• If the [PRE] switch LED is lit

The pre-EQ or pre-fader signal will be sent to the

corresponding MIX bus.

The pre-EQ/pre-fader selection can be made in the

display (PAN/ROUTING function CH to MIX

screen).

6 MIX SEND [FIX] LED

This LED indicates the type of MIX bus (FIX or

VARI).

This LED will light when the corresponding MIX bus

is set to FIX.

The FIX/VARI selection can be made in the display

(PAN/ROUTING function CH to MIX screen).

7 MIX SEND LAYER [1–24]/[25–48] switches and

LEDs

These switches select either MIX buses 1–24 or MIX

buses 25–48 as the MIX buses to be controlled and

displayed in the MIX SEND section.

The LED of the currently selected switch will light.

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL

PAN

MIX1 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX2 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX1 SEND LEVEL MIX2 SEND LEVEL

PAI R

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL

PAN

MIX1/2 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX1/2 SEND PAN MIX1/2 SEND LEVEL

PAI R

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block

COMPRESSOR section

In this section you can make settings for the internal compressor.

All parameters can be controlled from the top panel, except for compressor library store/recall operations, compressor

type selection, and key-in signal selection.

1 COMPRESSOR [RATIO] encoder and [VALUE]

indicator

This sets the ratio of the internal compressor.

The range of settings is 1:1 – ∞(16 steps) if COMP or

EXPANDER is selected as the compressor type, or

1:1–20:1 (15 steps) if COMPANDER is selected.

2 COMPRESSOR FILTER [FREQUENCY] encoder,

[VALUE] indicator, and [Hz]/[kHz] LEDs

This sets the cutoff frequency of the HPF or LPF that

is placed in the ﬁrst stage of the internal compressor.

The adjustable range is 20 Hz – 20 kHz (121 steps).

The current value is shown by the [VALUE] indica-

tor. (Either the [Hz] or [kHz] LED will light to indi-

cate the units of the displayed value.)

The selection of HPF or LPF is made in the display

(IN GATE/COMP function COMP PRM screen).

Hint

HPF and LPF cannot be used simultaneously. When

COMP is selected as the type for the internal com-

pressor, selecting HPF will allow it to be used as a

“de-esser.”

3 COMPRESSOR FILTER [ON] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the HPF or LPF that is

placed in the ﬁrst stage of the internal compressor.

4 COMPRESSOR [ATTACK]/[RELEASE] switches

and LEDs

These switches select the function of the ATTACK/

RELEASE [TIME] encoder (5) located at the left of

the switches.

• When the COMPRESSOR [ATTACK] LED is lit

The ATTACK/RELEASE [TIME] encoder will set the

ATTACK (attack time).

• When the COMPRESSOR [RELEASE] LED is lit

The ATTACK/RELEASE [TIME] encoder will set the

RELEASE (release time).

5 COMPRESSOR ATTACK/RELEASE [TIME]

encoder, [VALUE] indicator, and [msec]/[sec] LEDs

According to the setting of the COMPRESSOR

[ATTACK]/[RELEASE] switch (4), this encoder

adjusts the ATTACK (attack time) or RELEASE

(release time) of the internal compressor.

The range of settings is 0 ms–120 msec for the attack

time, and 5 msec–42.3 sec for the release time (when

operating at 48 kHz).

The current value is shown in the [VALUE] indica-

tor. (Either the [msec] or [sec] LED will light to indi-

cate the units of the value.)

6 COMPRESSOR WIDTH (dB)/KNEE [TIME]

encoder, [VALUE] indicator, and [WIDTH]/

[KNEE] LEDs

The function of this encoder depends on the cur-

rently selected compressor type.

• When the compressor type is COMP or

EXPANDER

Use the encoder to set the KNEE parameter of the

COMP or EXPANDER. (The [KNEE] LED will

light.)

You can select SF1–SF5 (SOFT 1–SOFT 5), or Hrd

(HARD).

• When the compressor type is COMPANDER

Use the encoder to set the WIDTH parameter of the

COMPANDER.

The range is 1 dB–90 dB.

7 COMPRESSOR [GR] meter LEDs

This meter displays the amount of gain reduction

caused by the compressor.

COMPRESSOR

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

Hint

In the UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen you

can specify whether the GR meter display will be

linked with the compressor on/off setting. If linking

is on, the GR meter will be displayed only when the

compressor is on; the meter will not be displayed

when the compressor is off. If linking is turned off,

the GR meter will always be displayed.

8 COMPRESSOR [POST] meter LEDs

This meter indicates the signal level after the com-

pressor.

9 COMPRESSOR [PRE CLIP] LED

This LED will light if the signal clips before passing

through the compressor.

0 COMPRESSOR [LINK] switch and LED

This speciﬁes whether compressor operation of adja-

cent odd-numbered → even-numbered input chan-

nels will be linked by a key-in signal (link=on) or

whether the compressors will operate using indepen-

dent key-in signals (link=off). (The LED will light

when link is on.)

• Key-in signal ﬂow when link=on

• Key-in signal ﬂow when link=off

Linking will occur only if channels of the same

COMPRESSOR type are linked. If channels with

differing types are linked, the operation will be the

same as if link is off.

Be careful not to confuse “compressor linking” with

“input channel pairing.”

Turning compressor link on will simply cause the

two compressors to be triggered by the same key-in

signal; the parameters of the compressors them-

selves can be set independently for each channel.

If two input channels are paired, compressor link

will automatically be turned on, and the compres-

sor parameters will also operate in tandem.

However, you are free to subsequently turn linking

off.

For a ST IN channel, the compressor parameters for

the left and right channels will always operate in

tandem. However, you are free to turn link on/off.

A COMPRESSOR [ON] switch and LED

This switch turns the internal compressor on/off.

When the compressor is on, the LED will light.

B COMPRESSOR [GAIN] encoder and LEDs

This encoder controls the GAIN parameter of the

internal compressor.

The approximate current value is shown by the

perimeter LEDs.

The value range is 0 dB– +18 dB (0.5 dB steps) when

the type is COMP/EXPANDER, and –18 dB–0 dB

(0.5 dB steps) when the type is COMPANDER.

C COMPRESSOR [THR] encoder and LEDs

This encoder controls the THRESHOLD LEVEL

parameter of the internal compressor.

The approximate current value is shown by the

perimeter LEDs.

The value range is –54 dB–0 dB (1 dB steps).

ATTACK

processing

THR

LINK = ON

ATTACK

processing

Key-in signal of odd-

numbered channel

Key-in signal of even-

numbered channel

Detect the

maximum

level

ATTAC K

processing

ATTAC K

processing

Key-in signal of odd-

numbered channel

Key-in signal of even-

numbered channel

Detect the

maximum level

Detect the

maximum level

THR

LINK = OFF

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block

NOISE GATE section

In this section you can make settings for the internal noise gate.

All parameters can be controlled from the top panel, except for noise gate library store/recall operations, noise gate type

selection, and key-in signal selection.

1 NOISE GATE KEY IN FILTER [HPF]/[LPF] switch

Of the two ﬁlters (HPF and LPF) provided for the

key-in signal of the noise gate, this switch selects the

ﬁlter that you wish to adjust.

The LED of the currently selected switch will light.

Hint

You can simultaneously use both the HPF and LPF.

The HPF and LPF are applied only to the key-in sig-

nal sent to the noise gate.

They do not affect the signals that are sent to the

STEREO bus or the MIX buses.

2 NOISE GATE KEY IN FILTER [FREQUENCY]

encoder, [VALUE] indicator, and [Hz]/[kHz] LEDs

This encoder sets the cutoff frequency of the ﬁlter

(LPF or HPF) selected by the KEY IN FILTER [HPF]/

[LPF] switch (1).

The range of frequency adjustment is 20 Hz–20 kHz

(121 steps).

The current value is shown in the [VALUE] indica-

tor. (Either the [Hz] or [kHz] indicator will light to

indicate the units of the displayed value.)

3 NOISE GATE KEY IN FILTER [ON] switch and

LED

This is an on/off switch for the ﬁlter selected (LPF or

HPF) selected by the KEY IN FILTER [HPF]/[LPF]

switch (1).

When this is on, the switch LED will light.

4 NOISE GATE SIG [+]/[THR]/[–] LEDs

These LEDs indicate the level of the noise gate key-in

signal (after passing through the ﬁlters).

At the threshold level, [THR] will light. When the

key-in signal exceeds the threshold level [+] will

light, and when it is below the threshold level [–] will

light.

5 NOISE GATE KEY IN [CUE] switch and LED

This switch allows you to monitor the noise gate key-

in signal.

When this switch is pressed, the noise gate key-in sig-

nal (after passing through the ﬁlters) of the currently

selected channel will be sent to the CUE bus, and can

be monitored via the CUE OUT jacks, MONITOR

OUT jacks A, and PHONES jack.

The LED will light while this is being monitored.

While this switch is on, all three of the CUE ACTIVE

LEDs in the CUE section of the MASTER block will

light.

6 NOISE GATE [ATTACK]/[DECAY] switches and

LEDs

These switches select the function of the NOISE

GATE ATTACK/DECAY [TIME] encoder (7)

located at the left of the switches.

When the NOISE GATE [ATTACK] LED is lit, the

encoder will set the ATTACK (attack time). When

the NOISE GATE [DECAY] LED is lit, the encoder

will set the DECAY (decay time).

7 NOISE GATE ATTACK/DECAY [TIME] encoder,

[VALUE] indicator, and [msec]/[sec] LEDs

Depending on the setting of the NOISE GATE

[ATTACK]/[DECAY] switch (6), this encoder

adjusts either the ATTACK (attack time) or the

DECAY (decay time) of the internal noise gate.

The range for the attack time is 0 msec–120 msec,

and for the decay time is 5 msec–42.3 sec (when

operating at 48 kHz).

The current value is shown by the [VALUE] indica-

tor. (Either the [msec] or [sec] LED will light to indi-

cate the units of the displayed value.)

8 NOISE GATE HOLD [TIME] encoder, [VALUE]

indicator, and [msec]/[sec] LEDs

These set and display the hold time of the internal

noise gate.

The range is 0.02 msec–1.96 sec (when operating at

48 kHz).

NOISE GATE

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

The current value is shown by the [VALUE] indica-

tor. (Either the [msec] or [sec] LED will light to indi-

cate the units of the displayed value.)

9 NOISE GATE [GR] meter LEDs

This meter shows how far the noise gate has closed.

Hint

In the UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen you

can specify whether the GR meter display will be

linked with the noise gate on/off setting. If linking is

on, the GR meter will be displayed only when the

noise gate is on; the meter will not be displayed when

the noise gate is off. If linking is turned off, the GR

meter will always be displayed.

0 NOISE GATE [POST] meter LEDs

This meter indicates the signal level after passing

through the noise gate.

A NOISE GATE [LINK] switch and LED

This speciﬁes whether noise gate operation of adja-

cent odd-numbered → even-numbered input chan-

nels will be linked by a key-in signal (link=on) or

whether the noise gate will operate using indepen-

dent key-in signals (link=off). (The LED will light

when link is on.)

• Key-in signal ﬂow when link=on

• Key-in signal ﬂow when link=off

Linking will occur only if channels of the same

NOISE GATE type are linked. If channels with dif-

fering types are linked, the operation will be the

same as if link is off.

Be careful not to confuse “noise gate linking” with

“input channel pairing.”

Turning noise gate link on will simply cause the two

noise gates to be triggered by the same key-in sig-

nal; the parameters of the noise gates themselves

can be set independently for each channel.

If two input channels are paired, noise gate link will

automatically be turned on, and the noise gate

parameters will also operate in tandem. However,

you are free to subsequently turn linking off.

For a ST IN channel, the noise gate parameters for

the left and right channels will always operate in

tandem. However, you are free to turn link on/off.

B NOISE GATE [ON] switch and LED

This switch turns the internal noise gate on/off.

When the noise gate is on, the switch LED will light.

C NOISE GATE [RANGE] encoder and LEDs

This encoder sets the RANGE parameter of the inter-

nal noise gate.

The approximate current value is shown by the

perimeter LEDs.

The range is –70 dB–0 dB (1 dB units).

D NOISE GATE [THR] encoder and LEDs

This encoder sets the THRESHOLD parameter of the

internal noise gate.

The approximate current value is shown by the

perimeter LEDs.

The range is –54 dB–0 dB (1 dB units).

ATTACK

processing

THR

LINK = ON

ATTACK

processing

Key-in signal of odd-

numbered channel

Key-in signal of even-

numbered channel

Detect the

maximum

level

ATTAC K

processing

ATTAC K

processing

Key-in signal of odd-

numbered channel

Key-in signal of even-

numbered channel

Detect the

maximum level

Detect the

maximum level

THR

LINK = OFF

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block

EQUALIZER section

In this section you can make settings for the internal four-band EQ (HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, LOW).

Of the four bands, HIGH and LOW EQ can be switched between shelving and peaking, and the HIGH band can also be

used as an LPF.

You can also use a HPF that is independent of the four-band EQ.

1 EQ [LPF] switch and LED (HIGH band only)

This switch changes the HIGH band EQ to a LPF.

The switch LED will light when LPF is selected.

In this case, the HIGH band [Q]/[GAIN] encoders

will have no effect.

2 EQ [ ] [ ] switch and LED (HIGH/LOW bands

only)

This switches the HIGH/LOW band EQ type

between peaking and shelving.

The switch LED will light when shelving is selected.

In this case, the HIGH band [Q] encoder will have

no effect, and its perimeter LEDs will go dark.

3 EQ [Q] encoder and LEDs

This encoder sets the Q (steepness) of each band.

Rotating it toward the left will make the Q sharper,

and rotating it toward the right will make the Q more

gentle.

The range of adjustment is 10.0–0.10 (41 steps) for

each band.

The approximate current value is shown by the

perimeter LEDs.

4 EQ [FREQUENCY] encoder, [VALUE] indicator,

and [Hz]/[kHz] LEDs

This encoder sets the center frequency of each band.

The range of adjustment is 20 Hz–20 kHz (121 steps)

for each band.

The current value is shown by the [VALUE] indica-

tor, and either the [Hz] or [kHz] LED will light to

indicate the units of the displayed value.

5 EQ [GAIN] encoder and LEDs

This encoder sets the gain of each band.

The range of adjustment is –18 dB– +18 dB (0.5 dB

steps), and the approximate current value is shown

by the perimeter LEDs.

6 [EQ ON] switch

This switch turns the entire equalizer on/off.

When on, the switch LED will light.

7 [HPF] switch and LED

This switch turns the HPF on/off.

When the HPF is on, the switch LED will light.

This can be turned on/off independently of the four-

band EQ.

8 HPF [6 dB/OCT]/[12 dB/OCT]/[18 dB/OCT]

switches and LEDs

This switch selects the slope of the HPF: 6 dB/OCT,

12 dB/OCT, or 18 dB/OCT.

The LED of the currently selected slope will light.

9 HPF [FREQUENCY] encoder, [VALUE], and [Hz]/

[kHz] LEDs

This encoder sets the HPF cutoff frequency.

The range of adjustment is 20 Hz–600 Hz (60 steps)

for each band.

The current value is shown by the [VALUE] indica-

tor, and the [Hz] LED will light to indicate the units

of the displayed value.

EQ ON

EQUALIZER

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

STEREO section

In this section, the signal that is sent from the currently selected channel to the STEREO bus can be switched on/off and

panned.

1 STEREO [FIXED MIX PAN] switch and LED

When the signal from the currently selected channel

is sent to a FIX type MIX bus, this switch speciﬁes

whether the signal from before or after the [PAN]

encoder (3) will be sent.

When this switch is on (LED lit), the signal after the

[PAN] encoder will be sent.

The setting of this switch applies to all FIX type MIX

buses.

• Signal ﬂow when the [FIXED MIX PAN] switch is

off

• Signal ﬂow when the [FIXED MIX PAN] switch is

2 STEREO [TO ST] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent

from the currently selected channel to the STEREO

bus. (When on, the LED will light.)

This switch does not affect the signals that are sent

from the channel to the MIX buses.

3 STEREO [PAN] encoder and LEDs

This encoder sets the panning of the signal that is

sent from the currently selected channel to the STE-

REO bus.

The approximate current setting is shown by the

perimeter LEDs.

When the LED at the ▲ mark is lit, the signal is

panned to the center.

Hint

For two paired channels, or for a ST IN channel, the

pan is set independently for each channel.

If the STEREO [FIXED MIX PAN] switch (1) is

turned on, the setting of the STEREO [PAN] encoder

will be valid for FIX type MIX buses as well.

STEREO

1 2 3

INPUT CHANNEL

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

PAN

MIX1 (TYPE=FIX)

MIX2 (TYPE=FIX)

INPUT CHANNEL

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

PAN

MIX1

(TYPE=FIX)

MIX2

(TYPE=FIX)

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block

GAIN section

[GAIN] encoder and LEDs

If an AD card with head amp is patched to this chan-

nel, this encoder sets the input sensitivity of the head

amp.

The range of levels is +10dB — –68 dB.

The approximate current setting is shown by the

perimeter LEDs.

The PAD will be internally switched on or off when

the gain of the LMY4-MLF card (including the AI8-

ML8F unit) internal head amp is adjusted between

–8 dB and –7 dB. Keep in mind that noise may be

generated if there is a difference between the Hot

and Cold output impedance of the external device

connected to the card when using phantom power.

GAIN [CLIP] LED

This LED will light if the input signal of the input

channel clips.

If this LED lights for an input channel to which an

AD card with head amp has been patched, use the

[GAIN] encoder (

) to lower the input sensitivity.

If this LED lights for an input channel to which an

AD card without head amp or a digital I/O card has

been patched, lower the output level of the sound

source that is connected to the card.

ATTENUATOR section

This section attenuates the level of the input signal.

[ATTENUATOR] encoder and LEDs

This encoder attenuates the signal level of the

selected channel, and immediately before the HPF.

The range is –96 dB – 0 dB (1 dB steps), and the

approximate current value is shown by the perimeter

LEDs.

ATTENUATOR

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

FADER section

In this section you can switch the currently selected channel on/off, and set its input level.

1 CLIP [EQ] LED

This LED will light when the post-EQ signal clips.

If this LED lights, lower the [ATTENUATOR]

encoder.

2 CLIP [CH

∑

] LED

This LED will light if clipping occurs at any of the

following locations: the currently selected channel

metering point, PRE ATT, POST EQ, POST GATE,

POST COMP, or INSERT IN.

The lit state of this LED will be held if input PEAK

HOLD is turned on in the METER function screen.

3 [ON] switch and LED

This turns the currently selected channel on/off.

(The LED will light for an input channel that is

turned on.)

If this switch is turned off, no signals will be sent

from that channel to the STEREO bus or MIX buses.

4 Fader

This is a 100 mm fader that adjusts the input level of

the currently selected channel.

The range is – ∞ – +10 dB.

5 Meter LEDs

This is a twelve-point LED meter that indicates the

input level of the channel.

The position at which the level is detected can be

selected from the following locations:

• PRE ATT ............ Before the attenuator

• PRE GATE

...........Immediately before the internal gate

• PRE FADER....... Immediately before the fader

• POST FADER .... Immediately after the fader

• POST ON

............ Immediately after the [ON] switch

The level detection point can be selected in the dis-

play (METER function).

6 [CUE] switch and LED

This switch monitors the currently selected channel.

When this switch is pressed, the POST PAN, PFL

(pre-fader listen), or AFL (after-fader listen) signal of

the corresponding channel will be sent to the CUE

bus, and can be monitored from the CUE OUT jacks,

MONITOR OUT jacks A, and PHONES jack.

The position of the signal sent to the CUE bus and

the monitoring method can be selected from the

console in the MASTER block CUE section, or in the

display (MON/CUE function CUE/SOLO screen).

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block

DCA section

This section assigns the currently selected channel to a DCA group. It is convenient to use this section when you wish to

assign a single channel to multiple DCA groups.

1 DCA [1]–[12] switches and LEDs

These switches assign the currently selected channel

to DCA groups 1–12.

When the channel is assigned to a DCA group, the

LED of the corresponding switch will light.

[Procedure]

Using the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block to

assign a channel to a DCA group

1. Select the input channel or ST IN channel that you

wish to assign to a DCA group (1–12).

2. In the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block, use the

DCA [1]–[12] switches to select the DCA group(s)

to which you wish to assign the channel. (You may

select more than one DCA group.)

The LED(s) for the corresponding DCA group(s)

will light.

• DCA groups 9–12 can be used for either input chan-

nels or output channels. However, it is not possible

to assign both inputs and outputs to the same DCA

group.

For this reason, if an output channel is already

assigned to DCA group 9–12, attempting to assign an

input channel will cause a message to be displayed,

and you will not be able to do so.

• When a scene is recalled, the DCA group data of

recall safe channels may be adjusted so that recall safe

settings are consistent within DCA groups 9–12.

Also when a channel library is recalled, the data

recalled to a channel may be adjusted so that settings

are consistent within DCA groups 9–12.

DCA

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

SAFE section

In this section you can set or defeat Recall Safe or Mute Safe settings for the currently selected channel.

1 SAFE [RECALL] switch and LED

This switch sets/defeats Recall Safe for the currently

selected channel; a condition in which the channel

will be unaffected by scene recall operations.

The switch LED will light for channels that are set to

Recall Safe.

The parameters of a channel for which this LED is lit

will not change even if a scene memory is recalled.

2 SAFE [MUTE] switch and LED

This switch sets/defeats Mute Safe for the currently

selected channel; a condition in which the channel

will be unaffected by mute group operations.

The switch LED will light for channels that are set to

Mute Safe.

A channel for which this LED is lit will not be

affected even if a mute group to which the channel

belongs is muted.

CHANNEL SELECT section

This section selects the channel that will be controlled by the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block.

1 CHANNEL SELECT [NAME]/[NUMBER] indicator

and [MONO]/[PAIR] LEDs

These indicators show the short name and number

of the currently selected channel.

When an input channel is selected, the [MONO]

LED will light if that channel is monaural, or the

[PAIR] LED will light if pairing is enabled. The

[NUMBER] indicator will indicate a number 1–96

{1–48}.

If a ST IN channel is selected, the [PAIR] LED will

light, and the [NUMBER] indicator will display the

number and the LR designation as 1L, 1R ... 8L, 8R

{4L, 4R}.

2 CHANNEL SELECT [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC] switches

These switches change the channel number of the

currently selected channel, in the order of 1–96 {1–

48} → 1L, 1r ... 8L, 8r {4L, 4r}.

Hint

If you continue holding down one of the CHANNEL

SELECT [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC] switches, the number

will change continuously.

If you hold down both CHANNEL SELECT [▼/

DEC]/[▲/INC] switches for one second, input chan-

nel 1 will be selected.

3 [SHIFT] switch

If an input channel is selected, you can hold down

this switch and press either the CHANNEL SELECT

[▼/DEC] or [▲/INC] switches to increment or dec-

rement the current value in steps of 12.

When a ST IN channel is selected, you can hold

down this switch and use the CHANNEL SELECT

[▼/DEC]/[▲/INC] switches to increment or decre-

ment the number in steps of 8, as in 1L → 5L. {On 48

channel models, this switch will have no effect when

a ST IN channel is selected.}

MUTE

RECALL

SAFE

DEC INC

SHIFT

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block

This function is convenient when you wish to quickly

select an input channel that is at the same position of

another INPUT block.

4 [CHANNEL COPY] switch and LED

This switch is used to copy parameters from the

desired input channel to another input channel.

When you press this switch, the currently selected

input channel will be the copy source, and the input

channel whose [SEL] you press immediately thereaf-

ter will be the copy destination.

[Procedure]

Copying the input channel/ST IN channel

parameters to another channel

1. Select the input channel or ST IN channel that will

be the copy source.

2. Press the [CHANNEL COPY] switch.

The [CHANNEL COPY] switch LED will light.

However if you do not specify the copy destination

within ten seconds, the copy operation will be can-

celled.

3. Press a [SEL] switch to select the copy destination

input channel or ST IN channel.

A popup window will appear, asking you to conﬁrm

the copy operation.

4. To execute the copy operation, click the OK button.

To cancel the copy operation, click the CANCEL

button.

Hint

For details on the types of parameter that are copied

when you copy between input channels, refer to the

appendices (→p.44).

If you wish to perform another copy, repeat steps 1–

Copying is possible only between monaural input

channels or stereo input channels (a ST IN channel

or two paired channels). If you attempt to copy

some other combination of channels, a message of

“DATA TYPE CONFLICT! CANCELED” will

appear, and copying will not occur.

It is not possible to use the [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC]

switches to select the copy destination channel. The

channel copy operation will be cancelled.

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

GLOBAL CONTROL section

In this section you can exchange (ﬂip) the faders and modules.

1 FADER FLIP [CH]/[MIX] switches and LEDs

These switches exchange the functions of the faders and the [MIX] encoders in the INPUT blocks and the ST IN

block.

The functions of the faders and [MIX] encoders will change as follows, depending on the switch that is turned on.

The status of this switch will always be shown at the bottom of the display.

For details refer to “CS1D Reference manual (Software).”

• When FADER FLIP [CH] switch is on (default) • When FADER FLIP [MIX] switch is on

MIX

CHFLIP

PHONES

MIX

100

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

DCA

-68

THR

COMP

THR

CLIP

SAFE

GATE

+10

RCL

MUTE

CUE

MIX

100

PAN

L CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

CUE

DCA

-68

COMP

CLIP

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

GATE

+10

LSTATUS R

TO ST

THR

SEL

Sets the send level to the

currently selected MIX

bus

Indicates the on/off status

of the signal sent to the

currently selected MIX

bus

Tur ns the channel on/off

Sets the input level of the

channel

MIX

100

PAN

TO ST

CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

DCA

-68

THR

COMP

THR

CLIP

SAFE

GATE

+10

RCL

MUTE

CUE

MIX

100

PAN

L CLIP

+48V

INPUT

INS A

GAIN

CUE

DCA

-68

COMP

CLIP

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

GATE

+10

LSTATUS R

TO ST

THR

SEL

Sets the input level of the

channel

Indicates the on/off status

of the channel

Tur ns the signal sent to

the currently selected

MIX bus on/off

Sets the send level to the

currently selected MIX

bus

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block

2 MODULE [FLIP] switch

This switch exchanges (ﬂips) the operating channels

between vertically adjacent INPUT blocks or verti-

cally adjacent ST IN channels.

Depending on the on/off status of this switch, the

channels operated in the INPUT blocks and the ST

IN block will change as follows.

• When the MODULE [FLIP] switch is off (default)

• When the MODULE [FLIP] switch is on

The status of this switch will always be shown at the

bottom of the display.

For details refer to “CS1D Reference manual (Soft-

ware).”

3 PHONES MONITOR A/MONITOR B jacks

These are headphone jacks for monitoring MONI-

TOR A and MONITOR B.

Do not use both the headphone jack on the top

panel and the headphone jack on the front panel at

the same time. Doing so can cause the CS1D to

malfunction due to excessive current.

CH 13-24

CH 1-12

CH 37-4834

12 CH 25-36

INPUT blocks 1/2 INPUT blocks 3/4

ST IN block

CH 1-12

CH 13-24

CH 25-3612

34 CH 37-48

INPUT blocks 1/2 INPUT blocks 3/4

ST IN block

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

Signal ﬂow for input channels 1–96 {1–48}

Signal ﬂow for ST IN channels 1–8 {1–4}

MIX1

MIX2

MIX48

STEREO L

STEREO R

CUE L

CUE R

...

CH 1(-48)

...

FADER

PAN

4BAND

PEQ

GATE

METER

METERMETER

HPF

COMP

METER

DELAY

FIX

VARI

KEY IN

SEL

DIRECT OUT 1(-48)

INSERT OUT 1(-48)

PEAK

to OUTPUT PATCH

HPF

KEY IN

SEL

LPF

INSERT IN 1(-48)

ATT.

MIX PAIR

from PRE EQ

from PRE ATT.

KEYIN CUE

INSERT

CUE

TO ST

MIX1(ODD)

MIX2(EVEN)

LEFT CH(POST EQ)

KEYIN SOURCE:

KEYIN BUS1-4

SELF PRE EQ

SELF POST EQ

CH 1(-48)

to OUTPUT PATCH

METER

(-96)

DE-

EMPHASIS

DE-

EMPHASIS

METER

(-96)

KEY IN1

KEY IN4

...

FIXED MIX PAN

(-96)

INPUT PATCH

MIX1

MIX2

MIX48

STEREO L

STEREO R

CUE L

CUE R

...

FADER

PAN

4BAND

PEQ

GATE

HPF

COMP DELAY

FIX

VARI

KEY IN

SEL

DIRECT OUT STIN 1(-4) Lch

to OUTPUT PATCH

HPF

KEY IN

SEL

LPF

INSERT IN STIN 1(-4) Lch

FIX

VARI

INSERT IN STIN 1(-4) Rch

STIN Lch 1(-4)

STIN Rch 1(-4)

INSERT OUT STIN L 1(-4)

DIRECT OUT STIN 1(-4) Rch

ATT.

FADER

PAN

4BAND

PEQ

GATE

HPF

COMP

DELAY

KEY IN

SEL

to OUTPUT PATCH

HPF

KEY IN

SEL

LPF

INSERT OUT STIN R 1(-4)

from PRE EQ

from PRE ATT.

PEAK

METER

from PRE EQ

from PRE ATT.

MIX1(ODD)

MIX2(EVEN)

CUE

TO ST

CUE

TO ST

STIN 1(-4)

to OUTPUT PATCH

METER METER METER

(-8)

METER

DE-

EMPHASIS

DE-

EMPHASIS

DE-

EMPHASIS

DE-

EMPHASIS

(-8)

METER

KEY IN1

KEY IN4

...

KEYIN CUE

FIXED MIX PAN

(-8)

INPUT PATCH

Display

[Function]

This screen displays the information needed to operate the PM1D system, and lets you make settings for the

overall system and set MIX parameters for the input and output channels.

1 Frame

By moving the upper part of this frame backward or

forward, you can change the angle of the screen.

Before moving the CS1D, you must be sure to lower the

display toward the back until it is fastened in position.

2 Brightness

This adjusts the brightness of the screen. After setting

the angle of the screen, adjust this for best visibility

from your operating location.

3 Screen

Var ious parameters are displayed here, depending on

the selected function. For the contents of each screen,

refer to “CS1D Reference manual (Software).”

The LCD screen built into the CS1D has the follow-

ing characteristics. Please be aware that even if the

following symptoms occur, this is not a malfunc-

tion or a defect.

•

Since the LCD display is manufactured with extremely del-

icate technology, individual pixels may not display cor-

rectly. (A pixel may be constantly lit or constantly dark.)

• The LCD screen may be affected by changes in the

ambient temperature.

• Depending on the environment of use, you may

notice unevenness in brightness or small spots.

• Since the LCD screen uses a cold cathode tube for a

backlight, the state of the display will gradually

change over time.

Display

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

MIX OUTPUT block

[Function]

This block sets the level and on/off status of the signals sent from the input channels and ST IN channels to

MIX buses 1–48, and outputs them to the output units patched to each MIX channel and to the STEREO bus

and MATRIX buses.

This block also assigns MIX channels 1–48 to DCA faders.

PAI R PAI R

PAI R

PAI R PAI R

PAI R

MIX

LAYER

PAI R PAI R

LAYER

PAI R

MIX OUTPUT

block

MIX OUTPUT block

Channel assignments in the MIX OUTPUT block

The MIX channel section of the MIX OUPUT block contains a total of 24 MIX channel modules; 12 channels above and

12 channels below.

In the default state of the PM1D system, these modules are assigned to control MIX channels 1–24.

However in the MIX OUTPUT block MIX LAYER section, you can change this assignment as follows.

Using the MIX LAYER switches to change the MIX

channel assignments

MIX

LAYER

MIX 1-12

MIX

LAYER

MIX 13-24

MIX 25-36

MIX 37-48

MIX OUTPUT block

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

MIX channel section

In this section you can switch the on/off status and set the output level of each MIX channel 1–48.

1 MIX [NAME] indicator

This displays the short name of the MIX channel.

The short name can be input in the display (OUT

PATCH function NAME screen, etc.).

2 MIX [TO ST] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent

form the MIX channel to the STEREO bus. (The

LED will light when this is on.)

3 MIX [TO MTRX] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent

from the MIX channel to the MATRIX bus. (The

LED will light when this is on.)

When this switch is off, no signal will be sent from

that MIX channel to any MATRIX bus.

4 MIX [ON] switch and LED

This is the on/off switch for the MIX channel. (The

LED will light when this is on.)

When this switch is off, a signal will not be sent to

the channel of the output unit that is patched to the

corresponding MIX channel.

Hint

Even if this switch is off, a signal can be sent from the

MIX channel to a MATRIX bus or the STEREO bus.

To do this, make settings in the display (MATRIX/ST

function MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen) so that the

signal is sent to the MATRIX buses or the STEREO

bus from a point earlier than the MIX [ON] switch.

5 MIX [RCL SAFE] LED

This LED will light for MIX channels that are set to

Recall Safe (a state in which the channel will be unaf-

fected by scene recall operations).

The parameters of a MIX channel for which this LED

is lit will not change even if a scene memory is

recalled.

Recall Safe settings can be made in the SELECTED

OUTPUT CHANNEL bolck or display (SCENE

function RECALL SAFE screen).

6 MIX [MUTE SAFE] LED

This LED will light for MIX channels that are set to

Mute Safe (a state in which the channel will be unaf-

fected by mute group operations).

A MIX channel for which this LED is lit will be unaf-

fected even if a mute group to which it belongs is

muted.

Mute Safe settings can be made in the SELECTED

OUTPUT CHANNEL block or display (OUT DCA/

MUTE function MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen).

7 MIX [DCA] switch and LEDs

This switch assigns the MIX channel to DCA groups

9–12.

When the MIX channel is assigned to a DCA group,

the corresponding LED will light.

Hint

You can assign a single MIX channel to multiple

DCA groups, and assign multiple MIX channels to a

single DCA group.

PAIR

ON ON

MIX OUTPUT block

[Procedure]

Assigning a MIX channel to a DCA group

1. In the DCA GROUP block, press one of the

[ASSIGN DCA] switches 9–12 to select a DCA

group (9–12).

2. In the MIX OUTPUT block, press the MIX [DCA]

switch of the MIX channel that you wish to assign

to the above-selected DCA group.

The LED for that DCA group will light.

• DCA groups 9–12 can be used for either input chan-

nels or output channels. However, it is not possible

to assign both inputs and outputs to the same DCA

group. For this reason, if an input channel is already

assigned to DCA group 9–12, attempting to assign an

output channel will cause a message to be displayed,

and you will not be able to do so.

• When a scene is recalled, the DCA group data of

recall safe channels may be adjusted so that recall safe

settings are consistent within DCA groups 9–12.

Also when a channel library is recalled, the data

recalled to a channel may be adjusted so that settings

are consistent within DCA groups 9–12.

8 MIX [PAIR] LED

This LED will light if pairing has been selected for

two adjacent odd and even-numbered channels

(MIX channels 1/2, 3/4, ...) of MIX channels 1–48.

Pairing of MIX channels can be set/defeated using

the MIX [SEL] switches (B), and in the display

(PAN ROUTING function, etc.).

9 MIX [LEVEL/BAL] encoder and LEDs

This encoder sets the output level of the MIX chan-

nel 1–48 (the level of the signal that is sent to the out-

put unit patched to that MIX channel)

The range is from – ∞ – +10 dB, and the approxi-

mate current value is shown by the perimeter LEDs.

The LED at the ® mark will light to indicate nomi-

nal level (0 dB).

If two adjacent odd and even-numbered MIX chan-

nels are paired, the right (even-numbered) encoder

will function as the MIX [LEVEL] encoder to set the

common output level of the two channels, and the

left (odd-numbered) encoder will function as the

MIX [BAL] encoder to set the volume balance

between the two channels.

In this case as well, the approximate current value is

shown by the perimeter LEDs.

Of the LEDs around the [BAL] encoder, the LED at

the q mark will light to indicate that the left/right

balance is equal.

• When MIX channels are not paired

PAIR

ON ON

OUTPUT LEVEL

OUTPUT PATCH

MIX CHANNEL

MIX 1

MIX 2

MIX 1

OUTPUT

LEVEL

MIX 2

OUTPUT

LEVEL

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

• When MIX channels are paired

0 MIX [INS] LED

This LED indicates the insertion status of the MIX

channel.

When insertion is on, the switch LED will light, and

the insert out/in point speciﬁed in the display (OUT-

PUT PATCH function INSERT PATCH screen) will

be enabled.

A MIX [CUE] switch and LED

This switch monitors the currently selected MIX

channel.

When this switch is pressed, the PFL (pre-fader lis-

ten) or POST ON (after the [ON] switch) signal of

the corresponding MIX channel will be sent to the

CUE bus, and can be monitored from the CUE OUT

jacks, MONITOR OUT jacks A, or PHONES jack.

The location of the signal that is sent to the CUE bus

and the monitoring method can be switched from

the console in the MASTER block CUE section, or in

the display (MON/CUE function CUE/SOLO

screen).

B MIX [SEL] switch and LED

This switch selects the MIX channel that your opera-

tions will affect.

The MIX [SEL] LED of the currently selected MIX

channel will light.

The MIX channel selected by this switch can be con-

trolled in the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL

block.

It will also be reﬂected by the settings in the display.

Hint

If the selected MIX channel is paired, the MIX [SEL]

LED of the other MIX channel of the pair will blink.

You can also use the MIX [SEL] switches to set/defeat

pairing.

The MIX channel shown by the INPUT block MIX

SEND [NAME] indicator and the MIX SEND

[NUMBER] indicator will also follow the operation

of the MIX [SEL] switch. (However, INPUT blocks

whose [LOCAL] LED is lit are excepted.)

[Procedure]

Using the MIX [SEL] switches to set/defeat pair-

ing of MIX channels

1. For adjacent odd and even-numbered MIX chan-

nels, hold down one [SEL] switch and press the

other [SEL] switch.

The MIX [PAIR] LED will light, and the two MIX

channels will be paired.

The direction in which the channel parameters are

copied will depend on the order in which the [SEL]

switches are pressed. When creating a pair, the

parameters of the channel you pressed ﬁrst will be

copied to the channel that you pressed later, and then

the parameters will be linked.

For example if you wish to pair MIX 1 and MIX 2,

hold down the MIX 1 [SEL] switch and press the

MIX 2 [SEL] switch. The state of MIX 1 will be cop-

ied to MIX 2. For details on the parameters that are

copied/linked for a pair, refer to “CS1D Reference

Manual (Appendices)” (→p.45).

If you wish to reset the parameters, do so from the

screen.

2. To defeat pairing, hold down the MIX [SEL] switch

for one of the paired channels, and press the MIX

[SEL] switch for the other channel.

PAIR

ON ON

OUTPUT LEVEL BALANCE

OUTPUT PATCH

MIX CHANNEL

MIX 1

MIX 2

MIX 1/2

BALANCE

MIX 1/2

OUTPUT

LEVEL

MIX OUTPUT block

MIX LAYER section

In this section you can select the group of channels that will be controlled by the MIX channel section.

1 MIX LAYER [1–24]/[25–48] switches and LEDs

These switches select the channels that will be con-

trolled by the MIX channel section.

The channels controlled by the MIX channel section

will change as follows, according to the switch that is

turned on.

• When the MIX LAYER [1–24] switch is on

MIX channels 1–24 will be controlled.

• When the MIX LAYER [25–48] switch is on

MIX channels 25–48 will be controlled.

MIX

LAYER

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

MATRIX OUTPUT block

[Function]

In this block you can set the level and on/off status of the signals that are sent from MIX channels 1–48, STE-

REO A, B channel, and SUB IN channels to MATRIX buses 1–24, and send them to the output unit that is

patched to each MATRIX channel.

PAI RPAI R

PAI RPAIR

PAI R

MATRIX

LAYER

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

PAI R

MATRIX OUTPUT

block

MATRIX OUTPUT block

MATRIX OUTPUT block channel assignments

The MATRIX channel section of the MATRIX OUTPUT block contains 12 modules.

When the PM1D system is in its default state, these modules are assigned to control MATRIX channels 1–12.

However, these assignments can be changed as follows by an operation in the MATRIX LAYER section.

Using the MATRIX LAYER switches to change the

MATRIX channel assignments

MATRIX

LAYER

MATRIX

LAYER

MATRIX 1-12

MATRIX 13-24

MATRIX OUTPUT block

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

MATRIX channel section

In this section you can set the on/off status and output level of MATRIX channels 1–24.

1 MATRIX [NAME] indicator

This displays the short name of the MATRIX chan-

nel.

The short name can be input in the display (OUT

PATCH function NAME screen, etc.).

2 MATRIX [ON] switch and LED

This is the on/off switch for the MATRIX channel.

(The LED will light when this is on.)

When this switch is off, no signal will be sent to the

channel of the output unit that is patched to the cor-

responding MATRIX channel.

3 MATRIX SAFE [RCL] LED

This LED will light if the MATRIX channel has been

set to Recall Safe (a state in which the channel is

unaffected by scene recall operations).

The parameters of a MATRIX channel for which this

LED is lit will not change when a scene memory is

recalled.

Recall Safe settings can be made in the SELECTED

OUTPUT CHANNEL block or display (SCENE

function RECALL SAFE screen).

4 MATRIX SAFE [MUTE] LED

This LED will light if the MATRIX channel has been

set to Mute Safe (a state in which the channel is unaf-

fected by mute group operations).

A MATRIX channel for which this LED is lit will not

be affected even if a mute group to which it belongs

is muted.

Mute Safe settings can be made in the SELECTED

OUTPUT CHANNEL block or display (OUT DCA/

MUTE function MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen).

5 MATRIX [PAIR] LED

This LED will light when two adjacent odd and even-

numbered MATRIX channels 1–24 are paired (i.e.,

MATRIX channels 1/2, 3/4, ...).

MATRIX channel pairing can be set or defeated from

the console by using the MATRIX [SEL] switches

(9), or in the display (MATRIX/ST function, etc.).

6 MATRIX [LEVEL/BAL] encoder and LEDs

This encoder sets the output level of the MATRIX

channel 1–24 (the level of the signal that is sent to the

output unit patched to that MATRIX channel)

The range is from – ∞ – +10 dB, and the approxi-

mate current value is shown by the perimeter LEDs.

The LED at the

® mark will light to indicate nomi-

nal level (0 dB).

If two adjacent odd and even-numbered MATRIX

channels are paired, the right (even-numbered)

encoder will function as the MATRIX [LEVEL]

encoder to set the common output level of the two

channels, and the left (odd-numbered) encoder will

function as the MATRIX [BAL] encoder to set the

volume balance between the two channels.

In this case as well, the approximate current value is

shown by the perimeter LEDs. Of the LEDs around

the [BAL] encoder, the LED at the

q mark will light

to indicate that the left/right balance is equal.

PAIR

ON ON

MATRIX OUTPUT block

• When MATRIX channels are not paired

• When MATRIX channels are paired

7 MATRIX [INS] LED

This LED indicates the insertion on/off status for the

MATRIX channel.

When insertion is on, the LED will light, and the

insert out/in point speciﬁed in the display (OUTPUT

PATCH function INSERT PATCH screen) will be

enabled.

8 MATRIX [CUE] switch and LED

This switch monitors the currently selected MATRIX

channel.

When this switch is pressed, the PFL (pre-fader lis-

ten) or POST ON (after the [ON] switch) signal of

the corresponding MATRIX channel will be sent to

the CUE bus, and can be monitored from the CUE

OUT jacks, MONITOR OUT jacks A, or PHONES

jack.

The location of the signal that is sent to the CUE bus

and the monitoring method can be switched from

the console in the MASTER block CUE section, or in

the display (MON/CUE function CUE/SOLO

screen).

9 MATRIX [SEL] switch and LED

This switch selects the MATRIX channel that your

operations will affect. The MATRIX [SEL] LED of

the currently selected MATRIX channel will light.

The MATRIX channel selected by this switch can be

controlled in the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL

block.

It will also be reﬂected by the settings in the display.

Hint

If the selected MATRIX channel is paired, the

MATRIX [SEL] LED of the other MATRIX channel

of the pair will blink.

You can also use the MATRIX [SEL] switches to set/

defeat pairing.

MATRIX CHANNEL

MATRIX 1

MATRIX 2

PAIR

ON ON

OUTPUT PATCH

OUTPUT LEVEL

MATRIX

channel 1

OUTPUT

LEVEL

MATRIX

channel 2

OUTPUT

LEVEL

PAIR

ON ON

OUTPUT PATCH

OUTPUT LEVEL BALANCE

MATRIX CHANNEL

MATRIX 1

MATRIX 2

MATRIX

channel 1/2

OUTPUT

LEVEL

MATRIX

channel 1/2

BALANCE

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

[Procedure]

Using the MATRIX [SEL] switches to set/defeat

pairing of MATRIX channels

1. For adjacent odd and even-numbered MATRIX

channels, hold down one [SEL] switch and press

the other [SEL] switch.

The direction in which the channel parameters are

copied will depend on the order in which the [SEL]

switches are pressed. When creating a pair, the

parameters of the channel you pressed ﬁrst will be

copied to the channel that you pressed later, and then

the parameters will be linked.

For example if you wish to pair MATRIX 1 and

MATRIX 2, hold down the MATRIX 1 [SEL] switch

and press the MATRIX 2 [SEL] switch. The state of

MATRIX 1 will be copied to MATRIX 2. For details

on the parameters that are copied/linked for a pair,

refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Appendices)”

(→p.45).

If you wish to reset the parameters, do so from the

screen.

2. To defeat pairing, hold down the MATRIX [SEL]

switch for one of the paired channels, and press the

MATRIX [SEL] switch for the other channel.

MATRIX OUTPUT block

MATRIX LAYER section

In this section you can select the group of channels that will be controlled by the MATRIX channel section.

1 MATRIX LAYER [1–12]/[13–24] switches and LEDs

The channels controlled by the MATRIX channel

section will change as follows, according to the

switch that is turned on.

• When the MATRIX LAYER [1–12] switch is on

MATRIX channels 1–12 will be controlled.

• When the MATRIX LAYER [13–24] switch is on

MATRIX channels 13–24 will be controlled.

MATRIX

LAYER

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

STEREO OUTPUT block

[Function]

This block mixes the signals that are sent from the input channels and the output channels to the STEREO

bus, and sends them to the output units that are patched to the STEREO A/B channels. If you are using the

PM1D system is used in LCR mode and the CENTER BUS CONTROL button is turned on in the LCR screen

of the PAN/ROUTING function or the MATRIX/ST function, the CENTER bus signal will be output from the

STEREO B channel. In this case, the STEREO B channel will function as a control channel for the CENTER

bus.

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

INS

SEL

TO MTRX

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

INS

SEL

MONO

CUE CUE

ON ON

ST OUTPUT

STEREO OUTPUT

block

STEREO OUTPUT block

1 STEREO [ON] switch and LED

This is the on/off switch for the STEREO A/B chan-

nel. (The LED will light when this is on.)

If this switch is off, no signal will be sent to the chan-

nel of the output unit that is patched to the respec-

tive STEREO channel.

If you are using the PM1D system in LCR mode so

that the STEREO B channel controls the signal of the

CENTER bus, the [ON] switch of the STEREO B

channel will function as the on/off switch for the

CENTER bus.

2 STEREO A [TO MTRX] switch and LED (STEREO

A channel only)

This is the on/off switch for the signal that is sent

from the STEREO A channel to the MATRIX buses.

(The LED will light when this is on.)

If this switch is off, no signal will be sent from the

STEREO A channel to any MATRIX bus.

When the STEREO A [TO MTRX] switch is on, you

can use the knobs in the display (MATRIX/ST func-

tion MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen) to set the send

levels of the signals that are sent from the STEREO

A channel to MATRIX buses 1–24.

Note that these send level settings can be made only

in the display.

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

INS

SEL

TO MTRX

RCL

MUTE

SAFE

INS

SEL

MONO

CUE CUE

ON ON

ST OUTPUT

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

3 STEREO B [MONO] switch and LED (STEREO B

channel only)

This switch selects monaural or stereo output for the

STEREO B channel.

When the LED is lit, the output of the STEREO B

channel will be monaural, and the same signal will be

output to the channels of the output units that are

patched to STB (L) and STB (R).

In this case, the signals of the left and right channels

will be mixed with a 3 dB attenuation.

Hint

The signal that is sent from STEREO B to the

MATRIX bus can be switched on/off in the LCD

screen.

4 STEREO [SEL] switch and LED

This switch selects the STEREO A/B channel to

which your operations will apply.

When you press this switch, the STEREO A or STE-

REO B channel can be controlled in the SELECTED

OUTPUT CHANNEL block.

This will also be reﬂected by the settings in the dis-

play.

Hint

Each time you repeatedly press the STEREO [SEL]

switch, you will alternate between the L channel and

R channel of STEREO A or STEREO B.

For example if you repeatedly press the STEREO A

channel [SEL] switch, the CHANNEL SELECT

[NUMBER] indicator of the SELECTED OUTPUT

CHANNEL block will alternately display “AL” and

“Ar.”

However since all parameters except for DELAY

parameters are linked for the STEREO A/B channels,

you will probably not often need to switch between L

and R channels.

• Using the STEREO A channel [SEL] switch to

alternate between L and R channels

INS

SEL

TO MTRX

INS

SEL

MONO

MIX

MATRIX

CHANNEL

COPY

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL

ON ON

SHIFT

CHANNEL SELECT

INS

SEL

TO MTRX

INS

SEL

MONO

MIX

MATRIX

CHANNEL

COPY

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL

ON ON

SHIFT

CHANNEL SELECT

stAL

stAR

DEC INC

STEREO OUTPUT block

5 STEREO [INS] LED

This LED indicates the insertion on/off status of the

STEREO A/B channel.

When insertion is on, the switch LED will light, and

the insert out/in points speciﬁed in the display

(OUTPUT PATCH function INSERT PATCH screen)

will be enabled.

6 STEREO fader

This is a 100 mm fader that adjusts the output level

of the STEREO A/B channel.

The range is – ∞ dB – +10 dB.

If you are using the PM1D system in LCR mode so

that the STEREO B channel controls the signal of the

CENTER bus, the STEREO B channel fader will con-

trol the output level of the CENTER bus.

7 STEREO SAFE [RCL] LED

This LED will light if the STEREO A/B channel is in

Recall Safe mode (a condition in which the channel

will be unaffected by scene recall operations).

The parameters of a channel whose LED is lit will not

change even if a scene memory is recalled.

Recall Safe settings can be made in the SELECTED

OUTPUT CHANNEL block or in the display

(SCENE function RECALL SAFE screen).

8 STEREO SAFE [MUTE] LED

This LED will light if the STEREO A/B channel is in

Mute Safe mode (a condition in which the channel

will be unaffected by mute group operations).

A channel whose LED is lit will not be affected if a

mute group to which it belongs is muted.

Mute Safe settings can be made in the SELECTED

OUTPUT CHANNEL block or in the display (OUT

DCA/MUTE function MUTE GROUP ASSIGN

screen).

9 STEREO [CUE] switch and LED

This switch monitors the STEREO A/B channel.

When you press this switch, the PFL (pre-fader lis-

ten) or POST ON (after the [ON] switch) signal of

the corresponding channel will be sent to the CUE

bus, and can be monitored from the CUE OUT jacks,

MONITOR OUT jacks A, and PHONES jack.

The location of the signal sent to the CUE bus and

the monitoring method can be selected from the

CUE section of the console, or in the display (MON/

CUE function CUE/SOLO screen).

Hint

For details on the signal ﬂow of the STEREO A/B

channels, refer to the block diagram on page 68.

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block

[Function]

In this block you can set and view the parameters of the currently selected input channel (MIX channel,

MATRIX channel, L or R channels of STEREO A/B).

Hint

If desired, you can cause the corresponding screen to automatically appear when you operate this block.

This setting is made in the UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen.

COMPRESSOR

EQ ON

EQUALIZER

DCA

SAFE

CHANNEL SELECT

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL

DEC INC

SHIFT

SELECTED OUTPUT

CHANNEL block

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block

[Procedure]

Selecting a channel

The channel to be controlled by the SELECTED OUT-

PUT CHANNEL block can be selected in the following

ways.

1. Using the [SEL] switch

You can use the following [SEL] switches to directly

select the desired output channel.

The [SEL] switch LED of the currently selected chan-

nel will light.

• MIX OUTPUT block MIX [SEL] switch

Selects a MIX channel 1–48.

• MATRIX OUTPUT block MATRIX [SEL] switch

Selects a MATRIX channel 1–24.

• STEREO OUTPUT block STEREO [SEL] switch

Selects the L channel or R channel of STEREO A/B.

If you repeatedly press the same STEREO [SEL]

switch, you will cycle between the L and R of that

channel.

[SEL]

switch

MIX OUTPUT block

MIX OUTPUT

block

[SEL]

switch

MATRIX OUTPUT block

MATRIX OUTPUT

block

INS

SEL

TO MTRX

INS

SEL

MONO

ON ON

[SEL]

switch

STEREO OUTPUT block

STEREO OUTPUT

block

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

2. Using the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block

You can use the CHANNEL SELECT [ST]/

[MATRIX]/[MIX] switches of the SELECTED OUT-

PUT CHANNEL block to select the desired channel

group (STEREO A/B, MATRIX, MIX), and then use

the CHANNEL SELECT [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC]

switches to step through the channels consecutively.

These switches will operate as follows.

• CHANNEL SELECT [ST] switch

The channel that was last selected for STEREO will

be selected.

• CHANNEL SELECT [MATRIX] switch

The channel that was last selected for MATRIX will

be selected.

• CHANNEL SELECT [MIX] switch

The channel that was last selected for MIX will be

selected.

• CHANNEL SELECT [▲/INC] switch

The number following the currently selected chan-

nel will be selected.

If the highest-numbered channel is selected, you

will move to the ﬁrst channel in the same group.

• CHANNEL SELECT [▼/DEC] switch

The number preceding the currently selected chan-

nel will be selected.

If the ﬁrst-numbered channel is selected, you will

move to the last channel in the same group.

The [ST]/[MATRIX]/[MIX] switch LEDs will indi-

cate the group of the currently selected channel.

The CHANNEL SELECT [NAME] indicator and

CHANNEL SELECT [NUMBER] indicator located

at the right of the switch will indicate the channel

number and short name of the currently selected

channel.

MIX

MATRIX

CHANNEL

COPY

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL

CHANNEL SELECT

DEC INC

SHIFT

[ST]/[MATRIX]/[MIX]

switches

[▼/DEC] switch [▲/INC] switch

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block

DELAY section

In this section you can make settings for the internal delay function.

1 DELAY [ON] switch and LED

This is the on/off switch for the delay of the selected

channel.

When this is on, the switch LED will light, and the

input signal will be delayed by the delay time shown

in the DELAY TIME [VALUE] indicator (2).

2 DELAY [TIME] encoder and [VALUE] indicator

The DELAY [TIME] encoder sets the delay time of

the selected output channel.

The current delay time will be displayed in the

DELAY TIME [VALUE] indicator in millisecond

units.

The delay time range is 0 msec – 1000 msec

Hint

The output channel delay function provides a useful

way to compensate for time differences between

speakers placed at distant locations.

Even if the internal clock on which the PM1D system

operates is switched from 48 kHz to 44.1 kHz (or the

opposite), the delay time will not change. However

while a PM1D system is synchronized to a word

clock supplied from an external device, the displayed

time and the actual delay time may differ if the word

clock frequency is changed using vari-pitch.

If you have selected one channel of two paired

MIX/MATRIX channels, or the L or R channel of a

STEREO channel, the parameters of the DELAY

section can be set independently for each channel.

If you adjust the delay time here, decimal places

that are not subsequently displayed will be rounded

off.

TIME

msec

DELAY

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

COMPRESSOR section

In this section you can make settings for the internal compressor.

All parameters can be controlled from the top panel except for compressor library store/recall operations, compressor

type selection, and key-in signal selection.

1 COMPRESSOR [RATIO] encoder and [VALUE]

indicator

This sets the ratio of the internal compressor.

When the compressor type is set to COMP or

EXPANDER, the range is 1:1– ∞:1 (16 steps). When

the compressor type is set to COMPANDER, the

range is 1:1–20:1 (15 steps).

2 COMPRESSOR FILTER [FREQUENCY] encoder

and [VALUE] indicator and [Hz]/[kHz] LEDs

This sets the cutoff frequency of the HPF or LPF that

is placed in the ﬁrst stage of the internal compressor.

The range is 20 Hz – 20 kHz (121 steps).

The current value is shown in the [VALUE] indica-

tor. (Either the [Hz] or [kHz] LED will light to indi-

cate the units of the displayed value.)

The selection of HPF or LPF is made in the display

(OUT COMP function COMP PRM screen).

Hint

HPF and LPF cannot be used simultaneously.

If COMP is selected as the internal compressor type,

selecting HPF will allow it to function as a “de-esser.”

3 COMPRESSOR FILTER [ON] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the HPF or LPF that is

placed in the ﬁrst stage of the internal compressor.

4 COMPRESSOR [ATTACK]/[RELEASE] switches

and LEDs

These switches select the function of the ATTACK/

RELEASE [TIME] encoder (5) located to the left of

the switches.

• When the COMPRESSOR [ATTACK] LED is lit,

the ATTACK/RELEASE [TIME] encoder will set

the ATTACK (attack time)

• When the COMPRESSOR [RELEASE] LED is lit,

the ATTACK/RELEASE [TIME] encoder will set

the RELEASE (release time)

5 COMPRESSOR ATTACK/RELEASE [TIME]

encoder, [VALUE] indicator, and [msec]/[sec] LEDs

This encoder adjusts the ATTACK (attack time) or

RELEASE (release time) of the internal compressor,

according to the setting of the COMPRESSOR

[ATTACK]/[RELEASE] switches (4).

The attack time range is 0 msec – 120 msec . The

release time range is 5 msec – 42.3 sec.

The current value is shown in the [VALUE] indica-

tor. (Either the [msec] or [sec] LED will light to indi-

cate the units of the displayed value.)

6 COMPRESSOR WIDTH (dB)/KNEE encoder,

[VALUE] indicator, and [WIDTH]/[KNEE] LEDs

The function of this encoder will depend on the cur-

rently selected compressor type.

COMPRESSOR

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block

• When the compressor type is COMP or

EXPANDER

The encoder will set the KNEE parameter of the

COMP or EXPANDER. (The [KNEE] LED will

light.)

You can select from SOFT 1–SOFT 5, or HARD.

• When the compressor type is COMPANDER

The encoder will set the WIDTH parameter of the

COMPANDER.

The range is 1 dB – 90 dB.

7 COMPRESSOR [GR] meter LEDs

This meter displays the amount of gain reduction

caused by the compressor.

Hint

In the UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen you

can specify whether the GR meter display will be

linked with the compressor on/off setting. If linking

is on, the GR meter will be displayed only when the

compressor is on; the meter will not be displayed

when the compressor is off. If linking is turned off,

the GR meter will always be displayed.

8 COMPRESSOR [POST] meter LEDs

This meter indicates the signal level after the com-

pressor.

9 COMPRESSOR [PRE CLIP] LED

This LED will light when the signal has clipped

before passing through the compressor.

0 COMPRESSOR [LINK] switch and LED

This speciﬁes whether the compressors of adjacent

odd-numbered and even-numbered MIX channels

or MATRIX channels will be linked by their key-in

signals (link = on), or will operate using independent

key-in signals (link = off). (The LED will light when

link is on.)

• Key-in signal ﬂow when link=on

• Key-in signal ﬂow when link=off

Linking will occur only if channels of the same

COMPRESSOR type are linked. If channels with

differing types are linked, the operation will be the

same as if link is off.

Be careful not to confuse “compressor linking” with

“input channel pairing.”

When compressor link is on, the compressor opera-

tion will simply be linked by the key-in signal; the

compressor parameters themselves will remain

independent for each channel.

If output channels are paired, compressor link will

automatically be on, and the various compressor

parameters will also be linked. However, you are

free to turn linking off again if desired.

For the STEREO A/B channels, the compressor

parameters of the left and right channels are always

linked. However, you are free to turn link on/off if

you wish.

A COMPRESSOR [ON] switch and LED

This is the on/off switch for the internal compressor.

The LED will light when the compressor is on.

B COMPRESSOR [GAIN] encoder and LEDs

This encoder sets the GAIN parameter of the internal

compressor.

The perimeter LEDs show the approximate current

value.

When the type is COMP/EXPANDER, the range is 0

dB – +18 dB (0.5 dB steps). When the type is COM-

PANDER, the range is –18 dB – 0 dB (0.5 dB steps).

C COMPRESSOR [THR] encoder and LEDs

This encoder sets the THRESHOLD LEVEL parame-

ter of the internal compressor.

The perimeter LEDs show the approximate current

value.

The range is –54 dB – 0 dB (1 dB steps).

ATTAC K

processing

THR

LINK = ON

ATTAC K

processing

Key-in signal of odd-

numbered channel

Key-in signal of even-

numbered channel

Detect the

maximum

level

ATTAC K

processing

ATTAC K

processing

Key-in signal of odd-

numbered channel

Key-in signal of even-

numbered channel

Detect the

maximum level

Detect the

maximum level

THR

LINK = OFF

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

EQUALIZER section

This section sets the internal six-band EQ (HIGH, HIGH MID, MID, LOW MID, LOW, SUB LOW). Of the six bands,

HIGH and SUB LOW EQ can be switched between shelving and peaking types. In addition, the HIGH band can function

as an LPF, and the SUB LOW can function as an HPF.

1 EQ [LPF] switch and LED (HIGH band only)

This switch changes the HIGH band EQ type to LPF.

When LPF is selected, the switch LED will light.

In this case, the [Q]/[GAIN] encoders of the HIGH

band will have no effect, and the perimeter LEDs will

be displayed.

2 EQ [BYPASS] switch and LED

This switch bypasses each EQ band.

When bypassed, the switch LED will light.

3 EQ [ ] switch and LED (HIGH band only)

This switch changes the HIGH band to high-shelv-

ing.

The switch LED will light when high-shelving is

selected.

In this case, the HIGH band [Q] encoder will have

no effect, and the perimeter LEDs will be displayed.

4 EQ [Q] encoder and LEDs

This encoder sets the Q (steepness) of each band.

Rotating it toward the right will make the Q gentler,

and rotating it toward the left will make the Q

sharper.

The range is 10.0–0.10 (41 steps) for each band.

The current approximate value is shown by the

perimeter LEDs.

5 EQ [F] encoder, [VALUE] indicator, and [Hz]/[kHz]

LEDs

This encoder sets the center frequency of each band.

The range is 20 Hz – 20 kHz (121 steps) for each

band.

The current value is shown by the [VALUE] indica-

tor, and either the [Hz] or [kHz] indicators will light

to indicate the units of the displayed value.

6 EQ [GAIN] encoder and LEDs

This encoder sets the gain of each band.

The range is –18 dB – +18 dB (0.5 dB units), and the

approximate value is shown by the perimeter LEDs.

7 [EQ ON] switch

This switch turns the entire equalizer on/off.

The switch LED will light when the EQ is on.

8 EQ [HPF] switch and LED (SUB LOW band only)

This switch changes the SUB LOW band EQ type to

HPF.

The switch LED will light when HPF is selected. In

this case, the [Q]/[GAIN] encoders of the SUB LOW

band will have no function.

EQ ON

EQUALIZER

SUB LOW

LOW

HIGH

2 3 5 1

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block

9 EQ [ ] switch & LED (SUB LOW band only)

This switch changes the SUB LOW band EQ type to

low shelving.

When you switch the type to low shelving, the switch

LED will light.

In this case, the SUB LOW band [Q] encoder will

have no function, and its peripheral LEDs will go

dark.

OUTPUT section

This section switches the currently selected output channel on/off, and adjusts the pan/balance and level of the output

signal.

1 OUTPUT [ON] switch and LED

This switch turns the currently selected channel on/

off. (When on, the LED will light.)

2 OUTPUT [INSERT] switch and LED

This switch turns insertion on/off for the currently

selected channel.

When insertion is on, the switch LED will light, and

the insert out/in points speciﬁed in the display

(OUTPUT PATCH function INSERT PATCH screen)

will be enabled.

If the [INSERT] switch is turned on when the insert

out/in points are not patched to appropriate jacks,

it is possible that no signal will be output from the

channel of the output unit patched to that channel.

Please use caution.

3 OUTPUT [TO ST] switch and LED

When a MIX channel is selected, this is an on/off

switch for the signal sent from that MIX channel to

the STEREO bus. (When on, the LED will light.)

This is linked to the MIX [TO ST] switch of the MIX

OUTPUT block.

This switch is valid only if a MIX channel is selected

in the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block.

4 OUTPUT [TO MTRX] switch and LED

When the STEREO A, B channel or a MIX channel

1–48 is selected, this is an on/off switch for the signal

sent from that channel to the MATRIX bus. (When

on, the LED will light.)

When this switch is off, no signal can be sent from

that channel to any MATRIX bus.

This is linked with the MIX OUTPUT block MIX

[TO MTRX] switch and the STEREO OUTPUT

block STEREO A [TO MTRX] switch.

The send level settings can be made in the display.

This switch is valid only when the STEREO A, B

channel or a MIX channel is selected in the

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block.

5 OUTPUT [PAN/BAL] encoder and LEDs

This encoder adjusts the pan or balance, according to

the group or pair on/off status of the currently

selected output channel.

The approximate current setting is shown by the

perimeter LEDs.

TO ST PAN BAL CUE

TO STINSERT TO MTRX

LEVEL

100RL

1 2 3 4

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

6 OUTPUT [TO ST PAN]/[BAL] switches and LEDs

These LEDs will be lit or dark to indicate the func-

tion controlled by the OUTPUT [PAN/BAL] encoder

(5).

(A)

When the OUTPUT [TO ST PAN]/[BAL] LEDs

are dark

The OUTPUT [PAN/BAL] encoder will have no

effect.

This will be the state when an unpaired MATRIX

channel is selected in the SELECTED OUTPUT

CHANNEL block.

(B)

When the OUTPUT [TO ST PAN] LED is lit

The OUTPUT [PAN/BAL] encoder will adjust the

pan of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the

STEREO bus.

This will be the state when a MIX channel is

selected in the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL

block for that MIX channel.

(C)

When the OUTPUT [BAL] LED is lit

The OUTPUT [PAN/BAL] encoder will adjust the

volume balance of the paired output channels (or

of the L/R channels of STEREO A/B).

This will be the state when a paired MIX/MATRIX

channel or the STEREO A/B channel is selected in

the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block.

Normally, the OUTPUT [TO ST PAN]/[BAL] switch

LED will automatically be lit or dark depending on

the type or pair on/off status of the currently selected

output channel.

However, only if a paired MIX channel is selected

and the OUTPUT [TO ST] switch (3) is turned on

for those MIX channels, the OUTPUT [PAN/BAL]

encoder can be used for either of the above-listed

functions (B) and (C).

In this case, you yourself will need to press the [TO

ST PAN] switch or [BAL] switch to specify the func-

tion controlled by the encoder.

When the [TO ST PAN] switch LED is lit, you can

use the OUTPUT [PAN/BAL] encoder to adjust the

pan of the signal that is sent from the MIX channel to

the STEREO bus. (The section enclosed by dashed

lines in the following diagram corresponds to the

[PAN/BAL] encoder.)

• Adjusting the pan of the signal sent from a MIX

channel to the STEREO buttons

Also, when the [BAL] switch LED is lit, you can use

the OUTPUT [PAN/BAL] encoder to adjust the vol-

ume balance of paired MIX channels. (The section

enclosed by dashed lines in the following diagram

corresponds to the [PAN/BAL] encoder.)

• Adjusting the volume balance of paired MIX

channels

7 OUTPUT [LEVEL] encoder and LEDs

This sets the output level of the currently selected

channel.

The range is – ∞ dB – +10 dB (1 dB steps), and the

approximate current value is shown by the perimeter

LEDs.

8 OUTPUT [CUE] switch and LED

This switch monitors the currently selected MIX

channel.

When you press this switch, the PFL (pre-fader lis-

ten) or POST ON (after the [ON] switch) signal of

the corresponding MIX channel will be sent to the

CUE bus, and can be monitored from the CUE OUT

jacks, the MONITOR OUT jacks A, or the PHONES

jack.

STEREO L

STEREO R

OUTPUT LEVEL

PAN

MIX 1

PAN

MIX 2

OUTPUT LEVEL

BAL

OUTPUT PATCH

MIX 1

MIX 2

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block

DCA section

This section assigns the currently selected MIX channel to a DCA group. If you wish to assign a single MIX channel to

multiple DCA groups, it is convenient to use this section.

1 DCA [9]–[12] switches and LEDs

These switches assign the currently selected MIX

channel to DCA groups 9–12.

When the channel is assigned to a DCA group, the

LED of the corresponding switch will light.

This section is valid only when a MIX channel 1–48

is selected.

[Procedure]

Using the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block

to assign a MIX channel to a DCA group

1. Select the MIX channel that you wish to assign to a

DCA group (9–12).

2. Use the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block

DCA [9]–[12] switches to select the DCA group(s)

that you wish to assign to the channel. (You may

select more than one.)

The LED for the selected DCA group(s) will light.

• DCA groups 9–12 can be used for either input chan-

nels or output channels (MIX channels).

However, it is not possible to assign both input chan-

nels and output channels to the same DCA group.

For this reason, if a input channel is already assigned

to DCA group 9–12, attempting to assign a MIX

channel will cause a message to be displayed, and you

will not be able to do so.

• When a scene is recalled, the DCA group data of

recall safe channels may be adjusted so that recall safe

settings are consistent within DCA groups 9–12.

Also when a channel library is recalled, the data

recalled to a channel may be adjusted so that settings

are consistent within DCA groups 9–12.

DCA

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

SAFE section

This section sets/defeats Recall Safe and Mute Safe for the currently selected output channel.

1 SAFE [RECALL] switch and LED

This switch sets/defeats Recall Safe for the currently

selected output channel (MIX, MATRIX, STEREO

A/B); a state in which the channel will not be affected

by scene recall operations.

The switch LED will light for channels for which

Recall Safe is selected.

The parameters of a channel whose LED is lit will not

change even if a scene memory is recalled.

2 SAFE [MUTE] switch and LED

This switch sets/defeats Mute Safe for the currently

selected output channel (MIX, MATRIX, STEREO

A/B); a state in which the channel will not be affected

by mute groups.

The switch LED will light for channels for which

Mute Safe is selected.

Channels whose LED is lit will not change even if a

mute group to which that channel belongs is muted.

CHANNEL SELECT section

This section selects the channel that will be controlled in the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block.

1 CHANNEL SELECT [NAME]/[NUMBER] indicator

2 CHANNEL SELECT [ST]/[MATRIX]/[MIX]

switches and LEDs

The CHANNEL SELECT [NAME]/[NUMBER] indi-

cators show the short name and number of the cur-

rently selected channel.

The [ST]/[MATRIX]/[MIX] switches select the

channel group (STEREO A/B, MATRIX, MIX). (The

LED of the currently selected switch will light.)

• When a STEREO A/B channel is selected

The [ST] LED will light, and the [NUMBER] indi-

cator will show either AL (L channel of STEREO

A), Ar (R channel of STEREO A), bL (L channel of

STEREO B), or br (R channel of STEREO B).

• When a MATRIX channel is selected

The [MATRIX] LED will light, and the [NUM-

BER] indicator will indicate the number 1–24.

• When a MIX channel is selected

The [MIX] LED will light, and the [NUMBER]

indicator will indicate the number 1–48.

3 CHANNEL SELECT [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC] switches

These switches increment or decrement the currently

selected channel number within the channel group

selected in 2 (MIX, MATRIX, STEREO A/B). For

details on operation, refer to page 58.

Hint

If you hold down either of the CHANNEL SELECT

[▼/DEC]/[▲/INC] switches, the number will

change continuously.

If you hold down both of the CHANNEL SELECT

[▼/DEC]/[▲/INC] switches for one second, channel

1 of that group (or the L channel of STEREO A) will

be selected.

MUTE

RECALL

SAFE

DCA

MIX

MATRIX

CHANNEL

COPY

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL

DEC INC

SHIFT

CHANNEL SELECT

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block

4 CHANNEL SELECT [SHIFT] switch

If you hold down this switch and press either of the

CHANNEL SELECT [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC] switches,

the number will change in steps of 12 from the cur-

rent value.

5 [CHANNEL COPY] switch

Use this switch to copy parameters of an output

channel to a different output channel.

[Procedure]

Copying output channel parameters to a differ-

ent channel

1. Select the copy source output channel.

2. In the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block,

press the [CHANNEL COPY] switch.

The [CHANNEL COPY] switch LED will light.

However if you do not specify the copy destination

within ten seconds, the copy operation will be can-

celled.

3. Press the [SEL] switch of the copy destination out-

put channel (MIX, MATRIX, or STEREO A/B).

A popup window will appear, asking you to conﬁrm

the copy operation.

4. To execute the copy operation, click the OK button.

To cancel the copy operation, click the CANCEL

button.

Hint

For details on the types of parameter that are copied

when you copy between output channels, refer to the

appendices (→p.44).

If you wish to perform additional copies, repeat steps

1–4.

Copying is possible only between the same type of

output channels (between MIX channels, between

MATRIX channels, or between STEREO A/B). Fur-

thermore, even for the same type of output chan-

nels, it is not possible to copy between a monaural

output channel and two paired channels. If you

attempt to copy an inappropriate combination of

channels, a message of “DATA TYPE CONFLICT!

CANCELED” will appear, and copying will not

occur.

It is not possible to use the [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC]

switches to select the copy destination channel. The

channel copy operation will be cancelled.

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

Signal ﬂow for MIX channels

Signal ﬂow for MATRIX channels

Signal ﬂow for STEREO A/B channels

MIX1

MIX2

MIX48

STEREO L

STEREO R

CUE L

CUE R

...

PAN

MIX to STEREO

MIX 1(-48)

OUTPUT PATCH

FADER

KEY IN

SEL

to MATRIX

6BAND

PEQ

METER

COMP

DELAY

INSERT IN MIX1(-48)

to MONITOR

OUTPUT PATCH

METER

CUE

from INPUT PATCH

DE-EMPHASIS

KEY IN1

KEY IN4

...

to METER

METER

from PRE EQ

from PRE FADER

MIX1

MIX2

MIX48

STEREO L

STEREO R

CUE L

CUE R

...

from MIX1

from MIX48

from STEREO A Lch

from STEREO A Rch

FADER

to MONITOR

OUTPUT PATCH

SUB IN Lch

SUB IN Rch

6BAND

PEQ

COMP

DELAY

KEY IN

SEL

METER

INSERT IN

MTRX1(-24)

OUTPUT PATCH

METER METER

INPUT

PATCH

CUE

from INPUT PATCH

DE-EMPHASIS

KEY IN1

KEY IN4

...

to METER

from PRE EQ

MATRIX 1(-24)

from STEREO B Rch

from STEREO B Lch

MIX1

MIX2

MIX48

STEREO L

STEREO R

CUE L

CUE R

...

OUTPUT PATCH

STEREO A

6BAND

PEQ

METER

COMP

METER

KEY IN

SEL

DELAY

METER

FADER

6BAND

PEQ

COMP

KEY IN

SEL

DELAY

to MATRIX

to MONITOR

INSERT IN ST A Rch

METER

FADER

CUE

INSERT

METER METER

STEREO B

6BAND

PEQ

METER

COMP

METER

KEY IN

SEL

DELAY

METER

6BAND

PEQ

COMP

KEY IN

SEL

DELAY

to MONITOR

INSERT

METER METER

to MONITOR

MONO

to CS1D

CUE

from INPUT PATCH

DE-EMPHASIS

from INPUT PATCH

DE-EMPHASIS

from INPUT PATCH

DE-EMPHASIS

from INPUT PATCH

DE-EMPHASIS

KEY IN1

KEY IN4

...

to MATRIX

to CS1D

INSERT IN ST A Lch

INSERT IN ST B Lch

CUE

FADER

to MONITOR

to MATRIX

to METER

from PRE EQ

from PRE FADER

to METER

from PRE EQ

from PRE FADER

METER

to METER

INSERT IN ST B Rch

BALANCE

from PRE EQ

from PRE FADER

BALANCE

from PRE EQ

from PRE FADER

DCA GROUP block

[Function]

In this block, the input channel and output channel groups assigned to DCA 1–12 can be controlled as a

group by the DCA faders. As necessary, you can also use these faders to directly control a desired input chan-

nel or MIX channel, or boost/cut each band of the internal graphic EQ.

123456789101112

MIX

LAYER

FADER

STATUS

1–12

13–24

25–36

37–48

DCA

DCA GROUP

block

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

Select the items you wish to control from the DCA faders

The DCA GROUP block contains twelve DCA faders. In the default state of the PM1D system, you can use these faders to

control the input channel/output channel groups that are assigned to DCA 1–12. However, you can also make settings in

the DCA GROUP block FADER STATUS section to change the items that will be controlled by the DCA faders.

• When the FADER STATUS [IN] switch is on

You can use a DCA fader to directly adjust the input

levels of the individual input channels in a desired

INPUT block or ST IN block.

Use an INPUT [SEL] switch to select the INPUT

block or ST IN block. (The INPUT block or ST IN

block that includes the channel selected by the

INPUT [SEL] switch will be assigned to the DCA

faders.)

• When a FADER STATUS [1–12]/[13–24]/[25–36]/

[37–48] switch is on

The DCA faders will directly control the output lev-

els of the corresponding MIX channels 1–12, 13–24,

25–36, or 37–48.

• When the FADER STATUS [DCA] switch is on

The DCA faders will control the levels of DCA

groups 1–12.

Items that can be controlled from the DCA faders

FADER STATUS section

Hint

In addition, it is possible to split up the 31-band

graphic EQ and assign it to the DCA faders in 12-

band units to adjust the boost/cut amount for each

band. In order to do this, display the GEQ function

GEQ PARAMETER screen, then hold down the

[SHIFT/GRAB] switch and press a FADER STATUS

section [1–12]/[13–24]/[25–36] switch to call the

state of the selected frequency band into the DCA

faders.

Alternatively, you can click the ASSIGN TO DCA

FADERS button in the GEQ PARAMETER screen.

• GEQ PARAMETER screen

The input channels of the INPUT block or the ST

IN channels of the ST IN block currently selected

by the [SEL] switch.

MIX channels 1–12

MIX channels 13–24

MIX channels 25–36

MIX channels 37–48

DCA groups 1–12

Boost/cut for each band of the graphic EQ

123456789101112

1–12

13–24

25–36

37–48

DCA

1–12

13–24

25–36

37–48

DCA

1–12

13–24

25–36

1.60k–20.0k

200–2.50k

20–250

1–12

13–24

25–36

ASSIGN TO DCA

FADERS button

DCA GROUP block

DCA fader section

In this section you can control the levels of the DCA groups, input channels, or MIX channels assigned to DCA groups

1–12. You can also use this section to adjust the boost/cut amount for each band of the internal graphic EQ.

1 DCA [NAME] indicator

The upper row of indicators will show the type and

number of the channel that is selected in the FADER

STATUS section. (If DCA is selected, this will show

display the DCA name of up to 8 characters.)

The display has the following meaning.

• INxx ....................Twelve input channels will be

directly assigned to DCA faders

1–12. The xx digits will indicate

the channel number.

• STxx ....................ST IN 1–8 are directly assigned

to DCA faders 1–8. The xx loca-

tion will indicate a channel num-

ber.

In this case, DCA faders 9–12

will have no effect.

• MXxx.................. Twelve MIX channels will be

directly assigned to DCA faders

1–12. The xx digits will indicate

the channel number.

• Other.................. DCA groups are assigned to

DCA faders 1–12, and the long

name of the DCA group will be

displayed.

The lower row of indicators displays the short name

of the channel assigned to the fader or the long name

of the DCA group. These names can be input from

the display (in the NAME screen of the IN PATCH

function or OUTPUT PATCH function).

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

Hint

If the bands of the internal graphic EQ are assigned

to the DCA faders, the upper row of indicators will

display the frequency of the corresponding band, and

the lower row will display the gain value.

2 DCA [MUTE] switch and LED

This switch mutes the corresponding DCA group 1–

12.

When you press this switch, the DCA [MUTE] LED

will light, and the input channels/output channels

included in that DCA group will be set to the same

status as if the DCA fader were set to the minimum

level (– ∞ dB).

When you press the switch once again, the DCA

[MUTE] LED will go dark, and muting will be can-

celed.

Hint

The DCA [MUTE] switch and LED will have no

effect if input channels or output channels are

directly assigned to the DCA faders, or if the graphic

EQ is assigned.

Be careful not to confuse muting performed by the

DCA [MUTE] switch with mute groups (per-

formed in the MASTER block SCENE MEMORY

section).

The operation of the DCA [MUTE] switch is iden-

tical to the MUTE button in the IN DCA/MUTE

function DCA ASSIGN screen and the OUT DCA/

MUTE function DCA ASSIGN screen.

3 DCA [ASSIGN DCA] switch and LED

This switch selects the DCA group for which input

channels or output channels (MIX channels) will be

registered.

4 DCA fader

This is a 100 mm fader that sets the level of the input

channel, output channel, or DCA group selected by

the FADER STATUS section.

If the internal graphic EQ is assigned to the DCA

faders, this sets the amount of boost/cut for the cor-

responding band.

5 DCA [NOMINAL] LED

If input channels or output channels are directly

assigned to the DCA faders, or if DCA groups are

assigned, this LED will light when the fader is set to

nominal level (0 dB).

If the internal graphic EQ is assigned to the DCA

faders, this LED will light when the gain value is 0

dB.

6 DCA SAFE [RECALL] LED

If DCA groups 1–12 are assigned to the DCA faders,

this LED will light to indicate DCA groups that are

set to Recall Safe (a state in which the DCA group

will be unaffected by scene recall operations). A DCA

fader for which this LED is lit will not change even if

a scene memory is recalled.

If input channels / output channels are directly

assigned to the DCA faders, this LED will light to

indicate channels that are set to Recall Safe. A chan-

nel for which this LED is lit will not change even if a

scene memory is recalled.

Simply setting a DCA fader to Recall Safe means

only that the corresponding DCA fader will be

exempted from Recall operations, the various chan-

nels that belong to that DCA group are not affected

by this. If necessary, you must also set the individ-

ual channels to Recall Safe.

Recall safe settings can be made in the display

(SCENE function RECALL SAFE screen).

If the graphic EQ has been assigned to the DCA fad-

ers, this LED will have no function.

7 DCA [CUE] switch and LED

This switch monitors the channel(s) assigned to the

DCA fader.

If this switch is pressed when a DCA group 1–12 is

assigned to the DCA fader, all input channels (or

output channels) assigned to that DCA group will be

sent to the CUE bus, and can be monitored from the

CUE OUT jacks, MONITOR OUT jacks A, or

PHONES jack.

If this switch is pressed when an input channel/out-

put channel is directly assigned to the DCA fader, the

signal of the corresponding channel will be sent to

the CUE bus. (This will have the same function as

the [CUE] switch provided for each channel.)

The location and monitoring method for the signal

sent to the CUE bus can be selected on the console in

the MASTER block CUE section, or in the display

(MON/CUE function CUE/SOLO screen).

If the graphic EQ has been assigned to the DCA fad-

ers, this switch will have no function.

DCA GROUP block

FADER STATUS section

In this section you can select what will be controlled by DCA faders 1–12.

1 FADER STATUS [IN]/[1–12]/[13–24]/[25–36]/[37–

48]/[DCA] switches and LEDs

These switches select what will be controlled by DCA

faders 1–12.

The LED of the currently selected switch will light.

Each switch selects the following items for control.

• FADER STATUS [IN] switch

The DCA faders will control the input level of the

input channels in the selected INPUT block. The

INPUT block that includes the channel currently

selected by an INPUT [SEL] switch will be assigned

to the DCA faders. This allows you to control a dis-

tantly-located INPUT block without having to reach

across the console.

• FADER STATUS [1–12]/[13–24]/[25–36]/[37–48]

switches

The DCA faders will control the output levels of the

corresponding MIX channels 1–12, 13–24, 25–36, or

37–48.

• FADER STATUS [DCA] switch

The DCA faders will adjust the level of DCA groups

1–12 to which input channels/output channels have

been assigned.

FADER

STATUS

1–12

13–24

25–36

37–48

DCA

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

[Procedure]

Using DCA faders to control DCA groups 1–12

1. Press any one of the DCA GROUP block DCA

[ASSIGN DCA] switches to select the DCA group

that will be the assign destination.

The [DCA] LEDs of all channels assigned to the cur-

rently selected DCA group will blink.

2. In the INPUT block, ST IN block, or MIX OUTPUT

block, press the [DCA] switches of the channels

that you wish to assign to the above-selected DCA

group.

For the selected channel(s), the [DCA] LED of the

selected assign destination DCA group will light.

You can assign either input channels (input channels,

ST IN channels) or output channels (MIX channels).

Input channels can use DCA groups 1–12, and out-

put channels can use DCA groups 9–12.

It is not possible to assign an output channel to a

DCA group 1–8.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to assign input channels/out-

put channels to other DCA groups.

You can assign multiple channels to a single DCA

group, or assign a single channel to multiple DCA

groups.

• It is not possible to assign both input channels and

output channels to the same DCA group 9–12. If an

input channel is already assigned, attempting to

assign an output channel will cause a message to be

displayed, and the assignment will not be permitted.

(The same is true of the opposite situation.)

• When a scene is recalled, the DCA group data of

recall safe channels may be adjusted so that recall safe

settings are consistent within DCA groups 9–12.

Also when a channel library is recalled, the data

recalled to a channel may be adjusted so that settings

are consistent within DCA groups 9–12.

Hint

Input channels/output channels can also be assigned

to DCA groups in the display (IN DCA/MUTE func-

tion DCA ASSIGN screen, or OUT DCA/MUTE

function DCA ASSIGN screen).

4. When you have ﬁnished making assignments, press

the [ASSIGN DCA] switches whose LED is lit, to

turn off the LEDs of all [ASSIGN DCA] switches.

Then turn on the FADER STATUS [DCA] switch in

the FADER STATUS section.

The selected LED will light, and you will be able to

use DCA faders 1–12 to control the level of the corre-

sponding DCA group.

5. Operate DCA faders 1–12.

The level of the input channels or output channels

assigned to the corresponding DCA group will

change.

6. If you wish to mute a speciﬁc group, press the DCA

[MUTE] switch.

The DCA [MUTE] switch LED will light, and the

input channels/output channels included in that

DCA group will be set to the same status as when the

DCA fader is used to lower the level to the minimum

value (– ∞ dB).

7. When you press the switch once again, the DCA

[MUTE] LED will go dark, and muting will be

defeated.

[Procedure]

Using the DCA faders to control the graphic EQ

Separately from the parametric EQ provided on each

channel, the PM1D system provides twenty-four 31-

band graphic EQ modules which can be inserted into the

desired input channel, MIX channel, MATRIX channel,

or STEREO A/B channel.

By assigning the desired graphic EQ module to the DCA

faders, you can use the DCA faders to control the

amount of boost/cut for each band in realtime.

1. In the display, access the GEQ function GEQ

PARAMETER screen.

The GEQ PARAMETER screen can be accessed in the

following ways.

• From the top panel

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS section (MASTER

block), press the [GEQ] switch repeatedly until the

following screen appears.

• In the display

Click the MENU button → GEQ button → GEQ

PARAMETER tab.

• GEQ PARAMETER screen

MODULE button:

INSERT button:

DCA GROUP block

2. Click desired MODULE button located in the upper

left of the screen.

The MODULE button lets you select the graphic EQ

module that you wish to control.

When you click this button, the following popup

window will appear.

Popup window for selecting a graphic EQ module

3. Click one of the GEQ 1 – GEQ 24 buttons to select a

graphic EQ, you will return to the GEQ PARAME-

TER screen automatically.

Conﬁrm that the selected graphic EQ module is dis-

played at the right of the MODULE button.

Conﬁrm the selected graphic EQ module

Hint

If a GEQ is inserted in a channel, you can hold down

the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch and press the [SEL]

switch of that channel to display the GEQ.

4. Click the INSERT button located in the upper left

of the screen.

The INSERT button selects the output channel into

which the graphic EQ will be inserted.

When you click this button, the following popup

window will appear.

Popup window for selecting the output channel in

which the graphic EQ will be inserted

5. Click a button to select the output channel in which

you wish to insert the graphic EQ.

• When inserting to an input channel

Click to select the input channel number in the fol-

lowing order: IN 1-48 INSERT OUT button → 1–48

buttons or IN 49-96 INSERT OUT button → 49–96

buttons.

• To insert into a MIX channel

Click the MIX INSERT OUT button, and then click a

1–48 button to select the number of the MIX chan-

nel.

• To insert into a MATRIX channel

Click the MATRIX INSERT OUT button, and then

click a 1–24 button to select the number of the

MATRIX channel.

• To insert into a STEREO A/B channel

Click the button for the desired channel; either AL (L

channel of STEREO A), Ar (R channel of STEREO

A), bL (L channel of STEREO B), or br (R channel of

STEREO B).

You will return to the GEQ PARAMETER screen

automatically.

Conﬁrm that the selected channel is displayed at the

right of the INSERT button.

Conﬁrm the selected channel

6. Select the frequency band that will be assigned to

the DCA faders.

(1) Using the switch to select

Hold down the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch (located in

the data entry block) and press a [FADER STATUS]

switch, and you will be able to operate the graphic

EQ.

1.60k–20.0k

200–2.50k

20–250

1–12

13–24

25–36

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

(2) Switching on-screen

In the ASSIGN TO DCA FADERS buttons located in

the lower right of the screen, click the desired button.

• 1.60 k – 20.0 k button

The twelve bands from 1.6 kHz–20 kHz will be

assigned to the DCA faders.

• 200–2.50 k button

The twelve bands from 200 Hz–2.5 kHz will be

assigned to the DCA faders.

• 20–250 button

The twelve bands from 20 Hz–250 Hz will be

assigned to the DCA faders.

By clicking one of the above buttons, you can use the

DCA faders to control the graphic EQ.

In this case, the [FADER STATUS] switches located

above the DCA GROUP block on the CS1D top

panel will function as band select switches for the

bands of the graphic EQ, as shown in the following

illustration. (The LEDs will light to indicate the

[FADER STATUS] switches that can be used as band

select switches.) In this case, the FADER STATUS

[IN] switch and the FADER STATUS [37-48] switch

will have no effect.

7. Operate DCA faders 1–12.

The corresponding frequency bands will be boosted

or cut.

8. If you wish to use the DCA faders to control other

bands, repeat steps 7–8.

9. To stop using the DCA faders to control the graphic

EQ, press the FADER STATUS [DCA] switch on the

CS1D. Alternatively, click OFF in the ASSIGN TO

DCA buttons of the GEQ PARAMETER screen.

The [FADER STATUS] switches of the CS1D will

return to their original state.

To once again assign the graphic EQ to the DCA fad-

ers, click one of the ASSIGN TO DCA buttons in the

GEQ PARAMETER screen.

When you exit the GEQ PARAMETER screen,

assignments to the DCA faders will be forcibly can-

celed, and the DCA faders will return to their previ-

ous state.

10 11 12

FADER

STATUS

1–12

13–24

25–36

37–48

DCA

20–250

200–2.50k

1.60k–20.0k

OFF

10 11 12

FADER

STATUS

1–12

13–24

25–36

37–48

DCA

20–250

200–2.50k

1.60k–20.0k

OFF

MASTER block

[Function]

In this block you can use functions that apply to the entire CS1D, such as talkback and oscillator operations,

selecting the monitor source, and adjusting the monitor level.

GLOBAL LAYER

DELAY

SOURCE

MASTER block

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

TALKBACK section

This section sends the talkback signal to the desired bus, the MONITOR B jacks, and the desired output jacks.

1 TALKBACK 1 jack

This is an XLR-3-31 jack for connecting a talkback

mic.

Hint

The TALKBACK 2 jack on the rear panel of the CS1D

provides another talkback mic input in addition to

the TALKBACK 1 jack. The talkback signal that is

input from these two jacks is mixed within the CS1D,

and sent to the same bus or output jacks.

2 TALKBACK [LEVEL] volumes

These are analog volume controls for the input levels

of talkback 1/2.

Hint

The value of these levels cannot be stored in a scene

memory or controlled from outside (or from the

internal software).

3 TALKBACK [+48V] LEDs

These LEDs indicate the on/off status of phantom

power for the TALKBACK 1/TALKBACK 2 jacks.

(The LED will light when phantom power is on.)

Phantom power can be switched on/off in the display

(MON/CUE function TALKBACK screen).

4 TALKBACK [+10 dB] LEDs

These LEDs indicate the input sensitivity of the

TALKBACK 1 jack and the TALKBACK 2 jack.

When the input sensitivity is +10 dB, the LED will

light and a +10 dB input signal will be nominal

input. When off, the LED will be dark and the input

sensitivity will be –44 dB.

The input sensitivity can be switched in the display

(MON/CUE function TALKBACK screen).

5 TALKBACK ASSIGN [TO MON B] switch and LED

This switch sends the talkback signal to MONITOR

OUT jacks B.

When this is on, the switch LED will light.

The talkback signal cannot be sent to MONITOR

OUT jacks A. If necessary, use the IN PATCH func-

tion to patch the talkback signal to an input chan-

nel and sent it to MONITOR OUT jacks A.

6 TALKBACK ASSIGN [TB OUT] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent

from the talkback direct output. (When on, the

switch LED will light.)

The physical output jacks used as the talkback direct

output can be selected in the display (MON/CUE

function TALKBACK screen).

MASTER block

7 [TB ON] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the talkback signal.

When on, the switch LED will light, and the talkback

signal will be sent to the bus and output jacks that

were speciﬁed in the display (MON/CUE function

TALKBACK screen).

The [TB ON] switch can be used in the following

two ways.

• Continue holding the switch for more than 2 sec-

onds

This is the usual way to use talkback. Talkback will be

on only while you continue holding the switch, and

will be turned off when you release the switch.

• Press and immediately release the switch

The LED will continue light even after you release

the switch, and talkback will remain on. When you

press and immediately release the switch once again,

it will be turned off.

If the [TB ON] switch is off, [OSC ON] will cause

the OSC signal to be sent from the talkback direct

output.

OSCILLATOR section

This section sends a sine wave or noise generated by the internal oscillator to the speciﬁed bus or output jacks.

1 [OSC ON] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent

from the internal oscillator to the MIX buses,

MATRIX buses, and STEREO bus. (When on, the

switch LED will light.)

The waveform type, frequency, output level, and out-

put destination can be speciﬁed in the display

(MON/CUE function OSCILLATOR screen).

2 [OSC OUT] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent

from the direct output of the internal oscillator.

(When on, the switch LED will light.)

The physical output jacks that are used as the oscilla-

tor direct outputs can be selected in the display

(MON/CUE function OSCILLATOR screen).

Signal ﬂow in the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR section

MIX1

MIX2

MIX48

STEREO L

STEREO R

CUE L

CUE R

...

OSC

OSC OUT

+48V

PHANTOM

TALKBACK IN

+48V

PHANTOM

ADHA

NOISE

PINK

OSC ON

TB OUT

TB ON

to CASCADE OUT

from CASCADE IN

LEVEL

HPF

OSC OUT

TALKBACK OUT

-44

+10

-44

OFF

+48V

[CS1D]

Frequncy: 100Hz - 10kHz

to OUTPUT PATCH

LPF

KEY IN1

KEY IN4

...

to MONITOR B

ASSIGN

NOISE

BURST

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

Card slot section

This section saves scene memories and various libraries on PCMCIA Type II cards.

1 [PC ATA STORAGE CARD] card slot

Up to two PCMCIA Type II compatible cards can be

inserted in this slot, and used to load/save scene

memories and various libraries.

Load/save operations are performed in the display

(UTILITY function LOAD/SAVE screen).

Please note that Type III cards cannot be used.

This can be used only with an ATA compatible PC

ﬂash storage card, or a compact ﬂash with a PC

card adapter that is guaranteed to work with that

card. Operation is not guaranteed for any other

media.

The above-listed media is normally sold in a for-

matted condition. The CS1D does not have a for-

matting function, so if you need to format the

media, please use an external device such as a com-

puter.

MASTER block

CUE section

This section selects the cue point and monitoring method of the channel selected by the [CUE] switch.

1 [CUE OUT LEVEL] volume

This is an analog volume that sets the output level of

the signal output from the CUE OUT jacks.

Hint

The value of this level cannot be stored in a scene

memory or controlled from outside (or from the

internal software).

2 [SOLO] switch and LED

This switch selects either CUE mode or SOLO mode

as the monitoring method when the [CUE] switch is

used.

CUE mode is selected when this switch is off (LED

dark), and SOLO mode is selected when this switch

is on (LED blinking). To change from CUE mode to

SOLO mode, press and hold the [SOLO] switch for

two seconds or longer. To change from SOLO mode

to CUE mode, press the [SOLO] switch.

The operation when each mode is selected will be as

follows.

• CUE mode

The signal of the channel whose [CUE] switch is

pressed will be sent to a dedicated CUE bus, and sent

via the CUE bus to the CUE OUT jacks, MONITOR

OUT jacks A, and PHONES jack for monitoring.

By using this method, you can monitor the signal of

an input or output channel without affecting other

buses.

• SOLO mode

This is the familiar “solo function” that sends the sig-

nal of only a speciﬁc channel to the MIX, MATRIX,

and STEREO A/B buses.

Only the signal of the channel whose [CUE] switch

was pressed will be sent to the MIX, MATRIX, and

STEREO A/B buses, and other channels will be

muted.

When SOLO mode is selected, the signal that is mon-

itored from the CUE OUT jacks, MONITOR OUT

jacks A, and PHONES jacks can be selected from

either the CUE bus (the signal of the channel whose

[CUE] switch is pressed) or the MONITOR bus (the

source selected in the MONITOR A block). This set-

ting is made in the display (MON/CUE function

CUE/SOLO screen).

Hint

Even if the [SOLO] switch is on, you can exclude the

desired input channels or output channels from the

solo operation (MON/CUE function CUE/SOLO

screen). This is convenient when you wish to protect

channels that must not be soloed inadvertently, such

as the main STEREO channel or MIX channels that

are supplying signals to an external recorder.

3 [INPUT AFL] switch and LED

This selects the location in the signal route at which

the signal will be monitored when you press the

[CUE] switch of an input channel (input channel or

ST IN channel).

If this switch is on, the LED will light, and the signal

will be sent from the AFL (after-fader listen) position

to the CUE bus.

If this switch is off, the signal will be sent from the

PFL (pre-fader listen) position to the CUE bus.

Hint

If this switch LED is lit, you can make the further

choice of pre-pan or post-pan locations. This selec-

tion is made in the display (MON/CUE function

CUE/SOLO screen).

4 [OUTPUT PFL] switch and LED

This selects the location in the signal route at which

the signal will be monitored when you press the

[CUE] switch of an output channel (MIX channel,

MATRIX channel, STEREO A/B channel).

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

When this switch is on (the LED will light), the signal

will be sent from the PFL (pre-fader listen) position

to the CUE bus. When this switch is off, the signal

will be sent from the POST ON (immediately after

the [ON] switch) position to the CUE bus.

5 CUE ACTIVE [INPUT]/[DCA]/[OUTPUT] LEDs

These LEDs indicate the state of monitoring.

If even one [CUE] switch is currently on, the LED

corresponding to that monitor source will light. The

monitor source corresponding to each LED is as fol-

lows.

• INPUT

This will light when a channel of the INPUT CUE

group (input channel, ST IN channel) is being moni-

tored.

• DCA

This will light when a channel of the DCA CUE

group is being monitored.

• OUTPUT

This will light when a channel of the OUTPUT CUE

group (MIX channel, MATRIX channel, STEREO A/

B channel) is being monitored.

[INPUT]/[DCA]/[OUTPUT] all lit

All three LEDs will light when one of the following

buttons or switches of a CUE group other than

INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE is pressed.

• EFFECT CUE button (EFFECT function)

• GATE KEY IN CUE button (IN GATE/COMP

function GATE PRM screen), or INPUT

SELECTED CHANNEL [GATE KEY IN CUE]

switch

• SUB IN CUE button (MATRIX/ST function SUB

IN screen)

6 [LAST CUE] switch and LED

This switch speciﬁes what will occur when you press

the [CUE] switch of two or more channels.

When the LED is lit, LAST CUE mode is selected.

When the LED is dark, MIX CUE mode is selected.

Operation will differ in the following ways.

• LAST CUE mode

Only the channel whose [CUE] switch was pressed

last will be monitored.

• MIX CUE mode

All channels whose [CUE] switches are currently on

will be mixed and monitored.

MIX CUE mode is valid only when you press the

[CUE] switches of input channels, output channels,

or the DCA section.

For example while the SELECTED INPUT CHAN-

NEL block NOISE GATE KEY IN [CUE] switch is

on, only the key-in signal of the noise gate built into

that channel will be given priority for monitoring.

Hint

On the PM1D system, Cue can be classiﬁed into the

following three groups.

1) INPUT CUE group (Gate key-in cue signals from

input channels or ST IN channels)

2) DCA CUE group (cue signals from DCA groups)

3) OUTPUT CUE group (cue signals from MIX

channels, MATRIX channels, or STEREO A/B

channels)

4) Any CUE group other than INPUT/DCA/OUT-

PUT CUE (i.e., the EFFECT CUE button within

the EFFECT function, the KEY IN CUE button

within the GATE PRM screen or SELECTED

INPUT CHANNEL of the IN GATE/COMP func-

tion, or the SUB IN CUE button in the SUB IN

screen of the MATRIX/ST function)

It is not possible for [CUE] switches or buttons of

these four groups to be on simultaneously. The

group for the last-pressed [CUE] switch or button

will take priority, and the signals of that group can be

monitored.

If you switch groups in the order of “OUTPUT CUE

→DCA CUE,” “OUTPUT CUE → INPUT CUE,”

“DCA CUE → INPUT CUE,” or “INPUT/OUTPUT/

DCA CUE → CUE other than INPUT/OUTPUT/

DCA,” the state of the group or [CUE] switch or but-

ton before the change will be remembered, and if the

currently-on [CUE] switches or buttons are all

turned off, you will return to the previous group.

When you press the [LAST CUE] switch to switch

from LAST CUE mode to MIX CUE mode (or vice

versa), the previously-effective cue (solo) will be can-

celled.

7 [DCA PRE PAN] switch and LED

This switch selects the location in the signal route at

which the signal will be monitored when a [CUE]

switch in the DCA GROUP block is used to monitor

a DCA group to which input channels are assigned.

If this switch is on, turning on the [CUE] switch of a

DCA group to which input channels are assigned will

allow monitoring of the signal immediately before

pan. If this switch is off, the signal immediately after

pan will be monitored.

This switch is valid only for DCA groups to which

input channels are assigned. If you use the [CUE]

switch to monitor a DCA group to which output

channels are assigned, the signal will always be sent

from the POST ON location (after the [ON]

switch) to the CUE bus.

MASTER block

MONITOR A section

This section selects the monitor source for the MONITOR A output, and adjusts its level.

1 MONITOR A SOURCE [2TR IN 1]/[2TR IN 2]/[ST

A]/[ST B]/[DEFINE] switches and LEDs

These switches select the monitor source for the

MONITOR A outputs.

The switch LED for the currently selected source will

light. (It is not possible to select two or more

sources.)

Each switch corresponds to the following sources.

• [2TR IN 1] switch

Monitor the input signal from the 2-TRACK IN

DIGITAL 1 jack or 2-TRACK IN ANALOG 1 jacks

located on the rear panel of the CS1D.

The choice between analog and digital is made in the

display (MON/CUE function 2TR IN screen).

• [2TR IN 2] switch

Monitor the input signal from the 2-TRACK IN

DIGITAL 2 jack or 2-TRACK IN ANALOG 2 jacks

located on the rear panel of the CS1D.

The choice between analog and digital is made in the

display (MON/CUE function 2TR IN screen).

• [ST A] switch

Monitor the output signal of the STEREO A channel.

• [ST B] switch

Monitor the output signal of the STEREO B channel.

• [DEFINE] switch

Monitor the signal (MIX 1–48 , MATRIX 1–24 , 2TR

IN 3–6, or DIRECT IN) that was previously deﬁned

by the user in the display (MON/CUE function

MONITOR A screen).

Hint

With the default state of the PM1D, the setting of the

MONITOR A SOURCE switches will be ignored if

even one [CUE] switch is on, and the cue (solo) sig-

nal will be output from the MONITOR OUT A

jacks/MONITOR A phones jack.

However, you can make settings so that the state of

the [CUE] switches will be ignored and the source

selected by the MONITOR A SOURCE switch will

always be output from the MONITOR OUT A jacks.

This setting is made in the display (MON/CUE func-

tion MONITOR A screen).

DELAY

SOURCE

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

2 MONITOR A DELAY [TIME] encoder and [VALUE]

indicator

The MONITOR A DELAY [TIME] encoder is used to

set the delay time of the delay that is built into the

MONITOR A output and the cue output.

The current delay time is shown by the DELAY TIME

[VALUE] indicator in millisecond units.

The delay time range is 0 msec – 750 msec.

3 MONITOR A DELAY [ON] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the internal delay of the

MONITOR A output.

The switch LED will light when this is on, and the

output signal will be delayed by the time displayed in

the MONITOR A DELAY TIME [VALUE] indicator

(2).

4 MONITOR A [LEVEL] volume

This is an analog volume that sets the MONITOR A

output level.

Hint

The value of this level cannot be stored in a scene or

controlled from outside (or by the internal software).

5 MONITOR A [L MONO]/[R MONO] switches and

LEDs

These switches select the stereo/monaural state of the

MONITOR A output. Depending on the lit/dark sta-

tus of each switch, the output signal of MONITOR A

will change as follows.

MONITOR A [L MONO]/[R MONO] switches

6 MONITOR A [ON] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the MONITOR A output.

The switch LED will light when this is on.

7 MONITOR A PHONES [LEVEL] volume

This is an analog volume that sets the output level of

the MONITOR A phones jack.

Hint

The value of this level cannot be stored in a scene or

controlled from outside (or by the internal software).

[L MONO]

switch

[R MONO]

switch

MONITOR A output signal

Stereo signal

Monaural signal of left channel

only

Monaural signal of right channel

only

Monaural signal of mixed left and

right channels

Dark Dark

Lit Dark

Dark Lit

Lit Lit

MASTER block

MONITOR B section

This section selects the monitor source for the MONITOR B output, and adjusts its level.

1 MONITOR B SOURCE [2TR IN 1]/[2TR IN 2]/[ST

A]/[ST B]/[MONITOR A]/[DEFINE] switches and

LEDs

These switches select the monitor source for the

MONITOR B outputs.

The switch LED for the currently selected source will

light. (It is not possible to select two or more

sources.)

Each switch corresponds to the following sources.

• [2TR IN 1] switch

Monitor the input signal from the 2-TRACK IN

DIGITAL 1 jack or 2-TRACK IN ANALOG 1 jacks

located on the rear panel of the CS1D.

The choice between analog and digital is made in the

display (MON/CUE function 2TR IN screen).

• [2TR IN 2] switch

Monitor the input signal from the 2-TRACK IN

DIGITAL 2 jack or 2-TRACK IN ANALOG 2 jacks

located on the rear panel of the CS1D.

The choice between analog and digital is made in the

display (MON/CUE function 2TR IN screen).

• [ST A] switch

Monitor the output signal of the STEREO A channel.

• [ST B] switch

Monitor the output signal of the STEREO B channel.

• [MONITOR A] switch

Monitor the signal that is selected as the monitor

source by the MONITOR A section.

If this switch is selected, the CUE bus can also be

monitored by the MONITOR B section.

• [DEFINE] switch

Monitor the signal (MIX 1–48, MATRIX 1–24, 2TR

IN 3–6, or DIRECT IN) that was previously deﬁned

by the user in the display (MON/CUE function

MONITOR B screen).

2 MONITOR B [LEVEL] volume

This is an analog volume that sets the MONITOR B

output level.

Hint

The value of this level cannot be stored in a scene or

controlled from outside (or by the internal software).

SOURCE

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

3 MONITOR B [ON] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the MONITOR B output.

The switch LED will light when this is on.

4 MONITOR B PHONES [LEVEL] volume

This is an analog volume that sets the output level of

the MONITOR B phones jack.

Hint

The value of this level cannot be stored in a scene or

controlled from outside (or by the internal software).

MONITOR A/B section signal ﬂow

TALKBACK

DIRECT IN L

DIRECT IN R

2 TR IN DIGITAL 1-6

MONITOR

OUT A

DIMMER

MONITOR OUT B

from MIX1

from MIX48

from STEREO B Lch

from STEREO B Rch

from MATRIX1

from MATRIX24

from STEREO A Lch

from STEREO A Rch

2TR IN 1 Lch

2TR IN 2 Rch

2TR IN 6 Rch

COMM IN

MONITOR A SELECTOR

to MONITOR B

from COMM IN

from MONITOR A

same as above

MONITOR B SELECTOR

DIRECT INPUT Lch

DIRECT INPUT Rch

DAC

CUE OUT

to CASCADE OUT

from CASCADE IN

to CASCADE OUT

METER

2TR IN 3 Lch

DAC

METER

L MONO/R MONO

DEFINE

TO MONI B ASSIGN

[CS1D]

LEVEL

MONITOR A

METER

LEVEL

PHONES

MONITOR B

PHONES

METER

MONITOR B

PHONES

MONITOR A

PHONES

LEVEL

to KEY IN SEL

DIMMER

DELAY

TALKBACK

MIX1

MIX2

MIX48

STEREO L

STEREO R

CUE L

CUE R

...

KEY IN1

KEY IN4

...

MASTER block

ENGINE section

If two DSP1D (or DSP1D-EX) DSP units are connected to a single CS1D, this section selects the DSP unit that will be

controlled.

1 ENGINE [A]/[B] switches and LEDs

These switches select which of two DSP1D (or

DSP1D-EX) DSP units will be controlled by the

CS1D.

The LED of the currently selected switch will light.

PM1D system version 1.0 does not support addi-

tional DSP units except when using Mirror mode.

GLOBAL LAYER section

On 96 channel models with a DSP card installed in the DSP unit, this section selects the input channels that will be con-

trolled. {On 48 channel models this section has no function.}

1 [1–48]/[49–96] switches and LEDs

These switches select either channels 1–48 or 49–96

as the input channels to be controlled by INPUT

blocks 1–4 of a 96 channel model.

In the same way you can switch between 1–4 or 5–8

as the ST IN channels that will be controlled in the

ST IN block.

The LED of the currently selected switch will light.

GLOBAL LAYER

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

METER section

In this section you can select the channels whose level will be shown by the level meter, and specify the level detection

point.

1 METER [PRE] switch and LED

This switch selects either PRE (switch LED lit) or

POST (switch LED dark) as the level metering point

(the point at which the level is detected) for the out-

put channel modules.

Regardless of whether “PRE” or “POST” is selected,

the location in the signal route at which the level is

actually detected can be speciﬁed in the screen

(METER function MIX 1-48 screen, or MATRIX 1-

24/ST /MONITOR screen).

The following tables show the metering points that

can be selected for input channels and output chan-

nels.

Metering points that can be selected for output

channels

Hint

Operations of the [PRE] switch do not affect the level

meters of input channels. The metering point for

input channels can be selected only in the screen

(METER function screen), and can be set to one of

the following ﬁve points.

Metering points that can be selected for input channels

2 METER [PEAK HOLD] switch and LED

This is an on/off switch for the Peak Hold function of

the output channel meters.

The switch LED will light when this is on, and the

meter segment corresponding to the peak level will

remain lit.

3 METER SELECT [MIX 25–48]/[MATRIX 1–24]

switches and LEDs

These switches select the channels whose level will be

displayed by the 24 meters located on the right side

of the meter bridge.

When the [MIX 25–48] switch is on, the level of MIX

channels 25–48 will be displayed. When the

[MATRIX 1–24] switch is on, the level of MATRIX

channels 1–24 will be displayed.

PRE button

PRE EQ Immediately before the EQ

PRE FADER Immediately before the fader

POST button

POST FADER Immediately after the fader

POST ON After the [ON] switch

PRE ATT Before the attenuator

PRE GATE Immediately before the internal noise gate

PRE FADER Immediately before the fader

POST FADER Immediately after the fader

POST ON Immediately after the [ON] switch

SCENE MEMORY block

[Function]

In this block you can store and recall mix parameters as scene memories. Mute operations for mute groups 1–

12 are also performed in this block.

STORE

SCENE NUMBER

PREVIEW

RECALL

UNDO

SCENE MEMORY

DEC INC

789

456

123

CLEAR

MUTE

RECALL

MUTE MASTER

DIRECT RECALL

SCENE MEMORY

block

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

1 SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches and LEDs

These switches directly recall twelve previously-

selected scenes from the scenes stored in memory.

Assignment of a scene number to each switch is per-

formed in the display (SCENE function DIRECT

RECALL screen).

Hint

The SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches can also be

used as mute master switches to switch muting on/

off for mute groups 1–12. The selection of which

function is used can be made in the display (SCENE

function DIRECT RECALL screen).

2 SCENE MEMORY [RECALL]/[MUTE] LEDs

These LEDs indicate the function of the SCENE

MEMORY [1]–[12] switches (1).

One or the other LED will light depending on the

function that is selected in the display (SCENE func-

tion DIRECT RECALL screen).

• When the [RECALL] LED is lit

The SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches will func-

tion as direct recall switches that directly recall the

twelve previously assigned scenes.

• When the [MUTE] LED is lit

The SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches will func-

tion as mute master switches that switch muting on/

off for mute groups 1–12.

STORE

SCENE NUMBER

PREVIEW

RECALL

UNDO

SCENE MEMORY

DEC INC

789

456

123

CLEAR

MUTE

RECALL

MUTE MASTER

DIRECT RECALL

5 6

SCENE MEMORY block

3 SCENE MEMORY [RECALL UNDO] switch

This switch cancels the last-executed scene recall

operation.

If you accidentally recall an unwanted scene, you can

press this switch to return to the state prior to recall-

ing the scene.

Hint

This switch will have no effect until the ﬁrst scene is

recalled after the PM1D system is powered-on.

4 SCENE MEMORY [PREVIEW] switch and LED

This switch selects the mode of operation when a

scene recall is performed: either NORMAL mode or

PREVIEW mode.

When PREVIEW mode is selected, the switch LED

will light. When NORMAL mode is selected, it will

be dark.

• NORMAL mode

In this mode, scenes will be stored and recalled in the

conventional way.

When you recall a new scene in this mode, the mix

parameters will be rewritten to the settings of the

new scene.

• PREVIEW mode

This mode lets you check the scene settings, and unit,

patch, name setting stored in a memory without

affecting the internal signal processing of the system.

When you recall a scene in this mode, the mix

parameters of the new scene will be displayed on the

panel of the CS1D, but the internal signal processing

will remain the same as before the recall operation.

If you operate the panel switches/encoders, the panel

display of the CS1D will change, but here too, the

internal signal processing will not be affected. If you

wish, you can save the modiﬁed content to a desired

scene number and library number.

PREVIEW mode is useful when you wish to check the

parameter values before recalling a scene, or to mod-

ify/save parameter values before recalling a scene.

Hint

If you turn the SCENE [PREVIEW] switch off and

exit PREVIEW mode, you will return to the state

before PREVIEW mode was entered.

5 SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] switch

This switch recalls a scene.

• When the SCENE MEMORY [PREVIEW] switch

is off (NORMAL mode)

Use the SCENE MEMORY [0]–[9] switches (8) or

the SCENE MEMORY [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC] switches

(0) to select the scene number that you wish to

recall, and press this switch. The scene of the number

shown in the [SCENE NUMBER] indicator (7) will

be recalled from memory, and overwritten onto the

current mix parameters.

• When the SCENE MEMORY [PREVIEW] switch

is on (Preview mode)

When you select a scene number to be loaded and

then press this switch, the mix parameter values of

that scene will be reﬂected by the CS1D panel, but

the internal signal processing will not be affected.

Hint

If necessary, you can exclude only speciﬁc channels

from recall operations, so that they will not be

affected when you perform a recall (Recall Safe).

The channels that will be excluded from recall opera-

tions can be selected in the display (SCENE function

RECALL SAFE screen).

6 SCENE MEMORY [STORE] switch

This switch is used to store a scene.

• When the SCENE MEMORY [PREVIEW] switch

is off (Normal mode)

When you press this switch, the current mix parame-

ter settings will be saved in the number displayed in

the [SCENE NUMBER] indicator (7).

If desired, you can change the save destination scene

number.

• When the SCENE MEMORY [PREVIEW] switch

is on (PREVIEW mode)

If you press this switch immediately after entering

PREVIEW mode, the parameter values prior to

entering PREVIEW mode will be saved in the num-

ber shown by the [SCENE NUMBER] indicator.

If desired, you may change the save destination scene

number.

If you enter PREVIEW mode, perform a recall opera-

tion, and then press this switch, the last-recalled

scene will be saved in the number shown by the

[SCENE NUMBER] indicator. (Changes you made

after the recall operation will be reﬂected in the save

destination.)

In this case also, you may change the save destination

scene number.

7 [SCENE NUMBER] indicator

This indicator shows the scene memory number. The

scene numbers of the PM1D system consist of an

integer portion in the range of 00–99, and a decimal

portion in the range of .0–.9, allowing 1000 scene

memories to be stored in internal memory.

If this indicator shows a number that is different than

the last-recalled scene, the number in the indicator

will blink. This indicates that the displayed scene

number differs from the mix parameters currently

being controlled on the CS1D.

The number will stop blinking if you once again

select the last-recalled scene number or if you recall/

store a new scene.

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

[SCENE NUMBER]

8 SCENE MEMORY [0]–[9] switches

These switches are used to enter a three-digit num-

ber to specify the scene memory shown in the

[SCENE NUMBER] indicator. Successively input a

two-digit integer portion and a one-digit decimal

portion. (If the integer portion has only one digit,

add a 0 at the beginning.)

Examples of using the SCENE MEMORY [0]–[9]

switches to input a scene number

9 SCENE MEMORY [CLEAR] switch

This switch returns the number displayed in the

[SCENE NUMBER] indicator to the number that

had been displayed before the change.

0 SCENE MEMORY [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC] switches

These switches increment or decrement the number

shown in the [SCENE NUMBER] indicator.

When the PM1D system is in the default state, the

number shown in the [SCENE NUMBER] indicator

will increase or decrease in steps of 0.1, regardless of

whether data is actually saved in the scenes.

For example, if you repeatedly press the SCENE

MEMORY [▲/INC] switch, the displayed number

will change as follows.

However if you wish, you can skip scene numbers

that contain no data. This setting is made in the

SCENE function MEMORY screen. If you turn on

the BLANK SKIP button in this screen, scene num-

bers in which no data is saved will be skipped as

shown below.

BLANK SKIP applies to all scene memories that can

be recalled (including preset scene memories). The

selection sequence will also move between scene 00.0

and the highest scene that can be recalled.

Hint

Operation differs from when SCENE MEM INC/

DEC RECALL are assigned to USER DEFINE

switches. In this case, preset scene memories will be

skipped without being included. The selection

sequence will not skip between the lowest and high-

est scene numbers that can be recalled.

SCENE NUMBER

DEC INC

SCENE NUMBER

DEC INC

Immediately after you recall a

scene, the number will be lit

When you change the scene

number, the number will begin

blinking

The number will stop blinking

when you either return to the

original scene number or

recall a different scene

0 0 1

0 1 2

1 0 1

00.0 00.1 00.2 00.3 00.4 00.5 00.6 00.7 00.8 00.9

01.0 01.1 01.2 01.3 01.4 01.5 01.6 01.7 01.8 01.9

02.0 02.1 02.2 02.3 02.4 02.5 02.6 02.7 02.8 02.9

03.0 03.1 03.2 03.3 03.4 03.5 03.6 03.7 03.8 03.9

Scene numbers that contain no data

Scene numbers that contain saved data

00.0 00.1 00.2 00.3 00.4 00.5 00.6 00.7 00.8 00.9

01.0 01.1 01.2 01.3 01.4 01.5 01.6 01.7 01.8 01.9

02.0 02.1 02.2 02.3 02.4 02.5 02.6 02.7 02.8 02.9

03.0 03.1 03.2 03.3 03.4 03.5 03.6 03.7 03.8 03.9

Scene numbers that contain no data

Scene numbers that contain saved data

00.0 00.1 00.2 00.3 00.4 00.5 00.6 00.7 00.8 00.9

01.0 01.1 01.2 01.3 01.4 01.5 01.6 01.7 01.8 01.9

02.0 02.1 02.2 02.3 02.4 02.5 02.6 02.7 02.8 02.9

03.0 03.1 03.2 03.3 03.4 03.5 03.6 03.7 03.8 03.9

Scene numbers that contain no data

Scene numbers that contain saved data

SCENE MEMORY block

[Procedure]

Storing a scene

Here’s how to save the current mix settings as a new

scene.

Hint

Each scene of the PM1D system includes the settings

of all controls of the CS1D (except for display bright-

ness and analog volume settings), as well as the fol-

lowing settings for functions in the display.

• All INPUT functions

• All OUTPUT functions

• EFFECT functions

• GEQ functions

Before you perform the following procedure, make

sure that the SCENE MEMORY block SCENE

MEMORY [PREVIEW] switch (4) is turned off

(NORMAL mode).

1. Use the panel controllers of the CS1D to set the mix

parameters.

2. If necessary, use the SCENE MEMORY [0]–[9]

switches or the SCENE MEMORY [▼/DEC]/[▲/

INC] switches to select the save destination scene

number.

When you select a new scene number, the number

shown in the [SCENE NUMBER] indicator will

blink.

This blinking indicates that the displayed scene num-

ber is different than the mix parameters currently

being controlled on the CS1D.

3. Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] switch.

The SCENE STORE popup window will appear,

allowing you to assign a title to the scene and store it.

Assign a title or comment as necessary. (For details

on inputting text, refer to “CS1D Operation Manual

(Basic Operation)” →p.20.)

4. Use the [CURSOR] switch to move the cursor to the

STORE button in the screen, and press the

[ENTER] key.

A message conﬁrming the store operation will

appear in the display. When you select OK, the cur-

rent mix parameter settings will be stored in the

scene number you selected in step 2.

Hint

If desired, a message can ask you to conﬁrm the store

operation when you press the SCENE MEMORY

[STORE] switch.

This setting is made in the display (UTILITY func-

tion PREFERENCE screen).

If there are any changes in a UNIT, PATCH, or

NAME library that is linked with that scene, a

popup window for the corresponding library will

appear following the SCENE STORE popup win-

dow. Store the library as necessary.

Recalling a scene

Here’s how to load a saved scene into memory.

Before you perform the following procedure, make

sure that the SCENE MEMORY block SCENE

MEMORY [PREVIEW] switch (4) is turned off

(NORMAL mode).

1. Use the SCENE MEMORY [0]–[9] switches or the

SCENE MEMORY [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC] switches to

select the scene number that will be loaded.

When you select a new scene number, the number

shown in the [SCENE NUMBER] indicator will

blink.

2. Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] switch.

A message conﬁrming the recall operation will

appear in the display. When you select OK, the scene

of the number you selected in step 1 will be recalled.

Hint

If desired, a message can ask you to conﬁrm the recall

operation when you press the SCENE MEMORY

[RECALL] switch.

This setting is made in the display (UTILITY func-

tion PREFERENCE screen).

By pressing the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL

UNDO] switch, you can return to the state immedi-

ately prior to performing the recall operation. How-

ever when the Undo operation is not available, such

as immediately after power-on or during PREVIEW

mode, pressing the [RECALL UNDO] switch will

cause a message of “CANNOT UNDO!” to appear.

Using PREVIEW mode

By using PREVIEW mode you can check or modify the

contents of a scene stored in memory without affecting

the internal signal processing of the system.

1. Turn on the SCENE MEMORY [PREVIEW] switch

to make the switch LED light.

The SCENE MEMORY block will be in PREVIEW

mode.

2. Use the SCENE MEMORY [0]–[9] switches or the

SCENE MEMORY [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC] switches to

select the scene number that you wish to load.

When you select a new scene number, the number

shown in the [SCENE NUMBER] indicator will

blink.

3. Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] switch.

Only the settings of the scene selected in step 2 will

be loaded, and shown by the LEDs and the display in

the CS1D panel.

Internal signal processing of the system will not

change; it will remain as it was before the recall oper-

ation was performed.

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

Hint

You can recall a speciﬁc channel to the SELECTED

INPUT CHANNEL block or SELECTED OUTPUT

CHANNEL block, or view a speciﬁc screen in the

display to verify the settings in detail.

Channels set to RECALL SAFE will be safe. However

even if FADE TIME is speciﬁed, it will have no effect,

and the fader will move immediately to the speciﬁed

value.

4. As desired, use the controls of the CS1D panel to

modify the settings.

If you operate the panel controls in PREVIEW mode,

the patch whose settings alone you loaded in step 3

will be modiﬁed.

The internal signal processing of the system will not

be affected.

5. If you wish to save the changes you made in step 4,

select the store destination as desired, and press the

SCENE MEMORY [STORE] switch.

The changes you made in step 4 will be stored to

memory.

6. To return the SCENE MEMORY block to NORMAL

mode, press the SCENE MEMORY [PREVIEW]

switch to make the switch LED go dark.

Directly recalling a scene

By using SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches, you can

directly recall twelve scenes that were previously

assigned to these switches.

1. Assign scenes to the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12]

switches.

Scenes can be assigned to the SCENE MEMORY [1]–

[12] switches in the SCENE function DIRECT

RECALL screen.

SCENE function DIRECT RECALL screen

In the SCENE function DIRECT RECALL screen,

click the DIRECT RECALL button.

The SCENE MEMORY block SCENE MEMORY

[RECALL] LED will light.

The SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches will func-

tion as direct recall switches that directly recall the

speciﬁed twelve scenes.

Hint

The function of the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12]

switches can be selected in the IN DCA/MUTE func-

tion MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen, and also in the

OUT DCA/MUTE function MUTE GROUP

ASSIGN screen.

2. Press one of the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12]

switches.

The LED of the corresponding switch will light, and

the scene assigned to that switch in step 1 will be

loaded.

Using mute groups

The SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches can also be

used as mute master switches that turn muting on/off

for mute groups 1–12.

1. Assign input channels/output channels to mute

groups 1–12.

Input channels can be assigned to mute groups in the

IN DCA/MUTE function MUTE GROUP ASSIGN

screen. Output channels can be assigned to mute

groups in the OUT DCA/MUTE function MUTE

GROUP ASSIGN screen.

IN DCA/MUTE function MUTE GROUP ASSIGN

screen

DIRECT RECALL

button

SCENE MEMORY block

OUT DCA/MUTE function MUTE GROUP ASSIGN

screen

Input channels can be assigned to mute groups 1–

12, and output groups can be assigned to mute

groups 9–12.

However, it is not possible to assign both input and

output channels to a mute group 9–12. For this rea-

son if an output channel is already assigned to a

mute group, attempting to assign an input channel

to this mute group will cause a message to be dis-

played, and the assignment will not be made. (The

same will apply for the converse situation.)

When a scene is recalled, the DCA group data of

recall safe channels may be adjusted so that recall

safe settings are consistent within DCA groups 9–12.

Also when a channel library is recalled, the data

recalled to a channel may be adjusted so that set-

tings are consistent within DCA groups 9–12.

2. In the SCENE function DIRECT RECALL screen,

click the MUTE MASTER button.

The SCENE MEMORY block SCENE MEMORY

[MUTE] LED will light.

The SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches will func-

tion as mute master switches that turn muting on/off

for the corresponding mute group.

SCENE function DIRECT RECALL screen

Hint

The function of the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12]

switches can be selected in the IN DCA/MUTE func-

tion MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen, and also in the

OUT DCA/MUTE function MUTE GROUP

ASSIGN screen.

3. Press a SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switch.

The LED of the corresponding switch will light, and

the mute group assigned to the switch in step 1 will

be muted.

If a previously-on channel is muted by the mute

master switch, the [ON] LED of that channel will

blink.

Hint

You can also turn on multiple buttons to simulta-

neously mute multiple mute groups.

4. To turn muting off, press the SCENE MEMORY

[1]–[12] switches whose LEDs are currently lit.

MUTE MASTER

button

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS/USER DEFINE block

[Function]

In this block you can recall desired functions or screens in the display, or execute functions that were previ-

ously deﬁned by the user.

12345678

LCD FUNCTION

ACCESS/USER DEFINE

block

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS/USER DEFINE block

LCD ACCESS GLOBAL section

In this section, functions that affect the entire PM1D

system can be recalled to the display.

By repeatedly pressing the same switch, you can select

screens within a function.

By holding down the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch of the data

entry section and pressing one of these switches, you can

access the previous page within that function.

You can also recall the previous screen in that function

by continuing to press the switch.

1 [EFFECT] switch

2 [GEQ] switch

3 [SCENE] switch

4 [MIDI/GPI/TC] switch

5 [UTILITY] switch

6 [SYS/W.CLOCK] switch

7 [METER] switch

8 [MON/CUE] switch

LCD ACCESS OUTPUT section

In this section, functions that affect output channels can

be recalled to the display.

By repeatedly pressing the same switch, you can select

screens within a function.

By holding down the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch of the data

entry section and pressing one of these switches, you can

access the previous page within that function.

You can also recall the previous screen in that function

by continuing to press the switch.

1 [PATCH] switch

2 [INSERT] switch

3 [EQ] switch

4 [COMP] switch

5 [DELAY] switch

6 [DCA/MUTE] switch

7 [MATRIX/ST] switch

8 [CH VIEW] switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

LCD ACCESS INPUT section

In this section, functions that affect input channels can

be recalled to the display.

By repeatedly pressing the same switch, you can select

screens within a function.

By holding down the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch of the data

entry section and pressing one of these switches, you can

access the previous page within that function. You can

also recall the previous screen in that function by con-

tinuing to press the switch.

1 [PATCH] switch

2 [HA/INSERT] switch

3 [EQ] switch

4 [GATE/COMP] switch

5 [DELAY] switch

6 [DCA/MUTE] switch

7 [PAN/ROUTING] switch

8 [CH VIEW] switch

USER DEFINE

1 [1]–[8] switches and LEDs

These switches execute functions previously deﬁned

by the user.

Deﬁnitions for each switch can be made in the UTIL-

ITY function DEFINE screen.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

12345678

Data entry block

[Function]

This block is used to move the display pointer (the arrow displayed in the screen) or cursor (the red circle that

indicates a selection), or to modify the value of a parameter.

Data entry block

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

100

1 CURSOR [▲]/[▼]/[√]/[®] switches

Use these to move the cursor in the display to the

desired parameter.

2 [DEC/CANCEL]/[INC/OK] switches

Use these to increment or decrement the value of the

parameter at which the cursor is located in the dis-

play.

When a conﬁrmation window is displayed before

executing a Recall or Store operation, these switches

can also be used in place of the CANCEL button and

OK button in the window.

3 [SHIFT/GRAB] switch

If the cursor is located at a knob-type parameter with

a wide range of adjustment, the parameter value can

be made to change more quickly by holding down

this switch and pressing the [DEC/CANCEL]/[INC/

OK] switch or rotating the [DATA] encoder.

In some screens, you can hold down this screen and

press a CURSOR [▲]/[▼]/[√]/[®] switch 1, to

move the cursor from its current location to another

area.

The GRAB function is not supported on PM1D sys-

tem version 1.0.

4 [ENTER] switch

This switch is used as an on/off switch for the button

at which the cursor is located in the display.

5 [DATA] encoder

This is used to continuously increase or decrease the

parameter value in the display where the cursor is

currently located.

6 Track pad and left/right switches

Use this to move the pointer in the display, and to

select a speciﬁc parameter.

When adjusting a parameter that has a wide range,

such as delay time, the parameter value will change

more rapidly if you click the right switch of the track

pad (mouse) while using the pad to modify the

value.

By holding down the left/right switches while you

turn on the power, you can initialize internal mem-

ory such as scene memory and the various libraries.

For details refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Soft-

ware), Other” →p.194.

Meter bridge block

101

Meter bridge block

[Function]

Displays the levels of the output channels and cue output.

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

CLIP

-8

-16

-30

-70

CLIP

-8

-16

-30

-70

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

CLIP

-8

-16

-30

-70

CLIP

-8

-16

-30

-70

MIX OUT 123456789101112 131415161718192021222324

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

CLIP

-8

-16

-30

-70

CLIP

-8

-16

-30

-70

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

MIX OUT

MATRIX OUT

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

CLIP

-8

-16

-30

-70

CLIP

-8

-16

-30

-70

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

FRAME

SECOND

MINUTEHOUR

NUMBER

NAME

STEREO A

STEREO B

CUE

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

123456789101112

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

TIME CODE

SCENE MEMORY

CURRENT

PREVIEW

Meter bridge block

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

102

Meter section (left)

1 MIX OUT 1–24 meters

These LED meters show the output level of MIX

channels 1–24.

Meter section (right)

1 STEREO A L/R meters

These LED meters show the output level of the STE-

REO A channel.

2 STEREO B L/R meters

These LED meters show the output level of the STE-

REO B channel.

3 CUE L/R meters

These LED meters show the output level of the CUE

signal.

4 MIX OUT 25–48 / MATRIX OUT 1–24 meters

According to the MASTER block METER SELECT

switch setting, these LED meters show the output

level of MIX channels 25–48 or the output level of

MATRIX channels 1–24.

The number of the currently selected channel will

light above the meter bridge.

5 LAMP DIMMER encoder

Refer to page 107 for an explanation.

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

CLIP

-8

-16

-30

-70

CLIP

-8

-16

-30

-70

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

CLIP

-8

-16

-30

-70

CLIP

-8

-16

-30

-70

MIX OUT 123456789101112 131415161718192021222324

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

CLIP

-8

-16

-30

-70

CLIP

-8

-16

-30

-70

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

MIX OUT

MATRIX OUT

CLIP

-8

-16

-30

-70

CLIP

-4

-8

-12

-16

-20

-24

-30

-40

-50

-70

FRAME

SECOND

MINUTEHOUR

NUMBER

NAME

STEREO A

LAMP

DIMMER

STEREO B

CUE

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

123456789101112

37 38 39 40 41 42 4

13 14 15 16 17 18 1

TIME CODE

SCENE MEMORY

CURRENT

PREVIEW

15 2 3 4

Meter bridge block

103

TIME CODE section

1 TIME CODE indicator

This is a realtime display of the SMPTE time code

(LTC) that is input from the TIME CODE IN con-

nector in the rear panel of the CS1D, or of the time

code that is generated within the PM1D system.

This will not be displayed if the TIME CODE IN set-

ting in the TC EVENT screen is turned OFF, or if

TIME CODE is not input after changing this setting.

Hint

You can make settings in the display (MIDI/GPI/TC

function TC EVENT screen) to select the source

(internal or external) of the time code that is dis-

played.

SCENE MEMORY section

1 SCENE MEMORY [NUMBER] indicator

This displays the last stored or recalled scene mem-

ory number.

2 SCENE MEMORY [CURRENT]/[PREVIEW] LEDs

These indicate whether Normal mode or Preview

mode is selected as the operation when Recall is per-

formed.

• When the [CURRENT] LED is lit (Normal mode)

In this mode, scenes will be stored and recalled as

usual.

In this mode, the setting values shown on the CS1D

will always match the current state of the mix param-

eters.

When you recall a new scene in this mode, the mix

parameter values will be rewritten by the new scene.

• When the [PREVIEW] LED is lit (Preview mode)

In this mode, you can check or edit a scene stored in

memory, a unit, a patch, or a name without affecting

the signal processing of the system.

When you recall a new scene in this mode, the mix

parameter values, and unit, patch, name setting val-

ues of that scene will be shown by the CS1D top

panel, but the internal signal processing will not be

affected.

3 SCENE MEMORY [NAME] indicator

This displays the title (sixteen characters) of the

scene memory shown in the SCENE MEMORY

[NUMBER] indicator.

If a scene with a speciﬁed FADE TIME is recalled, the

title will blink during the fade. For details refer to

“CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” (→p.25).

FRAME

SECOND

MINUTEHOUR

TIME CODE

MIX OUT

MATRIX OUT

NUMBER

NAME

SCENE MEMORY

CURRENT

PREVIEW

1 23

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

104

Rear panel block

[Function]

This is the block where the CS1D is connected to external devices. Here you can make connections to other

devices of the PM1D system (DSP units, input/output units, power supplies), and to external audio devices

such as DAT recorders, monitor systems, and MIDI devices.

The CS1D is cooled by fan exhaust openings

located on its rear panel. Check these regularly and

use a vacuum cleaner etc. to ensure that the open-

ings do not become clogged with dust. Before per-

forming this maintenance, you must turn off the

POWER switch of the PM1D power supply unit

and make sure that the CS1D is not operating.

LAMP LAMP

CONSOLE ENGINE B ENGINE A

OUT

USB

RS-232-C

CONTROL

TIME CODE IN

GPI

MIDI

OUT

THRU

REMOTE

RS-422

NUM

KEY

MOUSE

KEY

BOARD

SVGA OUT

CONTROL I/O

LAMP LAMP

DC POWER INPUT B

SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL

DC POWER INPUT A

SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL

FAN

HIGH

LOW

AES

/EBU

COAXIAL

STEREO OUT

DIGITAL

WORD CLOCK

AES

/EBU

COAXIAL

AES

/EBU

AES

/EBU

AES

/EBU

AES

/EBU

2-TRACK IN DIGITAL

AES

/EBU

COAXIAL

AES

/EBU

COAXIAL

OFF

OUT

CONSOLE

1 2121

ENGINE B

DIGITAL I/O

ENGINE A

MONITOR OUT

ANALOG

TALKBACK IN 2

CUE OUT

ANALOG

2-TRACK IN

ANALOG

Rear panel block

105

DIGITAL I/O section

DIGITAL I/O CONSOLE connectors (1/2)

These are 68-pin D-sub connectors that exchange

multi-channel digital audio signals with a second

CS1D console when two CS1D consoles are used in a

single PM1D system (Dual Console mode). Connect

the ﬁrst console’s DIGITAL I/O CONSOLE connec-

tor to the second console’s DIGITAL I/O ENGINE A

connector.

DIGITAL I/O ENGINE B jacks (1/2)

These are 68 pin D-sub connectors that exchange

multi-channel digital audio signals with the two

DSP1D-EX {DSP1D} DSP units (engines A/B) con-

nected in a mirror conﬁguration to a single CS1D.

DIGITAL I/O ENGINE A jacks (1/2)

These are 68 pin D-sub connector that exchange

multi-channel digital audio signals with a connected

DSP1D-EX {DSP1D}.

When using two CS1D consoles in a single PM1D

system (Dual Console mode), connect the ﬁrst con-

sole’s DIGITAL I/O CONSOLE connector to the sec-

ond console’s DIGITAL I/O ENGINE A connector.

Hint

The connectors of the DIGITAL I/O section will

operate correctly if either connector 1 or 2 is con-

nected. However by connecting both 1 and 2, you

can use one as a standby in the event of unexpected

problems. For normal operation, only one of the

cables will be used. If a communication error occurs

and transmission becomes impossible, the PM1D

system will automatically switch to the correctly-

functioning cable and will attempt to reestablish

communication.

CONSOLE

1 2121

ENGINE B

DIGITAL I/O

ENGINE A

1 2 3

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

106

2-TRACK IN DIGITAL section

1 2-TRACK IN DIGITAL AES/EBU jacks (1–6)

These are AES/EBU (XLR-3-31) jacks for inputting

AES/EBU format digital sources from external

devices such as CD players and DAT recorders.

2 2-TRACK IN DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks (1–2 only)

These are coaxial (RCA phono) jacks for inputting

coaxial format (consumer IEC60958) digital sources

from external devices such as CD players and DAT

recorders.

Hint

The signals that are input from 2-TRACK IN DIGI-

TAL jacks 1–6 can be patched to the desired input

channels or ST IN channels in the display (IN

PATCH function INPUT PATCH screen).

Each of the 2-TRACK IN DIGITAL jacks 1–6 has its

own built-in sample rate converter. For this reason, it

is not necessary for the word clock of these sources to

be synchronized to the word clock of the PM1D sys-

tem.

It is not possible to use the AES/EBU jack 1 simulta-

neously with the COAXIAL jack 1, nor the AES/

EBU jack 2 simultaneously with the COAXIAL jack

2. The jack that will be used can be selected in the

display (MON/CUE function 2TR IN screen).

STEREO OUT DIGITAL section

1 STEREO OUT DIGITAL AES/EBU jacks (A/B)

These are AES/EBU (XLR-3-32) jacks that digitally

output the STEREO A/B channel signals in AES/EBU

format.

2 STEREO OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks (A/B)

These are coaxial (RCA phono) jacks that digitally

output the STEREO A/B channel signals in coaxial

format (consumer IEC60958).

AES

/EBU

AES

/EBU

AES

/EBU

AES

/EBU

2-TRACK IN DIGITAL

AES

/EBU

COAXIAL

AES

/EBU

COAXIAL

AES

/EBU

COAXIAL

STEREO OUT

DIGITAL

AES

/EBU

COAXIAL

Rear panel block

107

WORD CLOCK section

1 WORD CLOCK IN connector

This is a BNC connector that supplies a word clock

from an external device to the CS1D. Synchroniza-

tion must be achieved with the word clock that is

being input to other devices of the PM1D system.

2 WORD CLOCK OUT connector

This is a BNC connector that supplies a word clock

from the CS1D to an external device.

3 75 Ω [ON/OFF] switch

This switch terminates the word clock connector.

In general, this should be turned ON if the CS1D is

the last device in the word clock connection chain, or

if nothing is connected to the WORD CLOCK IN/

OUT connectors.

LAMP connectors

These are 4-pin female XLR output jacks that supply

power to the optional lamps. (These jacks are provided

in four locations.)

LAMP DIMMER encoder

An encoder for controlling the brightness of the lamp

connected to the LAMP connector is located at the left

side of the meter section (right). Rotating this toward

the right will brighten the lamps; rotating it toward the

left will darken them.

WORD CLOCK

OFF

OUT

LAMP

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

108

2-TRACK IN ANALOG section

1 2-TRACK IN ANALOG L/R jacks (1–2)

These are XLR-3-31 (balanced) jacks that input ste-

reo analog signals from external devices.

Hint

The signals that are input from these jacks can be

patched in the display (IN PATCH function INPUT

PATCH screen)to any desired input channel or ST IN

channel.

MONITOR OUT ANALOG section

1 MONITOR OUT L/R jacks (A/B)

These are XLR-3-32 (balanced) jacks that output the

monitor A/B signals.

2-TRACK IN

ANALOG

MONITOR OUT

ANALOG

Rear panel block

109

TALKBACK IN 2 section

1 TALKBACK IN 2 jack

This is an XLR-3-31 jack for connecting a talkback

mic.

The talkback signal that is input from this jack will

be mixed within the CS1D with the signal from the

TALKBACK 1 jack on the top panel, and sent to the

same buses or output jacks.

Hint

Phantom power for the TALKBACK IN 2 jack can be

switched on/off in the display (MON/CUE function

TALKBACK screen).

The level of the signal that is input from the TALK-

BACK IN 2 jack can be adjusted on the top panel

(TALKBACK [LEVEL] volume).

The input sensitivity of the TALKBACK 1 jack and

TALKBACK 2 jack can be switched individually.

When the input sensitivity is +10 dB, a +10 dB input

signal will be nominal input. The input sensitivity is

switched in the MON/CUE function TALKBACK

screen.

CUE OUT ANALOG section

1 CUE OUT L/R jacks (A/B)

These are XLR-3-32 (balanced) jacks that output the

cue signal.

TALKBACK IN 2

CUE OUT

ANALOG

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

110

DC POWER section

1 DC POWER INPUT connector

The PW1D power supply can be connected to these

connectors.

Hint

The CS1D will operate normally if a PW1D is con-

nected to just one of the two DC POWER INPUT

connectors. However it is also possible to connect

two PW1Ds to each DC POWER INPUT connector

respectively. In this case, power will be supplied from

both PW1D units during normal operation, but even

if one of the PW1D units should fail, power will con-

tinue to be supplied from the remaining PW1D.

2 FAN HIGH/LOW switch

This switches the cooling fan between high and low

settings.

For normal use, set this to LOW.

However if the CS1D is in a location of high temper-

ature or is outside in direct sunlight, set this to

HIGH.

You should also set this to HIGH if you feel that the

front panel of the console is warmer than usual.

123

4567

101112

131415161718

1920

2425

27 26

212223

123

4567

101112

131415161718

1920

2425

27 26

212223

DC POWER INPUT B

SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL

DC POWER INPUT A

SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL

FAN

HIGH

LOW

Rear panel block

111

CONTROL section

REMOTE RS422 connector

This is a 9-pin D-sub connector for controlling an

HD recorder or tape recorder. You can use serial

commands to control functions such as Play and

Stop on the recorder.

NUM KEY connector

A PS/2 compatible numeric keypad can be connected

to this connector.

A keypad connected here can be used to input values

and numbers.

The function of each key is as follows.

MOUSE connector

A PS/2 compatible mouse can be connected to this

connector.

A mouse connected here can be used in the same way

as the track pad.

This cannot be used simultaneously with the

MOUSE connector of the front panel block. Only

one or the other can be connected.

KEYBOARD connector

A PS/2 compatible keyboard can be connected to this

connector.

A keyboard connected here can be used to input

channel names or scene titles.

Only 101 or 104 type US keyboards can be used.

The system will not operate correctly with any

other type of keyboard.

This cannot be used simultaneously with the KEY-

BOARD connector of the front panel block. Only

one or the other can be connected.

SVGA OUT connector

An external monitor can be connected to this con-

nector to output the same image as the built-in dis-

play of the CS1D.

Connect a display that supports a resolution of 800

600 dots.

REMOTE

RS-422

NUM

KEY

MOUSE

KEY

BOARD

SVGA OUT

1 2 3 4 5

Key Function

0–9

Same function as the SCENE MEMORY

block [0]–[9] switches

Enter

Same function as the SCENE MEMORY

block [RECALL] switch

Same function as the SCENE MEMORY

block [

▲

/INC] switch + [ENTER] switch (recall

the next-numbered scene)

Same function as the SCENE MEMORY

block [

▼

/DEC] switch + [ENTER] switch

(recall the previously-numbered scene)

Not used

CS1D Corresponding keypad

[INC] PageUp

[DEC] PageDown

CURSOR

←

→

↑

↓

←

Keypad 4 with NumLock defeated

→

Keypad 6 with NumLock defeated

↑

Keypad 2 with NumLock defeated

↓

Keypad 8 with NumLock defeated

[DATA] Alt + PageUp (INC direction)

Alt + PageDown (DEC direction)

[SHIFT/GRAB] Shift

[ENTER] Return, Enter

Varions text

pattete opera-

tion

Ctrl +

←

(

√

button click)

Ctrl +

→

(

button click)

Ctrl + c (Copy button click)

Ctrl + v (PASTE button click)

Insert (INS button click)

Delet (DEL button click]

BackSpace (Back space function)

Ctrl +

↑

, Cntl +

↓

, tab (Switch the object of

editing in the text input box)

Display

Click menu

ESC

Display popup

window closed

(CANCEL/

EXIT)

ESC (except when MENU is displayed)

Switch display

tabs

Tab 1: Alt+1, Tab 2: Alt+2, Tab 3: Alt+3,

Tab 4: Alt+4, Tab 5: Alt+5, Tab 6: Alt+6,

Tab 7: Alt+7, Tab 8: Alt+8, Tab 9: Alt+9,

Tab 10: Alt+0, Tab 11: Alt+–, Tab 12: Alt+=,

Tab 13: Alt+\, Tab 14: Alt+’

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

112

CONTROL section

MIDI IN connector

MIDI OUT connector

MIDI THRU connector

These are 5-pin DIN connectors that function as

MIDI IN, MIDI OUT, and MIDI THRU respectively.

TIME CODE IN connector

This is an XLR-3-31 connector (balanced) for sup-

plying time code from an external device.

Hint

The time code source to be displayed (either external

or internal) and the frame rate can be selected in the

display (MIDI/GPI/TC function TC EVENT screen).

GPI connector

This is a 25-pin D-sub connector for sending and

receiving eight channels of GPI (General Purpose

Interface) signals to and from an external device.

PC CONTROL RS-232-C connector

This is a 9-pin D-sub connector for connection to

the RS232C connector of a PC, to allow the PM1D

Manager to control the software of the PM1D sys-

tem.

Use a D-sub 9-pin (female

← →

female) cross cable

to connect this to the serial (COM) connector of

your PC.

PC CONTROL USB connector

Connect this to the USB connector of a computer to

allow the PM1D system software to be controlled

from PM1D Manager.

ENGINE A I/O connectors (1/2)

These are BNC connectors for connection to ENGINE A

so that control signals can be received and transmitted.

ENGINE B I/O connectors (1/2)

These are BNC connectors for connection to the

DSP1D-EX {DSP1D} used as ENGINE B when two

engines (A/B) are connected in a mirror conﬁgura-

tion to a single console. They are used to transmit

and receive control signals.

CONSOLE IN/OUT connectors (1/2)

These BNC connectors are used to send and receive

control signals to and from a second CS1D console

when two CS1D consoles are used in a single PM1D

system (Dual Console mode).

Hint

The PM1D system will operate normally if either set 1

or set 2 of the ENGINE A IN/OUT connectors (

) is

connected. However it is also possible to connect both

sets 1 and 2 so that one of them will function as a

standby. In normal operation, only one set of cables will

be used. However if a communication error occurs and

transmission becomes impossible, the PM1D system

will automatically switch to the valid set of cables and

attempt to re-establish communication.

However, the system will not function properly

unless both the IN and OUT connectors of at least

one set (set 1 or set 2) are connected correctly. For

details on connections, refer to “CS1D Operation

Manual (Start-up).”

CONSOLE ENGINE B ENGINE A

OUT

USB

RS-232-C

CONTROL

TIME CODE IN

GPI

MIDI

OUT

THRU

CONTROL I/O

0 9 8

Rear panel block

113

Input/output signal ﬂow

The following diagram shows the signal ﬂow from the

input jacks of the CS1D until the signal is sent to the

DS1D DSP unit.

Input signal ﬂow

The following diagram shows the signal ﬂow from the

DS1D DSP unit until the signal is sent to the CS1D.

Output signal ﬂow

+48V

PHANTOM

TALKBACK IN

+48V

PHANTOM

ADHA

COAXIAL

2-TRACK IN DIGITAL1(-2)

AES/EBU

Lch

Rch

ADBA

2-TRACK IN DIGITAL3(-6)

AES/EBU

SRC

LEVEL

-44

+10

-44

+48V

2-TRACK IN ANALOG1(-2)

[CS1D]

[DSP-1D]

MONITOR

OUT A

DIMMER

MONITOR OUT B

[24bit Data]

COAXIAL

AES/EBU

STEREO OUT DIGITAL B

COAXIAL

AES/EBU

DITHER

DAC

CUE OUT

METER

DAC

METER

[CS1D]

STEREO OUT DIGITAL A

[24bit Data]

LEVEL

MONITOR A

METER

LEVEL

PHONES

MONITOR B

PHONES

METER

MONITOR B

PHONES

MONITOR A

PHONES

LEVEL

TALKBACK

[DSP-1D]

CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

114

Front panel block

[Function]

Keyboard, mouse, and monitoring headphones can be connected here.

1 MOUSE connector

A PS/2 compatible mouse can be connected to this

connector.

A mouse connected here can be used in the same way

as the track pad.

This cannot be used simultaneously with the

MOUSE connector of the CONTROL section 1.

Only one or the other can be connected.

2 KEYBOARD connector

A PS/2 compatible keyboard can be connected to this

connector.

A keyboard connected here can be used to input

channel names or scene titles.

For details on how keyboard operations correspond

to operations on the CS1D, refer to page 111.

Only a 101 or 104 type US keyboard can be used.

Other types of keyboards will not function cor-

rectly.

This cannot be used simultaneously with the KEY-

BOARD connector located in the CONTROL sec-

tion 1. Only one or the other can be connected.

3 MONITOR A / MONITOR B jacks

These are headphone jacks for monitoring MONI-

TOR A and MONITOR B.

Do not use the front panel headphone jacks at the

same time as the top panel headphone jacks. Doing

so can cause the CS1D to malfunction due to exces-

sive current.

MOUSE KEYBOARD MONITOR A MONITOR B

1 2 3

Front panel block

Reference Manual

(Software)

Contents

How the “CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” is organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Printing conventions in the “CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Information shown in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Function menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Selecting a function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Global functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

EFFECT functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Using internal effects 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

EFFECT ASSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

GEQ (graphic EQ) functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Using the internal 31 band graphic EQ on the output channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

GEQ PARAMETER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

GEQ ASSIGN 1-12/13-24 (graphic EQ assign 1–12/13–24) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

SCENE functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Operating scene memories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

MEMORY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

RECALL SAFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

FADE TIME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

DIRECT RECALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

MIDI/GPI/TC function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Make MIDI/GPI/time code -related settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

MIDI PROGRAM (MIDI program change) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

TC EVENT (time code event) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

UTILITY functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Initial settings for the PM1D system, and loading/saving data or libraries . . . . . . . . . 36

PREFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

USER DEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

LOAD/SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

SYS/W.CLOCK (system/word clock) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Make settings related to system/word clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

SYSTEM CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

INPUT UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

OUTPUT UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

WORD CLOCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

DITHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

METER functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Make meter-related settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Input metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Output metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

MON/CUE (monitor/cue) functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Make settings related to monitor and cue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

TALKBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

OSCILLATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

2TR IN (2 track in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Contents

iii

ST OUT DIGITAL (stereo out digital) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

MONITOR A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

MONITOR B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

CUE/SOLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Output functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

OUT PATCH (output patch) functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Assign output units to output channels/insert I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

OUTPUT PATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

INSERT PATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

INSERT POINT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

INSERT VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

OUT INSERT (output insert) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Settings for an output unit inserted into an output channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

MIX 1-24 INS / MIX 25-48 INS / MATRIX 1-24 INS / ST

MAS INS/UNIT LIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

OUT EQ (output equalizer) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Output channel EQ settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

EQ PARAMETER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

MIX 1-24/MIX 25-48/MATRIX 1-24/STEREO A, B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

OUT COMP (output compressor) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Compressor settings for output channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

COMP PRM (compressor parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

MIX 1-12 – MIX 37-48/MATRIX 1-12 – MATRIX 13-24/STEREO A, B . . . . . . . . 96

OUT DELAY (output delay) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Set the channel-independent delay for output channels, and the global delay . . . . . 99

MIX 1-24 /MIX 25-48/MATRIX 1-24/STEREO A, B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

OUT DCA/MUTE (output DCA/mute) function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Set DCA and mute group settings for the output channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

DCA ASSIGN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

MUTE GROUP ASSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

MATRIX/ST (matrix/stereo) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Send signals from the MIX channels, STEREO A/B channels, and SUB IN to

the MATRIX buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

MATRIX/ST ROUTING (matrix/stereo routing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

MIX to MATRIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

SUB IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

LCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

OUT CH VIEW (output channel view) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

View output channel settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

CH VIEW (channel view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Input functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

IN PATCH functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Assign input/output units to input channels/insert I/O/direct out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

INPUT PATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

DIRECT OUT PATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

INSERT PATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Contents

INSERT/DIRECT POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

INSERT/DIRECT VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

IN HA/INSERT (Input head amp/insert) functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Settings for the head amp/phase section of the input unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

CH 1-24 – CH 73-96 / ST IN 1-8 / CH 1-24 INS – CH 73-96

INS / ST IN INS/UNIT LIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

IN EQ (Input equalizer) functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Input channel EQ settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

EQ PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

CH 1-24 – CH 73-96/ST IN 1-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

IN GATE/COMP function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Gate/comp settings for the input channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

GATE PRM (gate parameters). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

COMP PRM (compressor parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

CH 1-12 – CH 85-96/ST IN 1-4 – ST IN 5-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

IN DELAY functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Make settings for individual input channel delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

CH 1–24 – CH 72-96/ST IN 1-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

IN DCA/MUTE functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Set DCA, and mute group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

DCA ASSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

MUTE GROUP ASSIGN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

PAN/ROUTING function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Send the signal from an input channel/ST IN channel to the desired MIX

bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

CH to MIX (channel to mix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

LCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

IN CH VIEW (input channel view) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

View the settings of an input channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

CH VIEW (channel view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

Basic library operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

UNIT LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

PATCH LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

NAME LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

INPUT EQ LIBRARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

INPUT GATE LIBRARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

INPUT COMP LIBRARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

OUTPUT COMP LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

INPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

OUTPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

EFFECT LIBRARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

GEQ LIBRARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194

Memory initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

How the “CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” is organized

In the “CS1D Reference Manual (Software),” the screens that appear in the display of the console (CS1D) are organized

into the following four sections. This manual explains how to access the screens, the function of each part, and related

procedures.

Global functions

Here you can make settings that affect the entire PM1D

system.

Output functions

Here you can make settings that affect the output chan-

nels (MIX channels, MATRIX channels, STEREO A/B

channels).

Input functions

Here you can make settings that affect input channels

(monaural input channels, ST IN channels).

Library

This is an internal memory area that allows you to save

and reuse PM1D system settings such as patch data, EQ

data, compressor data, and effect data.

•

For details on setting up and connecting the PM1D

system, refer to “CS1D Operating Manual (Start-

up).”

•

For details on operating the PM1D system, refer to

“CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation).”

•

For details on the functions and operation of the

controllers and connectors on the top panel, rear

panel, and front panel of the CS1D, refer to “CS1D

Reference Manual (Hardware).”

Screen shots shown in this manual are taken from a

prototype. Please be aware that they may differ

slightly from the actual screens on your unit.

Printing conventions in the “CS1D Reference Manual (Software)”

•

Difference between the 96 channel model and 48

channel model

In general, the “CS1D Reference Manual (Software)”

is written with the 96 channel model (i.e., the model

whose engine uses the DSP1D-EX) in mind. In cases

where the speciﬁcations differ between the 96 chan-

nel model and the 48 channel model (whose engine

uses the DSP1D), the speciﬁcations of the 48 channel

model will be enclosed in curly brackets { }.

Example: x will indicate a number in the range of 1–

96 {1–48}.

•

Distinguishing between the controls of the CS1D

and the on-screen knobs/buttons

Controls (switches, encoders, volumes) on the top

panel, rear panel, and front panel of the CS1D are

enclosed in square brackets [ ] to distinguish them

from the knobs and buttons that appear in the dis-

play.

Example: Press the [ENTER] switch. (This refers to

an operation on the top panel of the CS1D.)

Example: Click the STORE button. (This refers to an

operation within the display.)

•

Va r ious icons

The following icon indicates useful tips or related

pages for reference.

The following icon indicates particularly important

items or operations that must be used with caution.

•

Accessing screens

The method of accessing a screen is described on the

ﬁrst page of the explanation for that screen. Most

screens can be accessed either by using the switches

of the console or by using the buttons in the display.

Example:

■

Console

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block

INPUT

[PATCH]

switch (press repeatedly until the screen

shown at the right appears)

This means that you are to press the INPUT

[PATCH] switch on the CS1D (located in the LCD

FUNCTION ACCESS block) repeatedly to access

the desired screen.

Example:

■

Display

button

→

INPUT PATCH

button

→

INSERT/DIRECT VIEW

tab

This means that you are to successively click the

MENU button

→

INPUT PATCH button

→

INSERT/DIRECT VIEW tab that appear in the

display to access the desired screen.

Hint

CS1D Reference Manual (Software)

Information shown in the display

A typical screen of the CS1D

The following information is shown in the display of the

CS1D.

[Upper part of the display (Common to each screen)]

DISPLAY FUNCTION

This displays the abbreviation for the currently

selected function.

ENGINE

When the PM1D is being used in Mirror mode, this

indicates the currently valid engine (A or B) and the

number of channels that can be used. (The cur-

rently-used button is highlighted.) You can also click

this button to switch between engines A and B.

When the PM1D is being used in Standard mode,

engine A alone will be valid at all times. Engine B

will be shaded, and cannot be selected. When the

PM1D is being used in Mirror mode, engines A/B

will both be valid.

If a valid engine is not functioning correctly, or if

the connection has been broken, an X symbol will

be displayed over the A or B symbol.

SEL CH (selected channel)

This shows the currently selected channel. If an input

function screen is accessed, this will show the cur-

rently selected input channel. If an output function

screen is accessed, this will show the currently

selected output channel.

The abbreviations here have the following meanings.

•

CH x

................... Input channel (x will be a num-

ber in the range of 1–96 {1–48})

•

STINx[L]/[R]

..... ST IN channel L or R (x will be a

number in the range of 1–8 {1–

4})

•

MIX x

................. MIX channel (x will be a number

in the range of 1–48)

•

MTRX x

.............. MATRIX channel (x will be a

number in the range of 1–24)

•

ST A[L]/[R]

........ STEREO A channel L or R

•

ST B[L]/[R]

........ STEREO B channel L or R

1 2 3 4 6

Information shown in the display

SCENE MEMORY

This displays the number and title of the currently

selected scene memory. If this is changed to a scene

number other than the one that was last stored or

recalled, the title area will blink. At this time, you can

click the blinking title area to return to the last stored

or recalled scene number.

Indicators

One of the following indicators will be displayed

according to the state of the CS1D.

•

EDIT

This indicator will appear if a parameter included in

a scene, patch, unit, or name setting has been edited

after recalling a scene memory. This indicator will

disappear when you save the current settings into a

scene memory or recall a new scene from a scene

memory. This indicator may not disappear in certain

cases, such as when Recall Safe is in effect.

•

This will light if the TC EVENT screen parameter

EVENT RECALLING is set to ENABLE TC. While

this symbol is lit, it is not possible to rewrite the con-

tents of the SCENE or UNIT/PATCH/NAME librar-

ies. This means that functions such as STORE,

STORE UNDO, LINK ON/OFF, TITLE EDIT, SORT,

and LOAD will be unavailable. Before performing

these functions, you must set EVENT RECALLING

to DISABLE.

•

OFFLINE

This symbol will be displayed only in PM1D Man-

ager for Windows software running on your com-

puter. (It will not appear in the display of the CS1D.)

This symbol displayed on your computer indicates

that your computer and the CS1D are ofﬂine.

If you are unable to switch to online mode, check

the following points.

1)Have the connections between RS-232-C connec-

tors been made correctly?

2)Are you using an RS-232-C cross cable?

3)Is the power of the CS1D turned on?

4)Has the PM1D editing software been installed

appropriately?

Is the RS232C connector of your computer disabled?

•

PREVIEW

This indicator will appear when the PM1D system is

in PREVIEW mode.

In this mode you can view, edit, and save scene set-

tings stored in memory.

•

READ ONLY

PROTECT

The READ ONLY symbol will be displayed if the

scene currently selected for store/recall (shown by

the scene number in the upper right of the display) is

read-only (numbers 00.0–00.9), and the PROTECT

symbol will be displayed if the scene is protected.

Operation indicators

The following indicators will appear according to the

operating state of the CS1D.

•

SOLO

This indicator will appear when Solo mode is on.

•

This indicator will appear when Talkback is on.

•

OSC

This indicator will appear when the internal oscilla-

tor is on.

•

MIDI

This indicator will appear when a valid MIDI mes-

sage is received.

•

COMM IN

A red COMM IN symbol will be displayed if a signal

is being input to COMM IN and the COMM IN

DIMMER for MONITOR A is operating.

While this symbol is displayed, you can attenuate the

monitor signal level by using the DIMMER knob in

the MONITOR A screen of the MON/CUE function.

•

LCR

This indicator will light when one or more channels

is set to LCR mode.

•

BUSY

The BUSY symbol will be displayed if data is being

written to the internal memory or the card inserted

in the card slot.

•

INPUT CUE

This symbol will be displayed if the [CUE] switch of

an input channel is on.

•

OUTPUT CUE

This symbol will be displayed if the [CUE] switch of

an output channel is on.

•

DCA CUE

This symbol will be displayed appear if the [CUE]

switch of a DCA group is on.

•

EFFECT CUE

This symbol will be displayed if a CUE button is on

in the EFFECT function EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8

screens or the EFFECT ASSIGN screen.

•

KEY IN CUE

This symbol will be displayed if a KEY IN CUE but-

ton is on in the IN GATE/COMP function GATE

PRM screen.

•

SUB IN CUE

This symbol will be displayed if the KEY IN CUE

button is on in the IN GATE/COMP function GATE

PRM screen.

CS1D Reference Manual (Software)

[Center of the display]

Ta b

If a function consisting of multiple screens is

selected, you can click this area to switch screens

within that function. The number and content of the

screens will depend on the function.

Hint

An alternate method of switching screens within a

function is to repeatedly press the corresponding

function switch in the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block. (The result will be the same as if you clicked

the tabs in succession.)

This button accesses the function menu. This button

is located at the same place in all screens other than

the function menu itself.

Function parameters

This area displays the parameters for the currently

selected function or screen.

7 89

Information shown in the display

[Lower part of the display (Common to each screen)]

CONTROL STATUS/ USER DEFINE

These buttons switch the information that is dis-

played at the bottom of the screen. (The currently

selected button is displayed in green.)

•

When CONSOLE STATUS is on

The status of the currently selected channel and of

the CS1D will be displayed.

•

When USER DEFINE is on

A list of the functions assigned to the USER DEFINE

[1]–[8] switches of the USER DEFINE block will be

displayed.

Hint

Functions can be assigned to the USER DEFINE [1]–

[8] switches in the UTILITY function USER DEFINE

screen.

IN SEL (selected input channel)

This shows the input channel that is currently

selected by the [SEL] switch.

MODULE

This shows the on/off status of the MODULE [FLIP]

switch in the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block.

(When on, this will be displayed in green.) You can

also click this button to turn the MODULE [FLIP]

switch on/off (“CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

→

p.13).

FADER

This shows the status of the FADER FLIP section of

the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block. (When

the FADER FLIP [MIX] switch is on, the MIX button

will be displayed in green. When the FADER FLIP

[CH] switch is on, the CH button will be displayed in

green.) If you click either of these buttons, the setting

of the FADER FLIP section will follow your selection

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)

→

p.10).

MIX SEND NO. (mix send number)

This shows the number of the MIX bus (the number

shown by the MIX SEND [NUMBER] indicator)

that is selected as the send destination for INPUT

blocks 1–4 of the CS1D (“CS1D Reference Manual

(Hardware)

→

p.6).

If the INPUT block MIX SEND [LOCAL] switch is

turned on, the send destination MIX bus can be

selected independently of the other INPUT blocks.

Thus, for INPUT blocks in which the MIX SEND

[LOCAL] switch is turned on, the number of the

currently selected MIX bus may be different than

the number that is displayed here.

MASTER FADER

This shows the function that is currently assigned to

DCA faders 1–12 of the CS1D (located in the DCA

GROUP block) (“CS1D Reference Manual (Hard-

ware)

→

p.71).

The abbreviations have the following meanings.

•

........................ Input levels of the 12 input chan-

nels of any INPUT block and 8

input channels of the ST IN

block

•

MIX 1-12/MIX13-24/MIX25-36/MIX37-48

Output levels of the correspond-

ing 12 MIX channels

•

DCA

.................... DCA groups 1–12

•

GEQ LOW / GEQ MID / GEQ HIGH

Amount of boost/cut for the 12

selected bands of the internal

graphic EQ

OUT SEL (currently selected output channel)

This indicates the output channel that is currently

selected by the [SEL] switch.

Areas

–

are display areas used to show tempo-

rary messages if a malfunction has occurred in the

PM1D system or if there has been a problem with

operation. Important messages will be displayed in

a popup window.

0 A B C D E F

CS1D Reference Manual (Software)

Function menu

Selecting a function

[Function]

Here you can select the function that will be shown in the display. This menu will be the starting point when

you use operations in the display to select a speciﬁc screen.

■ Display

MENU button

[Screen functions]

1 Global functions

These buttons access global functions that affect the

entire PM1D system.

The content of each function is as follows.

• EFFECT

Set parameters and specify routing for the internal

effects 1–8 (→p.9).

• GEQ

Set parameters and select the insert destination for

the internal 31-band graphic EQ (→p.13).

• SCENE

Store/recall scene memories, and set the Recall Safe,

Fade Time, and Direct Recall functions (→p.18).

• MIDI / GPI / TC

Assign desired events to MIDI program change mes-

sages and time code (→p.29).

• UTILITY

Make settings that affect the basic operation of the

PM1D, such as default values for internal settings,

and the date and time. Here you can also load/save

scene memories and library data between the PM1D

system and a PC ATA ﬂash storage card (→p.36).

• SYS/W.CLOCK

Check the type and connections of the various com-

ponents in the PM1D system, and the type of cards

installed in each unit. Here you can also make word

clock and dither settings (→p.44).

Function menu

• METER

Make settings for the meters on the top panel of the

CS1D, the meters in the meter bridge block, and the

meters that appear in the display (→p.58).

• MON/CUE

Make settings for talkback, the internal oscillator,

and monitor/cue (→p.62).

2 Output functions

These buttons access functions related to the output

channels (MIX channels, MATRIX channels, STE-

REO A/B channels).

The content of each function is described below.

(The abbreviated function name shown in the dis-

play is given in parentheses.)

• PATCH (OUT PATCH)

Assign output units to output channels (→p.76).

• INSERT (OUT INSERT)

Make insertion settings for output channels

(→p.86).

• EQ (OUT EQ)

Make EQ settings for output channels (→p.89).

• COMP (OUT COMP)

Make compressor settings for output channels

(→p.93).

• DELAY (OUT DELAY)

Make delay settings for output channels (→p.99).

• DCA/MUTE (OUT DCA/MUTE)

Assign output channels to DCA groups or mute

groups (→p.101).

• MATRIX/ST (MATRIX/ST)

Make routing settings for MIX channels → MATRIX

bus / STEREO bus, SUB IN → MATRIX bus. Here

you can also make LCR mode settings for the MIX

channels (→p.105).

• CH VIEW (OUT CH VIEW)

Here you can view the parameters for a single output

channel. You can also edit the channel parameters

(→p.114).

CS1D Reference Manual (Software)

3 Input functions

These buttons access functions for the input chan-

nels (monaural input channels, ST IN channels).

The content of each function is described below.

(The abbreviated function name shown in the dis-

play is given in parentheses.)

• PATCH (IN PATCH)

Assign input units to input channels (→p.118).

• HA/INSERT (IN HA/INSERT)

Make settings for the head amps of an analog input

card, and insertion settings for input channels

(→p.131).

• EQ (IN EQ)

Make EQ settings for input channels (→p.134).

• GATE/COMP (IN GATE/COMP)

Make noise gate and compressor settings for input

channels (→p.139).

• DELAY (IN DELAY)

Make delay settings for input channels (→p.148).

• DCA/MUTE (IN DCA/MUTE)

Assign input channels to DCA groups or mute

groups (→p.150).

• PAN/ROUTING (PAN/ROUTING)

Make pan/routing settings for input channels. Here

you can also switch the MIX bus type (FIX or VARI)

(→p.154).

• CH VIEW (IN CH VIEW)

Here you can view the parameters for a single input

channel. You can also edit the channel parameters

(→p.162).

4 CANCEL

This button returns to the previous screen. When

you click this button, you will go back to the screen

that was displayed before you entered the menu

screen.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

Global functions

EFFECT functions

Using internal effects 1–8

EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8

[Function]

For internal effects 1–8, select the type, edit parameters, and patch inputs and outputs.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION

ACCESS block, press the

[EFFECT] switch (press repeat-

edly until the screen shown at the

right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → EFFECT but-

ton → EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8 tab

[Screen functions]

1 Level meter

These level meters display the peak level of the signal

being input to the internal effect.

2 INPUT L/R (input channel select)

These buttons select the signal route that will be

patched to the L/R input channels of the internal

effect.

When you click these buttons, a popup window will

appear in which you can select the signal.

The following signal routes can be selected.

1.CH1 INS–CH96 INS {CH1 INS–CH48 INS}

Insert Out of input channels 1–96 {1–48}

2.ST1 INS–ST8 INS {ST1 INS–ST4 INS} (L/R)

Insert Out of ST IN channels 1–8 {1–4} (L/R)

3.MIX 1–MIX 48

Output of MIX channels 1–48

4.MTRX 1 – MTRX 24

Output of MATRIX channels 1–24

5.MIX 1 INS – MIX 48 INS

Insert Out of MIX channels 1–48

6.MTRX 1 INS – MTRX 24 INS

Insert Out of MATRIX channels 1–24

7.ST A [L/R]

Output of STEREO A channel [L/R]

Global functions

8.ST B [L/R]

Output of STEREO B channel [L/R]

9.ST A [L/R] INS

Insert Out of STEREO A channel [L/R]

10. ST B [L/R] INS

Insert Out of STEREO B channel [L/R]

Hint

If a signal route 1–6 is selected, you can choose L/R

independently. (But not if the corresponding channel

is paired.)

If both L/R are “OFF” (i.e., when no signal route has

been assigned), selecting one of a pair of channels or

one side of the STEREO A/B channel will cause both

channels to automatically be assigned to L/R.

3 Effect

The currently selected effect is shown by name and

by graphic.

It is not possible to switch the type of effect in this

screen. If you wish to use a different effect, use the

effect library to recall a program that contains the

desired effect.

Hint

If a signal route is assigned only to the input channel

of one side of the effect, the effect will be processed as

mono-in/stereo-out.

If signal routes are assigned to both input channels,

the processing will depend on the effect type. “STE-

REO” types independently process the input signals

from the L/R channels. “MIX” types mix the L/R

channel signals before processing them, and output

the result in stereo. For details on the type to which

each effect belongs, refer to “CS1D Reference Manual

(Appendices).”

• When the signal path is assigned to only one

input channel

• When the signal path is assigned to both input

channels

STEREO type effects

MIX type effects

4 TYPE

This knob selects the type of effect.

The types available for selection will depend on the

effect that is displayed in 3.

5 BYPASS

This button temporarily bypasses the effect.

While this button is turned on, only the original

(“dry”) sound will be output.

6 CUE

This button monitors the effect output. CUE will be

defeated when you switch screens.

7 EFFECT LIBRARY

This button accesses the EFFECT LIBRARY popup

window, in which you can store/recall parameters as

effect programs (→p.190).

8 OUTPUT L/R

These buttons select the signal route that will be

patched to the L/R output channels of the internal

effect.

When you channel these buttons, a popup window

will appear, in which you can select the signal.

The following signal routes can be selected.

• CH1–CH96 {CH1–CH48}

Input of input channels 1–96 {1–48}

• CH1 INS–CH96 INS {CH1 INS–CH48 INS}

Insert In of input channels 1–96 {1–48}

• ST1–ST8 {ST1–ST4} [L/R]

Input of ST IN channels 1–8 ({1–4}.

• ST1 INS–ST8 INS {ST1 INS–ST4 INS} (L/R)

Insert In of ST IN channels 1–8 {1–4} (L/R)

• MIX 1 INS–MIX 48 INS

Insert In of MIX channels 1–48

• MTRX 1 INS – MTRX 24 INS

Insert In of MATRIX channels 1–24

• ST A [L/R] INS

Insert In of STEREO A channel (L/R)

• ST B [L/R] INS

Insert In of STEREO B channel (L/R)

INPUT L R L RETURN

EFFECT

R RETURN

INPUT L or R

L RETURNINPUT L

EFFECT L

R RETURNINPUT R

EFFECT R

L RETURNINPUT L

EFFECT

R RETURNINPUT R

95 68

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

EFFECT functions

9 Level meters

These level meters display the peak level of the signal

being output from the internal effect.

0 AT TENUATOR

These knobs adjust the dedicated attenuator for the

internal effect.

The range is –96 – 0 dB.

This attenuator is used to prevent the signal from

clipping after effect processing. If the signal clips at

the input meter, adjust the send level of the send

channel to lower the level.

A FILTER

These knobs adjust the cutoff frequency for the dedi-

cated ﬁlters (HPF/LPF) of the internal effect.

The range is as follows.

• HPF ....................Thru (bypass), 21 Hz–8.00 kHz

• LPF......................50 Hz – 16.0 kHz, Thru (bypass)

This ﬁlter is applied to the signal before it is pro-

cessed by the effect. For some effect types, there is

no ﬁlter.

B Effect parameters

These parameters determine the effect.

The type of effect parameters will depend on the cur-

rently selected effect (3).

For details on the effect parameters, refer to “CS1D

Reference Manual (Appendices)”.

C BALANCE

This knob adjust the balance between the original

(dry) sound and the effect (wet) sound.

A setting of 0(%) is only the original sound, and

100(%) is only the effect sound.

D ASSIGN

This button assigns the effect parameters to the

encoders of the MIX OUTPUT block, allowing you

to edit the parameters in realtime. For details on

operation, refer to Basic Operation p.130.

Global functions

EFFECT ASSIGN

[Function]

Displays a list of the effect types, the signal routes assigned to input and output, and the bypass and cue set-

tings used by internal effects 1–8.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the [EFFECT] switch

(press repeatedly until the screen

shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → EFFECT button

→ EFFECT ASSIGN tab

[Screen functions]

1 Level meters

These level meters show the peak level of the signal

that is input to the internal effect.

2 Effect

The currently selected effect is shown by name and

by graphic.

You can click this area to access the corresponding

EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8 screen. In addition, you can

drag and drop the graphic to copy all settings of an

effect (including the effect type) between EFFECT 1–

EFFECT 8.

3 BYPASS

This button switches bypass on/off.

4 CUE

This button monitors the output of the correspond-

ing effect. Cue will be defeated when you switch

screens.

5 TYPE

This indicates the type of the currently selected

effect.

6 INPUT (input channel)

This shows the signal route that is patched to input

channels L/R of the internal effect.

You can also click the SEL button and select the sig-

nal route.

7 OUTPUT (output channel)

This shows the signal route that is patched to output

channels L/R of the internal effect.

You can also click the SEL button and select the sig-

nal route.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

GEQ (graphic EQ) functions

Using the internal 31 band graphic EQ on the output channels

GEQ PARAMETER

[Function]

In this screen you can make settings for the twenty-four 31-band graphic EQ modules that are provided for

insertion into input/output channels. Here you can assign signal routes, specify the boost/cut amount for

each band, and make notch ﬁlter settings, etc.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the [GEQ] switch (press

repeatedly until the screen shown at

the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → GEQ button →

GEQ PARAMETER tab

[Screen functions]

1 MODULE

Select the desired module of the twenty-four graphic

EQ modules (GEQ 1–GEQ 24).

When you click this button, the GEQ SELECT popup

window will appear.

2 INSERT

Select the signal route into which this module will be

inserted.

When you click this button, the GEQ PATCH

SELECT popup window will appear.

The following signal routes can be selected.

• INPUT 1-96 INS

Insert In/Out of input channels 1–96

• MIX 1 INS–MIX 48 INS

Insert In/Out of MIX channels 1–48

• MTRX 1 INS – MTRX 24 INS

Insert In/Out of MATRIX channels 1–24

• ST A [L/R] INS

Insert In/Out of the STEREO A channel (L/R)

• ST B [L/R] INS

Insert In/Out of the STEREO B channel (L/R)

If you insert into the STEREO A/B channel or into a

pair of input channels or MIX channels, adjacent

odd-numbered → even-numbered modules will be

assigned automatically.

1 2 3 4

Global functions

However, if executing this would cause a module pre-

viously assigned to a different channel to be cancelled,

a popup window will appear, warning you of this.

If you select an input channel as the GEQ insert des-

tination, the INS. button of the corresponding chan-

nel will automatically be turned on in the IN PATCH

function INSERT/DIRECT POINT screen.

If you select an output channel as the GEQ insert

destination, the INS. button of the corresponding

channel will automatically be turned on in the OUT

PATCH function INSERT POINT screen.

3 GEQ ON/OFF

This button switches the currently displayed graphic

EQ on/off.

Hint

This button does not affect the notch ﬁlters (0).

4 LINK

This button links adjacent odd-numbered → even-

numbered GEQ modules.

5 Spectrum analyzer

This spectrum analyzer displays the level of each fre-

quency band in the input signal.

6 EQ graph

This graph shows the current frequency response of

the graphic EQ.

7 Faders

These faders boost/cut each frequency band of the

graphic EQ. The amount of boost/cut is shown in the

numerical box below.

Hint

The allowable maximum range and direction of

change for the faders will depend on the setting of

the LIMIT parameter (8).

A red line displayed in the knob portion of the fader

indicates that it can currently be controlled by the

DCA faders of the CS1D.

8 LIMIT

This button sets the allowable maximum range and

direction of change for the faders.

You can ±15 dB, ±12 dB, ±6 dB (for both boost or

cut), or –24 dB (for cut only).

9 EQ FLAT

This button resets the faders of all bands to the 0 dB

position.

0 NOTCH 1–4

These are four notch ﬁlters that operate on the signal

route selected by INSERT (2).

Use the NOTCH 1–NOTCH 4 buttons to switch each

ﬁlter on/off, use the Q knob to adjust the steepness,

and use the F knob to adjust the center frequency.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

GEQ (graphic EQ) functions

Hint

Notch ﬁlters 1–4 are independent of the graphic EQ,

and are not affected by the GEQ ON/OFF button.

After recalling a graphic EQ module, you can turn off

the graphic EQ, and use only the notch ﬁlters if

desired.

A GEQ LIBRARY (graphic EQ library)

This button accesses the GEQ LIBRARY popup win-

dow, in which you can store/recall the settings of the

GEQ PARAMETER screen (including the notch ﬁl-

ters). (→p.192)

B Level meters

These level meters show the peak levels before and

after the graphic EQ.

C ASSIGN TO DCA FADERS

This button allows the 31 bands of the graphic EQ to

be divided into 12-band groups and assigned to the

DCA faders of the CS1D top panel, so that the faders

can be used to control the boost/cut amount of each

band.

1) 1.60 k–20.0 k button

When you click this button, the 12 bands from

1.6 kHz–20 kHz will be assigned to the DCA fad-

ers.

2) 200–2.50 k button

When you click this button, the 12 bands from

200 Hz–2.5 kHz will be assigned to the DCA fad-

ers.

3) 20-250 button

When you click this button, the 12 bands from

20 Hz–250 Hz will be assigned to the DCA faders.

4) OFF button

When you click this button, assignments to the

DCA faders will be cancelled.

Hint

When you click one of the above buttons 1)–3) in the

GEQ PARAMETER screen, the FADER STATUS

switches in the DCA block of the CS1D will function

as graphic EQ band switches. This state will remain

in effect until you click the OFF button.

When you click the OFF button in the GEQ PARAM-

ETER screen, the FADER STATUS switches will

revert to their normal function, and DCA faders 1–

12 will function as DCA group control faders.

The same result can be produced by pressing the

FADER STATUS [OFF] button of the CS1D.

• Using the FADER STATUS switches as band select

switches

Hint

While GEQ PARAMETER or the GEQ PARAMETER

popup window are accessed, you can hold down the

panel [SHIFT/GRAB] switch and press a FADER

STATUS switch [1-12]/[13-24]/[25-36] to produce

the same result as clicking on C.

10 11 12

FADER

STATUS

1–12

13–24

25–36

37–48

DCA

20–250

200–2.50k

1.60k–20.0k

OFF

Global functions

GEQ ASSIGN 1-12/13-24 (graphic EQ assign 1–12/13–24)

[Function]

This screen displays the GEQ 1–24 settings, the signal routes in which they are inserted, and the input/output

levels.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION

ACCESS block, press the [GEQ]

switch (press repeatedly until the

screen shown at the right

appears)

■ Display

MENU button → GEQ button

→ GEQ ASSIGN 1-12/GEQ

ASSIGN 13-24 tab

[Screen functions]

1 Level meters

These level meters show the peak levels before and

after the graphic EQ.

2 Fader graph

This graph indicates the fader positions of each

band.

You can also click this portion to recall the GEQ

PARAMETER screen for the corresponding module.

3 Insert

This displays the signal route in which this module is

inserted, and the name of that channel.

You can also click the SEL button at the left and select

the signal route.

4 Module number

This is the graphic EQ module number.

If adjacent odd-numbered → even-numbered mod-

ules are linked, the LINK indicator will light.

5 GEQ ON/OFF button

This switches the GEQ on/off.

6 DISPLAY ORDER REVERSE button

This button reverses the order of the GEQs. By

default, the GEQs are arranged in ascending order

from bottom to top, but will be arranged in ascend-

ing order from top to bottom when you turn on this

button.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

GEQ (graphic EQ) functions

[Procedure]

Copying GEQ settings to an input channel

within the same tab (Example: copying from

GEQ1 to GEQ6)

1. Drag the mini-graph from the copy source input

channel and drop it onto the copy destination input

channel.

A window will appear, asking you to conﬁrm the

copy. To execute the copy, click the OK button. To

cancel, click the CANCEL button.

2. Click the OK button, and the settings will be cop-

ied.

Copying GEQ settings to an input channel

located in a different tab (Example: copying

from GEQ9 to GEQ22)

1. Drag the mini-graph from the copy source input

channel onto the tab of the copy destination.

It is not possible to copy the data by dropping it on

any screen other than the CH 1-24, CH 25-48, CH

49-72, CH 73-96 or ST IN 1-8 screens that are dis-

played when you press the INPUT [GEQ] switch in

the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block of the CS1D

console.

2. The copy destination tab screen will appear.

3. Drag and drop the mini-graph on the copy destina-

tion input channel.

A window will appear, asking you to conﬁrm the

copy. To execute the copy, click the OK button. To

cancel, click the CANCEL button.

4. Click the OK button, and the settings will be cop-

ied.

Global functions

SCENE functions

Operating scene memories

MEMORY

[Function]

Store mix parameters into a scene memory, or recall a previously-stored scene.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the [SCENE] switch

(press repeatedly until the screen

shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → SCENE button →

MEMORY tab

[Screen functions]

1 Scene list

This is a list of the scenes stored in scene memory.

If the EVENT RECALLING button is set to

“ENABLE” in the TC EVENT screen of the MIDI/

GPI/TC function, the buttons and LINK button

will be grayed and cannot be used.

You must ﬁrst set the EVENT RECALLING button

to “DISABLE.”

Each scene contains the following elements.

• No. (scene number)

This is the scene number. The scene numbers of the

PM1D consist of an integer portion of 00–99 and a

decimal portion of .0–.9, together covering a range of

00.0–99.9 to handle 1,000 scenes. Of these, new

scenes can be stored in numbers 01.0–99.9.

• TITLE

The name assigned to each scene

• PROTECT

This button switches protect on/off for each scene.

A scene for which Protect is on cannot be overwrit-

ten.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

SCENE functions

Hint

Numbers 00.0–00.9 contain scenes with various fac-

tory-preset settings. Since these preset scenes are

read-only and cannot be overwritten, the PROTECT

ﬁeld will indicate “READ ONLY.”

• LIBRARY LINK

This shows the number and library names for the

UNIT library, PATCH library, and NAME library

used by each scene.

• button

This button is used to select the UNIT library,

PATCH library, and NAME library used by that

scene. When you click this button, a popup window

will appear, allowing you to make a selection from

the corresponding library.

• LINK button

This button speciﬁes whether Recall operations of

the UNIT, PATCH, and NAME libraries will also

occur when a scene is recalled. Each scene of the

PM1D system stores only the number of the linked

UNIT, PATCH, or NAME library, rather than the

contents of the settings themselves. If there is a

library for which the LINK button is on when you

recall a scene, the library of the corresponding num-

ber will be recalled at the same time. Libraries whose

LINK button is off will not change when a scene is

recalled.

Hint

The scene that is highlighted in the scene list is cur-

rently selected for operations. To switch to a different

scene, directly click the line of the desired scene to

make the highlighted that line. To view scenes in the

list that are not currently visible, use the scroll bar

located at the right of the list.

By moving the scroll bar located at the bottom of the

list, you can view the date at which the scene was

stored and the COMMENT ﬁeld in which you can

input a comment for each scene.

2 RECALL FUNCTION

These buttons are used to store/recall scene memo-

ries.

If the EVENT RECALLING button is set to

“ENABLE” in the TC EVENT screen of the MIDI/

GPI/TC function, the STORE button, STORE

UNDO button, and TITLE EDIT button will be

grayed, and cannot be used. Before you can use

these operations, you must ﬁrst set the EVENT

RECALLING button to “DISABLE.”

• RECALL

The currently selected scene will be loaded into the

PM1D system.

• STORE

The current mix settings of the PM1D system will be

saved in the selected scene.

• UNDO

This button cancels the previously-performed recall

operation or store operation.

UNDO cannot be used if the PREVIEW button is

on.

UNDO will also become unavailable if you perform

the SORT operation or if you execute LOAD in the

UTILITY function LOAD/SAVE screen.

• PREVIEW

If this button is turned on, the PM1D system will be

placed in PREVIEW mode, so that you can view or

modify the settings of a scene in memory without

affecting the signal processing of the system.

This is linked with the SCENE MEMORY [PRE-

VIEW] switch in the SCENE MEMORY block of the

CS1D.

• TITLE EDIT

When you click the button, the SCENE TITLE EDIT

popup window will appear, in which you can edit the

title and comment for the currently selected scene.

You can also save the edited title and comment.

3 SORT

These buttons change the order of the scenes that are

saved in memory.

If the EVENT RECALLING button is set to

“ENABLE” in the TC EVENT screen of the MIDI/

GPI/TC function, the buttons of the SORT section

will be grayed, and cannot be used. Before you can

use these operations, you must ﬁrst set the EVENT

RECALLING button to “DISABLE.”

Undo will no longer be possible if you perform a

SCENE STORE/STORE UNDO operation or if you

exit the MEMORY screen.

3 4

Global functions

• CUT

Deletes the currently selected scene, and temporarily

saves it in the buffer memory.

The scenes following the deleted number will move

forward by one number.

If a certain scene is assigned to a Direct Recall [1]–

[12] switch, deleting that scene will also cause the

assignment to be cancelled. However, this will not

affect other scenes assigned to the Direct Recall [1]–

[12] switches or other scenes stored in the MIDI

PROGRAM screen or TC EVENT screen. (In some

cases, you may need to re-make the settings so that

these functions will operate correctly.)

• COPY

Copies the currently selected scene, and temporarily

saves it in the buffer memory.

The original scene will not be affected.

• CLEAR

Erases the currently selected scene.

Scenes of other numbers will not be affected.

• INSERT

Inserts the scene from the buffer memory at the cur-

rently selected location.

The scenes following the inserted scene will be

moved forward by one number.

If a scene is stored in number 99.9, the INSERT

button will be grayed and cannot be used.

BUFFER

MEMORY

SCENE

MEMORY

SCENE

01.8

SCENE

01.9

SCENE

02.0

SCENE

02.1

SCENE

MEMORY

SCENE

01.8

SCENE

01.9

SCENE

02.0

SCENE

02.1

BUFFER

MEMORY

CUT

Before

After

Click the CUT button

BUFFER

MEMORY

SCENE

MEMORY

SCENE

01.8

SCENE

01.9

SCENE

02.0

SCENE

02.1

SCENE

MEMORY

SCENE

01.8

SCENE

01.9

SCENE

02.0

SCENE

02.1

BUFFER

MEMORY

COPY

Before

After

Click the COPY button

SCENE

MEMORY

SCENE

01.8

SCENE

01.9

SCENE

02.0

SCENE

02.1

SCENE

MEMORY

SCENE

01.8

BLANK

01.9

SCENE

02.0

SCENE

02.1

CLEAR

Before

After

Click the CLEAR button

BUFFER

MEMORY

SCENE

MEMORY

SCENE

01.8

SCENE

01.9

SCENE

02.0

SCENE

02.1

SCENE

MEMORY

SCENE

01.8

SCENE

01.9

SCENE

02.0

SCENE

02.1

SCENE

BUFFER

MEMORY

INSERT

Before

After

Click the INSERT button

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

SCENE functions

• PASTE

Overwrites the scene from the buffer memory onto

the currently selected location.

Scenes of other numbers will not be affected.

The data can be only pasted into a blank scene (i.e., a

scene in which no data has been stored). If you wish

to paste into a scene that already contains data, you

must ﬁrst use the CLEAR button to erase the data.

• UNDO

Cancels the previously-executed Cut, Clear, Insert, or

Paste operation to return to the previous state.

4 SCENE INC/DEC (scene increment/decrement)

These buttons select the function of the SCENE

MEMORY [▼/DEC]/[▲/INC] switches located in

the SCENE MEMORY block of the CS1D.

• When the BLANK SKIP button is off

Each time you press the SCENE MEMORY [▼/

DEC]/[▲/INC] switches, the number shown in the

[SCENE NUMBER] indicator will increment or dec-

rement in steps of 0.1, regardless of whether or not

data has actually been saved.

In this state, repeatedly pressing the SCENE MEM-

ORY [s/INC] key will cause the displayed number to

change as shown below.

• When the BLANK SKIP button is on

Each time you press a SCENE MEMORY [▼/DEC]/

[▲/INC] switch, the number displayed in the

[SCENE NUMBER] indicator will increase or

decrease, skipping numbers in which no data has

been stored, including presets.

This sequence will continue between the highest

scene number that can be recalled and scene number

00.0.

In this state, repeatedly pressing the SCENE MEM-

ORY [▲/INC] key will cause the displayed number

to change as shown below.

[Procedure]

Storing a scene in the MEMORY screen

Here’s how to use the SCENE function MEMORY screen

to save the current mix settings as a new scene.

Before you perform the following procedure, make

sure that the PREVIEW button located in the

SCENE function MEMORY screen is turned off.

1. Use the CS1D panel controls and the on-screen

knobs and sliders to set the mix parameters.

2. Access the SCENE function MEMORY screen, and

select the scene number in which the data will be

saved.

When you click directly on the desired scene, the cur-

sor will move to that number. The newly selected scene

number will blink in the upper right of the display.

To see scenes that are not currently shown in the list,

use the scroll bar located at the right of the list.

3. Click the STORE button.

The SCENE STORE popup window will appear, in

which you can assign a title to the scene and save it.

Assign a title and comment to the scene as necessary.

BUFFER

MEMORY

SCENE

MEMORY

SCENE

01.8

BLANK

01.9

SCENE

02.0

SCENE

02.1

SCENE

MEMORY

SCENE

01.8

SCENE

01.9

SCENE

02.0

SCENE

02.1

SCENE

BUFFER

MEMORY

PASTE

Before

After

Click the PASTE button

00.0 00.1 00.2 00.3 00.4 00.5 00.6 00.7 00.8 00.9

01.0 01.1 01.2 01.3 01.4 01.5 01.6 01.7 01.8 01.9

02.0 02.1 02.2 02.3 02.4 02.5 02.6 02.7 02.8 02.9

03.0 03.1 03.2 03.3 03.4 03.5 03.6 03.7 03.8 03.9

Scene numbers that contain no data

Scene numbers that contain data

00.0 00.1 00.2 00.3 00.4 00.5 00.6 00.7 00.8 00.9

01.0 01.1 01.2 01.3 01.4 01.5 01.6 01.7 01.8 01.9

02.0 02.1 02.2 02.3 02.4 02.5 02.6 02.7 02.8 02.9

03.0 03.1 03.2 03.3 03.4 03.5 03.6 03.7 03.8 03.9

Scene numbers that contain no data

Scene numbers that contain data

Global functions

If the EVENT RECALLING button is set to

“ENABLE” in the TC EVENT screen of the MIDI/

GPI/TC function, the buttons of the SORT section

will be grayed, and cannot be used. Before you can

use these operations, you must ﬁrst set the EVENT

RECALLING button to “DISABLE.”

4. To execute the Store operation, click the STORE

button in the SCENE STORE popup window.

The current settings of the mix parameters will be

saved in the scene number you selected in step 2.

If there are any changes in a UNIT, PATCH, or

NAME library that is linked to that scene, a popup

window for the corresponding library will then

appear. Store the library as necessary. If you press

the [EXIT] button without storing, the linked

library number will remain the previously-linked

number.

If a UNIT, PATCH, or NAME library is stored in a

different number, the link destination will be auto-

matically stored as a new number when you store

the scene.

Hint

By clicking the STORE UNDO button, you can

return to the state prior to when the scene memory

was stored.

When you use the SCENE MEMORY [▼/DEC]/

[▲/INC] switches and the [STORE] switch to per-

form the Store operation, scene numbers that con-

tain no data will not be displayed if the BLANK

SKIP button is on.

Recalling a scene in the MEMORY screen

Here’s how to use the SCENE function MEMORY screen

to load a scene that was previously saved in memory.

Before you perform the following procedure, make

sure that the PREVIEW button located in the

SCENE function MEMORY screen is turned off.

1. Access the SCENE function MEMORY screen, and

select the scene number that you wish to recall.

The newly selected scene number will blink in the

upper right of the display.

2. Click the RECALL button.

The scene of the number you selected in step 1 will

be loaded.

Hint

By clicking the RECALL UNDO button, you can

return the mix parameters of the PM1D system to

the state prior to when the scene was recalled.

Using PREVIEW mode in the MEMORY screen

In the SCENE function MEMORY screen, you can click

the PREVIEW button to put the PM1D system in Pre-

view mode.

By using PREVIEW mode, you can view (or edit and

save) the scene, unit, patch, or name settings stored in

memory without affecting the internal signal processing

of the system.

1. Click the PREVIEW button to turn it on.

The PM1D system will enter Preview mode.

2. Select the scene number that you wish to load.

3. Click the RECALL button.

Only the settings of the scene you selected in step 2

will be loaded, and will be shown by the LEDs and

display of the CS1D panel.

However, the internal signal processing of the system

will remain unchanged from its state before you

recalled the scene.

Hint

You can also recall a speciﬁc channel to the

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block or SELECTED

OUTPUT CHANNEL block of the CS1D, and view a

speciﬁc screen in the display to see the settings in

detail.

4. Use the panel controls or the on-screen knobs and

faders to modify the mix parameters.

Even if you modify the mix parameter settings in

Preview mode, the internal signal processing of the

system will not be affected.

5. If you wish to save the changes you made in step 4,

select the store destination scene number as neces-

sary, and click the STORE button.

The SCENE STORE popup window will appear.

6. To execute the Store operation, click the STORE

button in the SCENE STORE popup window.

The values that you modiﬁed in step 4 will be stored

into memory.

7. To return the PM1D system to Normal mode, click

the PREVIEW button in the MEMORY screen once

again.

Hint

A scene memory contains all input and output func-

tions, and the EFFECT and GEQ global functions.

The short names/long names assigned to channels

and DCA groups are stored in the NAME library, the

patch data for channels and insert I/O is stored in the

PATCH library, and input/output jack information

such as head amp gain and phase is stored in the

UNIT library.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

SCENE functions

RECALL SAFE

[Function]

Select the channels, parameters, or units that you wish to set to Recall Safe (a state of being excluded from

Recall operations). For example if you have speciﬁed Recall Safe for a channel that you always want to operate

manually, the parameters of that channel will not change even if you recall a new scene.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION

ACCESS block, press the

[SCENE] switch (press repeat-

edly until the screen shown at the

right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → SCENE button

→ RECALL SAFE tab

[Screen functions]

1 SAFE ON/OFF buttons

These buttons turn Recall Safe on/off for each chan-

nel. This can be set for the following channels.

• CH 1–96 {1-48} ........Input channels 1–96 {1–48}

• ST IN 1–8 {1–4}........ST IN channels 1–8 {1–4}

• MIX 1–48..................MIX channels 1–48

• MTRX 1–24 ..............MATRIX channels 1–24

• ST A/B.......................STEREO A/B channels

Hint

Recall Safe on/off settings are also shown by the

RECALL SAFE LED on the control panel, and in the

INPUT CHANNEL VIEW screen and OUTPUT

CHANNEL VIEW screen.

2 SAFE PARAMETER SELECT buttons

For each channel, select the parameters that you wish

to set to Recall Safe. The following parameters can be

selected.

• ALL..................All parameters of that channel

• AT T ..................The ATT parameter of that channel

• EQ....................The EQ parameters of that channel

(except ATT)

• FADER ............The fader of that channel (includes

BALANCE for STEREO A/B)

• SEND/TO MTRX .... The SEND/TO MATRIX

parameters of that channel

(ON, LEVEL, PAN, PRE/

POST, PAN, PRE POINT)

• UNIT ........................ The parameters of the unit

patched to that channel (HA

GAIN GANG and HA A/B

LINK are included in ALL)

Simply turning on the above buttons does not enable

the Recall Safe function. To enable Recall Safe, you

must turn on the SAFE ON/OFF button (1) for the

corresponding channel.

However, Unit Recall Safe is independent of Channel

Recall Safe. For this reason, simply turning on the

UNIT button will exclude the corresponding unit

from recall operations even if the SAFE ON/OFF

button is off.

Global functions

Hint

You may select two or more parameters for the same

channel (except for ALL).

ALL will automatically be selected for channels for

which individual parameters are not selected.

• Selecting all parameters other than ALL will not

apply Recall Safe to all parameters of that channel. If

you want to protect all parameters of the channel,

you must select ALL.

• Even if a certain unit is set to Recall Safe, HA AB

LINK will not be subject to Recall Safe. Also, HA

GAIN GANG will operate according to the setting

prior to the recall operation. These are included in

ALL.

•

If the unit or card type is changed when a new scene or

unit library is recalled, the Recall Safe setting of that

unit will be defeated.

3 SET ALL

When you click this button, the SAFE PARAMETER

SELECT button of the corresponding parameter/unit

will be turned on for all channels.

If the SET ALL button is on, even units not dis-

played in this screen will all be set to Recall Safe. Be

aware that units not currently patched and units

that are patched to Insert will also be affected.

4 CLEAR ALL

When you click this button, the SAFE PARAMETER

SELECT button of the corresponding parameter/unit

will be turned off for all channels.

5 OTHERS

Using these buttons, elements other than the above

channel parameters can be selected for Recall Safe

status. The following parameters can be selected.

• DCA 1–12 ................ DCA groups 1–12

• GEQ 1–24................. Graphic EQ modules 1–24

• EFFECT 1–8............. Internal effects 1–8

• MUTE MASTER...... Turn all mute groups on/off

Recall Safe is not possible for GEQ and EFFECT

when an individual library is recalled.

It is not possible to specify Recall Save individually

for mute groups 1–12.

For parameters like those listed below of which there

is only one for a pair of two adjacent odd-numbered

→ even-numbered channel, Recall Safe will be valid

only if Recall Safe is set for both channels.

• HA GAIN GANG

• HA A/B LINK

• GATE LINK

• COMP LINK

• DELAY GANG

• PAN MODE

• GEQ LINK

Hint

In the case of two paired channels, a ST IN channel,

or the STEREO A/B channels, all settings that are set

to Recall Safe will be linked for both channels.

• Recall Safe is not possible if a scene is recalled during

PREVIEW.

• If Recall Safe is speciﬁed for either (not both) the

odd-numbered or even-numbered channel of two

channels, and you recall a scene in which these two

channels are paired, pairing will be forcibly defeated,

and the channel that was set to Recall Safe will main-

tain the state prior to the recall.

• For channels in which the SEND parameter is set to

Recall Safe, VARI PAN LINK will forcibly be defeated

when a new scene is recalled.

• If you specify Recall Safe for channels whose pairing

settings would be modiﬁed by a scene recall, the

SAFE PARAMETERS of both paired channels will be

forcibly handled as “ALL.”

• If a MIX channel that is set to Recall Safe has a differ-

ent mix type (VARI or FIX) before and after a scene

recall, the mix type prior to the recall will remain

valid.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

SCENE functions

FADE TIME

[Function]

Make settings for the Fade function that smoothly changes the faders until they reach the levels speciﬁed by a

newly selected scene.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION

ACCESS block, press the

[SCENE] switch (press repeat-

edly until the screen shown at the

right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → SCENE button

→ FADE TIME tab

[Screen functions]

1 FADE TIME

This knob speciﬁes the time over which the faders

(LEVEL parameters) will change to the new values

when a scene is selected. The range is 0.0 sec–60.0

sec.

The current setting is shown in the number box

immediately below.

2 FADING ENABLE

The Fade function will be enabled if this button is

on.

Global functions

3 SET ALL

This button turns on the fade function of all chan-

nels.

4 CLEAR ALL

This button clears all channels for which the Fade

function was enabled.

5 Channels

Select the channels that will use the Fade function,

from the following.

• INPUT 1–96 {1–48} ...Input channels 1–96 {1–48}

• ST IN 1–8 {1–4}..ST IN channels 1–8 {1–4}

• MIX 1–48............MIX channels 1–48

• MATRIX 1–24 ....MATRIX channels 1–24

• DCA 1–12 ...........DCA groups 1–12

• STEREO A/B ......STEREO A/B channels

6 INPUT CH PANNING ENABLE

If this button is on, the Fade function will also apply

to the PAN parameter of the input channels (input

channels and ST IN channels).

7 INPUT CH PANNING SELECT

These buttons select the channels for which the Fade

function will be enabled for the PAN parameter.

• When the ALL CH button is on

The Fade function will be enabled for the PAN

parameters of all input channels.

• When the SAME AS FADING button is on

The Fade function will be enabled for the PAN

parameters of only the input channels selected in 4.

The Fade function for the PAN parameter is valid

only for input channels and ST IN channels. This

will not function for MIX, STEREO A/B, MATRIX,

and DCA.

If you manually control a LEVEL or PAN parameter

while the corresponding parameter is being faded,

fading will be halted for that parameter.

If a scene with the same settings for the various

parameters is recalled while the LEVEL or PAN

parameters are being faded, the fade will be halted

and the parameters will change immediately to the

target values.

Hint

If you recall a scene for which a fade time has been

speciﬁed, the panel SCENE MEMORY NAME will

blink during the fade.

Change in how fade-time processing of each

channel is defeated

Up through PM1D system software v1.2, operating a

fader while the fade time was being executed caused

fade-time processing for that channel to be cancelled.

However since it is easy to operate a fader inadvertently,

this version of the software disables this automatic can-

cellation, in order to prevent accidents.

If you want to cancel fade-time processing as before,

operate the fader while holding down one of the follow-

ing:

• The [SHIFT/GRAB] switch of the data entry block

• The [SHIFT] switch in the CHANNEL SELECT sec-

tion of the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block

• The [SHIFT] switch in the CHANNEL SELECT sec-

tion of the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

SCENE functions

DIRECT RECALL

[Function]

Make settings for the Direct Recall function that allows you to use the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches

(SCENE MEMORY block) of the CS1D to directly recall speciﬁc scenes.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the [SCENE] switch

(press repeatedly until the screen

shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → SCENE button →

DIRECT RECALL tab

[Screen functions]

1 MODE

These buttons select the function of the SCENE

MEMORY [1]–[12] switches.

• When the DIRECT RECALL button is on

The SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches will func-

tion as direct recall switches that directly recall the

twelve previously-assigned scenes.

• When the MUTE MASTER button is on

The SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches will func-

tion as mute master switches that turn muting on/off

for mute groups 1–12.

2 DIRECT RECALL ASSIGN

This list shows the scenes that are assigned to the

SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches.

To assign a scene, click this list, and select the num-

ber of the switch for the desired assign destination.

(The cursor will move to that line and displayed in

reverse.)

3 ASSIGN

When you click this button, the scene you selected in

5 will be assigned to the switch you selected in 2.

4 NO ASSIGN

No scene will be assigned to the SCENE MEMORY

[1]–[12] switch selected in 2. (The corresponding

switch will have no function.)

Global functions

5 SCENE MEMORY

From this list you can select the scene memory that

will be assigned.

Click the line for the desired scene, and it will be

selected.

To display a scene that is not currently shown in the

list, use the scroll bar at the right of the list.

[Procedure]

Assigning a scene to a SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12]

switch

Here’s how to assign a scene to each switch so that the

SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches of the CS1D can be

used to recall scenes directly.

1. Access the SCENE function DIRECT RECALL

screen. In the DIRECT RECALL ASSIGN list, click

the line for the desired number to select the switch

to which the scene will be assigned.

2. In the SCENE MEMORY list, click the line for the

desired scene to select the scene that will be

assigned.

To display scenes that are not currently displayed in

the list, use the scroll bar at the right of the list.

3. Click the ASSIGN button.

The scene you selected in step 2 will be assigned to

the switch you selected in step 1.

4. Repeat steps 1–3 to assign the desired scenes to the

SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches.

5. To use the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches as

direct recall switches, click the DIRECT RECALL

button to turn it on.

The SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] LED (SCENE

MEMORY block) of the CS1D will light. In this con-

dition, you can press SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12]

switches to recall the previously-assigned scenes.

Hint

The function of the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12]

switches can also be changed in the IN DCA/MUTE

function MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen, and in the

OUT DCA/MUTE function MUTE GROUP

ASSIGN screen.

The SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches are

assigned scene memory numbers – not the actual

content of the scenes themselves. For this reason if

the content of one of these scenes has been

changed, the content that is recalled by the direct

recall function will also change accordingly.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

MIDI/GPI/TC function

Make MIDI/GPI/time code -related settings

MIDI PROGRAM (MIDI program change)

[Function]

When a MIDI program change is received from an external device, the event (scene recall/effect recall) that

you speciﬁed for that program number will be executed.

Also, when the corresponding event is executed on the CS1D, a MIDI program change message will be trans-

mitted to the external device.

This function will operate only while the CS1D and DSP1D are connected and operating.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the [MIDI/GPI/TC]

switch (press repeatedly until the

screen shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → MIDI/GPI/TC

button → MIDI PROGRAM tab

[Screen functions]

1 MIDI PORT TX/RX (MIDI transmission/reception

port)

From the following choices, select the port that will

transmit (TX) or receive (RX) MIDI program change

messages.

• CONSOLE ......... The MIDI IN/OUT connectors

on the rear panel of the CS1D

• ENGINE A ......... The MIDI IN/OUT connectors

of the DSP1D-EX {DSP1D} con-

nected to the ENGINE A con-

nector of the CS1D

• ENGINE B ......... The MIDI IN/OUT connectors

of the DSP1D-EX {DSP1D} con-

nected to the ENGINE B connec-

tor of the CS1D

• OFF..................... MIDI messages will not be trans-

mitted or received

Hint

You can specify different ports for transmission and

reception.

Global functions

2 ECHO

If this button is on, the program change message

received at the MIDI IN connector will be echoed-

back from the MIDI OUT connector.

3 MIDI MODE

These buttons select one of the following two modes

by which program changes will be transmitted and

received.

• Single mode (when the SINGLE button is on)

In this mode, program changes will be transmitted/

received using a single MIDI channel.

In this mode, program changes 1–128 that are

received on the MIDI channel (RX CH) speciﬁed by

the RX CH knob (7) will execute the event that has

been assigned to each program number.

When you execute the corresponding event on the

CS1D, a program change 1–128 will be transmitted

to an external device on the MIDI channel (TX CH)

speciﬁed by the TX CH knob (6).

If this mode is selected, turning the BANK button

(5) on will allow more selections (a maximum of

2,048) to be made using a single MIDI channel than

would be possible when using program changes 1–

128 alone.

• Multi mode (when the MULTI button is on)

In this mode, program changes will be transmitted/

received using multiple MIDI channels.

In this mode, program changes 1–128 that are

received on MIDI channels 1–16 will execute the

event that has been assigned to each MIDI channel/

program number.

When you execute the corresponding event on the

CS1D, a program change 1–128 will be transmitted

to an external device on a MIDI channel 1–16.

In Multi mode, the OMNI button (4), BANK ON/

OFF button (5), and TX CH/RX CH knobs (67)

will have no effect.

4 OMNI

If this button is on when Single mode is selected,

program change messages can be received on all

MIDI channels.

If Multi mode is selected, this button will have no

effect.

Do not confuse Single mode/OMNI=ON with

Multi mode. When the OMNI button is on, only

the events assigned to program changes 1–128 of

the RX CH can be executed.

5 BANK (bank select)

If this button is on when Single mode is selected,

Bank Select messages can be transmitted/received.

When messages are received in the sequence of Bank

Select 1–16 → Program Change 1–128 on the RX

CH, the events assigned to the corresponding bank

number/program number will be executed.

When the corresponding event is executed on the

CS1D, messages will be transmitted on the TX CH in

the sequence of Bank Select 1–16 → Program

Change 1–128.

If Multi mode is selected, this button has no effect.

6 TX CH (transmit channel)

If Single mode is selected, this knob selects the MIDI

transmit channel.

If Multi mode is selected, this knob has no effect.

7 RX CH (receive channel)

If Single mode is selected, this knob selects the MIDI

receive channel.

If Multi mode is selected, this knob has no effect.

8 INITIALIZE

This button initializes the events assigned to the pro-

gram change numbers.

Hint

The following table shows the MIDI channels and types of message that can be transmitted/received in Single mode

or Multi mode.

MIDI mode OMNI BANK

MIDI channels that

can be received

MIDI channels that

can be transmitted

Messages that can be transmitted/received

BANK SELECT PROGRAM CHANGE

Single

OFF OFF RX CH only TX CH only -- 1–128

ON OFF CH 1–16 TX CH only -- 1–128

OFF ON RX CH only TX CH only 1–16 1–128

ON ON CH 1–16 TX CH only 1–16 1–128

Multi -- -- CH 1–16 CH 1–16 -- 1–128

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

MIDI/GPI/TC function

9 List

This list shows the event (scene recall/effect recall)

that is assigned to each program change number.

• CH

This is the MIDI channel on which the program

change will be transmitted/received.

In Single mode when the BANK button is on, the

number in this column will indicate the bank num-

ber.

• PGM No.

This shows the program number 1–128.

Be aware that some external devices may display the

program number as 0–127. When transmitting

program changes from such an external device to

the PM1D system, add 1 to the program number.

• PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT

This shows the event that will be executed when the

program number of the corresponding MIDI chan-

nel is received.

When you click the button in the list, a popup

window will appear in which you can select the event

to be assigned to that program number.

When the event displayed in this column is executed

on the CS1D, the program change of the correspond-

ing MIDI channel will be transmitted.

[Procedure]

Executing a speciﬁc event when a given pro-

gram change is received

Here’s how to make settings so that when a given pro-

gram change message is received from an external

device, the speciﬁc event (scene recall/effect recall)

assigned to that program change message will be exe-

cuted.

1. Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the external

device to the [MIDI IN] connector of the CS1D or

to the [MIDI IN] connector of the DSP1D-EX

{DSP1D}.

2. Access the MIDI/GPI/TC function MIDI PRO-

GRAM screen, and use the MIDI PORT buttons to

select the port at which you wish to receive the pro-

gram changes.

3. Turn on one of the MIDI MODE buttons to select

either Multi mode or Single mode as the program

change reception/transmission mode.

4. If you selected Single mode in step 2, use the TX

CH/RX CH knobs to specify the MIDI channels

that will be used to transmit and receive program

change messages. As necessary, turn on the OMNI

button or BANK button.

5. From the PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT list, select

the program number to which you wish to assign

an event, and click the button in that column.

A popup window will appear, in which you can select

the event to assign.

Global functions

Hint

If you selected Multi mode in step 3, you can use

MIDI channels 1–16/program changes 1–128.

If you selected Single mode in step 3, you can use

only program changes 1–128 of the MIDI channel

that is selected by the RX CH knob.

If you selected Single mode in step 3 and turned the

BANK button on, you can use bank select 1–16/pro-

gram changes 1–128 of the MIDI channel that is

selected by the RX CH knob. In this case, the number

shown in the CH column of the Program Change

Event list will be the bank number.

6. Click one of the following buttons to select the type

of event.

1) SCENE

Scene memory recall operation

2) EFFECT

Effect recall operation

3) NO ASSIGN

No event assignment

7. If you selected 1) in step 6, select the number of the

scene to be recalled from the list in the right side of

the popup window, and click the OK button.

8. If you selected 2) in step 6, use the buttons in the

lower left of the popup window to select the inter-

nal effect (1–8) that the recall operation will affect,

then use the list shown at the right to select the

effect library that will be recalled, and click the OK

button.

9. Repeat steps 5–8 until you have assigned all the

necessary events to program numbers.

10. Transmit program change (or bank select + pro-

gram change) messages from the external device on

the appropriate MIDI channel.

The event assigned to that program number will be

executed.

Hint

Program changes can also be transmitted from the

PM1D system to an external device. To do so, con-

nect the MIDI OUT connector of the CS1D or

DSP1D-EX {DSP1D} to the MIDI IN connector of

the external device, and execute the event on the

CS1D that was assigned to the program number in

step 9.

If the same event is assigned to more than one pro-

gram number, the lowest-numbered program change

will be transmitted.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

MIDI/GPI/TC function

TC EVENT (time code event)

[Function]

When LTC time code received from an external device (or time code generated within the CS1D) reaches a

certain time, the speciﬁed scene will be recalled.

This function will operate only while the CS1D and DSP1D are connected and operating.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the [MIDI/GPI/TC]

switch (press repeatedly until the

screen shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → MIDI/GPI/TC

button → TC EVENT tab

[Screen functions]

1 EVENT RECALLING (event recall on/off)

This button speciﬁes whether or not the scene recall

will be executed when the received time code (or the

internally generated time code) reaches the speciﬁed

location.

Be aware that while this button is set to “ENABLE”, it

is not possible to store scenes, units, patches or

names, or to load memory card data.

2 TIME CODE IN

These buttons select the time code source. You can

select from the following sources.

• CONSOLE ......Time code (LTC) will be received

from the [TIME CODE IN] con-

nector of the CS1D.

• ENGINE A ......Time code (LTC) will be received

from the [TIME CODE IN] con-

nector of the DSP1D-EX {DSP1D}

connected to the ENGINE A con-

nector of the CS1D.

• ENGINE B.......Time code (LTC) will be received

from the [TIME CODE IN] con-

nector of the DSP1D-EX {DSP1D}

connected to the ENGINE B con-

nector of the CS1D.

• INT GEN.........The time code generated by the

PM1D system itself will be used.

The instant you click this button,

the time code internally generated

by the PM1D will start at the time

speciﬁed by INT GEN START

TIME (4).

Global functions

• OFF ................. Click this button if you do not wish

to use time code. No time code will

be received from outside, and time

code will not be displayed in this

screen or in the meter bridge block.

3 FRAME RATE

Select the frame rate of the received time code (or the

internally generated time code) from the following.

• 24.........................24 frames/second

• 25.........................25 frames/second

• 29.97 ND.............29.97 frames/second (non-drop)

• 29.97 DF .............29.97 frames/second (drop

frame)

• 30 ND..................30 frames/second (non-drop)

• 30 DF...................30 frames/second (drop frame)

4 OFFSET

This knob sets an offset value which speciﬁes a for-

ward or backward adjustment to the timing at which

recall will occur, relative to the received time code.

The offset value can be adjusted in hour: minute:

second: frame units.

5 INT GEN START TIME (Internal time code start

time)

When the INT GEN button (2) is on, this speciﬁes

the starting time of the internally-generated time

code.

6 CAPTURE (time code capture)

This button captures time code. When time code is

being received from an external device (or being gen-

erated internally), you can click the CAPTURE but-

ton to add that time (displayed at the left of the

CAPTURE button) to the SCENE MEMORY list

(7).

7 List

This lists the captured time codes.

When you click the button, a TC EVENT popup

window will appear, in which you can select the

scene to which the captured time code will be

assigned.

8 ADD

This button adds a new time code to the SCENE

MEMORY list.

9 DELETE

Of the time code or scene memories registered in the

SCENE MEMORY list, this button deletes the cur-

rently-highlighted one.

0 ALL DELETE

This button deletes all time code/scene memory

items that were registered in the SCENE MEMORY

list.

The FRAME RATE button or the OFFSET, INT

GEN, and START TIME knobs can be operated

only while “OFF” is selected in the TIME CODE IN

section.

The CAPTURE, ADD, DELETE, and ALL DELETE

buttons can be operated only while the EVENT

RECALLING button is set to “DISABLE.”

[Procedure]

Capturing the time code and assigning a scene

to be recalled at that time

1. Connect the time code output connector of the

external device to the [TIME CODE IN] connector

of the CS1D or to the [TIME CODE IN] connector

of the DSP1D-EX {DSP1D}.

2. Access the MIDI/GPI/TC function TC EVENT

screen, and in the TIME CODE IN section, click the

button for the connector to which the external

device was connected in step 1.

3. Use the FRAME RATE buttons to select the frame

rate of the time code that is being received.

4. Start time code output on the external device.

The currently-received time code will be displayed in

realtime in the TIME CODE CAPTURE section of

the TC EVENT screen.

5. At each moment that you wish to recall a scene,

click the CAPTURE button.

Each time you click the CAPTURE button, the time

at that instant will be added to the list immediately

below.

If an event is already registered at the same time loca-

tion, the original event will take priority.

8 9 0

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

MIDI/GPI/TC function

6. When you have captured each of the desired time

locations, stop time code output on the external

device.

7. In the list, click the button in the line of the ﬁrst-

captured time code.

The TC EVENT popup window will appear, in which

you can select scene memories.

8. Use the buttons in the RECALL SCENE area to

select the scene that you wish to recall, as described

below.

• DIRECT

Recall a speciﬁc scene number. If this button is

turned on, you must use the SCENE NO. knob

located at the right to specify the scene number that

you wish to recall.

If you specify a scene number that has not been

stored, that event will be ignored.

• INC

Recall the scene that follows the scene number that

was stored/recalled immediately before starting TC

EVENT.

However, scene numbers that have not been stored

will be skipped. Also, this will be ignored if the range

of scene memory numbers (maximum 99.9) is

exceeded.

• DEC

Recall the scene that precedes the scene number that

was stored/recalled immediately before starting TC

EVENT.

However, scene numbers that have not been stored

will be skipped. Also, scene numbers preceding 01.0

will not be recalled.

• DISABLE

The corresponding event will be disabled.

9. If necessary, use the knobs of the TIME CODE area

to make ﬁne adjustments to the captured time code

location.

10. Repeat steps 7–8 until the desired scenes have been

assigned to each of the time codes that you cap-

tured.

11. Click the EVENT RECALLING button to set it

ENABLE.

12. Once again, start time code output on the external

device.

Each time a time location in the list is reached, the

corresponding scene will be recalled.

Global functions

UTILITY functions

Initial settings for the PM1D system, and loading/saving data or libraries

PREFERENCE

[Function]

Make initial settings for the PM1D system.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the [UTILITY] switch

(press repeatedly until the screen

shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → UTILITY button

→ PREFERENCE tab

[Screen functions]

1 MOUSE

Make settings for the track pad built into the CS1D

and for the mouse connected to the [MOUSE] con-

nector.

On the included software “PM1D Manager for

Windows,” this setting has no effect.

• TAPPING

Select whether or not tapping the built-in track pad

(as a substitute for clicking) will be enabled.

• SPEED

This knob speciﬁes the speed at which the pointer

will be moved by the built-in track pad of the CS1D

or by the mouse connected to the [MOUSE] connec-

tor. You can select from four levels: 1–4.

2 LED BRIGHTNESS

This knob speciﬁes the brightness of the LEDs of the

CS1D.

You can select from seven levels: 1–7.

3 GATE/COMP GR METER ON/OFF LINK (Gate/

compressor GR meter on/off link)

If this button is on, the GR meters in the screen and

on the CS1D panel will be either visible or hidden

depending on the on/off status of the internal com-

pressor.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

UTILITY functions

4 AUTO DISPLAY ON/OFF

These buttons specify whether or not the corre-

sponding screen will appear in the display when you

move a particular controller in the SELECTED

INPUT CHANNEL/SELECTED OUTPUT CHAN-

NEL block on the CS1D.

The controllers corresponding to each button and

the screens that appear are as follows.

These functions will not operate if a popup window

is displayed.

5 CONFIRMATION ON/OFF

This button speciﬁes whether or not a conﬁrmation

message will appear when you perform certain oper-

ations on the CS1D.

Each button corresponds to the following operations.

Even if the RECALLING button is turned on, the

scene will be recalled without a conﬁrmation mes-

sage in the following cases.

• Recall by MIDI program change

• Recall from the TC EVENT screen

• Direct recall

• Recall using a USER DEFINE switch

6 WARNING MESSAGES ON/OFF

These buttons specify whether or not a warning mes-

sage will appear if an error occurs in the connection

between the PM1D system and an external device.

Each button corresponds to the following errors.

7 INTERNAL CALENDAR/CLOCK

These buttons set the year/month/day of the PM1D sys-

tem’s internal calendar and the time of its internal clock.

Use the knobs to set the date or time, and press the SET

button to apply the new date and time.

On the included PC software, the SET switch has

no effect, and it is not possible to change the date or

time. (The internal calendar and clock settings of

the computer will be displayed.)

8 BATTERY

This displays the remaining amount of the internal

batteries for the console and engine A/B (DSP1D-EX

{DSP1D}.

When the battery runs down, the display will indi-

cate “EMPTY.”

[Procedure]

Setting the date of the internal calendar or the

time of the internal clock

1. Access the UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen,

and use the six knobs of the INTERNAL CALEN-

DAR/CLOCK section to set the date and time.

2. To ﬁnalize the new date and time, click the SET button.

The instant you click the SET button, the new date

and time will take effect. If you click the CANCEL

button instead of the SET button, the date and time

will revert to the original settings.

Button Controller Selected screen

INSERT/UNIT

button

[INSERT] switch INSERT/DIRECT

VIEW or

INSERT VIEW

UNIT-related controller HA/INSERT

EQ button ATT, EQ-related con-

trollers

EQ PARAMETER

GATE/COMP

button

Gate/compressor-

related controllers

GATE PRM /

COMP PRM

DELAY button Delay-related control-

lers

IN DELAY / OUT

DELAY

ROUTING

button

Routing-related con-

trollers

PAN/ROUTING /

MATRIX/ST or OUT

CH VIEW

FADER button Input/output channel

faders and [ON] switch

IN CH VIEW / OUT

CH VIEW

CUE/SOLO

button

Input/output channel

[CUE] switches

IN CH VIEW / OUT

CH VIEW

OSCILLATOR

button

[OSC ON] switch,

[OSC OUT] switch

OSCILLATOR

Button Operation

PATCH button Patching changes in the OUT PATCH

screen/IN PATCH screen

RECALLING button Scene or library recall operations

STORING button Scene or library store operations

Button Error

TC DROP A drop-out has occurred in the time code.

DIGITAL I/O A word clock that is not synchronized with the

PM1D system was input.

Global functions

USER DEFINE

[Function]

Assign the function to be executed by the USER DEFINE [1]–[8] switches in the USER DEFINE block of the

CS1D.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the [UTILITY] switch

(press repeatedly until the screen

shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → UTILITY button

→ USER DEFINE tab

[Screen functions]

1 Buttons

When you click these buttons, the USER DEFINE

KEY SETUP popup window will appear, where you

can select the function that will be assigned to the

USER DEFINE [1]–[8] switches.

2 FUNCTION

This area displays the functions that are currently

assigned to the USER DEFINE [1]–[8] switches.

3 PARAMETER

Select the optional parameter for the function that

you selected in 2.

The functions and their parameters that can be

selected are as follows.

• NO ASSIGN

No function will be assigned. (The corresponding

switch will have no function.)

• SCENE RECALL (parameter: –1/+1)

Recall the scene of the previous (or next) number

from the currently selected scene.

• MONITOR A SOURCE SELECT

(parameter: 2TR IN 3–6, DIRECT, MIX 1–48,

MTRX 1–24)

• MONITOR B SOURCE SELECT

(parameter: 2TR IN 3–6, DIRECT, MIX 1–48,

MTRX 1–24)

As the source to be monitored by MONITOR A/B,

select 2TR IN 3–6, DIRECT, MIX 1–48, or MTRX 1–

24. You can select up to four sources for monitoring.

21 3

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

UTILITY functions

The LED of a USER DEFINE switch to which this

function is assigned will light when the currently

selected monitor source matches the parameter.

When you use the USER DEFINE [1]–[8] switches

to change the monitor source, the MONITOR A

SOURCE switch and MONITOR B SOURCE

switch of the CS1D will have no effect until the next

time you select the monitor source from the panel.

• PAGE SELECT (parameter: PREVIOUS, NEXT,

LAST)

Access the speciﬁed screen in the display.

PREVIOUS: The last-selected screen within the same

function will be displayed.

NEXT: The next screen within the same function will

be displayed.

LAST: The last-selected screen will be displayed once

again.

• BOOKMARK

Access the screen that was last bookmarked. The LED

of a USER DEFINE switch to which this function is

assigned will light when a screen has been memo-

rized. Also, when the functions of the USER DEFINE

[1]–[8] switches are shown at the bottom of the dis-

play, the name of the screen memorized as a book-

mark will be displayed at the location of the

corresponding switch.

To register a screen, press and hold the correspond-

ing USER DEFINE switch for two seconds or longer.

If you release your hand in less than two seconds, the

last-registered screen will be recalled.

[Procedure]

Assigning a function to the USER DEFINE [1]–[8]

switches

1. Access the UTILITY function USER DEFINE

screen.

2. From the USER DEFINE [1]–[8] switches, select the

switch to which you wish to assign a function, and

click the button for that number.

The following USER DEFINE KEY SETUP popup

window will appear.

3. From the list in the FUNCTION section, select the

function that you wish to assign.

4. As necessary, click a button in the PARAMETER

section to select the parameter.

5. Click the OK button.

6. Repeat steps 2–5 until you have assigned the

desired functions to the USER DEFINE [1]–[8]

switches.

7. To execute an assigned function, press one of the

USER DEFINE [1]–[8] switches in the USER

DEFINE block.

Hint

The functions assigned to the USER DEFINE [1]–[8]

switches can also be executed in the display. To do so,

click the USER DEFINE button located at the lower

left of the screen to display the USER DEFINE 1–8

buttons, and click the desired button.

• USER DEFINE buttons

Display the USER DEFINE 1–8 buttons in the lower

part of the screen

Global functions

LOAD/SAVE

[Function]

Load scene or library data stored on a PC ATA ﬂash storage card into the PM1D system, or save scene or

library data from the PM1D system to a PC ATA ﬂash storage card.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the [UTILITY] switch

(press repeatedly until the screen

shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → UTILITY but-

ton

→ LOAD/SAVE tab

[Screen functions]

1 SLOT A/B

These buttons select whether the memory card

inserted into slot A or B will be the subject of the

operation.

If you switch the SLOT A/B buttons when a memory

card is inserted into both slots, the list of ﬁles for

each card will change accordingly.

On the included software “PM1D Manager for

Windows,” the DRIVE button will be displayed in

this location, allowing you to select the drive for

saving/loading.

2 SAVING MEMORY SELECT (select item to save)

These buttons select the item(s) to be saved to the

memory card. Use these buttons to select the item(s)

that you wish to save (you may select more than

one). Then click the SAVE button (8) to save the

corresponding item(s) to the memory card.

The following items can be selected

• SCENE MEMORY.. Scene memory contents

• SETUP..................... Internal parameters not

stored in a scene, template

name list

• TC EVENT .............. Settings of the MIDI/GPI/TC

function TC EVENT screen

• MIDI PROGRAM .. Settings of the MIDI/GPI/TC

function MIDI PROGRAM

screen

• UNIT LIBRARY/PATCH LIBRARY/NAME

LIBRARY/INPUT CH LIBRARY/OUTPUT CH

LIBRARY/INPUT EQ LIBRARY/OUTPUT EQ

LIBRARY/INPUT GATE LIBRARY/INPUT

COMP LIBRARY/OUTPUT COMP LIBRARY/

EFFECT LIBRARY/GEQ LIBRARY

The contents of the corresponding library

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

UTILITY functions

3 From No./To No. (specify range)

These knobs specify the range (numbers) of the

scene memories in SAVING MEMORY SELECT (2)

that will be affected by the operation.

Use the From No. knob to specify the ﬁrst number,

and the To No. knob to specify the last number.

4 SELECT ALL

Select all items of the SAVING MEMORY SELECT

section (2).

5 CLEAR ALL (clear all selections)

De-select all items in the SAVING MEMORY

SELECT section (2).

6 FILE SIZE

Display the estimated size required to save the items

selected in the SAVING MEMORY SELECT section

(2).

The value shown in the FILE SIZE ﬁeld assumes

that data is saved in all areas of the speciﬁed range

of scene memories and libraries. For this reason,

the actual ﬁle size may be different than this num-

ber.

7 File list

This will show a list of the ﬁles on the item that was

selected in (1). For each ﬁle, the following items will

be displayed.

• FILE NAME

This is a ﬁlename of up to 8 characters.

• TYPE

This indicates the type of ﬁle.

The following types can be selected.

• ALL .................... All contents of scene memories,

libraries, SETUP, TC EVENT,

and MIDI PROGRAM.

• COMPOSITE

.... A portion of the scene memo-

ries/libraries (a ﬁle saved by

using the From No. knob and To

No. knob to specify the range)

• Other ................. A ﬁle in which only a speciﬁc

item was saved

• DATE/SIZE

The date and time at which the ﬁle was last saved.

• COMMENT

The comment added when the ﬁle was saved.

Hint

Use the scroll bar located below to switch between

COMMENT and DATE/SIZE.

By using the buttons in the top line of the list, you

can select how the ﬁles in the list will be sorted. You

can specify that the ﬁles be sorted in the order of

their FILE NAME (alphabetically), TYPE (by type),

DATE/SIZE (by date), or COMMENT (alphabeti-

cally).

8 Button

Use these buttons to select the operation that you

wish to execute. The following operations can be

selected.

Global functions

• SAVE

Save the selected PM1D internal data on a memory

card as a ﬁle.

• LOAD

Load the selected ﬁle from memory card.

• DELETE

Delete the selected ﬁle from memory card.

• VIEW

Check the contents of the selected ﬁle on memory

card.

In the ﬁle list (7), select one ﬁle that you wish to

view, and click the VIEW button. The contents of

that memory card ﬁle will be displayed.

9 Free space

This displays the free space (1 Kbyte = 1024 Bytes)

on the memory card selected in 1.

[Procedure]

Saving a ﬁle on a memory card

1. Insert a PC ATA ﬂash storage card into [PC] card

slot A or B, located on the top panel of the CS1D.

You can use either PCMCIA Type II ATA compati-

ble memory cards or compact ﬂash media inserted

into a PC card adapter (in either case, types with

3.3V/5V power supply voltage). Operation is not

guaranteed for other types of media.

Normally, the memory cards listed above are sold in

a formatted state. This means that you do not need

to format a card before using it on the PM1D sys-

tem.

If you need to format a card, use an external device

such as a computer to do so.

2. Access the UTILITY function LOAD/SAVE screen.

3. Click the SLOT A/SLOT B button to select the

memory card that you wish to use.

4. In the SAVING MEMORY SELECT section, click

the button for the item that you wish to save on the

memory card.

According to the item you select, a list of the ﬁles

saved on the memory card will be displayed.

5. If you selected scene memory or a library in step 4,

use the From No. knob and To No. knob to specify

the data that will be affected. (Alternatively, select

“ALL.”)

For example if in the DISPLAY SELECT section you

select scene memories, and set the From No. knob =

01.0 and the To No. knob = 02.9, the data saved in

scene memories 01.0–02.9 of the PM1D system will

be saved to the memory card. When you later load

this ﬁle from the memory card, the data will be

loaded into the identically-numbered scene memo-

ries of the PM1D system.

6. Click the SAVE button.

A popup window will appear, in which you can input

the ﬁlename and comment.

7. Assign a ﬁlename and comment as necessary, and

click the SAVE button.

The data you speciﬁed in steps 4–5 will be saved to

the memory card.

If you save (overwrite) using the same ﬁlename as

an existing ﬁle, the previous ﬁle will be deleted.

Once you have pressed the button to execute this

operation, never insert or remove a memory card in

the PC ATA storage card slot or turn off the power

of the CS1D. Doing so may damage the ﬁle.

Please be aware that the switches in the LED func-

tion section of the CS1D can not be operated while

the operation is executing.

If you press the [CANCEL] button while saving is

in progress, all ﬁles that had been written up to that

point will be deleted. Be aware that if you were sav-

ing by overwriting, the previous ﬁles will also be

deleted.

If the EVENT RECALLING button is set to

“ENABLE” in the MIDI/GPI/TC function TC

EVENT screen, the SAVE button will be grayed, and

data cannot be written.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

UTILITY functions

You must ﬁrst switch the EVENT RECALLING but-

ton to “DISABLE.”

If you format a card using a PC, format it as FAT16.

The CS1D supports only FAT16 and FAT12.

In order to store all data of the PM1D, you must use

a PC ATA storage card that has 32 Mbytes or more of

free area.

The following characters cannot be used in a ﬁle-

name. They will be ignored if you attempt to input

them. (Also, the SPACE character is unusable only

at the beginning of the ﬁlename.)

It is not possible to PASTE the ﬁlename into the

FILE SAVE popup window.

[Procedure]

Loading a ﬁle from memory card

1. Insert a PC ATA ﬂash storage card into [PC] card

slot A or B, located on the top panel of the CS1D.

2. Access the UTILITY function LOAD/SAVE screen.

3. From the list shown at the right, select the ﬁle that

you wish to load, and click it.

The cursor will move to that line.

4. Click the LOAD button.

The ﬁle you selected in steps 3 will be loaded from

the memory card into the PM1D system.

Once you have pressed the button to execute this

operation, never insert or remove a memory card in

the PC ATA storage card slot or turn off the power

of the CS1D. Doing so may damage the ﬁle.

Please be aware that the switches in the LCD func-

tion section of the CS1D can not be operated while

the operation is executing.

If the ﬁle being loaded has a type of ALL/COM-

POSITE, all or part of the PM1D scene memories/

libraries may be rewritten unexpectedly. Be sure

that you do not inadvertently erase important

scenes or libraries.

If the EVENT RECALLING button is set to

“ENABLE” in the TC EVENT screen of the MIDI/

GPI/TC function, the LOAD button will be grayed

and loading will not be possible.

You must ﬁrst switch the EVENT RECALLING but-

ton to “DISABLE.”

Be aware that if you press the [STOP] button while

a scene memory is being loaded, all settings that

would have been loaded will be cleared.

(SPACE) \ / : * ? "

< >|+=[];,.

Global functions

SYS/W.CLOCK (system/word clock) function

Make settings related to system/word clock

SYSTEM CONNECTION

[Function]

Here you can check connections between units in the PM1D system. You can also select the operation mode

that determines the operation of the entire system.

■ Console

IN the LCD FUNCTION

ACCESS block, press the [SYS/

W.CLOCK] switch (press repeat-

edly until the screen shown at the

right appears)

■ DisplayDisplay

MENU button → SYS/

W.CLOCK button → SYSTEM

CONNECTION tab

[Screen functions]

1 OPERATION MODE

Specify the system conﬁguration and connection

method of the console (CS1D) and engine (DSP1D-

EX {DSP1D}).

By clicking the button you can choose between

the following two modes.

Select the mode appropriate for the system conﬁgu-

ration or connections you are using.

• Console x 1 <–> Engine x 1

This is a system consisting of one console and one

engine.

If the engine is the DSP1D-EX, the system will oper-

ate with 96 monaural input channels. If the engine is

the DSP1D, the system will operate with 48 monau-

ral input channels.

• Console × 1 <–> Engine × 2 (Mirror Mode)

This is a system consisting of one console and two

engines in a mirrored connection.

In this mode, one of the two engines (A/B) performs

the actual signal processing, and the other is used as a

spare.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

SYS/W.CLOCK (system/word clock) function

If the engine currently in use develops a problem,

you can manually switch to the other unit. (For

details on mirror connection, refer to “CS1D Operat-

ing Manual (Start-up).”)

PM1D system version 1.0 does not support a 192-

channel operation mode using two engines.

2 Connection status

This indicates the state of connections between the

console and engine.

Light blue lines in the screen indicate control signal

connections (BNC connectors), and red lines indi-

cate digital audio signal connections (68 pin D-sub

connectors).

If both of the two sets of identical connectors (1/2)

on the rear panel of the console and engine are con-

nected, two lines will be shown in the screen.

At this time, the connector area of the transmitting

graphic will indicate the number of the connector

that is currently valid. (If the connection is broken,

an “x” symbol will be displayed instead of the num-

ber.)

The engine graphic will indicate the number of chan-

nels for that system. (If the connection between the

console and engine is broken, or if the engine is not

operating correctly, an “x” symbol will be added to

the A or B characters.

Hint

If both sets of connectors (1/2) are connected, con-

nector set 1 will be given priority when the power is

turned on.

If the currently enabled connector becomes unus-

able, the receiving device will automatically switch to

the other connector.

Digital audio signal output connectors 1/2 always

output the same signals. If the currently enabled con-

nector no longer provides a word clock, the receiving

device will automatically switch to the other connec-

tor.

Since a pair or control signal cables (BNC cables)

are required in order to function bi-directionally,

both cables of the pair must be connected correctly

for each connection.

PM1D system version 1.0 does not provide a way to

manually switch between the two sets of control

signals or digital signals.

3 INPUT UNIT

This shows the type of input units that are connected

to INPUT connectors 1–10 of engine A/B (DSP1D-

EX {DSP1D}).

When you click the name of a unit, the SYS/

W.CLOCK function INPUT UNIT screen will

appear, allowing you to view the type and operating

status of the cards connected to each unit.

4 OUTPUT UNIT

This shows the type of output units that are con-

nected to OUTPUT connectors 1–6 of engine A/B

(DSP1D-EX {DSP1D}).

When you click the name of a unit, the SYS/

W.CLOCK function OUTPUT UNIT screen will

appear, allowing you to view the type and operating

status of the cards connected to each unit.

A unit displayed in yellow indicates that it is virtu-

ally connected (→p.49).

A unit displayed in red indicates that the input unit

is connected to the connector of the output unit (or

vice versa).

23 4

Number of the

currently

enabled con-

nector

5 6

Global functions

Hint

If the state of unit connections differs from the

stored state, a popup window like the following will

appear.

This popup window will appear when a previously-

speciﬁed unit is no longer detected. If you click the

LEAVE IT AS A VIRTUAL UNIT button, the corre-

sponding unit will be changed to a virtual unit, and

the unit and patch settings will be maintained with-

out change. If you click the DISPATCH IT button,

the corresponding unit will be considered a blank

(empty) unit; the unit settings will be initialized and

the patch settings will be discarded.

This popup window will appear when a real unit

changes to an actual unit. When you click the OK

button, the unit settings will be initialized.

This popup window will appear when a virtual unit

changes to a real unit. If the real unit is of the same

type as the virtual unit, the unit and patch settings

will be maintained when you click the OK button. If

the real unit is different than the virtual unit, the unit

and patch settings will be discarded when you click

the OK button.

This popup window will appear when the system

detects a unit that is of a different type than previ-

ously remembered. The unit and patch settings will

be discarded when you click the OK button.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

SYS/W.CLOCK (system/word clock) function

INPUT UNIT

[Function]

This screen displays the type and operating status of the cards installed in an input unit. In this screen you can

also specify virtual connections of input units and cards, and make Recall Safe settings for a unit.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION

ACCESS block, press the [SYS/

W.CLOCK] switch (press repeat-

edly until the screen shown at the

right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → SYS/

W.CLOCK button → INPUT

UNIT tab

[Screen functions]

1 Selected unit

This displays the status of the currently selected

input unit.

The types of I/O card installed in that unit will be

shown by graphics.

When you select a card, the status of that card will be

displayed in the card settings window (6). The

selected card will be displayed with green shading.

The card will be displayed with shading if it is not

installed correctly, or if it is a card that cannot be

controlled.

2 IN1–IN10 buttons

The input unit displayed in 1 can be selected by

number using these buttons. When editing off-line,

you can select DSP1D-EX {DSP1D} INPUT jacks for

virtual connection to input units.

The input unit connected to [INPUT] connector 1 of

the DSP1D-EX will be displayed as “IN1,” the input

unit connected to [INPUT] connector 2 as “IN2,”

and so forth.

Global functions

Hint

A card with an indication of “VIRTUAL” on a yellow

background is virtually connected.

If a card is indicated as “ILLEGAL” on a red back-

ground, an input card is installed in an output unit

(or vice versa).

3 Card assignment buttons

These buttons are used to assign an I/O card to each

slot of the input unit. By clicking this button for a

slot in which no card has been installed, you can

assign a virtual card.

4 UNIT SELECT

This button is used to virtually connect a unit to the

jack selected by the IN 1 – IN 10 buttons.

5 UNIT LIBRARY

This button accesses the UNIT LIBRARY, where you

can store/recall setting data for an entire unit. This is

the same function as the UNIT LIBRARY button in

the ST IN INS/UNIT LIB screen (IN HA/INSERT

function).

6 Card type

This shows the type of I/O card installed in each slot

1–8 of the currently selected input unit.

7 Card settings window

The settings of the selected I/O card are displayed in

this area.

If an AD card with head amp (LMY2-ML) is selected,

you can switch phantom power on/off, switch the

phase, select between input jacks A/B, and adjust

input gain.

8 RECALL SAFE

Sets the Recall Safe status of the currently selected

unit. In this screen, Recall Safe can be turned on/off

for each input jack.

Hint

Recall Safe for a unit can be set independently from

channel Recall Safe. Operation is also independent.

• Even if the type of unit or card changes when a new

scene or a unit library is recalled, the Recall Safe set-

ting of that unit will be maintained.

• The card will be displayed with shading if it is not

installed correctly, or if it is a card that cannot be

controlled (except when the unit is the DIO8).

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

SYS/W.CLOCK (system/word clock) function

[Procedure]

Making virtual connections for an input unit

You can make virtual connections for input units or

cards that are not actually connected.

Virtual connections can be made only if a unit/card

is not actually connected.

1. Access the SYS/W.CLOCK function INPUT UNIT

screen.

2. Use the IN1–IN10 buttons to select the jack to

which the input unit will be virtually connected.

The IN1–IN10 buttons correspond respectively to

INPUT jacks 1–6 of the DSP1D-EX {DSP1D}.

3. To virtually connect a unit to the currently selected

jack, click the UNIT SELECT button.

UNIT SELECT popup window

The UNIT SELECT popup window will appear, in

which you can select the type of unit.

The following units can be selected in this window.

• AI8 (AI8 input unit)

• AI8-ML8 (an input unit in which eight mic/line

input cards are installed)

• AI8-ML4AD4 (an input unit in which four mic/

line input cards + four AD cards are installed)

• AI8-AD (an input unit in which eight AD cards

are installed)

• DIO8 1-4 (OUTPUT A jacks of DIO8 digital

input/output unit)

• DIO8 5-8 (OUTPUT B jacks of DIO8 digital

input/output unit)

• BLANK (no unit)

If you wish to independently use the OUTPUT A

jacks and OUTPUT B jacks of the DIO8 digital

input/output unit, you must set the PORT B

SELECTOR of the DIO8 to the 5-8 position. With

this setting, signals will be sent from the OUTPUT

A jacks to slots 1–4, and from the OUTPUT B jacks

to slots 5–8.

4. Click an icon to select the unit that you will connect

virtually.

If you select a unit of a different type than was speci-

ﬁed previously, a window will appear to warn you of

this. Click the OK button, and the patching that had

been speciﬁed for the previous unit will be defeated.

UNIT CONFLICT window warning that the unit has

been changed

Hint

Virtually connected units are shown by a yellow icon.

5. To virtually connect a card to the currently selected

unit, click the card assign button for the desired slot.

A list of the cards that can be installed in that unit

will be displayed.

6. Click the card that you wish to virtually connect.

Hint

Virtually-connected cards will be indicated by “VIR-

TUAL” displayed on a yellow background.

7. Make virtual connections for other units and cards

in the same way.

Hint

When the CS1D goes off-line, and the virtually-con-

nected units/cards differ from the physically-connected

units/cards, a popup window will appear, informing

you that the settings have been modiﬁed according to

the units/cards that are actually connected.

If in step 3 you selected the model name (AI8-ML8,

AI8-ML4AD4, AI8-AD8) of a unit in which a card is

already installed, it is not necessary to specify the card.

Global functions

OUTPUT UNIT

[Function]

Displays the type of card that is connected to the output unit. You can also use this screen to make virtual con-

nections for output units and cards.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION

ACCESS block, press the [SYS/

W.CLOCK] switch (press repeat-

edly until the screen shown at the

right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → SYS/

W.CLOCK button → OUTPUT

UNIT tab

[Screen functions]

1 Selected unit

This displays the status of the currently selected out-

put unit.

The types of I/O card installed in that unit will be

shown by graphics.

When you select a card, the status of that card will be

displayed in the card settings window (6). The

selected card will be displayed with green shading.

The card will be displayed with shading if it is not

installed correctly, or if it is a card that cannot be

controlled.

2 OUT1–OUT6 buttons

The output unit displayed in 1 can be selected by

number using these buttons. When editing off-line,

you can select DSP1D-EX {DSP1D} INPUT jacks for

virtual connection to output units.

The output unit connected to [OUTPUT] connector

1 of the DSP1D-EX will be displayed as “OUT1,” the

output unit connected to [OUTPUT] connector 2 as

“OUT2,” and so forth. The number of the currently

selected unit is indicated by the graphic in the screen.

1 3

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

SYS/W.CLOCK (system/word clock) function

Hint

A card with an indication of “VIRTUAL” on a yellow

background is virtually connected.

If a card is indicated as “ILLEGAL” on a red back-

ground, an input card is installed in an output unit

(or vice versa).

3 Card assignment buttons

These buttons are used to assign an I/O card to each

slot of the output unit.

By clicking this button for a slot in which no card has

been installed, you can assign a virtual card.

4 UNIT SELECT

This button is used to virtually connect an output

unit to the jack selected by the OUT 1 – OUT 6 but-

tons.

5 UNIT LIBRARY

This button accesses the UNIT LIBRARY window, in

which you can store/recall settings for all units. This

is the same function as the UNIT LIBRARY button in

the ST MAS INS/UNIT LIB screen of the OUT

INSERT function.

6 Card type

This shows the type of I/O card installed in each slot

1–8 of the currently selected output unit.

7 Card settings window

The settings of the selected I/O card are displayed in

this area.

[Procedure]

Making off-line virtual connections for an out-

put unit

By using the included software “PM1D Manager for

Windows,” you can make virtual connections for output

units or cards that are not actually connected.

Virtual connections can be made only if a unit/card

is not actually connected.

1. Access the SYS/W.CLOCK function OUTPUT

UNIT screen.

2. Use the OUT1–OUT6 buttons to select the jack to

which the output unit will be virtually connected.

The OUT1–OUT6 buttons correspond respectively

to OUTPUT jacks 1–6 of the DSP1D-EX {DSP1D}.

3. To virtually connect a unit to the currently selected

jack, click the UNIT SELECT button.

UNIT SELECT popup window

The UNIT SELECT popup window will appear, in

which you can select the type of unit. The following

units can be selected in this window.

Global functions

• AO8 (AO8 output unit)

• AO8-DA8 (an output unit in which eight DA

cards are installed)

• DIO8 1-4 (INPUT A jacks of DIO8 digital input/

output unit)

• DIO8 5-8 (INPUT B jacks of DIO8 digital input/

output unit)

• BLANK (no unit)

If you wish to independently use the INPUT A jacks

and INPUT B jacks of the DIO8 digital input/out-

put unit, you must set the PORT B SELECTOR of

the DIO8 to the 5-8 position. With this setting, sig-

nals will be sent from the INPUT A jacks to slots 1–

4, and from the INPUT B jacks to slots 5–8.

4. Click an icon to select the unit that you will connect

virtually.

If you select a unit of a different type than was speci-

ﬁed previously, a window will appear to warn you of

this. Click the OK button, and the patching that had

been speciﬁed for the previous unit will be defeated.

Hint

Virtually connected units are shown by a yellow icon.

UNIT CONFLICT window warning that the unit has

been changed

Hint

Virtually connected units are shown by a yellow icon.

5. To virtually connect a card to the currently selected

unit, click the card assign button for the desired

slot.

A list of the cards that can be installed in that unit

will be displayed.

6. Click the card that you wish to virtually connect.

Hint

Virtually-connected cards will be indicated by “VIR-

TUAL” displayed on a yellow background.

7. Make virtual connections for other units and cards

in the same way.

If in step 3 you selected the model name (AO8-DA8)

of a unit in which a card is already installed, it is not

necessary to specify the card.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

SYS/W.CLOCK (system/word clock) function

WORD CLOCK

[Function]

Although the PM1D system is designed to continue audio processing as far as possible even if there are syn-

chronization-related problems or incorrect settings, word clock synchronization (audio system clock) must

be established for all devices in the system. In this screen you can specify the word clock that will operate the

PM1D system. In general, the frequency of this clock is referred to as the sampling rate or sampling frequency.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press [SYS/W.CLOCK] (press

repeatedly until the screen shown at

the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → SYS/W.CLOCK

button → WORD CLOCK tab

[Screen functions]

1 SETTING LEVEL

Select one of the following two modes for making

word clock settings.

• BASIC

This mode simpliﬁes word clock settings for the

PM1D system by limiting the items that can be set.

You can automatically set all word clock settings of

the PM1D to their optimal state simply by selecting

the word clock (the reference word clock) that will be

the master clock. Unless you need to make special

settings, we recommend that you normally use this

level.

• ADVANCED

This level allows more detailed settings to be made.

If MASTER CLOCK SELECT is other than INT

48k/INT 44.1k/W.CLOCK IN, changing from

ADVANCED to BASIC will forcibly select INT 48k.

2 MASTER CLOCK SELECT

Select the clock source that will be the master clock.

The entire PM1D system will be controlled so that it

operates in synchronization with the selected clock

source. This setting will determine the sampling rate

of the PM1D system.

When the BASIC button is on, the clock source can

be selected from the following devices.

Global functions

When you change the word clock settings, noise may

be heard from the output jacks of the CS1D and AO8,

particularly if an MY8-AT digital I/O card is installed

in the DIO8. To protect your speaker system, you

must turn down the power amp output before

changing the word clock settings. Such a change in

the word clock settings can occur not only when

PM1D system internal settings are changed, but also

when the word clock setting is switched on an exter-

nal device (e.g., a CD player or a recording device).

Hint

In the case of one console and two engines connected

in a Mirror conﬁguration, there will also be an

Engine B select button, allowing you to make set-

tings. However, the settings of engine A and engine B

will be linked.

• ENGINE A (DSP1D-EX {DSP1D})

INT 48 k

Internal clock of engine A (48 kHz)

INT 44.1 k

Internal clock of engine A (44.1 kHz)

W.CLOCK IN

Word clock supplied to the WORD CLOCK IN

connector of engine A

• ENGINE B (DSP1D-EX {DSP1D})

INT 48 k

Internal clock of engine B (48 kHz)

INT 44.1 k

Internal clock of engine B (44.1 kHz)

W.CLOCK IN

Word clock supplied to the WORD CLOCK IN

connector of engine B

If the ADVANCED button is on, the clock source

can be selected from the following devices, as well

as from engines A/B listed above.

• UNIT

ENGINE A

CH 1/2, CH 3/4, CH 5/6, CH 7/8

The word clock included in the input signal for

each channel of the digital input/output unit

(DIO8) connected to engine A.

ENGINE B

CH 1/2, CH 3/4, CH 5/6, CH 7/8

The word clock included in the input signal for

each channel of the digital input/output unit

(DIO8) connected to engine B.

The only clock source that can be selected as the

master is the clock that is extracted from the digital

I/O card installed in slot number 1 of unit

number 1.

If the digital I/O card type is MY8-AE (AES/EBU

format), you can also use the 1/2–7/8 buttons to

select the input channel.

If the type of digital I/O card is MY8-TD (Tascam

format) or MY8-AT (ADAT format), operation will

be the same regardless of which of the four buttons

you select. In the case of an analog card such as the

MY8-AD or MY4-AD, the status will always be

UNLOCK, and operation will not be correct even if

you select this.

• CONSOLE

INT 48k

Internal clock (48 kHz) of the console (CS1D)

INT 44.1

Internal clock (44.1 kHz) of the console (CS1D)

W.CLOCK IN

Word clock supplied to the WORD CLOCK IN

jack of the console (CS1D)

2TR IN

Clock extracted from 2-TRACK IN DIGITAL AES/

EBU jack 3 of the console (CS1D)

3 WORD CLOCK INPUT SELECT (displayed only if

ADVANCED level is selected)

For each device within the PM1D system, you can

specify the jack that will supply the word clock used

for synchronization.

This button will be displayed only for a unit that is

connected or virtually connected. Buttons for a unit

that cannot be controlled will be grayed out, and the

setting cannot be changed.

For each device, you can select one of the following

three settings.

• If the AUTO button is on

A valid word clock will automatically be detected in

the priority order of the WORD CLOCK IN connec-

tor of that device → the 68 pin D-sub connector con-

nected to the engine, and the connector that receives

the word clock will be speciﬁed accordingly. How-

ever if, while the unit is operating on the word clock

supplied from the 68 pin D-sub connector, a word

clock valid for synchronization begins to be received

from the WORD CLOCK IN connector, the word

clock source will automatically switch to the WORD

CLOCK IN connector.

Hint

This automatic detection is always enabled. This

means that even if one of the clocks should be inter-

rupted, the clock source will be switched immedi-

ately to re-establish synchronization.

• If the W.CLOCK button is on

If this button is on, the WORD CLOCK IN connec-

tor of that device will be selected.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

SYS/W.CLOCK (system/word clock) function

• If both buttons are off

The 68 pin D-sub will be selected.

4 Status

The symbol at the left of the button indicates the

clock status that is being input to that connector.

This indicates the result of selecting the connector,

and whether audio signals of that status are being

correctly input/output between the various devices.

The various statuses have the following signiﬁcance.

• LOCK (blue)

A clock synchronized to the source selected in 2 is

being input.

If the clock of the selected connector displays this

status, the device to which that connector belongs is

correctly performing input/output within the PM1D

system.

This status may be displayed even when unsynchro-

nized, if the sampling frequency is close.

• UNLOCK (red)

A valid clock is not being input.

If the clock of the selected connector has this status,

the device to which that connector belongs is unable

to function with that clock.

As a result, that device is operating with its own

clock, and therefore unable to input/output correctly

within the PM1D system. A clock that is synchro-

nized with the source selected in 2 must be input to

the selected connector.

• LOCK, BUT NOT SYNC’ED (orange)

A valid clock is being input, but is not synchronized

to the source selected in 2.

If the clock of the selected connector has this status,

the device to which that connector belongs is unable

to correctly perform input/output within the PM1D

system.

A clock that is synchronized with the source selected

in 2 must be input to the selected connector.

• UNKNOWN (yellow)

This indicates that the clock status of that connector

cannot be known, because it is a virtual connection

or is unconnected.

Although it is possible to select this connector, valid

synchronization with the PM1D system cannot be

established until an actual connection is made.

• SRC ON (green)

This is a special status belonging only to 2-TRACK

IN DIGITAL connector 3.

The clock status is “LOCK” or “LOCK, BUT NOT

SYNC’ED”, but since an SRC (Sampling Rate Con-

verter) is provided on the audio input section, the

audio is being input normally into the PM1D system

by virtue of this function, even if it is actually not

synchronized.

In order for the PM1D system to operate correctly,

the status of the selected connectors must all be in

the LOCK (blue) state.

If the 2-TRACK IN DIGITAL connector 3 SRC is

on, and you attempt to select this connector as the

word clock master, a message of “Selecting 2TR IN

3 will turn off SRC. Are you sure?” will be dis-

played. When you click the OK button, the SRC will

be defeated.

When using an MY8-AT card to handle ADAT for-

mat signals, synchronization may tend to be lost

easily, depending on the device that is connected.

For more reliable synchronization, we recommend

that the word clock for the combination of digital

audio equipment you are using be taken from other

than the ADAT format connector.

Global functions

DITHER

[Function]

For each output channel of the output unit, turn dithering on/off and specify the bits to which dithering will

be applied.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the [SYS/W.CLOCK]

switch (press repeatedly until the

screen shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → SYS/W.CLOCK

button → DITHER tab

[Screen functions]

1 Unit select

Select the output unit for which you will turn dither-

ing on/off.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

SYS/W.CLOCK (system/word clock) function

2 On/off buttons

These buttons switch dithering on/off in two-chan-

nel units for each output slot of the output unit.

3 Bit number

These buttons select the number of valid bits in two-

channel units for each output slot of the output unit.

Dithering will be applied to bits below the value you

specify.

You can select from a range of 24 bits – 16 bits.

You can make this setting even if a unit is not con-

nected. The number of valid bits will differ depend-

ing on the output card, so you must be sure to

check this. Otherwise, noise may occur.

Output channels

Output slots

Global functions

METER functions

Make meter-related settings

Input metering

[Function]

Display the input levels of input channels 1–96 {1–48} and ST IN channels 1–8 {1–4}. The location (metering

point) at which the input levels are measured can also be selected.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the [METER] switch

(press repeatedly until the screen

shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → METER button

→ tab for the desired channel

[Screen functions]

1 Meters

These are peak level meters that show the input level

of each channel.

The current fader level is shown in the numerical box

located below.

The ∑ and CLIP meter will light if clipping occurs at

a metering point, PRE ATT, POST EQ, POST GATE,

POST COMP, or INSERT IN point in the currently

selected channel.

2 Pairing icon

This indicates the channel number and pairing sta-

tus.

By clicking this area, you can set/defeat pairing.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

METER functions

3 METERING POINT

These buttons select the metering point at which the

input levels will be measured, from the following

choices.

• PRE ATT .............Before the attenuator

• PRE GATE ..........Immediately before the internal

gate

• PRE FADER........Immediately before the fader

• POST FADER.....Immediately after the fader

• POST ON............Immediately after the [ON]

switch

• These ﬁve buttons are independent of the METER

[PRE] switch in the METER section (MASTER

block) of the CS1D top panel.

• The peak hold function will be momentarily cleared

when you change the metering point.

4 PEAK HOLD

If this button is on, the peak level of each meter will

be held.

When this button is turned off, the peak level display

that had been held until then will be cleared.

Peak hold will also be cleared when you change the

METERING POINT (3) setting.

The PEAK HOLD button in the input meter screen

is independent of the METER [PEAK HOLD]

switch in the METER section (MASTER block) of

the CS1D top panel.

Global functions

Output metering

[Function]

Display the output levels of MIX channels 1–48, MATRIX channels 1–24, STEREO A/B channels, MONITOR

OUT jacks A/B, and CUE OUT jacks. The location at which the output levels are measured can also be

selected.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the [METER] switch

(press repeatedly until the screen

shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → METER button

→ tab for the desired channel

[Screen functions]

1 Meters

These are peak level meters that show the output lev-

els from the various channels and output jacks.

The current master level is shown in the number box

located below.

The ∑ and CLIP meter will light if clipping occurs at

a metering point, PRE EQ, POST EQ, POST COMP,

or INSERT IN point in the currently selected chan-

nel.

However, the MONITOR A/B CUE meter does not

have a ∑ or CLIP indicator.

2 Pairing icon

This shows the channel number and the pairing status.

By clicking this area, you can set/defeat pairing.

3 METERING POINT

You can pre-specify metering points for PRE and

POST, and then use the PRE button and POST but-

ton to switch between the two selected metering

points.

The following metering points can be selected for

each.

PRE button

• PRE EQ .............. Immediately before the EQ

• PRE FADER....... Immediately before the fader

POST button

• POST FADER .... Immediately after the fader

• POST ON........... After the [ON] switch

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

METER functions

Hint

These buttons are linked with the METER [PRE]

switch in the METER section (MASTER block) of

the CS1D top panel, and their setting will also affect

the level meters in the meter bridge block.

When the PRE EQ or PRE FADER button is on, the

METER [PRE] switch LED will light.

When the POST FADER or POST ON button is on,

the METER [PRE] switch LED will be dark.

The peak hold function will be momentarily

cleared when you change the metering point.

4 PEAK HOLD

This button is linked with the METER [PEAK

HOLD] switch of the METER section (MASTER

block) on the CS1D top panel, and its setting will

also affect the level meters of the meter bridge block.

If this button is on (the METER [PEAK HOLD]

switch LED will light), peak levels of each meter will

be held.

When this button is turned off, the peak level display

that had been maintained until then will be cleared.

Global functions

MON/CUE (monitor/cue) functions

Make settings related to monitor and cue

TALKBACK

[Function]

Switch talkback on/off, and select its assignment destination

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the [MON/CUE] switch

(press repeatedly until the screen

shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → MON/CUE but-

ton → TALKBACK tab

[Screen functions]

1 Level meter

This level meter indicates the peak level of the signals

that are input from the TALKBACK 1 jack located on

the CS1D top panel and from the TALKBACK 2 jack

located on the rear panel.

2 +48V (phantom power)

This button turns phantom power on/off for the

TALKBACK 1/TALKBACK 2 jacks. (When on, the

TALKBACK [+48V] LED located on CS1D top panel

will light.)

3 ø (phase)

This button switches the phase of the TALKBACK 1/

TALKBACK 2 jacks between normal/inverted.

4 INPUT LEVEL

This button selects the input level of the TALKBACK

1/TALKBACK 2 jacks.

Levels of +10 dB and –44 dB are supported.

When the +10 dB button is on, the TALKBACK [+10

dB] LED located on the CS1D top panel will light.

2 3

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

MON/CUE (monitor/cue) functions

5 TB ON/OFF (talkback on/off)

This switch turns talkback on/off.

This switch is linked with the [TB ON] switch on the

CS1D top panel.

6 TB OUT (talkback direct output)

In this section you can patch the talkback signal to

physical output jacks for direct output.

When you click the button, the TB DIRECT OUT

popup window will appear, in which you can select

the jacks for direct output.

You can also use the ON/OFF button to switch direct

output on/off. (The ON/OFF button is linked with

the TALKBACK ASSIGN [TB OUT] switch located

on the CS1D top panel.)

7 ASSIGN

Select the bus or output jack that will send the talk-

back signal, from the following choices. (More than

one may be selected.)

• STEREO..............STEREO bus

• MONITOR B......MONITOR OUT jack B

• MIX 1–48............MIX buses 1–48

• MATRIX 1–24 ....MATRIX buses 1–24

Hint

The MONITOR B button is linked with the TALK-

BACK ASSIGN [TO MON B] switch located on the

CS1D top panel.

You can also send the talkback signal to a desired

input channel, and use it as a dedicated talkback

channel. To do so, use the IN PATCH function

INPUT PATCH screen to patch the talkback signal to

the desired input channel.

[Procedure]

Using the Talkback function

1. Connect a talkback mic to the TALKBACK 1 jack

located on the CS1D top panel, and to the TALK-

BACK 2 jack located on the rear panel.

Hint

The input signals from the TALKBACK 1 jack and

the TALKBACK 2 jack are mixed by the PM1D sys-

tem, and are output to the same bus or output jack.

Both jacks can be used simultaneously.

2. Access the MON/CUE function TALKBACK screen.

As appropriate for your mic(s), turn phantom

power on/off, switch the phase between normal/

inverted, and set the input level.

3. Use the buttons of the TALKBACK screen ASSIGN

section to select the bus or output jack to which the

talkback signal will be output.

If necessary, you can also use the TB OUT section to

select a jack that will directly output the talkback sig-

nal, or use the IN PATCH function INPUT PATCH

screen to patch the talkback signal to the desired

input channel.

4. Press the [TB ON] switch located in the TALK-

BACK section (MASTER block) of the CS1D.

The [TB ON] switch can be used in the following

two ways.

• Press and hold the switch for two seconds or

longer

This is the usual way to use talkback.

Talkback will be on only while you continue pressing

the switch, and will be off when you release the

switch.

• Press and immediately release the switch

The LED will stay lit even after you release the

switch, and Talkback will stay on.

When you once again press and immediately release

the switch, talkback will be turned off.

Global functions

OSCILLATOR

[Function]

Switch the internal oscillator on/off, and select its assignment destination. The internal oscillator can be used

to measure the acoustical response of the concert hall, or to match levels with external devices.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the [MON/CUE] switch

(press repeatedly until the screen

shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → MON/CUE but-

ton → OSCILLATOR tab

[Screen functions]

1 Level meter

This level meter shows the output level of the oscilla-

tor.

2 OSC LEVEL (oscillator output level)

This knob adjusts the output level of the oscillator.

The range is from – 96 – 0 dB.

3 OSC ON/OFF (oscillator on/off)

This is an on/off switch for the oscillator.

This switch is linked with the [OSC ON] switch

located on the CS1D top panel.

4 OSC OUT

In this section you can patch the oscillator signal to a

physical output jack for direct output.

When you click button, the OSC DIRECT OUT

popup window will appear, in which you can select

the jack for direct output.

You can also use the ON/OFF button to switch the

direct output on/off. (The ON/OFF button is linked

with the [OSC OUT] switch located on the CS1D top

panel.)

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

MON/CUE (monitor/cue) functions

5 SINE WAVE FREQ (sine wave frequency)

This knob sets the frequency of the sine wave that is

output by the oscillator.

The range is 20 Hz–20 kHz, and the current value is

shown in the number box below.

6 10 kHz/1 kHz/100 Hz

These buttons select preset sine wave frequencies.

7 PINK NOISE/BURST NOISE

These buttons output noise instead of a sine wave.

• When the PINK NOISE button is on

Pink noise at a continuous level will be output to the

speciﬁed bus or output jack.

• When the BURST NOISE button is on

Repeated bursts of pink noise will be output to the

speciﬁed bus or output jack.

The duration of the noise (WIDTH) and the time

interval between the beginning of each noise burst

(INTERVAL) can be set using the respective knobs

(8).

• When the PINK NOISE/BURST NOISE buttons

are off

A sine wave will be sent to the speciﬁed bus or output

jack.

8 WIDTH & INTERVAL

When burst noise is selected, these knobs adjust the

time duration of the noise itself, and the spacing at

which each burst will begin.

The range is 0.1–10 seconds for WIDTH, and 1–30

seconds for INTERVAL. (The current value is shown

in the numerical box immediately below.)

9 LPF/HPF knobs

These knobs set the cutoff frequency of the LPF/HPF

through which the pink noise/burst noise will pass.

The range is 20 Hz – 20 kHz for both knobs, and the

current value is shown in the numerical box immedi-

ately below.

0 LPF/HPF ON, OFF

These are on/off switches for the LPF/HPF.

A ASSIGN

Select the bus or output jack to which the sine wave

or noise will be output, from the following choices.

(You may select more than one.)

• STEREO ............. STEREO bus

• MIX 1–48 ........... MIX buses 1–48

• MATRIX 1–24.... MATRIX buses 1–24

Level

Time

Pink noise output

The PINK NOISE button is on

INTERVAL

WIDTH

Level

Time

Pink noise output

The BURST NOISE button is on

Global functions

[Procedure]

Using the internal oscillator

1. Access the MON/CUE function OSCILLATOR

screen, and use the PINK NOISE/BURST NOISE

buttons to select the type of signal that will be out-

put (sine wave, pink noise, burst noise).

2. If you selected sine wave in step 1, use the SINE

WAVE knob or the 10 kHz/1 kHz/100 Hz buttons to

set the frequency of the sine wave.

3. If you selected pink noise/burst noise in step 1, set

the WIDTH/INTERVAL and LPF/HPF parameters

as necessary.

4. Use the LEVEL knob to adjust the output level of

the oscillator.

5. Use the buttons of the ASSIGN section to select the

bus or output jack to which the oscillator signal

will be sent.

If necessary, you can also use the OSC OUT section

to select a jack to which the oscillator signal will be

output directly.

6. Press the [OSC ON] switch located in the OSCIL-

LATOR section (MASTER block) of the CS1D.

(Alternatively, you can click the OSC ON/OFF but-

tons located in the OSCILLATOR screen to turn the

oscillator on.)

The oscillator signal will be sent to the bus or output

jack you selected in step 5.

If you press the same switch once again (or click the

OSC ON/OFF button once again), the oscillator will

be turned off.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

MON/CUE (monitor/cue) functions

2TR IN (2 track in)

[Function]

Make settings for the 2-TRACK IN jacks of the CS1D.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the [MON/CUE] switch

(press repeatedly until the screen

shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → MON/CUE but-

ton → 2TR IN tab

[Screen functions]

1 Level meter

This level meter shows the input level from the corre-

sponding 2-TRACK IN jack.

2 PHASE

This button switches the input signal of the corre-

sponding 2-TRACK IN jack between normal/

inverted phase. This can be set independently for L

and R.

3 SRC (sample rate converter)

This is an on/off switch for the sample rate converter

provided on each 2-TRACK IN jack.

This will be displayed as “ON” when the converter is

being used, or “THROUGH” when it is not being

used. This SRC button cannot be operated if 2-

TRACK IN connector 3 is selected as the word clock

master.

4 Fs (sampling frequency)

This indicates the sampling frequency of the signal

that is input from the corresponding 2-TRACK IN

jack.

5 SOURCE (2TR IN 1/2 only)

These buttons select the input jack that will be used

for 2TR IN 1/2.

The following input jacks correspond to each button.

• ANALOG............ 2-TRACK IN ANALOG L/R

jacks

• AES/EBU............ 2-TRACK IN DIGITAL AES/

EBU jacks

• COAXIAL........... 2-TRACK IN DIGITAL COAX-

IAL jacks

Global functions

ST OUT DIGITAL (stereo out digital)

[Function]

For the two STEREO OUT DIGIGAL jacks (A/B) of the CS1D, turn dithering on/off and specify the number

of quantization bits for the output signal.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the [MON/CUE] switch

(press repeatedly until the screen

shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → MON/CUE but-

ton → ST OUT DIGITAL tab

[Screen functions]

1 DITHER ON/OFF

Switch dithering on/off for STEREO OUT DIGITAL

jacks A/B.

2 Number of bits

Select the number of quantization bits for STEREO

OUT DIGITAL jacks A/B.

You can select from 24 bits – 16 bits.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

MON/CUE (monitor/cue) functions

MONITOR A

[Function]

Make settings and operations for the MONITOR A output.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the [MON/CUE] switch

(press repeatedly until the screen

shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → MON/CUE but-

ton → MONITOR A tab

[Screen functions]

1 MONITOR A SOURCE (monitor A source)

These buttons select the monitor source for the

MONITOR A output. (Multiple selections are not

possible.)

These are linked with the MONITOR A SOURCE

switches located on the CS1D top panel.

Each button corresponds to the following source.

• 2TR IN1

Monitor the input signal from the 2-TRACK IN

DIGITAL/ANALOG 1 jacks located on the rear panel

of the CS1D.

• 2TR IN2

Monitor the input signal from the 2-TRACK IN

DIGITAL/ANALOG 2 jacks located on the rear panel

of the CS1D.

• STEREO A

Monitor the output signal of the STEREO A channel.

• STEREO B

Monitor the output signal of the STEREO B channel.

• DEFINE

Monitor the signal selected in the DEFINE section

(2) of this screen.

Hint

When the PM1D is in the default state, the setting of

the MONITOR A SOURCE button will be ignored if

even one of the [CUE] switches is on, and the cue

(solo) signal will be output from the MONITOR

OUT jacks A/PHONES MONITOR A jack.

However, you can make settings so that the [CUE]

switch will be ignored and the source selected by the

MONITOR A SOURCE switch will always be output

from the MONITOR OUT jacks A. This setting is

made in the CUE INTERRUPTION section (9) of

the same screen.

Global functions

2 DEFINE

From the following choices, this selects the signal

that will be monitored when “DEFINE” is selected in

the MONITOR SOURCE section.

• MIX 1–48............Output signal of MIX buses 1–48

• MATRIX 1–24 ....Output signal of MATRIX buses

1–24

• 2TR IN 3–6 .........Input signal from 2-TRACK IN

DIGITAL jacks 3–6 of the CS1D

• DIRECT IN.........The input signal from the con-

nector selected in the DIRECT

IN SELECT section (3)

3 DIRECT IN SELECT

Select the two input connectors that will be moni-

tored when “DIRECT IN” is selected as the signal for

monitoring.

When you click the button, a popup window will

appear in which you can select the unit number/slot

number/channel for the input jack.

The input level of the signal is shown by the level

meter at the left.

If an input card with head amp is selected, this screen

will allow you to switch between A/B jacks, turn

phantom power on/off, switch between normal/

inverted phase, and adjust the input gain

4 COMM IN (communication in)

Here you can make settings for the COMM IN sig-

nal, which can always be monitored via the MONI-

TOR A output.

When a signal of a given level is input to COMM IN,

the levels of the output signals of MONITOR OUT

ANALOG jacks A/PHONES jack A and of the cue

signal will be lowered. The amount by which the lev-

els will be lowered at this time can be speciﬁed by the

COMM IN DIMMER setting within the screen.

Subsequently if one-second elapse without a given

signal level being input, the levels will return to their

original value over a one-second fade-in.

The reference level that will trigger the COMM IN

DIMMER will depend on the on/off state of the

COMM IN signal gate.

• If the gate is off

The COMM IN DIMMER will operate when the

input level exceeds –34 dB.

• If the gate is on

The COMM IN DIMMER will operate when the

input level exceeds the level speciﬁed by the

THRESHOLD parameter of the gate.

Hint

The COMM IN signal can always be monitored via

the MONITOR A output without being affected by

the setting of the MONITOR A SOURCE button. For

example, this provides a convenient way to keep in

touch with on-stage staff.

The COMM IN signal cannot be monitored from the

MONITOR B output.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

MON/CUE (monitor/cue) functions

• COMM IN

Select the input jack that will be the source for the

COMM IN signal.

When you click the button, a popup window will

appear in which you can select the unit number/slot

number/channel of the input jack.

The input level of the signal is shown by the level

meter at the left.

If an input card with head amp is selected, this screen

will allow you to switch between A/B jacks, turn

phantom power on/off, switch between normal/

inverted phase, and adjust the input gain.

• GATE

Make settings for gating the COMM IN signal.

The GATE ON/OFF button switches the gate on/off.

By clicking the mini-graph, you can access a screen

for setting the parameters.

• LEVEL

Adjust the output level of the COMM IN signal after

passing through the gate.

5 MONITOR MODE

These buttons select one of the following four moni-

toring methods for the MONITOR A output.

This is linked with the [L MONO] and [R MONO]

switches in the MONITOR section of the CS1D top

panel.

• STEREO..............L/R channels will be monitored

in stereo.

• L-MONO ............Only the L channel will be moni-

tored in monaural.

• R-MONO ............Only the R channel will be mon-

itored in monaural.

• LR-MONO..........The L/R channels will be mixed,

and monitored in monaural.

6 DIMMER

These buttons temporarily attenuate the levels of the

COMM IN and the signal that was being monitored

when talkback was ON.

The amount of attenuation when the button is

turned on can be adjusted by the knobs located

immediately below.

The range of adjustment is –96 dB – 0dB.

When COMM IN or talkback are turned on, a

COMM IN or TB symbol will appear in the upper

part of the screen.

7 Level meters

This is a peak level meter that shows the pre-fader

level of MONITOR OUT connector A (i.e., the level

before the MONITOR A [LEVEL] volume).

The level of the signal that is output from the MON-

ITOR OUT connector will vary depending on the

state of the MONITOR A [LEVEL] volume and the

[ON] switch.

Normally these will indicate the level of the MONI-

TOR A output (the source selected in the MONITOR

A SOURCE section). When cue/solo is being used,

these will indicate the output level of the cue/solo

signal.

8 OUTPUT ON/OFF

This button is an on/off switch for the signal that is

output from the MONITOR OUT A jacks.

This will not affect the output to the MONITOR A

PHONES jack.

9 CUE INTERRUPTION

This button speciﬁes whether or not the cue/solo sig-

nal will be output from the MONITOR OUT A jacks.

• When the CUE INTERRUPTION button is on

When cue/solo is used, the cue/solo signal will be

output from the MONITOR OUT A jacks. (The

monitor source selected in the MONITOR A

SOURCE section will be ignored.)

• When the CUE INTERRUPTION button is off

The cue/solo signal will not be output from the

MONITOR OUT A jacks at all. (Only the monitor

source selected in the MONITOR A SOURCE section

will be output at all times.)

0 DELAY

Here you can set the delay function provided for the

MONITOR/CUE bus output.

Use the knob to specify a delay time (0–750 msec)

and use the DELAY button to turn the delay on/off.

When the DELAY button is on, the MONITOR A

and cue signals will be delayed by the speciﬁed time.

Global functions

MONITOR B

[Function]

Make settings and operations for the MONITOR B output.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the [MON/CUE] switch

(press repeatedly until the screen

shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → MON/CUE but-

ton → MONITOR B tab

[Screen functions]

1 MONITOR B SOURCE (monitor B source)

These buttons select the monitor source for the

MONITOR B output. (Multiple selections are not

possible.)

These are linked with the MONITOR B SOURCE

switches located on the CS1D top panel.

Each button corresponds to the following source.

• 2TR IN1

Monitor the input signal from the 2-TRACK IN

DIGITAL/ANALOG 1 jacks located on the rear panel

of the CS1D.

• 2TR IN2

Monitor the input signal from the 2-TRACK IN

DIGITAL/ANALOG 2 jacks located on the rear panel

of the CS1D.

• STEREO A

Monitor the output signal of the STEREO A channel.

• STEREO B

Monitor the output signal of the STEREO B channel.

• MONITOR A

Monitor the same signal as the monitor source

selected in the MONITOR A SOURCE section of the

MONITOR A screen.

• DEFINE

Monitor the signal selected in the DEFINE section

(2) of this screen.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

MON/CUE (monitor/cue) functions

2 DEFINE

From the following choices, this selects the signal

that will be monitored when “DEFINE” is selected in

the MONITOR SOURCE section.

• MIX 1–48............Output signal of MIX buses 1–48

• MATRIX 1–24 ....Output signal of MATRIX buses

1–24

• 2TR IN 3–6 .........Input signal from 2-TRACK IN

DIGITAL jacks 3–6 of the CS1D

• DIRECT IN.........The input signal from the con-

nector selected in the DIRECT

IN SELECT section (3)

3 DIRECT IN SELECT

Select the two input connectors that will be moni-

tored when “DIRECT IN” is selected as the signal for

monitoring.

When you click the button, a popup window will

appear in which you can select the unit number/slot

number/channel for the input jack.

The input level of the signal is shown by the level

meter at the left.

If an input card with head amp is selected, this screen

will allow you to switch between A/B jacks, turn

phantom power on/off, switch between normal/

inverted phase, and adjust the input gain.

4 Level meters

This is a peak level meter that shows the pre-fader

level of MONITOR OUT connector B (i.e., the level

before the MONITOR B [LEVEL] volume).

The level of the signal that is output from the MON-

ITOR OUT connector will vary depending on the

state of the MONITOR B [LEVEL] volume and the

[ON] switch.

5 ON/OFF

This button is an on/off switch for the signal that is

output from the MONITOR OUT jacks B.

This will not affect the output to the PHONES

MONITOR B jack.

Global functions

CUE/SOLO

[Function]

Cue/solo settings and operations.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION

ACCESS block, press the [MON/

CUE] switch (press repeatedly

until the screen shown at the

right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → MON/CUE

button → CUE/SOLO tab

[Screen functions]

1 SOLO ON/OFF

This button selects either CUE mode or SOLO mode as

the monitoring method when a [CUE] switch is used.

• CUE mode (SOLO ON/OFF button is off)

The signal of the channel whose [CUE] switch is pressed

will be sent to the dedicated CUE bus, and can be moni-

tored via the CUE bus from the CUE OUT jacks, MON-

ITOR OUT jacks A, and PHONES MONITOR A jack.

By using this method, you can monitor the signals of an

input or output channel without affecting the other buses.

• SOLO mode (SOLO ON/OFF button is on)

This is the so-called “solo function,” in which the sig-

nal of only a speciﬁc channel will be sent to the MIX,

MATRIX, and STEREO A/B buses.

The signal of only the channel whose [CUE] switch is

pressed will be send to the MIX, MATRIX, and STE-

REO A/B buses, and other channels will be muted.

The signal of the channel whose [CUE] switch is

pressed can also be monitored from the CUE OUT

jacks, MONITOR OUT jacks A, and the PHONES

MONITOR A jack.

Hint

The SOLO ON/OFF button is linked with the

[SOLO] switch in the CUE section (MASTER block)

of the CS1D top panel. If CUE mode is selected the

[SOLO] switch LED will be dark, and if SOLO mode

is selected it will blink.

Even when the SOLO ON/OFF button is on, you can

exclude a speciﬁc input channel or output channel

from the solo operation. This setting can be made in

the SOLO SAFE section (7) of the CUE/SOLO screen.

2 LAST CUE ON/OFF

This button speciﬁes the operation when a [CUE]

switch is pressed for more than one channel.

• When LAST CUE is on

Only the channel that was last selected by the [CUE]

switch will be monitored.

• When LAST CUE is off

All channels for which the [CUE] switch is currently

on will be mixed and monitored.

MIX CUE mode is valid only for the [CUE]

switches of the input channels, the output channels,

and the DCA section.

For example while the NOISE GATE KEY IN

[CUE] switch of the SELECTED INPUT CHAN-

NEL block is on, only the key-in signal of the built-

in noise gate of that input channel will take priority

for monitoring.

EFFECTGEQSCENEMIDI/GPI/TCUTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK

METERMON/CUE

MON/CUE (monitor/cue) functions

If the [CUE] switch of an output channel is pressed

when the [CUE] switch of an input channel is on,

cue will be defeated for the input channel, and cue

will be active only for the output channel.

Hint

The LAST CUE ON/OFF button is linked with the

[LAST CUE] switch in the CUE section (MASTER

block) of the CS1D top panel. When CUE mode is

selected the [LAST CUE] switch LED will be dark,

and when SOLO mode is selected the LED will blink.

3 INPUT

These buttons select AFL and PFL. When AFL is selected,

you can also choose between PRE PAN and POST PAN.

The buttons that select AFL or PFL are linked with the

[INPUT AFL] switch located in the CUE section (MAS-

TER block) of the top panel.

PFL button

• PFL......................Pre-fader

AFL button

• PRE PAN.............Immediately before [PAN]

• POST PAN ..........Immediately after [PAN]

If PFL is selected, you can use the PFL TRIM knob

located immediately at the right to adjust the signal level.

The range is –20 dB – +10 dB.

4 OUTPUT

These buttons select the cue point of the output

channels from the following choices.

• PFL .................Immediately before the fader

• POST ON .......Immediately after the [ON] switch

If PFL is selected, you can use the PFL TRIM knob

located immediately at the right to adjust the signal level.

The range is –20 dB – +10 dB.

The buttons that select PFL and POST ON are linked

with the [OUTPUT PFL] switch located in the CUE sec-

tion (MASTER block) of the top panel.

5 DCA TRIM

This knob adjusts the monitor level when the DCA

GROUP block [CUE] switch is on.

The range is –20 dB – +10 dB.

6 CUE OUT

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is output from

the CUE OUT jacks located on the rear panel of the CS1D.

This does not affect MONITOR OUT jacks A/B.

7 DCA PRE PAN

Specify whether the pre-PAN signal or post-PAN sig-

nal will be monitored when you use DCA CUE. If this

is on, the pre-PAN signal will be sent to the CUE bus.

8 SOLO SAFE

These buttons select the channels that will be

excluded from solo operations. (You may select more

than one.)

Channels for which Solo Safe is on will not be muted

even in SOLO mode.

• INPUT 1–96 {1–48} ...Input channels 1–96 {1–48}

• ST IN 1–8 {1–4}..........ST IN channels 1–8 {1–4}

• MIX 1–48.................... MIX channels 1–48

• MATRIX 1–24 ............MATRIX channels 1–24

• STEREO A/B...............STEREO A/B channels

Hint

The Solo Safe setting and Cue on/off are linked for

two channels that are paired.

Normally, the Solo Safe operation can be per-

formed independently of scene memories. However

if a channel changes from mono to paired as a

result of recalling a scene, Solo Safe will be turned

on for both channels if it had been on for either of

the channels.

8 9

Output functions

OUT PATCH (output patch) functions

Assign output units to output channels/insert I/O

OUTPUT PATCH

[Function]

Patch the output jack of a card installed in an output unit or the input of an internal effect to the desired out-

put channel (MIX channel, MATRIX channel, STEREO A/STEREO B channel).

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the OUTPUT [PATCH]

switch (press repeatedly until the

screen shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → OUTPUT PATCH

button → OUTPUT PATCH tab

[Screen functions]

1 CH (output channel)

This is the number of the output channel (MIX

channel, MATRIX channel, STEREO A/STEREO B

channel) that will be the patch source. The number

corresponding to the grid where the cursor is cur-

rently located will be highlighted.

2 Short name

This displays the short name that has been assigned

to each output channel. You can click this area and

assign a short name/long name.

3 ASSIGN

This shows the number of output jacks that have

been assigned to each output channel.

4 SELECTED PATCH

This shows the number/long name of the output

channel corresponding to the grid where the cursor

is currently located.

5 Grid

In this grid you can patch output jacks (horizontal

lines) to output channels (vertical columns). Cur-

rently-patched grid locations will show a ● symbol.

Move the cursor to the desired grid and press the

[ENTER] switch (or click) to set/defeat a patch.

3 5

OUT PATCH (output patch) functions

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

Hint

If PATCH CONFIRMATION is turned on in the

UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen, a popup

window will ask you for conﬁrmation each time you

attempt to change the patch settings.

You may patch a single output channel to multiple

output jacks. However you may not patch multiple

output channels to a single output jack.

6 OUTPUT UNIT/SLOT/CH (output unit/slot/chan-

nel)

From the top, these indicate the type and ID number

of the output unit, the slot number, and the channel

number of the output jack. The abbreviations dis-

played in the output unit column have the following

meanings.

• OUTx (DIO8).....DIO8 digital input/output unit

(x is the unit ID number)

• OUTx (AO8).......A08 analog output unit

(x is the unit ID number)

• EFF ......................Send to the internal effects 1–8

By clicking the buttons at either end of the

output unit/slot rows, you can switch the display by

units. By clicking the buttons you can switch

the display by slots.

7 PATCH LIBRARY button

This button is used to access the PATCH LIBRARY

window, where you can store/recall patch status as a

library (→p.172).

Output functions

INSERT PATCH

[Function]

For each output channel, patch the input/output jacks where external devices such as effect processors will be

inserted.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the OUTPUT [PATCH]

switch (press repeatedly until the

screen shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → OUTPUT PATCH

button → INSERT PATCH tab

[Screen functions]

1 CH (output channel)

This is the number of the output channel for which

insertion input/output jacks are being patched. The

number corresponding to the grid where the cursor

is currently located will be highlighted.

2 Short name

This displays the short name that has been assigned

to each output channel. You can click this area to

access the CH NAME EDIT window and assign a

short name/long name (→p.83).

3 ASSIGN

This shows the number of outputs assigned to each

output channel for insertion output.

4 SELECTED PATCH

This shows the output number/long name for the

grid location where the cursor is currently located.

5 OUT UNIT/SLOT/CH (output unit/slot/channel)

From the top, these indicate the type and number of

the output unit, the slot number, and the channel

number of the output jack.

By clicking the buttons at either end of the

output unit/slot rows, you can switch the display by

units. By clicking the buttons you can switch

the display by slots.

3 6

OUT PATCH (output patch) functions

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

6 Grid

This grid allows output jacks (horizontal lines) to be

patched to input channels (vertical columns). Cur-

rently-patched grids are indicated by a ● symbol.

Move the cursor to the desired grid and press the

[ENTER] switch (or click) to set/defeat a patch.

7 IN UNIT/SLOT/CH (input unit/slot/channel)

In order from the top, these are the type and number

of the input unit, the slot number, and the input jack

channel number.

By clicking the buttons at either end of the

input unit/slot line, you can switch the display by

units. By clicking the buttons you can switch

the display by slots.

8 ASSIGN

This shows the total number of channels that are

patched to each input jack.

Even if a channel is not patched within this screen,

it will be counted if it is patched to the input jack in

another screen. However, it will not be counted if it

is patched as a key-in signal.

9 Grid

This grid allows insertion input jacks (horizontal

lines) to be patched to input channels (vertical col-

umns). Currently-patched grids are indicated by a ●

symbol. Move the cursor to the desired grid, and

press the [ENTER] switch (or click) to set/cancel the

patch.

Hint

If PATCH CONFIRMATION is turned on in the

UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen, a popup

window will ask you for conﬁrmation each time you

attempt to change the patch settings.

If you wish to use console switches to move the cur-

sor from the right grid (INSERT OUT) to the left

grid (INSERT IN), or in the opposite direction, hold

down the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch and use the CUR-

SOR [√]/[®] switches.

Cursor movement using the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch

and CURSOR [√]/[®] switches

• To enable the insert I/O point that you assigned in

this screen, you must turn on the INS. button for the

corresponding output channel, located in the OUT

PATCH function INSERT POINT screen or in the

INSERT VIEW screen. (→p.80, 81)

• Be aware that if the INS. button for an output chan-

nel is turned on when either the input or output jack

is unpatched, the correct signal will no longer be out-

put from that output channel.

[SHIFT/GRAB] switch

CURSOR [

®] switch

Output functions

INSERT POINT

[Function]

For each output channel, switch insertion on/off, and select the insert I/O point.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the OUTPUT [PATCH]

switch (press repeatedly until the

screen shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → OUTPUT PATCH

button → INSERT POINT tab

[Screen functions]

1 CH (output channel)

This shows the number of the output channel that

you are setting. For two channels that are a pair, this

area will display a heart symbol, and items 3–4 will

be common.

2 NAME

The short name assigned to each output channel is

displayed here. You can also click this area to assign a

short name/long name (→p.83).

3 INS. (insert on/off)

This button switches insertion on/off for each chan-

nel.

Before turning this button on, you must assign

input/output jacks to the insert out/in points in the

OUT PATCH function INSERT PATCH screen. Be

aware that if the INS. button for an output channel

is turned on when either the input or output jack is

unpatched, the correct signal will no longer be out-

put from that output channel.

4 INSERT I/O POINT

For each output channel, select the insert I/O point

(the location in the signal patch where the external

device will be inserted) from the following choices.

• PRE EQ .............. Immediately before the EQ

• PRE COMP

.........Immediately before the compressor

• PRE DELAY ....... Immediately before the delay

• PRE FADER....... Immediately before the fader

• POST ON........... Immediately after the [ON]

switch

OUT PATCH (output patch) functions

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

INSERT VIEW

[Function]

While viewing the block diagram displayed on-screen, select the insert I/O point of the desired output chan-

nel.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the OUTPUT [PATCH]

switch (press repeatedly until the

screen shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → OUTPUT PATCH

button → INSERT VIEW tab

[Screen functions]

1 SEL (channel select)

This button accesses the CH SELECT popup win-

dow, allowing you to select the output channel to

which your operations will apply.

Hint

When this screen is ﬁrst accessed, the output channel

selected by OUTPUT [SEL] on the console will be

displayed. However, if you select a different output

channel for editing in this screen, the output channel

selected by the OUTPUT [SEL] switch will be

affected.

2 Output channel number and short name

This shows the number, the short name, and the

pairing status of the currently selected output chan-

nel. You can click the heart symbol to enable/defeat

pairing.

3 Unit, card, and channel type and number

This displays the unit type and number, card num-

ber, and output jack channel number assigned to the

currently selected output channel.

4 Unit, card, and channel type and number

This displays the unit type and number, card num-

ber, and input/output jack channel number assigned

to the insert out/insert in of the currently selected

output channel.

Output functions

5 INSERT ON/OFF

This button switches insert on/off. It is linked to the

INS. button of the OUT PATCH function INSERT

POINT screen (→p.80).

6 Block diagram

This is a block diagram for the currently selected

output channel. Each button has the following func-

tion.

• INSERT button

This button selects the insert I/O point. The wiring

in the block diagram will change depending on the

location of the INSERT button that you turn on.

• EQ, COMP, DELAY buttons

These buttons access windows in which the corre-

sponding parameters can be adjusted.

Hint

After using the EQ, COMP, or DELAY buttons to

access the corresponding window, you can click the

OK button in the screen to return to the OUT

PATCH function INSERT VIEW screen.

The above diagram shows an example of an unpaired

monaural output channel. If two paired channels, or

the STEREO A or STEREO B channel is selected, a

two-channel block diagram will be displayed.

OUT PATCH (output patch) functions

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

NAME

[Function]

Assign a short name/long name to each MIX channel, MATRIX channel, DCA group 9–12, and STEREO A/B.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the OUTPUT [PATCH]

(press repeatedly until the screen

shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → OUTPUT PATCH

button → NAME tab

[Screen functions]

1 LIST SELECT

These buttons select the items that will be displayed

in the name list (3). Each button corresponds to the

following items.

• MIX.....................MIX channels 1–48

• MATRIX .............MATRIX channels 1–24

• STEREO..............STEREO A/B channels

• DCA ....................DCA groups 9–12

2 NAME LIBRARY

This button accesses the NAME LIBRARY window in

which you can store and recall name lists (→p.174).

3 Name list

This lists the names of the item selected in 1. If you

click the short name area (four characters) or long

name area (eight characters) in the list, it will be dis-

played in light blue, and can be edited using the text

box (6) or character palette (7).

If DCA groups are selected in LIST SELECT (1),

only the long names are valid.

4 Te mplate name list

In this list you can register frequently-used names or

abbreviations such as “Kick,” “SD,” “Tom,” and

“Chor” as template names. If you click the short

name area (four characters) or long name area (eight

characters) in the list, it will be displayed in light

blue, allowing you to edit the template itself using

the text box (6) or character palette (7).

Output functions

You can register 256 names, which are shared by

inputs and outputs.

Hint

This template will maintain its previous state as long

as you do not initialize all memories. To return to the

factory settings, select “INITIALIZE ALL MEMO-

RIES” when you perform memory initialization. For

details on memory initialization, refer to p.194.

The contents registered in this template can be saved

to a memory card as SETUP data. For details refer to

p.40.

5 Te mplate copy buttons

By clicking these buttons, you can copy both the

short name and long name between the ﬁelds dis-

played in black or light blue in the selected name list

or template list.

• [®] button .........copies from the name list to the

template name list.

• [√] button .........copies from the template name

list to the name list.

When copying between the DCA group and tem-

plate name list, only the long name will be copied.

6 Text box

When the name area of the name list (3) or tem-

plate name list (4) is in an editable state, the name

for editing will be displayed here. Use the text palette

(7) to input characters into this box, and click the

ENTER button located at the left to input the name

into the edited ﬁeld (light blue) of the name list (3)

or template name list (4). When input is completed,

the editable state will be cancelled, and the ﬁeld will

be displayed in black to indicate the normal selected

condition.

7 Character palette

This palette allows you to input characters, numerals,

and symbols into a text box. (For details on entering

characters and on the function of each button, refer

to “CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)”

→p.20.)

Hint

You can also input text from a keyboard connected to

the KEYBOARD connector of the CS1D front panel.

[Procedure]

Assigning a short name/long name to an output

channel or DCA group

1. Use the four buttons of the LIST SELECT (1) sec-

tion to select the type of item whose name you wish

to change.

2. In the name list, click the short name or long name

ﬁeld for the channel whose name you wish to

change. (Alternatively, use the [CURSOR] switches

to move the cursor to the ﬁeld, and press the

[ENTER] switch.)

The selected ﬁeld will be displayed in light blue to

indicate that it can be edited.

3. Use the character palette or connnected keyboard

to input a name into the text box. (For the character

input procedure, refer to “CS1D Operating Manual

(Basic Operation)” →p.20.)

If the short name was selected in the name list you

will be able to input four characters. If the long name

was selected you will be able to input eight charac-

ters.

4. After you have input the characters, click the

ENTER button in the screen. (Alternatively, use the

[CURSOR] switches to move the cursor to the

ENTER button in the screen, and press the

[ENTER] switch.)

The name will be registered in the name list.

Hint

When the cursor is on a ﬁeld that is in an editable

state (displayed in light blue), pressing the [ENTER]

switch will have the same result as step 4.

[Procedure]

Registering a template name

1. In the template name list, click the ﬁeld in which

you wish to register a name. (Alternatively, use the

[CURSOR] switches to move the cursor to the

desired ﬁeld, and press the [ENTER] switch.)

The selected ﬁeld will be displayed in light blue.

2. Use the character palette or connnected keyboard

to input a name into the text box. (For the character

input procedure, refer to “CS1D Operating Manual

(Basic Operation)” →p.20.)

If the short name was selected in the name list you

will be able to input four characters. If the long name

was selected you will be able to input eight charac-

ters.

OUT PATCH (output patch) functions

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

3. After you have input the characters, click the

ENTER button in the screen. (Alternatively, use the

[CURSOR] switches to move the cursor to the

ENTER button in the screen, and press the

[ENTER] switch.)

The name will be registered in the name list.

Hint

When the cursor is on a ﬁeld that is in an editable

state (displayed in light blue), pressing the [ENTER]

switch will have the same result as step 3.

[Procedure]

Using the template name list to assign a name

to a channel/DCA group

A name registered in the template name list can be input

directly into the name list. This method is convenient

when you wish to create a name list quickly.

1. Use the four buttons of the LIST SELECT (1) sec-

tion to select the type of item whose name you wish

to change.

2. In the name list, move the cursor to the ﬁeld whose

name you wish to change, and press the [ENTER]

switch. (Alternatively, use the [CURSOR] switches

to move the cursor to the desired ﬁeld, and press

the [ENTER] switch.)

The selected line will turn light blue or black.

3. In the template name list, click the name that you

wish to use. (Alternatively, use the [CURSOR]

switches to move the cursor to the desired ﬁeld, and

press the [ENTER] switch.)

The selected line will turn light blue or black.

4. Click the [√] template copy button (5). (Alterna-

tively, use the [CURSOR] switches to move the cur-

sor to the [√] button in the screen, and press the

[ENTER] switch.) When you do so, both the short

name and long name will be copied from the tem-

plate name list to the name list.

Hint

A name that is already assigned to a channel or DCA

group can also be copied to the template name list. In

this case, click the [®] template copy button in step

Output functions

OUT INSERT (output insert) function

Settings for an output unit inserted into an output channel

MIX 1-24 INS / MIX 25-48 INS / MATRIX 1-24 INS / ST MAS INS/UNIT LIB

[Function]

Make settings for the output unit that has been assigned to the insert out point of an output channel.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the OUTPUT

[INSERT] switch (press repeatedly

until the desired output channel

appears)

■ Display

MENU button → OUTPUT

INSERT button → tab for the

desired output channel

When the MIX 1–24 tab is selected

When the ST MAS INS tab is selected

OUT INSERT (output insert) function

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

[Screen functions]

The OUT INSERT function screen displays the state of

the parameter settings according to the type of unit or

card that is assigned to the output channel.

For an AD card with head amp (LMY2-ML)

For an AD card without head amp (LMY4-AD)

For a digital I/O card (MY card)

For a 2TR IN is assigned

For an effect return, graphic EQ output, or talkback

signal is assigned

For a channel to which nothing is assigned

1 GAIN GANG

This button links the head amp gain setting between

adjacent channels in the screen. (The offset value will

be preserved.) When this button is on, rotating the

GAIN knob (7) of one channel will cause the knob

of the other channel to follow, while preserving the

current level difference.

1 2

(Meter)

Output functions

2 A/B LINK

For adjacent channels in the screen, this button links

the selection of input jack A or B on an AD card with

head amp. If this button is on, switching the A/B but-

ton (4) of one channel will forcibly turn on the

same button for the other channel.

If the AD card with head amp is patched to two or

more channels, switching A/B on a channel for which

A/B LINK is on will cause A/B to be switched in the

same way for all channels to which the card is

patched.

In addition, if there are any channels that are linked

to these patch destination channels, they will be

switched in the same way.

3 Level meter

This is a peak level meter showing the input level.

4 A/B

This button switches between input jacks A/B of the

AD card with head amp.

5 +48 V

For each channel, this button switches the phantom

power on/off for the AD card with head amp.

The +48V switch on the front panel of the AI8

input unit is the master phantom power switch for

the entire unit. If this switch is off, phantom power

cannot be used on that unit (regardless of the set-

ting of the +48V button in the display).

6 ø (phase)

This button switches the input signal between nor-

mal and inverted phase.

7 GAIN

This knob adjusts the input sensitivity of the head

amp. It covers a range of +10dB — –68 dB, and the

current value is displayed in the numerical box

immediately below the knob.

8 Unit type/ID number/channel number

This displays the input unit type and ID number, slot

number, and input jack channel number.

9 Pair setting

This displays the channel number and the pairing

status. You can click the heart symbol to select/defeat

pairing.

0 Digital I/O card

If a digital I/O card is installed in the digital input/

output unit, the type of digital I/O card will be

shown here.

A DE-EMPHASIS

If a signal with emphasis (emphasis = ON) is input

to the corresponding port of the digital input/output

unit, this area will indicate “DE-EMPHASIS.”

B UNIT LIBRARY

This button accesses the UNIT LIBRARY window in

which preamp settings for all units can be stored/

recalled (→p.170).

OUT EQ (output equalizer) function

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

OUT EQ (output equalizer) function

Output channel EQ settings

EQ PARAMETER

[Function]

Make 6-band EQ settings for the selected output channel.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the OUTPUT [EQ]

switch (press repeatedly until the

screen shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → OUTPUT EQ

button → EQ PARAMETER tab

[Screen functions]

1 SEL (channel select)

This button accesses the CH SELECT popup win-

dow, allowing you to select the output channel to

which your operations will apply.

2 Output channel number and short name

This shows the number, the short name, and the

pairing status of the currently selected output chan-

nel. You can click the heart symbol to enable/defeat

pairing.

3 HPF/LPF CROSSOVER GAIN

Specify how much the level will be attenuated at the

center frequency when the SUB LOW band is used as

an HPF or when the HIGH band is used as an LPF.

However, this parameter is valid only if the HPF/LPF

SLOPE parameter is set to 12 dB. If the SLOPE

parameter is set to 6 dB, the CROSSOVER parameter

will be ﬁxed at –3 dB.

• SUB LOW

• HIGH band

Level

Center Frequency

Crossover Gain

Level

Center

Frequency

Crossover Gain

Frequency

Output functions

4 EQ ON/OFF

This button switches the 6-band EQ on/off.

5 EQ graph

This graph displays the settings of the various EQ

parameters. The colored vertical lines indicate the

Freq (center frequency) of each band. (Each line will

be the same color as the markings for the knob of the

corresponding band.) As you modify Q or Gain for

each band, the response curve will change.

6 OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY

This button accesses the EQ LIBRARY window

allowing you to store/recall EQ settings (→p.178).

7 Level meters

These meters show the peak level before the EQ and

after the EQ. If the signal clips before or after the EQ,

the corresponding CLIP segment will light.

8 EQ FLAT

This button resets the parameters of the 6-band EQ

to the default values (±0.0 dB).

9 Knobs

For each band, these buttons adjust the Q, F (center

frequency), and GAIN (amount of boost/cut).

0 BYPASS

This button bypasses an individual band of the EQ.

A (LOW shelving)

When this button is on, the SUB-LOW EQ will func-

tion as a shelving ﬁlter. The Q knob will disappear.

B HPF

When this button is on, the SUB-LOW EQ will func-

tion as a high pass ﬁlter. The GAIN knob will disap-

pear, and Q will change to SLOPE.

C (HIGH shelving)

When this button is on, the HIGH EQ will function

as a shelving ﬁlter. The Q knob will disappear.

D LPF

When this button is on, the HIGH EQ will function

as a low pass ﬁlter. The GAIN knob will disappear,

and Q will change to SLOPE.

5 8

4 6

A B C D

OUT EQ (output equalizer) function

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

MIX 1-24/MIX 25-48/MATRIX 1-24/STEREO A, B

[Function]

This displays a list of the EQ settings for each output channel. Here you can also copy EQ settings between

output channels.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the OUTPUT [EQ]

switch (press repeatedly until the

desired output channel appears)

■ Display

MENU button → OUTPUT EQ

button → tab for the desired output

channel

[Screen functions]

1 EQ graph

This mini-graph shows the EQ settings for each out-

put channel.

By clicking the graph where the cursor is located, you

can access the EQ PARAMETER screen for the corre-

sponding channel. By dragging the graph area to

another input channel, you can copy EQ settings.

Hint

For two paired channels, and for the STEREO A/

STEREO B channels, the graph will be shared, and

level meters for two channels will be displayed.

2 Meter

This meter displays the post EQ peak levels. If the

signal clips after the EQ, the corresponding CLIP

segment will light.

3 EQ ON/OFF

This button switches the EQ on/off.

This is linked with the EQ ON/OFF button in the

OUT EQ function EQ PARAMETER screen.

4 Pair setting

This shows the number and the pairing status of the

output channel. You can click the heart symbol to

enable/defeat pairing.

Output functions

[Procedure]

Copying EQ settings to an output channel

within the same tab (Example: copying from

MIX1 to MIX8)

1. Drag the mini-graph from the copy source output

channel and drop it onto the copy destination out-

put channel.

A window will appear, asking you to conﬁrm the

copy. To execute the copy, click the OK button. To

cancel, click the CANCEL button.

2. Click the OK button, and the settings will be cop-

ied.

Copying EQ settings to an output channel

located in a different tab (Example: copying

from MIX19 to MIX44)

1. Drag the mini-graph from the copy source output

channel onto the tab of the copy destination.

Copying will not occur if you drop the mini-graph

onto any screen other than the MIX 1-24, MIX 25-

48, MATRIX 1-24, and STEREO A/B screens that

are displayed when you press the OUTPUT [EQ]

switch in the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block of

the CS1D console.

2. The copy destination tab screen will appear.

3. Drag and drop the mini-graph onto the copy desti-

nation output channel.

A window will appear, asking you to conﬁrm the

copy. To execute the copy, click the OK button. To

cancel, click the CANCEL button.

4. Click the OK button, and the settings will be cop-

ied.

OUT COMP (output compressor) function

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

OUT COMP (output compressor) function

Compressor settings for output channels

COMP PRM (compressor parameters)

[Function]

Make compressor settings for the selected output channel.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the OUTPUT [COMP]

switch (press repeatedly until the

screen shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → OUTPUT COMP

button → COMP PRM tab

[Screen functions]

1 SEL (channel select)

This button accesses the CH SELECT popup win-

dow, allowing you to select the channel to which

your operations will apply.

2 Level meters

These meters show the amount of gain reduction, the

peak levels before and after the compressor, and the

peak level of the key-in signal (the reference signal

that operates the compressor). When the signal clips,

the corresponding CLIP segment will light.

Hint

In the case of two paired channels, or if either the

STEREO A or STEREO B channels are selected, level

meters for two channels will be displayed.

In the UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen, you

can specify whether the GR meter display will be

linked to the compressor on/off setting. If linking is

turned on, the GR meter will be displayed only when

the compressor is on, and will be hidden when the

compressor is off. If linking is turned off, the GR

meter will always be displayed.

Output functions

3 Output channel number and short name

This shows the number, the short name, and the

pairing status of the currently selected output chan-

nel. You can click the heart symbol to enable/defeat

pairing.

4 Typ e

This indicates the type of the currently selected com-

pressor.

Hint

Normally, you will switch the compressor type by

recalling a different type of compressor in the COMP

LIBRARY window. It is not possible to change the

type in this screen.

5 COMP ON/OFF (compressor on/off)

This button switches the compressor on/off.

6 Graph

This is a graph showing the settings of the various

compressor parameters.

7 INPUT FILTER

These ﬁlters modify the signal that is processed by

the compressor. Use the buttons located at the right

to select the type of ﬁlter (HPF/LPF) and the on/off

setting. Use the knob located at the left to set the cut-

off frequency (common to LPF/HPF).

If LPF is on, the compressor will be applied to the

signal that has passed through the LPF, and will then

be mixed with the signal that has passed through the

HPF. If HPF is on, the compressor will be applied to

the signal that has passed through the HPF, and will

then be mixed with the signal that has passed

through the LPF.

In this case, the cutoff frequency of the LPF and HPF

will be linked.

• If COMP is on and LPF is also on

• If COMP is on and HPF is also on

Hint

If you wish to use the compressor as a de-esser, select

SELF POST EQ in the KEY IN SELECT section.

8 THRESHOLD (threshold level)

This sets the reference level at which the compressor

will operate. When the key-in signal exceeds this

level, the input signal will begin to be compressed.

When the key-in signal drops below this level, com-

pression will be defeated.

9 RATIO

Specify the ratio at which the input signal will be

compressed when the key-in signal exceeds the

threshold level.

0 AT TACK (attack time)

Specify the time from when the key-in signal exceeds

the threshold until compression begins.

5 4

87 9 0 A B

LPF COMP

HPF

SELF POST EQ Key-in signal

LPF

HPF

COMP

SELF POST EQ Key-in signal

OUT COMP (output compressor) function

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

A RELEASE (release time)

Specify the time from when the key-in signal drops

below the threshold until compression is defeated.

B GAIN

Set the output level gain.

C KNEE

This sets the sharpness of the angle at which the out-

put level will change. A setting of HARD produces

the sharpest angle, and a setting of SOFT5 produces

the softest angle.

D OUTPUT COMP LIBRARY (output compressor

library)

This button accesses the COMP LIBRARY window

allowing you to store/recall compressor settings

(→p.184).

E LINK ON/OFF (key-in link)

This specify whether the key-in signals will link com-

pressor operation for adjacent odd-numbered →

even-numbered channels (link=on), or whether the

compressors will operate with independent key-in

signals (link=off).

• Key-in signal ﬂow when link=on

• Key-in signal ﬂow when link=off

• Be careful not to confuse “compressor link” with

“stereo pairing of output channels.” Turning on com-

pressor link simply causes the compressors to be

linked by the key-in signal; the compressor parame-

ters themselves can be set independently for each

channel.

• When output channels are used as a stereo pair, com-

pressor link will automatically be turned on, and the

compressor parameter values will also be linked.

However you are free to subsequently turn linking

off and modify the parameter values.

F SELECT (Key-in select)

Select the key-in signal from the following choices.

• SELF PRE EQ

The immediately before EQ signal of the currently

selected output channel

• SELF POST EQ

The immediately before compressor signal of the

currently selected output channel

• LEFT CH

The signal of the previously-numbered output chan-

nel (the same signal as the SELF POST EQ of the pre-

vious channel)

If you select LEFT CH, the post- INPUT FILTER

signal of the previously-numbered channel will be

the key-in signal. However, please be aware that the

INPUT FILTER will not function unless COMP is

on.

• KEY IN1–KEY IN4

Signal of the input channel selected in the respective

CH SELECT menu

If MIX channel 1, MATRIX channel 1, or the STE

REO A or B channel is selected, the LEFT CH but-

ton will not be displayed.

Nor will it be displayed for paired channels.

ATTAC K

processing

THR

LINK = ON

ATTAC K

processing

Key-in signal of odd-

numbered channel

Key-in signal of even-

numbered channel

Detect the

maximum

level

ATTAC K

processing

ATTAC K

processing

Key-in signal of odd-

numbered channel

Key-in signal of even-

numbered channel

Detect the

maximum level

Detect the

maximum level

THR

LINK = OFF

Output functions

MIX 1-12 – MIX 37-48/MATRIX 1-12 – MATRIX 13-24/STEREO A, B

[Function]

Display a list of compressor settings for each output channel. Here you can also copy compressor settings

between output channels.

■

Console

In the

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the

OUTPUT [COMP]

switch (press repeatedly until the

desired output channel appears)

■

Display

MENU button → OUTPUT COMP

button → the tab for the desired

output channel

[Screen functions]

1 COMP graph

This mini-graph shows the compressor settings for

each output channel. By clicking the graph where the

cursor is currently located, you can access the COMP

PARAMETER popup window for the corresponding

channel. You can copy settings by dragging the graph

to another output channel.

Hint

In the case of two paired channels or the STEREO A

or STEREO B channels, the graph will be common to

both channels.

2 Meter

These meters show the gain reduction amount of the

compressor, and the peak levels after passing through

the compressor.

3 COMP ON/OFF (compressor on/off)

This button switches the compressor on/off.

It is linked with the COMP ON/OFF button of the

COMP PARAMETER popup window.

4 Pair setting

This displays the output channel number and its

pairing status. You can also click the heart symbol to

enable/defeat pairing.

OUT COMP (output compressor) function

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

[Procedure]

Copying compressor settings to an output chan-

nel in the same tab (Example: copying from

MIX1 to MIX8)

1. Drag the mini-graph from the copy source output

channel and drop it onto the copy destination out-

put channel

A window will appear, asking you to conﬁrm the

copy. To execute the copy, click the OK button. To

cancel, click the CANCEL button.

2. Click the OK button, and the settings will be cop-

ied.

Output functions

Copying compressor settings to an output chan-

nel located in a different tab (Example: copying

from MIX7 to MIX20)

1. Drag the mini-graph from the copy source output

channel onto the tab of the copy destination.

It is not possible to copy the data by dropping it on

any screen other than the MIX 1-12, MIX 13-24,

MIX 25-36, MIX 37-48, MATRIX 1-12, MATRIX

13-24 or STEREO A, B screens that are displayed

when you press the OUTPUT [COMP] switch in

the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block of the CS1D

console.

2. The copy destination tab screen will appear.

3. Drag and drop the mini-graph onto the copy desti-

nation output channel.

A window will appear, asking you to conﬁrm the

copy. To execute the copy, click the OK button. To

cancel, click the CANCEL button.

4. Click the OK button, and the settings will be cop-

ied.

OUT DELAY (output delay) function

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

OUT DELAY (output delay) function

Set the channel-independent delay for output channels, and the global delay

MIX 1-24 /MIX 25-48/MATRIX 1-24/STEREO A, B

[Function]

Set the delay for each output channel.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the OUTPUT [DELAY]

switch (press repeatedly until the

screen shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → OUTPUT DELAY

button → the tab for the desired

output channel

[Screen functions]

1 DELAY SCALE

Select the delay time units from the following

choices. The units you select here will be used in the

numerical box located below the delay time setting

knob (3).

The units you select here are linked with the IN

DELAY function DELAY SCALE setting. If you

change the selected units, your selection will be

reﬂected by the delay time display in other screens.

• METER

The delay time will be displayed as a distance (in

meters), calculated by the speed of sound (

343.59 m/s

in an air temperature of 20°C) × the delay time (in

seconds).

• FEET

The delay time will be displayed as a distance (in

feet), calculated by the speed of sound (1127.26 feet/s

in an air temperature of 20°C) × the delay time (in

seconds).

• SAMPLE (number of samples)

The delay time will be displayed in samples. If you

change the clock rate (displayed immediately below

the button) at which the PM1D system is operating,

the number of samples will change accordingly.

• msec (millisecond)

The delay time will be displayed in millisecond units.

When this button is on, the numerical boxes below

and above the delay time setting knob (3) will be

the same value.

Output functions

100

• BEAT

Use the knob located below the numerical box to set

the BPM, and the delay time will be displayed as the

number of beats (quarter notes) for that tempo.

• FRAME

The delay time will be displayed in frame units. You

can use the six buttons below the FRAME button to

select the number of frames per second.

The BPM (beat per minute) button of the DELAY

function is not related to the BPM button of the

internal effects.

2 GANG

This button links the DELAY parameters for adjacent

odd-numbered → even-numbered output channels.

This can be set independently of pairing.

If the GANG button is turned on for channels that

are set to different delay times, rotating knob 3 will

cause the delay times of both channels to change

while preserving the difference between the two

times.

3 Knob

This knob sets the delay time for each channel.The

numerical box located below each knob shows the

delay time in the units selected in 1. Operating the

knobs will set the delay time in the units selected in

1. The numerical box located above each knob

always shows the settings in millisecond units.

4 DELAY ON/OFF

This button switches the delay on/off.

5 Pairing

This shows the output channel number and pairing

status. You can click the heart symbol to enable/

defeat pairing.

OUT DCA/MUTE (output DCA/mute) function

101

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

OUT DCA/MUTE (output DCA/mute) function

Set DCA and mute group settings for the output channels

DCA ASSIGN

[Function]

Assign output channels to DCA faders 9–12 and operate the DCA faders 9–12.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the OUTPUT [DCA/

MUTE] (press repeatedly until the

screen shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → OUTPUT DCA/

MUTE button → DCA ASSIGN tab

[Screen functions]

1 These are the DCA group numbers. The number

corresponding to the grid where the cursor is cur-

rently located will be highlighted.

Only DCA faders 9–12 can be assigned to output

channels.

2 These are the eight-character names displayed in the

DCA fader section. You can also click here and mod-

ify the names of the DCA faders.

3 Grid

In this grid you can assign output channels (horizon-

tal lines) to DCA faders (vertical columns. Currently-

patched grids will be indicated by a ● symbol. Move

the cursor to the desired grid, and press the [ENTER]

switch (or click) to set/cancel an assignment.

Hint

You can also use multiple DCA control by assigning a

single output channel to more than one DCA fader.

• DCA faders 9–12 can be used for either input chan-

nels or output channels. However, it is not possible

to assign both input and output channels to the same

DCA fader. For this reason, if an input channel is

already assigned to a DCA fader 9–12, it will not be

possible to assign an output channel to the same

DCA fader.

Output functions

102

• When a scene is recalled, the DCA group data of

Recall Safe channels may be adjusted so that Recall

Safe settings are consistent within DCA groups 9–12.

Also when a channel library is recalled, the data that

is recalled to the channel may be adjusted so that set-

tings are consistent for DCA groups 9–12.

4 CLEAR

This button clears all output channels that were

assigned to DCA faders.

5 CUE

For each DCA fader, these buttons switch cue on/off.

(These buttons are linked with the [CUE] switches in

the DCA/GROUP block on the console.) When these

buttons are on, Cue will be turned on for all channels

assigned to the corresponding DCA fader.

6 MUTE

These buttons switch muting on/off for each DCA

fader.

Hint

If the MUTE button is on, the corresponding output

channels will be in the same state as if the DCA fader

were operated to lower the output level to – ∞ dB,

and no signal will be output.

7 DCA LEVEL SET

These buttons operate all DCA faders at once.

• ALL NOMINAL

When you click this button, any DCA 9–12 faders to

which output channels are assigned (and faders to

which no channel is assigned) will move to the nom-

inal level (0 dB) position.

• ALL MINIMUM

When you click this button, any DCA 9–12 faders to

which output channels are assigned (and faders to

which no channel is assigned) will move to the – ∞

dB position.

8 DCA faders 9–12

These indicate the DCA fader levels, following the

DCA faders on the console. You can also drag the on-

screen faders to change the levels. (When you do so,

the DCA faders on the console will follow.)

5 64

OUT DCA/MUTE (output DCA/mute) function

103

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

MUTE GROUP ASSIGN

[Function]

Assign output channels to mute groups 9–12.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the OUTPUT [DCA/

MUTE] switch (press repeatedly

until the screen shown at the right

appears)

■ Display

MENU button → OUTPUT DCA/

MUTE button → MUTE GROUP

ASSIGN tab

[Screen functions]

1 MODE

From the two choices listed below, select the function

of the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches located

in the SCENE MEMORY block of the console.

This is linked with the MODE button located in the

IN DCA/MUTE function MUTE GROUP ASSIGN

screen, and also with the MODE button located in

the SCENE function DIRECT RECALL screen.

• DIRECT RECALL

The [1]–[12] switches can be used to directly recall

the scenes assigned to direct recall numbers 1–12.

(For the procedure of assigning a scene to a direct

recall number, →p.28.)

• MUTE MASTER

The [1]–[12] switches can be used to switch mute

on/off for mute groups 1–12.

Output functions

104

2 MUTE

These are the mute group numbers. The mute group

corresponding to the grid where the cursor is cur-

rently located will be highlighted.

3 MUTE ON/OFF

Each mute group can be switched between mute on/

off in the screen using these buttons. If the MODE

button (1) is set to MUTE MASTER, these buttons

will be linked to the [9]–[12] switches on the con-

sole.

Hint

If mute is turned on, the output channels of that

mute group will be set to the same state as if the cor-

responding [ON] switch of the console had been

turned off, so that no signal will be output.

At this time, the LED of the [ON] switch of the con-

sole will blink.

4 CLEAR

This button clears all output channels that had been

assigned to that mute group.

5 Grid

In this grid, output channels (horizontal rows) can

be assigned to mute groups (vertical columns). Move

the cursor to the desired grid, and press the [ENTER]

button (or click) to set/cancel the assignment. You

may assign a single output channel to multiple mute

groups.

6 MUTE SAFE ON/OFF

This button temporarily defeats muting for a chan-

nel. If this button is displayed as “–”, clicking it will

change the display to “ON” and will exclude that out-

put channel from the mute group. Click it once again

to return to the original state.

• Normally, the Mute Safe operation can be performed

independently of scene memories. However if a

channel changes from mono to paired as a result of

recalling a scene, Mute Safe will be turned on for

both channels if it had been on for either of the chan-

nels.

• Mute groups 9–12 can be used for either input chan-

nels or output channels. However, it is not possible

to assign both input and output channels to the same

mute group. For this reason if an input channel is

already assigned to a mute group 9–12, it is not pos-

sible to assign an output channel to the same mute

group.

• When a scene is recalled, the mute group data of

Recall Safe channels may be adjusted so that Recall

Safe settings are consistent within mute groups 9–12.

Also when a channel library is recalled, the data that

is recalled to the channel may be adjusted so that set-

tings are consistent for mute groups 9–12.

32 4

6 5

MATRIX/ST (matrix/stereo) function

105

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

MATRIX/ST (matrix/stereo) function

Send signals from the MIX channels, STEREO A/B channels, and SUB IN to the MATRIX buses

MATRIX/ST ROUTING (matrix/stereo routing)

[Function]

Send signals from the MIX channels and STEREO A/B channels to the desired MATRIX bus.

■ Console

IN the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the OUTPUT

[MATRIX/ST] switch (press repeat-

edly until the screen shown at the

right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → OUTPUT

MATRIX/ST button → MATRIX/

ST ROUTING tab

[Screen functions]

1 Pairing

Here you can set/cancel pairing of adjacent odd-

numbered → even-numbered MATRIX buses.

When you click the heart symbol, a popup window

will appear in which you can conﬁrm the pairing set-

ting/cancellation.

2 Send level

Here you can adjust the send level of the signals that

are sent from the MIX channels/STEREO A/B chan-

nels (vertical columns) to the MATRIX bus (hori-

zontal row).

The knobs displayed in this area will change accord-

ing to the pair settings between the send destination

MATRIX buses.

MIX channels (send sources)

MATRIX buses

(send

destination)

Output functions

106

When using the MATRIX buses independently When using the MATRIX buses in pairs

LEVEL knobs

Adjust the send level of the

signals that are sent from the

MIX channels/STEREO A/B

channels to each MATRIX

bus.

MIX channel 1

→MATRIX bus 1

MIX channel 1

→MATRIX bus 2

MIX channel 2

→MATRIX bus 1

MIX channel 2

→MATRIX bus 2

……

MATRIX1

MATRIX2

FADER

MIX CHANNEL 1

MATRIX1

LEVEL

MATRIX2

LEVEL

FADER

MIX CHANNEL 2

MATRIX1

LEVEL

MATRIX2

LEVEL

PAN knobs

Adjust the panning of the sig-

nals that are sent from the

MIX channels/STEREO A/B

channels to the odd-num-

bered and even-numbered

MATRIX buses.

MIX channel 1

→MATRIX bus 1/2

MIX channel 2

→MATRIX bus 1/2

MIX channel 1

→MATRIX bus 1/2

MIX channel 2

→MATRIX bus 1/2

LEVEL knobs

Adjust the send level of the

signals that are sent from the

MIX channels/STEREO A/B

channels to an odd-num-

bered → even-numbered pair

of MATRIX buses.

PAN

to MATRIX 1/2

LEVEL

……

MATRIX1

MATRIX2

FADER

MIX CHANNEL 1

PAN

to MATRIX 1/2

LEVEL

FADER

MIX CHANNEL 2

MATRIX/ST (matrix/stereo) function

107

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

3 MIX TO MATRIX ON/OFF (MIX → MATRIX on/

off)

This button is an on/off switch for the signal that is

sent from the MIX channel/STEREO A/B to the

MATRIX bus. This is linked with the [TO MATRIX]

switch on the MIX OUTPUT block of the console.

When this button is off, no signal will be sent from

that channel to the MATRIX bus.

4 PRE FADER/POST FADER/POST ON

These buttons select the location at which the signal

will be sent from the MIX channel/STEREO A/B

channel to the MATRIX bus.

• When the PRE FADER button is on

The signal from immediately before the fader will be

sent.

• When the POST FADER button is on

The signal from immediately after the fader will be

sent.

• When the POST ON button is on

The signal from immediately after the MIX [ON]

switch/STEREO [ON] switch on the CS1D will be

sent.

This parameter affects all signals that are sent from

the corresponding channel to the MATRIX buses.

5 ON/OFF (MIX → STEREO on/off)

This button is an on/off switch for the signal that is

sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus. This

is linked with the [TO ST] switch on the MIX OUT-

PUT block of the console.

When this button is off, no signal will be sent from

that channel to the STEREO bus.

6 PRE/POST (pre-fader/post on)

This button selects the location at which the signal is

sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus.

If this is turned on (POST), the signal after the [ON]

switch will be sent. If this is turned off (PRE), the

pre-fader signal will be sent.

7 PAN (MIX → STEREO pan)

This knob sets the panning of the signal that is sent

from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus.

If the [TO ST PAN] switch is turned on in the

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL block of the CS1D

console, this knob will be linked with the [PAN]

encoder of the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL

block.

Hint

If the send source is the STEREO A/B channel,

parameters 5–7 will not be displayed.

8 Pairing/send source channel

This displays the number and short name of the send

source MIX channel/STEREO A/B channel and its

pairing status.

You can also click the heart symbol to set/defeat pair-

ing.

Output functions

108

MIX to MATRIX

[Function]

Select a MATRIX bus, and set the level, on/off, and sent point of the signal that is sent from the MIX channel/

STEREO A/B channel to that MATRIX bus.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the OUTPUT

[MATRIX/ST] switch (press repeat-

edly until the screen shown at the

right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → OUTPUT

MATRIX/ST button → MIX to

MATRIX tab

[Screen functions]

1 SEL (select MATRIX bus)

When you click this button, a popup window will

appear in which you can select the send destination

MATRIX bus.

2 MTRX bus number/name

This displays the number, short name, and pairing

status of the currently selected MATRIX bus.

You can click the short name area to assign a name,

or click the heart symbol to set/cancel pairing.

3 Fader

This sets the send level of the signal that is sent from

the MIX channel/STEREO A/B channel to the

MATRIX bus selected in 1.

4 ON/OFF

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent

from the MIX channel/STEREO A/B channel to the

MATRIX bus selected in 1.

5 PRE FADER/POST FADER/POST ON

These buttons select the send point for the signal that

is sent from the MIX channel/STEREO A/B channel

to the MIX bus selected in 1.

• When the PRE FADER button is on

The signal will be sent from immediately before the

fader.

• When the POST FADER button is on

The signal will be sent from immediately after the

fader.

MATRIX/ST (matrix/stereo) function

109

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

• When the POST ON button is on

The signal will be sent from immediately after the

MIX [ON] switch or STEREO A/B [ON] switch of

the CS1D.

6 Pairing

This displays the number and short name of the send

source MIX channel/STEREO A/B channel and pair-

ing status.

You can click the heart symbol to set/defeat pairing.

Hint

If the send source MIX channels are paired, the fad-

ers and buttons will be shared as shown in the fol-

lowing diagram.

Output functions

110

SUB IN

[Function]

Make settings for the SUB IN signal that is sent from the input jacks of the input unit or the input jacks of the

CS1D directly to the MATRIX buses.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the OUTPUT

[MATRIX/ST] switch (press repeat-

edly until the screen shown at the

right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → OUTPUT

MATRIX/ST button → SUB IN tab

[Screen functions]

1 SUB IN (L)/(R) SELECT

These buttons select the signal that will be patched to

the L channel/R channel of SUB IN.

When you click these buttons, a popup window will

appear in which you can select the signal.

You can choose from the L channel/R channel of 2TR

IN 1–6, and any input channel of an input unit (AI8,

DIO8).

2 SUB IN CUE

This button monitors the SUB IN signal that is

selected in 1.

If you move to another screen when the SUB IN CUE

button is on, it will automatically be turned off.

3 TO MATRIX ON/OFF (SUB IN → MATRIX on/off)

This button is an on/off switch for the signal that is

sent from SUB IN to the MATRIX bus.

When this button is off, the SUB IN signal will not be

sent to the MATRIX bus at all.

4 Send level

Specify the send level of the signal that is sent from

SUB IN to the MATRIX bus.

The knob that is displayed here will change accord-

ing to the pairing status of the send destination

MATRIX bus.

5 Pairing/send destination channel

This displays the number and short name of the send

destination MATRIX bus and its pairing status.

You can also click the heart symbol to set/defeat pair-

ing.

MATRIX/ST (matrix/stereo) function

111

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

When using the MATRIX buses independently When using the MATRIX buses in pairs

LEVEL knobs

Adjust the send level of the signals

that are sent from the SUB IN L/R

channels to each MATRIX bus.

SUB IN L channel

→ MATRIX bus 1

SUB IN L channel

→ MATRIX bus 2

SUB IN R channel

→ MATRIX bus 1

SUB IN R channel

→ MATRIX bus 1

……

MATRIX1

MATRIX2

SUB IN (L)

MATRIX1

LEVEL

MATRIX2

LEVEL

SUB IN (R)

MATRIX1

LEVEL

MATRIX2

LEVEL

LEVEL knobs

Adjust the send level of the sig-

nals that are sent from the SUB

IN L/R channels to an odd-num-

bered → even-numbered pair of

MATRIX buses.

SUB IN L channel

→ MATRIX bus 1/2

PAN knobs

Adjust the panning of the

signals that are sent from

SUB IN to the odd-num-

bered and even-numbered

MATRIX buses.

SUB IN R channel

→ MATRIX bus 1/2

SUB IN L channel

→ MATRIX bus 1/2

SUB IN R channel

→ MATRIX bus 1/2

SUB IN (L)

SUB IN (R)

PAN

to MATRIX 1/2

LEVEL

……

MATRIX1

MATRIX2

PAN

to MATRIX 1/2

LEVEL

Output functions

112

LCR

[Function]

Make settings for LCR mode to allow three-channel playback, with a CENTER channel added to the L/R

channels of the STEREO bus. This function can be used only for MIX channels.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the OUTPUT

[MATRIX/ST] switch (press repeat-

edly until the screen shown at the

right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → OUTPUT

MATRIX/ST button → LCR tab

[Screen functions]

1 CENTER BUS CONTROL

When this button is on, the STEREO B channel will

function as the CENTER channel.

By adding the CENTER channel to the L/R channels

of the STEREO A bus, you can implement three-

channel playback.

When this button is off, the CENTER channel sig-

nal will no longer be sent to STEREO B, meaning

that it will not be output externally. (The same LR

signal as STEREO A will be sent to STEREO B.)

However even when the CENTER BUS CONTROL

button is off, you can operate LCR pan for channels

in which LCR mode is turned on. (When you turn

the button on, the LCR setting will immediately

take effect.)

2 LCR (LCR mode on/off)

For each MIX channel, turn LCR mode on/off.

In the case of channels for which LCR mode is

turned on, the [PAN/BAL] encoder can be used to

simultaneously control the level of the L/R channels

and the CENTER channel if the [TO ST PAN] switch

(located in the SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL

output block of the CS1D top panel) is not turned

on.

Hint

On channels for which LCR mode on, rotating the

[PAN/BAL] encoder will cause the perimeter LEDs

to light as follows.

32 4

MATRIX/ST (matrix/stereo) function

113

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

LED lighting

• When LCR=off

• When LCR=on

3 CSR (center side ratio)

Adjust the level ratio of the CENTER channel relative

to the L/R channels. The range is 0.0–1.0.

If CSR is set to 0:0, rotating the PAN knob in the

MIX TO STEREO section of the MATRIX/ST

ROUTING screen will cause the signal levels of the

L/R channels to change as shown in LCR response

curve 1, below.

In this case, the MIX TO STEREO PAN will function

as a conventional PAN control, and no signal will be

sent to the CENTER channel.

LCR response curve 1

If CSR is set to 1.0, rotating the PAN knob in the

MIX TO STEREO section of the MATRIX/ST

ROUTING screen will cause the signal levels sent to

the L/R channels and the CENTER channel to

change as shown in LCR response curve 2, below.

When the PAN knob in the MIX TO STEREO sec-

tion is in the center location, the signal level of the

CENTER channel will be maximum, and no signal

will be sent to the L/R channels.

LCR response curve 2

4 Pairing

This shows the number and pairing status of the

MIX channel.

You can also click the heart symbol to set/defeat pair-

ing. Parameters 2–3 will be linked for paired chan-

nels.

Hint

The master level of the CENTER channel is con-

trolled by the fader of the STEREO B block on the

CS1D. If necessary, you can also use the internal EQ

or compressor of the STEREO B channel to process

the signal.

One of the output jacks patched to the STEREO B

channel will be used as the output jack for the CEN-

TER channel. (If the CENTER BUS CONTROL but-

ton is on, the same signal will be output to the L/R

channels of STEREO B.)

RLRL RL

CRL

Signal sent to the L channel

Signal sent to the R channel

[PAN] encoder

Signal level

CRL

Signal sent to the C channe

Signal sent to the L channel

[PAN] encoder

Signal level

Signal sent to the R channe

Output functions

114

OUT CH VIEW (output channel view) function

View output channel settings

CH VIEW (channel view)

[Function]

View the settings of the currently selected MIX channel, MATRIX channel, or STEREO A/B channel. In this

screen you can also modify the parameter settings, or access individual screens.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the OUTPUT [CH

VIEW] switch

■ Display

MENU button → OUTPUT CH

VIEW button

[Screen functions]

1 SEL (channel select)

Use this button to select the channel whose settings

you wish to view.

When you click this button, the CH SELECT popup

window will appear.

2 Channel number/name

This displays the number and short name of the cur-

rently selected channel.

3 Pairing

This displays the pairing status of the currently

selected channel.

You can also click the heart symbol to set/defeat pair-

ing.

Hint

If a paired MIX/MATRIX channel or the STEREO A/

B channel is selected, parameters for both channels

will be displayed in this one screen. See the following

diagram.

OUT CH VIEW (output channel view) function

115

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

4 EQ (equalizer)

This area displays the on/off status of the internal

EQ, the approximate response curve, and the peak

level of the signal that has passed through the EQ.

You can click the ON/OFF button to switch the EQ

on/off, or click the mini-graph to access the EQ

PARAMETER popup window.

5 COMP (compressor)

This area displays the on/off status of the internal

compressor, the approximate response curve, the

amount of gain reduction, and the peak level of the

signal that has passed through the compressor.

You can click the ON/OFF button to turn the com-

pressor on/off, or click the mini-graph to access the

COMP PARAMETER popup window.

6 TO ST (stereo pan)

This area displays the status of the ON/OFF button,

PRE/POST button, and PAN knob that are shown in

the MIX TO STEREO section of the MATRIX/ST

ROUTING screen (MATRIX/ST function).

You can also use the buttons and knob to modify the

settings.

7 DELAY

This area displays the on/off status and delay time of

the delay function.

You can also use the buttons and knobs to change the

setting. The upper numerical box always displays the

delay time in msec units. The lower numerical box

displays the delay time in the units currently selected

by the IN DELAY function.

8 TO MATRIX

This area displays the send level of the signal that is

sent from the currently selected channel to each

MATRIX bus, and the pairing status of the destina-

tion MATRIX bus.

You can also use the buttons and knobs to modify the

settings. To view MATRIX buses that are not visible

in the screen, use the scroll bar located at the right.

9 PRE FADER/POST FADE/POST ON

These buttons select the send point of the signal that

is sent from the currently selected channel to each

MATRIX bus.

0 ON/OFF

This button is an on/off switch for the signal that is

sent from the currently selected channel to each

MATRIX bus.

Output functions

116

A CH LIBRARY (channel library)

This button accesses the OUTPUT CH LIBRARY

popup window in which you can store/recall mix

parameters by channel.

B DCA group/MUTE group

This area shows the DCA groups/MUTE groups to

which this channel belongs.

You can also change the settings.

C RECALL SAFE/MUTE SAFE

This area displays the on/off status of mute safe (a

state in which the channel is exempted from mute

group operations) and recall safe (a state in which

the channel is exempted from scene recall opera-

tions).

You can also modify these settings.

D BAL (balance)

This knob controls the post-fader left/right balance

of the STEREO A/B channel or of paired MIX chan-

nels/MATRIX channels.

E MONO (stereo B monaural on/off)

This button will be displayed only if the STEREO B

channel is selected. If this button is turned on, the

STEREO B channel will be monaural. This is linked

with the [MONO] switch of the CS1D.

LCR (LCR on/off)

The button for this parameter will be displayed only

if a MIX channel is selected. If this button is turned

on, the PAN parameter will be used as the LCR pan

when the signal is sent from the MIX channel to the

STEREO bus.

F INSERT

This displays the currently selected insert I/O point

(the location in the signal path at which an external

device is inserted) for the channel.

You can also use the ON/OFF button to switch inser-

tion on/off.

G Level meter

This peak level meter indicates the output level of the

channel.

The location at which the level is detected is speciﬁed

in METER function.

The ∑ and CLIP meter will light if clipping occurs at

a metering point, PRE EQ, POST EQ, POST COMP,

or INSERT IN of the currently selected channel.

H Fader

This fader adjust the output level of the channel. It is

linked with the [LEVEL] encoder or STEREO A/B

fader on the CS1D top panel.

I CUE

This button monitors the output channel. It is linked

with the MIX [CUE] switch, MATRIX [CUE] switch,

or STEREO [CUE] switch on the CS1D top panel.

J ON/OFF

This button turns the output channel on/off. It is

linked with the MIX [ON] switch, MATRIX [ON]

switch, or STEREO [ON] switch on the CS1D top

panel.

[Procedure]

Pairing output channels

1. Select one of the functions OUT EQ, OUT COMP,

OUT DELAY, MATRIX/ST, OUT CH VIEW, or

METER, and access the screen for the channel that

you wish to pair.

2. Click the divided heart symbol for the channel that

you wish to pair.

The MIX PAIRING popup window will appear.

In this window you can select how parameter settings

will be handled when the channels are paired.

• MIX A to B (a channel number will appear in A

and B)

The parameters of MIX channel A will be copied to

MIX channel B.

• MIX B to A (a channel number will appear in A

and B)

The parameters of MIX channel B will be copied to

MIX channel A.

OUT CH VIEW (output channel view) function

117

OUT PATCHOUT INSERTOUT EQOUT COMPOUT DELAY

OUT DCA/MUTE

MATRIX/STOUT CH VIEW

• RESET BOTH

The parameters of both channels will be reset to the

default settings.

The channel parameters that are copied/reset when

you click one of the above buttons are limited to the

parameters that are linked when paired. In addition

to the channel parameters, the following settings

will also be copied/reset.

• Solo/Cue on/off status

• Solo Safe on/off status

• Recall Safe on/off status

• Mute Safe on/off status

3. To pair the channels, click the MIX A to B button,

the MIX B to A button (a channel number will

appear in A and B), or the RESET BOTH button. If

you decide not to specify pairing, click the CANCEL

button.

Hint

You can also enable/defeat pairing by pressing the

[SEL] switches of two adjacent input channels on the

console.

Defeating pairing

1. Select one of the functions OUT EQ, OUT COMP,

OUT DELAY, MATRIX/ST, OUT CH VIEW, or

METER, and access the screen for the channel that

you wish to pair.

2. Click the heart symbol for the channels that you

wish to un-pair.

A popup window will appear, asking you to conﬁrm

that you wish to defeat pairing.

3. To defeat, click the OK button. If you decide not to

defeat pairing, click the CANCEL button.

Hint

You can also enable/defeat pairing by pressing the

[SEL] switches of two adjacent input channels on the

console.

118

Input functions

IN PATCH functions

Assign input/output units to input channels/insert I/O/direct out

INPUT PATCH

[Function]

Patch the input jacks of the input units, 2TR IN jacks, effect returns, and talkback to the desired input channel

(monaural/stereo).

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the INPUT [PATCH]

switch (press repeatedly until the

screen shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → INPUT PATCH

button → INPUT PATCH tab

[Screen functions]

1 CH (input channel)

This is the number of the patch destination input

channel.

The channel number of the grid where the cursor is

currently located will be highlighted.

2 Short name

The short name assigned to each input channel is

displayed here. You can also click this area to assign a

short name/long name.

3 SELECTED PATCH (currently selected patch)

This shows the input channel number/long name for

the grid location of the cursor.

4 Grid

This grid allows input jacks (horizontal lines) to be

patched to input channels (vertical columns). Cur-

rently-patched grids are indicated by a ● symbol.

Move the cursor to the desired grid, and press the

[ENTER] switch (or click) to set/cancel the patch.

3 5

IN PATCH functions

119

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

Hint

If PATCH CONFIRMATION is turned on in the

UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen, a popup

window will ask you for conﬁrmation each time you

attempt to change the patch settings.

You can patch a single input jack to multiple input

channels, but you cannot patch multiple input jacks

to a single input channel.

5 AUTO SETUP button

This button patches input channels starting from

channel 1 to the currently-connected input units. At

this time, the effect returns will be assigned to ST IN.

When you press the AUTO SETUP button, a popup

window will appear.

If you click OK, AUTO SETUP will be executed to

perform the patches automatically.

6 INPUT UNIT/SLOT/CH (input unit/slot/channel)

In order from the top, these are the type and ID

number of the input unit, slot number, and input

jack channel number. The abbreviations displayed in

the input unit line indicate the following.

• INx (DIO8).........DIO8 digital input/output unit

(x is the unit ID number)

• INx (AI8) ............AI8 analog input unit

(x is the unit ID number)

• 2TR IN ................Input signal from one of the 2

TR IN connectors 1–6 on the

rear panel of the CS1D console

• TB........................Talkback signal

• EFF RTN .............Return signal to internal effect

1–8

By clicking the buttons at either end of the

input unit/slot line, you can switch the display by

units. By clicking the buttons you can switch

the display by slots.

7 ASSIGN

This displays the total number of channels that are

patched to each input jack.

Input jacks patched in other screens will be counted

even if they are not patched in this screen. However,

key-in signals that are patched will not be counted.

8 PATCH LIBRARY button

This button is used to access the PATCH LIBRARY

window in which you can save/load the patch status

as a library (→p.172).

Input functions

120

DIRECT OUT PATCH

[Function]

The signals input to the input channels are patched to the output jacks of a card installed in the output unit

(AO8, DIO8), and output directly.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the INPUT [PATCH]

switch (press repeatedly until the

screen shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → INPUT PATCH

button → DIRECT OUT PATCH

tab

[Screen functions]

1 CH (input channel)

This is the number of the input channel to be

patched.

2 Short name

The short name assigned to each input channel is

displayed here. You can also click this area to assign a

short name/long name (→p.128).

3 ASSIGN

This shows the number of direct outputs assigned to

each input channel.

4 Grid

This grid allows output jacks (horizontal lines) to be

patched to input channels (vertical columns). Cur-

rently-patched grids are indicated by a ● symbol.

Move the cursor to the desired grid, and press the

[ENTER] switch (or click) to set/cancel the patch.

Hint

If PATCH CONFIRMATION is turned on in the

UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen, a popup

window will ask you for conﬁrmation each time you

attempt to change the patch settings.

You can patch a single input channel to multiple

output channels, but you cannot patch multiple

input channels to a single output jack.

5 SELECTED PATCH (currently selected patch)

This shows the input channel number/long name for

the grid location where the cursor is currently

located.

3 4

IN PATCH functions

121

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

6 PATCH LIBRARY button

This button is used to access the PATCH LIBRARY

window in which you can save/load the patch status

as a library (→p.172).

7 OUTPUT UNIT/SLOT/CH (output unit/slot/chan-

nel)

In order from the top, these are the type and ID

number of the input unit, slot number, and output

jack channel number. The abbreviations displayed in

the output unit line indicate the following.

• OUTx (DIO8).....DIO8 digital input/output unit

(x is the unit ID number)

• OUTx (AO8).......AO8 analog output unit

(x is the unit ID number)

By clicking the buttons at either end of the

output unit/slot line, you can switch the display by

units. By clicking the buttons you can switch

the display by slots.

Input functions

122

INSERT PATCH

[Function]

For each input channel, patch the input/output jacks used for inserting external devices such as an effect pro-

cessor.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the INPUT [PATCH]

switch (press repeatedly until the

screen shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → INPUT PATCH

button → INSERT PATCH tab

[Screen functions]

1 CH (input channel)

This is the number of the input channel for which

the insertion input/output jacks are being patched.

The channel number of the grid where the cursor is

currently located will be highlighted.

2 Short name

The short name assigned to each input channel is

displayed here. You can also click this area to assign a

short name/long name (→p.128).

3 ASSIGN

This shows the number of outputs assigned to each

input channel for insertion output.

4 SELECTED PATCH (currently selected patch)

This shows the input channel number/long name for

the grid location where the cursor is currently

located.

5 OUT UNIT/SLOT/CH (output unit/slot/channel)

In order from the top, these are the type and number

of the output unit, the slot number, and the output

jack channel number. (For the meaning of the abbre-

viations displayed in the output unit line, refer to

→p.121.)

By clicking the buttons at either end of the

output unit/slot line, you can switch the display by

units. By clicking the buttons you can switch

the display by slots.

6 Grid

This grid allows output jacks (horizontal lines) to be

patched to input channels (vertical columns). Cur-

rently-patched grids are indicated by a ● symbol.

Move the cursor to the desired grid, and press the

[ENTER] switch (or click) to set/cancel the patch.

Hint

If PATCH CONFIRMATION is turned on in the

UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen, a popup

window will ask you for conﬁrmation each time you

attempt to change the patch settings.

3 6

IN PATCH functions

123

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

7 IN UNIT/SLOT/CH (input unit/slot/channel)

In order from the top, these are the type and number

of the input unit, the slot number, and the input jack

channel number. (For the meaning of the abbrevia-

tions displayed in the output unit line, refer to

→p.119.)

By clicking the buttons at either end of the

input unit/slot line, you can switch the display by

units. By clicking the buttons you can switch

the display by slots.

8 ASSIGN

This displays the total number of channels that are

patched to each input jack.

Input jacks patched in other screens will be counted

even if they are not patched in this screen. However,

key-in signals that are patched will not be counted.

9 Grid

This grid allows insertion input jacks (horizontal

lines) to be patched to input channels (vertical col-

umns). Currently-patched grids are indicated by a ●

symbol. Move the cursor to the desired grid, and

press the [ENTER] switch (or click) to set/cancel the

patch.

Hint

If PATCH CONFIRMATION is turned on in the

UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen, a popup

window will ask you for conﬁrmation each time you

attempt to change the patch settings.

If you wish to use console switches to move the cur-

sor from the right grid (INSERT OUT) to the left

grid (INSERT IN), or in the opposite direction, hold

down the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch and use the CUR-

SOR [√]/[®] switches.

Cursor movement using the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch

and CURSOR [√]/[®] switches

• To enable the insert I/O point that you assigned in

this screen, you must turn on the INS. button for the

corresponding input channel, located in the

INSERT/DIRECT POINT screen or in the INSERT/

DIRECT VIEW screen. (→p.124, 126)

• Be aware that if the INS. button is turned on, the

appropriate signal will not be input to that input

channel unless both the insert out and the insert in

point are patched to a jack.

[SHIFT/GRAB] switch

CURSOR [

®] switch

Input functions

124

INSERT/DIRECT POINT

[Function]

For each input channel, switch insertion on/off, and select the insertion I/O point and the direct out point.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the INPUT [PATCH]

switch (press repeatedly until the

screen shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → INPUT PATCH

button → INSERT/DIRECT

POINT tab

[Screen functions]

1 CH (input channel)

This shows the number of the input channel that you

are setting. For two channels that are a pair, this area

will display a heart symbol, and items 2–5 will be

common.

2 NAME

The short name assigned to each input channel is

displayed here. You can also click this area to assign a

short name/long name.

3 INS. (insert on/off)

This button switches insertion on/off for each chan-

nel.

Before turning on this button, you must assign

input/output jacks to the insert out/in points in the

INSERT PATCH screen. Be aware that unless both

the input and output jacks are patched, the appro-

priate signal will not be input to that input channel.

321

IN PATCH functions

125

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

4 INSERT I/O POINT

For each input channel, select the insert I/O point

(the location in the signal path at which the external

device will be inserted) from the following choices.

• PRE EQ ...............Immediately before the EQ

• POST EQ ............Immediately after the EQ

• PRE COMP.........Immediately before the com-

pressor

• PRE DELAY ........Immediately before the delay

• PRE FADER........Immediately before the fader

5 DIRECT OUT POINT

For each input channel, select the direct point (the

location in the signal patch from which direct output

will occur) from the following choices.

• PRE EQ ...............Immediately before the EQ

• PRE FADER........Immediately before the fader

• POST FADER.....Immediately after the fader

• POST ON............Immediately after the [ON]

switch

4 5

Input functions

126

INSERT/DIRECT VIEW

[Function]

While viewing the block diagram displayed on-screen, select the insert I/O point and direct point of the

desired input channel.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the INPUT [PATCH]

switch (press repeatedly until the

screen shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → INPUT PATCH

button → INSERT/DIRECT VIEW

tab

[Screen functions]

1 SEL (channel select)

This button accesses the CH SELECT popup win-

dow, allowing you to select the input channel to

which your operations will apply.

Hint

When this screen is ﬁrst accessed, the input channel

selected by INPUT [SEL] on the console will be dis-

played. If you change the applicable input channel in

this screen, the console will also be affected.

2 Input channel number and short name

This shows the number, the short name, and the

pairing status of the currently selected input channel.

You can click the heart symbol to enable/defeat pair-

ing.

3 Unit, card, channel type and number

This displays the unit type and number, card num-

ber, and input jack channel number assigned to the

currently selected input channel.

4 Unit, card, channel type and number

This displays the unit type and number, card num-

ber, and input/output jack channel number assigned

to the insert out/insert in of the currently selected

input channel.

IN PATCH functions

127

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

5 INSERT ON/OFF

This button switches insertion on/off. It has the same

function as the INS. button in the INSERT/DIRECT

POINT screen (→p.124).

6 Input channel block diagram

This is a block diagram for the currently selected

input channel. Each button has the following func-

tion.

• INSERT button

This button selects the insert I/O point. The wiring

in the block diagram will change depending on the

location of the INSERT button that you turn on.

• DIRECT button

This button selects the direct out point. The wiring

in the block diagram will change depending on the

location of the DIRECT button that you turn on.

• AT T, HPF, EQ, GATE, COMP, DELAY buttons

These access a window in which you can operate the

corresponding parameters.

Hint

When the ATT, HPF, EQ, GATE, COMP, or DELAY

buttons have been used to access the corresponding

window, you can click the OK button in the screen to

return to the INSERT/DIRECT VIEW screen.

The screen shot shown above is an example of a

monaural input channel that has not been stereo-

paired. If you have selected two stereo-paired input

channels or one side of a stereo input channel, the

block diagram will show two channels.

7 DIRECT OUT

This shows the unit type and number, card number,

and output jack channel number that has been

assigned as the direct output for the currently

selected input channel.

Input functions

128

NAME

[Function]

Assign a short name/long name to an input channel, or DCA.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the INPUT [PATCH]

switch (press repeatedly until the

screen shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → INPUT PATCH

button → NAME tab

[Screen functions]

1 LIST SELECT

These buttons select the type of item that will be dis-

played in the name list (3). Each button corre-

sponds to the following items.

• INPUT CH .........Input channels 1–96

ST IN channels 1–8

• DCA ....................DCA 1–12

2 NAME LIBRARY

This button accesses the NAME LIBRARY window in

which you can store/recall name lists (→p.174).

3 Name list

This lists the names of the item selected in 1. If you

click the short name area (four characters) or long

name area (eight characters) in the list, it will be dis-

played in light blue, and can be edited using the text

box (6) or character palette (7).

If DCA is selected in LIST SELECT (1), only long

names are valid.

4 Te mplate name list

In this list you can register frequently-used names or

abbreviations such as “Kick,” “SD,” “Tom,” and

“Chor” as template names. If you click the short

name area (four characters) or long name area (eight

characters) in the list, it will be displayed in light

blue, allowing you to edit the template itself using

the text box (6) or character palette (7).

IN PATCH functions

129

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

You can register 256 names, which are shared by

inputs and outputs.

Hint

This template will maintain its previous state as long

as you do not initialize all memories. To return to the

factory settings, select “INITIALIZE ALL MEMO-

RIES” when you perform memory initialization. For

details on memory initialization, refer to p.194.

The contents registered in this template can be saved

to a memory card as SETUP data. For details refer to

p.40.

5 Te mplate copy buttons

By clicking these buttons, you can copy both the

short name and long name between the ﬁelds dis-

played in black or light blue in the selected name list

or template list.

The [®] button copies from the name list to the tem-

plate name list. The [√] button copies from the tem-

plate name list to the name list.

When copying between the DCA group and tem-

plate name list, only the long name will be copied.

6 Text box

When the name area of the name list (3) or tem-

plate name list (4) is in an editable state, the name

for editing will be displayed here. Use the text palette

(7) to input characters into this box, and click the

ENTER button located at the left to input the name

into the edited ﬁeld (light blue) of the name list (3)

or template name list (4). When input is completed,

the editable state will be cancelled, and the ﬁeld will

be displayed in black to indicate the normal selected

condition.

7 Character palette

This palette lets you input characters, numerals, and

symbols into the text box. (For details on inputting

characters and using the various buttons, refer to

“CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)”

→p.20.)

Hint

You can also input text from a keyboard connected to

the KEYBOARD connector of the CS1D front panel.

[Procedure]

Assigning a short name/long name to an input

channel or DCA

1. Use the two buttons of the LIST SELECT (1) sec-

tion to select the type of item whose name you wish

to change.

2. In the name list, click the short name or long name

ﬁeld for the channel whose name you wish to

change. (Alternatively, use the [CURSOR] switches

to move the cursor to the ﬁeld, and press the

[ENTER] switch.)

The selected ﬁeld will be displayed in light blue to

indicate that it can be edited.

3. Use the character palette or connnected keyboard

to input a name into the text box. (For the character

input procedure, refer to “CS1D Operating Manual

(Basic Operation)” →p.20.)

If the short name was selected in the name list you

will be able to input four characters. If the long name

was selected you will be able to input eight charac-

ters.

4. After you have input the characters, click the

ENTER button in the screen. (Alternatively, use the

[CURSOR] switches to move the cursor to the

ENTER button in the screen, and press the

[ENTER] switch.)

The name will be registered in the name list.

Hint

When the cursor is on a ﬁeld that is in an editable

state (displayed in light blue), pressing the [ENTER]

switch will have the same result as step 4.

[Procedure]

Registering a template name

1. In the template name list, click the ﬁeld in which

you wish to register a name. (Alternatively, use the

[CURSOR] switches to move the cursor to the

desired ﬁeld, and press the [ENTER] switch.)

The selected ﬁeld will be displayed in light blue.

2. Use the character palette to input a name into the

text box. (For the character input procedure, refer

to “CS1D Operating Manual (Basic Operation)”

→p.20.)

If the short name was selected in the name list you

will be able to input four characters. If the long name

was selected you will be able to input eight charac-

ters.

3. After you have input the characters, click the ENETR

button in the screen. (Alternatively, use the [CUR-

SOR] switches to move the cursor to the ENTER but-

ton in the screen, and press the [ENTER] switch.)

The name will be registered in the template name

list.

Input functions

130

Hint

When the cursor is on a ﬁeld that is in an editable

state (displayed in light blue), pressing the [ENTER]

switch will have the same result as step 3.

[Procedure]

Using the template name list to assign a name

to a channel/DCA

A name registered in the template name list can be input

directly into the name list. This method is convenient

when you wish to create a name list quickly.

1. Use the two buttons of the LIST SELECT (1) sec-

tion to select the type of item whose name you wish

to change.

2. In the name list, move the cursor to the ﬁeld whose

name you wish to change, and press the [ENTER]

switch. (Alternatively, use the [CURSOR] switches

to move the cursor to the desired ﬁeld, and press

the [ENTER] switch.)

The selected line will turn light blue or black.

3. In the template name list, click the name that you

wish to use. (Alternatively, use the [CURSOR]

switches to move the cursor to the desired ﬁeld, and

press the [ENTER] switch.)

The selected line will turn light blue or black.

4. Click the [√] template copy button (5). (Alterna-

tively, use the [CURSOR] switches to move the cur-

sor to the [√] button in the screen, and press the

[ENTER] switch.) When you do so, both the short

name and long name will be copied from the tem-

plate name list to the name list.

Hint

A name that is already assigned to a channel or DCA

group can also be copied to the template name list. In

this case, click the [®] template copy button in step

IN HA/INSERT (Input head amp/insert) functions

131

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

IN HA/INSERT (Input head amp/insert) functions

Settings for the head amp/phase section of the input unit

CH 1-24 – CH 73-96 / ST IN 1-8 / CH 1-24 INS – CH 73-96 INS / ST IN INS/UNIT LIB

[Function]

Make settings for the head amp assigned to the input channel/insert in point.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the INPUT [HA/

INSERT] switch (press repeatedly

until the screen shown at the right

appears)

■ Display

MENU button → INPUT HA/

INSERT button → The tab corre-

sponding to the desired input chan-

nel/insert in point

When the CH 1-24 tab is selected

When the ST IN INS tab is selected

Input functions

132

[Screen functions]

In the IN/INS screen, the state of the parameters will be

displayed according to the type of unit or card that is

assigned to that channel.

For an AD card with head amp (LMY2-ML)

For an AD card without head amp (LMY4-AD)

For a digital I/O card (MY card)

For a 2TR IN is assigned

For an effect return, graphic EQ output, or talkback

signal is assigned

For a channel to which nothing is assigned

1 GAIN GANG

This button links the head amp gain setting between

adjacent input channels in the screen. (The offset

value will be preserved.) When this button is on,

rotating the GAIN knob (7) of one channel will

cause the knob of the other channel to follow, while

preserving the current level difference.

1 2

(Meter)

IN HA/INSERT (Input head amp/insert) functions

133

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

A/B LINK

For adjacent input channels on the screen, this but-

ton links the selection of input jacks A/B on an AD

card with head amp. If this button is on, switching

the A/B button (

) for one channel will force the

same button to be selected for the other channel as

well.

If an AD card with head amp is patched to multiple

channels, switching the A/B setting of a channel for

which A/B LINK is on will cause A/B to change in the

same way for all patch destination channels.

In addition, if there are any channels that are linked

to the patch destination channel, they will be

switched in the same way.

Level meter

This is a peak level meter showing the input level.

A/B

This button switches between input jacks A/B of the

AD card with head amp.

+48 V

For each channel, this button switches the phantom

power on/off for the AD card with head amp.

The +48V switch on the front panel of the AI8

input unit is the master phantom power switch for

the entire unit. If this switch is off, phantom power

cannot be used on that unit (regardless of the set-

ting of the +48V button in the display).

ø (phase)

This button switches the input signal between nor-

mal and inverted phase.

GAIN

This knob adjusts the input sensitivity of the head

amp. It covers a range of +10dB — –68 dB, and the

current value is displayed in the numerical box

immediately below the knob.

The PAD will be internally switched on or off when

the gain of the LMY4-MLF card (including the AI8-

ML8F unit) internal head amp is adjusted between

–8 dB and –7 dB. Keep in mind that noise may be

generated if there is a difference between the Hot

and Cold output impedance of the external device

connected to the card when using phantom power.

Unit type/ID number/channel number

This displays the input unit type and ID number, slot

number, and input jack channel number.

Pair setting

This displays the input channel number and the pair-

ing status. You can click the heart symbol to select/

defeat pairing.

Digital I/O card

If a digital I/O card is installed in the digital input/

output unit, the type of digital I/O card will be

shown here.

DE-EMPHASIS

If a signal with emphasis (emphasis = ON) is input

to the corresponding port of the digital input/output

unit, this area will indicate “DE-EMPHASIS.”

UNIT LIBRARY

This button accesses the UNIT LIBRARY window in

which preamp settings for all units can be stored/

recalled (

→

p.170). This button will be displayed only

when the ST IN INS tab is selected.

Input functions

134

IN EQ (Input equalizer) functions

Input channel EQ settings

EQ PARAMETER

[Function]

Set the attenuator, HPF, and four-band EQ for the selected input channel.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the INPUT [EQ] switch

(press repeatedly until the screen

shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → INPUT EQ but-

ton → EQ PARAMETER tab

[Screen functions]

1 SEL (channel select)

This button accesses the CH SELECT popup win-

dow, allowing you to select the input channel to

which your operations will apply.

2 AT T (attenuator)

This knob sets the amount of attenuation after AD

conversion. The range is 0 dB — –96 dB, and the

current value is displayed in the numerical box

immediately below the knob.

3 Input channel number and short name

This shows the number, the short name, and the

pairing status of the currently selected input channel.

You can click the heart symbol to enable/defeat pair-

ing.

4 HPF/LPF CROSSOVER GAIN

When using HPF, or when using the HIGH band as

LPF, this speciﬁes how greatly the level will be atten-

uated at the center frequency.

However, this parameter is valid only if the HPF/LPF

SLOPE parameter is set to 12 dB or 18 dB. If the

SLOPE parameter is set to 6 dB, the CROSSOVER

parameter will be ﬁxed at –3 dB.

• HPF

Level

Center Frequency

Crossover Gain

IN EQ (Input equalizer) functions

135

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

• HIGH band

5 EQ ON/OFF

This button switches the four-band EQ on/off.

6 EQ graph

This graph displays the settings of the various EQ

parameters. The colored vertical lines indicate the

Freq (center frequency) of each band. (Each of these

lines is the color of the markings around the knobs of

the corresponding band.) As you adjust the Q or

Gain of each band, the response curve will change

accordingly.

7 INPUT EQ LIBRARY

This button accesses the EQ LIBRARY window,

allowing you to store/recall EQ settings (→p.176).

8 EQ FLAT

This button resets the parameters of the four-band

EQ to their default values (±0.0 dB).

9 Level meter

These meters display the peak levels before the EQ

and after the EQ. If the signal clips before or after the

EQ, the corresponding CLIP segment will light.

0 HPF (high pass ﬁlter)

This knob speciﬁes the cutoff frequency of the high

pass ﬁlter. The range is 20 Hz – 600 Hz.

A HPF ON/OFF (high pass ﬁlter on/off)

This button switches the high pass ﬁlter on/off.

Level

Center

Frequency

Crossover Gain

Frequency

6 8

5 7

C E F

Input functions

136

B SLOPE

These buttons select the slope of the high pass ﬁlter

from 6 dB, 12 dB, or 18 dB.

C (LOW shelving)

If this button is on, LOW EQ will function as a shelv-

ing ﬁlter. The Q knob will disappear.

D Knobs

For each band, these buttons adjust the Q, F (center

frequency), and GAIN (amount of boost/cut).

E (HIGH shelving)

If this button is on, HIGH EQ will function as a

shelving ﬁlter. The Q knob will disappear.

F LPF

If this button is on, HIGH EQ will function as a low

pass ﬁlter. The GAIN knob will disappear, and Q will

change to SLOPE.

IN EQ (Input equalizer) functions

137

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

CH 1-24 – CH 73-96/ST IN 1-8

[Function]

View a list of the EQ settings for each input channel. Also, copy EQ settings between input channels.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the INPUT [EQ] switch

(press repeatedly until the screen

shown at the right appears)

■ Display

MENU button → INPUT EQ but-

ton → The tab for the desired input

channel/insert in point

[Screen functions]

1 EQ graph

This is a mini-graph that shows the EQ settings for

each input channel. By clicking the graph where the

cursor is located, you can access the EQ PARAME-

TER screen for the corresponding channel. By drag-

ging the graph area to another input channel, you

can copy EQ settings.

Hint

For two paired channels or a stereo input channel,

the graph will be shared, and level meters for the two

channels will be displayed.

2 Meter

This meter displays the post EQ peak levels. If the

signal clips after the EQ, the corresponding CLIP

segment will light.

3 EQ ON/OFF

This button switches the EQ on/off.

It is linked with the EQ ON/OFF button in the EQ

PARAMETER screen.

4 Pair setting

This shows the number and the pairing status of the

input channel. You can click the heart symbol to

enable/defeat pairing.

Input functions

138

[Procedure]

Copying EQ settings to an input channel within

the same tab (Example: copying from ch.1 to

ch.8)

1. Drag the mini-graph from the copy source input

channel and drop it onto the copy destination input

channel.

A window will appear, asking you to conﬁrm the

copy. To execute the copy, click the OK button. To

cancel, click the CANCEL button.

2. Click the OK button, and the settings will be cop-

ied.

Copying EQ settings to an input channel located

in a different tab (Example: copying from ch.19

to ch.44)

1. Drag the mini-graph from the copy source input

channel onto the tab of the copy destination.

It is not possible to copy the data by dropping it on

any screen other than the CH 1-24, CH 25-48, CH

49-72, CH 73-96 or ST IN 1-8 screens that are dis-

played when you press the INPUT [EQ] switch in

the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block of the CS1D

console.

2. The copy destination tab screen will appear.

3. Drag and drop the mini-graph onto the copy desti-

nation input channel.

A window will appear, asking you to conﬁrm the

copy. To execute the copy, click the OK button. To

cancel, click the CANCEL button.

4. Click the OK button, and the settings will be cop-

ied.

IN GATE/COMP function

139

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

IN GATE/COMP function

Gate/comp settings for the input channel

GATE PRM (gate parameters)

[Function]

Make gate-related settings for the selected input channel.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the INPUT [GATE/

COMP] switch (press repeatedly

until the screen shown at the right

appears)

■ Display

MENU button → INPUT GATE/

COMP button → GATE PRM tab

[Screen functions]

1 SEL (channel select)

This button accesses the CH SELECT popup win-

dow, allowing you to select the channel to which

your operations will apply.

2 Level meters

These meters show the amount of gain reduction, the

peak levels before and after the gate, and the peak

level of the key-in signal (the reference signal that

operates the gate). When the signal clips, the corre-

sponding CLIP segment will light.

Hint

If you have selected two paired channels or either

side of a stereo input channel, level meters for both

channels will be displayed.

In the UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen, you

can specify whether the GR meter display will be

linked to the noise gate on/off setting. If linking is

turned on, the GR meter will be displayed only when

the noise gate is on, and will be hidden when the

noise gate is off. If linking is turned off, the GR meter

will always be displayed.

Input functions

140

3 Input channel number and short name

This shows the number, the short name, and the

pairing status of the currently selected input channel.

You can click the heart symbol to enable/defeat pair-

ing.

4 Typ e

This indicates the type of the currently selected gate.

Hint

Normally, you will switch the gate type by recalling a

different type of gate in the GATE LIBRARY window.

It is not possible to change the type in this screen.

5 GATE ON/OFF

This button switches the gate on/off.

6 Graph

This is a graph showing the settings of the various

gate parameters.

7 THRESHOLD (threshold level)

This sets the nominal level at which the gate will

open or close. When the key-in signal exceeds this

level, the gate will open. When the key-in signal falls

below this level, the gate will close.

8 AT TACK (attack time)

This sets the time from when the key-in signal

exceeds the threshold level until the gate opens.

9 HOLD (hold time)

This sets the time that the gate will remain open after

the key-in signal falls below the threshold.

0 DECAY (decay time)

This sets the time from when the speciﬁed hold time

has elapsed until the gate closes.

A RANGE

This sets the amount of attenuation while the gate is

closed.

B INPUT GATE LIBRARY

This button accesses the GATE LIBRARY window,

where you can store/recall gate settings (→p.180).

C KEY IN CUE

This button monitors the key-in signal of the selected

input channel.

D LINK ON/OFF (key-in sync)

This speciﬁes whether the operation of the compres-

sor will be linked via the key-in signal for adjacent

odd-numbered → even-numbered input channels

(link=on) or whether they will operate using sepa-

rate key-in signals (link=off).

• Key-in signal ﬂow when link=on

• Key-in signal ﬂow when link=off

5 4

87 9 0 A

ATTAC K

processing

THR

LINK = ON

ATTAC K

processing

Key-in signal of odd-

numbered channel

Key-in signal of even-

numbered channel

Detect the

maximum

level

ATTAC K

processing

ATTAC K

processing

Key-in signal of odd-

numbered channel

Key-in signal of even-

numbered channel

Detect the

maximum level

Detect the

maximum level

THR

LINK = OFF

IN GATE/COMP function

141

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

E SELECT

Select the key-in signal from the following choices.

• SELF PRE EQ

Pre-EQ signal of the currently selected input channel

• SELF POST EQ

Post-EQ signal of the currently selected input chan-

nel

• LEFT CH

Post-EQ signal of the previous-numbered input

channel

• KEY IN 1–KEY IN 4

Signal of the input channel selected in the respective

CH SELECT menu

If input channel 1 or the L channel of a ST IN chan-

nel is selected, the LEFT CH button will not be dis-

played.

F LPF ON/OFF (low pass ﬁlter on/off)

This button is an on/off switch for the low pass ﬁlter

of the key-in signal.

G Knob

This knob sets the cutoff frequency of the low pass

ﬁlter. The numerical box below shows the current

value.

If input channel 1 or the L channel of a ST IN chan-

nel is selected, the LEFT CH button will not be dis-

played.

H HPF ON/OFF (high pass ﬁlter on/off)

This button is an on/off switch for the high pass ﬁlter

of the key-in signal.

I Knob

This knob sets the cutoff frequency of the low pass

ﬁlter. The numerical box below shows the current

value.

Hint

The low pass ﬁlter and high pass ﬁlter do not affect

the signal that is sent from the original input channel

to the various buses.

Input functions

142

COMP PRM (compressor parameters)

[Function]

Make compressor-related settings for the selected input channel.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the INPUT [GATE/

COMP] switch (press repeatedly

until the screen shown at the right

appears)

■ Display

MENU button → INPUT GATE/

COMP button → COMP PRM tab

[Screen functions]

1 SEL (channel select)

This button accesses the CH SELECT popup win-

dow, allowing you to select the channel to which

your operations will apply.

2 Level meters

These meters show the amount of gain reduction, the

peak levels before and after the compressor, and the

peak level of the key-in signal (the reference signal

that operates the compressor). When the signal clips,

the corresponding CLIP segment will light.

Hint

If you have selected two paired channels or either

side of a stereo input channel, level meters for both

channels will be displayed.

In the UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen, you

can specify whether the GR meter display will be

linked to the compressor on/off setting. If linking is

turned on, the GR meter will be displayed only when

the compressor is on, and will be hidden when the

compressor is off. If linking is turned off, the GR

meter will always be displayed.

3 Input channel number and short name

This shows the number, the short name, and the

pairing status of the currently selected input channel.

You can click the heart symbol to enable/defeat pair-

ing.

IN GATE/COMP function

143

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

4 Typ e

This indicates the type of the currently selected com-

pressor.

Hint

Normally, you will switch the compressor type by

recalling a different type of compressor in the

INPUT COMP LIBRARY window. It is not possible

to change the type in this screen.

5 COMP ON/OFF (compressor on/off)

This button switches the compressor on/off.

6 Graph

This graph shows the various parameter settings of

the compressor.

7 INPUT FILTER

These ﬁlters modify the signal that is processed by

the compressor. Use the buttons located at the right

to select the type of ﬁlter (HPF/LPF) and the on/off

setting. Use the knob located at the left to set the cut-

off frequency (common to LPF/HPF).

If LPF is on, the compressor will be applied to the

signal that has passed through the LPF, and will then

be mixed with the signal that has passed through the

HPF. If HPF is on, the compressor will be applied to

the signal that has passed through the HPF, and will

then be mixed with the signal that has passed

through the LPF.

In this case, the cutoff frequency of the LPF and HPF

will be linked.

• If COMP is on and LPF is also on

• If COMP is on and HPF is also on

Hint

If you want this to function as a de-esser, use the

SELECT (key-in select) setting (F) described on the

following page to select SELF POST EQ.

8 THRESHOLD (threshold level)

This sets the nominal level at which the compressor

will begin to operate. When the key-in signal exceeds

this level, the input signal will start to be compressed.

When the key-in signal falls below this level, com-

pression will be defeated.

9 RATIO

This sets the ratio at which the input signal will be

compressed when the key-in signal exceeds the

threshold level.

0 AT TACK (attack time)

This sets the time from when the key-in signal

exceeds the threshold level until compression begins.

A RELEASE (release time)

This sets the time from when the key-in signal falls

below the threshold level until compression is

defeated.

B GAIN

This sets the gain of the output level.

5 4

87 9 0 A B

LPF COMP

HPF

SELF POST EQ Key-in signal

LPF

HPF

COMP

SELF POST EQ Key-in signal

Input functions

144

C KNEE

This sets the sharpness of the angle at which the out-

put level will change. A setting of HARD produces

the sharpest angle, and a setting of SOFT5 produces

the softest angle.

D INPUT COMP LIBRARY (Input compressor

library)

This button accesses the COMP LIBRARY window,

where you can store/recall compressor settings

(→p.182).

E LINK ON/OFF (key-in link)

This specify whether the key-in signals will link com-

pressor operation for adjacent odd-numbered →

even-numbered channels (link=on), or whether the

compressors will operate with independent key-in

signals (link=off).

• Key-in signal ﬂow when link=on

• Key-in signal ﬂow when link=off

• Be careful not to confuse “compressor link” with

“stereo pairing of input channels.” Turning on com-

pressor link simply causes the compressors to be

linked by the key-in signal; the compressor parame-

ters themselves can be set independently for each

channel.

• When input channels are used as a stereo pair, com-

pressor link will automatically be turned on, and the

compressor parameter values will also be linked.

However you are free to subsequently turn linking

off and modify the parameter values.

F SELECT (Key-in select)

Select the key-in signal from the following choices.

• SELF PRE EQ

Pre-EQ signal of the currently selected input channel

• SELF POST EQ

Pre-compressor signal of the currently selected input

channel

• LEFT CH

The signal from the previously-numbered input

channel (the same signal as the SELF POST EQ of the

previous channel)

If you select LEFT CH, the post- INPUT FILTER

signal of the previously-numbered channel will be

the key-in signal. However, please be aware that the

INPUT FILTER will not function unless COMP is

on.

• KEY IN 1–KEY IN 4

Signal of the input channel selected in the respective

CH SELECT menu

If input channel 1 or the L channel of a ST IN chan-

nel is selected, the LEFT CH button will not be dis-

played.

Nor will it be displayed for paired channels.

ATTAC K

processing

THR

LINK = ON

ATTAC K

processing

Key-in signal of odd-

numbered channel

Key-in signal of even-

numbered channel

Detect the

maximum

level

ATTAC K

processing

ATTAC K

processing

Key-in signal of odd-

numbered channel

Key-in signal of even-

numbered channel

Detect the

maximum level

Detect the

maximum level

THR

LINK = OFF

IN GATE/COMP function

145

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

CH 1-12 – CH 85-96/ST IN 1-4 – ST IN 5-8

[Function]

View a list of the gate/compressor settings for each input channel. Also, copy settings between input channels.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the INPUT [GATE/

COMP] switch (press repeatedly

until the screen shown at the right

appears)

■ Display

MENU button → INPUT GATE/

COMP button → The tab for the

desired input channel

[Screen functions]

1 GATE graph

This is a mini-graph that shows the gate/compressor

settings for each input channel. By clicking the graph

where the cursor is located, you can access the

COMP PARAMETER/GATE PARAMETER popup

window for the corresponding channel. By dragging

the graph area to another input channel, you can

copy settings.

Hint

For two paired channels or a stereo input channel,

the graph will be shared by the two channels.

2 Meters

These meters show the gain reduction amount of the

gate and compressor, and the peak levels after pass-

ing through the gate/compressor.

3 GATE ON/OFF

This button switches the gate on/off. It is linked with

the GATE ON/OFF button in the GATE PARAME-

TER popup window.

4 COMP ON/OFF (compressor on/off)

This button switches the compressor on/off.

It is linked with the COMP ON/OFF button in the

COMP PARAMETER popup window.

5 Pair setting

This displays the input channel number and its pair-

ing status.

You can also click the heart symbol to enable/defeat

pairing.

Input functions

146

[Procedures]

Copying gates/compressors to an input chan-

nels within the same tab (Example: copying

from ch.1 to ch.2)

1. Drag the mini-graph from the copy source input

channel and drop it onto the copy destination input

channel.

A window will appear, asking you to conﬁrm the

copy. To execute the copy, click the OK button. To

cancel, click the CANCEL button.

If you attempt to drag and drop a Gate mini-graph

to Compressor (or the reverse), a warning message

will appear, and the operation will not be executed.

2. Click the OK button, and the settings will be cop-

ied.

Copying gate/compressor settings to an input

channel located in a different tab (Example:

copying from ch.7 to ch.20)

1. Drag the mini-graph from the copy source input

channel onto the tab of the copy destination.

The screen for the copy destination tab will appear.

It is not possible to copy settings by dropping the

mini-graph in any screen other than the 1-12, 13-

24, 25-36, 37-48, 49-60, 61-72, 73-84, 85-96, ST IN

1-4, and ST IN 5-8 screens accessed by pressing the

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block INPUT [GATE/

COMP] switch.

2. The copy destination tab screen will appear.

IN GATE/COMP function

147

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

3. Drag and drop the mini-graph onto the copy desti-

nation input channel.

A window will appear, asking you to conﬁrm the

copy. To execute the copy, click the OK button. To

cancel, click the CANCEL button.

If you attempt to drag and drop a Gate mini-graph

to Compressor (or the reverse), a warning message

will appear, and the operation will not be executed.

4. Click the OK button, and the settings will be cop-

ied.

Input functions

148

IN DELAY functions

Make settings for individual input channel delay

CH 1–24 – CH 72-96/ST IN 1-8

[Functions]

Make delay settings for each input channel.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the INPUT [DELAY]

switch (Press repeatedly until the

desired input channel appears.)

■ Display

MENU button → INPUT DELAY

button → The tab corresponding to

the desired input channel

[Screen functions]

1 DELAY SCALE

Select the desired unit of delay time. The unit you

select here will be used in the numerical box below

the delay time setting knob (3).

The units you select here are linked with the OUT

DELAY function DELAY SCALE setting. If you

change the selected units, your selection will be

reﬂected by the delay time display in other screens.

• METER

The delay time will be displayed as a distance (in

meters), calculated by the speed of sound (

343.59 m/s

in an air temperature of 20°C) × the delay time (in

seconds).

• FEET

The delay time will be displayed as a distance (in

feet), calculated by the speed of sound (1127.26 feet/s

in an air temperature of 20°C) × the delay time (in

seconds).

• SAMPLE (number of samples)

The delay time will be displayed in samples. If you

change the clock rate (displayed immediately below

the button) at which the PM1D system is operating,

the number of samples will change accordingly.

IN DELAY functions

149

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

• msec (millisecond)

The delay time will be displayed in millisecond units.

When this button is on, the numerical boxes below

and above the delay time setting knob (3) will be

the same value.

• BEAT

Use the knob located below the numerical box to set

the BPM, and the delay time will be displayed as the

number of beats (quarter notes) for that tempo.

• FRAME

The delay time will be displayed in frame units. You

can use the six buttons below the FRAME button to

select the number of frames per second.

The BPM (beat per minute) button of the DELAY

function is not related to the BPM button of the

internal effects.

2 GANG

This button links the DELAY parameters of two adja-

cent input channels in the screen. This can be set

independently of pairing. If the GANG button is

turned on for channels that are set to different delay

times, rotating knob 3 will change the delay times

of both channels while maintaining the difference in

delay times.

3 Knob

This knobs sets the delay time for each channel. The

numerical box located below each knob shows the

delay time in the units selected in 1. Operating the

knobs will set the delay time in the units selected in

1. The numerical box located above each knob

always shows the settings in millisecond units.

4 DELAY ON/OFF

This button switches the delay on/off.

5 Pair setting

This displays the input channel number and its pair-

ing status. You can also click the heart symbol to

enable/defeat pairing.

Input functions

150

IN DCA/MUTE functions

Set DCA, and mute group

DCA ASSIGN

[Functions]

Assign input channels to DCA groups 1–12 so that they can be controlled by DCA faders 1–12.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the INPUT [DCA/

MUTE] switch (Press repeatedly

until the screen shown at the right

appears.)

■ Display

MENU button → INPUT DCA/

MUTE button → DCA ASSIGN tab

[Screen functions]

1 These are the DCA group numbers. The number

corresponding to the grid where the cursor is cur-

rently located will be highlighted.

2 These are the eight-character names displayed in the

DCA fader section. You can also click here and mod-

ify the names of the DCA faders.

3 Grid

This is the grid where input channels (horizontal

rows) can be assigned to DCA groups (vertical col-

umns). Move the cursor to the desired grid location,

and press the [ENTER] switch (or click) to set/cancel

the assignment. To access channels that are not cur-

rently displayed, use the horizontal scroll bar.

Hint

It is possible to assign a single input channel to two

or more DCA groups for multiple DCA control. For

details refer to the section on basic operation.

• DCA groups 9–12 can be used for either input chan-

nels or output channels. However, it is not possible

to use the same DCA fader for both inputs and out-

puts. For this reason, input channels cannot be

assigned to a DCA group 9–12 to which an output

channel has already been assigned.

IN DCA/MUTE functions

151

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

• When a scene is recalled, the DCA data of Recall Safe

channels may be adjusted so that the recall safe set-

tings are consistent within DCA groups 9–12.

Also when a channel library is recalled, the data that

is recalled to the channel may be adjusted so that

DCA groups 9–12 are consistent.

4 CLEAR

These buttons clear all input channels that have been

assigned to the corresponding DCA group.

5 CUE

These buttons switch cue on/off for each DCA group.

(They are linked with the [CUE] switches of the

DCA/GROUP block of the console.) When these

buttons are on, cue will be on for all channels

assigned to the corresponding DCA group.

6 MUTE

These buttons switch muting on/off for each DCA

group.

Hint

When a MUTE button is on, the corresponding

channels will be set to the same state as when the

DCA fader is operated to lower the input level to – ∞

dB, and no signal will be sent to the buses or output

channels.

7 DCA LEVEL SET

These buttons set all DCA faders simultaneously.

• ALL NOMINAL

When you click this button, any DCA 1–12 faders to

which an input channel is assigned (and faders to

which no channel is assigned) will move to nominal

level (0 db) position.

• ALL MINIMUM

When you click this button, any DCA 1–12 faders to

which an input channel is assigned (and faders to

which no channel is assigned) will move to the – ∞

position.

8 DCA faders 1–12

These indicate the DCA fader levels in accordance

with the DCA groups of the console. You can also

drag the on-screen faders to change the levels. (When

you do so, the DCA faders of the console will move

accordingly.)

654

Input functions

152

MUTE GROUP ASSIGN

[Functions]

Assign input channels to mute groups 1–12.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the INPUT [DCA/

MUTE] switch (Press repeatedly

until the screen shown at the right

appears.)

■ Display

MENU button → INPUT DCA/

MUTE button → MUTE GROUP

ASSIGN tab

[Screen functions]

1 MODE

Select one of the following two choices as the func-

tion of the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches in

the console’s SCENE MEMORY block).

This is linked with the MODE button located in the

OUT DCA/MUTE function MUTE GROUP

ASSIGN screen, and also with the MODE button

located in the SCENE function DIRECT RECALL

screen.

• DIRECT RECALL

The SCENE MEMORY[1]–[12] switches can be used

to directly recall the scenes assigned to direct recall

numbers 1–12. (For details on assigning a scene to a

direct recall number, →p.28.)

• MUTE MASTER

The SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches can be

used to switch muting on/off for mute groups 1–12.

2 MUTE

These are the mute group numbers. The mute group

corresponding to the grid location of the cursor will

be highlighted.

3 Grid

In this grid you can assign input channels (horizon-

tal rows) to mute groups (vertical columns). Move

the cursor to the desired grid location, and press the

[ENTER] switch (or click) to set/cancel the assign-

ment. It is possible to assign a single input channel to

two or more mute groups. To access channels that are

not currently displayed, use the horizontal scroll bar.

2 3

IN DCA/MUTE functions

153

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

4 MUTE ON/OFF

These buttons allow operations in the display screen

to turn muting on/off for each mute group.

If the MODE button 1 is set to MUTE MASTER,

these buttons will be linked with the SCENE MEM-

ORY [1]–[12] switches of the console.

Hint

If muting is turned on, the input channels that

belong to that mute group will be in the same state as

if the [ON] switch of the console had been turned

off. They will not sent signals to the buses or output

channels.

At this time, the LED of the [ON] switch of the con-

sole will blink.

5 CLEAR

These buttons clear all input channels that were

assigned to the corresponding mute group.

6 MUTE SAFE ON/OFF

This button temporarily defeats muting for a chan-

nel. If this button is displayed as “–”, clicking it will

change the display to “ON” and will exclude that

input channel from the mute group. Click it once

again to return to the original state.

• Normally, Mute Safe operations can be performed

independently of scene memories. However when a

scene is recalled and a channel changes from monau-

ral to paired, this will be turned On for both paired

channels if either of them had been set to Mute Safe

On.

• Mute groups 9–12 can be used for either input chan-

nels or output channels. However it is not possible to

mix input and output channels in the same mute

group. For this reason, input channels cannot be

assigned to a mute group 9–12 to which an output

channel has already been assigned.

• When a scene is recalled, the mute group data of

Recall Safe channels may be adjusted so that the

recall safe settings are consistent within mute groups

9–12.

Also when a channel library is recalled, the data that

is recalled to the channel may be adjusted so that

mute groups 9–12 are consistent.

4 5

Input functions

154

PAN/ROUTING function

Send the signal from an input channel/ST IN channel to the desired MIX bus

CH to MIX (channel to mix)

[Function]

Send the signal from an input channel/ST IN channel to the desired MIX bus. In this screen you can also

select the type (VARI or FIX) for each MIX bus.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the INPUT [PAN/

ROUTING] switch (press repeatedly

until the screen shown at the right

appears)

■ Display

MENU button → INPUT PAN/

ROUTING button → CH to MIX

tab

PAN/ROUTING function

155

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

[Screen functions]

1 Pairing

Pairing can be selected or defeated for adjacent odd-

numbered → even-numbered MIX buses.

Click the heart-shaped symbol, and a popup window

will appear in which you can conﬁrm the action of

selecting or defeating pairing.

2 FIX/VARI indicator

This selects the MIX bus type for two adjacent odd-

numbered → even-numbered MIX buses.

When you click the FIX/VARI button, the MIX BUS

MODE SELECT popup window will appear, and you

can select OK to switch between the following two

types.

• FIX

The send level of the MIX bus will be ﬁxed.

Select this when you use the MIX bus as a group out-

put, or as a bus output for recording to a multi-track

recorder.

• VARI (variable)

The send level of the MIX bus will be variable.

Select this when you use the MIX bus as a send to an

external effect, or as a foldback output.

If Recall Safe is set for one of two adjacent odd-

numbered → even-numbered MIX channels,

recalling a scene may cause VARI/FIX settings to

differ between the odd-numbered and even-num-

bered channels. If this occurs, the settings after

recall will take priority.

3 Send level

In this section, the signal that is sent from the input

channel/ST IN channel (vertical column) to the MIX

bus (horizontal line) can be switched on/off, and its

send level can be adjusted.

The buttons and knobs displayed in this section will

change depending on the type (FIX or VARI) of the

destination MIX bus, and on the pairing status of the

MIX buses.

MIX buses

(send destination)

Input channel/ST IN channels (send source)

Input functions

156

When using a FIX type MIX bus independently

When using FIX type MIX buses in pairs

ON/OFF button

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent from the input

channel/ST IN channel to each MIX bus.

Input

channel 1

→MIX bus 1

Input

channel 1

→MIX bus 2

Input

channel 2

→MIX bus 1

Input

channel 2

→MIX bus 2

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 1

PAN

MIX1 (FIX)

MIX2 (FIX)

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 2

PAN

MIX1 (FIX)

MIX2 (FIX)

ON/OFF button

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent from the input

channels/ST IN channel to the two adjacent odd-numbered and

even-numbered MIX buses.

Input channel 1

→MIX buses 1/2

Input channel 2

→MIX buses 1/2

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 1

PAN

MIX1/2 (FIX)

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 2

PAN

MIX1/2 (FIX)

PAN/ROUTING function

157

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

When using VARI type MIX buses independently

When using VARI type MIX buses in pairs

ON/OFF button

This is an on/off

switch for the sig-

nal that is sent

from the input

channel/ST IN

channel to each

MIX bus.

Input

channel 1

→MIX bus 1

PRE/POST button

This button selects either

PRE or POST (post

fader) as the send point

for the signal that is sent

from the input channel/

ST IN channel to each

MIX bus. If PRE is

selected, you can also

use the PRE FADER/

PRE EQ button (next

page, 7) to specify either

pre-fader or pre-EQ.

LEVEL knob

This adjusts the

send level of the

signal that is sent

to each MIX bus

from the input

channel/ST IN

channel.

Input

channel 1

→MIX bus 2

Input

channel 2

→MIX bus 1

Input

channel 2

→MIX bus 2

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 1

PAN

MIX1 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX2 (VARI)

LEVEL

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 2

PAN

MIX1 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX2 (VARI)

LEVEL

PAN knob

This adjusts the posi-

tion of the signal that is

sent from the input

channels/ST IN channel

to the odd-numbered

MIX bus and even-num-

bered MIX bus.

Input channel 1

→MIX buses 1/2

ON/OFF button

This is an on/off switch

for the signal that is sent

from the input channels/

ST IN channel to the two

adjacent odd-numbered

→ even-numbered MIX

buses.

LEVEL knob

This adjusts the send level of

the signal that is sent from

the input channels/ST IN

channel to the two adjacent

odd-numbered → even-num-

bered MIX buses.

PRE/POST button

This button selects either PRE or

POST (post fader) as the send

point for the signal that is sent

from the input channels/ST IN

channel to the two adjacent odd-

numbered → even-numbered

MIX buses. If PRE is selected,

you can also use the PRE

FADER/PRE EQ button (next

page, 7) to specify either pre-

fader or pre-EQ.

Input channel 2

→MIX buses 1/2

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 1

PAN

MIX1/2 (VARI)

LEVEL

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 2

PAN

MIX1/2 (VARI)

LEVEL

Input functions

158

4 VARI PAN LINK

This button speciﬁes whether or not the PAN knob

that appears in the screen (at the location of 3 when

you pair VARI type MIX buses can be set indepen-

dently or will be linked with the TO ST PAN knob

(8).

If this button is on, the two PAN knobs will be linked

as follows.

This parameter is valid for all signals sent to VARI

type MIX buses from the corresponding channel.

5 FIXED MIX PAN

When sending the signal from the input channel/ST

IN channel to a FIX type MIX bus, this button selects

whether the pre-pan signal or the post-pan signal

will be sent.

When this button is on, the pre-pan signal will be

sent. When this button is off, the post-pan signal will

be sent.

Signal ﬂow when FIXED MIX PAN is off

Signal flow when FIXED MIX PAN is on

This parameter is valid for all signals sent to FIX

type MIX buses from the corresponding channel.

6 TO ST (to stereo)

This button speciﬁes whether or not the signal from

the input channel/ST IN channel will be sent to the

STEREO bus.

This is linked with the [TO ST] switch in the

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block of the CS1D.

7 PRE FADER/PRE EQ buttons

When the PRE/POST button is set to “PRE” for a

VARI type MIX bus, this button lets you specify in

greater detail the location from which the signal will

be output from the input channel/ST IN channel.

• When the PRE FADER button is on

The signal will be sent from immediately before the

fader.

• When the PRE EQ button is on

The signal will be sent from immediately before the

EQ.

This parameter is valid for all signals that are sent

from the corresponding channel to a VARI type

MIX bus whose PRE/POST button is set to “PRE.”

8 PAN

This adjusts the position of the signal that is sent

from the input channel/ST IN channel to the STE-

REO bus. (The current value is shown in the numer-

ical box immediately below.)

This is linked with the INPUT [PAN] encoder in the

INPUT block of the CS1D.

9 PAN MODE

This speciﬁes whether or not pan settings will be

linked between adjacent odd-numbered → even-

numbered input channels (or between the left and

right channels of a ST IN channel).

You can select only one of the following three but-

tons.

• INDIVIDUAL

In this mode, the two pan settings are independent.

• GANG PAN

The two pan settings will be linked in the same direc-

tion. If this button is turned on when the two pan

8 0 9

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL

PANPAN

PAN

MIX1/2 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL

PAN

MIX1 (FIX)

MIX2 (FIX)

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL

PAN

MIX1 (FIX)

MIX2 (FIX)

PAN/ROUTING function

159

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

settings are at different values, pan will move in tan-

dem while maintaining the difference in values.

This allows you to change the location while main-

taining the stereo spread.

• INV. GANG (inverted gang)

The two pan settings will be linked in the opposite

direction.

This allows you to change the stereo spread while

maintaining the location.

PAN MODE is always valid even if the send source

input channels are not paired.

If you select GANG PAN or INV.GANG mode

when the two pan knobs are turned all the way to

the left and right, the PAN knobs will have no

effect.

0 Pairing

This indicates the number and pairing status of the

send source input channels.

You can also click the heart symbol to set/defeat pair-

ing.

Hint

The settings of parameters 1–7 are shared for

input channels for which pairing is selected and for

ST IN channels.

Input functions

160

LCR

[Function]

Make settings for LCR mode to allow three-channel playback, with a CENTER channel added to the L/R

channels of the STEREO bus.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the INPUT [PAN/

ROUTING] switch (press repeatedly

until the screen shown at the right

appears)

■ Display

MENU button → INPUT PAN/

ROUTING button → LCR tab

[Screen functions]

1 CENTER BUS CONTROL

When this button is on, the STEREO B channel will

function as the CENTER channel.

By adding the CENTER channel to the L/R channels

of the STEREO A bus, you can implement three-

channel playback.

When this button is off, the CENTER channel sig-

nal will no longer be sent to STEREO B, meaning

that it will not be output externally. (The same LR

signal as STEREO A will be sent to STEREO B.)

However even when the CENTER BUS CONTROL

button is off, you can operate LCR pan for channels

in which LCR mode is turned on. (When you turn

the button on, the LCR setting will immediately

take effect.)

2 LCR (LCR mode on/off)

For each input channel/ST IN channel, turn LCR

mode on/off.

For channels whose LCR mode is on, you can use the

INPUT [PAN] encoder on the CS1D top panel to

simultaneously control the level of the L/R channels

and the CENTER channel.

Hint

On channels for which LCR mode on, rotating the

[PAN] encoder will cause the perimeter LEDs to light

as follows.

32 4

PAN/ROUTING function

161

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

LED lighting

• When LCR=off

• When LCR=on

3 CSR (center side ratio)

Adjust the level ratio of the CENTER channel relative

to the L/R channels. The range is 0.0–1.0.

If CSR is set to 0.0, rotating the [PAN] encoder will

cause the signal levels of the L/R channels to change

as shown in LCR response curve 1, below.

In this case, the [PAN] encoder will function as a

conventional PAN control, and no signal will be sent

to the CENTER channel.

LCR response curve 1

If CSR is set to 1.0, rotating the [PAN] encoder will

cause the signal levels sent to the L/R channels and

the CENTER channel to change as shown in LCR

response curve 2, below.

When the [PAN] encoder is in the center location,

the signal level of the CENTER channel will be maxi-

mum, and no signal will be sent to the L/R channels.

LCR response curve 2

4 Pairing

This shows the number and pairing status of the

input channel.

You can also click the heart symbol to set/defeat pair-

ing. Parameters 2–3 will be linked for paired chan-

nels.

Hint

The master level of the CENTER channel is con-

trolled by the fader of the STEREO B block on the

CS1D. If necessary, you can also use the internal EQ

or compressor of the STEREO B channel to process

the signal.

One of the output jacks patched to the STEREO B

channel will be used as the output jack for the CEN-

TER channel. (If the CENTER BUS CONTROL but-

ton is on, the same signal will be output to the L/R

channels of STEREO B.)

PAN

CRL

Signal sent to the L channel

Signal sent to the R channel

[PAN] encoder

Signal level

CRL

Signal sent to the C channe

Signal sent to the L channel

[PAN] encoder

Signal level

Signal sent to the R channe

Input functions

162

IN CH VIEW (input channel view) function

View the settings of an input channel

CH VIEW (channel view)

[Function]

View the settings of the currently selected input channel/ST IN channel. In this screen you can also edit the

parameter settings and access individual screens.

■ Console

In the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS

block, press the INPUT [CH VIEW]

switch

■ Display

MENU button → CH VIEW tab

[Screen functions]

1 SEL (channel select)

Use this button to select the channel that you wish to

view and control.

When you click this button, the CH SELECT popup

window will appear.

2 Channel number/name

This displays the number and short name of the cur-

rently selected channel.

3 Pairing

This displays the pairing status of the currently

selected channel.

You can also click the heart symbol to set/defeat pairing.

Hint

When a paired input channel or a ST IN channel is

selected, a single screen will display the parameters

for both channels, as shown in the following illustra-

tion.

IN CH VIEW (input channel view) function

163

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

4 Information for the patched unit

This area displays information such as the type of

input unit/card assigned to that channel, the input

level, gain setting, input jack A/B selection, phantom

power on/off, and phase switch status.

You can also use the buttons and knobs to edit the

settings.

5 EQ (equalizer)

This area displays the on/off status of the internal

EQ, the approximate response curve, and the peak

level of the signal that has passed through the EQ.

You can click the ON/OFF button to turn the EQ on/

off, or click the mini-graph to access the EQ

PARAMETER popup window for the corresponding

channel.

6 GATE

This area displays the on/off status of the internal

gate, the approximate response curve, the amount of

gain reduction, and the peak level of the signal that

has passed through the gate.

You can click the ON/OFF button to turn the gate

on/off, or click the mini-graph to access the GATE

PARAMETER popup window for the corresponding

channel.

7 COMP (compressor)

This area displays the on/off status of the internal

compressor, the approximate response curve, the

amount of gain reduction, and the peak level of the

signal that has passed through the compressor.

You can click the ON/OFF button to turn the com-

pressor on/off, or click the mini-graph to access the

COMP PARAMETER popup window for the corre-

sponding channel.

Hint

In the UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen, you

can specify whether the GR meter display will be

linked to the compressor on/off setting. If linking is

turned on, the GR meter will be displayed only when

the compressor is on, and will be hidden when the

compressor is off. If linking is turned off, the GR

meter will always be displayed.

8 DELAY

This area displays the on/off status and delay time of

the delay function.

You can also use the buttons and knobs to change the

setting. The upper numerical box always displays the

delay time in msec units. The lower numerical box

displays the delay time in the units currently selected

by the IN DELAY function.

9 MIX SEND

This area displays the on/off status, send level, pre/

post, and pairing status of the signal that is sent from

the currently selected channel to each MIX bus.

You can use the buttons and knobs to modify the set-

tings.

Use the scroll bar located at the right to view the MIX

buses that are not currently shown in the screen.

0 PAN

This area displays the status of the VARI PAN LINK

button, FIXED MIX PAN button, TO ST button, and

TO ST PAN knob that are shown in the CH to MIX

screen of the PAN/ROUTING function.

You can use the buttons and knob to modify the set-

tings.

Input functions

164

A CH LIBRARY (channel library)

This button accesses the INPUT CHANNEL

LIBRARY popup window, where you can store/recall

mix parameters by channel.

B DCA groups/MUTE groups

This area displays the DCA groups/MUTE groups to

which that input channel belongs.

You can also modify these settings.

C RECALL SAFE/MUTE SAFE

This area displays the on/off status of mute safe (a

state in which the channel is exempted from mute

group operations) and recall safe (a state in which

the channel is exempted from scene recall opera-

tions).

You can also modify these settings.

D LCR

This shows the on/off status of LCR mode. You can

also change this setting.

E INSERT

This shows the currently selected insert I/O point

(the location in the signal route where an external

device is inserted) for the channel.

You can use the ON/OFF button to switch insertion

on/off.

F Meter

This peak level meter displays the input level of the

channel. The point at which the level is detected can

be set by the METER function.

G Fader

This adjusts the input level of the channel. It is linked

with the [INPUT] faders on the top panel of the

CS1D.

H CUE

This button is used to monitor the input channel.

It is linked with the INPUT [CUE] switch on the top

panel of the CS1D.

I ON/OFF

This button switches the input channel on/off.

It is linked with the INPUT [ON] switch on the top

panel of the CS1D.

[Procedure]

Pairing input channels

1. Select one of the functions IN EQ, IN GATE/COMP,

IN DELAY, IN PAN/ROUTING, or IN CH VIEW

METER, and access the screen for the channel that

you wish to pair.

2. Click the divided heart symbol for the channel that

you wish to pair.

The CHANNEL PAIRING popup window will

appear.

In this window you can select how parameter settings

will be handled when the channels are paired.

• CH A to B (a channel number will appear in A

and B)

The parameters of channel A will be copied to chan-

nel B.

• CH B to A (a channel number will appear in A

and B)

The parameters of channel B will be copied to chan-

nel A.

• RESET BOTH

The parameters of both channels will be reset to the

default settings.

When you click one of the above buttons, only the

parameters that are linked when paired will be cop-

ied or reset. The following settings will also be cop-

ied or reset in addition to the channel parameters.

• The on/off state of Solo/Cue

• The on/off state of Solo Safe

• The on/off state of Recall Safe

• The on/off state of Mute Safe

IN CH VIEW (input channel view) function

165

IN PATCHIN HA/INSERTIN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAYIN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

IN CH VIEW

3. To pair the channels, click the CH A to B button, the

CH B to A button (a channel number will appear in

A and B), or the RESET BOTH button. If you decide

not to specify pairing, click the CANCEL button.

Hint

You can also enable/defeat pairing by pressing the

[SEL] switches of two adjacent input channels on the

console.

Defeating pairing

1. Select one of the functions IN EQ, IN GATE/COMP,

IN DELAY, IN PAN/ROUTING, or IN CH VIEW,

and access the screen for the channel that you wish

to pair.

2. Click the heart symbol for the channels that you

wish to un-pair.

A popup window will appear, asking you to conﬁrm

that you wish to defeat pairing.

3. To defeat, click the OK button. If you decide not to

defeat pairing, click the CANCEL button.

Hint

You can also enable/defeat pairing by pressing the

[SEL] switches of two adjacent input channels on the

console.

166

Libraries

A library is an internal memory area where various settings of the PM1D system can be saved for later use.

The PM1D system provides a variety of libraries for patch data, EQ data, compressor data, and effect data.

These can be recalled from the corresponding screens.

Basic library operation

This section explains the basic procedure common to all libraries.

[Procedure]

Storing settings of the PM1D system in a library

Here’s how to store PM1D settings in a library.

1. Access the library popup window for the type of

data you wish to store.

For details on how to access the popup window, refer

to the explanation for each library. Depending on the

type of library, you will ﬁrst need to select the item

(channel, effect, GEQ module, etc.) that you wish to

store.

• An example of a library popup window

2. From the library list, select the store destination

number, and click that line.

At the right side of each library popup window, there

is a list called the “library list.” Use this list to select

the memory number for the data that will be stored

or recalled. When you click the line for the desired

number within the list, that line will be highlighted.

This indicates that this number is selected for dis-

play/editing.

• An example of a library list

Some library lists may contain data marked “READ

ONLY.” This is preset data written at the factory.

Data cannot be overwritten onto these numbers.

3. Click the STORE button.

The LIBRARY STORE popup window will appear, in

which you can assign a name to the data that will be

stored.

•

An example of a LIBRARY STORE popup window

4. Use the text palette to name the data.

For details on using the text palette, refer to “CS1D

Operating Manual (Basic Operation)” →P.20.

Basic library operation

167

Basic library

operation

UNIT

LIBRARY

PATCH

LIBRARY

NAME

LIBRARY

INPUT EQ

LIBRARY

OUTPUT EQ

LIBRARY

INPUT GATE

LIBRARY

INPUT COMP

LIBRARY

OUTPUT COMP

LIBRARY

INPUT CH

LIBRARY

OUTPUT CH

LIBRARY

EFFECT

LIBRARY

GEQ

LIBRARY

5. Click the STORE button.

A window will appear, asking you to conﬁrm.

• Window to conﬁrm Store operation

Hint

If CONFIRMATION is turned off in the UTILITY

PREFERENCE screen, the conﬁrmation message will

not appear, and the Store or Recall operation will be

executed immediately.

In the case of a library used to store settings of indi-

vidual channels, selecting a different channel after

the above popup window appears will cause the

newly selected channel to be the store source.

6. To execute the Store operation, click the OK button.

When the Store operation is executed, the stored data

will be added to the library. You will exit the library

popup window and return to the previous screen. If

you click the CANCEL button instead of the OK but-

ton, the Store operation will be cancelled, and you

will return to the library popup window. If you then

press the EXIT button, you will exit the library

popup window and return to the previous screen.

Recalling (loading) library settings into the

PM1D system

Settings that were saved in a library (or read-only preset

data) can be recalled into the PM1D system as follows.

1. Access the popup window for the desired library.

For details on how to access the popup window, refer

to the explanation for each library. Depending on the

type of library, you will ﬁrst need to select the item

(channel, effect, GEQ module, etc.) that you wish to

recall.

2. From the library list, select the number that you

wish to recall, and click that line.

The line you clicked will be highlighted to indicate

that this number has been selected for display/edit-

ing.

Hint

Some library lists may contain data marked “READ

ONLY.” This is preset data written at the factory. Pre-

set data can be recalled in the same way as the data

that you yourself have stored.

3. Click the RECALL button.

A window will appear, asking you to conﬁrm the

Recall operation.

• Recall confirmation window

In the case of a library used to recall settings of indi-

vidual channels, selecting a different channel after

the above popup window appears will cause the

newly selected channel to be the recall destination.

4. To execute the Recall, click the OK button.

When the Recall operation is executed, the data you

selected in step 2 will be loaded into the PM1D sys-

tem. You will exit the library popup window and

return to the previous screen. If you click the CAN-

CEL button instead of the OK button, the Recall

operation will be cancelled, and you will return to

the library popup window. If you then click the EXIT

button, you will exit the library popup window and

return to the previous screen.

Hint

If CONFIRMATION is turned off in the UTILITY

PREFERENCE screen, the conﬁrmation message will

not appear, and the Store or Recall operation will be

executed immediately.

Libraries

168

Editing library data before recalling it

Here’s how you can edit library data within the library

window (before recalling it into the PM1D system), and

recall the edited data.

1. Access the popup window for the desired library.

For details on how to access each library, refer to the

page that explains the corresponding library.

2. In the library list, click the line that contains the

data you wish to edit.

The line you clicked will be highlighted, and the set-

tings of that data will be displayed in the edit section.

The “edit section” is the area in which you can view

and edit the settings of the data that is currently

selected in the library list.

• An example of an edit section

3. Use the buttons and knobs of the edit section to

edit the settings.

The items that can be edited will depend on the type

of library. For details refer to the pages that explain

the corresponding library. When the data currently

selected in the library list has been edited, the screen

will indicate “EDIT.”

In this state, the data has only been edited tempo

rarily; the library memory has not been updated. If

you wish to keep the changes you made, click the

STORE button or the APPLY EDIT button to per-

form the Store operation.

4. Recall the edited data.

When you click the RECALL button, the edited data

will be recalled.

Hint

If you select an empty library in step 2, the default

values of that library will be displayed in the edit sec-

tion. If you modify these settings, the “EDIT” indica-

tor will appear, and you will be able to recall the

settings in the same way as any library.

The popup window will close following step 4, but

the edited content is not saved in the library at this

time. Execute the Store operation as necessary.

Editing library data

Data that is stored in a library can be edited within the

library window (without recalling it into the PM1D sys-

tem), and the edited contents can be saved in the origi-

nal memory number.

1. Access the popup window for the desired library.

For details on how to access the popup window, refer

to the explanation for each library.

2. From the library list, select the data that you wish

to edit, and click that line.

The line you clicked will be highlighted, and the con-

tents (settings) of that data will be displayed in the

edit section. The “edit section” is an area where the

currently-selected contents of the library list can be

viewed and edited.

•

An example of the edit section

3. Use the buttons or knobs of the edit section to edit

the contents.

The items that can be edited will depend on the type

of library. For details refer to the explanatory pages

for each type of library. If the data currently selected

in the library list has been edited, the display will

indicate “EDIT.”

4. If you wish to store the edited data in the same

library number, click the APPLY EDIT button.

The LIBRARY STORE popup window will appear,

allowing you to assign a name for saving.

In some libraries, the list will contain data marked

“READ ONLY.” This is preset data that was written

at the factory. If one of these numbers is selected, it

is not possible to store the edited data into its origi-

nal number. (Nor will it be possible to press the

APPLY EDIT button.) If necessary, recall the data

into the PM1D system before you edit it.

Basic library operation

169

Basic library

operation

UNIT

LIBRARY

PATCH

LIBRARY

NAME

LIBRARY

INPUT EQ

LIBRARY

OUTPUT EQ

LIBRARY

INPUT GATE

LIBRARY

INPUT COMP

LIBRARY

OUTPUT COMP

LIBRARY

INPUT CH

LIBRARY

OUTPUT CH

LIBRARY

EFFECT

LIBRARY

GEQ

LIBRARY

•

The LIBRARY STORE popup window

5. As necessary, use the text palette to assign a name

to the data.

6. Click the STORE button.

A window will ask you to conﬁrm the operation.

•

Window to confirm Store operation

7. To execute the Store operation, click the OK button.

The edited data will be stored in its original number.

If you click the CANCEL button instead of the OK

button, the Store operation will be cancelled.

Changing only the name of the data

If desired, you can change only the name (title) of the

data in the library list.

1. Access the popup window of the desired library.

For details on how to access each library, refer to the

explanatory pages for the corresponding library.

2. From the library list, select the number for the data

whose name you wish to change, and click that line.

The line you clicked will be highlighted, and the con-

tent (settings) of the data will be displayed in the edit

section.

3. Click the TITLE EDIT button.

The LIBRARY STORE popup window will appear,

where you can assign a name to the data.

•

LIBRARY STORE popup window

4. Use the text palette to assign a new name to the

data.

5. Click the STORE button.

A window will ask you to conﬁrm before storing the

data.

•

Window to confirm Store operation

6. To store the new title, click the OK button.

The new title will be stored. If you click the CANCEL

button instead of the OK button, the Store operation

will be cancelled.

Libraries

170

UNIT LIBRARY

[Function]

Here you can store and recall the settings (unit data) of all input/output units included in the PM1D system.

Here you can also view and edit the connection state and settings of the input/output units.

■

Display

button

→

IN HA/INSERT

button

→

ST IN INS/UNIT LIB

tab

→

UNIT LIBRARY

button

→

OUT INSERT

button

→

ST MAS INS/UNIT LIB

tab

→

UNIT LIBRARY

button

The unit data that is saved in

the Unit library contains set-

tings for both input units and

output units.

[Screen functions]

The screen shown above is for when the library is

accessed from the IN HA/INSERT function.

UNIT SELECT

For the input unit data that is currently selected in

the library list

, these buttons select the type of

input/output unit that is to be displayed/edited.

The settings of the units you select here will be dis-

played in the edit section

Edit section

This displays a list of settings for each card of the

units you selected in

. You can use the buttons and

knobs to edit the settings.

Use the right scroll bars to access cards that are not

currently displayed.

Input/output selection

Select whether the input unit (INPUT button) or the

output unit (OUTPUT button) settings will be dis-

played in

UNIT LIBRARY

171

Basic library

operation

UNIT

LIBRARY

PATCH

LIBRARY

NAME

LIBRARY

INPUT EQ

LIBRARY

OUTPUT EQ

LIBRARY

INPUT GATE

LIBRARY

INPUT COMP

LIBRARY

OUTPUT COMP

LIBRARY

INPUT CH

LIBRARY

OUTPUT CH

LIBRARY

EFFECT

LIBRARY

GEQ

LIBRARY

Library list

This shows a list of the unit data stored in memory.

The highlighted line is currently selected for opera-

tions.

STORE/RECALL buttons

These buttons store/recall unit data.

Each button has the following function.

•

RECALL

Load the currently selected unit data from the library

list into the PM1D system.

•

STORE

Store the input/output unit settings of the PM1D

system to the number currently selected in the

library list. When you click this button, the LIBRARY

STORE popup window will appear, allowing you to

assign a name to the input unit data.

If EVENT RECALLING is set to ENABLE in the TC

EVENT screen, it is not possible to press the

STORE button.

•

TITLE EDIT

This edits the title of the unit data currently selected

in the library list.

The TITLE EDIT button is valid only if data has

actually been stored in the number selected in the

library list. If a number with no data is selected, the

button text will be gray, and the button cannot be

used.

•

APPLY EDIT

Store the edited content of the INPUT UNIT

LIBRARY window back into the same library num-

ber.

Hint

The APPLY EDIT button is valid only if the data of

the number selected in the library list has been

edited. If un-edited data is selected, and if a number

marked “READ ONLY” is selected, the button text

will be gray, and the button cannot be used.

EDIT

If you edit the unit data selected in the library list

this area will indicate “EDIT.”

EXIT

This button exits the INPUT UNIT LIBRARY win-

dow and returns to the previous screen.

•

Even if you recall a unit library, the units or cards

that are actually connected to the input/output jacks

will take priority.

•

When recalling a library that was saved while a unit

was connected, if no unit is installed for the recall

destination input/output jacks (for example even if a

virtual unit is speciﬁed), the settings of the recall

source unit will be used, and a virtual unit will be

newly speciﬁed.

Libraries

172

PATCH LIBRARY

[Function]

Here you can save (store) all data for input channels, output channels, and input/output jacks patched to

insert I/O (patch data). Previously stored data can also be loaded (recalled) into the PM1D system.

■ Display

MENU button → IN PATCH button

→ IN PATCH/DIRECT OUT

PATCH/INSERT PATCH tab →

PATCH LIBRARY button

MENU button → OUT PATCH/

INSERT PATCH button → PATCH

LIBRARY button

[Screen functions]

1 Edit section

From the patch data currently selected in the library

list (3), you can select speciﬁc elements and view

the patching status in this section.

You can also click the grid area to edit the patch data,

and store the edited data back into the library list. To

view an area that is not currently shown, use the ver-

tical and horizontal scroll bars.

The unit settings indicate the current status.

If you wish to create the same state as when you

saved the library data, you must also make the same

unit settings.

2 INPUT PATCH/OUTPUT PATCH

These buttons select the elements that are shown in

window 1, from the following choices.

[INPUT PATCH]

• INPUT................ Input channel patch data

• INSERT IN......... Insert in (input channel) patch

data

• INSERT OUT..... Insert out (input channel) patch

data

• DIRECT OUT.... Direct out patch data

[OUTPUT PATCH]

• OUTPUT ........... Output channel patch data

• INSERT IN......... Insert in (output channel) patch

data

PATCH LIBRARY

173

Basic library

operation

UNIT

LIBRARY

PATCH

LIBRARY

NAME

LIBRARY

INPUT EQ

LIBRARY

OUTPUT EQ

LIBRARY

INPUT GATE

LIBRARY

INPUT COMP

LIBRARY

OUTPUT COMP

LIBRARY

INPUT CH

LIBRARY

OUTPUT CH

LIBRARY

EFFECT

LIBRARY

GEQ

LIBRARY

• INSERT OUT .....Insert out (output channel)

patch data

3 Library list

This shows the numbers and names (titles) of the

patch data currently stored in the library.

The highlighted number indicates the data that is

currently selected.

4 STORE/RECALL buttons

These buttons store/recall patch data.

Each button has the following function.

• RECALL

Load the currently selected patch data from the

library list into the PM1D system.

• Recall will not occur if a unit is not installed, or if a

unit is installed with input/output reversed.

• Similarly, recall will not occur if a card is not

installed, or if a card is installed with input/output

reversed.

• A patch will be recalled even if the recall source

library contents differ from the type of unit or card

that is installed or virtually-set for the recall destina-

tion channel.

• STORE

Store all patch data of the PM1D system to the num-

ber currently selected in the library list. When you

click this button, the LIBRARY STORE popup win-

dow will appear, allowing you to assign a name to the

patch data.

If EVENT RECALLING is set to ENABLE in the TC

EVENT screen, it is not possible to press the

STORE button.

• TITLE EDIT

This edits the title of the patch data currently selected

in the library list.

The TITLE EDIT button is valid only if data has

actually been stored in the number selected in the

library list. If a number with no data is selected, the

button text will be gray, and the button cannot be

used.

• APPLY EDIT

Store the edited content of the PATCH LIBRARY

window back into the same library number.

Hint

The APPLY EDIT button is valid only if the data of

the number selected in the library list has been

edited. If un-edited data is selected, and if a number

marked “READ ONLY” is selected, the button text

will be gray, and the button cannot be used.

5 EDIT

When you edit the patch data selected in the library

list (3), this area will indicate “EDIT.”

6 EXIT

This button exits the PATCH LIBRARY window and

returns to the previous screen.

Libraries

174

NAME LIBRARY

[Function]

Here you can store and recall all short names and long names (name data) assigned to input channels, output

channels, and DCA groups.

■ Display

MENU button → IN PATCH button

→ NAME tab → NAME LIBRARY

button

MENU button → OUT PATCH but-

ton → NAME tab → NAME

LIBRARY button

[Screen functions]

1 LIST SELECT

For the name data that is currently selected in the

library list (6), these buttons select the type of item

that is to be displayed/edited.

The short names/long names of the type you select

here will be displayed in the name list (2) located at

the right.

The following types can be selected.

• INPUT CH .........Input channels 1–96, ST IN

channels 1–8

• MIX.....................MIX channels 1–48

• MATRIX .............MATRIX channels 1–24

• STEREO..............STEREO A/B channels

• DCA ....................DCA groups 1–12

2 Name list

This list shows the short names/long names of the

speciﬁed type from the name data currently selected

in the library list (6).

When you click a short name or long name ﬁeld, it

will be displayed in light blue and can be edited.

3 Text box

When a name ﬁeld in the name list (2) is in an edit-

able state, the name subject to editing will be dis-

played here. Use the character palette (4) to input

characters into this box, and click the ENTER button

located at the right to input the name into the edit-

able ﬁeld (displayed in light blue) of the name list

(2). When input is completed, the editable state will

be defeated.

NAME LIBRARY

175

Basic library

operation

UNIT

LIBRARY

PATCH

LIBRARY

NAME

LIBRARY

INPUT EQ

LIBRARY

OUTPUT EQ

LIBRARY

INPUT GATE

LIBRARY

INPUT COMP

LIBRARY

OUTPUT COMP

LIBRARY

INPUT CH

LIBRARY

OUTPUT CH

LIBRARY

EFFECT

LIBRARY

GEQ

LIBRARY

4 Character palette

Use this palette to input characters, numerals, and

symbols into the text box. (For details on inputting

text and using the various buttons, refer to “CS1D

Operating Manual (Basic Operation)” →P.20.)

5 EDIT

When you edit the name data that you selected from

the library list (6), this area will indicate “EDIT.”

6 Library list

This lists the name data stored in memory.

The highlighted line indicates the data that is cur-

rently selected for operations.

7 STORE/RECALL buttons

These buttons store/recall name data.

Each button has the following function.

• RECALL

Load the currently selected name data from the

library list into the PM1D system.

• STORE

Store the name data of the PM1D system to the num-

ber currently selected in the library list.

When you click this button, the LIBRARY STORE

popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a

name to the name data.

If EVENT RECALLING is set to ENABLE in the TC

EVENT screen, it is not possible to press the

STORE button.

• TITLE EDIT

This edits the title of the name data currently selected

in the library list.

The TITLE EDIT button is valid only if data has

actually been stored in the number selected in the

library list. If a number with no data is selected, the

button text will be gray, and the button cannot be

used.

• APPLY EDIT

Store the edited content of the NAME LIBRARY win-

dow back into the same library number.

Hint

The APPLY EDIT button is valid only if the data of

the number selected in the library list has been

edited. If un-edited data is selected, and if a number

marked “READ ONLY” is selected, the button text

will be gray, and the button cannot be used.

8 EXIT

This button exits the NAME LIBRARY window and

returns to the previous screen.

Libraries

176

INPUT EQ LIBRARY

[Function]

Here you can store and recall EQ settings (input EQ data) for the currently selected input channel.

■ Display

MENU button → IN EQ button →

EQ PARAMETER tab → EQ

LIBRARY button

[Screen functions]

1 Edit section

This area displays the settings of the input EQ data

currently selected in the library list (2).

You can use the buttons and knobs to edit the data.

Use the various PARAMETER buttons to switch the

frequency band that is displayed.

2 Library list

This shows a list of the input EQ data stored in mem-

ory. The highlighted line is currently selected for

operations.

INPUT EQ LIBRARY

177

Basic library

operation

UNIT

LIBRARY

PATCH

LIBRARY

NAME

LIBRARY

INPUT EQ

LIBRARY

OUTPUT EQ

LIBRARY

INPUT GATE

LIBRARY

INPUT COMP

LIBRARY

OUTPUT COMP

LIBRARY

INPUT CH

LIBRARY

OUTPUT CH

LIBRARY

EFFECT

LIBRARY

GEQ

LIBRARY

3 STORE/RECALL buttons

These buttons store/recall input EQ data.

Each button has the following function.

• RECALL

Load the currently selected input EQ data from the

library list into the input channel selected in the EQ

PARAMETER screen (IN GATE/COMP function).

• STORE

Store the input EQ data currently selected in the EQ

PARAMETER screen (IN GATE/COMP function) to

the number selected in the library list. When you

click this button, the LIBRARY STORE popup win-

dow will appear, allowing you to assign a name to the

input EQ data.

Input EQ data displayed as “READ ONLY” in the

library list is read-only preset data. New EQ data

cannot be overwritten onto these locations.

• TITLE EDIT

This edits the title of the input EQ data currently

selected in the library list.

The TITLE EDIT button is valid only if data has

actually been stored in the number selected in the

library list. If a number with no data is selected, the

button text will be gray, and the button cannot be

used.

• APPLY EDIT

Store the edited content of the INPUT EQ LIBRARY

window back into the same library number.

Hint

The APPLY EDIT button is valid only if the data of

the number selected in the library list has been

edited. If un-edited data is selected, and if a number

marked “READ ONLY” is selected, the button text

will be gray, and the button cannot be used.

4 EDIT

If you edit the input EQ data selected in the library

list (2), this area will indicate “EDIT.”

5 EXIT

This button exits the INPUT EQ LIBRARY window

and returns to the previous screen.

Libraries

178

OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY

[Function]

Here you can store and recall EQ settings (output EQ data) for the currently selected output channel.

■ Display

MENU button → OUT EQ button

→ EQ PARAMETER tab → EQ

LIBRARY button

[Screen functions]

1 Edit section

This area displays the settings of the output EQ data

currently selected in the library list (2). You can use

the buttons and knobs to edit the data. Use the vari-

ous PARAMETER buttons to switch the frequency

band that is displayed.

2 Library list

This shows a list of the output EQ data stored in

memory. The highlighted line is currently selected

for operations.

OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY

179

Basic library

operation

UNIT

LIBRARY

PATCH

LIBRARY

NAME

LIBRARY

INPUT EQ

LIBRARY

OUTPUT EQ

LIBRARY

INPUT GATE

LIBRARY

INPUT COMP

LIBRARY

OUTPUT COMP

LIBRARY

INPUT CH

LIBRARY

OUTPUT CH

LIBRARY

EFFECT

LIBRARY

GEQ

LIBRARY

3 STORE/RECALL buttons

These buttons store/recall output EQ data.

Each button has the following function.

• RECALL

Load the currently selected output EQ data from the

library list into the output channel selected in the EQ

PARAMETER screen.

• STORE

Store the output channel EQ data currently selected

in the EQ PARAMETER screen to the number

selected in the library list. When you click this but-

ton, the LIBRARY STORE popup window will

appear, allowing you to assign a name to the output

EQ data.

Output EQ data displayed as “READ ONLY” in the

library list is read-only preset data. New EQ data

cannot be overwritten onto these locations.

• TITLE EDIT

This edits the title of the output EQ data currently

selected in the library list.

The TITLE EDIT button is valid only if data has

actually been stored in the number selected in the

library list. If a number with no data is selected, the

button text will be gray, and the button cannot be

used.

• APPLY EDIT

Store the edited content of the OUTPUT EQ

LIBRARY window back into the same library num-

ber.

Hint

The APPLY EDIT button is valid only if the data of

the number selected in the library list has been

edited. If un-edited data is selected, and if a number

marked “READ ONLY” is selected, the button text

will be gray, and the button cannot be used.

4 EDIT

If you edit the output EQ data selected in the library

list (2), this area will indicate “EDIT.”

5 EXIT

This button exits the OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY win-

dow and returns to the previous screen.

Libraries

180

INPUT GATE LIBRARY

[Function]

Here you can store and recall gate settings (input gate data) for the currently selected input channel.

■ Display

MENU button → IN GATE/COMP

button → GATE PARAMETER tab

→ INPUT GATE LIBRARY button

[Screen functions]

1 Edit section

This area displays the settings of the input gate data

currently selected in the library list (2). You can use

the buttons and knobs to edit the data.

It is not possible to change the type here. If you

wish to change the type, you must recall library

data that uses the desired type.

2 Library list

This shows a list of the input gate data stored in

memory.

The highlighted line is currently selected for opera-

tions.

INPUT GATE LIBRARY

181

Basic library

operation

UNIT

LIBRARY

PATCH

LIBRARY

NAME

LIBRARY

INPUT EQ

LIBRARY

OUTPUT EQ

LIBRARY

INPUT GATE

LIBRARY

INPUT COMP

LIBRARY

OUTPUT COMP

LIBRARY

INPUT CH

LIBRARY

OUTPUT CH

LIBRARY

EFFECT

LIBRARY

GEQ

LIBRARY

3 STORE/RECALL buttons

These buttons store/recall input gate data.

Each button has the following function.

• RECALL

Load the currently selected input gate data from the

library list into the input channel selected in the

GATE PARAMETER screen.

• STORE

Store the gate settings of the input channel currently

selected in the GATE PARAMETER screen to the

number selected in the library list. When you click

this button, the LIBRARY STORE popup window

will appear, allowing you to assign a name to the

input gate data.

Input gate data displayed as “READ ONLY” in the

library list is read-only preset data. New gate data

cannot be overwritten onto these locations.

• TITLE EDIT

This edits the title of the input gate data currently

selected in the library list.

The TITLE EDIT button is valid only if data has

actually been stored in the number selected in the

library list. If a number with no data is selected, the

button text will be gray, and the button cannot be

used.

• APPLY EDIT

Store the edited content of the INPUT gate LIBRARY

window back into the same library number.

Hint

The APPLY EDIT button is valid only if the data of

the number selected in the library list has been

edited. If un-edited data is selected, and if a number

marked “READ ONLY” is selected, the button text

will be gray, and the button cannot be used.

4 EDIT

If you edit the input gate data selected in the library

list (2), this area will indicate “EDIT.”

5 EXIT

This button exits the INPUT GATE LIBRARY win-

dow and returns to the previous screen.

Key-in settings are not stored in the library.

Libraries

182

INPUT COMP LIBRARY

[Function]

Here you can store and recall compressor settings (input compressor data) for the currently selected input

channel.

■ Display

MENU button → IN GATE/COMP

button → COMP PARAMETER tab

→ INPUT COMP LIBRARY button

[Screen functions]

1 Edit section

This area displays the settings of the input compres-

sor data currently selected in the library list (2). You

can use the buttons and knobs to edit the data.

It is not possible to change the type here. If you

wish to change the type, you must recall library

data that uses the desired type.

2 Library list

This shows a list of the input compressor data stored

in memory.

The highlighted line is currently selected for opera-

tions.

INPUT COMP LIBRARY

183

Basic library

operation

UNIT

LIBRARY

PATCH

LIBRARY

NAME

LIBRARY

INPUT EQ

LIBRARY

OUTPUT EQ

LIBRARY

INPUT GATE

LIBRARY

INPUT COMP

LIBRARY

OUTPUT COMP

LIBRARY

INPUT CH

LIBRARY

OUTPUT CH

LIBRARY

EFFECT

LIBRARY

GEQ

LIBRARY

3 STORE/RECALL buttons

These buttons store/recall input compressor data.

Each button has the following function.

• RECALL

Load the currently selected input compressor data

from the library list into the input channel selected

in the COMP PARAMETER screen.

• STORE

Store the input compressor data currently selected in

the COMP PARAMETER screen to the number

selected in the library list. When you click this but-

ton, the LIBRARY STORE popup window will

appear, allowing you to assign a name to the input

compressor data.

Input compressor data displayed as “READ ONLY”

in the library list is read-only preset data. New com-

pressor data cannot be overwritten onto these loca-

tions.

• TITLE EDIT

This edits the title of the input compressor data cur-

rently selected in the library list.

The TITLE EDIT button is valid only if data has

actually been stored in the number selected in the

library list. If a number with no data is selected, the

button text will be gray, and the button cannot be

used.

• APPLY EDIT

Store the edited content of the INPUT COMP

LIBRARY window back into the same library num-

ber.

Hint

The APPLY EDIT button is valid only if the data of

the number selected in the library list has been

edited. If un-edited data is selected, and if a number

marked “READ ONLY” is selected, the button text

will be gray, and the button cannot be used.

4 EDIT

If you edit the input compressor data selected in the

library list (2), this area will indicate “EDIT.”

5 EXIT

This button exits the INPUT COMP LIBRARY win-

dow and returns to the previous screen.

Key-in settings are not stored in the library.

Libraries

184

OUTPUT COMP LIBRARY

[Function]

Here you can store and recall compressor settings (output compressor data) for the currently selected output

channel.

■ Display

MENU button → OUT COMP but-

ton → COMP PARAMETER tab →

OUTPUT COMP LIBRARY button

[Screen functions]

1 Edit section

This area displays the settings of the output compres-

sor data currently selected in the library list (2). You

can use the buttons and knobs to edit the data.

It is not possible to change the type here. If you

wish to change the type, you must recall library

data that uses the desired type.

2 Library list

This shows a list of the output compressor data

stored in memory.

The highlighted line is currently selected for opera-

tions.

OUTPUT COMP LIBRARY

185

Basic library

operation

UNIT

LIBRARY

PATCH

LIBRARY

NAME

LIBRARY

INPUT EQ

LIBRARY

OUTPUT EQ

LIBRARY

INPUT GATE

LIBRARY

INPUT COMP

LIBRARY

OUTPUT COMP

LIBRARY

INPUT CH

LIBRARY

OUTPUT CH

LIBRARY

EFFECT

LIBRARY

GEQ

LIBRARY

3 STORE/RECALL buttons

These buttons store/recall output compressor data.

Each button has the following function.

• RECALL

Load the currently selected output compressor data

from the library list into the output channel selected

in the COMP PARAMETER screen (OUT COMP

function).

• STORE

Store the compressor data of the channel selected in

the COMP PARAMETER screen to the number

selected in the library list. When you click this but-

ton, the LIBRARY STORE popup window will

appear, allowing you to assign a name to the output

compressor data.

Output compressor data displayed as “READ

ONLY” in the library list is read-only preset data.

New compressor data cannot be overwritten onto

these locations.

• TITLE EDIT

This edits the title of the output compressor data

currently selected in the library list.

The TITLE EDIT button is valid only if data has

actually been stored in the number selected in the

library list. If a number with no data is selected, the

button text will be gray, and the button cannot be

used.

• APPLY EDIT

Store the edited content of the OUTPUT COMP

LIBRARY window back into the same library num-

ber.

Hint

The APPLY EDIT button is valid only if the data of

the number selected in the library list has been

edited. If un-edited data is selected, and if a number

marked “READ ONLY” is selected, the button text

will be gray, and the button cannot be used.

4 EDIT

If you edit the output compressor data selected in the

library list (2), this area will indicate “EDIT.”

5 EXIT

This button exits the OUTPUT COMP LIBRARY

window and returns to the previous screen.

Key-in settings are not stored in the library.

Libraries

186

INPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY

[Function]

Here you can store and recall mix parameter settings (input channel data) for the currently selected input

channel.

■ Display

MENU button → IN CH VIEW

button → INPUT CH LIBRARY

button

[Screen functions]

1 Edit section

This area displays the settings of the input channel

data currently selected in the library list (2). You

can use the buttons and knobs to edit the data.

Hint

By clicking the EQ, GATE, or COMP mini-graphs,

you can access screens for editing the corresponding

parameters. After editing the parameters, click OK to

return to the INPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY screen.

INPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY

187

Basic library

operation

UNIT

LIBRARY

PATCH

LIBRARY

NAME

LIBRARY

INPUT EQ

LIBRARY

OUTPUT EQ

LIBRARY

INPUT GATE

LIBRARY

INPUT COMP

LIBRARY

OUTPUT COMP

LIBRARY

INPUT CH

LIBRARY

OUTPUT CH

LIBRARY

EFFECT

LIBRARY

GEQ

LIBRARY

2 Library list

This shows a list of the input channel data stored in

memory.

The highlighted line is currently selected for opera-

tions.

3 STORE/RECALL buttons

These buttons store/recall input channel data.

Each button has the following function.

• RECALL

Load the currently selected input channel data from

the library list into the input channel selected in the

CH VIEW screen (IN CH VIEW function).

It is not possible to recall if the pairing state of the

recall channel does not match the pairing state

stored in the selected library list.

However, LIBRARY No.00 Initial Data can be

recalled to either paired or unpaired channels.

• STORE

Store the channel settings of the input channel cur-

rently selected in the CH VIEW screen (IN CH VIEW

function) to the number selected in the library list.

When you click this button, the LIBRARY STORE

popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a

name to the input channel data.

• TITLE EDIT

This edits the title of the input channel data currently

selected in the library list.

The TITLE EDIT button is valid only if data has

actually been stored in the number selected in the

library list. If a number with no data is selected, the

button text will be gray, and the button cannot be

used.

• APPLY EDIT

Store the edited content of the INPUT CHANNEL

LIBRARY window back into the same library num-

ber.

Hint

The APPLY EDIT button is valid only if the data of

the number selected in the library list has been

edited. If a number with no data is selected, or if un-

edited data is selected, and if a number marked

“READ ONLY” is selected, the button text will be

gray, and the button cannot be used.

4 EDIT

If you edit the input channel data selected in the

library list (2), this area will indicate “EDIT.”

5 EXIT

This button exits the INPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY

window and returns to the previous screen.

• Recall can be used only if the library contents and the

recall destination are both monaural input channels

or both paired (stereo) input channels. For other

combinations, the RECALL button will be grayed,

and the Recall operation cannot be performed.

• However, Initial Data can be recalled for any input

channel.

• If the library contents differ from the VARI/FIX or

MONO/PAIR settings of the current MIX bus, the

SEND-related parameters for that MIX bus will be

partially not recalled.

Hint

For a list of the parameters that are saved in the

channel library, refer to “CS1D Reference Manual

(Appendices)” section “Channel library list.”

Libraries

188

OUTPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY

[Function]

Here you can store and recall mix parameter settings (output channel data) for the currently selected output

channel.

■ Display

MENU button → OUT CH VIEW

button → OUTPUT CH LIBRARY

button

[Screen functions]

1 Edit section

This area displays the settings of the output channel

data currently selected in the library list (2). You

can use the buttons and knobs to edit the data.

Hint

By clicking the EQ, GATE, or COMP mini-graphs,

you can access screens for editing the corresponding

parameters. After editing the parameters, click OK to

return to the OUTPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY screen.

OUTPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY

189

Basic library

operation

UNIT

LIBRARY

PATCH

LIBRARY

NAME

LIBRARY

INPUT EQ

LIBRARY

OUTPUT EQ

LIBRARY

INPUT GATE

LIBRARY

INPUT COMP

LIBRARY

OUTPUT COMP

LIBRARY

INPUT CH

LIBRARY

OUTPUT CH

LIBRARY

EFFECT

LIBRARY

GEQ

LIBRARY

2 Library list

This shows a list of the output channel data stored in

memory.

The highlighted line is currently selected for opera-

tions.

3 STORE/RECALL buttons

These buttons store/recall output channel data.

Each button has the following function.

• RECALL

Load the currently selected output channel data from

the library list into the output channel selected in the

CH VIEW screen (OUT CH VIEW function).

It is not possible to recall if the pairing state of the

recall channel does not match the pairing state

stored in the selected library list.

However, LIBRARY No.00 Initial Data can be

recalled to either paired or unpaired channels.

• STORE

Store the channel settings of the output channel cur-

rently selected in the CH VIEW screen to the number

selected in the library list. When you click this but-

ton, the LIBRARY STORE popup window will

appear, allowing you to assign a name to the output

channel data.

• TITLE EDIT

This edits the title of the output channel data cur-

rently selected in the library list.

The TITLE EDIT button is valid only if data has

actually been stored in the number selected in the

library list. If a number with no data is selected, the

button text will be gray, and the button cannot be

used.

• APPLY EDIT

Store the edited content of the OUTPUT CHANNEL

LIBRARY window back into the same library num-

ber.

Hint

The APPLY EDIT button is valid only if the data of

the number selected in the library list has been

edited. If a number with no data is selected, or if un-

edited data is selected, and if a number marked

“READ ONLY” is selected, the button text will be

gray, and the button cannot be used.

4 EDIT

If you edit the output channel data selected in the

library list (2), this area will indicate “EDIT.”

5 EXIT

This button exits the OUTPUT CHANNEL

LIBRARY window and returns to the previous

screen.

• Recall can be used only if the store source and the

recall destination are both the same type of output

channels (MIX, MATRIX, STEREO A/B) and are

both monaural or both paired (stereo). For other

combinations, the RECALL button will be grayed,

and the Recall operation cannot be performed.

• If you recall STEREO A channel data into the STE-

REO B channel, the ST B MONO parameter will be

OFF. In the opposite case, the ST B MONO parame-

ter will be ignored.

• However, Initial Data can be recalled to any output

channel.

Hint

For a list of the parameters that are saved in the

channel library, refer to “CS1D Reference Manual

(Appendices)” section “Channel library list.”

Libraries

190

EFFECT LIBRARY

[Function]

Here you can store and recall the effect settings (effect data) of the currently selected internal effect.

■ Display

MENU button → EFFECT button

→ EFFECT 1 – EFFECT 8 tabs →

EFFECT LIBRARY button

[Screen functions]

1 Edit section

This area displays the settings of the effect data cur-

rently selected in the library list (2). You can use the

buttons and knobs to edit the data.

It is not possible to change the effect type used by

the effect data. If you need a speciﬁc effect type, you

must ﬁrst select effect data that uses that effect type.

2 Library list

This shows a list of the effect data stored in memory.

The highlighted line is currently selected for opera-

tions.

3 STORE/RECALL buttons

These buttons store/recall effect data.

EFFECT LIBRARY

191

Basic library

operation

UNIT

LIBRARY

PATCH

LIBRARY

NAME

LIBRARY

INPUT EQ

LIBRARY

OUTPUT EQ

LIBRARY

INPUT GATE

LIBRARY

INPUT COMP

LIBRARY

OUTPUT COMP

LIBRARY

INPUT CH

LIBRARY

OUTPUT CH

LIBRARY

EFFECT

LIBRARY

GEQ

LIBRARY

Each button has the following function.

• RECALL

Load the currently selected effect data from the

library list into the internal effect selected in the

EFFECT function.

• STORE

Store the effect data of the effect currently selected in

the EFFECT function to the number selected in the

library list. When you click this button, the LIBRARY

STORE popup window will appear, allowing you to

assign a name to the effect data.

Effect data displayed as “READ ONLY” in the

library list is read-only preset data. New effect data

cannot be overwritten onto these locations.

• TITLE EDIT

This edits the title of the effect data currently selected

in the library list.

The TITLE EDIT button is valid only if data has

actually been stored in the number selected in the

library list. If a number with no data is selected, the

button text will be gray, and the button cannot be

used.

• APPLY EDIT

Store the edited content of the EFFECT LIBRARY

window back into the same library number.

Hint

The APPLY EDIT button is valid only if the data of

the number selected in the library list has been

edited. If un-edited data is selected, and if a number

marked “READ ONLY” is selected, the button text

will be gray, and the button cannot be used.

4 EDIT

If you edit the effect data selected in the library list

(2), this area will indicate “EDIT.”

5 EXIT

This button exits the EFFECT LIBRARY window and

returns to the previous screen.

Libraries

192

GEQ LIBRARY

[Function]

Here you can store and recall the settings (GEQ data) of the currently selected GEQ module.

■ Display

MENU button → GEQ button →

GEQ PARAMETER tab → GEQ

LIBRARY button

[Screen functions]

1 Edit section

This area displays the settings of the GEQ data cur-

rently selected in the library list (2).

You can use the buttons, knobs and sliders to edit the

data.

2 Library list

This shows a list of the GEQ data stored in memory.

The highlighted line is currently selected for opera-

tions.

GEQ LIBRARY

193

Basic library

operation

UNIT

LIBRARY

PATCH

LIBRARY

NAME

LIBRARY

INPUT EQ

LIBRARY

OUTPUT EQ

LIBRARY

INPUT GATE

LIBRARY

INPUT COMP

LIBRARY

OUTPUT COMP

LIBRARY

INPUT CH

LIBRARY

OUTPUT CH

LIBRARY

EFFECT

LIBRARY

GEQ

LIBRARY

3 STORE/RECALL buttons

These buttons store/recall GEQ data.

Each button has the following function.

• RECALL

Load the currently selected GEQ data from the

library list into the GEQ module selected in the GEQ

PARAMETER screen.

• STORE

Store the settings of the GEQ module currently

selected in the GEQ PARAMETER screen to the

number selected in the library list. When you click

this button, the LIBRARY STORE popup window

will appear, allowing you to assign a name to the

GEQ data.

• TITLE EDIT

This edits the title of the GEQ data currently selected

in the library list.

The TITLE EDIT button is valid only if data has

actually been stored in the number selected in the

library list. If a number with no data is selected, the

button text will be gray, and the button cannot be

used.

• APPLY EDIT

Store the edited content of the GEQ LIBRARY win-

dow back into the same library number.

Hint

The APPLY EDIT button is valid only if the data of

the number selected in the library list has been

edited. If un-edited data is selected, and if a number

marked “READ ONLY” is selected, the button text

will be gray, and the button cannot be used.

4 EDIT

If you edit the GEQ data selected in the library list

(2), this area will indicate “EDIT.”

5 EXIT

This button exits the GEQ LIBRARY window and

returns to the previous screen.

194

Other

Memory initialization

[Function]

Restore scene memories and other internal data such as libraries to their factory-set condition.

When you initialize the memory, all previously-saved data will be erased, and cannot be recovered. Please use cau-

tion. If memory contains important data, you must save it to a memory card inserted in the PC ATA STORAGE

CARD slot of the CS1D before you initialize the memory.

[Procedure]

1. Turn off the power of the PW1D power supply.

2. Turn on the power of the PW1D, and after the

opening screen appears in the LCD display of the

CS1D, repeatedly press the left/right switches

located below the track pad of the data entry block

until the following screen appears in the display.

3. Use the track pad and the left/right switches to

select either “INITIALIZE ALL MEMORY” or “INI-

TIALIZE CURRENT SCENE.”

When you select one of these, the corresponding dis-

play shown below will appear.

“INITIALIZE ALL MEMORY”: All memory will be

initialized. All parameters that can be stored in mem-

ory will return to their factory-set condition.

“INITIALIZE CURRENT SCENE”: The current

state will be initialized. SCENE MEMORY settings or

the various LIBRARY settings that have been stored

will not be initialized.

The following data will be initialized.

• CURRENT SCENE

• CURRENT UNIT

• CURRENT PATCH

• CURRENT NAME

• CURRENT SETUP

4. Use the left/right switches on the track pad to select

OK.

After initialization occurs, the system will restart.

If you wish to abort the initialization, select CAN-

CEL.

Reference Manual

(Appendices)

Contents

Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

Preset EQ Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

INPUT EQ LIBRARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Preset Dynamics Program Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

INPUT GATE LIBRARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

INPUT COMP LIBRARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

OUTPUT COMP LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Compressor Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

COMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

EXPANDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

COMPANDER (HARD & SOFT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Gate Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

GATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

DUCKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Preset Effects Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Basic effect programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Advanced reverb programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Effects Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

REVERB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

EARLY REF.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

DELAY LCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

ECHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

CHORUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

FLANGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

SYMPHONIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

PHASER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

AUTO PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

TREMOLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

HQ. PITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

DUAL PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

REV + CHORUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

REV

➔

CHORUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

REV + FLANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

REV

➔

FLANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

REV + SYMPHO.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

REV

➔

SYMPHO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

REV

➔

PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

DELAY + ER.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

DELAY

➔

ER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

DELAY + REV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

DELAY

➔

REV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

AMP SIMULATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

DYNA. FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

DYNA. FLANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

DYNA. PHASER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Contents

iii

Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Channel library list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Parameters copied when pairing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

MIDI Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Warning Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Error Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

About the PM1D system version checking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Controls & Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Analog Input Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Analog Output Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Digital Input & Output Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Pin Assignment DIGITAL I/O ENGINE A1, A2, B1, B2

(D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Pin Assignment DIGITAL I/O CONSOLE 1, 2

(D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Pin Assignment GPI (D-SUB Connector 25P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Pin Assignment OUTPUT A,B,C

(D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Pin Assignment INPUT A,B (D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Pin Assignment DIGITAL I/O INPUT 1-10

(D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Pin Assignment DIGITAL I/O OUTPUT 1-6

(D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Pin Assignment DIGITAL I/O CASCADE IN

(D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Pin Assignment DIGITAL I/O CASCADE OUT

(D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Pin Assignment DIGITAL I/O CONSOLE 1,2

(D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Pin Assignment CONTROL I/O REMOTE RS-422

(D-SUB Connector 9P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Pin Assignment CONTROL I/O GPI (D-SUB Connector 25P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Cards Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

LMY2-ML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

LMY4-AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

LMY4-DA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Appendices

Preset EQ Program Parameters

• INPUT EQ LIBRARY

This is the EQ library that can be used on inputs. (All are read-only.)

#Title

Parameter

Description

LOW LOW MID HIGH MID HIGH

01 Bass Drum 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

Emphasizes the low range

of a bass drum and the

attack created by the

beater.

+3.5 dB –3.5 dB ±0.0 dB +4.0 dB

100 Hz 265 Hz 1.06 kHz 5.30 kHz

1.2 10.0 0.90 —

02 Bass Drum 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF

Creates a peak around

80Hz, producing a tight,

stiff sound.

+8.0 dB –7.0 dB +6.0 dB —

80 Hz 400 Hz 2.50 kHz 12.5 kHz

1.4 4.5 2.2

SLOPE: 12 dB

03 Snare Drum 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

Emphasizes snapping and

rimshot sounds.

–0.5 dB ±0.0 dB +3.0 dB +4.5 dB

132 Hz 1.00 kHz 3.15 kHz 5.00 kHz

1.2 4.5 0.11 —

04 Snare Drum 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

Emphasizes the ranges of

that classic rock snare

drum sound.

+1.5 dB –8.5 dB +2.5 dB +4.0 dB

180 Hz 335 Hz 2.36 kHz 4.00 kHz

— 10.0 0.70 0.10

05 Tom-tom 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

Emphasizes the attack of

tom-toms, and creates a

long, “leathery” decay.

+2.0 dB –7.5 dB +2.0 dB +1.0 dB

212 Hz 670 Hz 4.50 kHz 6.30 kHz

1.4 10.0 1.2 0.28

06 Cymbal

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

Emphasizes the attack of

crash cymbals, extending

the “sparkling” decay.

–2.0 dB ±0.0 dB ±0.0 dB +3.0 dB

106 Hz 425 Hz 1.06 kHz 13.2 kHz

— 8.0 0.90 —

07 High Hat

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

A hi-hat setting that

slightly emphasizes the

mid to high range and

reduces the low range to

make the sound crisp.

You can use LOW MID G

(gain) to adjust the boost/

cut of the attack portion.

–4.0 dB –2.5 dB +1.0 dB +0.5 dB

95 Hz 425 Hz 2.80 kHz 7.50 kHz

— 0.50 1.0 —

08 Percussion

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

Emphasizes the attack and

clariﬁes the high-range of

instruments, such as shak-

ers, cabasas, and congas.

–4.5 dB ±0.0 dB +2.0 dB ±0.0 dB

100 Hz 400 Hz 2.80 kHz 17.0 kHz

— 4.5 0.56 —

09 E.Bass 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

Makes a tight electric bass

sound by cutting very low

frequencies.

–7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB ±0.0 dB

35.5 Hz 112 Hz 2.00 kHz 4.00 kHz

— 5.0 4.5 —

Appendices

10 E.Bass 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

Unlike program 09, this

program emphasizes the

low range of an electric

bass.

+3.0 dB ±0.0 dB +2.5 dB +0.5 dB

112 Hz 112 Hz 2.24 kHz 4.00 kHz

0.10 5.0 6.3 —

11 Syn.Bass 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

Use on a synth bass with

emphasized low range.

+3.5 dB +8.5 dB ±0.0 dB ±0.0 dB

85 Hz 950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz

0.10 8.0 4.5 —

12 Syn.Bass 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

Emphasizes the attack that

is peculiar to a synth bass.

+2.5 dB ±0.0 dB +1.5 dB ±0.0 dB

125 Hz 180 Hz 1.12 kHz 12.5 kHz

1.6 8.0 2.2 —

13 Piano 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

This is used to make a

piano sound brighter.

–6.0 dB ±0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB

95 Hz 950 Hz 3.15 kHz 7.50 kHz

— 8.0 0.90 —

14 Piano 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

Used in conjunction with

a compressor, this pro-

gram emphasizes the

attack and low range of a

piano sound.

+3.5 dB –8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

224 Hz 600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz

5.6 10.0 0.70 —

15 E.G.Clean

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

Use for line-recording an

electric guitar or semi-

acoustic guitar to get a

slightly hard sound.

+2.0 dB –5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB

265 Hz 400 Hz 1.32 kHz 4.50 kHz

0.18 10.0 6.3 —

16 E.G.Crunch 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

Adjusts the tonal quality of

a slightly distorted guitar

sound.

+4.5 dB ±0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB

140 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz

8.0 4.5 0.63 9.0

17 E.G.Crunch 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

A variation on program

16.

+2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB ±0.0 dB

125 Hz 450 Hz 3.35 kHz 19.0 kHz

8.0 0.40 0.16 —

18 E.G.Dist. 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

Makes a heavily distorted

guitar sound clearer.

+5.0 dB ±0.0 dB +3.5 dB ±0.0 dB

355 Hz 950 Hz 3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz

— 9.0 10.0 —

19 E.G.Dist. 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

A variation on program

18.

+6.0 dB –8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB

315 Hz 1.06 kHz 4.25 kHz 12.5 kHz

— 10.0 4.0 —

20 A.G.Stroke 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

Emphasizes the bright

tones of an acoustic gui-

tar.

–2.0 dB ±0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB

106 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.30 kHz

0.90 4.5 3.5 —

#Title

Parameter

Description

LOW LOW MID HIGH MID HIGH

Preset EQ Program Parameters

21 A.G.Stroke 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

A variation on program

20. You can also use it

with a gutsy guitar sound.

–3.5 dB –2.0 dB ±0.0 dB +2.0 dB

300 Hz 750 Hz 2.00 kHz 3.55 kHz

— 9.0 4.5 —

22 A.G.Arpeg. 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

Corrects arpeggio tech-

nique of an acoustic gui-

tar.

–0.5 dB ±0.0 dB ±0.0 dB +2.0 dB

224 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

— 4.5 4.5 0.12

23 A.G.Arpeg. 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

A variation on program

22.

±0.0 dB –5.5 dB ±0.0 dB +4.0 dB

180 Hz 355 Hz 4.00 kHz 4.25 kHz

— 7.0 4.5 —

24 Brass Sec.

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

Use with trumpets, trom-

bones, or sax. With one

instrument, adjust the

HIGH or HIGH MID fre-

quency.

–2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

90 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz

2.8 2.0 0.70 7.0

25 Male Vocal 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

Use as a template for male

vocal. Adjust the HIGH or

HIGH MID setting accord-

ing to the voice quality.

–0.5 dB ±0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB

190 Hz 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

0.11 4.5 0.56 0.11

26 Male Vocal 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

A variation on program

25.

+2.0 dB –5.0 dB –2.5 dB +4.0 dB

170 Hz 236 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.70 kHz

0.11 10.0 5.6 —

27 Female Vo. 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

Use as a template for

female vocal. Adjust the

HIGH or HIGH MID setting

according to the voice

quality.

–1.0 dB +1.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB

118 Hz 400 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz

0.18 0.45 0.56 0.14

28 Female Vo. 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

A variation on program

27.

–7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB

112 Hz 335 Hz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

— 0.16 0.20 —

29 Chorus&Harmo

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

Use as a template for a

chorus. It makes the entire

chorus much brighter.

–2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

90 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz

2.8 2.0 0.70 7.0

30 Bass Drum 3

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

A variation on program

01, 02. The low and mid

range is removed.

+3.5 dB –10.0 dB +3.5 dB ±0.0 dB

118 Hz 315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz

2.0 10.0 0.40 0.40

31 Snare Drum 3

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

A variation on program

03, 04. It creates a thick

sound.

±0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB ±0.0 dB

224 Hz 560 Hz 4.25 kHz 4.00 kHz

— 4.5 2.8 0.1

#Title

Parameter

Description

LOW LOW MID HIGH MID HIGH

Appendices

32 Tom-tom 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

A variation on program

05. Emphasizes the mid

and high range.

–9.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB ±0.0 dB

90 Hz 212 Hz 5.30 kHz 17.0 kHz

— 4.5 1.2 —

33 Piano 3

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

A variation on program

13, 14.

+4.5 dB –13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB

100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz

8.0 10.0 9.0 —

34 Piano Low

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

Use for the low range of a

piano sound recorded in

stereo.

–5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB ±0.0 dB

190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 12.5 kHz

10.0 6.3 2.2 —

35 Piano High

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

Use for the high range of a

piano sound recorded in

stereo.

–5.5 dB +1.5 dB +5.0 dB +3.0 dB

190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 5.60 kHz

10.0 6.3 2.2 0.10

36 Fine-EQ Cass

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

Use when recording to or

from cassette tape to

make the sound clearer.

–1.5 dB ±0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB

75 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz

— 4.5 1.8 —

37 Narrator

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

Use when recording narra-

tion.

–4.0 dB –1.0 dB +2.0 dB ±0.0 dB

106 Hz 710 Hz 2.50 kHz 10.0 kHz

4.0 7.0 0.63 —

#Title

Parameter

Description

LOW LOW MID HIGH MID HIGH

Preset EQ Program Parameters

• OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY

This is the EQ library that can be used on outputs. (All are read-only.)

#Title

Parameter

Description

SUB

LOW

MID

HIGH

MID

HIGH

01 Total EQ 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

Use on a stereo mix dur-

ing mixdown. Sounds

even better when used

with a compressor.

–0.5 dB ±0.0 dB ±0.0 dB ±0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB

95 Hz 1.0 kHz 950 Hz 2.5 kHz 2.12 kHz 16.0 kHz

7.0 1.0 2.2 1.0 5.6 —

02 Total EQ 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

A variation on program

01.

+4.0 dB ±0.0 dB +1.5 dB ±0.0 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB

95 Hz 1.0 kHz 750 Hz 2.5 kHz 1.80 kHz 18.0 kHz

7.0 1.0 2.8 1.0 5.6 —

03 Total EQ 3

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

A variation on program

01. 01–03 can also be

used with stereo inputs or

external effect returns.

+1.5 dB ±0.0 dB +0.5 dB ±0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB

67 Hz 1.0 kHz 850 Hz 2.5 kHz 1.90 kHz 15.0 kHz

— 1.0 0.28 1.0 0.70 —

Appendices

Preset Dynamics Program Settings

Here is a list of the built-in dynamics programs.

The values shown for the RELEASE, HOLD, and DECAY parameters are for a sampling frequency of 44.1

kHz. Be aware that for these parameters, the operating time and available range will change depending on the

sampling frequency.

• INPUT GATE LIBRARY

No. Title [Type] Compressor effect and parameter values

01 Gate [GATE] Gating template preset.

02 Ducking [DUCKING] Ducking template preset. For example, this can be used with an announcer’s voice as

the key-in signal to lower the volume of background music.

03 A.Dr.BD [GATE] This preset adapts COMP, GATE, and COMPANDER (H) respectively to the bass drum

of an acoustic drum kit.

04 A.Dr.SN [GATE] This adapts preset program 03 to a snare drum.

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

01 –26 — –56 0m — — — — 2.56m 331m

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

02 –19 — –22 93m — — — — 1.20 6.32

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

03 –11 — –53 0m — — — — 1.93m 400m

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

04 –8 — –23 1m — — — — 0.63m 238m

Preset Dynamics Program Settings

• INPUT COMP LIBRARY

For all libraries, the INPUT FILTER is set to HPF 20 Hz OFF.

[COMPANDER H] indicates COMPANDER HARD, and [COMPANDER S] indicates COMPANDER SOFT.

No. Title [Type] Compressor effect and parameter values

01 Comp [COMP] Compressor template preset for use on the overall mix.

02 Expand [EXPANDER] Expander template preset.

03 Compander(H) [COMPANDER H] Compander template presets

04 Compander(S) [COMPANDER S]

07 A.Dr.SN [COMP] These adapt preset programs 02, 05, and 06 for a snare drum.

08 A.Dr.SN [EXPANDER]

09 A.Dr.SN [COMPANDER S]

10 A.Dr.Tom [EXPANDER] When used on acoustic drum toms, this will lower the volume except when the tom

is being played, to improve separation from the snare and bass drum sounds.

11 A.Dr.OverTop [COMPANDER S] This emphasizes the attack and “air” of the sound picked up by a mic

placed above the cymbal of an acoustic drum set, and also slightly lowers

the volume when the cymbal is not being played, to improve separation

from the other sounds of the kit.

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

01 –8 2.5 — 60m 0.0 SOFT 2 — 250m — —

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

02 –23 1.7 — 1m 3.5 SOFT 2 — 70m — —

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

03 –10 3.5 — 1m 0.0 — 6 250m — —

04 –8 4 — 25m 0.0 — 24 180m — —

05 A.Dr.BD [COMP]

06 A.Dr.BD [COMPANDER H]

These presets adapt COMP and COMPANDER (H) respectively for the bass

drum of an acoustic drum kit.

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

05 –24 3 — 9m 5.5 SOFT 2 — 58m — —

06 –11 3.5 — 1m –1.5 — 7 192m — —

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

07 –17 2.5 — 8m 3.5 SOFT 2 — 12m — —

08 –23 2 — 0m 0.5 SOFT 2 — 151m — —

09 –8 1.7 — 11m 0.0 — 10 128m — —

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

10 –20 2 — 2m 5.0 SOFT 2 — 749m — —

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

11 –24 2 — 38m –3.5 — 54 842m — —

Appendices

12 E.B.Finger [COMP] A compressor that evens out the attack and volume of a finger-plucked electric bass.

13 E.B.Slap [COMP] A compressor that evens out the attack and volume of a slapped electric bass.

14 Syn.Bass [COMP] A compressor that evens out the level of a synth bass and emphasizes it.

17 E.Guitar [COMP] Suitable for electric guitar backing such as chording and arpeggios. Try making vari-

ous adjustments according to the tone or playing technique.

18 A.Guitar [COMP] Suitable for acoustic guitar strumming or arpeggios.

22 BrassSection [COMP] Suitable for sounds with a fairly rapid rise or strong sense of attack.

23 Syn.Pad [COMP] Pulls together sounds that tend to lack cohesiveness. Suitable for instruments that are

pleasant to the ear but can tend to be diffuse, such as synth pads.

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

12 –12 2 — 15m 4.5 SOFT 2 — 470m — —

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

13 –12 1.7 — 6m 4.0 HARD — 133m — —

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

14 –10 3.5 — 9m 3.0 HARD — 250m — —

15 Piano1 [COMP]

16 Piano2 [COMP]

Piano1 makes the sound stand out slightly and brightens it. In contrast, Piano2 has a

deeper threshold and evens out the overall level and sense of attack.

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

15 –9 2.5 — 17m 1.0 HARD — 238m — —

16 –18 3.5 — 7m 6.0 SOFT 2 — 174m — —

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

17 –8 3.5 — 7m 2.5 SOFT 4 — 261m — —

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

18 –10 2.5 — 5m 1.5 SOFT 2 — 238m — —

19 Strings1 [COMP]

20 Strings2 [COMP]

21 Strings3 [COMP]

These are compressors suitable for strings. No.20 and 21 can also be used on low-

range instruments (cello, contrabass).

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

19 –11 2 — 33m 1.5 SOFT 2 — 749m — —

20 –12 1.5 — 93m 1.5 SOFT 4 — 1.35m — —

21 –17 1.5 — 76m 2.5 SOFT 2 — 186m — —

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

22 –18 1.7 — 18m 4.0 SOFT 1 — 226mm — —

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

23 –13 2 — 58m 2.0 SOFT 1 — 238m — —

Preset Dynamics Program Settings

28 Solo Vocal1 [COMP] Variations suitable for solo vocal sources.

29 Solo Vocal2 [COMP]

30 Chorus [COMP] An adaptation of Vocal, suitable for choruses.

31 Click Erase [EXPANDER] Use this as a gate if the click tone that the musicians listen to is loud and you wish to

eliminate it.

32 Announcer [COMPANDER H] This uses the voice of an announcer to lower the level of the gate, and also

maintains a consistent volume for the announcer’s voice.

24 SamplingPerc [COMPANDER S]

25 Sampling BD [COMP]

26 Sampling SN [COMP]

27 Hip Comp [COMPANDER S]

Effective when used on sampled sounds from CD-ROM etc. are used in a

context of acoustic sounds, to prevent the sampled sounds from seeming

to lack in power or deﬁnition. Four variations are provided: Perc, BD, SN,

and for looped materials (Hip Comp).

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

24 –18 1.7 — 8m –2.5 — 18 238m — —

25 –14 2 — 2m 3.5 SOFT 4 — 35m — —

26 –18 4 — 8m 8.0 HARD — 354m — —

27 –23 20 — 15m 0.0 — 15 163m — —

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

28 –20 2.5 — 31m 2.0 SOFT 1 — 342m — —

29 –8 2.5 — 26m 1.5 SOFT 3 — 331m — —

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

30 –9 1.7 — 39m 2.5 SOFT 2 — 226m — —

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

31 –33 2 — 1m 2.0 SOFT 2 — 284m — —

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

32 –14 2.5 — 1m –2.5 — 18 180m — —

33 Limiter1 [COMPANDER S]

34 Limiter2 [COMP]

Limiter templates. 1 has a slow release, and 2 is a Peak Stop type.

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

33 –9 3 — 20m –3.0 — 90 3.90m — —

34 0 ∞ —0m0.0 HARD — 319m — —

Appendices

• OUTPUT COMP LIBRARY

No. Title [Type] Compressor effect and parameter values

01 Comp [COMP] Compressor template preset for use on the overall mix.

02 Expand [EXPANDER] Expander template preset.

03 Compander(H) [COMPANDER H] Compander template preset.

04 Compander(S) [COMPANDER S]

05 Click Erase [EXPANDER] Use this as a gate if the click tone that the musicians listen to is loud

and you wish to eliminate it.

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

01 –8 2.5 — 60m 0.0 SOFT 2 — 250m — —

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

02 –23 1.7 — 1m 3.5 SOFT 2 — 70m — —

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

03 –10 3.5 — 1m 0.0 — 6 250m — —

04 –8 4 — 25m 0.0 — 24 180m — —

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

05 –33 2 — 1m 2.0 SOFT 2 — 284m — —

06 Limiter1 [COMPANDER S]

07 Limiter2 [COMP]

Limiter templates. 1 has a slow release, and 2 is a Peak Stop type.

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

06 –9 3 — 20m –3.0 — 90 3.90m — —

07 0 ∞ —0m0.0 HARD — 319m — —

08 Total Comp1 [COMP]

09 Total Comp2 [COMP]

These presets make the overall level consistent and improve the deﬁni-

tion of the overall sound, and are effective when applied to the stereo

out during mixdown. Interesting effects can also be obtained with var-

ious adjustments when these are used on stereo sources.

No.

THRESHOLD

(dB)

RATIO

( :1)

RANGE

(dB)

ATTAC K

(s)

OUT GAIN

(dB)

KNEE

WIDTH

(dB)

RELEASE

(s)

HOLD

(s)

DECAY

(s)

08 –18 3.5 — 94m 2.5 HARD — 447m — —

09 –16 6 — 11m 6.0 SOFT 1 — 180m — —

Compressor Types

Dynamics processors are generally used to correct or control signal levels, although they can also be used cre-

atively to shape a sound’s volume envelope. The following sections explain the COMP, EXPANDER, and

COMPANDER-(H/S) compressor, their parameters, and general applications.

COMP

The COMP processor is a compressor that attenuates

signals above a speciﬁed threshold, providing automatic

level control.

Vo calists that tend to move toward and away from the

microphone while singing produce ﬂuctuating signal

levels; sometimes loud, sometimes soft. Likewise, acous-

tic instruments with a large dynamic range produce

sound levels from pianissimo (very soft) through to for-

tissimo (very loud). In these situations, it is often difﬁ-

cult to set an average fader level that will allow a voice or

instrument to be heard clearly throughout a song or

piece of music. This is where the compressor comes in

with automatic level control. By automatically reducing

high levels, thus effectively reducing the dynamic range,

the compressor makes it much easier to control signals

and set appropriate fader levels. Reducing the dynamic

range also means that recording levels can be set higher,

therefore improving signal-to-noise performance.

[Compressor]

The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter,

which is essentially a compressor with a high ratio set-

ting. Compression ratios above 10:1 are considered to

limit signals rather than compress them. When an input

signal exceeds the speciﬁed threshold level, its level is

automatically reduced to the threshold level. This means

that the limiter’s output level never actually exceeds the

threshold level. Limiters are often used to prevent signals

from overloading ampliﬁers and tape recorders. A lim-

iter with a relatively high threshold, for example, could

be used with the stereo outputs to prevent ampliﬁer and

speaker overload.

[Limiter]

THRESHOLD—This determines the level of input signal

required to trigger the compressor. Signals at a level

below the threshold pass through the compressor unaf-

fected. Signals at and above the threshold level are com-

pressed by the amount speciﬁed using the Ratio

parameter. The trigger signal is sourced using the KEY

IN parameter.

OUT GAIN—This sets the compressor’s output signal

level, and can be used to compensate for the overall level

change caused by the compression process.

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Input Level (dB)

Output Level (dB)

Knee = Hard

Threshold = –20dB

Compression ratio = 2:1

Parameter Range

THRESHOLD –54 dB to 0 dB (1 dB steps)

OUT GAIN ±0.0 dB to +18.0 dB (0.5 dB steps)

KNEE

HARD, SOFT 1, SOFT 2, SOFT 3,

SOFT 4, SOFT 5

ATTACK 0–120 ms (1 ms steps)

RELEASE

5 ms–42.3 s (fs = 48 kHz)

6 ms–46 s (fs = 44.1 kHz)

RATIO

1:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2:1,

2.5:1, 3:1, 3.5:1, 4:1, 5:1, 6:1, 8:1,

10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)

INPUT FILTER

HPF/LPF

HPF (high-pass ﬁlter) or

LPF (low-pass ﬁlter)

INPUT FILTER

ON/OFF

ON or OFF

INPUT FILTER

FREQUENCY

20 Hz–20 kHz (121 steps)

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Input Level (dB)

Output Level (dB)

Knee = Hard

Threshold = –20dB

Compression ratio = 20:1

Appendices

KNEE—This determines how compression is applied at

the threshold point. When set to hard, compression at

the speciﬁed ratio is applied as soon as the input signal

level exceeds the speciﬁed threshold. For knee settings

from 1 to 5, however, compression is applied gradually

as the signal exceeds the speciﬁed threshold, creating a

more natural sound. This is called soft-knee compres-

sion.

ATTACK—This determines how soon the signal is com-

pressed once the compressor has been triggered. With a

fast attack time, the signal is compressed almost imme-

diately. With a slow attack time, however, the initial

transient of a sound passes through unaffected. Attack

times from 1 to 5 milliseconds are a good place to start.

RELEASE—This determines how soon the compressor

returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level

drops below the threshold. If the release time is too

short, the gain will recover too quickly causing level

pumping (i.e., noticeable gain ﬂuctuations). If it is set

too long, the compressor may not have time to recover

before the next high level signal appears, and it will be

compressed incorrectly. Release times from 0.1 to 0.5

seconds are a good place to start.

RATIO—This determines the amount of compression,

that is, the change in output signal level relative to

change in input signal level. For a 2:1 ratio, for example,

a 10 dB change in input level (above the threshold)

results in a 5 dB change in output level. For a 5:1 ratio, a

10 dB change in input level (above the threshold) results

in a 2 dB change in output level.

INPUT FILTER HPF/LPF—Select the ﬁlter that will be

applied to the signal immediately before the compressor.

When HPF (high pass ﬁlter) is on, the compressor will

apply to the signal that has passed through the HPF, and

the signal that has passed through the LPF will then be

mixed in. Since with this setting only the high-frequency

portion of the signal is compressed, the effect will func-

tion as a de-esser.

When LPF (low pass ﬁlter) is on, the compressor will

apply to the signal that has passed through the LPF, and

the signal that has passed through the HPF will then be

mixed in. With this setting, only the low-frequency por-

tion of the signal is compressed.

If you want the signal immediately after passing

through the LPF or HPF to be used as the key-in

signal for the internal compressor, select SELF

POST EQ as the key-in signal.

When the key-in signal is set to LEFT CH (when

the key-in signal is taken from the previous-num-

bered channel), and if COMP is turned on and LPF

or HPF is also turned on for the channel that is the

source of the key-in signal, then the signal after

passing through the ﬁlter will be output as the key-

in signal.

INPUT FILTER ON/OFF—This turns the input ﬁlter on/

off. If off, the LPF/HPF setting will be ignored.

INPUT FILTER FREQUENCY—This sets the cutoff fre-

quency of the LPF/HPF. (The LPF cutoff frequency and

HPF cutoff frequency are always linked.)

For COMP ON and HPF ON

LPF

HPF COMP

SELF POST EQ

For COMP ON and LPF ON

HPF

LPF COMP

SELF POST EQ

Compressor Types

EXPANDER

An expander is similar to a compressor except that it

works on signals below the threshold level. By reducing

signals below the threshold level, the expander attenu-

ates low-level noise, effectively increasing the dynamic

range and improving the signal-to-noise performance.

An expander set to an inﬁnite ratio (i.e., ∞:1) is essen-

tially a gate.

The following two graphs show typical expander curves.

The one on the left shows an expander with an expan-

sion ratio of 2:1 and a hard knee setting. The one on the

right shows an expander with an expansion ratio of 2:1

and a soft knee setting of 5.

THRESHOLD—This determines the level of input signal

required to trigger the expander. Signals above the

threshold pass through the expander unaffected. Signals

at and below the threshold level are attenuated by the

amount speciﬁed using the Ratio parameter. The trigger

signal is sourced using the KEY IN parameter.

OUT GAIN—This sets the expander’s output signal level,

and can be used to compensate for the overall level

change caused by the expansion process.

KNEE—This determines how expansion is applied at the

threshold point. When set to hard, expansion at the

speciﬁed ratio is applied as soon as the input signal level

falls below the speciﬁed threshold. For knee settings

from 1 to 5, however, expansion is applied gradually as

the signal falls below the speciﬁed threshold, creating a

more natural sound.

ATTACK – Specify the time over which the expander will

return to the normal gain after the trigger signal exceeds

the threshold. If the attack time is too short, the gain will

return suddenly, causing the sound to “jump out.” (The

gain change will be obtrusive.) However if the attack is

too long, the next signal will be input before the gain has

returned, causing inappropriate expansion. When set-

ting the attack time, it is a good idea to start with a value

in the range of 1–5 milliseconds.

RELEASE – Specify the time over which the signal is

expanded from when the expander is triggered. If the

release time is short, the signal will be expanded almost

instantly. If the release time is long, the release portion of

the sound will not be expanded. When setting the release

time, it is a good idea to start with a value in the range of

0.1–0.5 seconds.

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Input Level (dB)

Output Level (dB)

Threshold = –10dB

Knee = Hard

Expansion ratio = 2:1

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Input Level (dB)

Output Level (dB)

Threshold = –10dB

Knee = SOFT 5

Expansion ratio = 2:1

Parameter Range

THRESHOLD –54 dB to 0 dB (1 dB steps)

OUT GAIN ±0.0 dB to +18.0 dB (0.5 dB steps)

KNEE

HARD, SOFT 1, SOFT 2, SOFT 3,

SOFT 4, SOFT 5

ATTACK 0–120 ms (1 ms steps)

RELEASE

5 ms–42.3 s (fs = 48 kHz)

6 ms–46 s (fs = 44.1 kHz)

RATIO

1:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2:1,

2.5:1, 3:1, 3.5:1, 4:1, 5:1, 6:1, 8:1,

10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)

INPUT FILTER

HPF/LPF

HPF (high-pass ﬁlter) or

LPF (low-pass ﬁlter)

INPUT FILTER

ON/OFF

ON or OFF

INPUT FILTER

FREQUENCY

20 Hz–20 kHz (121 steps)

Appendices

RATIO—This determines the amount of expansion.

That is, the change in output signal level relative to

change in input signal level. For a 2:1 ratio, for example,

a 5 dB change in input level (below the threshold) results

in a 10 dB change in output level. For a 5:1 ratio, a 2 dB

change in input level (below the threshold) results in a

10 dB change in output level.

INPUT FILTER HPF/LPF—Select the ﬁlter that will be

applied to the signal immediately before the expander.

When HPF (high pass ﬁlter) is on, the expander will

apply to the signal that has passed through the HPF, and

the signal that has passed through the LPF will then be

mixed in.

When LPF (low pass ﬁlter) is on, the expander will apply

to the signal that has passed through the LPF, and the

signal that has passed through the HPF will then be

mixed in.

If you want the signal immediately after passing

through the LPF or HPF to be used as the key-in

signal for the internal compressor, select SELF

POST EQ as the key-in signal.

When the key-in signal is set to LEFT CH (when

the key-in signal is taken from the previous-num-

bered channel), and if COMP is turned on and LPF

or HPF is also turned on for the channel that is the

source of the key-in signal, then the signal after

passing through the ﬁlter will be output as the key-

in signal.

INPUT FILTER ON/OFF—This turns the input ﬁlter on/

off. If off, the LPF/HPF setting will be ignored.

INPUT FILTER FREQUENCY—This sets the cutoff fre-

quency of the LPF/HPF. (The LPF cutoff frequency and

HPF cutoff frequency are always linked.)

COMPANDER (HARD & SOFT)

The hard (H) and soft (S) companders comprise of com-

pressor, expander, and limiter. The limiter prevents out-

put signals from exceeding 0 dB. The compressor

compresses signals that exceed the threshold level. The

expander attenuates signals below the threshold and

width. The soft compander has an expansion ratio of

1.5:1, while the hard compander has an expansion ratio

of 5:1. The following two graphs show typical com-

pander curves. The one on the left shows the hard com-

pander. The one on the right, the soft compander.

For COMP ON and HPF ON

LPF

HPF EXPANDER

SELF POST EQ

For COMP ON and LPF ON

HPF

LPF

SELF POST EQ

EXPANDER

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Input Level (dB)

Hard Compander

Output Level (dB)

Threshold

Width

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Input Level (dB)

Soft Compander

Output Level (dB)

Threshold

Width

Compressor Types

THRESHOLD—This determines the input signal level at

which compression and expansion are applied. Signals at

a level below the sum of the threshold and width are

attenuated by the expander. Signals at and above the

threshold level are compressed by the amount speciﬁed

using the Ratio parameter. The trigger signal is sourced

using the KEY IN parameter.

OUT GAIN—This sets the compander’s output signal

level. It can be used to compensate for the overall level

change caused by the compression and expansion pro-

cesses.

WIDTH—This determines how far below the threshold

level expansion is applied. The expander is essentially

turned off when the width is set to 90 dB.

ATTACK—Speciﬁes the time over which the signal will

be compressed (starting when the compressor of the

compander is triggered) or the time over which the gain

will return to normal after the expander is triggered. If

the attack time is fast, the signal will be compressed or

return to normal nearly instantaneously. If the attack

time is slow, the initial attack portion of the sound will

not be compressed or return to normal. Attack times

from 1 to 5 milliseconds are a good place to start.

RELEASE—Speciﬁes the time from when the level of

the trigger signal falls below the threshold until the com-

pressor returns to the normal gain or the expander

expands. If the release time is too short, the compressor

gain will return suddenly, making the sound jump out

(i.e., the gain will change unnaturally). However if the

release is too long, the next high-level signal will be

input before the compressor gain has returned, and

compression may not occur appropriately. Release times

from 0.1 to 0.5 seconds are a good place to start.

RATIO—This determines the amount of compression.

That is, the change in output signal level relative to

change in input signal level. For a 2:1 ratio, for example,

a 10 dB change in input level (above the threshold)

results in a 5 dB change in output level. For a 5:1 ratio, a

10 dB change in input level (above the threshold) results

in a 2 dB change in output level. The expander ratios are

ﬁxed: 1.5:1 for the soft compander (S) and 5:1 for the

hard compander (H).

INPUT FILTER HPF/LPF—Select the ﬁlter that will be

applied to the signal immediately before the expander.

When HPF (high pass ﬁlter) is on, the expander will

apply to the signal that has passed through the HPF, and

the signal that has passed through the LPF will then be

mixed in.

When LPF (low pass ﬁlter) is on, the expander will apply

to the signal that has passed through the LPF, and the

signal that has passed through the HPF will then be

mixed in.

If you want the signal immediately after passing

through the LPF or HPF to be used as the key-in

signal for the internal compressor, select SELF

POST EQ as the key-in signal.

When the key-in signal is set to LEFT CH (when

the key-in signal is taken from the previous-num-

bered channel), and if COMP is turned on and LPF

or HPF is also turned on for the channel that is the

source of the key-in signal, then the signal after

passing through the ﬁlter will be output as the key-

in signal.

INPUT FILTER ON/OFF—This turns the input ﬁlter on/

off. If off, the LPF/HPF setting will be ignored.

INPUT FILTER FREQUENCY—This sets the cutoff fre-

quency of the LPF/HPF. (The LPF cutoff frequency and

HPF cutoff frequency are always linked.)

Parameter Range

THRESHOLD –54 dB to 0 dB (1 dB steps)

OUT GAIN –18 dB to ±0.0 dB (0.5 dB steps)

WIDTH 1 dB–90 dB (1 dB steps)

ATTACK 0–120 ms (1 ms steps)

RELEASE

5 ms–42.3 s (fs = 48 kHz)

6 ms–46 s (fs = 44.1 kHz)

RATIO

1:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2:1,

2.5:1, 3:1, 3.5:1, 4:1, 5:1, 6:1, 8:1,

10:1, 20:1 (15 points)

INPUT FILTER

HPF/LPF

HPF (high-pass ﬁlter) or

LPF (low-pass ﬁlter)

INPUT FILTER

ON/OFF

ON or OFF

INPUT FILTER

FREQUENCY

20 Hz–20 kHz (121 steps)

SELF POST EQ

For COMP ON and HPF ON

LPF

HPF

COMPANDER H/S

For COMP ON and LPF ON

HPF

LPF

COMPANDER H/S

SELF POST EQ

Appendices

Gate Types

GATE

A gate, or noise gate is essentially an audio switch used

to mute signals below a set threshold level. It can be used

to cut background noise picked up by open micro-

phones, noise and hiss from guitar valve amps and

effects pedals, and leakage between drum microphones.

It also has many creative uses too. For example, gating a

drum sound with a short decay time tightens up the

sound. Also, patching a gate into a droning bass synth

channel and then triggering it from the kick drum chan-

nel allows the bass synth through only when the kick

drum is struck, adding extra “oomph” on the beat.

THRESHOLD—This determines the level at which the

gate closes, cutting off the signal. Signals above the

threshold level pass through unaffected. Signals at or

below the threshold, however, cause the gate to close.

The trigger signal is sourced using the KEY IN parame-

ter.

RANGE—This determines the level to which the gate

closes. Think of it as a brick holding a garden gate open

so that a certain amount of signal always ﬂows through.

For a setting of –70 dB, the gate closes completely when

the input signal falls below the threshold. For a setting of

–30 dB, however, the gate half closes. For a setting of

0 dB, the gate has no effect. When signals are gated

abruptly, the sudden disappearance can sometimes

sound odd. This parameter causes the gate to reduce the

signal level rather than cut it completely.

HOLD—This determines how long the gate stays open

once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold

level.

ATTACK—This determines how fast the gate opens

when the signal exceeds the threshold level. Slow attack

times can be used to remove the initial transient edge of

percussive sounds. Too slow an attack time makes some

sounds appear backwards.

DECAY—This determines how fast the gate closes once

the hold time has expired. A longer decay time produces

a more natural gating effect, allowing the natural decay

of an instrument to pass through. With a maximum

decay time of between 42 and 46 seconds, you could

even use this for fade-outs.

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Input Level (dB)

Output Level (dB)

Threshold = –10dB

Range = –30dB

Range = –70dB

Parameter Range

THRESHOLD –54 dB to 0 dB (1 dB steps)

RANGE –70 dB to 0 dB (1 dB steps)

HOLD

0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs = 48 kHz)

0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs = 44.1 kHz)

ATTACK 0–120 ms (1 ms steps)

DECAY

5 ms–42.3 s (fs = 48 kHz)

6 ms–46 s (fs = 44.1 kHz)

Gate Types

DUCKING

Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications

in which the background music level is reduced auto-

matically when an announcer speaks. Ducking is

achieved by triggering a compressor with a different

sound source. For example, a ducker is patched into the

background music channel, and the KEY IN signal is

sourced from the announcer’s microphone channel.

When the announcer’s microphone level exceeds the

speciﬁed threshold, the background music level is

reduced automatically, allowing the announcer to be

heard clearly. The same technique can also be used for

vocals in a mix. For example, ducking backing sounds

such as rhythm guitar and synth pad during vocal

phrases allows the vocals to be heard more clearly. This

can also be used to bring solo instruments up in a mix.

THRESHOLD—This determines the level of trigger sig-

nal (KEY IN) required to activate ducking. Trigger signal

levels below the threshold do not activate ducking. Trig-

ger signals at and above the threshold level, however,

activate ducking, and the signal level is reduced to a level

set by the Range parameter. The trigger signal is sourced

using the KEY IN parameter.

RANGE—This determines the level to which the signal

is ducked. For a setting of –70 dB, the signal is virtually

cutoff. For a setting of –30 dB, however, the signal is

ducked by 30 dB. For a setting of 0 dB, the ducker has no

effect.

HOLD— This determines how long ducking remains

active once the trigger signal has fallen below the thresh-

old level.

ATTACK—This determines how soon the signal is

ducked once the ducker has been triggered. With a fast

attack time, the signal is ducked almost immediately.

With a slow attack time, however, ducking appears to

fade the signal. Too fast an attack time may sound

abrupt.

DECAY—This determines how soon the ducker returns

to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops

below the threshold.

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Input Level (dB)

Output Level (dB)

Range = –30dB

Threshold = –20dB

Parameter Range

THRESHOLD –54 dB to 0 dB (1 dB steps)

RANGE –70 dB to 0 dB (1 dB steps)

HOLD

0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs = 48 kHz)

0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs = 44.1 kHz)

ATTACK 0–120 ms (1 ms steps)

DECAY

5 ms–42.3 s (fs = 48 kHz)

6 ms–46 s (fs = 44.1 kHz)

Appendices

Preset Effects Programs

This is a list of the effect programs built into the CS1D. Basic effect programs 01–29 are standard programs

for each effect type. Advanced reverb programs 31–71 are variations of reverb-type effects, and can be used

immediately in a variety of situations.

• Basic effect programs

Reverb-type Effects

Delays

Modulation-type Effects

Combined Effects

#Title Type Description

Reverb REVERB Reverb simulating a large space such as a concert hall.

Early Ref. EARLY REF.

An effect which isolates only the early reﬂection (ER.) component

from reverberation. A ﬂashier effect than reverb is produced.

Gate Reverb GATE REVERB A type of ER. designed for use as gated reverb.

Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE A reverse-playback type ER.

#Title Type Description

Delay LCR DELAY LCR Three-tap delay (L, C, R).

Echo ECHO

Stereo delay with additional parameters for more detailed control. The

signal can be fed back from left to right, and right to left.

#Title Type Description

Chorus CHORUS Three-phase stereo chorus.

Flange FLANGE The well-known ﬂanging effect.

Symphonic SYMPHONIC

A Yamaha proprietary effect that produces a richer and more complex

modulation than chorus.

Phaser PHASER Stereo phaser with 2-16 stages of phase shift.

Auto Pan AUTO PAN An effect which cyclically moves the sound between left and right.

Tremolo TREMOLO An effect which cyclically varies the sound volume.

HQ.Pitch HQ.PITCH Only one note is pitch-shifted, but a stable effect is produced.

Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shift with left and right pitches set independently.

#Title Type Description

Rev+Chorus REV+CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel

Rev->Chorus REV->CHORUS Reverb and chorus in series

Rev+Flange REV+FLANGE Reverb and ﬂanger in parallel

Rev->Flange REV->FLANGE Reverb and ﬂanger in series

Rev+Sympho. REV+SYMPHONIC Reverb and symphonic in parallel

Rev->Sympho. REV->SYMPHONIC Reverb and symphonic in series

Rev->Pan REV->PAN Reverb and auto-pan in parallel

Delay+ER. DELAY+ER. Delay and early reﬂections in parallel

Delay->ER. DELAY->ER. Delay and early reﬂections in series

Delay+Rev DELAY+REV Delay and reverb in parallel

Delay->Rev DELAY->REV Delay and reverb in series

Preset Effects Programs

Guitar Effects

Dynamic Effects

• Advanced reverb programs

Reverb Effects

#Title Type Description

Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar Amp Simulator

#Title Type Description

Dyna.Filter DYNA.FILTER Dynamically controlled ﬁlter.

Dyna.Flange DYNA.FLANGE Dynamically controlled ﬂanger.

Dyna.Phaser DYNA.PHASER Dynamically controlled phase shifter.

#Title Type Description

Large Hall 1 Reverb

The ProR3’s standard hall-type reverb. Simulates a large hall with

good acoustics, and is suitable for any instrument.

Large Hall 2 Reverb

New Hall Reverb

A program with a slight delay between the sparse early reﬂections

and the rich reverberation.

Wide Hall Reverb A program simulating a spacious and uncolored hall.

Breathless Hall Reverb A bit of character. Bright, strong, and somewhat long reverb.

Medium Hall 1 Reverb

A standard medium-sized hall reverb.

Medium Hall 2 Reverb

Wonder Hall Reverb

Reverb with a lighter feel than the large hall type. Try it with percus-

sion.

Bright Hall Reverb A bright medium sized hall.

Small Hall 1 Reverb An idealized small hall with a small stage.

Small Hall 2 Reverb An even smaller hall.

Pool Reverb Small hall program with many early reﬂections.

Open Hall Reverb Small hall with open space. For vocals.

Large Room 1 Reverb

Simulation of a large room with hard walls. A thick and somewhat

idiosyncratic sound. Try it on percussion.

Large Room 2 Reverb

Compared to Large Room 1, a room with more naturalness and trans-

parency.

Mood Room Reverb Large room with slightly darker tone.

Soft Room Reverb Large room with mellow tone.

Medium Room 1 Reverb

Simulates a medium sized studio with good acoustics. Apply to a 2-

channel source for “live in the studio.”

Medium Room 2 Reverb Simulates a somewhat live recording studio with wood walls.

Dark Room Reverb

A studio slightly smaller than Medium Room 2, with a natural acous-

tics.

Quick Room Reverb

A dry-sounding studio with wood and metal walls. For brass or per-

cussion.

Bright Studio Reverb

The small room programs are extremely short reverbs created with

hip-hop in mind. These are meant to be applied in small amounts, so

that the sound appears either dry or to have the natural acoustics of a

studio. They are especially effective on sequenced instruments, synth

brass, and on instruments recorded in a dead studio.

Droid Short Reverb

Simulates an early and extremely expensive digital reverb unit.

Droid Long Reverb

Appendices

Coliseum Reverb Long reverb of a wide space, simulating a coliseum.

Opera Reverb

Fairly long reverb with a 52 ms delay between the early reﬂections

and the reverb.

Train Station Reverb Try this when you need echoing footsteps in a late-night train station.

Beauty Plate Reverb Sub-reverb settings have been boosted. Try it on an electric piano.

Arena Plate Reverb Simulates a gigantic arena like the Budokan in Tokyo.

Vocal Plate 1 Reverb Try it on vocals. Especially nice for ballads.

Vocal Plate 2 Reverb Reverb with a darker feel than Vocal Plate 1.

String Plate Reverb Try it on strings for an even more beautiful sound.

Home Plate Reverb Metal plate reverb from the good old days.

LA Plate Short Reverb

Simulations of the bright and crisp plate reverb preferred in studios on

the US west coast.

LA Plate Long Reverb

Short Perc.Plate Reverb

Short and bright percussion plate. Set the IniDelay parameter accord-

ing to the tempo.

Long Plate Reverb Longer plate reverb. Try it on organ pads etc.

Gated Rev 1 Reverb

These are standard combinations of reverb + noise gate. Compared

to the gated programs consisting only of E.Ref, more detailed settings

are required to ﬁt them to your song, but this also means that you

have more control.

Gated Rev 2 Reverb

Reverb Flange Reverb Rather ﬂashy reverb with a ﬂanger applied.

Super Long Decay Reverb An effect like an extremely long tunnel.

Effects Parameters

These are the parameters used to edit each effect.

• REVERB [Type: STEREO]

• EARLY REF. [Type: STEREO]

Parameter Range Description

REVERB TYPE

Small Hall, Large Hall, Vocal Plate,

Perc.Plate, Spring, Echo Room,

Strings, Snare, Reverb Flange

Reverb type

REV TIME 0.3 - 99 [s] Reverb time

INI.DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Initial delay before reverb begins

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 Reverb time for high-frequency portion

LO.RATIO 0.1 - 2.4 Reverb time for low-frequency portion

DIFFUSION 0 - 10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)

DENSITY 0 - 100 [%] Reverb density

FREQ. 0.05 - 40.00 [Hz] Modulation frequency

DEPTH 0 - 100 [%] Modulation depth

MOD DELAY 0.0 - 30.0 [ms] Delay time applied to modulation

ER. DELAY 0.0 - 100.0 [ms] Delay between early reﬂections and reverb

ER. BALANCE 0 - 100 [%]

Balance of early reﬂections and reverb

(0%= ER., 100%= reverb)

GATE LEVEL OFF, –60 - 0 [dB] Level at which gate kicks in

ATTACK 0 - 120 [ms] Gate opening speed

HOLD

0.02ms - 1.96s(@fs=48kHz),

0.02ms - 2.13s(@fs=44.1kHz)

Gate open time

DECAY

5.0ms - 42.3s(@fs=48kHz),

6.0ms - 46.0s(@fs=44.1kHz)

Gate closing speed

HPF Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance

Parameter Range Description

ER. TYPE

Small Hall, Large Hall, Random,

Reverse, Plate, Spring

Type of early reﬂection (ER.) simulation

ROOM SIZE 0.1 - 20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0 - 10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0= dead, 10= live)

INI.DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFFUSION 0 - 10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread)

DENSITY 0 - 100 [%] Reverb density

ER. NUM. 1 - 34 Number of early reﬂections

FB.DELAY 0.0 - 1000.0 [ms] Feedback delay time

FB.LEVEL –99 - +99 [%] Feedback gain

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SPACE MOD 0 - 10 Modulation depth

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance

Appendices

•GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE [Type: STEREO]

• DELAY LCR [Type: MIX]

• Delay Time is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

Parameter Range Description

ER. TYPE Type-A, Type-B Type of early reﬂection (ER.) simulation

ROOM SIZE 0.1 - 20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0 - 10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0= dead, 10= live)

INI.DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFFUSION 0 - 10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread)

DENSITY 0 - 100 [%] Reverb density

ER. NUM. 1 - 34 Number of early reﬂections

FB.DELAY 0.0 - 1000.0 [ms] Feedback delay time

FB.LEVEL –99 - +99 [%] Feedback gain

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SPACE MOD 0 - 10 Modulation depth

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

delay time

DELAY L 0.0 - 5460.0 [ms] Left channel delay time

NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

LEVEL L –100 - +100 [%] Left channel level

DELAY C 0.0 - 5460.0 [ms] Center channel delay time

NOTE C *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

LEVEL C –100 - +100 [%] Center channel level

DELAY R 0.0 - 5460.0 [ms] Right channel delay time

NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

LEVEL R –100 - +100 [%] Right channel level

FB.DELAY 0.0 - 5460.0 [ms] Feedback delay time

NOTE FB. *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

FB.LEVEL –99 - +99 [%] Feedback gain

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance



  

      

Effects Parameters

• ECHO [Type: STEREO]

• Delay Time is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

• CHORUS [Type: STEREO]

• FREQ. is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

delay time

DELAY L 0.0 - 2730.0 Left channel delay time

NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

FB.LEVEL L –99 - +99 [%]

Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

DELAY R 0.0 - 2730.0 Right channel delay time

NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

FB.LEVEL R –99 - +99 [%]

Right channel feedback gain (plus values for nor-

mal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

FB.DELAY L 0.0 - 2730.0 Left channel feedback delay time

NOTE FB.L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

L->R FB.LEVEL –99 - +99 [%]

Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for nor-

mal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

FB.DELAY R 0.0 - 2730.0 Right channel feedback delay time

NOTE FB.R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

R->L FB.LEVEL –99 - +99 [%]

Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for nor-

mal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

modulation speed

FREQ. 0.05 - 40.00 [Hz] Modulation speed

NOTE *1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine modulation

speed

PM DEPTH 0 - 100 [%] Pitch modulation depth

AM DEPTH 0 - 100 [%] Amplitude modulation depth

MOD DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Delay time applied to modulation

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LOW SHEL. F Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] Low-range shelving ﬁlter frequency

LOW SHEL. G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] Low-range shelving ﬁlter gain

PEQ F 100 - 8.0k [Hz] Parametric EQ cutoff frequency

PEQ G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] Parametric EQ gain

PEQ Q 10.0 - 0.1 Parametric EQ Q

HIGH SHEL. F 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] High-range shelving ﬁlter frequency

HIGH SHEL. G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] High-range shelving ﬁlter gain

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance



  

      



  

      

Appendices

• FLANGE [Type: STEREO]

• FREQ. is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

• SYMPHONIC [Type: STEREO]

• FREQ. is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

modulation speed

FREQ. 0.05 - 40.00 [Hz] Modulation speed

NOTE *1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine modulation

speed

DEPTH 0 - 100 [%] Modulation depth

MOD DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Delay time applied to modulation

FB.LEVEL –99 - +99 [%] Feedback gain

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LOW SHEL. F Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] Low-range shelving ﬁlter frequency

LOW SHEL. G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] Low-range shelving ﬁlter gain

PEQ F 100 - 8.0k [Hz] Parametric EQ cutoff frequency

PEQ G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] Parametric EQ gain

PEQ Q 10.0 - 0.1 Parametric EQ Q

HIGH SHEL. F 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] High-range shelving ﬁlter frequency

HIGH SHEL. G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] High-range shelving ﬁlter gain

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

modulation speed

FREQ. 0.05 - 40.00 [Hz] Modulation speed

NOTE *1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine modulation

speed

DEPTH 0 - 100 [%] Modulation depth

MOD DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Delay time applied to modulation

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LOW SHEL. F Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] Low-range shelving ﬁlter frequency

LOW SHEL. G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] Low-range shelving ﬁlter gain

PEQ F 100 - 8.0k [Hz] Parametric EQ cutoff frequency

PEQ G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] Parametric EQ gain

PEQ Q 10.0 - 0.1 Parametric EQ Q

HIGH SHEL. F 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] High-range shelving ﬁlter frequency

HIGH SHEL. G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] High-range shelving ﬁlter gain

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance



  

      



  

      

Effects Parameters

• PHASER [Type: STEREO]

• FREQ. is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

• AUTO PAN [Type: STEREO]

• FREQ. is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

modulation speed

FREQ. 0.05 - 40.00 [Hz] Modulation speed

NOTE *1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine modulation

speed

DEPTH 0 - 100 [%] Modulation depth

FB.LEVEL –99 - +99 [%] Feedback gain

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

OFFSET 0 - 100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset

STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages

LOW SHEL. F Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] Low-range shelving ﬁlter frequency

LOW SHEL. G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] Low-range shelving ﬁlter gain

PEQ F 100 - 8.0k [Hz] Parametric EQ cutoff frequency

PEQ G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] Parametric EQ gain

PEQ Q 10.0 - 0.1 Parametric EQ Q

HIGH SHEL. F 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] High-range shelving ﬁlter frequency

HIGH SHEL. G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] High-range shelving ﬁlter gain

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

modulation speed

FREQ. 0.05 - 40.00 [Hz] Modulation speed

NOTE *1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine modulation

speed

DEPTH 0 - 100 [%] Modulation depth

DIRECTION L<->R, L->R, L<-R, Turn L, Turn R Panning direction

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

LOW SHEL. F Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] Low-range shelving ﬁlter frequency

LOW SHEL. G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] Low-range shelving ﬁlter gain

PEQ F 100 - 8.0k [Hz] Parametric EQ cutoff frequency

PEQ G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] Parametric EQ gain

PEQ Q 10.0 - 0.1 Parametric EQ Q

HIGH SHEL. F 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] High-range shelving ﬁlter frequency

HIGH SHEL. G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] High-range shelving ﬁlter gain

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance



  

      



  

      

Appendices

• TREMOLO [Type: STEREO]

• FREQ. is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

• HQ. PITCH [Type: MIX]

• Delay Time is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

modulation speed

FREQ. 0.05 - 40.00 [Hz] Modulation speed

NOTE *1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine modulation

speed

DEPTH 0 - 100 [%] Modulation depth

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

LOW SHEL. F Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] Low-range shelving ﬁlter frequency

LOW SHEL. G -12.0 - +12.0 [dB] Low-range shelving ﬁlter gain

PEQ F 100 - 8.0k [Hz] Parametric EQ cutoff frequency

PEQ G -12.0 - +12.0 [dB] Parametric EQ gain

PEQ Q 10.0 - 0.1 Parametric EQ Q

HIGH SHEL. F 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] High-range shelving ﬁlter frequency

HIGH SHEL. G -12.0 - +12.0 [dB] High-range shelving ﬁlter gain

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

delay time

PITCH –12 - +12 Pitch shift

FINE –50 - +50 [ct] Pitch shift ﬁne

MODE 1 - 10 Pitch shift precision

DELAY 0.0 - 1000.0 [ms] Delay time

NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

FB.LEVEL –99 - +99 [%]

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HPF Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance



  

      



  

      

Effects Parameters

• DUAL PITCH [Type: STEREO]

• Delay Time is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

• REV + CHORUS [Type: MIX]

• FREQ. is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

delay time

PITCH L –24 - +24 Left channel pitch shift

FINE L –50 - +50 [ct] Left channel pitch shift ﬁne

LEVEL L –100 - +100 [%]

Left channel level (plus values for normal phase, minus

values for reverse phase)

PITCH R –24 - +24 Right channel pitch shift

FINE R –50 - +50 [ct] Right channel pitch shift ﬁne

LEVEL R –100 - +100 [%]

Right channel level (plus values for normal phase, minus

values for reverse phase)

DELAY L 0.0 - 1000.0 [ms] Left channel delay time

NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

FB.LEVEL L –99 - +99 [%]

Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

DELAY R 0.0 - 1000.0 [ms] Right channel delay time

NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

FB.LEVEL R –99 - +99 [%]

Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-

phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

MODE 1 - 10 Pitch shift precision

HPF Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

modulation speed

REVERB TYPE

Small Hall, Large Hall, Vocal Plate,

Perc.Plate, Spring, Echo Room,

Strings, Snare, Reverb Flange

Reverb type

REV TIME 0.3 - 99 [s] Reverb time

INI.DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Initial delay before reverb begins

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 Reverb time for high-frequency portion

DENSITY 0 - 100 [%] Reverb density

FREQ. 0.05 - 40.00 [Hz] Modulation speed

NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine modulation

speed

DEPTH 0 - 100 [%] Modulation depth

MOD DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

CHO:REV BAL. 0 - 100 [%] Reverb and chorus balance (0%= chorus, 100%= reverb)

HPF Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance



  

      



  

      

Appendices

• REV ➔ CHORUS [Type: MIX]

• FREQ. is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

• REV + FLANGE [Type: MIX]

• FREQ. is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

modulation speed

REVERB TYPE

Small Hall, Large Hall, Vocal Plate,

Perc.Plate, Spring, Echo Room,

Strings, Snare, Reverb Flange

Reverb type

REV TIME 0.3 - 99 [s] Reverb time

INI.DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Initial delay before reverb begins

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 Reverb time for high-frequency portion

DENSITY 0 - 100 [%] Reverb density

FREQ. 0.05 - 40.00 [Hz] Modulation speed

NOTE *1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine modulation

speed

DEPTH 0 - 100 [%] Modulation depth

MOD DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

CHO-REV BAL. 0 - 100 [%]

Reverb and chorused reverb balance

(0%= chorused reverb, 100%= reverb)

HPF Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

modulation speed

REVERB TYPE

Small Hall, Large Hall, Vocal Plate,

Perc.Plate, Spring, Echo Room,

Strings, Snare, Reverb Flange

Reverb type

REV TIME 0.3 - 99 [s] Reverb time

INI.DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Initial delay before reverb begins

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 Reverb time for high-frequency portion

DENSITY 0 - 100 [%] Reverb density

FREQ. 0.05 - 40.00 [Hz] Modulation speed

NOTE *1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine modulation

speed

DEPTH 0 - 100 [%] Modulation depth

MOD DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Delay time applied to modulation

FB.LEVEL –99 - +99 [%]

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

FLG:REV BAL. 0 - 100 [%] Reverb and ﬂange balance (0%= ﬂange, 100%= reverb)

HPF Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance



  

      



  

      

Effects Parameters

• REV ➔ FLANGE [Type: MIX]

• FREQ. is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

• REV + SYMPHONIC [Type: MIX]

• FREQ. is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

modulation speed

REVERB TYPE

Small Hall, Large Hall, Vocal Plate,

Perc.Plate, Spring, Echo Room,

Strings, Snare, Reverb Flange

Reverb type

REV TIME 0.3 - 99 [s] Reverb time

INI.DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Initial delay before reverb begins

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 Reverb time for high-frequency portion

DENSITY 0 - 100 [%] Reverb density

FREQ. 0.05 - 40.00 [Hz] Modulation speed

NOTE *1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine modulation

speed

DEPTH 0 - 100 [%] Modulation depth

MOD DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Delay time applied to modulation

FB.LEVEL –99 - +99 [%]

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

FLG-REV BAL. 0 - 100 [%]

Reverb and ﬂanged reverb balance

(0%= ﬂanged reverb, 100%= reverb)

HPF Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

modulation speed

REVERB TYPE

Small Hall, Large Hall, Vocal Plate,

Perc.Plate, Spring, Echo Room,

Strings, Snare, Reverb Flange

Reverb type

REV TIME 0.3 - 99 [s] Reverb time

INI.DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Initial delay before reverb begins

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 Reverb time for high-frequency portion

DENSITY 0 - 100 [%] Reverb density

FREQ. 0.05 - 40.00 [Hz] Modulation speed

NOTE *1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine modulation

speed

DEPTH 0 - 100 [%] Modulation depth

MOD DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Delay time applied to modulation

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYM:REV BAL. 0 - 100 [%]

Reverb and symphonic balance

(0%= symphonic, 100%= reverb)

HPF Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance



  

      



  

      

Appendices

• REV ➔ SYMPHONIC [Type: MIX]

• FREQ. is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

• REV ➔ PAN [Type: MIX]

• FREQ. is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

modulation speed

REVERB TYPE

Small Hall, Large Hall, Vocal Plate,

Perc.Plate, Spring, Echo Room,

Strings, Snare, Reverb Flange

Reverb type

REV TIME 0.3 - 99 [s] Reverb time

INI.DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Initial delay before reverb begins

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 Reverb time for high-frequency portion

DENSITY 0 - 100 [%] Reverb density

FREQ. 0.05 - 40.00 [Hz] Modulation speed

NOTE *1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine modulation

speed

DEPTH 0 - 100 [%] Modulation depth

MOD DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Delay time applied to modulation

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYM-REV BAL. 0 - 100 [%]

Reverb and symphonic reverb balance

(0%= symphonic reverb, 100%= reverb)

HPF Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

modulation speed

REVERB TYPE

Small Hall, Large Hall, Vocal Plate,

Perc.Plate, Spring, Echo Room,

Strings, Snare, Reverb Flange

Reverb type

REV TIME 0.3 - 99 [s] Reverb time

INI.DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Initial delay before reverb begins

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 Reverb time for high-frequency portion

DENSITY 0 - 100 [%] Reverb density

FREQ. 0.05 - 40.00 [Hz] Modulation speed

NOTE *1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine modulation

speed

DEPTH 0 - 100 [%] Modulation depth

DIRECTION L<->R, L-->R, L<--R, Turn L, Turn R Panning direction

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

PAN-REV BAL. 0 - 100 [%]

Reverb and panned reverb balance

(0%= panned reverb, 100%= reverb)

HPF Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance



  

      



  

      

Effects Parameters

• DELAY + ER. [Type: MIX]

• Delay Time is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

• DELAY ➔ ER. [Type: MIX]

• Delay Time is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

delay time

DELAY L 0.0 - 4000.0 Left channel delay time

NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

DELAY R 0.0 - 4000.0 Right channel delay time

NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

FB.LEVEL –99 - +99 [%]

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

FB.DELAY 0.0 - 4000.0 Feedback delay time

NOTE FB. *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

ER.:DELAY BAL. 0 - 100 [%]

Delay and early reﬂections balance

(0%= early reﬂections, 100%= delay)

ER. TYPE

Small Hall, Large Hall, Random,

Reverse, Plate, Spring

Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOM SIZE 0.1 - 20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0 - 10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0= dead, 10= live)

INI.DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Initial delay before reverb begins

DENSITY 0 - 100 [%] Reverb density

ER. NUM. 1 - 34 Number of early reﬂections

HPF Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

delay time

DELAY L 0.0 - 4000.0 Left channel delay time

NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

DELAY R 0.0 - 4000.0 Right channel delay time

NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

FB.LEVEL –99 - +99 [%]

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

FB.DELAY 0.0 - 4000.0 Feedback delay time

NOTE FB. *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

ER.-DELAY BAL. 0 - 100 [%]

Delay and early reﬂected delay balance

(0% = early reﬂected delay, 100% = delay)

ER. TYPE

Small Hall, Large Hall, Random,

Reverse, Plate, Spring

Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOM SIZE 0.1 - 20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0 - 10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0= dead, 10= live)

INI.DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Initial delay before reverb begins

DENSITY 0 - 100 [%] Reverb density

ER. NUM. 1 - 34 Number of early reﬂections

HPF Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance



  

      



  

      

Appendices

• DELAY + REV [Type: MIX]

• Delay Time is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

• DELAY ➔ REV [Type: MIX]

• Delay Time is calculated from the [TEMPO] and [NOTE].

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

delay time

DELAY L 0.0 - 4000.0 Left channel delay time

NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

DELAY R 0.0 - 4000.0 Right channel delay time

NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

FB.LEVEL –99 - +99 [%]

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

FB.DELAY 0.0 - 4000.0 Feedback delay time

NOTE FB. *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

DELAY HIGH 0.1 - 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

REV:DELAY BAL. 0 - 100 [%] Delay and reverb balance (0%= reverb, 100%= delay)

REVERB TYPE

Small Hall, Large Hall, Vocal Plate,

Perc.Plate, Spring, Echo Room,

Strings, Snare, Reverb Flange

Reverb type

REV TIME 0.3 - 99 [s] Reverb time

INI.DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Initial delay before reverb begins

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 Reverb time for high-frequency portion

DENSITY 0 - 100 [%] Reverb density

HPF Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance

Parameter Range Description

TEMPO 20 - 300

Tempo (BPM) value that is the basis for calculating the

delay time

DELAY L 0.0 - 4000.0 Left channel delay time

NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

DELAY R 0.0 - 4000.0 Right channel delay time

NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

FB.LEVEL –99 - +99 [%]

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

FB.DELAY 0.0 - 4000.0 Feedback delay time

NOTE FB. *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine delay time

DELAY HIGH 0.1 - 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

REV-DELAY BAL. 0 - 100 [%]

Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = delayed reverb,

100% = delay)

REVERB TYPE

Small Hall, Large Hall, Vocal Plate,

Perc.Plate, Spring, Echo Room,

Strings, Snare, Reverb Flange

Reverb type

REV TIME 0.3 - 99 [s] Reverb time

INI.DELAY 0.0 - 500.0 [ms] Initial delay before reverb begins

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 Reverb time for high-frequency portion

DENSITY 0 - 100 [%] Reverb density

HPF Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance



  

      



  

      

Effects Parameters

• AMP SIMULATE [Type: MIX]

• DYNA. FILTER [Type: STEREO]

• DYNA. FLANGE [Type: STEREO]

Parameter Range Description

AMP TYPE

STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH,

MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR,

CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI

Guitar amp simulation type

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2,

CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST= distortion, OVD= overdrive)

NOISE GATE 0 - 20 Noise reduction

DRIVE 0 - 100 Distortion drive

MASTER 0 - 100 Master volume

CAB 0 - 100 [%] Speaker cabinet simulation depth

BASS 0 - 100 Bass tone control

MIDDLE 0 - 100 Middle tone control

TREBLE 0 - 100 High tone control

EQ F 100 - 8.0k [Hz] Parametric equalizer frequency

EQ G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] Parametric equalizer gain

EQ Q 10.0 - 0.10 Parametric equalizer bandwidth

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance

Parameter Range Description

SENSE 0 - 100 Sensitivity

FILTER TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type

OFFSET 0 - 100 Filter frequency offset

RESONANCE 0 - 20 Filter resonance

LEVEL 0 - 100 Output level

DIRECTION UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change

DECAY

5.0ms - 42.3s(@fs=48kHz),

6.0ms - 46.0s(@fs=44.1kHz)

Filter frequency change decay speed

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance

Parameter Range Description

SENSE 0 - 100 Sensitivity

FB.LEVEL –99 - +99 [%]

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

OFFSET 0 - 100 Delay time offset

DIRECTION UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change

DECAY

5.0ms - 42.3s(@fs=48kHz),

6.0ms - 46.0s(@fs=44.1kHz)

Decay speed

LOW SHEL. F Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] Low-range shelving ﬁlter frequency

LOW SHEL. G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] Low-range shelving ﬁlter gain

PEQ F 100 - 8.0k [Hz] Parametric EQ cutoff frequency

PEQ G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] Parametric EQ gain

PEQ Q 10.0 - 0.10 Parametric EQ Q

HIGH SHEL. F 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] High-range shelving ﬁlter frequency

HIGH SHEL. G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] High-range shelving ﬁlter gain

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance

Appendices

• DYNA. PHASER [Type: STEREO]

Parameter Range Description

SENSE 0 - 100 Sensitivity

FB.LEVEL –99 - +99 [%]

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI.RATIO 0.1 - 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

OFFSET 0 - 100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset

DIRECTION UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change

STAGE 2, 4, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages

DECAY

5.0ms - 42.3s(@fs=48kHz),

6.0ms - 46.0s(@fs=44.1kHz)

Decay speed

LOW SHEL. F Thru, 21 - 8.0k [Hz] Low-range shelving ﬁlter frequency

LOW SHEL. G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] Low-range shelving ﬁlter gain

PEQ F 100 - 8.0k [Hz] Parametric EQ cutoff frequency

PEQ G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] Parametric EQ gain

PEQ Q 10.0 - 0.10 Parametric EQ Q

HIGH SHEL. F 50 - 16.0k, Thru [Hz] High-range shelving ﬁlter frequency

HIGH SHEL. G –12.0 - +12.0 [dB] High-range shelving ﬁlter gain

BALANCE WAT 0 - 100 [%] Wet/dry balance

Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table

Initial Bank/Ch# 1

Initial Bank/Ch# 2

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

001 Scene 01.0 033 Scene 04.2 065 Scene 07.4 097 Scene 10.6

002 Scene 01.1 034 Scene 04.3 066 Scene 07.5 098 Scene 10.7

003 Scene 01.2 035 Scene 04.4 067 Scene 07.6 099 Scene 10.8

004 Scene 01.3 036 Scene 04.5 068 Scene 07.7 100 Scene 10.9

005 Scene 01.4 037 Scene 04.6 069 Scene 07.8 101 Scene 11.0

006 Scene 01.5 038 Scene 04.7 070 Scene 07.9 102 Scene 11.1

007 Scene 01.6 039 Scene 04.8 071 Scene 08.0 103 Scene 11.2

008 Scene 01.7 040 Scene 04.9 072 Scene 08.1 104 Scene 11.3

009 Scene 01.8 041 Scene 05.0 073 Scene 08.2 105 Scene 11.4

010 Scene 01.9 042 Scene 05.1 074 Scene 08.3 106 Scene 11.5

011 Scene 02.0 043 Scene 05.2 075 Scene 08.4 107 Scene 11.6

012 Scene 02.1 044 Scene 05.3 076 Scene 08.5 108 Scene 11.7

013 Scene 02.2 045 Scene 05.4 077 Scene 08.6 109 Scene 11.8

014 Scene 02.3 046 Scene 05.5 078 Scene 08.7 110 Scene 11.9

015 Scene 02.4 047 Scene 05.6 079 Scene 08.8 111 Scene 12.0

016 Scene 02.5 048 Scene 05.7 080 Scene 08.9 112 Scene 12.1

017 Scene 02.6 049 Scene 05.8 081 Scene 09.0 113 Scene 12.2

018 Scene 02.7 050 Scene 05.9 082 Scene 09.1 114 Scene 12.3

019 Scene 02.8 051 Scene 06.0 083 Scene 09.2 115 Scene 12.4

020 Scene 02.9 052 Scene 06.1 084 Scene 09.3 116 Scene 12.5

021 Scene 03.0 053 Scene 06.2 085 Scene 09.4 117 Scene 12.6

022 Scene 03.1 054 Scene 06.3 086 Scene 09.5 118 Scene 12.7

023 Scene 03.2 055 Scene 06.4 087 Scene 09.6 119 Scene 12.8

024 Scene 03.3 056 Scene 06.5 088 Scene 09.7 120 Scene 12.9

025 Scene 03.4 057 Scene 06.6 089 Scene 09.8 121 Scene 13.0

026 Scene 03.5 058 Scene 06.7 090 Scene 09.9 122 Scene 13.1

027 Scene 03.6 059 Scene 06.8 091 Scene 10.0 123 Scene 13.2

028 Scene 03.7 060 Scene 06.9 092 Scene 10.1 124 Scene 13.3

029 Scene 03.8 061 Scene 07.0 093 Scene 10.2 125 Scene 13.4

030 Scene 03.9 062 Scene 07.1 094 Scene 10.3 126 Scene 13.5

031 Scene 04.0 063 Scene 07.2 095 Scene 10.4 127 Scene 13.6

032 Scene 04.1 064 Scene 07.3 096 Scene 10.5 128 Scene 13.7

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

001 Scene 13.8 033 Scene 17.0 065 Scene 20.2 097 Scene 23.4

002 Scene 13.9 034 Scene 17.1 066 Scene 20.3 098 Scene 23.5

003 Scene 14.0 035 Scene 17.2 067 Scene 20.4 099 Scene 23.6

004 Scene 14.1 036 Scene 17.3 068 Scene 20.5 100 Scene 23.7

005 Scene 14.2 037 Scene 17.4 069 Scene 20.6 101 Scene 23.8

006 Scene 14.3 038 Scene 17.5 070 Scene 20.7 102 Scene 23.9

007 Scene 14.4 039 Scene 17.6 071 Scene 20.8 103 Scene 24.0

008 Scene 14.5 040 Scene 17.7 072 Scene 20.9 104 Scene 24.1

009 Scene 14.6 041 Scene 17.8 073 Scene 21.0 105 Scene 24.2

010 Scene 14.7 042 Scene 17.9 074 Scene 21.1 106 Scene 24.3

011 Scene 14.8 043 Scene 18.0 075 Scene 21.2 107 Scene 24.4

012 Scene 14.9 044 Scene 18.1 076 Scene 21.3 108 Scene 24.5

013 Scene 15.0 045 Scene 18.2 077 Scene 21.4 109 Scene 24.6

014 Scene 15.1 046 Scene 18.3 078 Scene 21.5 110 Scene 24.7

015 Scene 15.2 047 Scene 18.4 079 Scene 21.6 111 Scene 24.8

016 Scene 15.3 048 Scene 18.5 080 Scene 21.7 112 Scene 24.9

017 Scene 15.4 049 Scene 18.6 081 Scene 21.8 113 Scene 25.0

018 Scene 15.5 050 Scene 18.7 082 Scene 21.9 114 Scene 25.1

019 Scene 15.6 051 Scene 18.8 083 Scene 22.0 115 Scene 25.2

020 Scene 15.7 052 Scene 18.9 084 Scene 22.1 116 Scene 25.3

021 Scene 15.8 053 Scene 19.0 085 Scene 22.2 117 Scene 25.4

022 Scene 15.9 054 Scene 19.1 086 Scene 22.3 118 Scene 25.5

023 Scene 16.0 055 Scene 19.2 087 Scene 22.4 119 Scene 25.6

024 Scene 16.1 056 Scene 19.3 088 Scene 22.5 120 Scene 25.7

025 Scene 16.2 057 Scene 19.4 089 Scene 22.6 121 Scene 25.8

026 Scene 16.3 058 Scene 19.5 090 Scene 22.7 122 Scene 25.9

027 Scene 16.4 059 Scene 19.6 091 Scene 22.8 123 Scene 26.0

028 Scene 16.5 060 Scene 19.7 092 Scene 22.9 124 Scene 26.1

029 Scene 16.6 061 Scene 19.8 093 Scene 23.0 125 Scene 26.2

030 Scene 16.7 062 Scene 19.9 094 Scene 23.1 126 Scene 26.3

031 Scene 16.8 063 Scene 20.0 095 Scene 23.2 127 Scene 26.4

032 Scene 16.9 064 Scene 20.1 096 Scene 23.3 128 Scene 26.5

Appendices

Initial Bank/Ch# 3

Initial Bank/Ch# 4

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

001 Scene 26.6 033 Scene 29.8 065 Scene 33.0 097 Scene 36.2

002 Scene 26.7 034 Scene 29.9 066 Scene 33.1 098 Scene 36.3

003 Scene 26.8 035 Scene 30.0 067 Scene 33.2 099 Scene 36.4

004 Scene 26.9 036 Scene 30.1 068 Scene 33.3 100 Scene 36.5

005 Scene 27.0 037 Scene 30.2 069 Scene 33.4 101 Scene 36.6

006 Scene 27.1 038 Scene 30.3 070 Scene 33.5 102 Scene 36.7

007 Scene 27.2 039 Scene 30.4 071 Scene 33.6 103 Scene 36.8

008 Scene 27.3 040 Scene 30.5 072 Scene 33.7 104 Scene 36.9

009 Scene 27.4 041 Scene 30.6 073 Scene 33.8 105 Scene 37.0

010 Scene 27.5 042 Scene 30.7 074 Scene 33.9 106 Scene 37.1

011 Scene 27.6 043 Scene 30.8 075 Scene 34.0 107 Scene 37.2

012 Scene 27.7 044 Scene 30.9 076 Scene 34.1 108 Scene 37.3

013 Scene 27.8 045 Scene 31.0 077 Scene 34.2 109 Scene 37.4

014 Scene 27.9 046 Scene 31.1 078 Scene 34.3 110 Scene 37.5

015 Scene 28.0 047 Scene 31.2 079 Scene 34.4 111 Scene 37.6

016 Scene 28.1 048 Scene 31.3 080 Scene 34.5 112 Scene 37.7

017 Scene 28.2 049 Scene 31.4 081 Scene 34.6 113 Scene 37.8

018 Scene 28.3 050 Scene 31.5 082 Scene 34.7 114 Scene 37.9

019 Scene 28.4 051 Scene 31.6 083 Scene 34.8 115 Scene 38.0

020 Scene 28.5 052 Scene 31.7 084 Scene 34.9 116 Scene 38.1

021 Scene 28.6 053 Scene 31.8 085 Scene 35.0 117 Scene 38.2

022 Scene 28.7 054 Scene 31.9 086 Scene 35.1 118 Scene 38.3

023 Scene 28.8 055 Scene 32.0 087 Scene 35.2 119 Scene 38.4

024 Scene 28.9 056 Scene 32.1 088 Scene 35.3 120 Scene 38.5

025 Scene 29.0 057 Scene 32.2 089 Scene 35.4 121 Scene 38.6

026 Scene 29.1 058 Scene 32.3 090 Scene 35.5 122 Scene 38.7

027 Scene 29.2 059 Scene 32.4 091 Scene 35.6 123 Scene 38.8

028 Scene 29.3 060 Scene 32.5 092 Scene 35.7 124 Scene 38.9

029 Scene 29.4 061 Scene 32.6 093 Scene 35.8 125 Scene 39.0

030 Scene 29.5 062 Scene 32.7 094 Scene 35.9 126 Scene 39.1

031 Scene 29.6 063 Scene 32.8 095 Scene 36.0 127 Scene 39.2

032 Scene 29.7 064 Scene 32.9 096 Scene 36.1 128 Scene 39.3

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

001 Scene 39.4 033 Scene 42.6 065 Scene 45.8 097 Scene 49.0

002 Scene 39.5 034 Scene 42.7 066 Scene 45.9 098 Scene 49.1

003 Scene 39.6 035 Scene 42.8 067 Scene 46.0 099 Scene 49.2

004 Scene 39.7 036 Scene 42.9 068 Scene 46.1 100 Scene 49.3

005 Scene 39.8 037 Scene 43.0 069 Scene 46.2 101 Scene 49.4

006 Scene 39.9 038 Scene 43.1 070 Scene 46.3 102 Scene 49.5

007 Scene 40.0 039 Scene 43.2 071 Scene 46.4 103 Scene 49.6

008 Scene 40.1 040 Scene 43.3 072 Scene 46.5 104 Scene 49.7

009 Scene 40.2 041 Scene 43.4 073 Scene 46.6 105 Scene 49.8

010 Scene 40.3 042 Scene 43.5 074 Scene 46.7 106 Scene 49.9

011 Scene 40.4 043 Scene 43.6 075 Scene 46.8 107 Scene 50.0

012 Scene 40.5 044 Scene 43.7 076 Scene 46.9 108 Scene 50.1

013 Scene 40.6 045 Scene 43.8 077 Scene 47.0 109 Scene 50.2

014 Scene 40.7 046 Scene 43.9 078 Scene 47.1 110 Scene 50.3

015 Scene 40.8 047 Scene 44.0 079 Scene 47.2 111 Scene 50.4

016 Scene 40.9 048 Scene 44.1 080 Scene 47.3 112 Scene 50.5

017 Scene 41.0 049 Scene 44.2 081 Scene 47.4 113 Scene 50.6

018 Scene 41.1 050 Scene 44.3 082 Scene 47.5 114 Scene 50.7

019 Scene 41.2 051 Scene 44.4 083 Scene 47.6 115 Scene 50.8

020 Scene 41.3 052 Scene 44.5 084 Scene 47.7 116 Scene 50.9

021 Scene 41.4 053 Scene 44.6 085 Scene 47.8 117 Scene 51.0

022 Scene 41.5 054 Scene 44.7 086 Scene 47.9 118 Scene 51.1

023 Scene 41.6 055 Scene 44.8 087 Scene 48.0 119 Scene 51.2

024 Scene 41.7 056 Scene 44.9 088 Scene 48.1 120 Scene 51.3

025 Scene 41.8 057 Scene 45.0 089 Scene 48.2 121 Scene 51.4

026 Scene 41.9 058 Scene 45.1 090 Scene 48.3 122 Scene 51.5

027 Scene 42.0 059 Scene 45.2 091 Scene 48.4 123 Scene 51.6

028 Scene 42.1 060 Scene 45.3 092 Scene 48.5 124 Scene 51.7

029 Scene 42.2 061 Scene 45.4 093 Scene 48.6 125 Scene 51.8

030 Scene 42.3 062 Scene 45.5 094 Scene 48.7 126 Scene 51.9

031 Scene 42.4 063 Scene 45.6 095 Scene 48.8 127 Scene 52.0

032 Scene 42.5 064 Scene 45.7 096 Scene 48.9 128 Scene 52.1

Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table

Initial Bank/Ch# 5

Initial Bank/Ch# 6

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

001 Scene 52.2 033 Scene 55.4 065 Scene 58.6 097 Scene 61.8

002 Scene 52.3 034 Scene 55.5 066 Scene 58.7 098 Scene 61.9

003 Scene 52.4 035 Scene 55.6 067 Scene 58.8 099 Scene 62.0

004 Scene 52.5 036 Scene 55.7 068 Scene 58.9 100 Scene 62.1

005 Scene 52.6 037 Scene 55.8 069 Scene 59.0 101 Scene 62.2

006 Scene 52.7 038 Scene 55.9 070 Scene 59.1 102 Scene 62.3

007 Scene 52.8 039 Scene 56.0 071 Scene 59.2 103 Scene 62.4

008 Scene 52.9 040 Scene 56.1 072 Scene 59.3 104 Scene 62.5

009 Scene 53.0 041 Scene 56.2 073 Scene 59.4 105 Scene 62.6

010 Scene 53.1 042 Scene 56.3 074 Scene 59.5 106 Scene 62.7

011 Scene 53.2 043 Scene 56.4 075 Scene 59.6 107 Scene 62.8

012 Scene 53.3 044 Scene 56.5 076 Scene 59.7 108 Scene 62.9

013 Scene 53.4 045 Scene 56.6 077 Scene 59.8 109 Scene 63.0

014 Scene 53.5 046 Scene 56.7 078 Scene 59.9 110 Scene 63.1

015 Scene 53.6 047 Scene 56.8 079 Scene 60.0 111 Scene 63.2

016 Scene 53.7 048 Scene 56.9 080 Scene 60.1 112 Scene 63.3

017 Scene 53.8 049 Scene 57.0 081 Scene 60.2 113 Scene 63.4

018 Scene 53.9 050 Scene 57.1 082 Scene 60.3 114 Scene 63.5

019 Scene 54.0 051 Scene 57.2 083 Scene 60.4 115 Scene 63.6

020 Scene 54.1 052 Scene 57.3 084 Scene 60.5 116 Scene 63.7

021 Scene 54.2 053 Scene 57.4 085 Scene 60.6 117 Scene 63.8

022 Scene 54.3 054 Scene 57.5 086 Scene 60.7 118 Scene 63.9

023 Scene 54.4 055 Scene 57.6 087 Scene 60.8 119 Scene 64.0

024 Scene 54.5 056 Scene 57.7 088 Scene 60.9 120 Scene 64.1

025 Scene 54.6 057 Scene 57.8 089 Scene 61.0 121 Scene 64.2

026 Scene 54.7 058 Scene 57.9 090 Scene 61.1 122 Scene 64.3

027 Scene 54.8 059 Scene 58.0 091 Scene 61.2 123 Scene 64.4

028 Scene 54.9 060 Scene 58.1 092 Scene 61.3 124 Scene 64.5

029 Scene 55.0 061 Scene 58.2 093 Scene 61.4 125 Scene 64.6

030 Scene 55.1 062 Scene 58.3 094 Scene 61.5 126 Scene 64.7

031 Scene 55.2 063 Scene 58.4 095 Scene 61.6 127 Scene 64.8

032 Scene 55.3 064 Scene 58.5 096 Scene 61.7 128 Scene 64.9

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

001 Scene 65.0 033 Scene 68.2 065 Scene 71.4 097 Scene 74.6

002 Scene 65.1 034 Scene 68.3 066 Scene 71.5 098 Scene 74.7

003 Scene 65.2 035 Scene 68.4 067 Scene 71.6 099 Scene 74.8

004 Scene 65.3 036 Scene 68.5 068 Scene 71.7 100 Scene 74.9

005 Scene 65.4 037 Scene 68.6 069 Scene 71.8 101 Scene 75.0

006 Scene 65.5 038 Scene 68.7 070 Scene 71.9 102 Scene 75.1

007 Scene 65.6 039 Scene 68.8 071 Scene 72.0 103 Scene 75.2

008 Scene 65.7 040 Scene 68.9 072 Scene 72.1 104 Scene 75.3

009 Scene 65.8 041 Scene 69.0 073 Scene 72.2 105 Scene 75.4

010 Scene 65.9 042 Scene 69.1 074 Scene 72.3 106 Scene 75.5

011 Scene 66.0 043 Scene 69.2 075 Scene 72.4 107 Scene 75.6

012 Scene 66.1 044 Scene 69.3 076 Scene 72.5 108 Scene 75.7

013 Scene 66.2 045 Scene 69.4 077 Scene 72.6 109 Scene 75.8

014 Scene 66.3 046 Scene 69.5 078 Scene 72.7 110 Scene 75.9

015 Scene 66.4 047 Scene 69.6 079 Scene 72.8 111 Scene 76.0

016 Scene 66.5 048 Scene 69.7 080 Scene 72.9 112 Scene 76.1

017 Scene 66.6 049 Scene 69.8 081 Scene 73.0 113 Scene 76.2

018 Scene 66.7 050 Scene 69.9 082 Scene 73.1 114 Scene 76.3

019 Scene 66.8 051 Scene 70.0 083 Scene 73.2 115 Scene 76.4

020 Scene 66.9 052 Scene 70.1 084 Scene 73.3 116 Scene 76.5

021 Scene 67.0 053 Scene 70.2 085 Scene 73.4 117 Scene 76.6

022 Scene 67.1 054 Scene 70.3 086 Scene 73.5 118 Scene 76.7

023 Scene 67.2 055 Scene 70.4 087 Scene 73.6 119 Scene 76.8

024 Scene 67.3 056 Scene 70.5 088 Scene 73.7 120 Scene 76.9

025 Scene 67.4 057 Scene 70.6 089 Scene 73.8 121 Scene 77.0

026 Scene 67.5 058 Scene 70.7 090 Scene 73.9 122 Scene 77.1

027 Scene 67.6 059 Scene 70.8 091 Scene 74.0 123 Scene 77.2

028 Scene 67.7 060 Scene 70.9 092 Scene 74.1 124 Scene 77.3

029 Scene 67.8 061 Scene 71.0 093 Scene 74.2 125 Scene 77.4

030 Scene 67.9 062 Scene 71.1 094 Scene 74.3 126 Scene 77.5

031 Scene 68.0 063 Scene 71.2 095 Scene 74.4 127 Scene 77.6

032 Scene 68.1 064 Scene 71.3 096 Scene 74.5 128 Scene 77.7

Appendices

Initial Bank/Ch# 7

Initial Bank/Ch# 8

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

001 Scene 77.8 033 Scene 81.0 065 Scene 84.2 097 Scene 87.4

002 Scene 77.9 034 Scene 81.1 066 Scene 84.3 098 Scene 87.5

003 Scene 78.0 035 Scene 81.2 067 Scene 84.4 099 Scene 87.6

004 Scene 78.1 036 Scene 81.3 068 Scene 84.5 100 Scene 87.7

005 Scene 78.2 037 Scene 81.4 069 Scene 84.6 101 Scene 87.8

006 Scene 78.3 038 Scene 81.5 070 Scene 84.7 102 Scene 87.9

007 Scene 78.4 039 Scene 81.6 071 Scene 84.8 103 Scene 88.0

008 Scene 78.5 040 Scene 81.7 072 Scene 84.9 104 Scene 88.1

009 Scene 78.6 041 Scene 81.8 073 Scene 85.0 105 Scene 88.2

010 Scene 78.7 042 Scene 81.9 074 Scene 85.1 106 Scene 88.3

011 Scene 78.8 043 Scene 82.0 075 Scene 85.2 107 Scene 88.4

012 Scene 78.9 044 Scene 82.1 076 Scene 85.3 108 Scene 88.5

013 Scene 79.0 045 Scene 82.2 077 Scene 85.4 109 Scene 88.6

014 Scene 79.1 046 Scene 82.3 078 Scene 85.5 110 Scene 88.7

015 Scene 79.2 047 Scene 82.4 079 Scene 85.6 111 Scene 88.8

016 Scene 79.3 048 Scene 82.5 080 Scene 85.7 112 Scene 88.9

017 Scene 79.4 049 Scene 82.6 081 Scene 85.8 113 Scene 89.0

018 Scene 79.5 050 Scene 82.7 082 Scene 85.9 114 Scene 89.1

019 Scene 79.6 051 Scene 82.8 083 Scene 86.0 115 Scene 89.2

020 Scene 79.7 052 Scene 82.9 084 Scene 86.1 116 Scene 89.3

021 Scene 79.8 053 Scene 83.0 085 Scene 86.2 117 Scene 89.4

022 Scene 79.9 054 Scene 83.1 086 Scene 86.3 118 Scene 89.5

023 Scene 80.0 055 Scene 83.2 087 Scene 86.4 119 Scene 89.6

024 Scene 80.1 056 Scene 83.3 088 Scene 86.5 120 Scene 89.7

025 Scene 80.2 057 Scene 83.4 089 Scene 86.6 121 Scene 89.8

026 Scene 80.3 058 Scene 83.5 090 Scene 86.7 122 Scene 89.9

027 Scene 80.4 059 Scene 83.6 091 Scene 86.8 123 Scene 90.0

028 Scene 80.5 060 Scene 83.7 092 Scene 86.9 124 Scene 90.1

029 Scene 80.6 061 Scene 83.8 093 Scene 87.0 125 Scene 90.2

030 Scene 80.7 062 Scene 83.9 094 Scene 87.1 126 Scene 90.3

031 Scene 80.8 063 Scene 84.0 095 Scene 87.2 127 Scene 90.4

032 Scene 80.9 064 Scene 84.1 096 Scene 87.3 128 Scene 90.5

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

001 Scene 90.6 033 Scene 93.8 065 Scene 97.0 097 Scene 00.2

002 Scene 90.7 034 Scene 93.9 066 Scene 97.1 098 Scene 00.3

003 Scene 90.8 035 Scene 94.0 067 Scene 97.2 099 Scene 00.4

004 Scene 90.9 036 Scene 94.1 068 Scene 97.3 100 Scene 00.5

005 Scene 91.0 037 Scene 94.2 069 Scene 97.4 101 Scene 00.6

006 Scene 91.1 038 Scene 94.3 070 Scene 97.5 102 Scene 00.7

007 Scene 91.2 039 Scene 94.4 071 Scene 97.6 103 Scene 00.8

008 Scene 91.3 040 Scene 94.5 072 Scene 97.7 104 Scene 00.9

009 Scene 91.4 041 Scene 94.6 073 Scene 97.8 105 Scene —

010 Scene 91.5 042 Scene 94.7 074 Scene 97.9 106 Scene —

011 Scene 91.6 043 Scene 94.8 075 Scene 98.0 107 Scene —

012 Scene 91.7 044 Scene 94.9 076 Scene 98.1 108 Scene —

013 Scene 91.8 045 Scene 95.0 077 Scene 98.2 109 Scene —

014 Scene 91.9 046 Scene 95.1 078 Scene 98.3 110 Scene —

015 Scene 92.0 047 Scene 95.2 079 Scene 98.4 111 Scene —

016 Scene 92.1 048 Scene 95.3 080 Scene 98.5 112 Scene —

017 Scene 92.2 049 Scene 95.4 081 Scene 98.6 113 Scene —

018 Scene 92.3 050 Scene 95.5 082 Scene 98.7 114 Scene —

019 Scene 92.4 051 Scene 95.6 083 Scene 98.8 115 Scene —

020 Scene 92.5 052 Scene 95.7 084 Scene 98.9 116 Scene —

021 Scene 92.6 053 Scene 95.8 085 Scene 99.0 117 Scene —

022 Scene 92.7 054 Scene 95.9 086 Scene 99.1 118 Scene —

023 Scene 92.8 055 Scene 96.0 087 Scene 99.2 119 Scene —

024 Scene 92.9 056 Scene 96.1 088 Scene 99.3 120 Scene —

025 Scene 93.0 057 Scene 96.2 089 Scene 99.4 121 Scene —

026 Scene 93.1 058 Scene 96.3 090 Scene 99.5 122 Scene —

027 Scene 93.2 059 Scene 96.4 091 Scene 99.6 123 Scene —

028 Scene 93.3 060 Scene 96.5 092 Scene 99.7 124 Scene —

029 Scene 93.4 061 Scene 96.6 093 Scene 99.8 125 Scene —

030 Scene 93.5 062 Scene 96.7 094 Scene 99.9 126 Scene —

031 Scene 93.6 063 Scene 96.8 095 Scene 00.0 127 Scene —

032 Scene 93.7 064 Scene 96.9 096 Scene 00.1 128 Scene —

Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table

Initial Bank/Ch# 9

Initial Bank/Ch# 10

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

001 Effect1 072 033 Effect1 104 065 Effect1 136 097 Effect1 168

002 Effect1 073 034 Effect1 105 066 Effect1 137 098 Effect1 169

003 Effect1 074 035 Effect1 106 067 Effect1 138 099 Effect1 170

004 Effect1 075 036 Effect1 107 068 Effect1 139 100 Effect1 171

005 Effect1 076 037 Effect1 108 069 Effect1 140 101 Effect1 172

006 Effect1 077 038 Effect1 109 070 Effect1 141 102 Effect1 173

007 Effect1 078 039 Effect1 110 071 Effect1 142 103 Effect1 174

008 Effect1 079 040 Effect1 111 072 Effect1 143 104 Effect1 175

009 Effect1 080 041 Effect1 112 073 Effect1 144 105 Effect1 176

010 Effect1 081 042 Effect1 113 074 Effect1 145 106 Effect1 177

011 Effect1 082 043 Effect1 114 075 Effect1 146 107 Effect1 178

012 Effect1 083 044 Effect1 115 076 Effect1 147 108 Effect1 179

013 Effect1 084 045 Effect1 116 077 Effect1 148 109 Effect1 180

014 Effect1 085 046 Effect1 117 078 Effect1 149 110 Effect1 181

015 Effect1 086 047 Effect1 118 079 Effect1 150 111 Effect1 182

016 Effect1 087 048 Effect1 119 080 Effect1 151 112 Effect1 183

017 Effect1 088 049 Effect1 120 081 Effect1 152 113 Effect1 184

018 Effect1 089 050 Effect1 121 082 Effect1 153 114 Effect1 185

019 Effect1 090 051 Effect1 122 083 Effect1 154 115 Effect1 186

020 Effect1 091 052 Effect1 123 084 Effect1 155 116 Effect1 187

021 Effect1 092 053 Effect1 124 085 Effect1 156 117 Effect1 188

022 Effect1 093 054 Effect1 125 086 Effect1 157 118 Effect1 189

023 Effect1 094 055 Effect1 126 087 Effect1 158 119 Effect1 190

024 Effect1 095 056 Effect1 127 088 Effect1 159 120 Effect1 191

025 Effect1 096 057 Effect1 128 089 Effect1 160 121 Effect1 192

026 Effect1 097 058 Effect1 129 090 Effect1 161 122 Effect1 193

027 Effect1 098 059 Effect1 130 091 Effect1 162 123 Effect1 194

028 Effect1 099 060 Effect1 131 092 Effect1 163 124 Effect1 195

029 Effect1 100 061 Effect1 132 093 Effect1 164 125 Effect1 196

030 Effect1 101 062 Effect1 133 094 Effect1 165 126 Effect1 197

031 Effect1 102 063 Effect1 134 095 Effect1 166 127 Effect1 198

032 Effect1 103 064 Effect1 135 096 Effect1 167 128 Effect1 199

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

001 Effect2 072 033 Effect2 104 065 Effect2 136 097 Effect2 168

002 Effect2 073 034 Effect2 105 066 Effect2 137 098 Effect2 169

003 Effect2 074 035 Effect2 106 067 Effect2 138 099 Effect2 170

004 Effect2 075 036 Effect2 107 068 Effect2 139 100 Effect2 171

005 Effect2 076 037 Effect2 108 069 Effect2 140 101 Effect2 172

006 Effect2 077 038 Effect2 109 070 Effect2 141 102 Effect2 173

007 Effect2 078 039 Effect2 110 071 Effect2 142 103 Effect2 174

008 Effect2 079 040 Effect2 111 072 Effect2 143 104 Effect2 175

009 Effect2 080 041 Effect2 112 073 Effect2 144 105 Effect2 176

010 Effect2 081 042 Effect2 113 074 Effect2 145 106 Effect2 177

011 Effect2 082 043 Effect2 114 075 Effect2 146 107 Effect2 178

012 Effect2 083 044 Effect2 115 076 Effect2 147 108 Effect2 179

013 Effect2 084 045 Effect2 116 077 Effect2 148 109 Effect2 180

014 Effect2 085 046 Effect2 117 078 Effect2 149 110 Effect2 181

015 Effect2 086 047 Effect2 118 079 Effect2 150 111 Effect2 182

016 Effect2 087 048 Effect2 119 080 Effect2 151 112 Effect2 183

017 Effect2 088 049 Effect2 120 081 Effect2 152 113 Effect2 184

018 Effect2 089 050 Effect2 121 082 Effect2 153 114 Effect2 185

019 Effect2 090 051 Effect2 122 083 Effect2 154 115 Effect2 186

020 Effect2 091 052 Effect2 123 084 Effect2 155 116 Effect2 187

021 Effect2 092 053 Effect2 124 085 Effect2 156 117 Effect2 188

022 Effect2 093 054 Effect2 125 086 Effect2 157 118 Effect2 189

023 Effect2 094 055 Effect2 126 087 Effect2 158 119 Effect2 190

024 Effect2 095 056 Effect2 127 088 Effect2 159 120 Effect2 191

025 Effect2 096 057 Effect2 128 089 Effect2 160 121 Effect2 192

026 Effect2 097 058 Effect2 129 090 Effect2 161 122 Effect2 193

027 Effect2 098 059 Effect2 130 091 Effect2 162 123 Effect2 194

028 Effect2 099 060 Effect2 131 092 Effect2 163 124 Effect2 195

029 Effect2 100 061 Effect2 132 093 Effect2 164 125 Effect2 196

030 Effect2 101 062 Effect2 133 094 Effect2 165 126 Effect2 197

031 Effect2 102 063 Effect2 134 095 Effect2 166 127 Effect2 198

032 Effect2 103 064 Effect2 135 096 Effect2 167 128 Effect2 199

Appendices

Initial Bank/Ch# 11

Initial Bank/Ch# 12

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

001 Effect3 072 033 Effect3 104 065 Effect3 136 097 Effect3 168

002 Effect3 073 034 Effect3 105 066 Effect3 137 098 Effect3 169

003 Effect3 074 035 Effect3 106 067 Effect3 138 099 Effect3 170

004 Effect3 075 036 Effect3 107 068 Effect3 139 100 Effect3 171

005 Effect3 076 037 Effect3 108 069 Effect3 140 101 Effect3 172

006 Effect3 077 038 Effect3 109 070 Effect3 141 102 Effect3 173

007 Effect3 078 039 Effect3 110 071 Effect3 142 103 Effect3 174

008 Effect3 079 040 Effect3 111 072 Effect3 143 104 Effect3 175

009 Effect3 080 041 Effect3 112 073 Effect3 144 105 Effect3 176

010 Effect3 081 042 Effect3 113 074 Effect3 145 106 Effect3 177

011 Effect3 082 043 Effect3 114 075 Effect3 146 107 Effect3 178

012 Effect3 083 044 Effect3 115 076 Effect3 147 108 Effect3 179

013 Effect3 084 045 Effect3 116 077 Effect3 148 109 Effect3 180

014 Effect3 085 046 Effect3 117 078 Effect3 149 110 Effect3 181

015 Effect3 086 047 Effect3 118 079 Effect3 150 111 Effect3 182

016 Effect3 087 048 Effect3 119 080 Effect3 151 112 Effect3 183

017 Effect3 088 049 Effect3 120 081 Effect3 152 113 Effect3 184

018 Effect3 089 050 Effect3 121 082 Effect3 153 114 Effect3 185

019 Effect3 090 051 Effect3 122 083 Effect3 154 115 Effect3 186

020 Effect3 091 052 Effect3 123 084 Effect3 155 116 Effect3 187

021 Effect3 092 053 Effect3 124 085 Effect3 156 117 Effect3 188

022 Effect3 093 054 Effect3 125 086 Effect3 157 118 Effect3 189

023 Effect3 094 055 Effect3 126 087 Effect3 158 119 Effect3 190

024 Effect3 095 056 Effect3 127 088 Effect3 159 120 Effect3 191

025 Effect3 096 057 Effect3 128 089 Effect3 160 121 Effect3 192

026 Effect3 097 058 Effect3 129 090 Effect3 161 122 Effect3 193

027 Effect3 098 059 Effect3 130 091 Effect3 162 123 Effect3 194

028 Effect3 099 060 Effect3 131 092 Effect3 163 124 Effect3 195

029 Effect3 100 061 Effect3 132 093 Effect3 164 125 Effect3 196

030 Effect3 101 062 Effect3 133 094 Effect3 165 126 Effect3 197

031 Effect3 102 063 Effect3 134 095 Effect3 166 127 Effect3 198

032 Effect3 103 064 Effect3 135 096 Effect3 167 128 Effect3 199

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

001 Effect4 072 033 Effect4 104 065 Effect4 136 097 Effect4 168

002 Effect4 073 034 Effect4 105 066 Effect4 137 098 Effect4 169

003 Effect4 074 035 Effect4 106 067 Effect4 138 099 Effect4 170

004 Effect4 075 036 Effect4 107 068 Effect4 139 100 Effect4 171

005 Effect4 076 037 Effect4 108 069 Effect4 140 101 Effect4 172

006 Effect4 077 038 Effect4 109 070 Effect4 141 102 Effect4 173

007 Effect4 078 039 Effect4 110 071 Effect4 142 103 Effect4 174

008 Effect4 079 040 Effect4 111 072 Effect4 143 104 Effect4 175

009 Effect4 080 041 Effect4 112 073 Effect4 144 105 Effect4 176

010 Effect4 081 042 Effect4 113 074 Effect4 145 106 Effect4 177

011 Effect4 082 043 Effect4 114 075 Effect4 146 107 Effect4 178

012 Effect4 083 044 Effect4 115 076 Effect4 147 108 Effect4 179

013 Effect4 084 045 Effect4 116 077 Effect4 148 109 Effect4 180

014 Effect4 085 046 Effect4 117 078 Effect4 149 110 Effect4 181

015 Effect4 086 047 Effect4 118 079 Effect4 150 111 Effect4 182

016 Effect4 087 048 Effect4 119 080 Effect4 151 112 Effect4 183

017 Effect4 088 049 Effect4 120 081 Effect4 152 113 Effect4 184

018 Effect4 089 050 Effect4 121 082 Effect4 153 114 Effect4 185

019 Effect4 090 051 Effect4 122 083 Effect4 154 115 Effect4 186

020 Effect4 091 052 Effect4 123 084 Effect4 155 116 Effect4 187

021 Effect4 092 053 Effect4 124 085 Effect4 156 117 Effect4 188

022 Effect4 093 054 Effect4 125 086 Effect4 157 118 Effect4 189

023 Effect4 094 055 Effect4 126 087 Effect4 158 119 Effect4 190

024 Effect4 095 056 Effect4 127 088 Effect4 159 120 Effect4 191

025 Effect4 096 057 Effect4 128 089 Effect4 160 121 Effect4 192

026 Effect4 097 058 Effect4 129 090 Effect4 161 122 Effect4 193

027 Effect4 098 059 Effect4 130 091 Effect4 162 123 Effect4 194

028 Effect4 099 060 Effect4 131 092 Effect4 163 124 Effect4 195

029 Effect4 100 061 Effect4 132 093 Effect4 164 125 Effect4 196

030 Effect4 101 062 Effect4 133 094 Effect4 165 126 Effect4 197

031 Effect4 102 063 Effect4 134 095 Effect4 166 127 Effect4 198

032 Effect4 103 064 Effect4 135 096 Effect4 167 128 Effect4 199

Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table

Initial Bank/Ch# 13

Initial Bank/Ch# 14

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

001 Effect5 072 033 Effect5 104 065 Effect5 136 097 Effect5 168

002 Effect5 073 034 Effect5 105 066 Effect5 137 098 Effect5 169

003 Effect5 074 035 Effect5 106 067 Effect5 138 099 Effect5 170

004 Effect5 075 036 Effect5 107 068 Effect5 139 100 Effect5 171

005 Effect5 076 037 Effect5 108 069 Effect5 140 101 Effect5 172

006 Effect5 077 038 Effect5 109 070 Effect5 141 102 Effect5 173

007 Effect5 078 039 Effect5 110 071 Effect5 142 103 Effect5 174

008 Effect5 079 040 Effect5 111 072 Effect5 143 104 Effect5 175

009 Effect5 080 041 Effect5 112 073 Effect5 144 105 Effect5 176

010 Effect5 081 042 Effect5 113 074 Effect5 145 106 Effect5 177

011 Effect5 082 043 Effect5 114 075 Effect5 146 107 Effect5 178

012 Effect5 083 044 Effect5 115 076 Effect5 147 108 Effect5 179

013 Effect5 084 045 Effect5 116 077 Effect5 148 109 Effect5 180

014 Effect5 085 046 Effect5 117 078 Effect5 149 110 Effect5 181

015 Effect5 086 047 Effect5 118 079 Effect5 150 111 Effect5 182

016 Effect5 087 048 Effect5 119 080 Effect5 151 112 Effect5 183

017 Effect5 088 049 Effect5 120 081 Effect5 152 113 Effect5 184

018 Effect5 089 050 Effect5 121 082 Effect5 153 114 Effect5 185

019 Effect5 090 051 Effect5 122 083 Effect5 154 115 Effect5 186

020 Effect5 091 052 Effect5 123 084 Effect5 155 116 Effect5 187

021 Effect5 092 053 Effect5 124 085 Effect5 156 117 Effect5 188

022 Effect5 093 054 Effect5 125 086 Effect5 157 118 Effect5 189

023 Effect5 094 055 Effect5 126 087 Effect5 158 119 Effect5 190

024 Effect5 095 056 Effect5 127 088 Effect5 159 120 Effect5 191

025 Effect5 096 057 Effect5 128 089 Effect5 160 121 Effect5 192

026 Effect5 097 058 Effect5 129 090 Effect5 161 122 Effect5 193

027 Effect5 098 059 Effect5 130 091 Effect5 162 123 Effect5 194

028 Effect5 099 060 Effect5 131 092 Effect5 163 124 Effect5 195

029 Effect5 100 061 Effect5 132 093 Effect5 164 125 Effect5 196

030 Effect5 101 062 Effect5 133 094 Effect5 165 126 Effect5 197

031 Effect5 102 063 Effect5 134 095 Effect5 166 127 Effect5 198

032 Effect5 103 064 Effect5 135 096 Effect5 167 128 Effect5 199

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

001 Effect6 072 033 Effect6 104 065 Effect6 136 097 Effect6 168

002 Effect6 073 034 Effect6 105 066 Effect6 137 098 Effect6 169

003 Effect6 074 035 Effect6 106 067 Effect6 138 099 Effect6 170

004 Effect6 075 036 Effect6 107 068 Effect6 139 100 Effect6 171

005 Effect6 076 037 Effect6 108 069 Effect6 140 101 Effect6 172

006 Effect6 077 038 Effect6 109 070 Effect6 141 102 Effect6 173

007 Effect6 078 039 Effect6 110 071 Effect6 142 103 Effect6 174

008 Effect6 079 040 Effect6 111 072 Effect6 143 104 Effect6 175

009 Effect6 080 041 Effect6 112 073 Effect6 144 105 Effect6 176

010 Effect6 081 042 Effect6 113 074 Effect6 145 106 Effect6 177

011 Effect6 082 043 Effect6 114 075 Effect6 146 107 Effect6 178

012 Effect6 083 044 Effect6 115 076 Effect6 147 108 Effect6 179

013 Effect6 084 045 Effect6 116 077 Effect6 148 109 Effect6 180

014 Effect6 085 046 Effect6 117 078 Effect6 149 110 Effect6 181

015 Effect6 086 047 Effect6 118 079 Effect6 150 111 Effect6 182

016 Effect6 087 048 Effect6 119 080 Effect6 151 112 Effect6 183

017 Effect6 088 049 Effect6 120 081 Effect6 152 113 Effect6 184

018 Effect6 089 050 Effect6 121 082 Effect6 153 114 Effect6 185

019 Effect6 090 051 Effect6 122 083 Effect6 154 115 Effect6 186

020 Effect6 091 052 Effect6 123 084 Effect6 155 116 Effect6 187

021 Effect6 092 053 Effect6 124 085 Effect6 156 117 Effect6 188

022 Effect6 093 054 Effect6 125 086 Effect6 157 118 Effect6 189

023 Effect6 094 055 Effect6 126 087 Effect6 158 119 Effect6 190

024 Effect6 095 056 Effect6 127 088 Effect6 159 120 Effect6 191

025 Effect6 096 057 Effect6 128 089 Effect6 160 121 Effect6 192

026 Effect6 097 058 Effect6 129 090 Effect6 161 122 Effect6 193

027 Effect6 098 059 Effect6 130 091 Effect6 162 123 Effect6 194

028 Effect6 099 060 Effect6 131 092 Effect6 163 124 Effect6 195

029 Effect6 100 061 Effect6 132 093 Effect6 164 125 Effect6 196

030 Effect6 101 062 Effect6 133 094 Effect6 165 126 Effect6 197

031 Effect6 102 063 Effect6 134 095 Effect6 166 127 Effect6 198

032 Effect6 103 064 Effect6 135 096 Effect6 167 128 Effect6 199

Appendices

Initial Bank/Ch# 15

Initial Bank/Ch# 16

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

001 Effect7 072 033 Effect7 104 065 Effect7 136 097 Effect7 168

002 Effect7 073 034 Effect7 105 066 Effect7 137 098 Effect7 169

003 Effect7 074 035 Effect7 106 067 Effect7 138 099 Effect7 170

004 Effect7 075 036 Effect7 107 068 Effect7 139 100 Effect7 171

005 Effect7 076 037 Effect7 108 069 Effect7 140 101 Effect7 172

006 Effect7 077 038 Effect7 109 070 Effect7 141 102 Effect7 173

007 Effect7 078 039 Effect7 110 071 Effect7 142 103 Effect7 174

008 Effect7 079 040 Effect7 111 072 Effect7 143 104 Effect7 175

009 Effect7 080 041 Effect7 112 073 Effect7 144 105 Effect7 176

010 Effect7 081 042 Effect7 113 074 Effect7 145 106 Effect7 177

011 Effect7 082 043 Effect7 114 075 Effect7 146 107 Effect7 178

012 Effect7 083 044 Effect7 115 076 Effect7 147 108 Effect7 179

013 Effect7 084 045 Effect7 116 077 Effect7 148 109 Effect7 180

014 Effect7 085 046 Effect7 117 078 Effect7 149 110 Effect7 181

015 Effect7 086 047 Effect7 118 079 Effect7 150 111 Effect7 182

016 Effect7 087 048 Effect7 119 080 Effect7 151 112 Effect7 183

017 Effect7 088 049 Effect7 120 081 Effect7 152 113 Effect7 184

018 Effect7 089 050 Effect7 121 082 Effect7 153 114 Effect7 185

019 Effect7 090 051 Effect7 122 083 Effect7 154 115 Effect7 186

020 Effect7 091 052 Effect7 123 084 Effect7 155 116 Effect7 187

021 Effect7 092 053 Effect7 124 085 Effect7 156 117 Effect7 188

022 Effect7 093 054 Effect7 125 086 Effect7 157 118 Effect7 189

023 Effect7 094 055 Effect7 126 087 Effect7 158 119 Effect7 190

024 Effect7 095 056 Effect7 127 088 Effect7 159 120 Effect7 191

025 Effect7 096 057 Effect7 128 089 Effect7 160 121 Effect7 192

026 Effect7 097 058 Effect7 129 090 Effect7 161 122 Effect7 193

027 Effect7 098 059 Effect7 130 091 Effect7 162 123 Effect7 194

028 Effect7 099 060 Effect7 131 092 Effect7 163 124 Effect7 195

029 Effect7 100 061 Effect7 132 093 Effect7 164 125 Effect7 196

030 Effect7 101 062 Effect7 133 094 Effect7 165 126 Effect7 197

031 Effect7 102 063 Effect7 134 095 Effect7 166 127 Effect7 198

032 Effect7 103 064 Effect7 135 096 Effect7 167 128 Effect7 199

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Initial#

001 Effect8 072 033 Effect8 104 065 Effect8 136 097 Effect8 168

002 Effect8 073 034 Effect8 105 066 Effect8 137 098 Effect8 169

003 Effect8 074 035 Effect8 106 067 Effect8 138 099 Effect8 170

004 Effect8 075 036 Effect8 107 068 Effect8 139 100 Effect8 171

005 Effect8 076 037 Effect8 108 069 Effect8 140 101 Effect8 172

006 Effect8 077 038 Effect8 109 070 Effect8 141 102 Effect8 173

007 Effect8 078 039 Effect8 110 071 Effect8 142 103 Effect8 174

008 Effect8 079 040 Effect8 111 072 Effect8 143 104 Effect8 175

009 Effect8 080 041 Effect8 112 073 Effect8 144 105 Effect8 176

010 Effect8 081 042 Effect8 113 074 Effect8 145 106 Effect8 177

011 Effect8 082 043 Effect8 114 075 Effect8 146 107 Effect8 178

012 Effect8 083 044 Effect8 115 076 Effect8 147 108 Effect8 179

013 Effect8 084 045 Effect8 116 077 Effect8 148 109 Effect8 180

014 Effect8 085 046 Effect8 117 078 Effect8 149 110 Effect8 181

015 Effect8 086 047 Effect8 118 079 Effect8 150 111 Effect8 182

016 Effect8 087 048 Effect8 119 080 Effect8 151 112 Effect8 183

017 Effect8 088 049 Effect8 120 081 Effect8 152 113 Effect8 184

018 Effect8 089 050 Effect8 121 082 Effect8 153 114 Effect8 185

019 Effect8 090 051 Effect8 122 083 Effect8 154 115 Effect8 186

020 Effect8 091 052 Effect8 123 084 Effect8 155 116 Effect8 187

021 Effect8 092 053 Effect8 124 085 Effect8 156 117 Effect8 188

022 Effect8 093 054 Effect8 125 086 Effect8 157 118 Effect8 189

023 Effect8 094 055 Effect8 126 087 Effect8 158 119 Effect8 190

024 Effect8 095 056 Effect8 127 088 Effect8 159 120 Effect8 191

025 Effect8 096 057 Effect8 128 089 Effect8 160 121 Effect8 192

026 Effect8 097 058 Effect8 129 090 Effect8 161 122 Effect8 193

027 Effect8 098 059 Effect8 130 091 Effect8 162 123 Effect8 194

028 Effect8 099 060 Effect8 131 092 Effect8 163 124 Effect8 195

029 Effect8 100 061 Effect8 132 093 Effect8 164 125 Effect8 196

030 Effect8 101 062 Effect8 133 094 Effect8 165 126 Effect8 197

031 Effect8 102 063 Effect8 134 095 Effect8 166 127 Effect8 198

032 Effect8 103 064 Effect8 135 096 Effect8 167 128 Effect8 199

Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table

Initial Bank/Ch# __

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

User#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

User#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

User#

001 044 087

002 045 088

003 046 089

004 047 090

005 048 091

006 049 092

007 050 093

008 051 094

009 052 095

010 053 096

011 054 097

012 055 098

013 056 099

014 057 100

015 058 101

016 059 102

017 060 103

018 061 104

019 062 105

020 063 106

021 064 107

022 065 108

023 066 109

024 067 110

025 068 111

026 069 112

027 070 113

028 071 114

029 072 115

030 073 116

031 074 117

032 075 118

033 076 119

034 077 120

035 078 121

036 079 122

037 080 123

038 081 124

039 082 125

040 083 126

041 084 127

042 085 128

043 086

Appendices

Channel library list

This table shows the parameters that are saved in the input channel, MIX channel, MATRIX channel, and

STEREO A/B channel libraries.

INPUT/ST IN MIX MATRIX STEREO A/B

INPUT CH No. MIX CH No. MATRIX CH No. STEREO CH No.

Input HA Gain Link

Input HA A/B Link

Input Insert In HA Gain Gang Mix Insert In HA Gain Gang Matrix Insert In HA Gain Gang Stereo Master Insert In HA Gain Gang

Input Insert In HA A/B Link Mix Insert In HA A/B Link Matrix Insert In HA A/B Link Stereo Master Insert In HA A/B Link

Input GATE Link On/Off

Input COMP Link On/Off Mix Comp Link On/Off Matrix Comp Link On/Off Stereo Master COMP Link

Input Delay Gang Mix Delay Gang Matrix Delay Gang Stereo Master Delay Gang

Input Mix send Pre Point

Input Mix send 1-48 Pre/Post

Mix Matrix Assign Post Point Stereo Matrix Assign Post Point

Mix Matrix Assign Pre/Post Stereo Matrix Assign Pre/Post

Mix Stereo Assign Point

Input Direct Out Point

Input Insert Point Mix Insert Point Matrix Insert Point Stereo Insert Point

Mix 1-48 Type

Mix Type

Input Pair On/Off

Mix Pair On/Off

Matrix Pair On/Off

Mix 1-48 Pair On/Off

Matrix 1-24 Pair On/Off Matrix 1-24 Pair On/Off

Input Pan Mode

Input On/Off Mix On/Off Matrix On/Off Stereo On/Off

Stereo B Mono

Center Bus Control

Input Stereo Assign On/Off Mix Stereo Assign On/Off

Input Mix send 1-48 On/Off

Input Level Mix Master Level(Balance) Matrix Master Level(Balance) Stereo Master Level

Input to Mix 1-48 send Level(PAN:ODD)

Input to Mix 1-48 send Level(PAN:EVEN)

Input to Stereo Pan(ODD) Mix to Stereo Pan(ODD)

Input to Stereo Pan(EVEN) Mix to Stereo Pan(EVEN)

Stereo Balance

Input Center Side Ratio Mix Center Side Ratio

Input LCR On/Off Mix LCR On/Off

Input Fade Time On/Off Mix Fade Time On/Off Matrix Fade Time On/Off Stereo Fade Time On/Off

Input Vari Pan Link On/Off

Input Direct Out Assign On/Off

Input Insert In Assign On/Off Mix Insert In On/Off Matrix Insert In On/Off Stereo Insert In On/Off

Mix Matrix Assign On/Off Stereo Matrix Assign On/Off

Input Fixed Mix Pan On/Off

Input Delay On/Off Mix Delay On/Off Matrix Delay On/Off Stereo Delay On/Off

Input HPF On/Off

Input EQ On/Off Mix EQ On/Off Matrix EQ On/Off Stereo EQ On/Off

Input GATE On/Off

Input COMP On/Off Mix Comp On/Off Matrix Comp On/Off Stereo Comp On/Off

Input DCA Group 1-12 On/Off Mix DCA Group 9-12 On/Off

Input Mute Group 1-12 On/Off Mix Mute Group 9-12 On/Off Matrix Mute Group 9-12 On/Off Stereo Master Mute Group 9-12 On/Off

Mix to Matrix 1-24 send Level(PAN:ODD) Stereo to Matrix 1-24 send Level(PAN:ODD)

Mix to Matrix 1-24 send Level(PAN:EVEN) Stereo to Matrix 1-24 send Level(PAN:EVEN)

Input Attenuator

Input High EQ Q Mix High EQ Q Matrix High EQ Q Stereo High EQ Q

Input High EQ Freq Mix High EQ Freq Matrix High EQ Freq Stereo High EQ Freq

Input High EQ Gain Mix High EQ Gain Matrix High EQ Gain Stereo High EQ Gain

Input High EQ Type Mix High EQ Type Matrix High EQ Type Stereo High EQ Type

Input High Mid EQ Q Mix High-Mid EQ Q Matrix High-Mid EQ Q Stereo High-Mid EQ Q

Input High Mid EQ Freq Mix High-Mid EQ Freq Matrix High-Mid EQ Freq Stereo High-Mid EQ Freq

Input High Mid EQ Gain Mix High-Mid EQ Gain Matrix High-Mid EQ Gain Stereo High-Mid EQ Gain

Input High Mid EQ Type Mix High-Mid EQ Type Matrix High-Mid EQ Type Stereo High-Mid EQ Type

Input Low Mid EQ Q Mix Mid EQ Q Matrix Mid EQ Q Stereo Mid EQ Q

Input Low Mid EQ Freq Mix Mid EQ Freq Matrix Mid EQ Freq Stereo Mid EQ Freq

Input Low Mid EQ Gain Mix Mid EQ Gain Matrix Mid EQ Gain Stereo Mid EQ Gain

Input Low Mid EQ Type Mix Mid EQ Type Matrix Mid EQ Type Stereo Mid EQ Type

Input Low EQ Q Mix Low-Mid EQ Q Matrix Low-Mid EQ Q Stereo Low-Mid EQ Q

Input Low EQ Freq Mix Low-Mid EQ Freq Matrix Low-Mid EQ Freq Stereo Low-Mid EQ Freq

Input Low EQ Gain Mix Low-Mid EQ Gain Matrix Low-Mid EQ Gain Stereo Low-Mid EQ Gain

Input Low EQ Type Mix Low-Mid EQ Type Matrix Low-Mid EQ Type Stereo Low-Mid EQ Type

Mix Low EQ Q Matrix Low EQ Q Stereo Low EQ Q

Mix Low EQ Freq Matrix Low EQ Freq Stereo Low EQ Freq

Mix Low EQ Gain Matrix Low EQ Gain Stereo Low EQ Gain

Mix Low EQ Type Matrix Low EQ Type Stereo Low EQ Type

Mix Sub-Low EQ Q Matrix Sub-Low EQ Q Stereo Sub-Low EQ Q

Mix Sub-Low EQ Freq Matrix Sub-Low EQ Freq Stereo Sub-Low EQ Freq

Mix Sub-Low EQ Gain Matrix Sub-Low EQ Gain Stereo Sub-Low EQ Gain

Parameters copied when pairing

* Shaded parameters are recalled only to paired (stereo) channels.

Parameters copied when pairing

This table shows the parameters that are copied when input channels, MIX channels, or MATRIX channels

are paired.

Mix Sub-Low EQ Type Matrix Sub-Low EQ Type Stereo Sub-Low EQ Type

Input HPF SLOPE

Input HPF Freq

Input GATE KEY IN SELECT

Input GATE TYPE

Input GATE HPF Freq.

Input GATE LPF Freq.

Input GATE Range

Input GATE Threshold

Input GATE Attack

Input GATE Decay

Input GATE Hold

Input COMP KEY IN SELECT Mix COMP KEY IN SELECT Matrix COMP KEY IN SELECT Stereo COMP KEY IN SELECT

Input COMP TYPE Mix COMP KEY TYPE Matrix COMP KEY TYPE Stereo COMP KEY TYPE

Input COMP INPUT FILTER Freq Mix COMP INPUT FILTER Freq Matrix COMP INPUT FILTER Freq Stereo COMP INPUT FILTER Freq

Input COMP Knee/Width Mix COMP Knee/Width Matrix COMP Knee/Width Stereo COMP Knee/Width

Input COMP OutGain Mix COMP OutGain Matrix COMP OutGain Stereo COMP OutGain

Input COMP Threshold Mix COMP Threshold Matrix COMP Threshold Stereo COMP Threshold

Input COMP Attack Mix COMP Attack Matrix COMP Attack Stereo COMP Attack

Input COMP Release Mix COMP Release Matrix COMP Release Stereo COMP Release

Input COMP Ratio Mix COMP Ratio Matrix COMP Ratio Stereo COMP Ratio

Input Delay Value(ODD) Mix Delay Value(ODD) Matrix Delay Value(ODD) Stereo Delay Value(ODD)

Input Delay Value(EVEN) Mix Delay Value(EVEN) Matrix Delay Value(EVEN) Stereo Delay Value(EVEN)

INPUT MIX MATRIX

Input GATE Link On/Off (*1)

Input COMP Link On/Off (*1) Mix Comp Link On/Off (*1) Matrix Comp Link On/Off (*1)

Input Mix send Pre Point

Input Mix send 1-48 Pre/Post

Mix Matrix Assign Post Point

Mix Matrix Assign Pre/Post

Mix Stereo Assign Point

Input Direct Out Point

Input Insert Point Mix Insert Point Matrix Insert Point

Input On/Off Mix On/Off Matrix On/Off

Input Stereo Assign On/Off Mix Stereo Assign On/Off

Input Mix send 1-48 On/Off

Input Level

Mix master Level Matrix master Level * When paired, the odd channel is BALANCE

Input to Mix 1-48 send Level All Input to Odd Mix send Level

Center Side Ratio Center Side Ratio

Input to Stereo Pan (*2) Mix to Stereo Pan (*2)

Input LCR On/Off Mix LCR On/Off

Input Fade Time On/Off Mix Fade Time On/Off Matrix Fade Time On/Off

Input Vari Pan Link On/Off

Input Direct Out Assign On/Off

Input Insert In Assign On/Off Mix Insert In On/Off Matrix Insert In On/Off

Mix Matrix Assign On/Off

Input Fixed Mix Pan On/Off

Input Delay On/Off Mix Delay On/Off Matrix Delay On/Off

Input HPF On/Off

Input EQ On/Off Mix EQ On/Off Matrix EQ On/Off

Input GATE On/Off

Input COMP On/Off Mix Comp On/Off Matrix Comp On/Off

Input DCA Group 1-12 On/Off Mix DCA Group 9-12 On/Off

Input Mute Group 1-12 On/Off Mix Mute Group 9-12 On/Off Matrix Mute Group 9-12 On/Off

Mix to Matrix 1-24 send Level All Mix to Odd Matrix send Level

SUB IN to Odd Matrix send Level

Input Attenuator Mix Attenuator Matrix Attenuator

Input High EQ Q Mix High EQ Q Matrix High EQ Q

Input High EQ Freq Mix High EQ Freq Matrix High EQ Freq

Input High EQ Gain Mix High EQ Gain Matrix High EQ Gain

Input High EQ Type Mix High EQ Type Matrix High EQ Type

Input High Mid EQ Q Mix High-Mid EQ Q Matrix High-Mid EQ Q

Input High Mid EQ Freq Mix High-Mid EQ Freq Matrix High-Mid EQ Freq

Input High Mid EQ Gain Mix High-Mid EQ Gain Matrix High-Mid EQ Gain

Input High Mid EQ Type Mix High-Mid EQ Type Matrix High-Mid EQ Type

Input Low Mid EQ Q Mix Mid EQ Q Matrix Mid EQ Q

Input Low Mid EQ Freq Mix Mid EQ Freq Matrix Mid EQ Freq

Input Low Mid EQ Gain Mix Mid EQ Gain Matrix Mid EQ Gain

Input Low Mid EQ Type Mix Mid EQ Type Matrix Mid EQ Type

Input Low EQ Q Mix Low-Mid EQ Q Matrix Low-Mid EQ Q

Input Low EQ Freq Mix Low-Mid EQ Freq Matrix Low-Mid EQ Freq

Input Low EQ Gain Mix Low-Mid EQ Gain Matrix Low-Mid EQ Gain

INPUT/ST IN MIX MATRIX STEREO A/B

Appendices

* Shaded parameters are not simply copied; the operation of Send Level and Pan etc. will change depending on whether

the source and destination are monaural or paired.

*1. This parameter is always on when paired.

*2. This parameter will change only if RESET BOTH is selected.

Input Low EQ Type Mix Low-Mid EQ Type Matrix Low-Mid EQ Type

Mix Low EQ Q Matrix Low EQ Q

Mix Low EQ Freq Matrix Low EQ Freq

Mix Low EQ Gain Matrix Low EQ Gain

Mix Low EQ Type Matrix Low EQ Type

Mix Sub-Low EQ Q Matrix Sub-Low EQ Q

Mix Sub-Low EQ Freq Matrix Sub-Low EQ Freq

Mix Sub-Low EQ Gain Matrix Sub-Low EQ Gain

Mix Sub-Low EQ Type Matrix Sub-Low EQ Type

Input HPF SLOPE

Input HPF Freq

Input GATE Key In/Type

Input GATE HPF Freq.

Input GATE LPF Freq.

Input GATE Range

Input GATE Threshold

Input GATE Attack

Input GATE Decay

Input GATE Hold

Input COMP Key In/Type Mix COMP Key In/Type Matrix COMP Key In/Type

Input COMP INPUT Freq Mix COMP INPUT Freq Matrix COMP INPUT Freq

Input COMP Knee/Width Mix COMP Knee/Width Matrix COMP Knee/Width

Input COMP OutGain Mix COMP OutGain Matrix COMP OutGain

Input COMP Threshold Mix COMP Threshold Matrix COMP Threshold

Input COMP Attack Mix COMP Attack Matrix COMP Attack

Input COMP Release Mix COMP Release Matrix COMP Release

Input COMP Ratio Mix COMP Ratio Matrix COMP Ratio

Input Delay Value (*2) Mix Delay Value (*2) Matrix Delay Value (*2)

RECALL SAFE RECALL SAFE RECALL SAFE

MUTE SAFE MUTE SAFE MUTE SAFE

SOLO SAFE SOLO SAFE SOLO SAFE

CUE/SOLO Select CUE/SOLO Select CUE/SOLO Select

INPUT MIX MATRIX

MIDI Data Format

1. TRANSMIT/RECEIVE DATA

1.1 CHANNEL MESSAGE

1.1.1 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn)

<<Reception>>

In SINGLE CH mode when BANK is ON, these messages will be

received on the matching [Rx CH] from the MIDI IN for which BANK

SELECT reception is speciﬁed. These messages will determine the

bank of the next-received program change.

<<Transmission>>

In SINGLE CH mode when BANK is ON, a Bank Select message will

be transmitted from the selected MIDI OUT according to the [Tx CH]

setting when a scene memory or effect library is recalled.

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control Change

00000000 00 Bank Select MSB

0vvvvvvv vv MSB Value

00100000 20 Bank Select LSB

0vvvvvvv vv LSB Value

1.1.2 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn)

<<Reception>>

These messages will be received on the matching [Rx CH] from the

MIDI IN speciﬁed for reception. However if [OMNI] is ON, they will

be received regardless of the channel.

If [Program Change ECHO] is ON, these messages will be echoed.

According to the [Program change table] settings, these messages will

recall scene memories or effect libraries.

<<Transmission>>

When a scene or effect library is recalled, these messages will be

transmitted on the [Tx CH] according to the settings of the [Program

change table] if [Program Change TX] is ON.

If the recalled memory number has been assigned to two or more pro-

gram numbers, the program number of the lowest-numbered channel

and lowest-numbered bank will be transmitted.

STATUS 1100nnnn Cn Program Change

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn Program No. ( 0-127)

1.2 ACTIVE SENSING (Fe)

<<Reception>>

Once this message has been received, an interval of 300ms or more dur-

ing which no message is received will cause MIDI communications to be

initialized, clearing Running Status etc.

STATUS 11111110 FE Active Sensing

2. TRANSMISSION CONDITION

3. RECEIVE CONDITION

ECHO ON

MIDI IN

MIDI TX CH?

BANK ON

PGM Tx ON

CONTROL CHANGE

BANK SELECT $BnH

PROGRAM CHANGE $CnH

MIDI OUT

BANK ON

PGM Rx ON

PGM OMNI ON

ECHO ON

$BnH CONTROL CHANGE

BANK SELECT

$CnH PROGRAM CHANGE

MIDI OUT

MIDI Rx CH?

MIDI IN

Appendices

Warning Message

These messages will disappear after a short time.

Message Explanation

2TR IN DIGITAL-3 SRC TURNED OFF. When WORD CLOCK was selected for 2TR IN3, SRC=ON changed to OFF.

CANNOT DROP!

You attempted to drop an EQ/COMP/GATE/GEQ graph onto a location of a

different type.

CANNOT UNDO! You pressed the [UNDO] switch when undo was not available.

CONTROL I/O OUT SYNC

DETECTIVE ERROR![CONSOLE]

Synchronization data from the CONTROL I/O output of the console could not

be detected.

CONTROL I/O OUT SYNC

DETECTIVE ERROR![ENGINE]

Synchronization data from the CONTROL I/O output of the engine could not

be detected.

DATA TYPE CONFLICT! CANCELED.

You attempted to execute Library Recall or Channel Copy on a channel of a

different type.

DCA-(x) IS FOR INPUTS NOW.

You attempted to assign an output channel to DCA-(x), to which an input

channel was already assigned (DCA 9-12).

DCA-(x) IS FOR OUTPUTS NOW.

You attempted to assign an input channel to DCA-(x), to which an output

channel was already assigned (DCA 9-12).

DIGITAL INPUT SYNC ERROR! [2TR

IN DIGITAL-(x)]

The signal from the device connected to 2TR IN DIGITAL-(x) is not synchro-

nized to the engine.

DIGITAL INPUT SYNC ERROR! [UNIT-

(x):SLOT-(x)]

The input signal from the corresponding digital card -(x) of the connected

DIO8 is not synchronized to the engine (MY8-AT, TD).

DIGITAL INPUT SYNC ERROR! [UNIT-

(x):SLOT-(x):CH-(x)/(x)]

The input signal from the corresponding digital card -(x) of the connected

DIO8 is not synchronized to the engine (MY8-AE).

DUPLICATE TC EVENT! CANCELED.

You attempted to input an event at the same location as a previously-input

TC event.

EFFECT CUE TURNED OFF. CUE was defeated because you switched EFFECT screens.

MEMORY PROTECTED! You attempted to store by overwriting onto Write Protected data.

MIDI: DATA FRAMING ERROR! Invalid data was received at the selected MIDI IN.

MIDI: DATA OVERRUN! Invalid data was received at the selected MIDI IN.

MIDI: Rx BUFFER FULL! Incoming MIDI data was excessive.

MIDI: Tx BUFFER FULL! Outgoing MIDI data was excessive.

MUTE GROUP-(x)IS FOR INPUTS

NOW.

You attempted to assign an output channel to MUTE GROUP-(x), to which an

input channel is already assigned. (MUTE GROUP 9-12)

MUTE GROUP-(x)IS FOR OUTPUTS

NOW.

You attempted to assign an input channel to MUTE GROUP-(x), to which an

output channel is already assigned. (MUTE GROUP 9-12)

NO DATA!

Data has not been stored in the memory you attempted to recall. Alterna-

tively, the data is damaged and cannot be recalled.

PAIRING RELEASED.

When recalling, pairing was defeated since Recall Safe settings would have

caused paired channels to have different settings.

READ ONLY! You attempted to store by overwriting Read Only data.

SUB IN CUE TURNED OFF. CUE was turned off because you switched the SUB IN screen.

SYNC ERROR! [COMPONENT NAME] The indicated device is not synchronized with the engine.

TC EVENT FULL! CANCELED.

Registration was cancelled because no further TC events could be regis-

tered.

TIME CODE ACTIVE! CANNOT

STORE.

The store operation is not possible because the TC EVENT RECALLING

function is set to “ENABLE.”

TIME CODE: FRAME JUMP! The currently-input time code has jumped frames or has run away.

TIME CODE: TYPE MISMATCHED! The currently-input time code is of a type different from the speciﬁed type.

WRONG WORD CLOCK!

[COMPONENT NAME]

The engine is not synchronized to the source selected by MASTER CLOCK

SELECT in the SYS/W.CLOCK function WORD CLOCK screen.

Error Message

These messages will appear in a popup window in the center of the screen. After reading the message, press

the OK button to close the popup window.

* Contact your dealer as soon as possible to have the battery replaced/installed. This device will operate correctly even if the battery runs down, but

ultimately, data other than the preset programs will be lost. We recommend that you save your data on an ATA-compliant PC ﬂash storage card

before you have the battery replaced.

About the PM1D system version checking function

When the CS1D starts up, or when the connection status of the various components in the PM1D system has

changed, the software/ﬁrmware version of each component is checked to verify that it can function correctly

within the PM1D system.

If a component with a version that has not been guaranteed to work within the PM1D system is found, the

VERSION CHECK popup window will appear, warning you to halt operation or use caution.

If this occurs, please disconnect that component or update its software/ﬁrmware to the correct version before

using it. If you continue using the system after this popup window appears, the operation of the entire PM1D

system may become unstable.

For details on how to update the software/ﬁrmware of each component, refer to the documentation on the

included PM1D system software disc.

Message Explanation

CONTROL LINE [CONSOLE-ENGINE A(B)]

DISCONNECTED!

The connection between the console and engine A (B) has been

broken.

CONTROL LINE HAS BEEN SWITCHED TO [1(2)] The control line has switched to 1 (2).

[ERROR] Couldn't close ﬁle! The ﬁle could not be closed correctly.

[ERROR] Couldn't copy Ini ﬁle! [IniFile Save

Error]

Failed to write Scene.DAT.

[ERROR] Couldn't copy table ﬁle! [Destination

File Open Error]

Failed to open the copy-destination ﬁle.

[ERROR] Couldn't copy table ﬁle! [Destination

File Write Error]

Failed to write to the copy-destination.

[ERROR] Couldn't copy table ﬁle! [Source File

Open Error]

Failed to open the copy-source ﬁle.

[ERROR] Couldn't copy table ﬁle! [Source File

Read Error]

Failed to read the copy-source.

[ERROR] Couldn't delete ﬁle! Failed to delete the ﬁle correctly.

[ERROR] Couldn't open ﬁle! Failed to open the ﬁle.

[ERROR] Couldn't read ﬁle! Failed to read the ﬁle.

[ERROR] Couldn't write ﬁle! Failed to write the ﬁle.

[ERROR] File not found! Failed to ﬁnd the ﬁle to be read.

[ERROR] Illegal ﬁle name! The assigned ﬁle name is invalid.

[ERROR] Illegal PM1D File Format! You attempted to load a ﬁle that cannot be loaded.

[ERROR] No card in slot! Memory card was not found.

[ERROR] No enough space to white!

You attempted to save a ﬁle that is larger than the free space in

the memory card.

LOW BATTERY! [CONSOLE] [ENGINE A(B)]

The battery has run down, and should be replaced as soon as

possible.

NO BATTERY! [CONSOLE] [ENGINE A(B)] No battery is installed.

POWER SUPPLY HAS MALFUNCTIONED!

A problem has occurred in the PW1D power supply unit that pro-

vides power to the console.

Appendices

Troubleshooting

■ Power does not turn on, Panel LEDs and

LCD do not light

• Is the power cable connected to an AC outlet of the

correct voltage?

• Are the CS1D and PW1D connected by the special

cable? (“CS1D Operation Manual (Start-up)” →p.6,

10)

• Is the [POWER] switch turned on?

• In the UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen, has

the LED brightness been turned down? (“CS1D Ref-

erence Manual (Software)” →p.36)

• If the power still does not turn on after the above

items have been checked, please contact your dealer.

■ Cannot control the DSP1D, DIO8, AI8, or AO8

from the CS1D

• Are the CS1D and DSP1D connected to each other

by a CONTROL I/O cable between the correct inputs

and outputs? (“CS1D Operation Manual (Start-up)”

→p.6, 10)

• Is the CS1D controlling the wrong (i.e., uncon-

nected) DSP1D – either A or B? (“CS1D Reference

Manual (Hardware)” →p.87, “CS1D Reference Man-

ual (Software)” →p.2)

• Is the DSP1D correctly connected via DIGITAL I/O

cables to the DIO8, AI8, or AO8? (“CS1D Operation

Manual (Start-up)” →p.8, 9, 12, 13)

• Are the various select switches of the DIO8, AI8, or

AO8 set appropriately for the cable connections?

(“CS1D Operation Manual (Start-up)” →p.8, 9, 12,

13)

■ Sound is not input

• Are the option cards installed correctly?

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” →p.47)

• Is a signal being input from the external device?

(“CS1D Operation Manual (Start-up)” →p.36)

• Is the signal from the input device (AI8, DIO8 etc.)

patched to an input channel? (“CS1D Operation

Manual (Start-up)” →p.33, “CS1D Operation Man-

ual (Basic Operation)” →p.28)

• For a channel in which an input card with head amp

is selected, is the [GAIN] encoder set to an appropri-

ate level? (“CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)”

→p.31)

• Is the EQ attenuator raised?

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)” →p.29)

• Has insertion been turned on even though it is not

set correctly? (“CS1D Reference Manual (Hard-

ware)” →p.21)

• Is the [ON] switch indicator of the input channel lit?

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)” →p.32)

• Is the fader of the input channel raised? (“CS1D Ref-

erence Manual (Hardware)” →p.32)

• In SOLO mode, is CUE turned on for a channel that

has no signal? (“CS1D Operation Manual (Basic

Operation)” →p.119)

• Has the DCA fader to which that channel is assigned

been raised? Has MUTE been turned on? (“CS1D

Operation Manual (Basic Operation)” →p.93)

■ Sound is not output

• Are the option cards installed correctly? (“CS1D Ref-

erence Manual (Software)” →p.50)

• Is the [ON] switch indicator lit for the STEREO A/B

channels? (“CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)”

→p.53)

• Is the output channel patched to a signal output

device (AO8, DIO8 etc.)? (“CS1D Operation Manual

(Start-up)” →p.42, “CS1D Operation Manual (Basic

Operation)” →p.30)

• Is LCR PAN turned on and the CSR value set to 1.0?

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” →p.160)

■ A signal is sent to the 2-TRACK IN jack, but

no sound is input

• Is the DIGITAL I/O cable correctly connected

between the CS1D and the DSP1D? (“CS1D Opera-

tion Manual (Start-up)” →p.6, 10)

• Are the ANALOG or DIGITAL jacks selected cor-

rectly? (“CS1D Reference Manual (Software)”

→p.67)

■ Sound is not output from the headphones or

MONITOR OUT

• Is the DIGITAL I/O cable correctly connected

between the CS1D and the DSP1D? (“CS1D Opera-

tion Manual (Start-up)” →p.6, 10)

• Are the MONITOR [PHONES] or [LEVEL] knobs

set to an appropriate volume? (“CS1D Operation

Manual (Start-up)” →p.36, “CS1D Operation Man-

ual (Basic Operation)” →p.111)

■ Sound is too weak

• Is the head amp or [GAIN] encoder set correctly?

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)” →p.31)

• Is the fader of the input channel raised? (“CS1D Ref-

erence Manual (Hardware)” →p.32)

• Is the EQ gain setting excessively low? (“CS1D Refer-

ence Manual (Hardware)” →p.29)

Troubleshooting

• Is the GATE/COMP set to an extreme threshold or

ratio? (“CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)”

→p.25, 27)

• Is the EQ attenuator raised?

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)” →p.29)

• Is the output channel [LEVEL] encoder raised?

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)” →p.63)

• Check the levels in the METER screen.

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” →p.58)

• Is the [GAIN] switch (maximum output setting) of

the analog output card set to the correct position?

→refer to the manual included with the I/O cards.

• Has the DCA fader to which that channel is assigned

been raised? (“CS1D Operation Manual (Basic Oper-

ation)” →p.93)

■ Sound is distorted

• Is the word clock set correctly?

(“CS1D Operation Manual (Start-up)” →p.24, 28,

“CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” →p.53)

• Are the head amp and [GAIN] encoder set correctly?

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)” →p.21, 31)

• Is the input channel fader raised excessively? (“CS1D

Reference Manual (Hardware)” →p.32)

• Is the STEREO A/B channel fader raised excessively?

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)” →p.53)

• Is the EQ gain raised excessively? (“CS1D Reference

Manual (Hardware)” →p.29)

• Is the analog output card [GAIN] switch (maximum

output setting) set to the correct position? →refer to

the manual included woth the I/O cards.

■ Sound is output even though not patched to

an output channel

• Is the signal set to DIRECT OUT? (“CS1D Operation

Manual (Basic Operation)” →p.91)

• Is the signal set to INSERT OUT? (“CS1D Operation

Manual (Basic Operation)” →p.85)

■ No response when the MIX SEND encoder is

rotated

• Is the MIX bus set to FIX MODE?

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” →p.155)

• Is MIX SEND turned on? (“CS1D Reference Manual

(Hardware)” →p.23)

• In the case of the send point is set to POST, has the

fader been lowered? (“CS1D Reference Manual

(Hardware)” →p.23, “CS1D Reference Manual (Soft-

ware)” →p.158)

■ A paired channel does not sound like stereo

• Is the pan mode setting and the pan value correct?

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)” →p.30,

“CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” →p.158)

■ The volume of a speciﬁc channel rises and

falls

• Is ducking speciﬁed for GATE/COMP? (“CS1D

Operation Manual (Basic Operation)” →p.55)

■ Cannot save a scene memory or library data

• Are you attempting to save over read-only memory

number or number that has been memory protected?

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” →p.18, 166)

• In TC EVENT, the EVENT RECALLING parameter

may have been set to ENABLE. (“CS1D Reference

Manual (Software)” →p.33)

■ Can’t save to memory card

• Is the memory card protected?

• Does the memory card contain sufﬁcient space for

saving the data?

■ Can’t load from memory card

• TC EVENT IN may have been set to ENABLE.

■ Cannot transmit/receive MIDI data

• Does the MIDI PORT selection match the connec-

tions?

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” →p.29)

• Are the MIDI MODE and channel settings made cor-

rectly for the transmitting and receiving devices?

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” →p.29)

• Has an event been speciﬁed for the program change?

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” →p.29)

■ Operating the faders does not produce the

desired level adjustment

• Are the [LAYER] or [FLIP] switches set to the appro-

priate fader mode or mixing layer? (“CS1D Reference

Manual (Hardware)” →p.5, 13)

■ Only a speciﬁc channel is heard from the

MONITOR or PHONES jack

• Is CUE turned ON? (“CS1D Operation Manual

(Basic Operation)” →p.116)

■ Noise is heard on a connected external

device (recorder, etc.)

• Is the word clock setting correct? (“CS1D Operation

Manual (Start-up)” →p.24, 28, “CS1D Reference

Manual (Software)” →p.53)

• Is an unsynchronized signal being input? (“CS1D

Reference Manual (Software)” →p.55)

• Is the Dither setting appropriate? (“CS1D Reference

Manual (Software)” →p.56)

• Is the OSCILLATOR, TALKBACK, or SUB IN oper-

ating? (“CS1D Operation Manual (Basic Opera-

tion)” →p.120)

Appendices

■ High frequency range is muted

• Is emphasis being applied? If the emphasis data does

not match the input signal, the high frequency range

will be muted. (“CS1D Reference Manual (Soft-

ware)” →p.133)

• Is EQ applied? (“CS1D Operation Manual (Basic

Operation)” →p.57, 83)

■ The [ON] switches and [SEL] switches select

the wrong channel

• Make sure that the correct mixing layer is selected.

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)” →p.5, 13,

41, 47)

■ An input signal is being received, but there

is no monitor output

• Is “CUE INTERRUPTION” turned on? If CUE is

ON, the CUE signal will be output from MONITOR

OUT. (“CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” →p.71)

■ A channel continues to be heard even in

SOLO mode

• Is that channel set to SOLO SAFE? (“CS1D Reference

Manual (Software)” →p.74)

■ Insufﬁcient headroom, especially when EQ

is boosted

• Use the EQ attenuator to lower the level. (“CS1D

Reference Manual (Hardware)” →p.29)

■ Sound recorded via ST OUT DIGITAL or a MY

card with digital output appears fragmented

• Make sure that the dither setting matches the word

length of the recording device. (“CS1D Reference

Manual (Software)” →p.56)

■ Signal phase is incorrect for a stereo pair

• You must set both input channels of a stereo pair to

the same phase setting. Phase settings are not linked

when you specify stereo pairing. (“CS1D Reference

Manual (Hardware)” →p.21)

■ Signal appears to be delayed

• Make sure that the channel delay function is set cor-

rectly. (“CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware)”

→p.22)

■ Some channels are not updated when a

scene memory is recalled

• Are those channels set to Recall Safe? (“CS1D Opera-

tion Manual (Basic Operation)” →p.106)

■ I selected CUE in the EFFECT screen, but it

is defeated without my action

• This will be defeated automatically when you switch

to a different display screen. (“CS1D Reference Man-

ual (Software)” →p.10)

■ Cannot make boost settings in the GEQ

• Is the LIMIT set to –24 dB? (“CS1D Operation Man-

ual (Basic Operation)” →p.136)

■ When a scene is recalled, some time is

required before faders stop moving

• Has the fade time been set? (“CS1D Reference Man-

ual (Software)” →p.25)

■ Unconnected units or uninstalled cards are

displayed

• Have virtual unit or virtual card settings been made?

(“CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” →p.47, 50)

■ CS1D panel LEDs are dim

• Adjust the LED BRIGHTNESS setting in the PREF-

ERENCE screen of the UTILITY function. (“CS1D

Reference Manual (Software)” →p.36)

■ The VERSION CHECK popup window

appeared

• The software/ﬁrmware of the component that failed

the test does not match the version of the PM1D sys-

tem. The software/ﬁrmware of that component must

be updated.

For details on how to perform the update, refer to the

documentation on the included PM1D system soft-

ware disc.

General Specifications

General Speciﬁcations

TALKBACK IN

Output impedance of signal generator: 150Ω, MONITOR OUT ANALOG volume MAX, fs= 44.1k or 48kHz

Frequency Response 20Hz-20kHz, refer to the nominal output level @1kHz

Gain Error @1kHz

Total Harmonic Distortion

*Total Harmonic Distortion are measured with a 6dB/octave ﬁlter @80kHz.

Dynamic Range

* Dynamic range are measured with a 6dB/octave ﬁlter @12.7kHz;

equivalent to a 20kHz ﬁlter with inﬁnite dB/octave attenuation.

Hum & Noise @20Hz-20kHz

* Hum & Noise are measured with a 6dB/octave ﬁlter @12.7kHz;

equivalent to a 20kHz ﬁlter with inﬁnite dB/octave attenuation

2-TRACK IN

Output impedance of signal generator: 150Ω, MONITOR OUT ANALOG volume MAX, fs= 44.1k or 48kHz

Frequency Response 20Hz-20kHz, refer to the nominal output level @1kHz

Gain Error @1kHz

Total Harmonic Distortion

*Total Harmonic Distortion are measured with a 6dB/octave ﬁlter @80kHz.

INPUT OUTPUT CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

TALKBACK IN 1, 2

MONITOR OUT

ANALOG

Gain: –44dB@+10dB –2 1 dB

Gain: +10dB@+10dB –2 1 dB

INPUT OUTPUT CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

TALKBACK IN 1, 2

MONITOR OUT

ANALOG

Gain: –44dB@+10dB –1 1 dB

Gain: +10dB@+10dB –1 1 dB

INPUT OUTPUT CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

TALKBACK IN 1, 2

MONITOR OUT

ANALOG

+10dB@20Hz-20kHz, Gain: –44dB 0.1 %

full scale output @1kHz, Gain: –44dB 0.02 %

+10dB@20Hz-20kHz, Gain: +10dB 0.02 %

full scale output @1kHz, Gain: +10dB 0.02 %

INPUT OUTPUT CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

TALKBACK IN 1, 2

MONITOR OUT

ANALOG

Gain: +10dB

105 dB

INPUT OUTPUT CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

TALKBACK IN 1, 2

MONITOR OUT

ANALOG

Equivalent Input Noise

Rs= 150Ω, Gain: –44dB

–127 dB

Rs= 150Ω, Gain: +10dB –81 dB

INPUT OUTPUT CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

2-TRACK IN 1, 2

ANALOG

MONITOR OUT

ANALOG

@+10dB –2 1 dB

INPUT OUTPUT CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

2-TRACK IN 1, 2

ANALOG

MONITOR OUT

ANALOG

@+10dB –1 1 dB

INPUT OUTPUT CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

2-TRACK IN 1, 2

ANALOG

MONITOR OUT

ANALOG

+10dB@20Hz-20kHz 0.02 %

full scale output @1kHz 0.01 %

Appendices

Dynamic Range

* Dynamic range are measured with a 6dB/octave ﬁlter @12.7kHz;

equivalent to a 20kHz ﬁlter with inﬁnite dB/octave attenuation.

Crosstalk @1kHz

* Hum & Noise are measured with a 6dB/octave ﬁlter @12.7kHz;

equivalent to a 20kHz ﬁlter with inﬁnite dB/octave attenuation

MONITOR OUT ANALOG & CUE OUT ANALOG

Output impedance of signal generator: 150Ω, fs= 44.1k or 48kHz

Frequency Response 20Hz-20kHz, refer to the nominal output level @1kHz

Gain Error @1kHz

Total Harmonic Distortion

*Total Harmonic Distortion are measured with a 6dB/octave ﬁlter @80kHz.

Hum & Noise residual output noise

* Hum & Noise are measured with a 6dB/octave ﬁlter @12.7kHz;

equivalent to a 20kHz ﬁlter with inﬁnite dB/octave attenuation.

Dynamic Range

* Dynamic range are measured with a 6dB/octave ﬁlter @12.7kHz;

equivalent to a 20kHz ﬁlter with inﬁnite dB/octave attenuation.

INPUT OUTPUT CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

2-TRACK IN 1, 2

ANALOG

MONITOR OUT

ANALOG

* 110 dB

FROM/TO TO/FROM CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

2-TRACK IN N L

ANALOG

2-TRACK IN N R

ANALOG

adjacent inputs –80 dB

INPUT OUTPUT RL CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

2-TRACK IN 1

ANALOG

MONITOR OUT

ANALOG

600Ω volume MAX @+10dB –2 1 dB

CUE OUT

ANALOG

600Ω volume MAX @+10dB –2 1 dB

INPUT OUTPUT RL CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

2-TRACK IN 1

ANALOG

MONITOR OUT

ANALOG

600Ω volume MAX @+10dB –1 1 dB

CUE OUT

ANALOG

600Ω volume MAX @+10dB –1 1 dB

INPUT OUTPUT RL CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

2-TRACK IN 1

ANALOG

MONITOR OUT

ANALOG

600Ω

+10dB@20Hz-20kHz, volume MAX 0.02 %

full scale output @1kHz, volume MAX

0.01 %

CUE OUT

ANALOG

600Ω

+10dB@20Hz-20kHz, volume MAX 0.02 %

full scale output @1kHz, volume MAX

0.01 %

INPUT OUTPUT RL CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

2-TRACK IN 1

ANALOG

MONITOR OUT

ANALOG

600Ω

* volume MAX –86 dB

* volume MIN –100 dB

CUE OUT

ANALOG

600Ω

* volume MAX –86 dB

* volume MIN –100 dB

INPUT OUTPUT RL CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

2-TRACK IN 1

ANALOG

MONITOR OUT

ANALOG

600Ω volume MAX @+10dB 110 dB

CUE OUT

ANALOG

600Ω volume MAX @+10dB 110 dB

General Specifications

Crosstalk @1kHz

PHONES OUT

Output impedance of signal generator: 150Ω, fs= 44.1k or 48kHz

Frequency Response 20Hz-20kHz, refer to the nominal output level @1kHz

Gain Error @1kHz

Total Harmonic Distortion

Hum & Noise

* Hum & Noise are measured with a 6dB/octave ﬁlter @12.7kHz;

equivalent to a 20kHz ﬁlter with inﬁnite dB/octave attenuation.

Crosstalk @1kHz

ANALOG INPUT (AI8 plus LMY2-ML)

ANALOG INPUT (AI8 plus LMY4-AD)

DIGITAL INPUT (DIO8)

FROM/TO TO/FROM CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

MONITOR OUT A, B L

ANALOG

MONITOR OUT A, B

R ANALOG

adjacent inputs –80 dB

CUE OUT L

ANALOG

CUE OUT R

ANALOG

adjacent inputs –80 dB

INPUT OUTPUT RL CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

2-TRACK IN 1

ANALOG

PHONES

A1, B1, A2, B2

8Ω volume MAX @0dB –3 1 dB

INPUT OUTPUT RL CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

2-TRACK IN 1

ANALOG

PHONES

A1, B1, A2, B2

8Ω volume MAX @0dB –2 2 dB

INPUT OUTPUT RL CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

2-TRACK IN 1

ANALOG

PHONES

A1, B1, A2, B2

8Ω 0dB@20Hz-20kHz, volume MAX 0.7 %

8Ω

full scale output @1kHz, volume MAX

INPUT OUTPUT RL CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

—

PHONES

A1, B1, A2, B2

8Ω * volume MAX –88 dB

8Ω * volume MIN –92 dB

FROM/TO TO/FROM RL CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX

UNITS

PHONES

A1, B1, A2, B2 L

PHONES

A1, B1, A2, B2 R

8Ω adjacent inputs –55 dB

40Ω adjacent inputs –60 dB

A/B select

phantom ON/OFF

analog gain control

AD converter

digital gain control

+48V DC is individually supplied inputs.

–68 - +10dB (6dB step)

24bit linear +4bit ﬂoating, 128 times oversampling.

0 - 6dB (1dB step)

AD converter 24bit linear +4bit ﬂoating, 128 times oversampling

Option card MY8, MY4 series

Appendices

INPUT CHANNEL CH 1-48(DSP1D) / CH 1-96(DSP1D-EX)

Phase normal / reverse

Input patch

De-emphasis automatic de-emphasis ﬁlter (15µs/50µs)

Attenuator –96 - 0dB (1dB step)

High pass ﬁlter 20Hz – 600Hz (60 point)

slope –6dB / –12dB / –18dB

on/off

Equalizer

4 band PEQ

on/off

crossover gain –3dB / –4dB / –5dB / –6dB

LOW LOW-MID HIGH-MID HIGH / LPF

Q 0.1 - 10 0.1 - 10 0.1 - 10 0.1 - 10

(41 point) (41 point) (41 point) (41 point)

low shelving high shelving

LPF

F 20Hz - 20kHz 20Hz - 20kHz 20Hz - 20kHz 20Hz - 20kHz

(1/12 oct step) (1/12 oct step) (1/12 oct step) (1/12 oct step)

G –18dB - +18dB –18dB - +18dB –18dB - +18dB –18dB - +18dB

(0.5dB step) (0.5dB step) (0.5dB step) (0.5dB step)

Gate on/off

key in self pre EQ / self post EQ / left CH/key in source1

/ key in source2 / key in source3 / key in source4

key in LPF on/off 20Hz - 20kHz (1/12 oct step)

key in HPF on/off 20Hz - 20kHz (1/12 oct step)

key in cue on/off

key in link on/off

gate

ducking

Compressor on/off

key in self pre EQ / self post EQ / left CH / key in source1

/ key in source2 / key in source3 / key in source4

input ﬁlter LPF / HPF on/off 20Hz - 20kHz (1/12 oct step)

key in link on/off

comp

expander

compander hard

compander soft

Delay 0 - 250msec (0.02msec step)

Fader 100mm motorized –∞, –90 - +10dB (128 step/100mm)

input / mix 1-48

DCA DCA assign 1-12

ON/OFF

Cue on/off

Mute mute group 1-12

Pan 127 positions (L= 1 - 63, center, R= 1 - 63)

pan mode individual / gang pan / inv.gang

Routing stereo on/off

mix 1 - 48 on/off, pre/post, ﬁx / vari

vari: level

Direct out pre EQ / pre fader / post fader / post on

Metering peak hold on/off

General Specifications

STEREO CHANNEL ST 1-4(DSP1D) / ST 1-8(DSP1D-EX)

2-TRACK IN ANALOG 1-2 (CS1D)

2-TRACK IN DIGITAL 1-6 (CS1D)

TALKBACK IN 1-2 (CS1D)

COMM IN (DSP1D)

SUB IN (DSP1D)

DIRECT IN (DSP1D)

Phase normal / reverse

Input patch

De-emphasis automatic de-emphasis ﬁlter (15µs/50µs)

Attenuator –96 - 0dB (1dB step)

High pass ﬁlter parameter are as same as input CH High pass ﬁlter.

Equalizer parameter are as same as input CH Equalizer.

Gate parameter are as same as input CH Gate.

Compressor parameter are as same as input CH Compressor.

Delay 0 - 250msec (0.02msec step)

Fader 100mm motorized –∞, –90 - +10dB (128 step/100mm)

input / mix 1-48

DCA DCA assign 1-12

ON/OFF

Cue on/off

Mute mute group 1-12

Pan 127 positions (L= 1 - 63, center, R= 1 - 63)

pan mode individual / gang pan / inv.gang

Routing stereo on/off

mix 1 - 48 on/off, pre/post, ﬁx / vari

vari: level

Direct out pre EQ / pre fader / post fader / post on

Metering peak hold on/off

AD converter 24bit linear +4bit ﬂoating, 128 times oversampling.

Phase normal / reverse

SRC on/off

Phase normal / reverse

Gain Switch –44dB / +10dB

Level control analog rotary potentiometer

AD converter 24bit linear, 128 times oversampling

Phase normal / reverse

De-emphasis automatic de-emphasis ﬁlter (15µs/50µs)

Gate parameter are as same as input CH Gate.

Level –∞, –90 - +10dB (128 step)

De-emphasis automatic de-emphasis ﬁlter (15µs/50µs)

Appendices

MIX 1-48 (DSP1D, DSP1D-EX)

MATRIX 1-24 (DSP1D, DSP1D-EX)

STEREO OUT A, B (DSP1D, DSP1D-EX)

Equalizer 6 band PEQ (SUB LOW, LOW, LOW MID, MID, HIGH MID, HIGH)

bypass on/off

SUB LOW / LOW SHELVING / HPF

HIGH / HIGH SHELVING / LPF

parameter are as same as input CH Equalizer

Compressor parameter are as same as input CH Compressor.

Delay 0 - 1000msec (0.02msec step)

Level control rotary encoder

DCA DCA assign 9-12

ON/OFF

MIX to STEREO on/off

pre fader / post fader

MIX to STEREO Pan 127 positions (L= 1 - 63, center, R= 1 - 63)

Cue on/off

Mute mute group 1-12

Metering peak hold on/off

Output patch

Dither on/off

word length 16bit - 24bit (DIO8 only)

Send level mix 1-48, stereo A, B

Send on/off mix 1-48, stereo A, B

Equalizer parameter are as same as input MIX Equalizer

Compressor parameter are as same as input MIX Compressor.

Delay 0 - 1000msec (0.02msec step)

Level control rotary encoder

DCA DCA assign 9-12

ON/OFF

Cue on/off

Metering peak hold on/off

Output patch

Dither on/off

word length 16bit - 24bit (DIO8 only)

Equalizer parameter are as same as input MIX Equalizer

Compressor parameter are as same as input MIX Compressor.

Delay 0 - 1000msec (0.02msec step)

Fader 100mm motorized –∞, –90 - +10dB (128 step/100mm)

Balance 127 positions (L= 1 - 63, center, R= 1 - 63)

ON/OFF

Cue on/off

Metering peak hold on/off

Output patch

Dither on/off

word length 16bit - 24bit (DIO8 only)

General Specifications

ANALOG OUTPUT (AO8 plus LMY4-DA)

DIGITAL OUTPUT (DIO8)

MONITOR OUT A (CS1D)

MONITOR OUT B (CS1D)

LIBRARIES

DA converter 24bit linear +3bit ﬂoating, 128 times oversampling.

Option card MY8, MY4 series

Select switch 2TR IN 1 / 2TR IN 2 / STEREO A / STEREO B / DEFINE / DIRECT IN

Monitor mode STEREO / L-MONO/R-MONO / LR-MONO

Delay 0 - 750msec (0.02msec step)

COMM IN dimmer –96 - 0dB (1dB step)

TALKBACK dimmer –96 - 0dB (1dB step)

Cue interruption on/off

DA converter 24bit linear, 128 times oversampling

Level control analog rotary potentiometer

ON/OFF

Phones level analog rotary potentiometer

Metering peak hold on/off

Select switch 2TR IN 1 / 2TR IN 2 / STEREO A / STEREO B / MONITOR A / DEFINE /

DIRECT IN

Monitor mode STEREO / L-MONO / R-MONO / LR-MONO

DA converter 24bit linear, 128 times oversampling

Level control analog rotary potentiometer

ON/OFF

Phones level analog rotary potentiometer

Metering peak hold on/off

PATCH Libraries Number of factory presets 10

Number of user library 90

NAME Libraries Number of factory presets 10

Number of user library 90

UNIT Libraries Number of factory presets 10

Number of user library 90

INPUT EQ Libraries Number of factory presets 37

Number of user library 62

OUTPUT EQ Libraries Number of factory presets 3

Number of user library 96

INPUT GATE Libraries Number of factory presets 4

Number of user library 95

INPUT COMP Libraries Number of factory presets 34

Number of user library 65

OUTPUT COMP Libraries Number of factory presets 9

Number of user library 90

INPUT CH Libraries Number of factory presets 1

Number of user library 99

OUTPUT CH Libraries Number of factory presets 1

Number of user library 99

EFFECT Libraries Number of factory presets 71

Number of user library 128

GEQ Libraries Number of user library 99

Appendices

SCENE MEMORIES

SIGNAL DELAY

fs= 48kHz

Controls & Indicators

INPUT BLOCK

Number of factory presets 10

Number of scene memories 990

PATH DELAY TIME

ANALOG IN(AI8 plus LMY card) → INPUT(DSP1D) → MIX(DSP1D) → ANALOG OUT(AO8 plus LMY

card)

MAX 3.1msec

ANALOG IN(AI8 plus LMY card) → INPUT(DSP1D) → STEREO OUT(DSP1D) → ANALOG OUT(AO8

plus LMY card)

MAX 3.1msec

ANALOG IN(AI8 plus LMY card) → INPUT(DSP1D) → MIX(DSP1D) → MATRIX(DSP1D) → ANALOG

OUT(AO8 plus LMY card)

MAX 3.27msec

ANALOG IN(AI8 plus LMY card) → INPUT(DSP1D) → MIX(DSP1D) → STEREO OUT(DSP1D) →

ANALOG OUT(AO8 plus LMY card)

MAX 3.4msec

PARAMETER CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNIT

Sampling Frequency Range External 39.69 50.88 kHz

Fan Circuit Fixed speed (always) ———˚C

Power Requirement

DC 60V 5 A

DC 12V 0.5 A

Dimensions

Height 355 mm

Depth 974 mm

Width 1906 mm

Net Weight 133 kg

Temperature Range

operating temperature range 10 35 ˚C

storage temperature range –20 +60 ˚C

Keys (w/ LED) CH 1-48/49-96 ON, CH 1-48/49-96 SEL

CH 1-48/49-96 TO ST, CH 1-48/49-96 CUE

MIX SEND LOCAL

Keys CH 1-48/49-96 ASSIGN DCA

MIX SEND DEC, MIX SEND INC

Faders CH 1-48/49-96

Rotary encoders (w/ 25 points LEDs) CH 1-48/49-96 GAIN, CH 1-48/49-96 PAN

CH 1-48/49-96 MIX

4 digits 5 x 7 dot LED CH 1-48/49-96 NAME, MIX SEND NAME

2 digits 7 segment LED MIX SEND NUMBER

LEDs CH 1-48/49-96 SAFE SELECT

CH 1-48/49-96 DCA SELECT

CH 1-48/49-96 INPUT meter 6 elements

CH 1-48/49-96 GATE meter 3 elements

CH 1-48/49-96 COMP meter 3 elements

CH 1-48/49-96 CLIP

CH 1-48/49-96 A SELECT, CH 1-48/49-96 B SELECT

CH 1-48/49-96 PHANTOM +48V, CH 1-48/49-96 INSERT

CH 1-48/49-96 PHASE, CH 1-48/49-96 MIX ON

MIX SEND FIX, MIX SEND VARI

Controls & Indicators

ST IN BLOCK

MIX OUT BLOCK

MATRIX OUT BLOCK

STEREO OUT BLOCK

Keys (w/ LED) ST IN 1-4/5-8 ON, ST IN 1-4/5-8 L SEL, ST IN 1-4/5-8 R SEL

ST IN 1-4/5-8 TO ST, ST IN 1-4/5-8 CUE

Keys ST IN 1-4/5-8 ASSIGN DCA

Faders ST IN 1-4/5-8

Rotary encoders (w/ 25 points LEDs) ST IN 1-4/5-8 GAIN, ST IN 1-4/5-8 PAN, ST IN 1-4/5-8 MIX

4 digits 5 x 7 dot LED ST IN 1-4/5-8 NAME

LEDs ST IN 1-4/5-8 SAFE SELECT

ST IN 1-4/5-8 DCA SELECT

ST IN 1-4/5-8 INPUT meter 6 elements x 2

ST IN 1-4/5-8 GATE meter 3 elements x 2

ST IN 1-4/5-8 COMP meter 3 elements x 2

ST IN 1-4/5-8 CLIP L, R

ST IN 1-4/5-8 A SELECT

ST IN 1-4/5-8 B SELECT

ST IN 1-4/5-8 PHANTOM +48V

ST IN 1-4/5-8 INSERT

ST IN 1-4/5-8 PHASE

ST IN 1-4/5-8 MIX ON

ST IN 1-4/5-8 STATUS L, R

Keys (w/ LED) MIX 1-24/25-48 ON, MIX 1-24/25-48 SEL,

MIX 1-24/25-48 TO ST, MIX 1-24/25-48 CUE

MIX 1-24/25-48 TO MATRIX

MIX LAYER 1-24 SELECT, MIX LAYER 25-48 SELECT

Keys MIX 1-24/25-48 ASSIGN DCA

Rotary encoders (w/ 25 points LEDs) MIX 1-24/25-48 LEVEL

4 digits 5 x 7 dot LED MIX 1-24/25-48 NAME

LEDs MIX 1-24/25-48 SAFE SELECT

MIX 1-24/25-48 DCA SELECT

MIX 1-24/25-48 INSERT

Keys (w/ LED) MATRIX 1-12/13-24 ON, MATRIX 1-12/13-24 SEL,

MATRIX 1-12/13-24 CUE

MATRIX LAYER 1-12 SELECT

MATRIX LAYER 13-24 SELECT

Rotary encoders (w/ 25 points LEDs) MATRIX 1-12/13-24 LEVEL

4 digits 5 x 7 dot LED MATRIX 1-12/13-24 NAME

LEDs MATRIX 1-12/13-24 SAFE SELECT

MATRIX 1-12/13-24 INSERT

Keys (w/ LED) STEREO A ON, STEREO B ON

STEREO A SEL, STEREO B SEL

STEREO A CUE, STEREO B CUE

STEREO A TO MTRX, STEREO B MONO

Fader STEREO A, STEREO B

LEDs STEREO A SAFE SELECT, STEREO B SAFE SELECT

STEREO A INSERT, STEREO B INSERT

Appendices

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL BLOCK

Keys (w/ LED) PHANTOM +48V, PHASE, INSERT, DELAY ON,

INPUT A SELECT, INPUT B SELECT

MIX SEND 1-24/25-48 ON, MIX SEND 1-24/25-48 PRE

MIX SEND LAYER 1-24, MIX SEND LAYER 25-48

COMPRESSOR ON, COMPESSOR LINK

COMPRESSOR ATTACK SELECT

COMPRESSOR RELEASE SELECT

COMPRESSOR FILTER ON

NOISE GATE ON, NOISE GATE LINK

NOISE GATE ATTACK SELECT

NOISE GATE DECAY SELECT

NOISE GATE KEY IN FILTER ON

NOISE GATE KEY IN CUE

NOISE GATE KEY IN FILTER HPF SELECT

NOISE GATE KEY IN FILTER LPF SELECT

EQ ON, HPF ON, HIGH SHELF ON, LOW SHELF ON

HPF 6dB/OCT SELECT, HPF 12dB/OCT SELECT

HPF 18dB/OCT SELECT, LPF ON

FIXED MIX PAN, TO STEREO

ON, CUE, DCA ASSIGN 1-12,

RECALL SAFE, MUTE SAFE

CHANNEL COPY, FADER FLIP, MODULE FLIP

Keys SHIFT, DEC, INC

Fader

Rotary encoders

(w/ 25 point LED)

MIX SEND1-24/25-48 LEVEL

COMPRESSOR GAIN, COMPRESSOR THR

NOISE GATE RANGE, NOISE GATE THR

EQ GAIN, EQ Q, STEREO PAN, GAIN, ATTENUATOR

Rotary encoders

(w/ 3 digits 7 segment LED)

DELAY TIME, COMPRESSOR RATIO

COMPRESSOR FILTER FREQUENCY

COMPRESSOR ATTACK/RELEASE TIME

COMPRESSOR WIDTH/KNEE

NOISE GATE KEY IN FILTER FREQUENCY

NOISE GATE ATTACK/DECAY TIME

NOISE GATE HOLD TIME, EQ FREQUENCY

EQ HPF FREQUENCY

4 digits 5 x 7 dot LED MIX 1-24/25-48 NAME

CHANNEL SELECT NAME

2 digits 7 segment LED CHANNEL SELECT NUMBER

LEDs MIX SEND PAIR, MIX SEND FIX

COMPRESSOR FILTER Hz/kHz

COMPRESSOR ATTACK/RELEASE TIME sec/msec

COMPRESSOR WIDTH/KNEE, COMPRESSOR PRE CLIP

COMPRESSOR GR meter 6 elements

COMPRESSOR POST meter 6 elements

NOISE GATE KEY IN FILTER Hz/kHz

NOISE GATE KEY IN SIG meter 3 elements

NOISE GATE ATTACK/RELEASE TIME sec/msec

NOISE GATE HOLD TIME sec/msec

NOISE GATE GR meter 6 elements

NOISE GATE POST meter 6 elements

EQ FREQUENCY Hz/kHz, EQ HPF FREQUENCY Hz/kHz

GAIN CLIP, CLIP EQ, CLIP CH ∑

CHANNEL SELECT MONO, CHANNEL SELECT PAIR

INPUT meter 12 elements

Controls & Indicators

SELECTED OUTPUT CHANNEL BLOCK

DCA GROUP BLOCK

SCENE MEMORY BLOCK

Keys (w/LED) DELAY ON

COMPRESSOR ON, COMPESSOR LINK

COMPRESSOR ATTACK/RELEASE SELECT

COMPRESSOR FILTER ON

EQ ON, HPF ON, LPF ON, HIGH SHELF ON

LOW SHELF ON, BYPASS

ON, CUE, INSERT, TO ST, TO MATRIX

TO ST PAN SELECT, BAL SELECT

DCA ASSIGN 9-12, RECALL SAFE, MUTE SAFE

CHANNEL COPY, ST SELECT, MATRIX SELECT

MIX SELECT

Keys SHIFT, DEC, INC

Rotary encoders

(w/ 25 point LED)

COMPRESSOR GAIN, COMPRESSOR THR

EQ GAIN, EQ Q, PAN, OUTPUT LEVEL

Rotary encoders

(w/ 3 digits 7 segment LED)

COMPRESSOR RATIO

COMPRESSOR FILTER FREQUENCY

COMPRESSOR ATTACK/RELEASE TIME

COMPRESSOR WIDTH/KNEE

EQ FREQUENCY

Rotary encoders

(w/ 4 digits 7 segment LED)

DELAY TIME

4 digits 5 x 7 dot LED CHANNEL SELECT NAME

2 digits 7 segment LED CHANNEL SELECT NUMBER

LEDs COMPRESSOR FILTER Hz/kHz

COMPRESSOR ATTACK/RELEASE TIME sec/msec

COMPRESSOR WIDTH/KNEE

COMPRESSOR PRE CLIP

COMPRESSOR GR meter 6 elements

COMPRESSOR POST meter 6 elements

EQ FREQUENCY Hz/kHz

Keys (w/ LED) DCA 1-12 MUTE

DCA1-12 ASSIGN DCA

DCA1-12 CUE

FADER STATUS IN, FADER STATUS 1-12

FADER STATUS 13-24, FADER STATUS 25-36

FADER STATUS 37-48, FADER STATUS DCA

Faders DCA 1-12

4 digits 5 x 7 dot LED x 2 DCA NAME

LEDs DCA 1-12 NOMINAL, DCA 1-12 RECALL SAFE

Keys (w/ LED) SCENE MEMORY 1-12, PREVIEW

Keys SCENE MEMORY RECALL UNDO

SCENE MEMORY RECALL, SCENE MEMORY STORE

SCENE MEMORY 0-9, SCENE MEMORY CLEAR

SCENE MEMORY DEC, SCENE MEMORY INC

3 digits 7 segment LED SCENE NUMBER

LEDs SCENE MEMORY RECALL, SCENE MEMORY MUTE

Appendices

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS, USER DEFINE BLOCK

MASTER BLOCK

DATA ENTORY BLOCK

Keys (w/ LED) USER DEFINE 1-8

Keys EFFECT, GEQ, SCENE, MIDI/GPI/TC, UTILITY

SYS/W.CLOCK, METER, MON/CUE

INPUT PATCH, INPUT HA/INSERT, INPUT EQ

INPUT GATE/COMP, INPUT DELAY, INPUT DCA/MUTE

INPUT PAN/ROUTING, INPUT CH VIEW

OUTPUT PATCH, OUTPUT INSERT, OUTPUT EQ

OUTPUT COMP, OUTPUT DELAY, OUTPUT DCA/MUTE

OUTPUT MATRIX/ST, OUTPUT CH VIEW

Keys (w/ LED) ASSIGN TO MON B, TB OUT, TB ON

OSC ON, OSC OUT

SOLO, INPUT AFL, OUTPUT PFL, LAST CUE

DCA PRE PAN

MONITOR A SOURCE 2TR IN 1

MONITOR A SOURCE 2TR IN 2

MONITOR A SOURCE ST A

MONITOR A SOURCE ST B

MONITOR A SOURCE DEFINE

MONITOR A DELAY ON

MONITOR A L MONO, MONITOR A R MONO

MONITOR A ON

MONITOR B SOURCE 2TR IN 1

MONITOR B SOURCE 2TR IN 2

MONITOR B SOURCE ST A

MONITOR B SOURCE ST B

MONITOR B SOURCE MONITOR A

MONITOR B SOURCE DEFINE

MONITOR B ON

ENGINE A, ENGINE B

GLOBAL LAYER 1-48, GLOBAL LAYER 49-96

METER PRE, METER PEAK HOLD

METER SELECT MIX 25-48

METER SELECT MATRIX 1-24

Rotary encoders

(w/ 3 digits 7 segment LED)

MONITOR A DELAY TIME

Analog Rotary Potentiometer TALKBACK 1 LEVEL, TALKBACK 2 LEVEL

CUE OUT, MONITOR A LEVEL, MONITOR A PHONES

MONITOR B LEVEL, MONITOR B PHONES

LEDs TALKBACK 1 PHANTOM +48V, TALKBACK 1 +10dB

TALKBACK 2 PHANTOM +48V, TALKBACK 2 +10dB

CUE ACTIVE INPUT, CUE ACTIVE DCA

CUE ACTIVE OUTPUT

Keys CURSOR UP, CURSOR DOWN, CURSOR LEFT

CURSOR RIGHT, DEC, INC, SHIFT, ENTER

LEFT, RIGHT

Rotary encoders

PC ATA STORAGE CARD SLOT A, B

Trackpad

Analog Input Characteristics

METER BRIDGE BLOCK

DISPLAY BLOCK

Analog Input Characteristics

Analog Output Characteristics

8 digits 7 segment LED TIME CODE

3 digits 7 segment LED SCENE MEMORY NUMBER

16 digits 5 x 7 dot LED SCENE MEMORY NAME

LEDs SCENE MEMORY CURRENT, SCENE MEMORY PREVIEW

MIX OUT 1-24 meter 21 elements

MIX OUT 25-48 / MATRIX OUT 1-24 meter 21 elements

STEREO A L, R meter 21 elements

STEREO B L, R meter 21 elements

CUE L, R meter 21 elements

DISPLAY 800 x 600 dots COLOR GRAPHIC LCD w/ backlight

Analog Rotary Potentiometer BRIGHTNESS

Input Terminals GAIN

Actual Load

Impedance

For Use With

Nominal

Input level

Connector

Nominal Max. before clip

TALKBACK IN

1, 2

*1. AD converters are 24bit linear, 128 times oversampling.

+48V DC (phantom power) is individually supplied to each TALKBACK connectors via 6.8kΩ resistors.

–44dB

3kΩ

50-600Ω Mics

& 600Ω Lines

–44dB (4.89mV) –30dB (24.5mV)

XLR-3-31 type

(Balanced)

*2. Balanced (1= GND, 2= HOT, 3= COLD)

+10dB +10dB (2.45V) +24dB (12.3V)

2-TRACK IN

ANALOG 1, 2

*3. AD converters are 24bit linear +4bit ﬂoating, 128 times oversampling.

• 0dB= 0.775Vrms, 0dBV= 1Vrms.

— 10kΩ 600Ω Lines +10dB (2.45V) +24dB (12.3V)

XLR-3-31 type

(Balanced)

Input Terminals

Actual Load

Impedance

For Use With

Nominal

Output level

Connector

Nominal Max. before clip

MONITOR OUT A, B 150Ω 600Ω Lines +10dB (2.45V) +24dB (12.3V)

XLR-3-32 type

(Balanced)

*1. Balanced (1= GND, 2= HOT, 3= COLD)

CUE OUT 150Ω 600Ω Lines +10dB (2.45V) +24dB (12.3V)

XLR-3-32 type

(Balanced)

PHONES A1, B1 15Ω

8Ω Phones 75mW

150mW

Stereo Phone Jack

(Unbalanced)

*2. Unbalanced (Tip= LEFT, Ring= RIGHT, Sleeve= GND)

• 0dB= 0.775Vrms, 0dBV= 1Vrms.

• DA converters are 24bit linear, 128 times oversampling.

40Ω Phones 65mW

150mW

PHONES A2, B2 15Ω

8Ω Phones 75mW

150mW

Stereo Phone Jack

(Unbalanced)

40Ω Phones 65mW

*3. The position of the level control is 10dB lowered from MAX.

150mW

Appendices

Digital Input & Output Characteristics

INPUT/OUTPUT

TERMINALS

FORMAT LEVEL

CONNECTOR

TYPE QUANTITY

DIGITAL I/O

ENGINE A1, A2

ENGINE B1, B2

CONSOLE 1, 2

— RS422 D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P

(Female)

2-TRACK IN DIGITAL

AES/EBU 1-6

AES/EBU RS422 XLR-3-31 type Connector 6

2-TRACK IN DIGITAL

COAXIAL 1-2

IEC60958 0.5Vpp/75Ω RCA Phono JACK 2

STEREO OUT DIGITAL

AES/EBU A, B

AES/EBU RS422 XLR-3-32 type Connector 2

STEREO OUT DIGITAL

COAXIAL A, B

IEC60958 0.5Vpp/75Ω RCA Phono JACK 2

WORD CLOCK IN — TTL/75Ω (ON/OFF) BNC Connector 1

WORD CLOCK OUT — TTL/75Ω BNC Connector 1

SVGA OUT SVGA 2Vpp High density D-sub 15pin Con-

nector (Female)

KEYBOARD PS2 TTL Mini DIN 6pin Connector 2

MOUSE PS2 TTL Mini DIN 6pin Connector 2

NUMKEY PS2 TTL Mini DIN 6pin Connector 1

REMOTE RS-422 — RS422 D-sub 9pin Connector (Female) 1

MIDI IN, OUT, THRU MIDI — DIN 5pin Connector 3

TIME CODE IN SMPTE Nominal –10dB/

10kΩ

XLR-3-31 type Connector 1

GPI — C-MOS IN,

Open collector out

D-SUB 25pin Connector

(Female)

PC CONTROL USB — 0V - 3.3V B Type USB Connector 1

PC CONTROL RS-232-C — RS-232-C D-SUB 9pin Connector (Male) 1

CONTROL I/O

ENGINE A

1IN, 1OUT, 2IN, 2OUT

ENGINE B

1IN, 1OUT, 2IN, 2OUT

CONSOLE

1IN, 1OUT, 2IN, 2OUT

— –0.225V - –1.825V

/50Ω

BNC Connector 12

DC POWER INPUT — DC 60V KN-27-31S 27pin (Female) 2

Pin Assignment DIGITAL I/O ENGINE A1, A2, B1, B2 (D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P)

Pin Assignment DIGITAL I/O ENGINE A1, A2, B1, B2

(D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P)

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal

GND

2TRK 1 OUT (+)

2TRK 1 OUT (–)

2TRK 2 OUT (+)

2TRK 2 OUT (–)

2TRK 3 OUT (+)

2TRK 3 OUT (–)

2TRK 4 OUT (+)

2TRK 4 OUT (–)

2TRK 5 OUT (+)

2TRK 5 OUT (–)

2TRK 6 OUT (+)

2TRK 6 OUT (–)

TB 1-2 OUT (+)

TB 1-2 OUT (–)

RESERVED

GND

WORD CLOCK OUT (+)

WORD CLOCK OUT (–)

WORD CLOCK IN (+)

WORD CLOCK IN (–)

GND

ID6 OUT

GND

ID6 IN

STEREO A IN (+)

STEREO A IN (–)

STEREO B IN (+)

STEREO B IN (–)

MONITOR A IN (+)

MONITOR A IN (–)

MONITOR B IN (+)

MONITOR B IN (–)

CUE A IN (+)

CUE A IN (–)

CUE B IN (+)

CUE B IN (–)

RESERVED

ID0 OUT

ID1 OUT

ID2 OUT

ID3 OUT

ID4 OUT

ID5 OUT

ID0 IN

ID1 IN

ID2 IN

ID3 IN

ID4 IN

ID5 IN

MSB/nLSB OUT

2ch/n4ch OUT

2 13h

jik

Appendices

Pin Assignment DIGITAL I/O CONSOLE 1, 2

(D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P)

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal

GND

2TRK 1 IN (+)

2TRK 1 IN (–)

2TRK 2 IN (+)

2TRK 2 IN (–)

2TRK 3 IN (+)

2TRK 3 IN (–)

2TRK 4 IN (+)

2TRK 4 IN (–)

2TRK 5 IN (+)

2TRK 5 IN (–)

2TRK 6 IN (+)

2TRK 6 IN (–)

TB 1-2 IN (+)

TB 1-2 IN (–)

RESERVED

GND

WORD CLOCK IN (+)

WORD CLOCK IN (–)

WORD CLOCK OUT (+)

WORD CLOCK OUT (–)

GND

ID6 IN

GND

ID6 OUT

STEREO A OUT (+)

STEREO A OUT (–)

STEREO B OUT (+)

STEREO B OUT (–)

MONITOR A OUT (+)

MONITOR A OUT (–)

MONITOR B OUT (+)

MONITOR B OUT (–)

CUE A OUT (+)

CUE A OUT (–)

CUE B OUT (+)

CUE B OUT (–)

RESERVED

ID0 IN

ID1 IN

ID2 IN

ID3 IN

ID4 IN

ID5 IN

ID0 OUT

ID1 OUT

ID2 OUT

ID3 OUT

ID4 OUT

ID5 OUT

MSB/nLSB IN

2ch/n4ch IN

2 13h

jik

Pin Assignment GPI (D-SUB Connector 25P)

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal

Data OUT 1

Data OUT 2

Data OUT 3

Data OUT 4

Data OUT 5

Data OUT 6

Data OUT 7

Data OUT 8

GND

+5V

Data IN 1

Data IN 2

Data IN 3

Data IN 4

Data IN 5

Data IN 6

Data IN 7

Data IN 8

123

NOP

Appendices

Pin Assignment OUTPUT A,B,C

(D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P)

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal

GND

Data OUT 1-2 (+)

Data OUT 1-2 (–)

Data OUT 3-4 (+)

Data OUT 3-4 (–)

Data OUT 5-6 (+)

Data OUT 5-6 (–)

Data OUT 7-8 (+)

Data OUT 7-8 (–)

Data OUT 9-10 (+)

Data OUT 9-10 (–)

Data OUT 11-12 (+)

Data OUT 11-12 (–)

Data OUT 13-14 (+)

Data OUT 13-14 (–)

Data OUT 15-16 (+)

Data OUT 15-16 (–)

DTR OUT (+)

DTR OUT (–)

RTS IN (+)

RTS IN (–)

GND

WORD CLOCK OUT (+)

WORD CLOCK OUT (–)

WORD CLOCK IN (+)

WORD CLOCK IN (–)

CONTROL OUT (+)

CONTROL OUT (–)

CONTROL IN (+)

CONTROL IN (–)

GND

ID6 OUT

GND

ID6 IN

Data OUT 17-18 (+)

Data OUT 17-18 (–)

Data OUT 19-20 (+)

Data OUT 19-20 (–)

Data OUT 21-22 (+)

Data OUT 21-22 (–)

Data OUT 23-24 (+)

Data OUT 23-24 (–)

Data OUT 25-26 (+)

Data OUT 25-26 (–)

Data OUT 27-28 (+)

Data OUT 27-28 (–)

Data OUT 29-30 (+)

Data OUT 29-30 (–)

Data OUT 31-32 (+)

Data OUT 31-32 (–)

ID0 OUT

ID1 OUT

ID2 OUT

ID3 OUT

ID4 OUT

ID5 OUT

ID0 IN

ID1 IN

ID2 IN

ID3 IN

ID4 IN

ID5 IN

MSB/nLSB OUT

2ch/n4ch OUT

2 13h

jik

Pin Assignment INPUT A,B (D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P)

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal

GND

Data IN 1-2 (+)

Data IN 1-2 (–)

Data IN 3-4 (+)

Data IN 3-4 (–)

Data IN 5-6 (+)

Data IN 5-6 (–)

Data IN 7-8 (+)

Data IN 7-8 (–)

Data IN 9-10 (+)

Data IN 9-10 (–)

Data IN 11-12 (+)

Data IN 11-12 (–)

Data IN 13-14 (+)

Data IN 13-14 (–)

Data IN 15-16 (+)

Data IN 15-16 (–)

RTS IN (+)

RTS IN (–)

DTR OUT (+)

DTR OUT (–)

GND

WORD CLOCK IN (+)

WORD CLOCK IN (–)

WORD CLOCK OUT (+)

WORD CLOCK OUT (–)

CONTROL IN (+)

CONTROL IN (–)

CONTROLOUT (+)

CONTROL OUT (–)

GND

ID6 OUT

GND

ID6 IN

Data IN 17-18 (+)

Data IN 17-18 (–)

Data IN 19-20 (+)

Data IN 19-20 (–)

Data IN 21-22 (+)

Data IN 21-22 (–)

Data IN 23-24 (+)

Data IN 23-24 (–)

Data IN 25-26 (+)

Data IN 25-26 (–)

Data IN 27-28 (+)

Data IN 27-28 (–)

Data IN 29-30 (+)

Data IN 29-30 (–)

Data IN 31-32 (+)

Data IN 31-32 (–)

ID0 OUT

ID1 OUT

ID2 OUT

ID3 OUT

ID4 OUT

ID5 OUT

ID0 IN

ID1 IN

ID2 IN

ID3 IN

ID4 IN

ID5 IN

MSB/nLSB IN

2ch/n4ch IN

2 13h

jik

Appendices

Pin Assignment DIGITAL I/O INPUT 1-10

(D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P)

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal

GND

Data IN 1-2 (+)

Data IN 1-2 (–)

Data IN 3-4 (+)

Data IN 3-4 (–)

Data IN 5-6 (+)

Data IN 5-6 (–)

Data IN 7-8 (+)

Data IN 7-8 (–)

Data IN 9-10 (+)

Data IN 9-10 (–)

Data IN 11-12 (+)

Data IN 11-12 (–)

Data IN 13-14 (+)

Data IN 13-14 (–)

Data IN 15-16 (+)

Data IN 15-16 (–)

DTR IN (+)

DTR IN (–)

RTS OUT (+)

RTS OUT (–)

GND

WORD CLOCK IN (+)

WORD CLOCK IN (–)

WORD CLOCK OUT (+)

WORD CLOCK OUT (–)

CONTROL IN (+)

CONTROL IN (–)

CONTROLOUT (+)

CONTROL OUT (–)

GND

ID6 IN

GND

ID6 OUT

Data IN 17-18 (+)

Data IN 17-18 (–)

Data IN 19-20 (+)

Data IN 19-20 (–)

Data IN 21-22 (+)

Data IN 21-22 (–)

Data IN 23-24 (+)

Data IN 23-24 (–)

Data IN 25-26 (+)

Data IN 25-26 (–)

Data IN 27-28 (+)

Data IN 27-28 (–)

Data IN 29-30 (+)

Data IN 29-30 (–)

Data IN 31-32 (+)

Data IN 31-32 (–)

ID0 IN

ID1 IN

ID2 IN

ID3 IN

ID4 IN

ID5 IN

ID0 OUT

ID1 OUT

ID2 OUT

ID3 OUT

ID4 OUT

ID5 OUT

MSB/nLSB IN

2ch/n4ch IN

2 13h

jik

Pin Assignment DIGITAL I/O OUTPUT 1-6 (D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P)

Pin Assignment DIGITAL I/O OUTPUT 1-6

(D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P)

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal

GND

Data OUT 1-2 (+)

Data OUT 1-2 (–)

Data OUT 3-4 (+)

Data OUT 3-4 (–)

Data OUT 5-6 (+)

Data OUT 5-6 (–)

Data OUT 7-8 (+)

Data OUT 7-8 (–)

Data OUT 9-10 (+)

Data OUT 9-10 (–)

Data OUT 11-12 (+)

Data OUT 11-12 (–)

Data OUT 13-14 (+)

Data OUT 13-14 (–)

Data OUT 15-16 (+)

Data OUT 15-16 (–)

RTS OUT (+)

RTS OUT (–)

DTR IN (+)

DTR IN (–)

GND

WORD CLOCK OUT (+)

WORD CLOCK OUT (–)

WORD CLOCK IN (+)

WORD CLOCK IN (–)

CONTROL OUT (+)

CONTROL OUT (–)

CONTROL IN (+)

CONTROL IN (–)

GND

ID6 IN

GND

ID6 OUT

Data OUT 17-18 (+)

Data OUT 17-18 (–)

Data OUT 19-20 (+)

Data OUT 19-20 (–)

Data OUT 21-22 (+)

Data OUT 21-22 (–)

Data OUT 23-24 (+)

Data OUT 23-24 (–)

Data OUT 25-26 (+)

Data OUT 25-26 (–)

Data OUT 27-28 (+)

Data OUT 27-28 (–)

Data OUT 29-30 (+)

Data OUT 29-30 (–)

Data OUT 31-32 (+)

Data OUT 31-32 (–)

ID0 IN

ID1 IN

ID2 IN

ID3 IN

ID4 IN

ID5 IN

ID0 OUT

ID1 OUT

ID2 OUT

ID3 OUT

ID4 OUT

ID5 OUT

MSB/nLSB OUT

2ch/n4ch OUT

2 13h

jik

Appendices

Pin Assignment DIGITAL I/O CASCADE IN

(D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P)

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal

GND

MIX IN 1-4 (+)

MIX IN 1-4 (–)

MIX IN 5-8 (+)

MIX IN 5-8 (–)

MIX IN 9-12 (+)

MIX IN 9-12 (–)

MIX IN 13-16 (+)

MIX IN 13-16 (–)

MIX IN 17-20 (+)

MIX IN 17-20 (–)

MIX IN 21-24 (+)

MIX IN 21-24 (–)

MIX IN 25-28 (+)

MIX IN 25-28 (–)

MIX IN 29-32 (+)

MIX IN 29-32 (–)

DTR IN (+)

DTR IN (–)

RTS OUT (+)

RTS OUT (–)

GND

WORD CLOCK IN (+)

WORD CLOCK IN (–)

WORD CLOCK OUT (+)

WORD CLOCK OUT (–)

CONTROL IN (+)

CONTROL IN (–)

CONTROL OUT (+)

CONTROL OUT (–)

GND

ID6 IN

GND

ID6 OUT

MIX IN 33-36 (+)

MIX IN 33-36 (–)

MIX IN 37-40 (+)

MIX IN 37-40 (–)

MIX IN 41-44 (+)

MIX IN 41-44 (–)

MIX IN 45-48 (+)

MIX IN 45-48 (–)

STEREO A,B IN (+)

STEREO A,B IN (–)

MONITOR A,B IN (+)

MONITOR A,B IN (–)

CUE A,B IN (+)

CUE A,B IN (–)

TB, COMM IN (+)

TB, COMM IN (–)

ID0 IN

ID1 IN

ID2 IN

ID3 IN

ID4 IN

ID5 IN

ID0 OUT

ID1 OUT

ID2 OUT

ID3 OUT

ID4 OUT

ID5 OUT

MSB/nLSB IN

2ch/n4ch IN

2 13h

jik

Pin Assignment DIGITAL I/O CASCADE OUT (D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P)

Pin Assignment DIGITAL I/O CASCADE OUT

(D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P)

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal

GND

MIX OUT 1-4 (+)

MIX OUT 1-4 (–)

MIX OUT 5-8 (+)

MIX OUT 5-8 (–)

MIX OUT 9-12 (+)

MIX OUT 9-12 (–)

MIX OUT 13-16 (+)

MIX OUT 13-16 (–)

MIX OUT 17-20 (+)

MIX OUT 17-20 (–)

MIX OUT 21-24 (+)

MIX OUT 21-24 (–)

MIX OUT 25-28 (+)

MIX OUT 25-28 (–)

MIX OUT 29-32 (+)

MIX OUT 29-32 (–)

RTS OUT (+)

RTS OUT (–)

DTR IN (+)

DTR IN (–)

GND

WORD CLOCK OUT (+)

WORD CLOCK OUT (–)

WORD CLOCK IN (+)

WORD CLOCK IN (–)

CONTROL OUT (+)

CONTROL OUT (–)

CONTROL IN (+)

CONTROL IN (–)

GND

ID6 OUT

GND

ID6 IN

MIX OUT 33-36 (+)

MIX OUT 33-36 (–)

MIX OUT 37-40 (+)

MIX OUT 37-40 (–)

MIX OUT 41-44 (+)

MIX OUT 41-44 (–)

MIX OUT 45-48 (+)

MIX OUT 45-48 (–)

STEREO A,B OUT (+)

STEREO A,B OUT (–)

MONITOR A,B OUT (+)

MONITOR A,B OUT (–)

CUE A,B OUT (+)

CUE A,B OUT (–)

TB, COMM OUT (+)

TB, COMM OUT (–)

ID0 OUT

ID1 OUT

ID2 OUT

ID3 OUT

ID4 OUT

ID5 OUT

ID0 IN

ID1 IN

ID2 IN

ID3 IN

ID4 IN

ID5 IN

MSB/nLSB OUT

2ch/n4ch OUT

2 13h

jik

Appendices

Pin Assignment DIGITAL I/O CONSOLE 1,2

(D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P)

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal

GND

2TRK 1 IN (+)

2TRK 1 IN (–)

2TRK 2 IN (+)

2TRK 2 IN (–)

2TRK 3 IN (+)

2TRK 3 IN (–)

2TRK 4 IN (+)

2TRK 4 IN (–)

2TRK 5 IN (+)

2TRK 5 IN (–)

2TRK 6 IN (+)

2TRK 6 IN (–)

TB 1-2 IN (+)

TB 1-2 IN (–)

RESERVED

GND

WORD CLOCK IN (+)

WORD CLOCK IN (–)

WORD CLOCK OUT (+)

WORD CLOCK OUT (–)

GND

ID6 IN

GND

ID6 OUT

STEREO A OUT (+)

STEREO A OUT (–)

STEREO B OUT (+)

STEREO B OUT (–)

MONITOR A OUT (+)

MONITOR A OUT (–)

MONITOR B OUT (+)

MONITOR B OUT (–)

CUE A OUT (+)

CUE A OUT (–)

CUE B OUT (+)

CUE B OUT (–)

RESERVED

ID0 IN

ID1 IN

ID2 IN

ID3 IN

ID4 IN

ID5 IN

ID0 OUT

ID1 OUT

ID2 OUT

ID3 OUT

ID4 OUT

ID5 OUT

MSB/nLSB IN

2ch/n4ch IN

2 13h

jik

Pin Assignment CONTROL I/O REMOTE RS-422 (D-SUB Connector 9P)

Pin Assignment CONTROL I/O REMOTE RS-422

(D-SUB Connector 9P)

Pin Assignment CONTROL I/O GPI (D-SUB Connector 25P)

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal

TX (–)

TX (+)

RX (+)

RX (–)

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal

Data OUT 1

Data OUT 2

Data OUT 3

Data OUT 4

Data OUT 5

Data OUT 6

Data OUT 7

Data OUT 8

GND

+5V

Data IN 1

Data IN 2

Data IN 3

Data IN 4

Data IN 5

Data IN 6

Data IN 7

Data IN 8

123

NOP

Appendices

Accessories

DIGITAL AUDIO CABLE 10m × 1

CONTROL CABLE 10m × 2

LAMP × 4

DUST COVER × 1

OWNER’S MANUAL × 1

PM1D SYSTEM SOFTWARE DISC × 1

(CD-R media)

Dimensions

Speciﬁcations and external appearance subject to change without notice.

For European Model

Purchaser/User Information speciﬁed in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2.

Conformed Environment: E1, E2, E3 and E4

355

1906

974

Unit: mm

Cards Specifications

Cards Speciﬁcations

• LMY2-ML

1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Output impedance of signal generator: 150Ω, fs=44.1k or 48kHz.

Frequency Response 20Hz-20kHz, refer to the nominal output level @1kHz

Gain Error @1kHz

Total Harmonic Distortion

Dynamic Range

* Dynamic range are measured with a 6dB/octave ﬁlter @12.7kHz; equivalent to a 20kHz ﬁlter with inﬁnite dB/octave attenuation.

Hum & Noise @20Hz-20kHz

* Hum & Noise are measured with a 6dB/octave ﬁlter @12.7kHz; equivalent to a 20kHz ﬁlter with inﬁnite dB/octave attenuation.

Crosstalk @1kHz

INPUT OUTPUT

CONDITIONS

MIN TYP MAX UNITS

CH1A, 1B

CH2A, 2B

LMY4-DA

Gain: –68dB@+10dB –3 1 dB

Gain: +10dB@+10dB –2 1 dB

INPUT OUTPUT

CONDITIONS

MIN TYP MAX UNITS

CH1A, 1B

CH2A, 2B

LMY4-DA

Gain: –68dB@+10dB –1 1 dB

Gain: +10dB@+10dB –1 1 dB

INPUT OUTPUT

CONDITIONS

MIN TYP MAX UNITS

CH1A, 1B

CH2A, 2B

LMY4-DA

+10dB@20Hz–20kHz, Gain: –68dB 0.3 %

full scale output @1kHz, Gain: –68dB 0.05 %

+10dB@20Hz–20kHz, Gain: +10dB 0.02 %

full scale output @1kHz, Gain: +10dB 0.007 %

INPUT OUTPUT

CONDITIONS

MIN TYP MAX UNITS

CH1A, 1B

CH2A, 2B

LMY4-DA Gain: +10dB * 120 dB

INPUT OUTPUT

CONDITIONS

MIN TYP MAX UNITS

CH1A, 1B

CH2A, 2B

LMY4-DA

Equivalent Input Noise

Rs=150Ω, Gain: –68dB

–128 dB

CH1A, 1B

CH2A, 2B

LMY4-DA Rs=150Ω, Gain: –26dB –74 dB

INPUT TO/FROM

CONDITIONS

MIN TYP MAX UNITS

CH N CH (N-1) or (N+1) adjacent input –90 dB

CH N A CH N B adjacent input –90 dB

Appendices

• LMY4-AD

1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Output impedance of signal generator: 150Ω, fs=44.1k or 48kHz.

Frequency Response 20Hz-20kHz, refer to the nominal output level @1kHz

Gain Error @1kHz

Total Harmonic Distortion

Dynamic Range

* Dynamic range are measured with a 6dB/octave ﬁlter @12.7kHz; equivalent to a 20kHz ﬁlter with inﬁnite dB/octave attenuation.

Crosstalk @1kHz

INPUT OUTPUT

CONDITIONS

MIN TYP MAX UNITS

CH1–4 LMY4-DA @+10dB –2 1 dB

INPUT OUTPUT

CONDITIONS

MIN TYP MAX UNITS

CH1–4 LMY4-DA @+10dB –1 1 dB

INPUT OUTPUT

CONDITIONS

MIN TYP MAX UNITS

CH1–4 LMY4-DA

+10dB@20Hz–20kHz 0.02 %

full scale output @1kHz 0.007 %

INPUT OUTPUT

CONDITIONS

MIN TYP MAX UNITS

CH1–4 LMY4-DA * 120 dB

INPUT TO/FROM

CONDITIONS

MIN TYP MAX UNITS

CH N CH (N-1) or (N+1) adjacent input –90 dB

Cards Specifications

• LMY4-DA

1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Output impedance of signal generator: 150Ω, fs=44.1k or 48kHz.

Frequency Response 20Hz-20kHz, refer to the nominal output level @1kHz

Gain Error @1kHz

Total Harmonic Distortion

Hum & Noise residual output noise

* Hum & Noise are measured with a 6dB/octave ﬁlter @12.7kHz; equivalent to a 20kHz ﬁlter with inﬁnite dB/octave attenuation.

Dynamic Range

* Dynamic range are measured with a 6dB/octave ﬁlter @12.7kHz; equivalent to a 20kHz ﬁlter with inﬁnite dB/octave attenuation.

Crosstalk @1kHz

INPUT OUTPUT RL CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNITS

LMY4-AD CH1–4 600Ω

Gain sw: +24dB@+10dB –2 1 dB

Gain sw: +18dB@+4dB –2 1 dB

Gain sw: +15dB@+1dB –2 1 dB

INPUT OUTPUT RL CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNITS

LMY4-AD CH1–4 600Ω

Gain sw: +24dB@+10dB –1 1 dB

Gain sw: +18dB@+4dB –1 1 dB

Gain sw: +15dB@+1dB –1 1 dB

INPUT OUTPUT RL CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNITS

LMY4-AD CH1–4 600Ω

+10dB@20Hz–20kHz, Gain sw: +24dB 0.02 %

+4dB@20Hz–20kHz, Gain sw: +18dB 0.02 %

+1dB@20Hz–20kHz, Gain sw: +15dB 0.02 %

full scale output @1kHz, Gain sw: +24dB 0.007 %

full scale output @1kHz, Gain sw: +18dB 0.007 %

full scale output @1kHz, Gain sw: +15dB 0.007 %

INPUT OUTPUT RL CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNITS

– CH1–4 600Ω Gain sw: +24dB, OUTPUT off * –96 dB

INPUT OUTPUT RL CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNITS

LMY4-AD CH1–4 600Ω * 120 dB

INPUT TO/FROM

CONDITIONS

MIN TYP MAX UNITS

CH N CH (N-1) or (N+1) adjacent input –90 dB

YAMAHA CORPORATION

V509020 R41 1 IP Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

P.O. Box 3, Hamamatsu, 430-8651, Japan

08 06 100 AP Printed in Japan

YAMAHA [Digital Audio Mixing System] Date: 25 Dec. 2000

Model: PM1D

MIDI Implementation Chart

Version: 1.0

Function... Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Basic

Channel

Default

Changed

1–16

Memorized

Mode

Default

Messages

Altered

**************

OMNI off/OMNI on

Memorized

Note

Number True Voice

**************

0–127

Velocity

Note On

Note Off

After

Touch

Keys

Ch’s

Pitch bend X X

Control

Change

0, 32

(Bank Select)

OOAssignable

Prog

Change :True#

0–127

**************

0–127

Assignable

System Exclusive X X

System

Common

:Song Pos

:Song Sel

:Tune

System

Real Time

:Clock

:Commands

Aux

Messages

:Local ON/OFF

:All Notes OFF

:Active Sense

:Reset

Notes *1)SCENE 00.0–99.9, EFFECT LIBRARY 001–199

Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO

Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO

O: Yes

X: No

MIX1

MIX2

MIX48

STEREO L

STEREO R

CUE L

CUE R

PM1D V2.0 System Block Diagram (CS1DV2, DSP1D, AI8, AO8, DIO8)

DITHER

...

CH 1(-48)

...

Option Card IN (8ch)

CASCADE IN

PAN

MIX to STEREO

MIX 1(-48)

from MIX1

from MIX48

from STEREO A Lch

from STEREO A Rch

SUB IN L

MONITOR OUT B

from MIX1

from MIX48

from STEREO B Lch

from STEREO B Rch

from MATRIX1

from MATRIX24

from STEREO A Lch

from STEREO A Rch

2TR IN 1 Lch

2TR IN 2 Rch

2TR IN 6 Rch

COMM IN

MONITOR A SELECTOR

to MONITOR B

FADER

to MONITOR

from COMM IN

CASCADE OUT

DAC

CH1

DAC

Option Card OUT(8ch)

[24bit Data]

COAXIAL

AES/EBU

STEREO OUT DIGITAL B

COAXIAL

AES/EBU

DITHER

from EFFECT 1(-8)

EFFECT 1(-8)

to EFFECT RETURN

OUTPUT PATCH

SUB IN Lch

SUB IN Rch

FADER

PAN

4BAND

PEQ

GATE

METER

METERMETER

HPF

COMP

METER

DELAY

FIX

VARI

KEY IN

SEL

DIRECT OUT 1(-48)

INSERT OUT 1(-48)

PEAK

to OUTPUT PATCH

HPF

KEY IN

SEL

LPF

INSERT IN 1(-48)

ATT.

FADER

KEY IN

SEL

to MATRIX

6BAND

PEQ

METER

COMP

DELAY

6BAND

PEQ

COMP

DELAY

KEY IN

SEL

from MONITOR A

same as above

MONITOR B SELECTOR

METER

+48V

GAIN

PHANTOM

CH 1 A

A/B

+48V

DIRECT INPUT Lch

DIRECT INPUT Rch

DIRECT IN L

DIRECT IN R

METERMETER

METER

DAC

MIX PAIR

from PRE EQ

from PRE ATT.

FADER

PAN

4BAND

PEQ

GATE

HPF

COMP DELAY

FIX

VARI

KEY IN

SEL

DIRECT OUT STIN 1(-4) Lch

to OUTPUT PATCH

HPF

KEY IN

SEL

LPF

INSERT IN STIN 1(-4) Lch

FIX

VARI

INSERT IN STIN 1(-4) Rch

STIN Lch 1(-4)

STIN Rch 1(-4)

INSERT OUT STIN L 1(-4)

DIRECT OUT STIN 1(-4) Rch

ATT.

FADER

PAN

4BAND

PEQ

GATE

HPF

COMP

DELAY

KEY IN

SEL

to OUTPUT PATCH

HPF

KEY IN

SEL

LPF

INSERT OUT STIN R 1(-4)

PEAK

OSC 2ch

OSC OUT

+48V

PHANTOM

TALKBACK IN

+48V

PHANTOM

ADHA

NOISE

PINK

OSC ON

TB OUT

TB ON

SUB IN R

COAXIAL

2-TRACK IN

DIGITAL1(-2)

AES/EBU

Lch

Rch

ADBA

2-TRACK IN

DIGITAL3(-6)

AES/EBU

CUE OUT

from GEQ 1(-24)

to GEQ RETURN

SRC

to CASCADE OUT

from CASCADE IN

[AI8 + LMY2-ML]

GAIN

ADHA

A/B

+48V

[AI8 + LMY4-AD]

ADBA

[DIO8 + MYx-xx]

LEVEL

INSERT IN MIX1(-48)

INSERT IN

MTRX1(-24)

to MONITOR

2TR IN 3 Lch

LEVEL

HPF

DAC

METER

L MONO/R MONO

OSC OUT

TALKBACK OUT

OUTPUT PATCH

-44

+10

-44

KEYIN CUE

INSERT

OFF

MIX1(ODD)

MIX2(EVEN)

CUE

TO ST

MIX1(ODD)

MIX2(EVEN)

CUE

TO ST

CUE

TO ST

DEFINE

31band GEQ1(-24)

SPECTRUM

with Selectable

+48V

LEFT CH(POST EQ)

KEYIN SOURCE:

KEYIN BUS1-4

SELF PRE EQ

SELF POST EQ

[AO8 + LMY4-DA]

[CS1D]

CH 1(-48)

STIN 1(-4)

to OUTPUT PATCH

CH 1 B

CH 2 A

CH 2 B

CH 1

CH 2

CH 3

CH 4

2-TRACK IN

ANALOG1(-2)

[CS1D]

Frequncy:

100Hz - 10kHz

ANALYZER

CH2

CH3

CH4

to METER

STEREO A

6BAND

PEQ

METER

COMP

METER

KEY IN

SEL

DELAY

METER

FADER

6BAND

PEQ

COMP

KEY IN

SEL

DELAY

to MATRIX

to MONITOR

INSERT IN ST A Rch

METER

FADER

CUE

INSERT

METER METER

STEREO B

6BAND

PEQ

METER

COMP

METER

KEY IN

SEL

DELAY

METER

6BAND

PEQ

COMP

KEY IN

SEL

DELAY

to MONITOR

INSERT

METER METER

to MONITOR

MONO

METER

METER METER

to CS1D

from DSP1D

STEREO OUT DIGITAL A

[24bit Data]

LEVEL

to OUTPUT PATCH

MONITOR B

PHONES

METER

METER METER METER

CUE

MONITOR B

PHONES

(-8)

(-96)

CUE

[DIO8 + MYx-xx]

LPF

DE-

EMPHASIS

DE-

EMPHASIS

(-8)

(-96)

DE-

EMPHASIS

DE-

EMP.

to METER

from INPUT PATCH

DE-EMPHASIS

from INPUT PATCH

DE-EMPHASIS

from INPUT PATCH

DE-EMPHASIS

from INPUT PATCH

DE-EMPHASIS

from INPUT PATCH

DE-EMPHASIS

from INPUT PATCH

DE-EMPHASIS

(-96)

KEY IN1

KEY IN4

...

KEYIN CUE

DE-

EMPHASIS

DE-

EMPHASIS

DE-

EMPHASIS

DE-

EMPHASIS

DE-

EMPHASIS

to MATRIX

LEVEL

FIXED MIX PAN

to KEY IN SEL

: DSP1D

: OTHER

(-8)

(-96)

(-8)

to CS1D

NOISE

BURST

INSERT IN ST A Lch

INSERT IN ST B Lch

CUE

FADER

to MONITOR

DIMMER

INPUT PATCH

DELAY

MONITOR

OUT A

DIMMER

DAC

METER

MONITOR A

METER

LEVEL

PHONES

MONITOR A

PHONES

TALKBACK

to MATRIX

TRIM

to METER

METER

from PRE EQ

from PRE ATT.

METER

from PRE EQ

from PRE ATT.

to METER

from PRE EQ

from PRE FADER

to METER

from PRE EQ

from PRE FADER

METER

to METER

METER

from PRE EQ

from PRE FADER

to METER

from PRE EQ

INSERT IN ST B Rch

BALANCE

from PRE EQ

from PRE FADER

BALANCE

from PRE EQ

from PRE FADER

MATRIX 1(-24)

TO MONI B ASSIGN

MASTER ON/OFF

from STEREO B Rch

from STEREO B Lch

DIGITAL

GAIN

DIGITAL

GAIN

DIGITAL

GAIN

DIGITAL

GAIN

DECODE

DE-

EMP.

DECODE

DE-

EMP.

DECODE

from TALKBACK CONSOLE2

from TALKBACK CONSOLE1

from COMM IN CONSOLE1

from COMM IN CONSOLE2

to TALKBACK CONSOLE1

to TALKBACK CONSOLE2

from CONSOLE2

to CASCADE OUT

TALKBACK CONSOLE1

TALKBACK CONSOLE2

from CASCADE IN

TALKBACK SEL

OSC 1ch

Frequncy:

100Hz - 10kHz

TO MONI B ASSIGN

(Dual Console Mode Only)

Dual Console Mode Only

to MONITOR A

MONITOR A

COMM IN

to CASCADE OUT

GATE

DE-

EMPHASIS

LEVEL

to MONITOR B

MONITOR B

COMM IN

to CASCADE OUT

from CASCADE IN

GATE

DE-

EMPHASIS

LEVEL

CONSOLE1

CONSOLE2

Dual Console Mode Only

ON/OFF

to COMM IN CONSOLE1

to COMM IN CONSOLE2

COMM IN CONSOLE1

COMM IN CONSOLE2

TALKBACK CONSOLE1

TALKBACK CONSOLE2

TALKBACK CONSOLE1

TALKBACK CONSOLE2

to COMM IN

from CAS.

COMM IN

from CASCADE IN

from CAS.

COMM IN

TALKBACK CONSOLE1

TALKBACK CONSOLE2

COMM IN CONSOLE1

COMM IN CONSOLE2

DIGITAL

GAIN

POST

TO ST

POST

TO ST

POST

TO ST

to CONSOLE1

from CONSOLE2

DIGITAL

GAIN

from CONSOLE2

SRC

to CONSOLE1

The Monitor B can be used in the Single Console Mode.

PATCH

Digital

Bit

–10

–20

–30

–40

–50

–60

–70

–80

–90

–100

–110

–120

–130

–140

–150

–160

–170

–190

–200

–210

ATT. EQ LEVEL PAN/SEND

LEVEL

EQ DA

DSP Noise Floor

GAIN

DIGITAL

GAIN

STEREO OUT A-B

dBFS

Digital

Analog

(LMY2-ML)

UNIT

Analog

(LMY4-DA,CS1D)

GATE COMPAD

MONITOR OUT A-B

MIX OUT 1-48

MATRIX OUT 1-24

–180

MASTER

LEVEL

MASTER

CASCADE IN CASCADE OUT

Digital Clipping Level

Nominal Output

Input

Max.

[+24dB]

[+20dB]

[+6dB]

Nominal

Input [+10dB]

Nominal

Input

[–68dB]

Max. Output

[+24dB]

[+10dB]

PATCH HPF COMP DELAY BUS

Adder

DELAY

GAIN MAX

GAIN MIN

[–54dB]Input

Max.

GAIN MAX

GAIN MIN

UNIT DSP1D

[0dBu = 0.775Vrms]

[0dBFS = Full Scale]

DE-

EMPHASIS

+20

+10

–10

–20

–30

–40

–50

–60

–70

–80

–90

–100

–110

–120

–130

–140

–150

–160

dBu

+24

–170

–180

–190

Analog

PHASE M/S

DECODE

DCA

LEVEL

ON DCA

LEVEL

Digital

DSP1D

+20

+10

–10

–20

–30

–40

–50

–60

–70

–80

–90

–100

–110

–120

–130

–140

–150

–160

dBu

+24

–170

–180

–190

Analog

DITHER

PM1D System V2.0 Level Diagram

Yamaha CS1D El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: CS1D

Categoría: Mezcladores de audio

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Descargar PDF

informe

en otros idiomas

français: Yamaha CS1D Le manuel du propriétaire
italiano: Yamaha CS1D Manuale del proprietario
English: Yamaha CS1D Owner's manual
Deutsch: Yamaha CS1D Bedienungsanleitung
русский: Yamaha CS1D Инструкция по применению
Nederlands: Yamaha CS1D de handleiding
português: Yamaha CS1D Manual do proprietário
dansk: Yamaha CS1D Brugervejledning
polski: Yamaha CS1D Instrukcja obsługi
čeština: Yamaha CS1D Návod k obsluze
svenska: Yamaha CS1D Bruksanvisning
Türkçe: Yamaha CS1D El kitabı
română: Yamaha CS1D Manualul proprietarului

Yamaha CS1D El manual del propietario

Yamaha CS1D El manual del propietario

en otros idiomas

Artículos relacionados

Otros documentos